initial commit of ebook 21403HEADmain

1 files changed, 18464 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/21403.txt b/21403.txt
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..82710e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/21403.txt
@@ -0,0 +1,18464 @@
+Project Gutenberg's The Pirate of the Mediterranean, by W.H.G. Kingston
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+
+Title: The Pirate of the Mediterranean
+       A Tale of the Sea
+
+Author: W.H.G. Kingston
+
+Illustrator: F.C. Tilney
+
+Release Date: May 9, 2007 [EBook #21403]
+
+Language: English
+
+Character set encoding: ASCII
+
+*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PIRATE OF THE MEDITERRANEAN ***
+
+
+
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+
+
+
+The Pirate of the Mediterranean, a Tale of the Sea, by W.H.G. Kingston.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+A long book--nineteen hours--full of adventure and tense situations.  I
+was a bit disappointed to find that the Pirate was a Greek who preyed
+mostly upon Italian, Greek and Turkish vessels in the Eastern
+Mediterranean, because I had hoped that Kingston would address himself
+to the problem in the previous century, where Barbary and Algerine
+pirates were harrying European craft, taking their passengers prisoner
+as slaves, whom they used to carry out the building works of their
+cities.
+
+Nevertheless, it is another admirable book from the pen of a great
+author, and I recommend it to you.
+
+________________________________________________________________________
+
+THE PIRATE OF THE MEDITERRANEAN, A TALE OF THE SEA, BY W.H.G. KINGSTON.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ONE.
+
+Malta, which I have selected as the opening scene of the following
+story, is, from its historical recollections, its fine climate, and
+brilliant skies, a very interesting spot; although, for such beauty as
+its scenery possesses, it must be acknowledged that it is indebted very
+much more to art than to nature.  Notwithstanding, however, the noise it
+has made in the world, and will, I suspect, should we ever be driven
+into a war with our vivacious continental neighbour, again make, it is
+but a rock some twenty miles long, and twelve broad, in the middle of
+the Mediterranean, with a smaller rock, Gozo, to the north of it, and
+was, probably, at one time of this planet's existence, merely a
+continuation of Sicily or Italy's toe, or a lump, as it were, kicked off
+into the middle of the sea.  If, also, report speaks true, the very soil
+which gives verdure to its valleys, and nourishes its sweet-scented
+orange-groves, was imported from richer lands; yet, notwithstanding
+this, a larger number of inhabitants of every religion, colour, and
+costume, continue to exist on its surface, than on any similar-sized
+portion of the globe.  But in its capital, Valetta, with its magnificent
+fortifications, and superb harbour, are centred its chief attractions,
+and which have gained for it a name imperishable on the page of history
+as the bulwark of Christendom, against the pagan hosts of the Saracens.
+
+But as my tale is with the present rather than with the past, I will not
+stop to describe how, when it was called Mileta, Saint Paul landed on
+the island,--how the Vandals and Goths took possession of it, and were
+driven out by Belisarius,--how in 1530, the Knights of Saint John of
+Jerusalem, driven away from Rhodes, here settled,--how they built a
+fortress which withstood the mighty army of the Turks, and how those
+gallant gentlemen hurled back the infidels defeated and disgraced,--how
+they at length degenerated, and its inhabitants, deceived by treachery
+from within and without their gates, yielded their liberty to the great
+enemy of Europe, Buonaparte, and were unmercifully ill-treated, and
+pillaged,--and how, in the year 1800, with the the aid of an English
+fleet and a small English army, they drove out their conquerors, and put
+themselves under the protection of Great Britain.
+
+How Mr Cameron was first Civil Commissioner, and was succeeded by Sir
+Alexander Ball, a man justly endeared to the inhabitants as the sharer
+of their toils and victory,--how he was followed by Sir Hildebrand
+Oakes, after whom reigned, as their first Governor, for eleven years,
+commencing in 1813, Sir Thomas Maitland, called by irreverent lips, King
+Tom; a gallant soldier, and the terror of ill-doers, on whose decease
+the Marquis of Hastings and General Ponsonby successively became chiefs.
+
+It was during the time that one of the three last-mentioned governors
+ruled the land, that the events I am about to narrate took place, and as
+it is in the capital, Valetta, and its magnificent harbour, that our
+scene more particularly lies, it is somewhat important that the reader
+should have them described to him.
+
+Valetta is situated on that side of the island which faces the
+north-east, though towards the southern end of it.  The harbour is of a
+very peculiar shape, and if the reader should not happen to possess a
+chart of it, he may form one by placing his left hand on the table, with
+the fingers separated as widely as possible from the middle finger: then
+let him bend up the third finger of his right hand, and place, widely
+apart, the tips of the others over the forefinger of his left hand.  The
+middle finger of his left hand is Valetta, with Saint Elmo Castle on the
+nail, and its palaces and ramparts running along up to the knuckles.
+The space on the right is the Great Port, and on the left, Port Marsa
+Musceit, or the Quarantine Harbour.  The tip of the little finger of the
+right hand is Port Ricasoli.  On the bent-up third finger is the Bighi
+Palace, now a naval hospital, built by Napoleon as a residence for
+himself.  The middle finger is the Burgh, with Port Saint Angelo at the
+end.  The fore-finger is called Isola, with the Cotonera fortifications
+at the knuckle, and the thumb is denominated Carodino, where the
+Palatario is situated, while the spaces between each of the fingers are
+smaller harbours of great depth and security; and from Port Saint
+Angelo, numerous tiers of frowning batteries completely enfilade the
+entrance of the harbour--the approach to which is further defended by
+Forts Saint Elmo and Ricasoli.  On the opposite side of Port Marsa
+Musceit, are two forts--Port Tigne at the entrance, and Fort Manuel; and
+there are several indentations, but of less depth and importance than
+those to the south.  Besides the forts I have mentioned, the city is
+protected by the Floriana lines, and several other works.  Indeed, it is
+said that there are sixty miles length of walls, which, in these
+economical times, are allowed slowly to crumble away.  If our merchants
+value their trade with the East--if our rulers value our possession of
+India--if our philanthropists value the civilisation of the world, and
+the continuance of peace, let not Malta be neglected.  To open the door
+is not the way to keep out a thief.
+
+Valetta is a place of life, bustle, and animation.  The Maltese are a
+busy people, given to gesticulation; and it is full of naval and
+military officers, and soldiers, and sailors, who are not addicted to
+quietude, especially the latter; and there are Greeks, and Moors, and
+Spaniards, and Italians, and Jews innumerable, congregated there, and
+priests and friars of all orders, who delight in the ringing of bells,
+so that silence is little known in this city of ramparts, steps, big
+guns, and churches.  The streets are wide and handsome; those running
+along the middle finger, as I have described, are on a level, while
+those which lead up from the water are at right angles to them, and are
+occasionally steep, so that, in most instances, they consist of a broad
+flight of steps, the best known of which are the Nix Mangiare stairs,
+leading from the chief landing-place at the Great Port to the upper part
+of the town.  The houses are balconied, lofty, and spacious, with
+terraces on the roofs, whence, in clear weather, Etna is visible; and
+where, in the cool of the evening, the inhabitants may enjoy the
+refreshing breeze from the sea, and behold it, in its intense blueness,
+dotted with white sails gliding in all directions over its surface.  It
+is full of fine churches, the towers of which rise above the flat roofs
+of the palace-like houses, the whole surrounded by a broad walk, and a
+fringe of ramparts bristling with cannon.
+
+It is to that part of the fortifications facing the mouth of the Great
+Port that I particularly wish to conduct the reader.
+
+It was some four hours or so past noon when the boat of a British
+man-of-war ran in alongside the landing-place at the fort of Nix
+Mangiare stairs, and out of her stepped two persons, whose blue jackets,
+adorned with crown-and-anchor buttons, and the patches of white cloth on
+their cohars proclaimed them to belong to the exalted rank of midshipmen
+in the Royal Navy.  But many might envy the free joyous laugh in which
+they indulged, seemingly on finding themselves on shore, and the light
+elastic tread with which they sprang up the long flight of steps before
+them, distancing, in a moment, several civilians and soldiers of various
+ranks, who, puffing and blowing, with handkerchiefs at their foreheads,
+were toiling upwards, while they arrived at the summit without even
+giving way to a gasp, and as cool, apparently, as when they landed.
+Their ears, as they went up, were saluted by--
+
+"_Yah hassare, carita_--Nix mangiar these ten days, sar--Mi moder him
+die plague, sar! mi fader him die too," and other pathetic cries and
+similar equally veracious assertions, from numerous cripples, deformed
+creatures, and children of all ages, in rags and tatters, who
+endeavoured to excite their compassion by exhibiting their wounds and
+scars.  The two youths had time to put their hands in their pockets, and
+to distribute a few pence to the wretched-looking beings on their way;
+both pocket and heart, if that were possible, being made lighter
+thereby.  On reaching the top of the flight of stairs, without stopping
+to contemplate the height they had ascended, they turned to the right,
+and took the way along the ramparts towards Fort Saint Elmo.  There
+seemed not to have been the slightest necessity for their hurry, as they
+appeared to have come on shore simply to take a walk, for they now
+slackened their pace, and proceeded on side by side.
+
+"Well, I'm so glad, Duff, that you have joined us," exclaimed the one
+who appeared to be somewhat the eldest.  "Who'd have thought it, when we
+parted four years ago at old Railton's that we were next to meet out
+here.  I didn't think you would have got leave to enter the service."
+
+"Neither did I expect to get afloat, and still less to become your
+messmate, when you, lucky dog that I thought you, left school.  I moped
+on there for nearly another year, and then wrote to my governor and told
+him that if he didn't let me go to sea I should never be fit for
+anything.  At last he believed that I was in earnest, and with a light
+heart I turned my back upon Brook-green, and shipped on board the old
+_Rodney_.  But, I say, old fellow, what sort of a chap is our skipper?
+He looks like a taut hand."
+
+"There is not a better fellow afloat," was the answer.  "He's none of
+your milk-and-water chaps who'll let butter melt in their mouths, of
+that you may be assured; but he knows what ought to be done, and what
+man can do; and he makes them do it too.  There's no shirking work or
+being slack in stays when he carries on the duty, and there's not a
+smarter ship in the service, nor a happier one either, though he won't
+allow an idler on board.  The fact is, my boy, both officers and men
+know that no one can shirk their work, so it comes easy to all, and we
+have more leave and less punishment than nearly any other vessel on the
+station.
+
+"But, I say, Jack Raby, is it true, that he makes the midshipmen do the
+duty of topmen?" asked the youngest of the two.
+
+"I believe you, my boy," answered Jack Raby.  "He makes all the
+youngsters lie out in the topsail-yards, and hand the canvas in fine
+style, ay, and black down the rigging at times too.  By Jove, he's the
+fellow to make your kid-glove-wearing gentlemen dip their hands in the
+tar-bucket, and keep them there, if he sees they are in any way
+squeamish about it."
+
+"By jingo, he seems to be somewhat of a Tartar," exclaimed the
+midshipman called Duff, with a half-doubtful expression of countenance,
+as if his new shipmate was practising on his credulity.
+
+"Not a bit of it," was the rejoinder.  "Let me tell you, that you'll
+soon find that your slack captains are the worst to sail with.  They let
+every one do as they like till all hands begin to take liberties, and
+the hard work falls on the most willing, and they then suddenly haul up,
+and there is six times more flogging and desertion than in a strict
+ship, and she soon becomes a regular hell afloat.  I hate your
+honey-mouthed, easy-going skippers, who simper out, `Please, my good
+men, have the goodness to brace round the foreyard when the ship's taken
+aback.'  No, no--give me a man who knows how to command men.  Depend on
+it.  Duff, you'll like Captain Fleetwood before you've sailed with him a
+week, if you are worth your salt, mind you, though."
+
+By this time they had reached an angle of the ramparts, where, jumping
+up on the banquette, they could enjoy a good view up the harbour.
+
+"There," exclaimed Raby, pointing to a fine man-of-war brig, which lay
+at the mouth of the dockyard creek just off Fort Saint Angelo.  "Isn't
+the _Ione_ a beauty now?"
+
+"Yes, she is, indeed; and a fine craft, I dare say, in every respect,"
+answered Duff.
+
+"Oh, there's nothing can come up to her!" exclaimed Jack Raby, warming
+with his subject.  "She'll sail round almost any ship in the fleet; and
+I only wish, with Charlie Fleetwood to command her, and her present
+crew, we could fall in with an enemy twice her size.  We should thrash
+him, I'd stake my existence on it, and bring him in as a prize before
+long."
+
+"Glorious!" exclaimed the other youth, catching the enthusiasm of his
+companion.  "It's a pity the war is over.  I'm afraid there's no chance
+of any fun of that sort."
+
+"Oh, you don't know--something may come out of this row between the
+Greeks and the Turks; and we, at all events, shall have some amusement
+in looking after them, and cruising up the Archipelago--where I hear we
+are to be sent, as soon as we are ready for sea."
+
+Jack Raby was the speaker.
+
+"How soon will that be?" asked his companion.  "We might sail to-morrow,
+I should have thought."
+
+"Why, you see, there are more reasons than one for our not being ready,"
+observed Jack.  "And I suspect the skipper himself is in no hurry to get
+away; for, don't you go and talk about it now, but the fact is, he has
+been and fallen desperately in love with a sweetly pretty girl, who,
+from what I can observe, likes him not a little in return, so he'll be
+very sorry to get out of sight of her smiles; at least, I know that I
+should be loath to be beyond hailing distance if I were in his place.
+Let me give you a piece of advice, Duff; don't go and fall in love.  It
+is a very inconvenient condition for a midshipman to be in, let me tell
+you."
+
+"Not if I can help it," said Duff.  "At least, till I am a lieutenant.
+However, I felt rather queer about the region of the brisket the other
+night, when I was dancing with that pretty little Maltese girl, with the
+black eyes, and cherry lips, though we neither of us could understand a
+word the other said, and I didn't know what was to come of it.
+Fortunately, next morning, the sensation had gone off again, and I got
+out of the scrape.  But the fact is, since I grew up (the rogue was
+scarcely fifteen), I have been so little on shore, that I have had no
+time to lose my heart."
+
+Jack Raby, who was a year older, and therefore considered himself a man
+at all events, burst into a loud fit of laughter, in which his companion
+joined him, at the absurdity of their conversation; of which, although
+they had spoken in earnest, they were both somewhat conscious.  "But I
+say, old fellow, without any more humbug about love and such like bosh,
+just look at the dear old craft! how beautifully she sits on the water--
+what a graceful sheer she has--and how well her sixteen guns look run
+out, like dogs from their kennels, all ready to bite.  You should see
+her under weigh though, and how beautiful she looks with her canvas
+spread!  You'd know her for a man-of-war twenty miles off by the cut of
+her royals.  See, what square yards she's got! and how well her masts
+stand.  How light she looks aloft--and yet everything that is required--
+not a block too large--and yet everything works as easy as possible.  On
+deck, too, you'll find there's no jim-crack nonsense about her--
+everything is for service, and intended to last; and yet, where there is
+any brass or varnished wood, it's kept as bright and clean as can be.
+There isn't a ship on the station can come up to us in reefing or
+furling; and, let them say what they like in other ships, there isn't a
+happier berth, or a better set of fellows to be found, on board any of
+them--take my word for it, Duff."
+
+"Well, from all you say, I haven't a doubt but that I shall like the
+little _Ione_ very much," observed the other.  "And, at all events, I
+wouldn't mind a worse ship, for the sake of being with you.  But, I say,
+who is the young lady your skipper--I may now, though, call him our
+skipper--has fallen in love with?"
+
+"A Miss Garden.  She is very young, and very fair, and very bright and
+lively.  I'm not surprised at any one's admiring her! it's much more
+wonderful that everybody doesn't fall in love with her over head and
+ears: for my part, though I've only seen her two or three times, I'm
+ready to fight and die for her, too, if it were necessary."
+
+"Oh, of course! that we should all be ready to do, as in duty bound, for
+our skipper's wife, and much more for the lady of his love," observed
+Duff; "but I want to know who she is?"
+
+"I was going to tell you.  She has no father nor mother; and her only
+living relation, that I know of, is an old colonel Gauntlett, on whose
+protection she is entirely thrown.  He is rather a grumpy old chap, they
+say--but she has no help for it; and he takes her about wherever he
+goes.  He has got some money--but he hates the navy, and swears she
+shall never marry a sailor, or if she does he'll cut her off with a
+farthing.  He came out here some months ago, and has never let any one
+with a blue jacket come inside his door; but, somehow or other, Captain
+Fleetwood got introduced to her, and as he was in mufti, the old chap
+didn't know he was in the navy, and told him he should be happy to make
+his acquaintance.  He did not find out his mistake for some time; and
+when he did--my eyes, what a rage he was in!  He did not mind it so
+much, though, afterwards, as he is going away in a few days, and thought
+the captain and his niece were not likely to meet again; but the
+skipper, you see, is not the man to let the grass grow under his feet in
+making love, more than in anything else, and in the mean time he had
+managed to come it pretty strong with Miss Garden.  How it will end I
+can't say--I only know that our captain is the last man in the world to
+yield up a lady if he loves her, and believes she loves him--he'd as
+soon think of striking his flag to an enemy while he had got a shot in
+the locker; so, I suppose, he'll either win over the old cove, or run
+off with her, and snap his fingers at him--he doesn't care for his
+money;--and, to my idea, that would be the best way to settle it."
+
+"So I think," observed the other youngster.  "I've made up my mind, when
+I want to marry, if I cannot get the old one's consent, to take French
+leave, and settle the matter in an offhand way.  But where do you say
+the grumpy colonel and his pretty niece are going to; for the captain
+must look sharp after her, or he'll be carrying her away somewhere
+inland, out of sight of salt water, where he can't get at her."
+
+"No fear of that; the old dragon has too great an opinion of his own
+soldiership not to fancy that he can keep guard over his ward," observed
+Raby.  "But we'll see if a sailor can't weather on him.  Nothing I
+should like so much as to help the skipper, and I only hope he may ask
+me.  He hasn't much time to lose, either; for we heard that the colonel
+and his niece were bound shortly for Cephalonia, or one of the Ionian
+Islands, where he has got an appointment.  If we were ordered there
+also, we might find an opportunity; but, you see, the captain won't have
+the chances of meeting her without being observed, which he has here,
+and a hundred to one the uncle claps half a dozen lobsters as sentries
+over her, if he sees the _Ione_ come off the place."
+
+"Then I should be for carrying her off at once, if I were the captain,
+and letting the old lion growl away without her," exclaimed Duff; and
+the two midshipmen walked on fully persuading themselves into the hope,
+that they should be called upon to assist their captain in running away
+with Miss Garden.
+
+There were few people abroad to interrupt their conversation; for the
+heat of the sun kept most of the Maltese within doors.  As the Italians,
+or Spaniards, I forget which, observe, none but dogs and Englishmen walk
+the streets when the sun shines in summer.  There were, however,
+sentries on duty, and a few seamen belonging to men of war; or
+merchantmen of various nations would pass by; and here and there a
+cowled priest, a woman in the dark faldetta, a ragged beggar boy--or an
+old gentleman in three-cornered hat, a bag-wig, riding on a donkey, with
+a big red cotton umbrella over his head, would appear from one of the
+neighbouring streets, as necessity called him forth.
+
+On the two happy youths went, careless of the heat, till they reached
+that part of the ramparts called the lower Barraca.  It is a broad open
+space directly above the water, where stands a conspicuous object from
+the sea, in the form of a Grecian temple, a monument to the memory of
+that excellent man, and brave officer, Sir Alexander Ball, one of Lord
+Nelson's most steemed captains.  As they reached the spot, they
+encountered a person, who was apparently about to descend the way they
+had come; he was a man of about forty years old, with a countenance
+slightly weather-beaten, and hands which showed that they were no
+strangers to ropes and tar, and there was an undeniable roll in his
+gait, which betrayed the seaman, though his costume was that of a
+denizen of the shore; he wore a long, swallow-tailed, black coat, a
+round beaver hat, and a coloured waistcoat; but the wide duck trousers,
+and low shoes were those of a thorough salt.  Jack Raby looked at him
+earnestly, and then held out his hand, which was shaken warmly by the
+other.
+
+"What, Bowse, as I live," he exclaimed; "what has brought you to Malta,
+old fellow?  I thought you were snugly housed at home with Mrs Bowse,
+and had given up the sea altogether."
+
+"Well, sir, so did I think too, and for a time I was comfortable enough;
+but at last I began to wish to have a look at the blue water again; and
+I grew sick, and then sicker, till I felt that nothing but a sniff of
+the salt air would do me good.  You know, sir, when I was bo'sun of the
+jolly little _Dart_, your first ship, I took to learning navigation, and
+was no bad hand at it.  Ah!  I loved that craft, and nothing but having
+that windfall of a fortune would have made me leave her.  Well, as I was
+saying, when I wished to go to sea again, I turned in my mind that I
+could not do better with my money than take a share of a merchantman,
+and go master of her.  No sooner said than done.  Up I went to London,
+where I knew a respectable shipowner.  He was glad enough to favour my
+wishes, for he knew he could trust me; and I soon became part owner and
+master of the _Zodiac_, a fine brig, of a hundred and sixty tons.  I
+have made two voyages in her, and am now bound to the eastward to
+Cephalonia and Zante.  I sail to-morrow or next day, according to
+circumstances.  If you'll step up here, sir, I think you'll see her, for
+we've hauled out ready for a start, as soon as my passengers come on
+board."
+
+As the master of the merchantman spoke, he advanced to a part of the
+ramparts over which they could look down upon the great harbour, where,
+some way below the custom-house, was seen a merchant brig, laden and
+ready for sea.
+
+"She's as fine a sea boat as ever floated, I can assure you, sir.  It's
+a pleasure to be her master," he continued, as he pointed with pride to
+her.  Every good seaman is fond of his vessel, and overlooks her faults,
+whatever they may be, as a good husband does those of his wife.
+
+"I am heartily glad of your success, Bowse, I can assure you," said the
+midshipman warmly; "I owe you much; for you gave me my first lessons in
+seamanship, and I shall never forget them.  You must come and dine with
+us to-morrow, and I shall introduce you as my friend, Captain Bowse."
+
+"No, sir--no, pray don't do so," answered the mariner; "I've served on
+board a man-of-war, and I know my place and rank better.  Captains of
+king's ships, if you please, sir,--but masters of merchantmen.  I know
+the difference between a collier and a seventy-four, I think.  But I'll
+dine with your mess, sir, with much pleasure, if I don't go to sea
+to-morrow."
+
+"We shall expect you, then, if we see the _Zodiac_ still in the
+harbour," said Raby.  "I see you've got a spy-glass there, let me take a
+squint at her.  You carry six guns, I observe; and I must say I like the
+look of your craft."
+
+"Very necessary, too, in the places to which we trade," answered the
+master.  "Those Greek chaps among the islands don't scruple to plunder
+any vessels they may find unarmed, particularly in these times; but the
+truth is, two of those are quakers--their look is much worse than their
+bite.  However, between this and Cephalonia there's no danger."
+
+"Why, you know, if any pirates attacked you, and were caught, you'd have
+the satisfaction of having them strung up by King Tom, like those chaps
+yonder," said Raby.  "By the bye, Duff, did you ever observe King Tom's
+Rubber of Whist?"
+
+"No," answered Duff.  "What do you mean?"
+
+"Take that glass, and look at the outer bastion of Port Ricasoli.  What
+do you see there?"
+
+"Four figures, which are hanging by their necks from gibbets," answered
+Duff.  "What are they?"
+
+"Those are four Englishmen,--at least, one, by the way, was a Yankee,
+their master,--who turned pirates, and tried to scuttle another English
+brig, and to drown the people.  It's too long a story to tell you now.
+But old King Tom got hold of them, and treated them as you see."
+
+"That fellow, Delano, the Yankee master, was a terrible villain,"
+observed Captain Bowse, shuddering.  "It was not the first black deed of
+the sort he had done, either.  One doesn't know what punishment is bad
+enough for such scoundrels.  It's a hundredfold worse when such-like
+acts are done by our countrymen, than when Greeks or Moors do them,
+because one does not expect anything better from their hands.  But I
+see, sir, you are casting an eye at one of those strange-looking native
+crafts standing in for the land with the sea breeze."
+
+Raby had the telescope at his eye, and he was pointing it towards a sail
+which was rapidly approaching the shore.  So broad and lofty was the
+canvass, that the hull looked like the small car of a balloon, in
+comparison to it, as if just gliding over the surface of the blue and
+unruffled sea.
+
+The view both up and down the harbour, and in every direction, was very
+interesting.  Directly facing them was Port Ricasoli, with its tiers of
+guns threatening any invader, and the black, wave-washed rocks at its
+base.  A little to the right, in a sort of bay between it and Port Saint
+Angelo, appeared the white and elegant buildings of the Naval Hospital;
+and further on, towering upwards from the water, the last-mentioned
+fort, with its numerous rows of heavy guns, having behind it the
+Dockyard creek, or Galley harbour, where, in the days of yore, the
+far-famed galleys of the knights were drawn up, and secure from attack.
+On either side were white stone walls and buttresses, glittering in the
+sunshine; overhead a sky of intense blueness; and below, a mirror-like
+expanse of waters, reflecting the same cerulean hue, on which floated
+innumerable crafts, of all shapes, sizes, and rigs, from the proud
+line-of-battle ship which had triumphantly borne the flag of England
+through the battle and the breeze, to the little caique with its great
+big eyes in its bow and strange-shaped stem and high outlandish stern,
+filled with its swarthy, skirmish crew of vociferating natives.  Among
+the merchantmen, the ensigns of all nations might be seen--the stars and
+stripes of Uncle Sam's freedom-loving people alongside the black
+lowering eagle of Russia; the cross of the Christian Greek, and the
+crescent of the infidel Turk; there was the banner of the Pope, and of
+Sardinia, and of various other Italian States; but outnumbering them
+all, by far, was the red flag of Britain.  Far out to the eastward,
+where the sky and sea formed the horizon, there was a slight,
+gauze-like, whitish haze, through which could be seen the lofty canvas
+of several vessels, rising, as it were, like spirits from the watery
+deep, and just catching the rays of the sun declining in the opposite
+direction, which gave an unusual brilliancy to their wide-spread sails.
+But the craft which most attracted the attention of our friends was the
+one Raby had been looking at.
+
+He pointed her out to his brother midshipman, and handed him the
+telescope.
+
+"What do you think of her?" he asked.  "She is a rum one to look at,
+isn't she?"
+
+Duff burst into a fit of laughter.
+
+"Why, if the fellows haven't set their jib right between the long poking
+yards of their foresail and mainsail," he exclaimed, "I never did see
+such an odd rig as that before.  What in the world is she?"
+
+"That's what they call a speronara in these parts, sir," answered Bowse;
+"but you'll see rummer rigs than that before long, when you go up the
+Archipelago.  You see that wide spread of canvass is made by crossing
+her two latine sails, and setting their jib as a topsail between them.
+They can lower that down, and haul their wind in an instant.  These
+sails, to my mind, are very good where light airs and smooth seas
+prevail, though they would not answer in our northern latitudes; and
+they require a good many more people to handle them than we could spare
+for the work.  They reef their canvas, not like fore-and-aft sails in
+general, by the foot, but by the leach along to the yard.  There's no
+doubt, however, though they have an outlandish look, that they sail well
+on a wind, and not badly before it, too, as we see by the craft below us
+there."
+
+Onward gracefully glided the speronara--such is the name given to the
+craft which ply between Malta and Sicily with goods and passengers, and
+from some port in the latter island she seemed to have come, from the
+direction in which she appeared.  On she came very rapidly, considering
+the light breeze; she was evidently a very fast craft of her class.  She
+came abreast of Fort Saint Elmo, and soon after took in her outlandish
+topsail, as Duff called, just before she passed close under the spot
+where our friends were posted, so that they could look directly down on
+her deck.  She seemed to be full of men habited in the long blue caps
+and striped shirt of Mediterranean mariners, with light-blue trowsers,
+and a red sash round the waist.  She was of considerable size, and, what
+is unusual with craft of her description, she was decked fore-and-aft,
+though her between-decks must have been inconveniently low.  There was a
+place sunk aft where stood the helmsman holding his long tiller, and on
+either side were arranged, ready for use, several long sweeps; but the
+wind was at present sufficient to impel the vessel along without their
+aid.  Thus much was seen as she ran up the harbour.  She passed close to
+the _Zodiac_, the mate of which, by his gestures, seemed to be speaking
+to the crew, and scolding them for the risk they ran of getting foul of
+her, and they then appeared to be uncertain where to bring up.  At last
+she crossed over to the _Ione_, and finally rounding to, took in her
+foresail, and dropped her anchor off the custom-house.
+
+The midshipmen and their companion soon got tired of looking down upon
+the harbour.  Captain Bowse was obliged to part from them, as he had
+business to transact; and they finally agreed, as they had still a
+couple of hours of daylight, to hire a couple of horses of old
+Salvatore, in the Palace-square, and to take a gallop into the country,
+as a preparation for a grand ball which was to take place that evening
+at the Auberge de Provence, and where Raby promised Jemmy Duff he would
+point him out Miss Garden.  Away hurried the two happy youngsters,
+without casting another thought on the speronara.  I, however,
+particularly wish my readers not to forget her, and also to remember the
+man-of-war brig, and the merchantman, as both are destined to play a
+conspicuous part in the following narrative.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWO.
+
+The speronara would, on a near inspection by a nautical eye, appear
+somewhat different to the general run of vessels of her rig and build.
+There was evidently the greatest attention paid to her ropes, spars, and
+oars.  They were of the best hemp and toughest wood; not a stranded or
+even worn sheet or halyard was to be seen; every spar was sound, and her
+canvas was new and strong.  Her crew, or those who sent her out of port,
+seemed to consider that much might depend on her speed and capability of
+keeping the sea.
+
+If, however, she was employed in carrying passengers between Sicily and
+Malta, it was very natural that her owners should make her appear as
+seaworthy as possible, to induce people to trust their lives and
+property in her.  We will suppose her still outside the port, soon after
+Jack Raby and his companions first saw her.  Evidently the most
+important person on board was a young man of very pleasing exterior.  He
+was rather tall than otherwise, and though slight, possessed a breadth
+of chest which gave promise of great strength and activity.  His
+complexion was sunburnt, if not dark by nature, and his lip, which
+betokened scorn and firmness, and gave an unattractive expression to his
+countenance, was shaded by a thick curling moustache.  His features were
+decidedly regular and handsome; and had they been otherwise, his large,
+flashing, dark eye would have challenged observation.  His age was
+probably about two or three-and-thirty--he might have been younger--and
+he was certainly a very remarkable person.  Those who saw him even but
+for a moment, went away fancying that they had been long acquainted with
+his features.  His costume at once betrayed his nation; for he wore the
+red fez, the embroidered jacket and full white kilt, and richly-worked
+leggings and slippers of the Greek, and the cast of his countenance made
+one also conclude that he belonged to that nation.  The only other
+person on board dressed in the Greek costume, was evidently some years
+younger, and was neither so tall nor so strongly built as his companion.
+His countenance was decidedly handsome, and what would be called
+aristocratic.  It was very grave, and, indeed, melancholy in the
+extreme; and an accurate observer of character might have divined, from
+the form of his mouth and expression of his eyes, that he was sadly in
+want of firmness and decision in his actions, which idea, probably,
+would not have been very far from the truth.  His dress, though the
+materials were good, was as plain as the costume he wore would allow;
+but it could not be otherwise than elegant and handsome, and it sat well
+upon his graceful figure.
+
+Those two persons were earnestly engaged in conversation with another,
+who appeared to be the master of the vessel, and they were standing
+leaning over the side, away from the rest of the people on board.
+
+"Remember, now," observed the principal Greek to the master, "you are to
+be ready to weigh and make sail at a moment's notice; it may be
+to-night, even--it may be tomorrow or on the following day--I cannot
+say, but you must be prepared."
+
+"_Signor, si_," answered the master in a tone of deep respect.  "I will
+take care to obey your commands to the letter; but I am afraid there may
+be some difficulty with the authorities at the custom-house.  They once
+suspected me of smuggling, though I was as innocent as the babe unborn,
+and they may detain me."
+
+"You know the consequences," returned the Greek, with a fierce look; "I
+will listen to no excuse if anything miscarries, so look to it!"
+
+"It is a dangerous expedition you go on, signore," observed the Sicilian
+master.
+
+"Dangerous!" exclaimed the Greek, in a tone of contempt.  "Danger is the
+food we live on, the air we breathe; without it life would lose half its
+zest.  I'll tell you what, my friend, he is but a base-born slave who
+knows not how to live, and fears to die.  Give me a life of activity and
+excitement, and when that ceases death will be welcome."
+
+"You, signore, are the best judge of your own taste," answered the
+Sicilian; "for my part, I am content to make an honest livelihood by
+trading between my native city of Syracuse and yonder good port of
+Valetta, where, please the holy saints, we shall drop our anchor in the
+course of ten minutes."
+
+"And anything else by which you may turn a colonna," muttered the Greek.
+
+The speronara continued in her course, and as she came off Fort
+Ricasoli, the other person habited as a Greek, who had not hitherto
+spoken, observed the four figures suspended on the southern bastion.
+
+"Holy Virgin, what are those?" he exclaimed in Italian.
+
+"Those, signore," answered the padrone, as the master of the speronara
+was called, with particular emphasis, "are pirates."
+
+"Pirates!" ejaculated the young man, while a shudder ran through his
+frame.
+
+"_Si, signore, pirates_," answered the padrone, with a significant look.
+"They had a short life of it after they had committed the acts for
+which they were condemned.  They had reached Smyrna with their booty,
+when they were captured by the British and brought back here."
+
+"An awful lesson to others to be more careful how they manage affairs,"
+observed the principal Greek, laughing.  "Now, I dare say, if the truth
+was known, those fellows blundered terribly.  It's always the case when
+people get into the clutches of the law."
+
+The other Greek shuddered and turned his head aside.  "It is not a
+pleasant sight," he observed.
+
+"Oh! those English are terrible fellows for punishing those engaged in
+any little transaction of that sort," said the padrone.  "They are good
+people, though."
+
+"They are remarkably conceited," said the Greek, twirling his
+moustache--"they believe that they can make the whole world obey them;
+but it is time that we should look about us.  Ah! steer near that
+merchant-brig there, in the mouth of the harbour, I should like to have
+a look at her that I might know her again."
+
+The man at the helm put it so much to port, that the end of one of the
+long tapering yards of the speronara nearly got foul of the _Zodiac's_
+fore-yard.
+
+"What the deuce are you lubbers about, that you cannot keep yourself
+clear of your neighbours?" sung out Bowse's mate, from the main rigging.
+"I'll teach you better manners if I catch you at sea, that's all."
+
+"The Englishman seems angry," said the Greek, laughing.  "That brig,
+though, looks as if she had a valuable cargo on board.  I must learn
+more about her."
+
+Conversation was now put a stop to, in consequence of the caution
+necessary for steering into a thickly-crowded harbour, and the hurry of
+bringing up.
+
+She dropped her anchor among a number of similarly-rigged craft, close
+inshore, where she lay exciting little or no observation, except that a
+few boatmen saw her, and were calculating their prospects of having to
+transport her passengers or merchandise to the landing-place.
+
+As soon as her sails were stowed, which was speedily done, the
+health-boat came alongside, and as it appeared she had come from Sicily,
+pratique was immediately given her.  She was next visited by the
+custom-house boat.  The officer, for some reason or other, seemed to
+consider that there was something suspicious about her, for he examined
+her papers very minutely, and read them over more than once, but was at
+last obliged to pass them as correct.  The vessel next underwent a
+strict search, but nothing contraband was found on board her, and at
+last he took his departure, even then casting back a look of doubt at
+her, as if he was not thoroughly convinced that all was right.
+
+During these proceedings the Greek sat in the after part of the vessel,
+maintaining a perfect silence, while he played with the handle of a
+short poniard which he wore in his sash.
+
+"You appear to be suspected, my friend," he observed to the master, as
+soon as the officers had gone.
+
+"So it seems, signore," he answered.  "The fact is, once upon a time, I
+had a few bales of goods on board, which I contrived to land without
+paying the duties, and I have ever since been watched as if I were a
+smuggler."
+
+"It was clumsy in you to be discovered," observed the Greek.  "In the
+present instance I might find it inconvenient."
+
+A man in a small boat, who had been paddling quietly at a little
+distance from the speronara, as soon as the government officials had
+left her, darted alongside.
+
+"Ah!  Signor Sandro, welcome back to Malta," he exclaimed, addressing
+the master of the little vessel.  "I have not seen you here for a long
+time."
+
+"Not the less welcome I hope, Manuel," said the master.
+
+"Few are who remember their friends and pay well," said the boatman.
+"How can I best serve you, signore?"
+
+"By landing my passengers, and giving them all the information they may
+require," said the master.  "Hark you, Manuel--put your head nearer--my
+boy's life is answerable for their safety--so, as you love me, take care
+that they get into no trouble.  They seek a passage to some part of
+their own country on board a merchantman, and have come here to look for
+one to suit them."
+
+"I understand clearly, signor," said the boatman, significantly.  "But
+who are they?  What is their calling, or occupation?"
+
+"Oh! mother of Heaven, don't ask me!" answered the padrone, with a
+terrified look.  "They may overhear you.  It is not my business to put
+questions to them.  It is enough that they pay well, and do not wish to
+be known.  Besides, they would not scruple to cut my throat if they were
+offended--and most assuredly their friends would string up my poor boy,
+if anything went wrong with them.  Even now, look at the captain--I mean
+the best dressed of the two.  How he is playing with the hilt of his
+dagger there.  He is meditating sticking it into my ribs because I am
+talking so long to you.  I tell you, you must watch over their safety;
+and, in the name of the saints, aid them to get away as fast as
+possible--for, till they are out of the place, I shall not feel my head
+secure on my shoulders."
+
+"Oh!  I understand.  They are political offenders disguised as Greeks,
+who do not wish their movements to be known;" said the sharp-witted
+boatman, jumping at a conclusion.  "I'll undertake to serve you and
+them--not forgetting myself--and, I trust, that they will make it worth
+my while."
+
+"No fear of that," the padrone was saying, when the Greek's voice
+summoned him aft.
+
+"What were you saying to the boatman?" he asked in an angry tone.
+
+"I was making arrangements with him to take you on shore, signor, and do
+your bidding," was the answer.
+
+"Well, he may land me at once," said the Greek.  "Paolo, do you remain
+on board till I send for you, and let not a man quit the vessel on any
+excuse," he whispered.  "Such provisions as they require, the boatman
+can bring off for them, and I will manage to make him faithful."
+
+The Greek, without further remarks, swung himself over the side of the
+vessel and took his seat in Manuel's boat.
+
+"Hist, Manuel," he said, in the _lingua Franca_, well understood by the
+Maltese boatmen; "you are debating in your mind whether you will inform
+the authorities that a suspicious character has landed on the island,
+and get a reward from them, or whether you will take the chance of
+pocketing what my generosity may induce me to bestow.  Now, mark me, my
+honest friend.  In the first place, I could get you hung for a little
+transaction, of which you know."
+
+The boatman started, and looked round with a suspicious glance.
+
+"_Que diavolo_, who can this be?" he muttered.
+
+"In the second, remember the English do not detain a man on bare
+suspicions, and but shabbily reward an informer.  On the other hand,
+twenty colonati are yours, if you do my bidding.  I do not want an
+answer--you are not a fool.  Now row on shore as fast as you can."
+
+The Greek was a judge of character; and he seemed not to be altogether
+unacquainted with Manuel, the boatman.  The boat ran into the public
+landing-place, and he stepped on shore with an independent and fearless
+air, where he mingled among the busy and motley throng who crowded the
+quay.  The boatman, Manuel, sat in his boat a little distance from the
+shore, watching him, and ready, apparently, to obey his orders when he
+should be required.
+
+The Greek proceeded onward through the lower parts of the town, eyeing
+those he passed with a quick keen glance, which seemed to read their
+very thoughts.  People were too much accustomed to see the varied
+costumes of the East to regard him with unusual curiosity, or to
+incommode him in his progress by stopping to stare at him; at the same
+time that many remarked him as he slowly sauntered on and wondered
+whence he had come.  He seemed to have nothing more to do than to amuse
+himself by viewing the city, though he had certainly not selected the
+most interesting or cleanest quarter.  He apparently was a stranger to
+the place, by the way in which he hesitated at each crossing, which
+turning he should take, till he had carefully deciphered the name on the
+wall.  Now he stopped to look into a shop, then to gaze up at the
+windows of a house as if he expected to see some one there, and then to
+throw a copper to some importunate beggar.  He walked with an air of so
+much independence and nonchalance, indeed, at times, almost of
+haughtiness, that it was difficult to suppose he had the slightest
+apprehension of danger.  Not a person, however, who, passed him, escaped
+his scrutiny; and even when he appeared to stop carelessly, or for the
+sake of considering the way he was to take, he cast a hurried glance
+behind him to satisfy himself that no one was acting the spy on his
+movements.  He had evidently seen enough to convince him that the
+vessel, in which he had come, was in bad odour, and he naturally
+concluded that her passengers would be narrowly watched.  Of the crowds
+who passed, not a human being seemed to know him, and if he was in
+reality particularly observed, it was done so cleverly and so
+cautiously, that with all his ingenuity, he failed to discover whether
+such was the case or not.  He had already traversed a number of
+streets--ascending several flights of steps and descending others--when,
+at the corner of a narrow lane, his eye fell on a squalid-looking beggar
+who was lustily calling on the passers-by, in the name of all the
+saints, to preserve him from starvation.  A broad-brimmed hat with a
+crown similar to those worn by Italian bandits, but sadly battered and
+brown with age and dirt, was worn slouchingly on his head, so as almost
+to hide his features, which were further concealed by a handkerchief
+tied under his chin, and a black patch over one of his eyes.  A tattered
+cloak, the cast-off finery of a dandy of the palmy days of the old
+Knights of Malta, covered his shoulders, as did, in part, his legs, a
+pair of blue cloth trousers, through which his knees obtruded, and which
+were fringed with torn stripes at the feet.  Such of his features as
+were visible were as ill-favoured as well could be.  His voice, too, had
+a peculiarly disagreeable tone, as in the _lingua Franca_ of the Maltese
+mendicants he begged for alms.
+
+This interesting personage was supporting himself carelessly on a pair
+of crutches, while he rested on one foot, and stretched forth the palm
+of his right hand to grasp whatever might be put into it.  The Greek
+stopped and put his hand into his pocket to draw out a piece of money,
+while he did so narrowly eyeing the beggar.  The man's voice changed
+instantly that he saw the stranger looking at him; from a half whining
+yet impudent tone, it began to sink and tremble with alarm, and finally
+he became perfectly mute and forgetful of his calling.
+
+"I thought you would know me," said the Greek.  "And you must remember I
+never forget those I have once seen either as friends or foes."
+
+"No, signor, I perceive you do not," replied the beggar, trembling with
+alarm.  "Have mercy on me."
+
+"That depends upon yourself," said the stranger.  "At present, you
+deserve no mercy at my hands; but I will now give you an opportunity of
+serving me; and if you do so faithfully, I will overlook the past."
+
+"You are very generous, signor--you always were," exclaimed the beggar,
+trying to fall down and embrace his knees, which the Greek prevented.
+"I will go to any part of the world.  I will go through fire and water
+to serve you."
+
+"You have not to go far to perform my directions; but I want
+faithfulness in the discharge of the duty I shall impose on you," said
+the Greek, sternly.  "And, mark me, Giacomo--if you play me false, as
+you have done others, I will find you out, and finish your worthless
+life with as little compunction as I would that of a rabid dog."
+
+"_Si, signor capitan_, I very well know that you are not a man to be
+trifled with," answered the beggar, bowing his head.
+
+"Tell me what you want, and by the Holy Virgin and all the saints in
+heaven I will perform the work faithfully."
+
+"Your oath is superfluous, as you would break it for a copper-piece, so
+don't insult me with it," replied the Greek, scornfully.  "But, listen:
+there is a certain Jew--Aaron Bannech by name--his office--his den--the
+place where he cheats, and robs, and lies, is beneath the Albergo--in
+the Strada.  Do you hear?"
+
+"_Si, signor, si_,--I know the place--I know the man," said the beggar,
+hastily.
+
+"You know him; it is well that you should--you are an admirable pair.
+He would sell his soul for a dollar, and would then try to cheat the
+devil out of it.  You are a meaner knave.  Half that sum would buy you.
+You both are useful to me, though.  Hasten to him, and tell him that I
+am here.  Say that he must clear out his den of visitors, clerks, or
+other prying knaves, and that I will be with him in half an hour.  When
+you have done this, go down to the port, and learn what vessels are
+about to sail, shortly, for the eastward, with all particulars about
+them--their cargoes--armed force--and number of men--also what ships are
+expected to arrive shortly from the same quarter.  Having gleaned this
+information, which you well know how to do, come up with it to the
+residence of the Jew.  Listen, also, if anything is said about the
+_Speronara Volante_, from Syracuse, by which I arrived.  Alessandro is
+her master--or, if any remarks are made respecting me.  I am, probably,
+unnoticed; but it is as well to be cautious."
+
+"I will strictly obey your directions, signor," said the beggar.  "Have
+you further orders?"
+
+"No--you may go.  I have been talking to you too long already, and may
+have been observed."
+
+"Rest assured of my fidelity," said the beggar, hobbling off up the
+street on his crutches, at a far more rapid rate than he was generally
+wont to move.
+
+No sooner, however, had he got out of sight of the Greek, than he
+slackened his pace.
+
+"Now, I wonder what I should get by denouncing him to the authorities,"
+he muttered to himself.  "They are stingy in rewarding informers though,
+and he, probably, will pay better; besides, as he says, he may get me
+hung by a word; and if I get him into trouble, some of his friends are
+certain to avenge him.  After all, too, he would probably make his story
+good, and I should not be believed.  You can never catch those Greeks
+asleep; their wit is so keen, and they twist, and turn, and double in
+such a manner, that if they get into a scrape, they are certain of
+working their way out of it.  No, it won't do.  I must keep to my word,
+and be honest with him.  Curse him!  Here am I a beggar on crutches, and
+a far greater rogue lords it over me as if he were a prince."
+
+So the beggar hobbled on towards the house of the Jew to fulfil his
+mission.  I am afraid that there are too many people in the world like
+Giacomo, the Maltese beggar, who are honest as long only as it suits
+their purpose.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THREE.
+
+The Greek, little dreaming of the danger to which he was exposed, or, at
+all events, little fearing it, turned on his heel, and retraced his
+steps for some part of the distance he had come.  His air was more
+buoyant and independent than before.
+
+"So much for business," he muttered.  "And now for amusement.  We'll try
+what this brave city can afford.  Let me see, I passed a _tratoria_ or a
+_caffe_ but just now; I'll look in there, and learn what is going
+forward!"
+
+He soon reached the place he spoke of; and throwing open the
+folding-doors at the entrance, entered with his usual careless air, and
+took his seat at a marble table, which chanced to be unoccupied.  There
+was a billiard-table in the room beyond, and upstairs were more secret
+apartments, where games of chance were, at times, played.
+
+The place was full of persons of all descriptions.  English and Maltese,
+and others of various nations.  Those belonging to the army and navy,
+were either of inferior rank, or were harum-scarum fellows, who cared
+not at all with whom they associated.  There were, also, masters and
+mates of merchantmen, Frenchmen and Italians; and there was a
+representative, indeed, to be found of almost all the people dwelling on
+the shores of the Mediterranean, as also, of more distant nations.  Some
+were smoking, and others drinking; but the greater number were idling
+about, laughing and talking, as if they had come there to kill time; and
+when, by chance, any pause occurred, the noise of the billiard balls was
+heard, and the cry of the marker from the next room.  The Greek seemed
+to excite less observation even here than in the street, except from two
+or three of his countrymen, who were in the room, and who eyed him
+narrowly.  He rose and sauntered into the billiard-room, perhaps to
+avoid their scrutiny, perhaps simply to amuse himself by looking on at
+the game.  He soon, however, returned, and ordering some coffee, he took
+up a Maltese newspaper, which appeared to afford him considerable
+interest.
+
+"Ah! here we have a complete list of all the vessels about to sail from
+this port," he muttered to himself.  "It will serve to compare with old
+Bannech's and Giacomo's account," and taking out a pocket-book he
+quickly copied the list.  "And let me see," he continued.  "What have we
+here?  A ball to-night at the Auberge de Provence.  By Saint Genario; it
+will be a good amusement to go there.  I shall pick up not a little
+useful information of what is going forward in the great world, what way
+the wheel is next to turn, and how those English are going to act with
+regard to Greece,--whether we are to have a loan or an army to assist
+us.  Heaven defend us from the latter, and afford us good pickings from
+the first.  But, with regard to this ball.  A stranger, I suppose, would
+not be admitted without an introduction.  They are, I know, of old, very
+suspicious in this place.  Well, I must make old Bannech settle that
+matter also for me.  He must forge some good introductions, if he cannot
+procure them for me in any other way.  He is well able to do so, for he
+keeps his hand in at the work, and knows everybody here and elsewhere."
+
+While he sat meditating and sipping his coffee, the three Greeks, at
+another table, continued eyeing him narrowly, and, at the same time,
+whispering among themselves.  If he was conscious that their glances
+were fixed on him, he stood the scrutiny admirably, without the
+slightest change of colour, nor did his eye quail in the least.  Looking
+suddenly up, however, he appeared first to discover that their eyes were
+turned towards him.  Immediately rising, with a bland smile, he walked
+up to them.
+
+"You seem to know me, gentlemen," he observed, with a courteous tone, in
+pure Romaic.  "Unfortunately, I do not enjoy the same happiness.  Will
+you inform me where it was we met?"
+
+"Pardon, sir, for our rudeness," answered one of the three, rather
+abashed.  "We mistook you for another person--we were trying to
+recollect where we had seen you."
+
+"It is not impossible that you may have met me before, if you have been
+in Italy, in which country I have resided for some years; or lately in
+Sicily," answered the Greek.  "In the fair city of Valetta you could not
+have seen me, as I only landed an hour ago from the last-mentioned
+island, and in our native Greece, I have not been since the days of my
+early boyhood, though I am on the very point of returning thither."
+
+"Then, clearly, we are mistaken," replied another of the three.  "We,
+ourselves, arrived here only yesterday from Greece, after encountering
+numerous hardships and dangers.  Among others, when off the southern end
+of Cerigo, our vessel was boarded by a rascally pirate, manned, too, by
+our own countrymen, who robbed us of everything we possessed, which they
+could carry off, and we fully believe they would have sunk the ship, and
+murdered us, had not a British man-of-war hove in sight, and made them
+sheer off before they had completed their work."
+
+"I dare say they would," replied the Greek, quietly.  "Such gentry, I
+have heard, generally consider that the only safe plan of avoiding
+detection, and the troublesome affair of a trial, and perhaps a very
+disagreeable result, is to stop the mouths of those they plunder beneath
+the waves, lest they should afterwards tell inconvenient tales of them.
+If they thought you had escaped, they would take very good care another
+time not to commit such a blunder."
+
+"Why, it was certainly from no leniency on the part of the villains that
+we were not drowned, for they had bored holes in our ship's bottom, and
+thought we should have sunk at once; but, fortunately, a fresh breeze
+brought up the man-of-war alongside of us before we went down, and her
+people stopped the leak, and saw us safely into port."
+
+"I regret to hear this account you give me," said the stranger, in a
+sympathising tone; "though I congratulate you on your narrow escape,--I
+may call it miraculous.  You are far more fortunate than the generality
+of people who fall into the hands of those gentry, I should think.  I
+was in hopes that our countrymen, since the commencement of the glorious
+struggle to throw off the foul Turkish yoke, had abandoned all their
+malpractices, and had joined heart and hand in the great cause against
+the common enemy.  I, too, am personally interested; as I am about to
+embark on board some merchant vessel for the East and may fare as badly
+as you have done, if not worse.  Do you know any particulars of the
+pirate who attacked you?  I should like to learn all about him, that we
+may, if possible, avoid the vessel if we see her at a distance."
+
+"It was dark when she boarded us, so that we had not an opportunity of
+scrutinising her near," answered the person addressed, who was
+evidently, by his costume and appearance, a Greek merchant, and, as it
+afterwards appeared, the two younger men with him were his sons.  "Our
+misfortune happened in this way.  We sailed, you must know, on board a
+Neapolitan brigantine from Athens, bound to Syracuse.  The first part of
+our voyage was performed in safety; but when some ten miles or so to the
+south of Cerigo, we lay becalmed the whole day.  Our captain and the
+mariners set to work to pray to those accursed little images they call
+their saints, for a breeze; and, at last, it came; but to prove what
+sort of characters their saints are, at the same time appeared in the
+north east, a large polacca brig, of a very rakish look, stealing round
+the east end of the island.  The stranger brought the wind up with her,
+and, as she neared us, the captain, who had been eyeing her earnestly,
+grew into a state of great trepidation, and began to pray harder than
+ever; but this time his saints would not listen to him.  He wrung his
+hands, and beat his breast, and said that the stranger had a very
+suspicious look, and that he did not like it at all.  After stamping on
+the deck, and weeping, and tearing his hair for some time, in which he
+was imitated by most of his crew, he bethought himself of getting more
+sail on his craft, and of trying to escape from the enemy, if enemy she
+were.  A wild boar might as well try to outstrip the fleet hunter.  The
+stranger came up with us hand over hand; our only hope of getting away
+from him was in the coming darkness.  At last the seamen managed to set
+all the sail the vessel could carry, and, with the wind right aft, we
+began to glide through the water.  On, however, came the stranger after
+us; if we wished to get away, he did not intend that we should do so,
+and all of a sudden he yawed to port, and let fly a bow chaser right at
+us; the shot did not hit us, but it frightened our captain excessively--
+for it flew directly over our heads.  I verily believe, if we had not
+stopped him, he would have let fly everything, and waited patiently to
+be robbed and murdered.  We caught hold of him, and urged him to be
+calm, and that we might yet have a chance of escaping.  The breeze
+freshened, and we held on, and, though the stranger still continued to
+overhaul us, he did not come up so fast as at first.  Every instant,
+too, it was growing dark; and as there was no moon shining, we hoped, by
+hauling our wind, to slip away from him, if we could contrive to run on
+without being hit till darkness had completely set in.  He, however,
+seemed in a hurry, and again yawing, let fly another shot at us; though
+his gunnery was not particularly good--for he again missed us--it had
+the effect of setting the Neapolitan master and his crew dancing like
+madmen; they leaped and jumped, and twisted and turned, and tore their
+hair, and prayed and swore, all in the same breath.  They prayed for
+themselves, and swore at their enemies, and at their own hard fate
+should they be taken; for they all had a venture on board, I believe.
+Though two shots had missed, it was not to be expected that all should
+have such ill-luck, and accordingly, when the brig yawed a third time
+and fired, down came our fore-topsail by the run.  If the crew had been
+in a fright before, when they were not hit, it must be supposed that
+they were now in a complete paroxysm of terror; their first impulse was
+to let fly all the tacks and sheets, and to jam down the helm, so as to
+let the vessel fly up into the wind; their next was to rush below to put
+on their best clothes, and the very little money they had in their
+pockets, and then to fall to again at praying and beating their breasts.
+Cowardly fools that they were; had they held on like men, as matters
+turned out, we should have escaped being plundered at all.  In ten
+minutes after the last shot had created such confusion on board, a boat
+pulled alongside, and a dozen fellows in Greek dresses jumped over the
+bulwarks down upon our decks.  We three, my sons and I, sat aft as
+dignified as Turks, and as all the crew were below, there was not the
+slightest show of resistance.  Our countrymen--for such I am sorry to
+say they were--seemed inclined to be civil to us, but vowed they would
+punish the Neapolitans for making them expend the three shots, and they
+forthwith began plundering the vessel; and hauling out the master from
+his berth, into which he had crept, they made him point out whatever was
+most valuable on board--brightening his wits up every now and then with
+a rope's end.  How the poor fellow did howl! but he deserved it; for he
+was an arrant coward.  The leader of the pirates who boarded us was a
+very polite young man: he told us, that he should be sorry to be under
+the necessity of cutting our throats, or of otherwise sending us out of
+the world; but that he was afraid he should be compelled to do so,
+except we would consent to come on board his vessel, where he would make
+us take the vow of secrecy, and re-land us in Greece.  He told us that
+he was in earnest, and would give us till the last moment to consider on
+the subject before he quitted the vessel.  By this we concluded that he
+intended to murder all hands in cold blood, or to sink the brigantine.
+It is very extraordinary, and I hope that you will pardon me the remark,
+but he bore a very striking resemblance to you, except that he looked
+younger, and it was this circumstance that first attracted our attention
+to you."
+
+The Greek stranger who had been standing against the wall, with his arms
+folded and his legs crossed in an easy attitude during this narrative,
+at different parts indulging in a slight smile, now laughed outright.
+"An extraordinary coincidence as you say, my friend, though I confess
+that I would rather not bear so striking a resemblance to the cut-throat
+gentleman you describe.  The consequences at times might be unpleasant;
+and I trust that no relative of mine--no younger brother nor cousin, has
+turned his hand to so disreputable an occupation.  Men of the first
+families, it is true, have become pirates, especially in these
+disordered times; but they usually make war only against their natural
+enemies, the Turks or Moors.  I cannot solve the mystery; however, I am
+very interested in your tale--pray go on with it."
+
+"Before I say another word, I must entreat your pardon for the remark I
+just made," said the Greek merchant; "I was compelled to do so to
+account for our apparent rudeness."
+
+"Oh, certainly, my friend," said the stranger, "I pardon you with all my
+heart.  Nothing was more natural--only I must beg that you will not
+repeat the observation to any one else.  The consequences you know might
+be unpleasant, as it might create disagreeable suspicions in men's minds
+as to the rectitude of my character; but pray continue your tale."
+
+It must be remembered that although there were numbers of people within
+earshot, as this conversation was carried on in the Romaic, none of them
+understood it, which was, perhaps, fortunate for our stranger friend, as
+it would certainly have drawn their attention towards him; and if a man
+happens to be unknown in a place, the slightest shade of suspicion
+thrown on him, is sufficient to blacken his character to the darkest
+tint.
+
+The Greek rubbed his red cap off and on his head two or three times to
+brighten his recollection, and then continued--
+
+"While the pirates were ransacking below, their vessel ran alongside,
+and our decks were soon crowded with a cut-throat set of fellows, who
+speedily joined their comrades in the work of plunder, and in
+transporting everything they considered of value to their own ship.  It
+is extraordinary with what rapidity bales and packages were handed out
+of one vessel into the other.  The rascals must have been well
+accustomed to the work.  Everything was done with the greatest
+regularity; their young leader directing all their movements.  It did
+not take them a quarter of the time to unload that it had taken to load
+the vessel.  Such discrimination, too, as the villains showed in
+selecting the most valuable merchandise.
+
+"In the midst of the work, however, a cry was raised that a strange sail
+was in sight, right to windward, bearing down on us.  With all their
+avidity for booty, the fellows had kept their eyes about them in the
+dark.  Their leader sprang on board his own vessel to have a clearer
+view.  He was convinced that the strange vessel was an enemy to him at
+all events, though a friend to us; and calm and collected as if he was
+enjoying a game of play, he issued his orders.  The first was to tell
+his people to quit the brigantine, and to make sail on the brig.  The
+second, part of which I heard, made my heart sink within me, and my
+blood run cold.  He did not seem to think it had reached our ears,--
+indeed, I believe he had forgotten all about us; the words were--
+
+"`Sink her--drown the people.  No help for it--patience; we should
+otherwise be suspected.'
+
+"Directly afterwards, several men with carpenters' instruments for
+boring holes, went below, and quickly returning, knocked our boat to
+pieces, and jumped on board their own vessel.  As soon as all the
+pirates had quitted us, the brig sheered off.  Just as she did so, I
+heard some one exclaim--
+
+"`Our countrymen, our dear compatriots, where are they?  We have
+forgotten them.'  However, I don't think their regret for us could have
+been very great, for the next moment they fired a broadside slap into
+our hull, between wind and water, to try to make us sink the faster;
+and, making all sail, stood away from us as fast as a rattling breeze
+would carry them.  Two of the crew had been knocked on the head by the
+pirates, and their broadside killed two more.  The master and the
+survivors were utterly incapacitated from helping themselves; so we
+three Greeks, with the black cook, feeling some wish to preserve our
+lives, rigged the pumps which had escaped destruction, and set to work
+to keep the water from gaining enough on her to send us to the bottom.
+This we found we could easily do; and the cook, going below, was able to
+plug several of the holes, which had been very imperfectly bored.  Some
+of the crew, also, at last recovered their senses and assisted us in our
+labours; so that we continued to keep the craft afloat till the vessel,
+which had frightened away the pirates, came up to us.  She proved to be
+the British brig-of-war, the _Cockroach_, and a boat immediately came on
+board to learn what all the firing was about.  Our condition proved the
+truth of our story; and we entreated the officer who boarded us not to
+desert us, as the sacrifice of our lives would have been the inevitable
+consequence; whereas, the improbabilities of his catching the pirate
+were very great.  The British are a very humane people, I will say that
+for them; and the captain of the brig accordingly sent two boats' crews
+on board us, with the carpenter and his crew, and they plugged the
+holes, and thrummed a sail, and got it under our bottom.  Some manned
+the pumps, to which they quickly drove the Neapolitans with a rope's
+end; and next morning we made sail for Zante, which we reached in
+safety, escorted by our preservers, who immediately afterwards started
+again in search of the pirate."
+
+"Did they fall in with him, do you know?" asked the Greek, carelessly.
+
+"Can you catch a sunbeam?" said the first speaker.  "She must be a fast
+craft to come up with him.  They say nothing can catch him."
+
+"What, then, you learnt who your friend was?" said the stranger.
+
+"Oh, yes! we heard a good deal about him in Zante.  He is the very
+terror of all honest, quiet-going traders in those parts."
+
+"And who is this formidable, light-heeled gentleman, may I ask?" said
+the stranger.
+
+"No other than that daring devil, Zappa," said the merchant.  "You have
+heard of him, doubtless?"
+
+"I think I have somewhere heard his name mentioned," said the stranger.
+"But has he already established so terrific a name for himself?  You
+described him as very young."
+
+"Ay, but old in crime.  A man who murders all his captives, and sinks
+every ship he plunders, soon gets his name up in the world.  It is one
+of the various methods to gain notoriety.  Each man to his taste."
+
+"You are right, my friend," said the stranger, stretching out his arms
+and yawning; "there are many methods by which a man may gain an elevated
+position; and your friend, Signor Zappa, as you call him, seems to have
+chosen a very certain one, at least, if he falls into the hands of the
+governor of this island; who, judging from the specimens I saw hanging
+up at the entrance of the port, treats such gentry with no slight
+distinction, by placing them in the most conspicuous posts within his
+jurisdiction."
+
+"You joke merrily on the subject; but it is no laughing matter to those
+who have been robbed and nearly murdered," said the Greek merchant.  "I
+only wish I could get the villains in my power, I would hang them all
+without mercy, as high as Haman."
+
+"I dare say you do," said the stranger, smiling.  "Such is but a natural
+impulse.  Yet, as I have not suffered, I cannot enter quite so warmly
+into your feelings.  However, I am grateful to you for your account; and
+I shall take very good care to keep out of the way of your friend Zappa.
+May I ask, by the way, the appearance and name of the vessel commanded
+by this renowned cut-throat?"
+
+"Certainly," said the merchant, "though, as I said, it was nearly dark
+when he boarded us; but I should describe her as a rakish polacca brig,
+of about two hundred and fifty tons burden; and from what we learnt
+afterwards, we discovered that she must be the celebrated _Sea Hawk_.
+It is said that she is so fleet that nothing could ever catch her, and
+that she comes up with everything she chases; so that, my friend, you
+may not avoid her quite so easily as you may wish."
+
+"It is something to know what she is like; and, if we cannot run from
+her, we must fight her," returned the stranger.  "However, before we
+part, let me assure you that I shall be most happy to be of any service
+to you in my power.  When do you again sail from hence?"
+
+"In a few days our mission here will be concluded.  We then return to
+our beloved Greece," replied the merchant.
+
+"What! and run the risk of being chased by the _Sea Hawk_, and of
+falling into the hands of that rogue, Zappa!" exclaimed the stranger.
+"However, as, by the law of chances, you could scarcely encounter him
+twice, I should much like to accompany you, for I should then consider
+myself safe from him.  By what vessel do you go?"
+
+"A Venetian merchant schooner, the _Floriana_.  She sails hence in four
+days; and, as she has a rich cargo, she is well-armed and has plenty of
+men--so we need not fear Zappa or any other pirate."
+
+"Just as I should wish.  I will look out for her, depend on it,"
+exclaimed the stranger, quickly.  "But I must, for the present, wish you
+farewell, gentlemen.  I have an appointment, and I have already
+overstayed my time."
+
+Saying this, the stranger bowed to his new acquaintance; and throwing
+down his reckoning with a haughty air, quitted the coffee-house.
+
+"He seems an honestly fair spoken gentleman," said one of the young
+Greeks to his father.  "He will be a great addition to our society on
+board."
+
+"I am not quite so certain of that," replied the more sagacious
+merchant.  "Fair spoken he is without doubt; but for honesty, why you
+know the safe rule is to look upon all men as knaves till you find them
+otherwise.  Therefore, my sons, never consider a stranger honest, or you
+may discover, when too late, that he is a rogue.  Now, though it is
+doubtless fancy, I cannot help thinking that our friend there bears a
+very striking resemblance to the pirate Zappa."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOUR.
+
+There is an old saying, that, "Give a dog a bad name, it is sure to
+stick by him."  On this account I suppose it is that Jews are always
+considered rogues.  I am very far from saying that they really are so
+invariably, or even generally.  On the contrary, I believe that there
+are a great number of very honest, generous, kind-hearted, hard-working
+people among them in all countries where they enjoy the privileges of
+free men.
+
+That, in those times and countries where they have been treated as worse
+than slaves, despised, insulted, and robbed on every occasion, they
+should have become, what they are often described as being, is not only
+not surprising, but is according to the laws which govern mankind.
+Tyranny and wrong, invariably make the people, who submit to them, grow
+mean, treacherous, and false.  Cut off from all honourable pursuits,
+they have recourse to such as are within their power; and thus the Jews,
+who were unable to hold even land in their possession, became the
+money-makers; and, consequently, moneylenders of the world--and, as they
+were frequently pillaged and deprived by extortion of their wealth, they
+naturally endeavoured to regain, by every means left to them, that of
+which they had been robbed.
+
+Now, though there are many Jews whose upright conduct is sufficient to
+retrieve the characters of their whole people, such cannot be said for
+the old Maltese Jew, Aaron Bannech.  He was a rogue ingrain.  To lie,
+cheat, and rob, where he could do so without risk of detection, was his
+occupation and delight.  Lying, cheating, and robbery, were in him a
+second nature.  He considered them not only lawful, but praiseworthy
+employments.  He could not help lying and cheating if he tried.  By so
+doing, he had heaped up hoards of wealth--he had raised himself from
+abject penury, and how could he be expected to persuade his conscience,
+or what stood him in place of one, that he had not been acting rightly.
+True his gold was of no real use to him--he had no one to enjoy it with
+him--he had no relative to whom he could leave it.  Some might say that
+it would serve to repurchase Judea for his people; but he cared no more
+for Judea than he did for Home.  He would not have parted with a
+sixpence to rebuild Jerusalem, unless he could have got a very large
+interest for his money--indeed he would probably have required very
+sufficient security, before he would have consented to part with it.
+His appearance was far from peculiar or striking as he sat in a dingy
+underground den, which he appeared to have burrowed out for himself
+beneath the groaning walls of one of the old mansions of Valetta.  He
+had sharp, ferrety eyes, a hooked nose, and a long, dirty, grey beard;
+indeed, no difference could be discerned between him and his countrymen
+employed in selling old clothes in London.  He wore a brown cap on his
+head, anila, long serge overcoat, the colour of which it was impossible
+to determine; and a pair of slippers, which had once been yellow, but
+were now stained with many a varied tinge.  The chamber in which he sat
+was fitted up with a desk, and a table covered with packages of papers
+and account-books, two high stools, and three or four rickety chairs.
+He was by himself, waiting in expectation of the arrival of the Greek.
+The time appointed had already passed, and he was beginning to think
+that some accident must have occurred to his acquaintance.  Ten minutes
+more elapsed--his suspicions increased.
+
+"Can the myrmidons of the law have got hold of him?" he muttered.  "That
+rascal Giacomo--he may have informed, and will receive the reward which
+ought to be mine.  If I dared, I would secure the prize at once--but
+then, I suspect, before long, the amount will be increased.  Yes, it
+must be.  The fruit is not yet ripe for plucking."
+
+He stopped, either to chuckle at his own wit, or to calculate the sum he
+might expect for betraying the man who trusted him.  His virtuous
+meditations were interrupted by the entrance of the Greek.  His manner
+was as free and joyous as ever.  He addressed the Jew in Italian, with a
+remarkably pure accent.
+
+"Ah! my dear correspondent--my noble friend--my prince of money-lenders,
+how fares it with you?  Still at the old trade of coining gold, eh?
+Well, we must all live either by fraud or force; cunning or strength are
+the weapons put by nature into our hands.  To some she gives one; to
+others the latter: nature is most impartial.  To the lion she gives
+claws and teeth; to the horse his hoofs and fleetness.  To a woman,
+beauty and softness; to a man, strength and courage.  She intends all
+these attributes to be employed.  So, friend Bannech, you live by fraud,
+and I by force.  Is it not so?"
+
+"I cannot dispute the correctness of your assertion: for, to say the
+truth, you have spoken so rapidly, that my poor comprehension could not
+follow you, noble signor," said the Jew, bending low, and placing a
+chair for his visitor.  "But may I inquire what thus unexpectedly brings
+you to Malta?"
+
+"Pleasure, Bannech--pleasure, and, perhaps, the hopes of a little
+profit," said the Greek, laughing.  "Now, though I may not just yet tell
+you what brings me to Malta, I will tell you a little more of my history
+than you are at present acquainted with.  Know, then, most worthy Jew,
+that I am, by name, Argiri Caramitzo, a patriot Greek chief, or prince,
+call me, of Graditza.  That I have been educated in Italy--that years
+have passed since I set foot in my native land--and that I am now
+hastening thither to join in the noble struggle to emancipate Greece
+from the thraldom of the infidel Turk.  I have travelled from that city
+of learning and piety, Pisa, to Naples, thence to Syracuse; and from
+that ancient city, I have crossed the sea hither.  All this you must
+remember, Bannech, should you be questioned."
+
+"I will not forget it, most noble prince," said the Jew, bending his
+head.  "I like the story much.  It has a probability about it which
+cannot fail to make it be believed--an essential point too frequently
+overlooked by bunglers in lying."
+
+"I am glad you like it," observed the Greek, or prince--as we may now
+call him.  He took no notice of the last, not very flattering,
+observation of the Jew.  "But now, Bannech, I wish to know what vessels
+are sailing hence for Greece, as I desire, you must remember, to secure
+a passage by one of them."
+
+The Jew looked at him for a moment, doubting whether he was in earnest.
+
+"Oh, I understand," he said at length.  "Why, there are several sailing
+in the course of a few days, but the one which will best suit your
+purpose quits the harbour to-morrow.  She carries passengers--one of
+whom an English colonel is said to be rich, so he will doubtless have a
+store of gold on board.  He has a daughter or niece with him, who is
+reported handsome.  If she was, by chance, to fall into the hands of
+such gentry, as we wot of, she would gain them a large amount for her
+ransom.  The vessel I speak of is the _Zodiac_, John Bowse, master."
+
+"I passed her as we entered the harbour," remarked the Greek.  "I will
+go on board this very evening.  But I wish to know more about her
+passengers.  Could not they be induced to carry a large amount of gold
+with them?  It would be very convenient.  Tell me, how can I become
+acquainted with them?"
+
+The Jew shook his head.
+
+"I do not know how it can be managed.  These English people, with their
+proud manners, do not like making the acquaintance of foreigners of
+whose history they are ignorant."
+
+"Do not tell me that it cannot be done," exclaimed the Greek
+impatiently.  "I tell you, signor, that you must find means of doing it.
+Surely a Greek prince would not be refused admittance into the best
+society of an insignificant island dependency like this."
+
+"There are a great many arrant rogues bearing that title," said the Jew,
+his eyes twinkling as he spoke.  "And among the English here the rank
+alone does not bear much weight.  You should have letters of
+introduction, and how they are to be procured, I cannot say."
+
+"How they are to be procured!  Why, forge them to be sure, my friend,"
+exclaimed the Greek.  "Nothing is so easy.  Come, come, you are well
+accustomed to the work, I know."
+
+"Oh, father Abraham, suppose I was to be discovered!" ejaculated the
+Jew.  "My credit would be gone, and I should be completely ruined and
+undone."
+
+"Oh, no fear of that, while your wits are as keen as at present," said
+the Greek.  "Come, has not the colonel some acquaintance or other in
+Italy, who would be likely to introduce a distinguished foreigner, his
+friend, visiting the island, or do you know of some other person to whom
+a letter of introduction might be addressed?"
+
+The Jew meditated for some time, and if with any other sensation than
+that of grasping avarice, and all its accompanying hopes and fears, it
+was with that of admiration for the Greek's daring and versatility of
+talent.  He was thinking of the value of which they might be to himself.
+
+"I have it," he exclaimed.  "There is a client of mine, a young
+spendthrift, who has lived much in Italy, and many of whose acquaintance
+I know.  Stay, I have a letter by me from his friend the Count
+Montebello of Florence.  He shall be your introducer.  Do you know him?"
+
+"I know nothing of him," said the Greek, "make me a friend of his
+friend.  It will be safer and will be sufficient."
+
+"Excellent, excellent," exclaimed the Jew, chuckling at the thoughts of
+the fraud.  "You should have been bred a lawyer instead of a sailor,
+prince.  Now, remember, this client of mine is acquainted with Colonel
+Gauntlett, and is, indeed, a suitor of his niece's, for the sake of the
+money he expects she will receive from her uncle.  You will know how to
+talk to him."
+
+"Admirable!  My plan must prosper.  There is a ball, too, I understand
+to-night, at which I suppose all the principal people in the place will
+be present, and among them, the colonel, his niece, and my new friend.
+I must be prepared for the occasion; so, friend Bannech, send for the
+best tailor in the place forthwith; for it will never do to appear in
+this barbarian costume."
+
+The Greek having thus fully concocted his plan, overruled all the
+objections thrown out by the Jew, and, as he was a man of action, he
+insisted on a tailor being instantly sent for.  In ten minutes
+afterwards the well-known artist Paolo Muhajiar made his appearance,
+and, though he was somewhat astounded at the shortness of the time
+allowed him to rig the Greek stranger in a suit of mufti, a show of some
+broad gold pieces overcame all difficulties, and he promised to set
+every hand at his establishment on to the work.
+
+Little did the honest Paolo dream, as with a profound bow, he gathered
+up his measures and patterns, and took his departure, who was the
+distinguished foreigner for whom he was about to labour.  The Greek
+desiring the Jew to detain the beggar Giacomo till his return, with a
+triumphant look soon after set out to inspect the good brig the
+_Zodiac_.
+
+Argiri Caramitzo was a man who hated inactivity; he was never happy
+except he was in motion, and never contented unless he had a prospect of
+change before him.  Born in England, he would have been a universal
+philanthropist or a radical reformer, or an inventor of patent machines,
+or, in late days, a railroad projector; he would have employed his time
+in haranguing popular assemblies on the rights of man, and the freedom
+of religion, and he would have been a loud advocate of the cause of the
+Poles, and Greeks, and Hungarians; but, as he happened to have been born
+in Greece, he cared not a jot for the Greeks, and employed his talents,
+sharpened by use, in making a fortune in the way most clearly open to
+him, and most suited to his taste.
+
+He now hurried down to the quay, off which he saw Manuel at his post,
+waiting for his return.  He beckoned him to approach, and, taking his
+seat, ordered him to pull alongside the English brig the _Zodiac_; he
+soon stood on her deck, to the no small astonishment of Captain Bowse,
+who had just before got on board.  It may be supposed that they would
+have had no little difficulty in understanding each other; but there is
+a _lingua Franca_ used in the Mediterranean, which all mariners, who
+traverse that sea, very quickly pick up; and, what with that and the aid
+of signs, they made themselves tolerably intelligible to each other; at
+all events the Greek learned all he wished to know; even before he had
+spoken, his quick glance had made him acquainted with the armament of
+the vessel, and her probable seaworthy qualities.  His foot, too, as he
+walked aft, happened to strike one of the carronades, the look of which
+he considered suspicious, and he smiled as he found that it was of wood.
+He soon made known his object in visiting the ship; he was looking out
+for a passage to Greece by some vessel shortly to sail thither, and, as
+the appearance of the _Zodiac_ pleased him, he should like to engage a
+cabin on board her.
+
+"Cannot, though, receive you on board, sir; sorry for it: but all my
+accommodation is taken up by an English colonel and his family, and he
+would not allow anybody else on board, even if it was the Pope himself,"
+answered Captain Bowse.
+
+"But I am not at all particular as to the sort of accommodation you can
+find for me," urged the Greek.  "I have been at sea before, and can
+rough it as well as any of you mariners."
+
+"No matter, Mr Prince; the colonel would not allow any stranger on
+board, so, with all the will in the world to serve you, I cannot do it."
+
+"But suppose the colonel should not object, would you then receive me?"
+asked the stranger.
+
+"That would alter the case, sir, and we would rig you up the best berth
+we could manage," answered Captain Bowse.
+
+"So far, so good," said the Greek.  "About the passage-money we shall
+not disagree; but tell me of what does your cargo consist?  I have the
+greatest horror of sleeping over gunpowder, or anything likely to
+explode."
+
+"Oh, we have no gunpowder except a few charges for our guns there; but
+we have some cases of muskets consigned to a merchant at Cephalonia, and
+which will, I suspect, soon find their way over to your friends on the
+main; and we have besides an assortment of hard goods, and of silks and
+clothes, and cottons, and such things, indeed, as would only be shipped
+in a sound ship--high up in Lloyd's list, let me tell you, sir.  There
+isn't a finer craft out of London than the _Zodiac_, and none but a good
+ship would have weathered the gale we fell in with t'other day, though,
+as it was, we met with a little damage, which made us put in here to
+repair."
+
+"I have no doubt of the _Zodiac's_ good qualities, and I hope that I may
+yet have the satisfaction of proving them," said the Greek, as he
+stepped over the side.  "Adieu, captain; a prosperous voyage whether I
+sail with you or not."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIVE.
+
+A grand ball was taking place at the Auberge de Provence, in the Strada
+Reale, at Valetta.  All the rank and fashion of the city were assembled.
+They consisted of the naval, military, and civil officers of the crown
+stationed there, their wives and daughters; a few English visitors
+attracted to the island to recruit their health, or to indulge their
+curiosity; and some foreigners, illustrious and otherwise, who had come
+there chiefly on the latter account; though a small portion might have
+been travelling diplomatists or scientific _savants_.  Few ball-rooms
+could display a larger number of glittering uniforms, both naval,
+military, and consular; and there was a very fair proportion of beauty
+among the younger ladies, and diamonds among the dowagers.  The soldiers
+certainly took the lead.  They consider that possession is nine parts of
+the law; and thus as they live in the island, while their naval brethren
+are merely visitors, they could not help feeling their superiority.
+Captains of line-of-battle ships and frigates are, of course, however,
+held in high consideration by the fair sex; but midshipmen were sadly at
+a discount; and even lieutenants, unless they happened to have handles
+to their names, or uncles in the ministry, were very little thought of.
+Such was the case at the time of which I write.  I suspect very little
+alteration has, since then, taken place.
+
+So our two young friends, Jack Raby and Jemmy Duff, seemed to feel as
+they sauntered into the ball-room, and cast their eyes round in a
+somewhat unusually bashful manner, in search of any young lady who would
+deign to bestow a bow on them, and accept them as partners.  At last,
+Jemmy Duff exchanged a nod and a smile with the little Maltese girl who
+had before attracted him, and he was soon, according to his own fashion,
+engaged in making desperate love to her, evidently as much to her
+amusement as to his satisfaction.  Poor Raby stood looking on, and could
+scarcely help feeling jealous at his friend's good fortune; for not a
+single lady did he know in the room, when a hand was placed on his
+shoulder.  He looked up, and a bright smile irradiated his countenance
+as he saw who it was.
+
+"What, Raby, don't you intend to show some of these fair ladies how well
+the _Ione_ lads can kick their heels?"
+
+The speaker was a young, intelligent-looking man, with a complexion
+which would have been fair, had it not been sunburnt, with thick, light,
+curling hair.  He was strongly but gracefully made, of the ordinary
+height, and would have been by every one considered good looking; his
+forehead and mouth were decidedly handsome, the latter expressing great
+firmness, at the same time a great amiability of disposition.  His dress
+was that of a commander in the navy.
+
+"I can't get a partner, sir," answered the midshipman; "I don't know a
+lady in the room."
+
+"Oh! we will soon find you one.  I must not have my boys thought to be
+misanthropic."
+
+"Captain Fleetwood," said a lady near, "can you introduce a partner to
+my niece?"
+
+"Oh, certainly," answered the officer, seizing Jack Raby by the arm,
+"allow me to introduce Mr Raby, of her Majesty's brig _Ione_, who will
+be happy to dance the next quadrille with you."
+
+The young lady to whom he spoke, smiled, and said she should be very
+happy; but the aunt made a wry face, and observed that she intended to
+have asked him to introduce his friend, Major White of the --.
+
+"I hope my young friend, Raby, will do as well.  He is a nephew of Lord
+--," observed Captain Fleetwood, in a slightly satirical tone.  "I will
+bring up White, in tow, to your ladyship, as soon as I can sight him."
+
+Captain Fleetwood was always more thoroughly nautical in his mode of
+expression at Malta than in any other place.
+
+"Oh, certainly, I am most happy to know any of your officers, especially
+a nephew of Lord --, whose brother is a great friend of my husband's
+cousin."
+
+Captain Fleetwood might have made a rejoinder; but at that moment his
+eye glanced towards the door, at which was entering a stout, oldish
+gentleman, in plain clothes, and hanging on his arm, a fair, young, and
+very pretty and interesting girl.  He instantly hurried forward, and
+claimed her hand for the next dance, which, with one of the sweetest
+possible smiles, she promised to give him, while the old gentleman,
+though he nodded to him, evidently regarded him with far from amiable
+feelings.
+
+The young officer, however, who appeared accustomed to the old man's
+surly looks, and indifferent to them, remained by her side, and engaged
+her in an animated conversation.  At last her companion lost all
+patience, and tugging at her arm, he exclaimed--
+
+"Come along, Ada, we must look for a seat somewhere till the dancing
+begins, for I cannot undertake to stand on my legs all night.  Captain
+Fleetwood, you will find Miss Garden at the farther end of the room,
+probably, when you wish to claim her hand for the next quadrille; but as
+she is soon to commence a long sea voyage, I cannot allow her to fatigue
+herself by dancing much this evening."
+
+Colonel Gauntlett, for the speaker was the uncle of Ada Garden, said
+this in a grave, cold tone, sufficient to freeze the heart of any
+ordinary lover; and, pressing his niece's arm as if to prevent her from
+escaping, he dragged her through the crowd towards a seat which he found
+vacant.
+
+"Ada," said the colonel, as he walked on, "I will not have you intimate
+with any of those sea officers.  I cannot bear them, from the highest to
+the lowest.  One of them had the impertinence to interfere between me
+and a lady to whom I was paying my addresses.  By Jove, miss, he carried
+her off before my eyes.  I have hated them ever since, with their
+easy-going, devil-me-care ways."
+
+"But surely, uncle, you would not make all suffer for the fault of one;
+and I suppose your rival loved the lady," urged Ada.
+
+"Love her, I suppose he did love her; but he had no business to do so, I
+tell you.  I already looked upon her as my wife!" exclaimed the colonel,
+stamping down his stick vehemently on the floor, and speaking so loud
+that several people must have heard him.
+
+"But did the lady confess her affection for you, uncle?" asked his
+niece.
+
+"Confess her love!--why, ay, no--that is, I never asked her; or, rather,
+she took it into her head to refuse me altogether."
+
+Fleetwood was about to follow, but he suddenly stopped.
+
+"It will only enrage the old man, and excite suspicions in his mind.
+Perhaps he will insult me to get rid of me altogether,--I had better
+not."
+
+Ada found herself seated next to Lady Marmion, with whose niece Jack
+Raby was dancing.  Her attention was easily riveted by the praises which
+her ladyship lavished on Captain Fleetwood, and the secret of her
+affection, if secret it could be called, was easily penetrated by the
+astute dame.
+
+"Now, my dear, you know I like him, though I do not like the navy in
+general.  Their coats smell of tar and cockroaches, and their
+conversation is all about their ships and their adventures at sea and on
+shore; and then you know they are generally so poor, that it is
+dangerous to let a girl talk to them.  Captain Fleetwood is not very
+rich, I believe; but then he has prospects, and they should be taken
+into consideration."
+
+"I really do not know," said Ada.  "It never occurred to me to calculate
+the fortunes of the gentlemen with whom I am acquainted."
+
+"Oh, you will grow more prudent, my dear, some day," observed her
+ladyship.  "But who can that particularly handsome man be walking this
+way, with Captain Dunnup?  By the way, my dear, I should recommend you
+to keep that Captain Dunnup at a distance.  I gave Jane the same advice,
+for you know he has entirely run through his property; and they say,
+besides, that he is completely in the hands of the Jews.  Dear me, here
+he comes with the stranger."
+
+As she spoke, two gentlemen were advancing towards the spot where she
+and Ada Garden were sitting.  The one she alluded to was a
+dissipated-looking young man, though with a well-bred air, and rather
+handsome.  The other was decidedly so--indeed, he might well have been
+considered the handsomest man in the room.  There was a noble and
+independent air, and a free-born grace about him--so all the ladies
+declared--which would have made him anywhere distinguished.  His
+features were dark, and of the purest classical model; his eyes were
+large and sparkling, and a long silky black moustache shaded his lip.
+His costume was simple and correct, from his well-fitting black coat to
+his trousers, which showed off the shape of his handsome leg, and his
+silk stockings, and low, well-polished shoes.  The most severe critic
+could not have found the slightest fault with him, except perhaps that
+his coat shone too much, as if it was just out of the tailor's hands.
+
+"Permit me to introduce to your ladyship, my friend, Prince Argiri
+Caramitzo," said Captain Dunnup, advancing and presenting the stranger,
+who bowed gracefully.
+
+"And may I, Miss Garden, be allowed to introduce him to you?" he
+continued.  "Although a Greek, he speaks Italian like a native, in which
+language I know that you, also, are a proficient."
+
+Both ladies bowed their heads, and signified their pleasure in knowing
+the Prince Caramitzo.  He, in his turn, in very pure Italian, expressed
+his still greater gratification at the honour he enjoyed.
+
+While he was speaking, Dunnup caught Colonel Gauntlett's eye fixed on
+him, and it occurred to him that he should introduce his friend.  He
+accordingly took him up, and introduced him in form.
+
+"The prince is going eastward, colonel, and as you will probably meet
+again in the classic land of Greece, if you do not rather journey
+together, I feel that you should become acquainted."
+
+As Colonel Gauntlett rather liked the look of the stranger, he
+condescended to be civil to him; but as he did not speak a word of
+Romaic, and as his Italian was very indifferent, and his French worse,
+Argiri Caramitzo could scarcely understand what he said.  He, however,
+made a polite speech full of complimentary phrases in return, and then,
+bowing, went back to talk to the ladies.
+
+The handsome stranger judged that he should more speedily gain all the
+information he required from the niece, and might afterwards, through
+her, if he found it requisite, persuade the colonel to do what he
+desired.  He found on his return that Miss Garden had been led out to
+dance by Captain Fleetwood, so he sat himself down to play the agreeable
+to Lady Marmion, and to glean from her much which he wished to know
+about the politics of Valetta, and which she was too happy to impart.
+
+We, however, must follow Captain Fleetwood and Miss Garden.  There was
+no doubt of their being lovers, by the confiding way in which she rested
+on his arm, and glanced up into his face as he spoke; and the look of
+proud happiness with which he regarded her, and seemed to defy the world
+to venture on the experiment of tearing her from him.  Everybody
+observed it but Colonel Gauntlett, and he remained obstinately blind to
+what had taken place.
+
+"My beloved Ada, this is the last time that I may have an opportunity of
+speaking to you," said Fleetwood, as, the dance being over, he led her
+to an open balcony which looked out on the moonlit harbour.  "You know
+how ardently I love you, and that willingly would I sacrifice all the
+prospect of your uncle's property, if he would give his consent to our
+union; but I would not urge you to act in opposition to his wishes--yet
+there is a time when obedience ceases to be a duty, and that time must
+come when he obstinately refuses to give you to me."
+
+"He will not, he cannot do so, when he knows how dearly, how deeply you
+love me."  She spoke according to the dictates of her own heart; nor was
+she, however, wrong.
+
+"Then this very night, or to-morrow morning, before you sail, I will ask
+you from him, and as soon as I pay off the _Ione_, which I shall
+probably do in the course of two months, I will come back and claim you.
+Shall I do so, dearest?"
+
+"Oh, yes! do, Charles.  It is the only way, and, believe me, whatever is
+the result, I will be faithful to you.  While you claim me, I will never
+marry another."
+
+"I cannot ask more, and yet I could not demand less without
+contemplating an event which would wring my heart with anguish,"
+exclaimed Fleetwood, pressing her hand to his lips.  "I think, however,
+we may before that time again meet--I expect to be sent to Greece, and
+shall contrive to visit Cephalonia."
+
+For some time longer the lovers talked on without taking note of its
+flight, when they were disagreeably interrupted by the voice of the
+colonel inquiring for Ada.
+
+"Come here, miss," he exclaimed.  "Here has been Prince Caramitzo
+waiting for the last quarter of an hour to lead you out to dance, and
+you were nowhere to be found--I will not have it."  And he looked a
+black thundercloud at Fleetwood.  "Come, _Signior Principe_, there is
+your partner ready for you."
+
+The prince, comprehending his meaning more by his action than his words,
+stepped forward, and, with a profound bow, offered his arm, which Ada,
+giving a glance of regret at Fleetwood, was obliged to accept.  The
+prince was not a man, it appeared, to allow a lady to feel annoyed in
+his society.  He first paid her a slight and delicate compliment on her
+beauty, which he introduced in a description of his own countrywomen and
+the Italians.  He told her how much he admired all he had heard of
+England, and seen of Malta; he drew out her opinion on several subjects,
+and a little account of her life, and then excited her curiosity about
+himself.
+
+"But how is it that, being a Greek, you speak Italian so well?" she
+asked.
+
+This was just what he expected; he wished to tell her his history, but
+could not volunteer to do so.
+
+"Ah, signora, it is a long story, and would fatigue you; but thus much I
+may tell you:--You know the misery, the abject slavery to which my
+beautiful, my noble country was so long subjected beneath the iron
+despotism of the infidel Turks.  Our fathers contrived to live under it,
+or the present race would not have been born to avenge them.  We were
+rapidly becoming extinct as a nation; our religion languished--our
+education was totally neglected.  My father, however, the late Prince of
+Graditza, also Argiri Caramitzo, was a man superior to those around him,
+and determining that I, his eldest son, should have the advantage of a
+good education, he sent me to the famous university of Pisa, in Tuscany.
+I there acquired the language of Italy in its purest form; but,
+unhappily, I almost learned to forget my own country--I formed
+friendships with those among whom I lived.  I not only learned to talk,
+but to think as an Italian, and I was even ignorant of the gallant
+struggle which had commenced in Greece.  This was owing to the affection
+of my parents, who, knowing that my disposition would have prompted me
+instantly to throw myself wherever danger was the greatest, did not
+inform me of what was taking place, and when they suspected that I must
+have heard something on the subject, assured me that my presence would
+be useless, and urged me to remain where I was.  Alas!  I listened to
+their well-meant deceit, till news was brought me that my noble father
+had been slain in combat with the enemies of our country, and that my
+mother had died of grief at his loss.  Then, indeed, the truth was made
+known to me, and, rousing myself for action, I hastened to fly to the
+country, where I felt that the presence of even the meanest of her brave
+sons was required.  Alas!  I found that the means of quitting Italy were
+wanting--I was in debt, and no funds had been transmitted to me.  I
+contrived to exist; for my friends were kind, but innumerable delays
+occurred before the money I sent for arrived, and I am only now on my
+way to Greece--my native land, the mother of the arts and sciences, the
+country of Socrates and Plato, of Alexander and Aristides, the
+battle-fields of Thermopylae and Marathon.  Ah, signora, Greece once
+contained all that is noble and great, and brave--what she once was,
+such she will be again--when we, her brave sons, have regenerated her,
+when we have driven forth the accursed Turk, never more to set his foot
+upon our sacred shore, except as a slave, and a bondman.  Ah, this is
+the patriot's wish--his dream by night, his hope by day.  This is the
+bond of union which now unites the hearts of our countrymen in one great
+feeling--a deadly hatred of the Turk--time is coming, and will shortly
+arrive when Greece, brightly and freshly burnished, will come forth a
+model of a perfect republic to all the nations of the earth.  You are
+happy, signora, in going to the neighbourhood, that you may watch the
+progress of the glorious work."
+
+Ada listened, and her cheek glowed with animation, for she was an
+enthusiast in the cause of the Greeks.  She looked at the prince, and
+thought him a noble patriot.
+
+The Greek intended that she should do so.  He was struck by her beauty,
+and every instant he felt his admiration for her increasing.
+
+A second time she accepted the prince's hand, in preference, however,
+only to that of Captain Dunnup, and she became the envy of the room, for
+numberless fair ladies were dying to dance with the handsome prince.
+
+The Greek stranger was accompanied to the ball-room by a young man of
+very striking appearance, though of a slighter figure, and not as tall
+as himself.  He spoke of him as his particular friend, the Count
+Montifalcone, who was on his way with him to join those struggling for
+Grecian independence.  His manners were elegant: but he appeared to be
+very bashful, or diffident; and, at all events, appeared very much
+disinclined to enter into conversation.  The Greek, however, introduced
+his Italian friend to Miss Garden; and though, at first, he was very
+much reserved, as he gazed at her animated and lovely countenance, he
+appeared to gain courage, and warmly entered into conversation on the
+beauty of his native Italy, and her superiority in works of arts over
+all other countries.  It seemed curious to her that although he was
+going out to join the Greeks, he should show so little interest, as he
+appeared to do, on the subject of Greece, her wrongs and prospects.  He
+danced, however, but once with Miss Garden nor did he, during the course
+of the evening, attempt to gain an introduction to any one else; but
+continued to watch her, at a distance, wherever she moved, and was
+evidently much struck with her beauty.
+
+Many remarked the grave and silent young Italian as he stood, with his
+arms folded on his breast, endeavouring to conceal himself among the
+crowd, or leaned, apparently lost in reflection, against the door-post
+at the entrance to the room, in which she happened to be.  His Greek
+friend seemed so much engaged, that he scarcely noticed him, and though
+Captain Dunnup exchanged a few words with him occasionally, he spoke to
+no one else, nor did he seem anxious to do so.
+
+With a glowing cheek and sparkling eye she listened as he advocated, in
+ardent language, the cause of his native land, and her heart beat with
+enthusiasm.
+
+"Oh! if I were a man, nothing should prevent me from hurrying to join
+the sacred ranks of your liberators!" she exclaimed.
+
+"With such an advocate we must succeed," returned the Greek, bowing.
+"Some of your noble countrymen, it is said, have already joined the
+patriot force; and, lady, when in the thick of the combat, fighting for
+Grecian liberty, I shall remember your words, and feel that your prayers
+are aiding us."
+
+Ada listened to the softly-flowing expressions of the voluble prince,
+and believed him to be a perfect patriot.  Had she known a little more
+of the world, she might have thought otherwise, and yet, who can say,
+that while the prince was speaking to her, he did not feel all he
+expressed.  New hopes, feelings, and aspirations rushed into his mind,
+elevating and purifying it--a glorious future might yet be in store for
+his country and himself--and while he remained by her side, the force of
+those sensations continued.  It was with unwillingness, and even pain,
+that he was obliged to yield her up again to Captain Fleetwood, who was
+naturally on the watch to monopolise her whenever he could.  How the
+prince hated the English Captain--for he soon saw that, though Miss
+Garden listened to his own honeyed words with pleasure, her heart was in
+the safe keeping of one whom he, all of a sudden, chose to consider as
+his rival.
+
+"No matter," he muttered.  "I must teach her to forget him."
+
+He sauntered about the room for a short time by himself, paying little
+attention to the fair ladies who surrounded him, and it must be owned,
+was sadly indifferent to the charms of most of them.  He then sought
+Colonel Gauntlett, whom he endeavoured to engage in conversation.  It
+was certainly of a peculiar nature, and the meaning was not always clear
+to either party; but he gleaned much useful information, and suggested
+many things to the colonel in return.  Among other pieces of advice, he
+recommended him to carry as much gold as he could with him, telling him
+that he would find it more convenient than bills.  He strongly advised
+him also to keep it in his trunks, as they, in case of shipwreck, would
+more probably be saved than other things.  It is extraordinary how very
+attentive and full of forethought he was.
+
+The ball was at length over.  Jack Raby and Jemmy Duff vowed that they
+had never enjoyed themselves more in their lives, thanks to their
+captain's management; and they had made an agreement to introduce one
+another to each other's partners, and, at the same time, to puff off
+each other's wealth and connections, which plan they found answer very
+satisfactorily.
+
+The Prince Caramitzo, as he threw a sea-cloak over his shoulder in front
+of the hotel, took the arm of Captain Dunnup, and warmly pressed his
+hand.
+
+"I have much reason to thank you for your politeness, sir, and shall be
+glad to welcome you to Greece."
+
+The captain expressed his satisfaction at having been useful to him, and
+signified the very great probability there was of his shortly having to
+pay a visit to that country, at all events, of having to leave Malta.
+They then parted with mutual expressions of esteem.
+
+The Greek then took the arm of his Italian friend, and together they
+sauntered down the street, every now and then stopping to ascertain
+whether any person from the ball was watching where they went.
+
+Captain Fleetwood walked to his lodgings in an unusually melancholy
+humour.  He had forebodings of disaster, which even his strong mind
+could not at once overcome, though he knew they arose from being
+fatigued and worried.
+
+To-morrow he must take his farewell of his beloved Ada for an indefinite
+period; for, though he intended to hurry back from England as soon as
+possible, he knew that numberless events might occur to delay him.  He
+had also ventured to speak to Colonel Gauntlett, for the first time, of
+his love for his niece; and the reception he had met with from the old
+gentleman was, as might be expected, most unsatisfactory.
+
+The colonel and Ada were driving home together: she had not spoken, for
+she could not trust her voice.
+
+"Niece," said the colonel, stamping with his stick at the bottom of the
+carriage, as if to arouse her, "you were talking and dancing a great
+deal too much with that young naval man--that Captain Fleetwood--and
+after what I said to you at the commencement of the evening, I consider
+such conduct highly reprehensible."
+
+"I confess I spoke to him a great deal this evening," answered the poor
+girl, in a tremulous voice.  "I hoped that you would not blame me, as he
+said that he would speak to you and explain everything."
+
+"Well, young lady, he did speak to me, and a damned impertinent thing he
+said, too.  He had the folly--the outrageous, unconscionable folly--to
+ask me to allow you to marry him!" exclaimed the colonel in a husky
+voice, again almost driving his stick through the bottom of the
+carriage.  "He had the folly; but I was not fool enough to accede to
+it--I refused him, young woman.  And now, never let me hear his name
+mentioned again."
+
+With a sad heart Ada placed her head on her pillow, and, with a sadder
+still, she rose on the following morning to prepare for her voyage.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIX.
+
+The crew of the Sicilian speronara were busily engaged the whole fore
+part of the day in discharging the small quantity of cargo, consisting
+chiefly of corn and other provisions, with which their vessel was laden.
+
+When this was done she immediately cleared out at the custom-house, and
+without any of her crew having even visited the shore, she got up her
+anchor, and commenced making sail.  The long tapering yard of her
+foresail was first hoisted, and its folds of white canvas let fall, and
+when her head paid round, her mainsail was next got on her, and sheeted
+home.  Instead, however, of running out of the harbour, as it at first
+appeared she was about to do, after she had gone a little distance, just
+between Fort Saint Angelo and Fort Ricasoli, she hauled her foresail to
+windward, and hove to.  The probable cause of this was soon explained,
+for a small boat was seen to dart out from beneath the fortifications of
+Valetta, and to take its way across the harbour towards her, carrying a
+person in the stern-sheets, wrapped up in a cloak, with a broad-brimmed
+hat shading his features.  The hat may not have been worn for the
+purpose of disguise, for the rays of the sun, striking down full upon
+the water, were very ardent, and there was good reason for its being
+worn to protect him from their fury; but there was not quite so much for
+the use of the cloak, unless, following the Italian fashion, he carried
+that also over his shoulders for the same reason.  The boat ran
+alongside the speronara, when the person, whoever he was, stepped out,
+and the foresail being let draw, the beautiful little craft stood out of
+the harbour.  The boat on its return was found to belong to the boatman
+Manuel, who, being questioned as to the person he had conveyed on board
+the speronara, declared that he had not the slightest notion who he
+was--that he had never before seen his face, and that he could not tell
+whether he was an Englishman, an Italian, or a Frenchman, but that he
+thought the former.  He said, all he knew was, that he had come down to
+the shore and engaged his boat, and as he had paid him well for the job,
+it was not his business to make further inquiries.  The general opinion
+was, that he was some person making his escape from his creditors; but
+by the time the proper authorities were informed of the supposed fact,
+and the necessary measures taken to ascertain its truth, the delinquent
+was far beyond their reach.
+
+The wind was about north-west--there was a nice fresh breeze, and
+supposing that the speronara was bound for Syracuse, she could, hauling
+as close to the wind as she was able to do, easily lay her course for
+that port.  Either, however, she was carelessly steered, or she was
+bound to some port in Italy, for, after hauling round Saint Elmo, she
+fell off considerably from the wind, and finally, when she might have
+been supposed to have got beyond the range of observation of those on
+shore, who were not likely to take much notice of so insignificant a
+little craft, and of so ordinary a rig, she eased off both her sheets,
+and, with the wind on her larboard quarter, indeed, almost astern, ran
+out into the offing.  By this course she crossed in a short time the
+mouth of the harbour; and though at a considerable distance, she was
+enabled to watch any vessel coming out.
+
+Her movements, however, were not totally unobserved, for Captain
+Fleetwood, who had called at the house of Colonel Gauntlett, early in
+the morning, in the vain hope of seeing Ada, was returning in a
+disconsolate mood along the ramparts, and meditating in what way his
+duty should direct him to proceed, when his eye fell on the speronara,
+hove-to directly below him, Manuel's boat just touching her side.
+
+As he had, like most naval officers, a remarkably good glass in his
+pocket, he directed it towards the little vessel, and among the people
+on her deck he fancied that he distinguished the figure of the stranger
+who had paid so much attention to Ada on the previous evening.  Now, as
+he understood that that gentleman was about to sail immediately for
+Greece, he was naturally surprised, indeed so unlikely did it appear,
+that he thought he must be mistaken.  Although he was very far from
+being of a suspicious disposition, yet combining the manner in which the
+stranger had gone on board, and the doubtful character of the craft
+herself, he determined to watch her movements.
+
+Another cause also combined to create very extraordinary suspicions in
+his mind respecting the character of the stranger, who had made his
+appearance so suddenly in Malta.  On his way to Colonel Gauntlett's
+residence, that morning, he had passed the office of the chief of the
+harbour police, and on looking in to speak a word with Captain S--, he
+found him engaged in examining three Greek merchants, who stated that
+the vessel in which they were making a passage from Athens to Sicily,
+had been plundered by a well-known pirate of the name of Zappa, and that
+he had appeared on board their vessel; that they had spoken to him, and
+that they felt almost confident that they had seen the same person,
+without any disguise, in a coffee-house in Valetta on the previous
+evening.  They acknowledged, that though at first they had no doubt of
+his identity, yet that when he came up to them, and entered into
+conversation, they were staggered in their belief; but that after he had
+disappeared it again occurred to them with greater force than ever, that
+he must be the man they at first thought.  When convinced of this they
+immediately set out in the hopes of falling in with him, and with the
+intention of handing him over to the police; but they were unsuccessful
+in their search, and when, after many inquiries, they learned before
+whom they should make their depositions, it was too late in the day to
+see any one.  After sleeping on the subject, they were as strong in
+their opinion as on the previous night, and the first thing in the
+morning they had come, they said, to make their statement.  Captain S--
+listened attentively.  He told them that he thought they must be
+mistaken as to the identity of the person, as he could not believe that
+a pirate would have the audacity to venture into Valetta; particularly
+just after he had committed a daring act of piracy.  The Greeks shrugged
+their shoulders, but asserted that from what they had heard of Zappa,
+they believed him capable of any act of hardihood.
+
+"At all events," observed Captain S--, "I will take your description of
+the gentleman.  Figure tall, features regular, eyes large and animated,
+hair black, and slight curling moustache--not a bad-looking fellow for a
+cut-throat, at all events.  I will order the police instantly to go in
+search of him, and if he can be found, of which I have no doubt, we will
+examine him, and confront him with you; and if he turns out to be Signor
+Zappa, he will, probably, before many days are over, be hanging up
+alongside Captain Delano and his shipmates."
+
+The Greeks were satisfied that they were right, and on their retiring,
+officers were instantly despatched in search of the supposed pirate.
+The result of their inquiries Captain Fleetwood had not yet learned; but
+the description given by the Greeks answered so exactly to that of the
+Prince Argiri Caramitzo, whom he had met at the ball the previous night,
+that he could not help being struck by it.
+
+"I did not altogether like the style of the fellow," he muttered to
+himself.  "He is good-looking enough, certainly; but there was an
+impudent, sinister expression about his countenance which one does not
+observe in that of an honest man.  I wonder, too, what right he has to
+the title of prince.  There are some few chiefs in Greece, who call
+themselves princes, but they are very rare.  Who they are can easily be
+ascertained, and I must learn if such a title exists.  Let me see, he
+was introduced, too, by that fellow Dunnup.  He is a _mauvais sujet_ I
+suspect, and I should fight very shy of his friends at all events.  What
+could have taken the gentleman on board that craft then!  That puzzles
+me!  I must see to it."
+
+Accordingly when the speronara let draw her foresail, and stood out of
+the harbour, he retraced his steps along the ramparts towards port Saint
+Elmo, to a position whence he could command a clear view to seaward.
+
+"She is a pretty lively craft that," he observed to himself, as he saw,
+with the pleased eye of a seaman, the rapid way in which the vessel
+glided over the crisp curling waves.  "The fellows know how to handle
+her too; but what is she about now, I wonder?  I thought, by the way she
+first steered, she was bound for Sicily, but there she goes running off
+to the south-east.  I cannot be mistaken."  And he took a scrutinising
+glance at her with his telescope.  "Yes, that is her, there can be no
+doubt about the matter."
+
+Now love makes most men sharp-witted in everything regarding the object
+of their affection, and Captain Fleetwood was certainly not a man to be
+less so than any other person.
+
+The sudden change in the course of the speronara had given rise in his
+mind to sundry suspicions.  They were not very serious, and probably,
+under other circumstances, he would not have entertained them; but he
+was out of spirits and fatigued, and he could not help connecting the
+movements of the speronara with the sailing of the _Zodiac_, on board
+which vessel Ada and her uncle were that evening to commence their
+voyage.  He did not, however, suppose that a craft of her character
+would venture to attack an armed brig of the size of the _Zodiac_,
+unless she could take her by surprise, nor could she have any chance of
+success against so brave and good a seaman as Captain.  Bowse, and so
+fine a crew as his; but at the same time he thought it would be more
+prudent to let him know what he had seen, and urge him to be on his
+guard against the speronara.
+
+"I never heard of one of those fellows committing piracy--probably he is
+up to some smuggling trick--perhaps he expects to fall in with some
+vessel, and will take her goods out of her during the night, to run them
+on the Sicilian or Italian coast; perhaps to put that good-looking
+fellow of a Greek prince, if that is him, on board some craft or other
+bound eastward.  However, I must speak to Bowse about it.  I wish to
+heaven I might sail and convoy the brig; but the admiral would not give
+me leave if I was to ask him--he would only think it was an excuse to be
+near Miss Garden."
+
+These thoughts passed through his mind as he hurried down to the quay,
+where his boat was waiting for him, and jumping into her, he started for
+the _Zodiac_.  He had made the acquaintance of the honest master, on
+finding that the colonel and his niece were going by his vessel, and he
+had been every day on board to assist in arranging Ada's cabin, and to
+suggest many little alterations which might conduce to her comfort and
+convenience.
+
+Captain Bowse was on board with every preparation made for sailing, and
+only awaited the arrival of his passengers.  The master of the _Zodiac_
+heard the account given by the naval officer without any alarm, though
+at the same time he owned that there was some cause for suspicion; and
+he promised to keep a sharp look-out, and to take all the precaution in
+his power to prevent being surprised.  When he heard that the Greek
+stranger had gone on board the speronara, he remembered the visit of a
+personage answering his description, on the previous evening, to his
+vessel, and he felt glad that he had not been induced to take him.
+
+"The chances are, if the fellow be a rogue, that he saw that there would
+be no use trying to do anything with the _Zodiac_ and he has gone to lay
+his plots against some other craft," he observed.  "That's my view of
+the case, sir, and I don't think that you need at all alarm yourself
+about the safety of your friends.  But although we are safe ourselves,
+that is no reason that we should not think of others; and if I was you,
+sir, I would make inquiries about the strange gentleman, and give notice
+to the authorities of what you have observed.  You can tell, sir, of his
+wanting to take a passage to Greece, on board here, and then shipping
+off suddenly in a Sicilian craft.  There may be nothing in it; but there
+may be something; and to my mind it's as well never to trust to a rope
+with a strand gone."
+
+Wishing a prosperous voyage to the master, and again cautioning him to
+be careful, Captain Fleetwood stepped into his gig, and had got some
+little distance, when he saw a large boat approaching, which he divined
+contained her he loved best on earth, with her uncle and his attendants.
+How could he resist the temptation of seeing and speaking to her once
+more? so, giving his boat a sweep, he pulled round to the other side of
+the _Zodiac_, from that on which the gangway ladder was shipped, and lay
+on his oars, trusting to the chance of seeing Ada on deck, while her
+uncle was below.
+
+There were fewer packages than most families travel with, for the
+colonel was a martinet, and would allow none of his womankind, as he
+called them, to have more traps than was absolutely necessary; and thus
+no time was lost in getting the party and their goods on board.  Besides
+the colonel and his niece, there was a little Maltese girl, as an
+attendant, and the colonel's own man, Mitchell, who, like his master,
+was a character not unworthy of note.  Bowse, who understood pretty well
+the state of affairs, soon contrived to get the colonel below, while he
+detained Ada on deck, and then pointing out Captain Fleetwood's boat to
+her, beckoned him on board.  He was much too judicious to show in any
+other way that he was aware of the feelings of the parties; but leaving
+them together, he rejoined the colonel in the cabin, determined to keep
+him there as long as he could, showing him the arrangements made for his
+convenience.  Little did the old gentleman think, that when praising
+many of them, he was indebted for them to the man for whom he had
+conceived so hearty an aversion.  What the lovers said need not be told.
+Those few moments were sweet but sad, and both felt that they would on
+no account have missed them.  Ada again assured him that nothing should
+induce her to give him up, and he repeated his promise to hasten and
+claim her in spite of all opposition.  The appearance of Bowse's honest
+face up the companion-ladder was the signal for him to tear himself away
+from her, and he had just time to get over the side, when the colonel
+appeared on deck.
+
+"What are you gazing at there, missie?" he asked, as he saw her, soon
+after, looking up the harbour.  "Oh, ay, thinking of your partners at
+the ball, I suppose."  She did not answer; but as she turned her face
+with a reproachful look at her uncle, her eyes were full of tears.
+
+As soon as Bowse came on deck, he gave the signal to weigh.  The cable
+was already hove short, the topsails were loose.  The men went about the
+work with alacrity, and in a style very different to that of merchant
+seamen in general.  They were all prime hands, mostly old men-of-war's
+men turned adrift, as ships were paid off, and had all before served
+with Bowse.
+
+He carried on the duty, therefore, as far as circumstances would allow,
+in the fashion to which they had been accustomed, and to which they
+willingly submitted.  The brig was consequently looked upon as as fine a
+vessel as any sailing out of the port of London.  To the cheery sound of
+the pipe, they manned the capstan bars, and singing in chorus to a merry
+strain, away they ran swiftly round.  A hand was sent to the helm, and
+the mate was on the forecastle.
+
+"Heave and away," he sung out, as the cable appearing up and down showed
+that the anchor was under the forefoot.  As the wind blew out of the
+harbour, the jib and fore-topmast-staysail were now hoisted to cast her.
+With renewed exertions the crew hove round, and the shout they uttered
+gave the signal that they had dragged the anchor from the bottom.  The
+bow of the vessel feeling the power of her head sails, now paid slowly
+off.
+
+"Heave and in sight," the mate next sung out, as the anchor appeared
+above water.  Another turn ran it up to the bows.  The foretopsail was
+next sheeted home and hoisted, and the head yards braced forward to help
+her round more quickly.  In the meantime the anchor was catted and
+fished ready for sea, and as the wind came abaft the beam, the head
+yards were squared, and the fore-clew-garnets being let run, the
+ponderous folds of the foresail were allowed to fall towards the deck,
+just as the wind was brought right aft.  Both sheets were then hauled
+aft, and the increasing breeze no longer finding escape beneath it, blew
+it out in a graceful swell which made it appear as if it were about to
+lift the vessel bodily out of the water to carry her gliding over the
+waves.  The fore-topmast-staysail, no longer being of use, was hauled
+down, and her fore-topgallantsail and royal, with the after sail, were
+next set, followed by studden-sails on either side, till the brig
+presented the appearance of a tall tower of white canvas shining
+brightly in the rays of the sun, which was setting directly astern, and
+which threw on them, in confused lines of tracery-work, the shadows of
+the masts, their respective shrouds and running rigging.
+
+Ada, who would not be persuaded by her uncle to go below, as he said, to
+get her out of harm's way, looked on with deep interest at these
+proceedings, and with admiration at the method by which, in so short a
+time, so beautiful a fabric could be raised.  Ada delighted in
+everything connected with the sea.  She was a sailor's daughter, and she
+loved a sailor; but even before she had known Captain Fleetwood she felt
+an affection for things nautical, and certainly he had done much to
+increase her regard.  She enjoyed too the physical pleasures of the sea,
+the fresh free breeze, and the light dancing wave, which to her was a
+source of no inconvenience.  While others suffered, she was on deck
+enjoying existence to the full.  It is true that she had as yet only
+seen the ocean in its summer dress, and except from the experience of a
+short gale, which she looked upon rather as giving a zest to the
+pleasure of a voyage, she knew little of its wintry tempests, its
+dangers and horrors.  Bowse observed the interest she took in all that
+was going forward, and, like a true sailor, felt as much gratified as if
+she was his own daughter, and under his especial protection.  Jack, the
+cabin-boy, was coiling away a rope near him, and beckoning to him, he
+sent him down for a comfortable chair, which, on its appearance, he
+placed before her.
+
+"There, miss," he observed, "I think you will be able, more at your
+ease, to sit and look at the little island we are leaving behind us.
+It's always a pleasure to take the last look at the place we are going
+from."
+
+Ada thanked him with a sweet smile for the chair which he had
+judiciously placed on the starboard side of the poop, and looking partly
+aft, so that she could command a full view of the harbour, where the
+_Ione_ lay, and of the fortifications of Valetta.  The _Zodiac_ was now
+running out between forts Saint Elmo and Ricasoli; and as she cleared
+the former, she felt the wind drawing rather more to the northward.  Her
+yards were, therefore, braced forward, and her mainsail hauled out; and
+now with the wind on her quarter, a point in which every sail a
+square-rigged vessel can carry draws best, with a fine rattling breeze
+she rapidly left the shores of Malta astern.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVEN.
+
+Never did a vessel leave port under more propitious circumstances than
+did the _Zodiac_, with a fair, steady breeze, a smooth sea, and at a
+time of the year when there was every prospect of the continuance of
+fine weather.
+
+As Bowse walked the deck with a spy-glass under his arm in man-of-war
+fashion, a smile of contentment lit up his honest countenance, and
+glistened in his eye; and as he felt the freshening breeze fanning his
+cheek, and lifting his vessel, as it were, he began to laugh at his
+momentary suspicions about the character of the speronara and her crew.
+Every now and then he would stop in his walk, and would look over the
+side to judge how fast the vessel was going through the water, or he
+would examine the compasses to assure himself that they were true, or he
+would cast his eye aloft to see how his sails drew, or his clear, full
+voice would be heard issuing some necessary order for the government of
+the ship.
+
+Even Colonel Gauntlett could not help expressing his satisfaction at the
+propitious commencement of their voyage, as he stopped in his short and
+otherwise silent walk on the poop to address a few words to the master.
+
+Ada sat silently in her chair, gazing on the fast-receding shore; and it
+is not surprising that her thoughts were fixed on him who was, she felt
+sure, even then watching, from its most extreme point, the bark which
+bore her away.  Her little Maltese maid, Marianna, stood by her side
+with tears in her bright eyes, and gazing her last for an indefinite
+time on the land of her birth, and where all her affections were
+centred, except those which had lately arisen for her young mistress.
+
+The colonel's man, not knowing exactly where he ought to be, being too
+dignified, at first, to mix with the men forward, and astonished and
+confused at manoeuvres which he could not comprehend, as is generally
+the case with his class, always managed to get exactly where he was most
+in the way.
+
+"Port a little, you may, my son," said the master to the man at the
+helm; "steady, so, keep her.  East-and-by-north is the course,"
+pronouncing the north with a strong emphasis on the O, and without the
+R--as if it were spelt Nothe.  "Just get a gentle pull on our
+weather-braces, Mr Timmins," to the mate.  "The wind's drawing a little
+more aft again.  We're making her walk along, sir," to the colonel.
+"She's not going less than six knots an hour, I'll warrant, which, with
+this light wind, is not bad for a craft of her build--she's no clipper,
+I own, sir.  Heave the log here.  I dare say you'll like to be certain,
+miss," turning to Ada, as he thought the operation would amuse her.
+
+The second mate and two hands came aft with the log-line and reel.
+Bowse took a half-minute glass from the binnacle, and watching till all
+the sand had run into one end, held it up before him.  The seamen,
+meantime, held the reel up before him, so as to allow it to turn easily
+in his hands, and the mate, taking the little triangular bit of wood,
+called the log-ship, adjusted the peg, and drew off, with a peculiar
+jerk of his left hand, several coils of the stray-line, which he held
+for a moment over the quarter of the vessel, till he saw that his chief
+was ready with the glass, and he then hove it over into the water.  The
+first part of the line is called the stray-line, and its object is to
+allow the log-ship to settle properly in the water, as well as to take
+it clear of the eddy.  As soon as this part had run out, a cloth mark
+ran through the mate's fingers.  "Turn," he exclaimed.  "Turn," repeated
+the master, and turned the glass.  The marks rapidly passed through the
+mate's hand, as he jerked the line of the reel, always keeping it at a
+stretch.
+
+"Stop," sung out Bowse, as the sand had run out of the upper end of the
+glass.
+
+"Done," said the mate, and stopped the line.
+
+He had not to count the knots run off, for his experienced eye was able
+to tell the number by the mark on the line.  It must be understood that
+this line is divided into a certain number of equal parts, each of which
+bears the same proportion to a mile, which thirty seconds do to an hour,
+and therefore, as the log-ship remains stationary in the water,
+according to the number of these proportions dragged through, while the
+sand is running, so is shown how many miles or knots the vessel is going
+through the water.
+
+"Six and a quarter," exclaimed the mate.  "That's what I call good going
+for a ship with a full cargo, in a breeze like this."
+
+"That's what we call heaving the log, Miss Garden," said the master, who
+had been explaining the use of the log, though in not quite so succinct
+a way as I have attempted to do.  "You'll be able to turn the glass
+another time, I'm sure."
+
+The glass runs, in reality, only for twenty-eight seconds, as two are
+considered to be employed in turning it.
+
+Ada, who enjoyed an advantage over the reader, by having the operation
+performed before her eyes, answered that she clearly understood it, and
+would always, in future, hold the glass.
+
+"By this calculation, you see, miss, as it is just two hours since we
+passed Fort Saint Elmo, we have run exactly twelve knots and a half off
+the reel; though we didn't go through the water so fast at first, as we
+are now doing.  However, by the look of the land, I calculate we are not
+much less than that off it.  You see we call miles--knots, miss, on
+account of the knots which are marked on the line.  When we can just see
+the last of some conspicuous point, we shall take its bearing by compass
+and its distance, and then I shall commence pricking the ship's course
+off on the chart, and that is what we call taking our departure.  Now
+you see there's many people on shore would fancy that when we left the
+port we took our departure; but the ties which bind a seaman to the
+shore, and to those we leave behind, are not so quickly parted as they
+may think, you see, miss."  And the honest master, chuckling at one of
+the first attempts at wit and gallantry of which he had ever been
+guilty, thought the next instant he blushed at his own audacity.
+
+"It's surprising, miss, what funny mistakes them who never leave the
+land make about seafaring concerns; but then, what can you expect of
+them? they know no better," he added, in a tone showing the deep
+commiseration he felt for the ignorance of landsmen.  "To say that they
+don't know the stem from the stern, isn't to say anything.  They know
+nothing about a ship, how she's built, how she sails, or what she's
+like.  The last voyage I made I had a passenger on board who was a
+cleverish sort of gentleman, too, and for talking politics he'd go on
+for an hour; yet he wanted to know why I couldn't bring the ship to an
+anchor right out in the Bay of Biscay; and one night, when it was
+blowing a stiffish gale, with a heavy sea running, he roused me out of
+my sleep to ask me to send a better hand to the helm; one who knew how
+to keep the craft steady, or else to run into some harbour till the
+morning.  He never could get it out of his head that he was not in the
+Thames.  Now, miss, I see that you are not one of those sort of people,
+and that you will soon know all about a ship, though you may not just
+yet be able to act the captain.  To-morrow I'll show you how to shoot
+the sun, as we tell greenhorns we are doing, when we take an observation
+with the quadrant.  It's a very pretty instrument, and you will be
+pleased to know how to use it."
+
+"I shall like very much to learn all you can teach me, Captain Bowse,"
+answered Ada, making a great effort to rouse herself from the feeling of
+sadness which oppressed her.  "I wonder how mariners managed to
+traverse, as they did, the most distant seas, before these instruments
+were invented."
+
+"They used to trust more to the sun and stars, and to their lead
+reckoning, than they do now, I suppose, miss," answered the master.
+"Even now, there's many a man in charge of a vessel who never takes more
+than a meridional observation, if even that; and having found his
+latitude, runs down the longitude by dead reckoning.  Some even go about
+to many distant parts entirely by rule of guess, and it is extraordinary
+how often they hit their point.  Now and then, to be sure, they find
+themselves two or three hundred miles out of their course, and sometimes
+they get the ship cast away.  I have, too, met vessels out in the
+Atlantic which had entirely lost their reckoning, and had not the
+slightest notion where they were.  Once, I remember, when I belonged to
+the _Harkaway_ frigate, coming home from the Brazils, we sighted a
+Spanish man-of-war corvette.  When we got up to her we hove to, and an
+officer came on board who could speak a little English; and you would
+scarcely believe it, but the first thing he did was to ask us for the
+latitude and longitude; and he confessed that the only instruments they
+had on board were out of repair, and, for what I know, the only man who
+knew how to use them was ill.  Our captain then sent an officer on board
+the corvette, and a pretty condition she was in for a man-of-war.  They
+had a governor of some place as a passenger, and his wife and family,
+and two or three other ladies and their families; and there they were
+all lying about the decks in a state of despair, thinking they were
+never to see land again.  They had been a whole month tossing about in
+every direction, and not knowing how to find the way home.  The decks
+were as dirty as if they had not been holystoned or swept all that time;
+not a sail was properly set, not a rope flemished down.  If I hadn't
+seen it with my own eyes, I could not have believed such a thing
+possible.  Our appearance raised their spirits a little, and they began
+putting themselves to rights as soon as they had made sail on their
+course.  They kept company with us till we got into the latitude of
+Cadiz, for their craft sailed very well, for all that they did not know
+how to handle her, and I believe that they managed to get into port in
+safety at last."
+
+"I am surprised at what you tell me," observed Miss Garden, "I should
+have thought the Spaniards could not have so totally forgotten their
+ancient naval renown as to allow such dreadful ignorance to exist."
+
+"The men are active, intelligent fellows enough, and the officers in the
+merchant service are, from what I have seen, very good seamen; but since
+the war, their navy has been much neglected, and men were made officers
+who did not know the stem from the stern of the ship, just because they
+happened to be some poor dependent of one of their nobles, or the son of
+a valet out of place.  Things are mending a little now with them, I
+hear."
+
+"I wonder any but such beggarly fellows as you speak of can be induced
+to go into the navy at all," said the colonel, who had been listening to
+the master's story, and was far from pleased at the interest Ada took in
+what he said.  "For my part, I would as soon be a shoe-black; but you
+seem determined to give my niece a dose of the sea."
+
+"Oh, yes, sir!" answered Bowse, perfectly indifferent to the colonel's
+ill-temper; "I hope we shall make the young lady a first-rate sailor
+before long."
+
+"I hope you will do no such thing, Mr Bowse; she thinks a great deal
+too much about it already," returned the colonel, taking another turn
+aft.
+
+"Indeed I do not, uncle," replied Ada, as he came back, in a
+half-playful tone, calculated to disarm his anger.  "You must
+acknowledge that the scene before us is very beautiful and enjoyable.
+Look at that blue and joyous sea, how the waves leap and curl as if in
+sport, their crests just fringed with sparkling bubbles of snow-white
+foam, which, in the freshness of their new-born existence, seem inclined
+to take wing into the air--then, what can be more bright and clear than
+the expanse of sky above us, or more pure than the breeze which wafts us
+along.  Look, too, at the blue, misty hills of our dear Malta, just
+rising from the water.  What mere mole-hills those wild rocks now seem.
+And then that glorious mass of glowing fire which spreads far and wide
+round the sun as he sinks into that clear outline of sea; and distant
+though it seems, sends its reflection across the waves even up to the
+very ship itself.  Ah! if one could but secure that orange tinge, one
+might gaze at it unwearied all day long.  See, also, the dark,
+fantastically-shaped spots on the ocean as the sails of the distant
+vessels appear between us and the sun, like evil spirits gliding about
+the ocean to cause shipwrecks and disaster; while again, on the opposite
+quarter, the canvas appears of snowy whiteness, just catching the last
+rays of the light-giving orb of day, and we would fain believe them
+benign beings hovering over the ocean, to protect us poor mortals from
+the malign influences of their antagonists; while our proud ship glides
+majestically along in solitary grandeur, casting indignantly aside the
+waves which it seems to rule, like some mighty monarch galloping over
+the broad domains which own him as their lord.  Come, uncle, can you
+deny the correctness of my description?  And I am sure Captain Bowse
+will agree with me."
+
+She laughed playfully at her attempts at a description of the scene
+surrounding them, and which she had purposely made as long as she could
+find words to go on with, well-knowing the effect which her own sweet
+voice exercised in calming the habitual irritation of her uncle.
+
+"A pretty bit of jargon you have managed to string together," said the
+colonel, looking more amiable than he had before done, "and that is what
+I suppose you call a poetical description, missie.  Well, as it does not
+convey a bad idea of what we have before our eyes, it must pass for
+something of the sort, I suppose.  What do you say, Mister Bowse?"
+
+Now, although Bowse had not entirely comprehended all that Ada had said,
+he felt that he was called on to give an answer, and accordingly looked
+round the horizon, as if to satisfy himself that her description was
+correct.  He had taken a survey of the whole expanse of the sea to the
+westward, and his eye had gradually swept round to the east, when,
+instead of turning round to answer, he kept it fixed on a distant spot
+just seen over the weather or larboard bow.  Shifting his position a
+little, he placed his telescope to his eye, and took a steady gaze.
+
+"That's her, I can't help thinking," he muttered.  "But what she wants
+out there, I can't say."
+
+To the surprise of Ada, he walked forward, and called his mate to his
+side.
+
+"Here, Mr Timmins, just tell me what you think of that chap out there,
+over the weather cat-head," he said, giving his officer the glass.
+
+The mate took the instrument, and looked as he was directed.
+
+"She's a lateen-rigged craft standing on a wind athwart our course,
+sir," answered the mate instantly, as if there was no difficulty in
+ascertaining thus much.
+
+"That one may see with half an eye, Mr Timmins; but do you see nothing
+unusual about her?"
+
+"I can't say that I see any difference between her and the craft, which
+one is always meeting with in these seas," answered the mate.  "Her
+canvas stands well, and looks very white as we see her beam almost on to
+us.  She seems one of those vessels with a name I never could manage to
+speak, which trade along the coast of Sicily and Italy, and come over to
+Malta."
+
+"By the way she is standing, she will pass at no great distance to
+leeward of us, and if she was to haul up a little, she would just about
+reach us," observed the master in a tone of interrogation.
+
+"Just about it, sir," replied the mate.
+
+"Well, then, Mr Timmins, keep your eye on her, and when we get near
+her, if there is still light enough left to make her out, tell me if you
+have ever seen her before."
+
+The mate, somewhat surprised at the directions his chief had given him,
+prepared, however, to obey them, and while he superintended the people
+on deck, he constantly kept his telescope fixed on the stranger.  A
+quarter of an hour or twenty minutes might have passed, when, after
+taking a longer scrutiny than before, he suddenly turned round, and
+walked to where his commander was standing.
+
+"I know her, sir," he exclaimed.  "She is no other than the craft which
+nearly ran foul of us yesterday, and which went out of harbour this
+morning.  She had two outlandish-looking chaps as passengers; and one of
+them came on board in the evening to talk about taking a passage to
+Greece.  I remember him well, sir, though I did not say anything to
+you."
+
+"You are right, Mr Timmins, it's her, there's no doubt," said Bowse.
+"We'll give her a wide berth, for there seems to be something suspicious
+about her," and he mentioned what Captain Fleetwood had said to him.  "I
+don't think the chap would dare to attack us; but, with females on
+board, it's as well to be cautious.  We'll haul up a little by degrees,
+not to make it remarkable, so as to pass to windward of him, and have
+the guns loaded and run out, just as a matter of course, in the
+Mediterranean, tell the people.  I don't want to have any talking about
+it, you know; for it will all be moonshine, I suspect.  Look you, too,
+have the small arms and cutlasses up on deck, just to overhaul them, as
+it were.  The studden-sails must come in, at all events; it won't do to
+be carrying on at night as if we had fifty hands in a watch instead of
+five.  Now let the people knock off work."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," answered the mate, and, without the slightest appearance
+of hurry, he set to work to obey his commander's orders.
+
+The crew, who had been employed beyond the usual hour in getting the
+ship to right, finished stowing away everything that was loose, and got
+the hatches on over the cargo.  One after another the studden-sails,
+which had been extended beyond the yard-arms came flying down like huge
+white birds from their lofty perches, the moment the halyards and sheets
+were let go, and, as they bulged out, they looked as if they were about
+to sail off before the wind ahead of the vessel.  As all hands were
+wanted for the work, Bowse clapped on himself, petting a rope into even
+Mitchell's hands, and in a short time the _Zodiac_, stripped of her
+wings, was brought under more easy-working canvas.  The lee-braces were
+then flattened in a little, and the helm being put a few strokes to
+starboard, she headed up towards the north.  While the mate was
+following the other directions he had given, Bowse again brought his
+glass to bear on the speronara, and, while so doing, his eye was
+attracted to a sail which appeared in the horizon, and which he at once
+knew to be a square-rigged vessel.  From its height, too, above the
+water, and its faint outline, he judged her to be a ship or a brig of
+some size.  He had, indeed, remarked her some time before, and it now
+occurred to him that she had not altered her position since first seen.
+It would therefore appear that she was standing the same course as the
+_Zodiac_; but as they neared her rapidly, such could scarcely be the
+case, and he, now seeing that her head was turned towards them, could
+only come to the conclusion that she was hove to.  He calculated, also,
+that the speronara, supposing that she had, for some time, steered the
+same course she was now on, must have passed close to her.
+
+The idea came into the master's head more as a matter of speculation
+than because any further suspicions occurred to him, for the probability
+of those he still entertained being correct, he thought so very slight,
+that he was almost vexed with himself for acting on them; and had it not
+been for his promise to Captain Fleetwood, he most likely would have
+done so.  That the speronara, now to leeward of him, was the self-same
+craft he had seen in Malta harbour, he could, however, no longer
+entertain a doubt.  He had noted her long, low hull, with overhanging
+stern and high bow, the great length of her tapering yards, and the way
+her immense lateen sails stood; there was also a peculiar dark mark on
+the cloth next to the outer leech of her foresail, near the head of the
+yard, which was unmistakable, and when he could clearly see that her
+identity would be proved.  As he now brought his glass again to bear on
+the speronara, he saw that as the _Zodiac_ was brought on a wind, she
+was immediately hauled close on it, so that, notwithstanding the change
+he had made in his course, she might still pass, if she liked, even to
+windward of him, unless she also chose to hug the wind as he had done.
+On seeing this, the spirit of the British sailor was roused within him.
+
+"Oh, hang it," he muttered.  "I'm not going to be altering my course for
+fear of a rascally Italian piccaroon, if such that fellow should be.  If
+he chooses to come near us, he must take the consequences.  We'll show
+him that we've got some bulldogs on board who can bark pretty well if
+they like.  But I forgot the young lady, and the little Smaitch girl
+with her.  It won't do to let them run any risk of being hurt, should
+the villains begin by firing into us before they speak, as is the
+fashion of the cowards.  I must manage to get them down below without
+frightening them."
+
+Having arrived at the conclusion of these cogitations, Bowse approached
+to where the colonel and his niece were sitting; the young lady employed
+in gazing on the sea, while he was looking with somewhat an inquiring
+eye at the preparations carrying on under the mate's superintendence on
+deck.
+
+"Don't you think the young lady had better go below, out of the way of
+the damp, sir," began Bowse, puzzled what excuse to make.
+
+"Damp! surely there's none to hurt me," said Ada, looking up somewhat
+surprised.  "It is so refreshing."
+
+"No, miss, the cold--the night air may do you harm," rejoined Bowse.
+
+"I have no fear of either," answered Ada.  "It's quite warm, and I do
+not even require a cloak."
+
+The master was sadly perplexed, and the colonel would not come to his
+aid; at last he bethought him of a better reason, which must succeed.
+
+"Yes, miss; but you see it's coming on night, and it's a rule that all
+ladies should go below at night," he said, in a grave tone.
+
+This made Ada fairly laugh outright.
+
+"Oh! but I intend to break through the rule, I can assure you.  The
+evening, when the moon is playing on the water, is the most delightful
+time of the twenty-four hours; and you will not persuade me to forego
+its pleasures."
+
+The colonel at length came to his rescue.
+
+"What is it makes you so anxious for my niece to go below, Mr Bowse?"
+he asked.  "If you have any particular reason, pray mention it, and I am
+sure she will be most ready to obey your wishes."
+
+"Why, sir," said Bowse, drawing the colonel, who had risen, a little
+forward, and whispering so as not, he thought, to be heard by Ada; "you
+see, sir, I don't quite like the look of that craft we are nearing--some
+murderous work has been done lately in these seas; and I was told, just
+before we sailed, to be cautious of her--that's all."
+
+"It was for that reason you were loading your guns, and getting up your
+arms?" exclaimed the colonel, in a less cautious voice than that in
+which the kind master had spoken.  "Very right and proper.  I'm glad to
+see precautions taken.  We'll fight the rascals with pleasure."
+
+Ada overheard the words, and coming up, placed her arm on her uncle's.
+
+"What is the matter?--Is there any danger?" she exclaimed, in a pleading
+tone.  "If there is--oh! let me share it with you.  Do not send me down
+into the cabin."  She trembled, but it was more with excitement than
+fear.
+
+"Oh! nonsense, girl--suppose there was any danger, what object could
+there be in your staying on deck?" answered the colonel.  "You couldn't
+save me from being hurt, missie, and I don't think you would manage to
+hurt any of the enemy, if there should prove to be one in the case,
+after all, which is in no way certain yet."
+
+While the colonel was speaking, Bowse again looked at the speronara.  He
+now, to a certainty, ascertained that she had the dark mark in her
+foresail, and that she was full of men.  This at once decided him in
+urging Miss Garden to go below, and on her still resisting, the colonel
+gave indubitable signs of anger.
+
+"Come, come, missie, no more nonsense.  Go below you must, without
+further delay, and take your little nigger with you."
+
+Ada pleaded for a few minutes more to see what was likely to happen, but
+in vain, and was reluctantly compelled, in company with her maid, to go
+into her cabin, there to await the result of the meeting between the two
+vessels.  Ada did as every right-minded girl, under the circumstances,
+would do--she knelt in prayer--not through abject fear for her own
+safety, did she pray, for of herself she thought not; but she prayed
+that her uncle, and the brave men with him on deck, might be shielded
+from danger--a danger which it was very natural that from what she had
+heard she should considerably exaggerate.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHT.
+
+If, as is asserted, the pleasures of life consist rather in the
+anticipation than in the fruition, or perhaps we may say, in the means
+taken to enjoy them, rather than in the objects when obtained; so, most
+assuredly, is the anticipation of evil worse than the evil itself; and
+misfortunes, which appear great and terrible when looked at timidly from
+a distance, diminish, if they do not altogether disappear, when grappled
+with manfully.
+
+In fact, as somebody or other observed, once upon a time, that whenever
+he wrote a philosophical, a beautiful, or a noble sentiment, that
+fellow, Shakspeare, was sure to have been before him; I might more
+briefly express what I wanted to say, by quoting our great poet--
+
+"Cowards die many times before their death."
+
+Now, as neither Bowse, nor his officers or men, were characters of that
+description, but, on the contrary, as brave fellows as ever looked
+danger in the face without flinching, they, on their own accounts, cared
+very little whether the craft in sight was a pirate or an honest trader.
+But it was now very evident that the speronara had an object in
+steering, as she was clearly doing, for the brig, and as that object
+could scarcely be otherwise than hostile, there was a possibility of
+their being attacked; and with one of those unpremeditated cheers which
+British seamen cannot refrain from giving at the thoughts of a skirmish,
+every man hastened to buckle a cutlass to his side.  Powder and shot
+were got up, and the small arms and boarding-pikes were placed by the
+sides of the guns, ready at hand, to be seized in a moment.  The spirit
+of the veteran soldier was instantly aroused in the bosom of Colonel
+Gauntlett.  As he sniffed the air of battle, the querulous, ill-tempered
+old gentleman was changed into the cool and gallant officer.  As soon as
+Mitchell understood what was likely to happen, he was seen to dive into
+the cabin, from whence he soon returned, when going up to his master, he
+stood before him anticipating his orders.
+
+"Mitchell, my sword and pistols, and bring me some ammunition, too, mark
+me."
+
+The servant's hand rose to his cap, and turning round, he again
+descended to the cabin, reappearing in less than half a minute with the
+weapons.  The colonel buckled on his sword with far greater satisfaction
+than a dandy tries on a new coat, and after carefully loading and
+priming his pistols, which were of exquisite workmanship, he placed
+them, with a look of satisfaction, in his belt.  Not a word, however,
+did he say while thus employed.  The first observation was to his
+servant.
+
+"Mitchell," he said, "if that rascally felucca attempts to board us, you
+are to act as my reserve, remember.  We shall have to charge on to her
+deck, or her people will charge on to ours, and you are to keep close
+behind me, and support me if I require you."
+
+"Yes, your honour," answered Mitchell, in imitation of his master
+fastening a cutlass round his waist.  "Is it them chaps in the
+night-caps on board the little boat out there we've to fight?"
+
+"It is, Mitchell, the people in that felucca now approaching us," said
+the colonel.
+
+"Och, then, by the powers, we'll blow them to blazes with these little
+darlins alone;" and thereon he pulled forth from his coat-tail pockets a
+pair of huge horse-pistols, of antique date and prodigious bore, which
+would almost require a rest from which to fire them.
+
+The sun had set, and the short twilight of that southern latitude was
+fast disappearing, yet sufficient remained to show the outline of the
+speronara as the two vessels drew near to each other, though more
+distant objects had long since been shrouded from sight.  Her tapering
+lateen sails now, as seen in one, appeared like the summit of a lofty
+pyramid of dark hue, surrounded by the waves.  Then, as they approached
+still nearer, and she was almost abeam, the crew were seen standing up,
+and watching them with eagerness.  Instead, however, of attempting to
+pass ahead of the brig, as she came near, she kept away so as pass close
+under her quarter.  Now came the anxious time.  If she was about to
+board, she would be alongside in another instant.  Bowse, however, felt
+that whatever might be his suspicions of her honesty, without some more
+presumptive evidence of evil intentions, it would not do for him to
+commence hostilities; he therefore, taking his speaking-trumpet in his
+hand, went aft, and leaned ever the quarter-rail.
+
+The speronara came rapidly on, and was close to.
+
+"I have one message for you," exclaimed a voice from the deck of the
+stranger, in Italian accents--"send boat here."
+
+"I'll see you damned first," exclaimed Bowse.  "I've no boat to send--
+send yours," he shouted through his speaking-trumpet.
+
+"Heave to, there--I send boat," was shouted in return from the
+speronara; and she was immediately seen to hug the wind, her helm was
+put down, and about she came on the other tack, the same on which the
+_Zodiac_ was sailing, placing herself thus on their weather quarter.
+
+"Keep her away," shouted Bowse to the man at the helm, thinking that the
+speronara was about to board him; but immediately he saw he was
+mistaken, for instead of her fore-sheet being eased off, it was kept to
+windward, and, as she lay hove-to, he observed preparations to launch a
+boat into the water.  "I suppose, sir, we may let these fellows come on
+board?" he said, addressing the colonel, who was by his side; "they can
+do us no harm, and they may possibly have a message."
+
+"As you think fit, Captain Bowse," returned the colonel, who was so
+pleased with the master's coolness and bearing, that he no longer
+refused to give him the usual title,--"I've no objection.  They can't
+eat us; and if they meditate running alongside, they will see we are
+prepared for them."
+
+"Put the helm down, my lad, round in the weather after-braces, and lay
+the main-yard square--brace up the head yards--rouse in the main sheet--
+ease off the head sheets."
+
+These orders being executed, and the brig brought to the wind, she was
+hove to, with her head in the same direction as that of the speronara.
+That vessel could just be seen to windward, looking dark against the
+western sky, and far larger than she really was, slowly forging ahead,
+while a small boat could just be discerned traversing the intervening
+space.
+
+"Well, as we are to have no fighting, I suppose, I will just go and
+relieve the anxiety of my little girl," said the colonel, whose good
+humour was now in the ascendant.
+
+No sooner did his niece see him than she flew into his arms, and kissed
+his cheek affectionately--an example Marianna, in the exuberance of her
+joy at finding there was to be no fighting, was nearly imitating.
+
+"Oh, dear uncle, I am so glad that there is no danger to be encountered.
+You cannot tell how anxious I have been."
+
+"Well, missie, since you don't like the cabin you shall come on deck and
+see what next takes place; we are going to have some visitors, it
+appears."  Saying this, he gallantly placed a shawl on her shoulders,
+and gave his hand to lead her on deck.
+
+While the boat of the speronara was approaching, three or four of the
+_Zodiac's_ crew were collected by the foremost gun, watching her
+progress with no little interest.  Two of them were regular salts of the
+old school, who still delighted in ear-rings and pigtails, though, in
+compliment to the degenerate taste of the times, they wore the latter
+ornaments much smaller than they had done in their younger days.  They
+were prime seamen, and fellows who were ready to go down with their
+colours flying rather than strike to an enemy.
+
+"You have heard tell on the _Flying Dutchman_, of course, Bill," said
+Jem Marline, casting a look to windward at the speronara, and hitching
+up his trousers, while he squirted a stream of tobacco-juice through the
+port.
+
+"On course," answered Bill Rullock, "I haven't been to sea near thirty
+years without, messmate."
+
+"Did you ever cast eyes on the chap, though?" asked Jem.
+
+"Can't say as how I have," answered Bill.  "But there's many they say
+who has, and few who ever lived to tell of it.  But what was you
+thinking on, Jem?"
+
+"Why you see, Bill," replied his chum, "I don't altogether like the
+circumbendibus ways of that ere chap to windward.  You see, first in
+Malta harbour, we falls in with him or one like him, for I don't say,
+mind you, that that ere craft is the same which nearly ran foul on us
+yesterday; then out he goes right ahead of us, and then just as it's got
+dark, down he comes again, and wants to send a boat aboard us.  Now you
+see as how that's the thing I don't in no manner of ways approve on.  If
+I was our skipper, I would send a round shot right into the boat, sooner
+than any of his people should step on this deck.  That's just the trick
+the cursed Dutchman's up to."
+
+"No manner o' doubt about it," said Bill gravely; "but you know, Jem,
+they say the Dutchman's cruising ground is off the Cape, in a
+full-rigged ship, and I never heard on his coming into these parts."
+
+"True as gospel, old shipmate, but how should we know that he hasn't got
+tired of the Cape, and taken a trip up here?" argued Jem.  "And as to
+the matter of the rig, he may shift his craft according to the sea he's
+in.  Besides, you know as how if there's one _Flying Dutchman_, there
+may be two, and this fellow may have come to trouble us here, up the
+straits.  Depend on't, Bill, the less company one keeps with them sort
+of gentry the better."
+
+"Very true, Jem, but suppose a chap out of that boat then does come on
+board, what's to happen think ye?" asked Bill, in a tone which showed
+that he in no way doubted his messmate's account.
+
+"Why I can't say exactly, because as how I never seed what he does; but
+from what I've heard, I believe he tries to slip a letter like into the
+skipper's or some 'un's hand who's green enough to take it; and then the
+chap, who's no better nor Davy Jones himself, gives a loud laugh, and
+down goes the ship to the bottom, or else a hurricane is sure to get up
+and drive her ashore.  But here comes that cursed felucca's boat.  I
+wish we might just let fly at her; it would save mischief, I'll be
+sworn."
+
+"Bear a hand there with a rope for the boat coming alongside," sung out
+the captain in a loud voice, which sounded as ominous of evil to the
+ears of the superstitious crew.  "Bring a lantern here to the gangway,"
+he added.  Bowse, with his first mate and Colonel Gauntlett, stood near
+the gangway, which was lighted up with a lantern to receive the
+strangers, as a small boat containing in all only four persons, came
+round under the brig's stern.  They pulled only two oars, and two people
+were seated in the stern sheet.  "Keep an eye to windward there,
+Larkins, on that felucca," said the first mate to the second, as he went
+to his captain's summons.  "I don't altogether think her cut honest."
+
+"A mighty fuss about a very small affair, I suspect," muttered the
+colonel, as a figure was seen to ascend from the boat up the side of the
+brig.
+
+The stranger was dressed in the Phrygian cap, and simple garb of a
+Sicilian mariner.  His appearance, as far as it could be judged of by
+the dim light of the lantern, was anything but prepossessing.  A
+profusion of long, straggling, grizzly locks, once probably of raven
+hue, which evidently had not felt the barber's scissors for many a year,
+concealed the greater part of his face which was still further hidden by
+a patch over one eye, and a handkerchief bound round his head, while his
+mouth was surrounded by an enormous pair of moustachios, and a beard of
+similar character, so that little more than the tip of a red nose, and a
+rolling fierce eye was visible.  As he reached the deck, this handsome
+personage bowed to the group before him, without speaking, while he
+glanced his eye round at the crew, who still wore their cutlasses, and
+at the other weapons which were placed ready for use.
+
+Behind the group I have described, stood several of the crew, among whom
+were Jem Marline, and his chum Bill Bullock, and if the stranger had
+been able to read the expression of their countenances, he would
+certainly have been a bold man, had he not felt some apprehension; for
+they spoke almost as plainly as words could do, that had they the power,
+they would, without ceremony, heave him into the sea.  There were fear,
+suspicion, and dislike, strangely blended with the usual bold
+recklessness which had given a character to their features a sudden
+emotion could not obliterate.  Fortunately, however, the light of the
+lantern fell in such a way as to throw them, where they stood, into
+shade.
+
+"What is it you want with us, signor?" said Bowse, in his usual blunt
+tone, seeing that the other did not speak.
+
+"To carry us all to Davy Jones, if we don't look sharp," muttered Jem
+Marline to his messmate.  "The beggar will be handing a letter directly,
+and then stand by for squall."
+
+The stranger shook his head, as if not comprehending what was said.
+
+"That's it," whispered Jem, in a tone of terror.  "He don't speak.  He
+never does."
+
+Bowse repeated the question, in the _lingua Franca_ of those seas.
+
+The stranger shook his head.
+
+"He does not understand our lingo," observed Bowse.  "Here, Timmins, you
+speak a little Italian--just ask this gentleman what he wants aboard
+here."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," said the mate coming forward, and asking the question in
+execrable Italian.
+
+Again the stranger shook his head, as if not comprehending the question,
+and finding that not much progress was likely to be made at this rate,
+he turned round, and leaning through the gangway, beckoned his companion
+to come on deck.  As he drew back, another person appeared, dressed
+precisely in the same manner; but evidently very much younger.  A long
+moustache shaded his mouth, and wild elf-locks concealed the greater
+portion of his face, and from a patch down one side of his cheek, he
+looked as if, like his elder companion, he had been engaged in some
+severe fighting.  The light of the lantern, as he reached the deck,
+seemed particularly to annoy him, and he stood with his eyes cast on the
+deck, shading them with one of his hands, nor could he meet the glance
+of any of those surrounding him.
+
+"What do you wish to explain?" said the second stranger in Italian,
+bowing with a not ungraceful bend, and a touch of his hand to his cap.
+
+"Oh! you can speak, can you?  Well, that's all right," said Timmins.
+"And now, if you please, tell us why it is the felucca there was so
+anxious to speak to us?"
+
+"_Si, signor_," answered the younger stranger, very slowly; and in an
+Italian which was mostly understood, he then explained that the
+speronara, of which his father was master, had, that afternoon, fallen
+in with an Austrian man-of-war brig, which had brought her to, and sent
+a boat on board her.  The officers, he said, informed them that the
+noted Greek pirate Zappa, in his famous brig the _Sea Hawk_, had lately
+been heard of not far from the mouth of the Adriatic, and that he had
+plundered and destroyed several vessels.  The Austrian, he said, had
+given him despatches for the governor of Malta, relative to the subject,
+as also to the Neapolitan Government, with a reward for carrying them,
+and had charged them to inform all vessels they should fall in with of
+what had occurred.
+
+"Then he did not tell you to speak us in particular," said Timmins.
+
+"_Si, signor_, he expressly--oh! no--not you in particular--oh, no,"
+replied the young man.
+
+"Have you nothing further to tell us?" said Timmins.  "Because you see,
+though we are much obliged to you for your information, we are in a
+hurry to be on our course again, and if you should happen to fall in
+with the Signor Zappa and his brig the _Sea Hawk_, just tell him that
+the _Zodiac_ will give him a warm reception if he attempts to play off
+any of his tricks upon her."
+
+"You don't know the pirate," exclaimed the young man vehemently, "he--"
+
+"Do you know him?" said Timmins, fixing his eye upon him.  The man's
+glance quailed before that of the stout sailor.
+
+"Oh no, signor, I don't know him--I have heard of him though."
+
+"Oh! is that it?" said the mate, interpreting what he heard to the
+captain.
+
+"Well, just ask him and his father if they will come down below, and
+take a glass of something before they shove off," said Bowse.
+
+A few words were exchanged between the two strangers in a low tone, and
+there appeared to be some hesitation on the part of the elder; but, at
+last, they consented, and followed the master into an outer cabin, which
+he had retained as his own, and where he and his mate messed.  A door
+from it opened into the cabins engaged by the colonel, who, when he saw
+the strangers, retired also with his niece into their cabin.
+
+As the door between the two stood open, all that took place in one could
+be heard in the other.
+
+"Let the Italians come in here, Mr Bowse," said the colonel, from the
+inner cabin.  "I will give them a glass of sherry which they will like
+better than rum and water, and it will do them more good than their own
+thin wash."
+
+When the strangers, who, directed by the signs made by the master, found
+themselves in the presence of a lady, they stood somewhat abashed, it
+seemed, and bowed respectfully as they quaffed off the wine offered to
+them.  The bright light which was shed from a lamp hanging from the deck
+seemed also much to annoy their eyes, long accustomed to darkness, and
+they kept their faces shaded by their hands during the short time they
+were in the cabin, so that little or nothing of their feature? could be
+seen.
+
+For an instant, however, the eyes of the youngest fell on Ada, and, at
+that moment, there gleamed in them a peculiar expression, which she
+could not help remarking; but what it meant to say, she was at a loss to
+comprehend.  It was certainly a look of intelligence, as if he expected
+to be understood; but there was also blended with it an expression of
+admiration, pity, and regret, which further puzzled her.  At all events,
+she was convinced that, by that look, he intended to convey some
+meaning, which he dared not otherwise explain.
+
+The strangers remained scarcely a minute below, and respectfully wishing
+the occupants of the cabin a good evening, they took their leave.  The
+elder went first, and as the second followed, he appeared to stumble at
+the door.  As he did so, he let a folded paper fall from his hand, and,
+at the same instant, he gave a hurried glance at Ada over his shoulder.
+Before she had time to tell him of his loss, he had sprung up the
+companion-ladder.  The strangers were quickly in their boat, which, with
+rapid strokes, pulled back towards the speronara.
+
+"Up with the helm, my lad," exclaimed the captain, in a hurried tone, to
+the man at the wheel, as soon as the boat left the side, "haul aft the
+head sheets--ease off the main sheet; Mr Timmins, we'll keep her on her
+right course."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," answered the mate--shouting as the brig's head fell off,
+"square away the head yards, my men; come, be sharp about it."
+
+"And what do you think, Timmins, of those fellows' account of the
+Austrian brig and the pirate?  It seems somewhat strange, doesn't it?"
+said Bowse, as he walked the deck with his first officer as soon as they
+had put the ship on her former course.  The speronara still lay hove to
+right astern, her outline every instant becoming more indistinct as the
+brig ran from her.
+
+"Why, sir," replied the mate, in return to his commander's question.  "I
+don't think any good of it, and that's a fact; but if you ask if I
+believe it, I don't do that neither.  These Italians are much given to
+lying at best, as far as my experience goes; and I believe we have just
+heard a pretty round lie, though I don't say there was no truth
+altogether in it.  To my mind, if there is such a chap as that Zap--what
+do they call him, the pirate--it is much more likely that he is on board
+that felucca, or perhaps he was one of the fellows who came on board us,
+than that an Austrian man-of-war brig should have sent her cruising
+about to give notice of him to English merchantmen."
+
+"Well, Timmins, that's my view of the case," replied Bowse; "I think the
+Austrian brig would have stood on to Malta herself, seeing she must have
+been almost in sight of it, instead of sending a craft of that sort with
+a message.  Besides, what business had the speronara there at all?"
+
+"There's something very suspicious about it, at all events," returned
+the mate.  "Now, though I don't often listen to what the men say,
+Captain Bowse, and they generally get hold of the wrong end of a thing,
+yet they have often an inkling of what's right and wrong.  Well, sir,
+they've already got all sorts of stories aboard here, about the _Flying
+Dutchman_ and such-like stuff, and they don't at all like the look of
+things.  When you were below with the strangers, they talked of throwing
+them crop and heels overboard and letting them swim to their boats, and
+I believe if you hadn't come up with them on deck yourself, they would
+not have let me prevent them."
+
+"I believe the people are right, Timmins, in thinking that the two
+fellows who stood on our deck lately are knaves, but it wouldn't have
+done to heave them overboard," said the master.  "However, they are not
+likely to do us any harm if we keep a bright look-out, and should any
+rascally pirate attack us, I'm sure all on board here will stand to
+their guns like men."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINE.
+
+One of the most valuable qualities which a person can possess, is
+presence of mind.  Our safety and our life, and the safety and the lives
+of others, frequently depend on it.  Some people are endued with it
+naturally--they never act without thought, and they in a moment perceive
+what is best to be said or done.  Others act from impulse, without
+consideration, and though they may now and then do what is right by
+chance, they are more likely to do what is wrong; like the Irish seaman,
+who, when ordered to cut a rope to which he was hanging, cut above his
+head instead of below his feet, and came down by the run.  I believe
+that it is very possible to attain a presence of mind which one does not
+naturally possess, by constant practice and attention, though I suspect
+the task would be found very difficult.
+
+When Ada saw the paper drop from the hand of the young Italian mariner,
+her first impulse was to call out to him in order to restore it, but the
+look he gave as he left the cabin, convinced her that he had done so
+purposely, and feeling that if so, it was certainly of importance, as
+she did possess the quality of which I was speaking, she sprang forward
+to secure it.  The paper she saw, as she returned to her seat, was the
+blank leaf of a book, torn hastily out, and folded up in the form of a
+note; but on opening it there appeared to be nothing written on it.
+
+"Why, what is that you have got there, Ada?" said Colonel Gauntlett.
+
+"Oh, I fancied that I had discovered an important document, and, lo and
+behold, it turns out to be merely a blank paper," returned the young
+lady laughing.  "One cannot help conjuring up some romantic incident in
+these lovely seas, and forgetting that in these matter-of-fact days
+nothing of the sort is likely to occur; but I believe after all there
+are some pencil marks on the paper."  She held it up closer to the
+light, and as she did so, her countenance grew graver.  There were a few
+lines written in pencil, but so faint that it was not surprising she
+should, at first, not have remarked them.  They were in Italian, and in
+the peculiar handwriting of the people of that nation.
+
+"Trust not to appearances," they said.  "Avoid the polacca brig.  The
+story told you is false."  At the bottom were the words, "An unwilling
+actor," as if intended for a signature.  There was nothing more to show
+by whom they were written, though there could be but little doubt that
+they were so by the young mariner, or by somebody who had employed him.
+Ada translated them to her uncle, who was at a loss to comprehend their
+meaning, further than that they contradicted the story they had just
+heard from the lips of the very man who dropped the paper.  He thought
+over them for some time, and then summoned Mitchell, whom he directed to
+request the captain's presence.
+
+Ada was again called to translate them, when the captain appeared.
+
+"And what do you think of them?" the colonel asked him.
+
+"Why, sir, that they serve to confirm my suspicions, and those of my
+mate, that the felucca is not honest, and that there is a good deal of
+mystification going on somewhere or other."
+
+"Then you don't believe the story of the Austrian brig having sent the
+felucca to us?" asked the colonel.
+
+"Not a bit of it, sir; and my firm opinion is, that if the rascals had
+found us unprepared, she would have been alongside us before now.  She
+had more people on board her than when she left Malta harbour this
+morning, though where they came from I can't say; and I'm positive as to
+the craft, though the young man denied having been there for many a day.
+I can't make it out."
+
+"But what does this paper mean about the polacca brig, think you?" asked
+the colonel.
+
+Bowse thought for some time.
+
+"I have it, sir!" he at length exclaimed, clapping his hand to his head.
+"That's the brig those fellows wanted to make us suppose an Austrian
+man-of-war.  If they had taken less trouble we might have been taken
+in."
+
+"And what do you intend to do, Captain Bowse?  Remember I am under your
+orders, in the way of fighting on board here.  If you ever come on shore
+when there's anything doing, I will show you how we manage things
+there."
+
+The colonel spoke in a good-natured lively tone, as he always did the
+moment there appeared a prospect of fighting.
+
+"Keep our guns loaded, and trust to Providence, sir," replied the
+captain.
+
+"Please, sir, Mr Timmins begs you will just step on deck for a moment,"
+said the steward, putting his head in at the door, and looking at the
+master.
+
+Bowse jumped up and hurried on deck, for he knew the mate would not have
+sent for him except on a matter of importance.
+
+"Here, Sims, what's the matter now?" said the colonel, calling the
+steward from the pantry; "any more visitors?"
+
+"O Lord, no, sir, I hope not," answered Sims, coming forward and showing
+by the pallor of his countenance, and his trembling hand, that whatever
+the matter was it had alarmed him.
+
+"What is the matter, then?" exclaimed the colonel.  "Out with it."
+
+"Why, sir, they say on deck, that the _Flying Dutchman_ is following us,
+and that we shall be sure to drive ashore or go to the bottom," answered
+the steward, almost crying with alarm.
+
+"Fiddle-de-dee, with the _Flying Dutchman_.  What arrant fools the men
+must be to think of such nonsense," exclaimed the colonel, in a
+contemptuous tone.  "Come, Ada, let us go on deck before you return to
+your cabin, and we will have a look at the phantom."
+
+Bowse found his mate standing on the poop, looking intently over the
+weather quarter.  He was so absorbed in what he saw, that he was not
+aware of his commander's presence till the latter touched his arm.
+
+"I thought it was better to send for you, Captain Bowse, for as I'm a
+living man there is that cursed felucca, instead of going to Malta,
+following at our heels, and coming up with us hand over hand."
+
+As the mate spoke, he pointed in the direction towards which he had been
+looking.  Bowse, having just left the bright light of the cabin, could
+not at first discern anything; but gradually he perceived the dark
+shadowy outline of the speronara's sails brought into one, and like a
+phantom gliding over the waves.  There could be no manner of doubt that
+it was she, but the question in his mind was how to treat her.  Though
+he might be almost certain that her intentions were evil, he could not
+fire into her, till there was no doubt of the matter, and she might be
+alongside, when the advantage he possessed in having heavy guns, would
+be much diminished, if not altogether lost.  He might, possibly, by
+making more sail, get away from the speronara; but that he doubted, and
+the brig was already under as much canvas, as on ordinary occasions, it
+was considered prudent to carry at night.  He remembered that he was not
+on board a man-of-war, when sail could be shortened, without calling the
+watch below.  Yet sail must be made, as it would never do to have that
+little speronara buzzing about them all night without being allowed to
+punish her, or trying to get away from her.
+
+"We must see if we can't walk away from that fellow, Mr Timmins.  Turn
+the hands up," he at length exclaimed, after taking a turn on the poop.
+"Set the royals.  Get the fore topmast, and lower studding-sails on
+her."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," replied the mate, going somewhat slowly to obey the
+order.  "Little good I'm afraid it will do us, though."
+
+The crew, though expecting to be roused up, for the watch on deck had
+let those below know of the reappearance of the suspicious stranger,
+went about their duty without their usual alacrity.
+
+"One might just as well try to run clear of a hurricane as to beat that
+chap out there either on wind or off it," muttered Jem Marlin, as he
+went aloft to rig out the studding-sail booms.  "All the canvas in store
+in Portsmouth Dockyard wouldn't carry us away from him, if he wanted to
+catch us."
+
+The additional sail, however, was set, and as the wind had fallen light,
+it was only what was required to urge her at her previous speed through
+the water.  While sail was being made the master was joined on the poop
+by his passengers.
+
+"Well," said the colonel, laughing.  "I hear we have the honour of the
+company of the _Flying Dutchman_ again."
+
+"Dutchman or not, sir," replied the master, "that little speronara has
+taken it into her head to dodge us; and, shame on the brig, which ought
+to do better, she seems likely to come up with us."
+
+"Well let her--we are a match for her, I should think; and my little
+girl here seems rather anxious for a brush.  She puts to shame that
+steward of yours, who came skulking into the cabin just now as white as
+a sheet, declaring we were going to be boarded by ghosts or hobgoblins
+of some sort."
+
+"You must humour seamen, or you can never manage them, sir," replied the
+master.  "They as firmly believe in the _Flying Dutchman_ as they do in
+the Gospel; and you can't persuade them that he is not to be met with.
+It would never do for me to go and tell them that they are cowards and
+credulous fools; and I well know that the same men would face three
+times their number with cutlasses in their hands."
+
+"And I am sure, uncle, any one might be excused for mistaking that dark
+object astern of us for a phantom wandering over the face of the deep,"
+said Ada.  "Even now, as I look at it, I can scarcely persuade myself
+that it is the light, graceful speronara we saw during daylight; and am
+far more inclined to believe it a being from another world--the ghost of
+one of the old sea-kings one reads of--or, perhaps, a malign spirit
+stalking over the deep in search of prey.
+
+"Well, miss, the same sort of idea occurs to the mind of the uneducated
+seaman as he keeps his silent watch at night on the mast-head or
+forecastle; and when he sees through the darkness tall ships slowly
+gliding noiselessly over the waters, and when no sign or signal is
+exchanged, there is nothing to show him to the contrary.  I don't mean
+to say that there are many seamen that would mistake a ship for a ghost,
+because they would not be worth their salt if they did; but a few may
+have done so, and have told stories about them which have found plenty
+of people to believe them, and tell them again."
+
+"That's the way all the wonderful nonsense one hears spoken of has got
+circulated," said the colonel.  "But as I do not see much to interest us
+in looking at that vessel astern--and there is nothing else visible--I
+shall go to bed; and you, Miss Ada, must go to your cabin, so take
+Marianna off with you."
+
+Ada begged to remain a little longer; and, for a short time more, she
+was allowed to enjoy the fresh air on deck.  The night was very fine.
+The sky was perfectly clear, and the stars shone brightly forth--but
+there was no moon; and, consequently, her range of vision was much
+circumscribed.  The sea was covered with light waves, which, as they
+rose and fell, scarcely had any effect in giving motion to the vessel.
+The hue of the ocean was, in some places, almost of an inky blackness;
+in others it was lighted up with phosphorescent flashes, which, seen
+amid the surrounding darkness, seemed as brilliant as if composed of
+real fire--their reflection being caught by the light foam which curled
+on the summits of the dancing waves--while, on either side of the
+vessel, a mass of scintillating sparks flew off as if her stern were
+ploughing up a vast field with a sub-layer of gold-dust; and astern
+appeared a line of yet brighter lights composed of thousands of whirling
+eddies, which grew smaller and smaller, and less distinct, till lost in
+the distance.  After watching the sea for some time, as Ada looked up at
+the rigging, and at the masts and wide-spread sails above her head, they
+no longer looked as in the day-time, like white wings extended to urge
+on the vessel in her course; but, increased to many times their former
+size, they seemed like a black pyramid to tower upwards to the sky till
+lost in the distance.
+
+Ada was not long permitted to enjoy this, to her, unusual scene, before
+her uncle again summoned her below; and this time she was obliged to
+obey.  He, however, had given strict orders to be called should anything
+occur.
+
+The wind, as the night drew on, grew considerably lighter, and this gave
+a decided advantage to the speronara, which rapidly came up abeam.
+Neither Bowse nor his mates had turned in, and even the crew remained on
+deck, watching the stranger with jealous eyes.  It appeared, as they
+watched her, that she was steering a course a point more to windward
+than they were, for, as she came up, her distance from them was far
+greater than they had expected, and it was soon evident that she had no
+intention of boarding them.  Bowse breathed more freely, and looked at
+the studding-sails.  He knew that all hands were weary as he was
+himself.
+
+"Take in the studding-sails, Timmins, and furl top-gallant sails.  The
+_Zodiac_ can walk along fast enough without them, and we must not have
+the people roused out again, if we can help it."
+
+The order was obeyed with alacrity, and the brig was soon brought under
+the snug canvas she usually carried at night.
+
+"I told ye, Bill, there was no manner nor use setting them studsails nor
+to'gallant sails neither," said Jem Marlin, as, his watch on deck being
+over, he turned into his hammock at midnight.  "Lord bless ye, nothing
+could have made us run away from her if we'd tried ever so much.  But to
+my mind, it's having that young lady aboard kept him off.  Depend on't
+there's nothing like having a beautiful, virtuous young woman on your
+side, to keep Davy Jones and all his devils at long range.  The fact is,
+they're afraid of her, she's so different to theirselves.  While we,
+Bill, you knows, is sarcumstantially too much--"
+
+What Jem might have said further, I know not, for his head touched the
+end of his hammock, and he was fast asleep.
+
+The grey light of the early dawn was just stealing across the sea, and a
+few faint streaks of reddish tinge showed the eastern part of the sky,
+when the master of the _Zodiac_ came on deck.  His ship was still
+proudly holding her course unharmed, amid the waste of waters, and with
+that fresh reviving hour when all the events of the new-born day are yet
+to occur, the indistinct causes of the alarm of the previous night
+appeared to have vanished, and even the superstitious seamen could
+venture to smile at their previous terrors.  The wind had fallen
+considerably, and there was no longer sufficient to crest the tops of
+the sluggish leaden-like waves which had not yet lost the hue thrown
+over them by the mantle of night.  Gradually, however, the eastern sky
+assumed a warmer, and yet a warmer tinge, increasing till an orange glow
+was cast across their surface, the sombre colour gave place to a
+brighter purple, and as the sun bursting from his ocean confines, took
+his rapid course upwards, they caught the intense blue of the sky above
+them, on their changeful bosoms.
+
+The first thing which a sailor does on coming on deck, is to cast his
+eye aloft, to see what sails are set, and how they stand, and then to
+sweep it round the horizon; his next is to go aft to the binnacle, and
+to take a look at the compass.
+
+Bowse quickly satisfied himself that the sails were properly trimmed,
+and that the ship was steering on her right course; but the survey he
+took of the horizon did not so well please him.  There was in the first
+place, some odd-shaped clouds floating along to the south and
+south-east, just above the sea, which he did not like, and rather to the
+northward of east, just on the horizon, were two sails, the appearance
+of which he liked still less.  He looked at them attentively, then he
+rubbed his eyes, and looked at them again; but neither operation
+satisfied him.  He then went to the companion, and taking his spyglass,
+surveyed the two objects for some time.  A landsman would not have
+remarked them; indeed, he would scarcely have perceived the faint,
+irregularly shaped dots they appeared, just suspended, as it were, above
+the horizon; but the well-practised eye of the old sailor could not only
+discover what were their peculiar rigs, but even which way they were
+steering.  He soon determined, to the satisfaction of his own mind, that
+the northern-most of the two, and the nearest, was a lateen-rigged
+craft, standing, close hauled, to the northward, across his course, and
+that the other was a square-rigged vessel, probably a brig, under easy
+sail, standing in the same direction that he was.  Now, although under
+ordinary circumstances, he would not have given the two vessels a second
+thought; yet coupling the events of the previous day, and the mysterious
+warning they had received, he could not help thinking that one was the
+speronara; the other the brig with which she was in communication, and
+which she wished to persuade them was an Austrian man-of-war.  Bowse
+took two or three turns on deck, every now and then casting a glance
+eastward, expressive of no very amiable feelings.
+
+"Oh! confound the rascals," he muttered, stamping his foot on the deck.
+"If it wasn't for that sweet young lady below, who should not have her
+eyes shocked with scenes of blood and fighting, I wish they would both
+of them come on at once, and have it out, if they want to rob us,
+instead of sneaking round, and bothering us in this way.  If I do get
+alongside them, I will give it them; but we shall have something else to
+do before that, I suspect."
+
+He took another turn or so, and then stopped, looking to the northward.
+He had, at first, intended again setting all the sail the ship would
+carry before the wind; but on more critically examining the clouds in
+that quarter, he determined, for the present, to make no change.  The
+clouds, he observed, were increasing in number, and banking up thickly
+together, and the first freshness of the morning had given way to an
+oppressive and heavy air, which seemed to weigh down their spirits.  The
+wind, which had hitherto been so steady, though varying in strength, now
+dropped considerably, and began to veer about, so as to require the
+hands constantly at the braces.  Bowse fully felt the responsibility of
+the command intrusted to him, and that the safety and lives of his crew
+and passengers would depend very much on his forethought, judgment, and
+coolness.  He was glad to be alone, to think over what was best to be
+done under the circumstances; that a gale was brewing, he felt pretty
+sure, and that it would come from the southward and east; but whether it
+would be of long duration, or whether one of those sudden gusts, those
+short-lived tempests, which occur frequently during summer in the
+Mediterranean, he could not determine, though he was inclined to think
+it would be the latter; then, that some vessel, with no good motive, was
+looking out for the brig, he felt almost certain; though his pride would
+not allow him to suppose that any one, knowing the armament of the
+_Zodiac_, would attempt to attack her openly.  At the same time this was
+an additional object of anxiety, and would require caution.
+
+The watch, with bare feet, and trousers tucked up to their knees, with
+buckets in their hands, were employed in washing decks, and as they
+splashed the water along the planks, and up the inner sides of the
+bulwarks, they laughed and jested in very buoyancy of spirits; and
+played off on each other various little practical jokes, which the
+presence of the second mate, who superintended and aided in the
+operation, alone prevented from being of a more boisterous character.
+
+The poop deck, where the captain was walking, had already been washed,
+and the people were now in the waist, and were giving a few more
+vehement splashes before moving further forward, when Colonel Gauntlett,
+in his forage cap, a richly flowered dressing-gown, and Turkish
+slippers, made his appearance at the companion hatch, very nearly
+receiving a copious shower-bath from the contents of a bucket dashed
+across the deck at that moment.
+
+"Hillo, my men," he exclaimed, in no very amiable tone.  "I thought the
+ship was wrecked, with all that splashing and scrubbing.  One would
+suppose that the vessel was as dirty as those Augean stables that fellow
+Hercules had to clean, by all the water you use."
+
+"It's cheaper than pipe-clay, and cleaner, for it's to be had for the
+taking, and don't leave any dust," muttered Jem Marlin, who was the
+offender.
+
+"It may be cheap, but it makes a confounded noise, and we have enough of
+it outside, as it is," answered the colonel, not hearing the reference
+to pipe-clay.  "So I beg in future you won't let quite so much of it
+play round my head in a morning."
+
+This was said, as he was standing with his body half-way down the
+companion ladder.
+
+He then observed the master on the poop.
+
+"Well, Mr Bowse, anything more of our friend, the _Flying Dutchman_?"
+he asked in a jocose tone.
+
+"If you will step up here, I will tell you more about her, sir,"
+answered the master; and, thus summoned, the colonel picked his way over
+the wet deck to where he was standing.  "I think it right, Colonel
+Gauntlett, to tell you, that you may be prepared, that we are going to
+have a blow of it, shortly; and I want you to look at that brig out
+there.  What do you make of her?"
+
+"Bless me, nothing--I can't even see her," said the colonel.  "Do you
+mean to tell me that you can distinguish what that little black mark is
+out there?"
+
+"Yes, Colonel Gauntlett, I am certain that yonder object is either a
+brig or a ship, under her tops'ils, standing to the eastward, and that
+the other, you see, to the north of her, is a felucca or speronara.
+Now, sir, if there is any credit to be placed in the letter we got last
+night, and in the account the two Sicilians who came on board gave us,
+and in the warnings we got at Malta, we are likely to fall in with a
+brig which is no better than she should be, and which is in connection,
+some way or other, with that same speronara.  Now, there is a brig on
+the same course that we are; yet, for some reason or other, in no hurry
+to make a passage: perhaps, she is waiting for us to come up with her.
+Then there floats just such another craft as the speronara, supposing it
+is not she herself: so, if we are to fall in with a pirate, I cannot
+help thinking that brig ahead is the vessel.  That is one thing I have
+to mention to you, sir; and please to look to the south'ard and
+east'ard.  The black bank gathering there shows that we shall have a
+very different time of it to what we had yesterday."
+
+"Well, Mr Bowse, what would you have us do?" exclaimed the colonel,
+with rather a puzzled look.  "Do you wish us to put back?"
+
+"No, Colonel Gauntlett, I have been brought up in a school where it is
+not the custom to run from any danger men can meet with, when there is a
+chance of overcoming it," replied the master, with not a little dignity
+in his tone.  "But I thought it my duty to inform you, sir, of what, in
+my opinion, is likely to occur; and, please Providence, we'll do our
+best to meet and overcome any dangers which may appear."
+
+"I like your spirit, Bowse, and cordially agree with you," exclaimed the
+colonel, taking his hand.  "Those black clouds may, after all, only
+indicate a squall; and, as for the pirate, if one falls foul of us I
+think we snail have no difficulty in handling him."
+
+"I won't deceive you, sir; if you had been as much at sea as I have you
+would know that those clouds foretell a gale; but such a gale as I hope
+the _Zodiac_ will weather without straining a timber; and, for the
+pirate, we must keep our weather eye open, that he does not take us
+unawares.  Perhaps, Providence tends the storm to keep us clear of the
+pirate.  My advice to you, sir, is to warn the young lady and her maid
+of what is going to happen, and to get everything stowed in your cabin.
+I'm just going to turn the hands up to shorten sail."
+
+"I wish I could be of as much use there as I hope to be alongside an
+enemy; but as I cannot, I will go where I can do some good."  Saying
+which, the colonel returned to the cabin.
+
+"All hands on deck to shorten sail," sang out the master; and ere a
+minute had passed, the senior mate and the watch below were on deck.
+
+The fore-clue-garnets were manned, and the foresail was quickly clewed
+up, and the men flying aloft, it was securely furled.  The topsails were
+next lowered on the caps, whence they bulged out like big balloons,
+about to fly away with the masts.
+
+"Man the fore and main tops'il clew-lines and bunt-lines," sung out
+Bowse, laying his hand on the main.  "Away with it, my lads."
+
+The topsails were clewed up, the reef tackles hauled out, and the hands
+aloft lying in, in as short a time almost as it has taken to describe.
+Both sails were close reefed, and again sheeted home.  The fore and aft
+mainsail was then close reefed, the jib hauled down, and fore-topmast
+staysail hoisted; the royal yards were also sent down, and the brig
+then, under her smallest working canvas, was prepared to meet the
+tempest, in whatever way, or from whatever quarter it might come.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TEN.
+
+There is a strong similarity between the aspects of physical nature and
+those exhibited by man, as an individual, and in the aggregate.
+
+Before any outbreak or great commotion, from the disorganised condition
+of the moral body, there are observed signs of discontent, murmurings,
+and complaints, fierce looks and threats--these, at length, disappear,
+and people seem to be seized with a sudden apathy and indifference,
+which is as quickly cast aside, and all is rage, havoc, and confusion.
+So, likewise, before the coming of a storm, clouds are seen gathering in
+the horizon, murmurs and growls are heard, then the wind dies away, and
+a perfect calm, for a short time, succeeds the fury of the tempest, and,
+in both instances, the more perfect the calm, the more is the subsequent
+outbreak to be feared.
+
+The wind had gradually died away, till the sea became smooth as glass,
+and rose and fell in gentle undulations, which made the vessel roll from
+side to side, and caused every timber and bulkhead to groan and creak.
+
+It appeared not to have been absolutely necessary to shorten sail so
+soon; but as there was a dead calm, this was of no consequence, and the
+most prudent seamanship; as it is, at times, difficult to judge the
+period a squall my take to travel up to a ship.
+
+The brig still lay with her head a little to the northward of east, and
+her yards were now braced up on the starboard tack to meet the wind
+which gave signs of coming from the southward and east.  Every
+preparation was made, and all hands were at their stations, ready to
+execute any of their commander's orders which the emergency might
+require, when Ada, wearied of remaining in the hot cabin, came on deck,
+followed by her little maid; and before Bowse, who was looking to the
+southward, perceived them, they had gained the poop.
+
+"This is no place for you, miss, I am sure," he exclaimed, on seeing
+her.  "You do not know what risk you run.  Oh, go below again--go
+below."
+
+"Why, what is the matter, Captain Bowse?" she replied, laughing, and
+looking at the calm sea.  "My uncle told me that we were to have a
+tremendous storm, and I do not feel a breath of wind."
+
+"And so we shall, miss," he exclaimed.  "You have no time to go below
+now without assistance.  Hold on by these cleats, and tell your maid to
+do so too.  Here it comes!"
+
+As he spoke, the mass of clouds which had been collecting to the
+eastward, and gradually approaching, now came driving up bodily across
+the sky at a rapid rate--the dark waters below it, hitherto so smooth
+and calm, presented a sheet of snow-white foam, hissing and bubbling as
+if it were turned up and impelled onward by some gigantic besom.  Ada,
+as she gazed with feelings of mingled terror and admiration, saw it in
+one long line near the brig--it reached her side--the white foam flew
+upwards, curling over them, and the wind, at the same instant, striking
+her canvas, her tall masts seemed to bend to its fury, and then pressed
+downwards, the hull heeled over till the lee bulwarks were nearly
+submerged.
+
+Two strong hands were at the helm, ready to turn it a-weather, should it
+be necessary to scud; but, in an instant, the gallant ship rose again--
+and then, like a courser starting for the race, she shot forward through
+the boiling cauldron, heeling over till her guns were in the water, but
+still bravely carrying her canvas.  Not a rope nor a lanyard had
+started--not a seam in her topsails had given, and away she flew on her
+proper course.  The veteran master stood on the poop watching for any
+change or increase of wind.  The safety of the ship depended on his
+promptitude.  The sea was rapidly rising; and this was soon perceptible
+by her uneasy motion, as she rose and fell to each receding wave, the
+last always appearing of greater height than its predecessors.  Any
+moment it might be necessary either to keep her away, and, furling
+everything, to let her drive before the gale under bare poles, or to put
+her helm down and heave her to, thus to let her lie forging slowly
+a-head, till the gale had abated.  A few minutes only had passed since
+the brig first felt the force of the gale, and the whole sky was now a
+mass of dark clouds, and the sea a sheet of white driving foam--out of
+which lofty waves seemed to lift their angry heads, and to urge each
+other into increased violence.  The wind howled and whistled through the
+rigging; the spars creaked and bent; and the whole hull groaned with the
+exertion as she tore onwards.  Ada, who had, when the ship heeled over,
+held firmly on to the weather bulwarks, gazed at the scene, to her, so
+novel and grand, with intense pleasure, from which fear was soon
+banished; and little Marianna, having followed the example of her
+mistress in securing herself, imitated her also in her courage.  Indeed,
+as yet, except that they were rather wetted by the foam which came on
+board, when the squall first struck the brig, there was no object of
+terror to alarm them.  The moment Bowse could withdraw his attention
+from the care of the ship, he hurried to assist Ada and her attendant,
+and to place them on the seat which surrounded the cabin skylight, where
+she might enjoy the magnificent spectacle of the tumultuous ocean,
+without the fatigue of standing, and having to hold on by the bulwarks.
+A cloak was thrown round her feet, and as she reclined back in the seat,
+she declared she felt like an ocean queen in her barge of state,
+reviewing her watery realms.  The colonel's appearance on deck,
+supported by his man Mitchell, whose usual cadaverous countenance looked
+still more ghastly, drove away the romance in which she was beginning to
+indulge.  He scolded her roundly for venturing on deck without his
+escort, and insisted on her promising never to do so again, on pain of
+being compelled instantly to go below.
+
+The mate had returned to his post.  The brig behaved beautifully; though
+she heeled over to the force of the wind, she rose buoyantly to each
+mountain wave, which reared its crest before her, and though the light
+spray which the short seas so quickly aroused would fly high above her
+bows, and come in showers down on her forecastle, little of it found its
+way aft, and not a sea which struck her came over her bulwarks.  Bowse
+looked delighted and proud at the behaviour of his brig, as he pointed
+out her good qualities to his passengers.
+
+"There's many a craft, which is looked upon as a clipper, won't behave
+as she does, that I'll answer for," he observed.
+
+He was going on with his panegyrics when his voice became silent, and
+his eye riveted ahead.  The atmosphere, which, when the gale first came
+on, had been somewhat thick, had now partially cleared, and revealed to
+him, at the distance of little more than a mile, a large polacca brig
+hove to on the starboard tack.  He instantly summoned his first officer
+to his side, and pointed out the stranger to him.
+
+"What think you of that fellow, Timmins?" he asked.
+
+The mate took a look at the stranger through his glass.
+
+"A fine polacca brig, sir, as one can see with half an eye," he answered
+deliberately; "but more of her I cannot say, as she shows no colours.
+We must keep away a little though, sir, or we shall be right down upon
+her."
+
+"We should--starboard the helm a point my lads," exclaimed the master.
+"Steady, that will take us clear, and we shall be near enough to have a
+look at him.  Ah! there goes some buntin' aloft.  What colours are they,
+Timmins?"
+
+"The Austrian ensign, sir," replied the mate.  "A black eagle on a white
+ground, and there flies a pennant at his mast head."
+
+"That's extraordinary indeed," exclaimed the master.  "Hoist the ensign
+there," he shouted.  "Austrian or devil, we'll show him that we are not
+ashamed of our flag, and will not strike it either in a hurry.  Come
+here, Timmins, we mustn't frighten the young lady by what we say.  You
+know the paper dropped on board here last night; now it's my opinion
+that that's the very brig it speaks about, and the one the felucca's two
+men tried to persuade us was an Austrian man-of-war.  To my eye, she
+looks fifty times more like a Greek than an Austrian, for all that her
+colours say.  Well, what's your opinion that we ought to do?"
+
+"With respect to her being a Greek, I think she is," answered the mate.
+"And if she's a pirate, we ought to do our best to stand clear of her,
+seeing that we were commissioned to carry merchandise, and not to look
+after such gentry; but if she comes after us, and we can't get clear of
+her, that alters the case, sir, and we must stand to our guns and fight
+her."
+
+"I am glad to hear you say so, Timmins," answered the master, laying his
+hand on the mate's arm.
+
+"Turn the hands up, my good fellow, and let them go to quarters."  (The
+people were at their breakfast.) "We will not fire the first shot; but
+if she attacks us, we will give it them as well as we can.  One
+satisfaction is, that they cannot board us while the gale lasts."  While
+the mate flew forward to execute the orders, Bowse approached his
+passengers, and, pointing out the stranger to them, to which they were
+now rapidly drawing near, told them his suspicions as to her character,
+and advised them to go below.
+
+"But do you think he will fire into us?" inquired the colonel.
+
+"He would gain little by so doing, while the gale lasts," replied Bowse,
+"and he might get injured in return, as he probably knows that we have
+guns on board."
+
+"There you see, Ada, there is little chance of any of us being hurt, but
+there is a possibility--so you must go below again."
+
+This the colonel said in a positive tone, and his niece was obliged to
+comply.
+
+"Oh, how I wish Captain Fleetwood was here in the _Ione_," she thought,
+as she quitted the deck.  "No pirate would dare to molest us."
+
+The stranger was hove to, under her fore-topsail, and appeared to be
+making what seamen call very fine weather of it.  The _Zodiac_ came down
+scarcely a cable's length from her quarter, but the stranger gave no
+sign of any intention of accompanying her.  Very few seamen appeared on
+her deck, and two or three officers only, whose uniform, seen through
+the glass, was evidently that of Austria.  One of them, who, from his
+wearing an epaulette on either shoulder, Bowse thought must be the
+captain, leaped up on the taffrail, and waved his hat to them, while
+another, in the _lingua franca_, sung out through a speaking trumpet--
+
+"Heave to, and we will keep your company."
+
+"I'll see you damned first, my fine fellow," answered the master, who
+had been attentively surveying them through his glass.  "I wish I was as
+certain of heaven as I am that the fellow who waved to us is the same
+who came on board when in Malta harbour.  I know his face, spite of his
+changed dress."
+
+"I don't think he's unlike, except that he didn't look so tall quite as
+the Greek you mean," observed the mate.  "However, as they did not fire
+at us, and don't seem inclined to keep company with us either, I suppose
+they are after other and surer game."
+
+The _Zodiac_ had by this time left the stranger far astern, and
+numberless were the surmises of the crew as to what she was and what she
+was about.  All agreed in pronouncing her a Greek-built craft.  She was
+a large vessel, too, and well armed, if all the ports which showed on a
+side had guns to them; and she was, probably, as are most of the Greek
+vessels of that class, very fast.  It is odd that they did not, however,
+regard her with half the suspicion that they did the little speronara,
+which could scarcely have harmed them, by mortal means, if she had
+tried.
+
+The _Zodiac_ had left the polacca brig about eight or ten miles astern,
+and her topsails could just be seen rising and falling above the boiling
+cauldron of waters which intervened, as she remounted the seas or sunk
+into the trough between them.
+
+The ship had also by this time assumed her usual peaceful appearance;
+the shot and powder had been returned below, the guns were run in and
+secured, the small arms had been replaced in their racks, and the
+colonel had withdrawn the charges of his pistols, and sent Mitchell with
+them to his cabin.
+
+"Well, I suppose as soon as this tornado blows over, we shall have a
+tranquil time of it, and hear no more of your Flying Dutchman and bloody
+pirates," he observed to the master, as he held on the weather bulwarks.
+"I did not bargain for all this sort of work, I can tell you, when I
+refused a passage in a king's ship in order that I might avoid the
+society of those young jackanapes of naval officers, and save my little
+girl from being exposed to their interested assiduities."
+
+"Can't say what may happen to us," returned Bowse, who was a great
+stickler for the honour of the navy, and did not at all relish the
+colonel's observations.  "I've done my best to please you, and I'm sure
+the officers of any of his Majesty's ships would have done the same.
+I've belonged myself to the service, and have held the king's warrant,
+and I have had as good opportunities of judging of the character of a
+very large number of officers as any in the same station, and I must
+say, sir, in justice to them, though with all respect to you, Colonel
+Gauntlett, that a less interested and less money-loving set of men than
+they are, are not to be found in any profession."
+
+"Well, well, Mr Bowse," answered the colonel, seeing by the frown on
+the master's good-natured countenance that he was in earnest, "I did not
+want to hear a defence of the navy, but I should like to have your
+opinion as to when there is a probability of our enjoying a little quiet
+again, and whether we are likely to be molested by these reputed pirates
+after all."
+
+"I do not think, by the looks of it, that the gale will last as long as
+I at first supposed," said the master, at once appeased.  "As for the
+matter of the pirates, no man can answer; I'm sure I can't."
+
+"Well, but what do you think, Mr Timmins?" said the colonel, turning to
+the mate.
+
+Now, although the officer would not have ventured to give an opinion in
+opposition to his superior, yet, as Bowse had not expressed one, he felt
+himself at liberty to pronounce his judgment.
+
+"Why, sir--looking at the state of the case on both sides--the long and
+short of it is, in my opinion, that there has been a bit of free-trading
+going on with some of the Liverpool merchantmen, which isn't at all
+unusual; and that those chaps who came about us mistook us for one of
+their friends; and then, when they found their mistake, wanted to bung
+up our eyes with a cock and a bull story about pirates.  That's what I
+think about it.  You see that brig, whether Austrian or not, was looking
+out for some one else."
+
+"Was she, though?" exclaimed the master, with sudden animation.  "I
+think not; for, by Heavens, here she comes."
+
+All those who heard the exclamation turned their eyes over the taffrail.
+
+Just astern was the polacca brig--her head had paid off, and, with a
+reef shaken out of each of her topsails, she was seen heeling over to
+the gale, and tearing away through the foaming waves in chase of them.
+
+The master, whose suspicions as to the honesty of her character had
+never been removed, now no longer hesitated to declare that he believed
+her to be the very pirate of whom he had been warned.  He felt that he
+was now called on to decide what course it would be wisest to pursue.
+To avoid her by outsailing her, he knew to be hopeless--except that, by
+carrying on sail to the very last, he might induce her to do the same,
+till, perhaps, she might carry away her masts or spars, and the victory
+might remain with the stoutest and best-found ship.  His next resource
+was the hope of crippling her with his guns, as she drew near, and thus
+preventing her from pursuing, while he escaped; and if both means
+failed, he trusted that Providence would give the victory to British
+courage and seamanship, should she attempt to engage him alongside.  He
+explained his intentions to his officers and Colonel Gauntlett, who
+fully agreed with him, and, acting on the first plan he proposed trying,
+he immediately ordered a reef to be shaken out of the topsails.  The men
+flew aloft obedient to the order--the reefs were quickly shaken out, and
+the yards again hoisted up.
+
+Bowse watched with anxiety to see how the brig bore the additional
+canvas.  A few minutes' trial convinced him that she might even carry
+more without much risk.  If any difference was perceptible, it was that
+the crests of the seas she met broke in thicker showers of spray over
+her bows; but she did not seem to heel over to it more than before.
+
+The crew, called on deck to make sail, at once divined, by seeing the
+stranger in their wake, the reason of it, and flew with alacrity to
+their duty.  They were all ready to fight, if necessary; they would
+rather have been chasing a vessel which they might hope to make their
+prize; but they were in no way indifferent to the excitement of
+endeavouring to outsail another craft, even though they might have been
+accused of being employed in the inglorious business of running away.
+
+"Bless the little beauty, she goes along nicely through it, don't she,
+old ship," said Jem Marlin to his chum.  "Them outlandish mounseers
+astern there will be clever if they comes up to us."
+
+All hands remained on the deck, for they had not been piped below again.
+
+Bowse, every now and then, gave a scrutinising glance astern at the
+stranger; but it was impossible to determine whether there was any
+difference in their relative distance.
+
+The two brigs were now under the same canvas, for the stranger had not
+shaken out a second reef in the topsails, when the _Zodiac_ shook out
+the first.
+
+The crew stood at their station ready to obey the next order.
+
+"She'll bear the fore-sail on her, Mr Timmins, if we close reef it,"
+said Bowse; "send some hands up and loose it, and hook on reef-burtons
+ready for reefing."
+
+As soon as the sail was let fall it flew out in thundering claps, as if
+it would fly away from the yard, and there was some danger of carrying
+it away or springing it, but steady hands were there, and the clew
+garnets being eased down, the reef-burtons hauled out, the ear-rings
+were soon secured, and the points tied; the lee clew garnet was then
+eased off, and the sheet steadied aft.  The tack was roused down,
+another pull had of the sheet, and the bowline hauled taut, the
+weather-lift and brace being hauled taut, the sail stood like a board.
+
+With this sail she carried too much lee helm, and it was difficult work
+for the helmsman to lift her, so as to let her rise over the seas, which
+now came one after the other in quick succession, rushing up her bows,
+and threatening to curl bodily over her bulwarks.
+
+"Now, my lads, aft here, and shake a reef out of the fore-and-aft
+mainsail."
+
+Led by the mate, the men sprung aft, the points were soon cast off, and
+the reef-pendant eased off.  The throat and peak halyards were manned,
+the main-sheet was slightly eased off, and the sail, thus enlarged, was
+hoisted to the mast.  The instant effect was to make her carry a
+weather-helm, and great care was now required to prevent her flying up
+into the wind, and being taken aback; a most perilous position to be
+placed in under the present circumstances.
+
+To prevent this, the fore-stay-sail was hoisted.  As the master watched
+the effect of all the canvas he had packed on the brig, he saw clearly
+that she would not bear another stitch; indeed, she had already very
+much more set than under any but the most extraordinary circumstances he
+would have ventured to carry.  He, however, felt that he could do more
+with her than could any stranger.  He knew that every timber and plank
+in her was sound, every spar had been well proved, and the canvas was
+all new, and every inch of rigging about her he or his mate had seen
+fitted and turned in.  He knew, indeed, that all was good, and it was
+this feeling, with a right confidence in his own knowledge and judgment,
+which gave him courage on this trying occasion.
+
+Onward the brig tore through the foaming waves, her lee-scuppers
+completely under water.  Now a dark sea would appear right a-head,
+seemingly about to overwhelm her, but buoyantly her bow would rise to
+it, the foam on its summit alone sweeping over her; then another would
+come of less height, and, as if disdaining to surmount it, she would
+cleave her way through it, while her decks were deluged as a punishment
+for her audacity.  Nearly everything on deck had been properly secured,
+and such trifling articles as were not, were soon washed into the
+lee-scuppers or overboard.  The crew, driven from forward, were huddled
+together close to the break of the poop, under shelter of the
+weather-bulwark, while Bowse and the first mate stood at their old post.
+
+"It's as much as she'll carry," said Timmins.
+
+He thought it was a great deal too much, but did not like to say so.
+
+Bowse looked at the stranger before answering.
+
+"I only hope she will try to carry a great deal more," he replied.
+"See, they are beginning to follow our example."
+
+The polacca brig had now not only set her foresail and mainsail, but had
+also shaken another reef out of her topsails.  She thus already had more
+sail on her than the _Zodiac_.
+
+"Now, then," said Bowse, "if we do but hold our own, she will begin to
+think we shall escape her, and they will be shaking another of those
+reefs out."
+
+"If they do, they will just get the drop in the pitcher too much," said
+the mate.
+
+"That's just what I wish they may do," replied the master.  "But, ah!
+hold on for your lives, my lads."
+
+A dark, circling wave appeared directly ahead of the vessel, as if it
+had risen suddenly out of the water.  She rose at it like a bold hunter,
+without hesitation, attempting to take a high fence beyond his powers.
+Its force was too great for her, she stopped, and trembled in every
+timber, then again she tried, and dashing headlong into it, the watery
+hill came thundering down on her decks, tearing away her long boat and
+spare spars, hencoops, caboose, and water casks, and, making a breach
+through the lee-bulwarks, washed them overboard.  Had not the hatches
+been well secured the _Zodiac_, with all in her, might never have risen
+again.  Cries of terror were heard, and many a bold seaman turned pale;
+but none of the crew were injured, and the ship again flew buoyantly
+onward.
+
+"That's what we may call our drop too much," said the mate.  "Don't you
+think we ought to take some of the canvas off her, sir?"
+
+"Timmins, we've long known each other, and you know I'm no coward; but I
+tell you that my conviction is, that there will be no child's play with
+that fellow astern if he comes alongside us.  Heaven only knows who'll
+come off the best if it comes to blows.  He has twice as many guns as we
+have, if not more, and longer pieces, depend on it, and, probably, five
+times as many hands.  These are fearful odds, and I don't think any man
+can say it's cowardly to shrink from them.  I know, too, the sort of
+fellows those are on board yonder craft, and sooner than fall into their
+power, I would run the brig, and all in her, under water.  Till she made
+sail in chase, I had my doubts about her; I now have none.  You see I
+don't risk the loss of our masts without good cause, and now see to
+getting life-lines along the lee-bulwarks, and secure them as you best
+can."
+
+The mate made no answer, except a hurried acquiescence in his chief's
+reasons; and then calling three seamen to him, he worked his way forward
+to the forecastle, to search for the requisite cordage for passing fore
+and aft along the sides of the vessel.
+
+Colonel Gauntlett had gone below to explain the state of affairs to poor
+Ada, and to endeavour to tranquillise her alarms.  Nothing daunted the
+old veteran himself; a soldier of the great duke's school, he was
+accustomed to hardships and vicissitudes of all sorts.  Brave as his
+sword, and delighting in the excitement of danger, his spirits rose in
+proportion to its imminence, and all the sour testiness of his temper
+vanished; a temper which had grown on him since the return of peace
+caused him to sheath his sword, and tempted him to commit the folly, as
+an old bachelor, of leading an idle life.  Married, and with a family,
+he would have had them to interest him; but, as it was, he had only to
+think of his own aches and ills, and, perhaps, past follies; and to
+brood over what he called the neglects he had experienced from his
+ungrateful country.  No man on board, perhaps, was so anxious as he was
+to have a skirmish with the rover, but he was not aware of the dreadful
+odds which would be opposed to him, and of the too probable fate which
+would await all hands, should victory side with the enemy.  His
+arguments had some effect in calming his niece's fears; but not those of
+poor little Marianna, who, pale and weeping, sat at the feet of her
+mistress, imploring her to urge the captain and her uncle to return to
+Malta.
+
+Ada, in her turn, had to act the part of comforter, and she promised her
+uncle that she would constantly remain below till they had escaped from
+the pirate, and the storm was over.  Her uncle had not attempted to
+deceive her, nor did she shut her eyes to the greatness of the
+threatening danger--yet hope rose triumphant in her bosom.  Though the
+storm had, at first, appeared very terrific, she got accustomed by
+degrees to the noise and commotion, and she could not persuade herself
+that a British vessel, manned by so many brave men, would not prove the
+victor against a pirate, of whatever nation she might be.  By the faint
+light which found its way into her cabin, she was able to read; and that
+book was in her hand from which the truest source of comfort can be
+drawn, and which she, in her turn, imparted to her ignorant and
+trembling companion.  Thus, between reading herself and explaining the
+subject to Marianna, and, at times, approaching the footstool of her
+Maker in prayer, Ada passed many hours, which would otherwise have
+become insupportable through anxiety and fear, and thus employed, we
+must leave her, to return on deck.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER ELEVEN.
+
+The longer a sensible man lives (for a fool may live and not learn), the
+more convinced he will become of the importance of laying a firm
+foundation for every undertaking, whether it be a constitution to live
+under, or a house to live in, an education for his children, a coat for
+his back, shoes for his feet, or a ship to convey himself or his
+merchandise from one part of the globe to the other.  He learns that it
+is wisest and cheapest to have all the materials of the best, to employ
+the best workmen, and to pay them the best wages.  It is the fashion,
+nowadays, to get everything at a price, to which is given the name of
+cheap--no matter at what cost or ruin to the consumer as well as the
+producer, for both are equally losers--the one from being badly said,
+the other from getting a bad article.  On every side, one ears the cries
+of cheap government, cheap houses, cheap education, and cheap clothing;
+and the people are always found ready to offer to supply them.  Wiser
+than this generation are seamen.  They know, from experience, that cheap
+clothes and cheap ships do not answer; that both are apt to fail at the
+very moment their services are most required; and a good officer,
+therefore, spares no expense or trouble in seeing that everything is
+good and sound on board his ship, from keelson to truck, below and
+aloft.  Such a man was our friend Captain Bowse.
+
+The spars and rigging of the _Zodiac_ did full justice to those who
+selected the first, and fitted the latter.  Not a spar was sprung--not a
+strand parted with the tremendous strain put on them.  It was almost too
+much for the ship, Bowse himself owned.  It was taking the wear of years
+out of her in a day--as a wild debauch, or any violent exertion, will
+injure the human frame, more than years of ordinary toil.  Though the
+masts stood, the ship, it was very evident, must be strained, from the
+way in which she was driven through the water, and made to buffet with
+the waves.  On rushed the brig.
+
+"That is what I call tearing the marrow out of a body's bones," said
+Bill Bullock.  "Well, bless the old barkie; there's few could stand it
+as she does.  I never seed any one carry on so as our skipper does, this
+blessed day--no, neither now, nor since the time I first went afloat."
+
+"Nor I neither, old ship," answered Jem.  "But for that matter, as the
+parson says, there's a time to stay at anchor, and a time to make sail,
+and go along as if the devil was a driver--only I do wish that that ere
+beggar astern was right ahead now, and that we was a chasin' her, and
+every now and then a slappin' at her with our bow-chasers."
+
+"Right, Jem--my sentiments is the same; but if you comes for to go to
+look into the rights of the case, like a man should do, why you sees as
+how, if she has got twenty guns, which can sink us from where our shot
+can't reach 'em, and we has only got four guns, for the Quakers only has
+to do when you comes to frighten people at a distance, then you see as
+how it's wiser for we to run away, while we has got legs to run with,
+than to try to run when we are on our way to the bottom."
+
+"Jobson!" cried the master, addressing the carpenter, who had just
+spoken, "sound the well, and see if she's made any water."
+
+Jobson performed his duty, and reported two feet of water in the hold.
+
+"She's made that, sir, though, since we began to carry on.  She was as
+dry as a cork yesterday," he observed.
+
+"I did not expect less, though," returned the master.  "She must be
+strong not to let it in faster.  We'll sound again in another half
+hour."
+
+For the first two or three hours of the chase, it was difficult to
+determine whether the stranger gained on them or not: but, by the time
+five had passed away, she had clearly come up very much.  Bowse looked
+at his topmasts and topsail-yards, and then at the lee-scuppers, and
+shook his head.  He was meditating the possibility of shaking out
+another reef.  He wished that he could divine some method to induce the
+stranger to set more sail; but this hope had failed, for as he was
+gaining on them without it, he was not likely to do so.  The master
+watched him anxiously through his glass.  He seemed to stand up well to
+his canvas, and there was but little chance of his carrying anything
+away.  On coming to this conclusion, Bowse began to consider whether it
+would not be more prudent to shorten sail himself, so as to be in better
+condition to meet the enemy when he should come up--a result which he
+feared must, sooner or later, occur.  Even should the weather moderate,
+the polacca brig would probably have a still greater advantage; but then
+again, his principle was to struggle to the last--never to yield to
+death or misfortune, while the faintest gasp remains--never to let hope
+expire--so he determined still to drive the ship through it.  Again the
+well was sounded.  The water had increased another half foot.  The mate
+shook his head.  Two more anxious hours passed away.
+
+"How much has she gained on us now, Timmins?" answered Bowse, who had
+returned from snatching a hasty meal below.
+
+"The best part of half a league at least, sir," answered the mate.  "If
+she comes up at this rate, she'll be within hail before the first watch
+is over to-night.  Now, sir, as the carpenter reports the water
+increasing fast, and to have to keep the men at the pumps, where they
+must go for a spell, will make them unfit to meet the enemy, I venture
+to advise that we take the strain off the ship at once.  It's clearly
+nothing else that makes her leak as she does, and we shall then meet
+that fellow by daylight, which I tell you honestly, Captain Bowse, I for
+one would rather do."
+
+Bowse listened to his mate's opinion with respect, but he doubted much
+whether to act upon it.
+
+"What you say has much reason in it," he answered; "but send the hands
+to the pumps first, and we'll judge how they can keep the water under.
+If, after they've cleared the ship, it gains upon half the watch, we'll
+shorten sail; but if we can easily keep the leaks under, we'll carry on
+to the last."
+
+The clank of the pumps was heard amid the roaring of the gale, and the
+loud dash of the water over the ship, as the crew performed that most
+detested portion of a seaman's duty.  The result was watched for with
+anxiety by the captain, for he saw that on it depended how soon they
+might be brought into action with the pirate.  If he could still manage
+to keep ahead of him he might induce him to give up the chase; or he
+might fall in with a man-of-war, or some armed merchantman, in company
+with whom no pirate would dare to attack them.  It did occur to him,
+that to ease the ship, he might keep her before the wind, and run for
+some port on the Italian coast; but there was a wide extent of sea to be
+crossed before he could reach it, and the pirate being probably just as
+fast off the wind as on it, would still overtake him; and though he
+might, as he trusted to do, beat him off, he would be so much further
+away from his port.
+
+"Well, what does the carpenter report?" he asked, as the mate appeared,
+after the well had been sounded.
+
+"We've gained a foot upon the leaks, sir; but it's hard work to keep
+them under, and if I might advise--"
+
+"Please Heaven, we'll carry on, then, on the ship!" exclaimed the
+master, interrupting him.  "Let half a watch at a time work the pumps.
+Before long the weather may moderate."
+
+The day wore on, and the pursuer and the pursued held their course with
+little variation.  The _Zodiac_ tore her way through the water, and sea
+succeeding sea met her persevering bows, and either yielded her a
+passage or flew in deluges over her decks.  Night came on, and the
+stranger was upward of two leagues astern.  The mate had before
+miscalculated her distance; his anxiety to shorten sail had probably
+somewhat blinded him.  If the scene on board the _Zodiac_ appeared
+terrific during daylight, much more so was it when darkness added its
+own peculiar horrors.  Still not a sheet nor a tack would the brave
+master start, and he resolved, if the gale did not further increase, to
+run through the night without shortening sail.  He himself set an
+example of hardihood and resolution to his crew, for scarcely a moment
+did he quit his post during the day, or the dreary hours of the first
+watch.  As the short twilight disappeared, the stranger grew less and
+less distinct, till her shadowy outline could alone be traced, and even
+that by degrees vanished from the view of all but the most keen-sighted,
+till at last she could nowhere be discerned.  An anxious look out was
+kept for her; for though shrouded by the obscurity from their sight,
+every one on deck felt that she was where she had last been seen, if not
+nearer; and some even fancied they could see her looming, surrounded by
+a halo of unnatural light, through the darkness.
+
+It was in the first hour of the morning-watch, and neither Bowse nor his
+mate, though they swept the sea to the westward with their
+night-glasses, could anywhere distinguish her.
+
+"We have done better than we could have hoped for," observed the master.
+"It will soon be day, and we then need not fear her."
+
+"It will be more than three good hours yet before we have anything like
+daylight," returned the mate; "and that cursed craft may be alongside us
+before then."
+
+"Well, we are prepared for her," returned the master.
+
+"I hope so," exclaimed the mate; "for, by Heaven, Captain Bowse, there
+she is, well on our weather quarter."
+
+The mate spoke truly.  There evidently was a brig, though dimly visible,
+hovering, as it were, like a dark spirit, in the quarter he indicated.
+
+The crew soon discovered her also, and if any of them had before felt
+inclined to seek rest below, they did so no longer.
+
+Another hour passed away; but the stranger had not altered her position.
+There she hung, like a dark shadow, indistinctly visible, yet causing
+no doubt of something ominous of evil being there, as some bird of prey
+hovering about, ready to pounce down any moment, and destroy them.
+
+The morning light brought the stranger clearly in view, at about the
+same distance; and at the same period of time the ship, righting
+suddenly from the downward pressure, to which she had been so long
+exposed, showed that there was a lull of the wind.  It was but
+momentarily, for again she heeled over as before.  Again, however, she
+righted, and this time, her lee scuppers remained for longer free of the
+water.
+
+Bowse looked to windward: he was about to order a couple of reefs more
+to be shaken out of the topsails, when another violent blast almost laid
+her on her beam ends.
+
+The hardy crew, wearied with the unremitting exertions of the night,
+looked at each other in despair, as the sea literally washed up the
+decks to leeward.  A loud crash was heard, and the fore-topmast went
+over the side, carrying away the jibboom.  It was the last expiring
+effort of the gale.
+
+The stranger now shook out all the reefs in her topsails and courses;
+but it was soon evident that there was no occasion for her so doing, as
+she continued to maintain the exact position she had held when first
+seen in the morning.
+
+The forenoon watch had just been set, when Colonel Gauntlett came on
+deck.
+
+"A nice night we've had of it, captain," he observed in a tone which
+showed but little anxiety on his part.  "It was only towards the morning
+the infernal hubbub would allow me a moment's sleep.  But, hillo! what
+have you been doing with your foremast?  Why, it's shorn of half its
+just proportions.  And a pretty work seems to have been going forward on
+your deck.  Why, I should have thought you had been in action already."
+
+"With the winds and waves we have, sir," answered Bowse.  "I wish we
+were in a better condition to meet an enemy."
+
+"Well, I wish we were, if there is a prospect of our seeing one again,"
+said the colonel.  "However, I suppose you've managed to give the go-by
+to our friend, the _Flying Dutchman_."
+
+Bowse, whose spirits weariness and anxiety had much lowered, shook his
+head, and pointed to the stranger.
+
+"I wish I could say so, Colonel Gauntlett.  There she is, as big as
+life; and, what is more, may be alongside of us any moment those on
+board her may desire."
+
+"Ods life, then we shall have to fight her after all," exclaimed the
+colonel, with animation.  "It's a pity we didn't have it out yesterday,
+and have enjoyed a quiet night's rest after it."
+
+"I wish we had, sir," said the master, his spirits a little cheered by
+the colonel's coolness.  "We should have had an advantage we shall not
+enjoy to-day.  She has the weather gauge, and may select her own time to
+engage us, and is, I suspect, but waiting till the sea goes down, when
+she may run us alongside, and take advantage of the great superiority of
+men she has, depend on it, on board her."
+
+"We must see, however, what we can do," replied the colonel.  "But,
+after all, the fellow may be an Austrian.  He has hoisted those
+colours."
+
+"Merely to blind us, sir, depend on it," answered the master.  "He is
+even now edging down upon us."
+
+As he spoke, the stranger at length set his topgallant-sails and royals;
+but if his intention was to run alongside, it was frustrated.
+
+The varying wind, which had been gradually lulling, now on a sudden died
+away completely, even before the sea created by the gale had had time to
+go down, and the two vessels lay rolling from side to side like logs on
+the water, without power to progress, just beyond the range of each
+other's guns.
+
+Those who have cruised in the Mediterranean Sea must have lively
+recollections of the calms which have stopped their onward progress--the
+slow rolling of the vessel without any apparent cause, the loud flapping
+of the canvas against the masts seemingly feeling anger at its inaction,
+the hot sun striking down on the decks and boiling up the pitch in the
+seams between the planks, the dazzling glare too bright for the eyes to
+endure from the mirror-like surface of the water, and, above all, the
+consequent feelings of discontent, lassitude, and weariness.
+
+Notwithstanding the heat and the motion, and the excessive weariness
+they felt from their incessant toil, Bowse and his bold crew set
+manfully to work to repair the damage the _Zodiac_ had received during
+the storm.  All hands laboured cheerfully, for they saw that everything
+might depend on the speed with which they could get the ship to rights
+again.  Although the damage on deck was considerable, yet their first
+care was to get up a new topmast, and another jib-boom out, for both
+which purposes they fortunately had spare ones on board.  Bowse had gone
+for a minute below, where Timmins speedily followed him.
+
+"A boat shoving off from the polacca brig, sir," said the mate.
+
+He was on deck in a minute; by his glass he saw a six-oared gig rapidly
+approaching; she had in the stern-sheets four persons, three of whom
+were dressed as officers, and wore cocked hats.
+
+The passengers were on deck, as well as the two mates, watching the
+boat.
+
+"I suspect after all we shall find that we were unnecessarily alarmed,
+and they will prove very honest gentlemen," observed the colonel.
+
+"I trust they may be," said Ada.  "It would be very dreadful to have to
+fight."
+
+"I'm afraid there's little honesty either on board the craft or the
+boat; for I trust little to the Austrian bunting flying at her peak,"
+answered Bowse.  "You must not be frightened, young lady, when you see
+the men armed.  It is safe to be prepared--Mr Timmins, get the
+cutlasses and small arms on deck, and send the people to their
+quarters--Colonel Gauntlett, I will speak with you, if you please;" and
+the master led the colonel aside.  "I have to propose a bold plan, and a
+dangerous one, should it not succeed; but if it does, I think our safety
+is secured.  The pirate--for pirate the commander of that brig is, I am
+assured--will, I suspect, through audacity or fool-hardiness, venture on
+our deck; now, what I propose, if he does, is to entice the rest of the
+people on board, and to seize them and their boat, and to hold them as
+hostages."
+
+"But suppose they should prove to be really Austrians," urged the
+colonel.  "It would be an odd way of treating officers who come to pay a
+friendly visit; and, seeing there are ten men in the boat, it will not
+be quite so easy either."
+
+"No fear of that, sir," answered Bowse; "they venture here because they
+don't know what Englishmen are made of.  They have been accustomed to
+deal with Turks and degenerate Greeks and Italians, and fancy they can
+manage us as easy; they come to see the condition we are in.  Now, as I
+feel certain that boat comes here with the intention and hope of taking
+this brig without any resistance, I want to make them fall into their
+own trap."
+
+The colonel thought a little time.  "Well," he answered, "I do not
+dislike your plan on the whole, provided we are sure the fellows intend
+us treachery.  What part am I to play in it?"
+
+"Why, sir, I want you to hold the chief man of them in conversation,
+while I talk to another; for I intend to let only two at a time come on
+deck--and then, if we can get them below, we can secure them, and,
+before the rest find it out, we will invite two more below, and secure
+them.  I want you to offer a reason for our carrying so much sail
+yesterday and last night, to throw them off their guard, and to make
+them suppose we still believe them Austrians."
+
+"But what am I to say about the way we carried sail?" asked the colonel.
+
+"Why, sir, you see, we did not go out of our course, so you can say that
+you are in a very great hurry, and insisted on my making more sail,
+while, as the ship is bran new, I was not afraid of pleasing you,
+particularly as you promised a good round sum more if I got you in
+before a certain time."
+
+"The story is plausible, but I am afraid it will not bear looking into,"
+observed the colonel; "however, I will play my part as I best can."
+
+"We will not give them time to look into that or anything else," replied
+Bowse.  "They will observe the loss of caboose and boats, and also of
+our bulwarks, it is true; but we must settle them before they have time
+to consult about it; or we may point it out to them at once, and tell
+them that it happened at the end of the gale, and that it would have
+made us shorten sail if the wind had not dropped."
+
+The plan of the master being agreed to, preparations were made to
+receive their very doubtful visitors.  Ada and her attendant were on the
+poop, with Mitchell to guard them.  The colonel and master, with the
+first mate stood at the gangway, on either side of which were stationed
+two of the strongest men in the ship, their cutlasses being concealed.
+The second mate, with six other hands, well armed, had orders to rush
+aft the moment they were summoned, and to look after the boats and those
+who might remain in her, and on no account to let them escape.
+
+By the time all the arrangements were made, the boat was close to.
+Bowse examined her carefully.  The crew were dressed as European seamen,
+and pulled in their fashion, though rather irregularly, and the uniform
+of the officers was perfectly correct, as far as he knew.
+
+The boat dashed alongside without hesitation, and two of the officers
+sprung up on deck; the rest would have followed, but the two men at the
+gangway stopped them, in spite of gesticulations and strenuous
+endeavours.
+
+"Messieurs, some one on board, I presume, speaks French?" said the
+principal of the two, taking off his cocked-hat, and bowing profoundly,
+with a glance towards the poop, where Ada sat.
+
+"_Moi_--I do," answered the colonel, with not the best pronunciation in
+the world.  "_Que voulez-vous, Messieurs_?"
+
+"I am delighted to find a gentleman with whom I can converse in a common
+language.  My native German I judged would be hopeless," observed the
+officer.
+
+He was a remarkably fine-looking man, with a dark, curling moustache,
+and a free, bold manner.  Now the colonel had studied German in the
+course of his military education, and spoke it well; he therefore
+immediately answered in that language.
+
+The officer looked puzzled, and then laughingly said, "Oh!  I must
+compliment you; but we will speak in French--it is the proper language
+for the intercourse of strangers--a mutual ground on which they meet.  I
+have come to offer the services of my ship's company in putting your
+vessel to rights; for I see that she has suffered severely in the gale,
+which has just passed."
+
+"Many thanks to you, monsieur," returned the colonel; "but I believe the
+crew of the brig are fully competent to perform all the work which is
+required; and you see they have already accomplished much of it."
+
+"I see they have been at work; but it will still occupy them much time
+to put you to rights," observed the stranger.  "You carried on yesterday
+and during the night more than I ever saw a vessel do before; and may I
+ask why you endeavoured to outsail me as you did yesterday."
+
+"Certainly," returned the colonel; and gave the explanation arranged
+with Bowse.
+
+"Ah, it was a pity though, it made me suspicious of you," exclaimed the
+officer.  "And did you not receive a message by a Sicilian speronara,
+which I sent to invite any merchantmen to put themselves under my
+protection?"
+
+"Oh! we received it; and though doubts might have occurred, we were
+grateful," returned the colonel; then, in a low whisper to Bowse, he
+said.  "Seize the rascals as soon as you like--we will ask them below."
+
+He then turned back to the officers.
+
+"Will you not come below to take some refreshment?  We shall be happy to
+offer it also to those in the boat."
+
+The stranger hesitated: at that instant Ada, who had risen to witness
+the conference, came to the break of the poop.  She had been examining
+the countenances of the officers.
+
+"The Prince Caramitzo, I am sure!" she exclaimed.
+
+"Prince!  Count Zappa, the pirate, you mean!" cried the colonel,
+stamping in a passion.
+
+"It's all discovered then.  Seize them my lads!" cried the master,
+rushing forward to aid in executing his own order.
+
+"Ah! is it treachery you mean me?" exclaimed the seeming Austrian
+officer, dealing the poor master a violent blow.  "It is Zappa you see,
+and whom you will soon learn to know."
+
+And before any one had time to rush forward and seize him, he, with his
+companion, leaped into the boat which, at the same instant, shoved off;
+and, with rapid strokes, began to pull away.
+
+"Give them a dose of the carronades!" exclaimed the master; but, before
+the guns could be brought to bear, and could be fired, the stranger was
+a long way from the ship, and not a shot told.  There was thus no longer
+any disguise--nor could they, should they be conquered, expect any mercy
+at the hands of the pirate.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWELVE.
+
+We must now go back to the day on which our story commences, or rather,
+at an early hour on the following morning, when the young Greek, Argiri
+Caramitzo, and his Italian companion, Paolo Montifalcone, left the
+ball-room of the Auberge de Provence.
+
+Highly satisfied with the adventures of the evening, Caramitzo took his
+way to the abode of the Jew, Aaron Bannech, not deeming it prudent to
+sleep under any other roof; perhaps he would not have trusted himself
+under that of the Israelite, had he not felt assured that the
+preservation of his life and liberty was of very considerable importance
+to his host.  As he reached the door of the house, he encountered the
+beggar Giacomo, who had concealed himself, till his approach, beneath a
+neighbouring archway.
+
+"Hist, signor," said the beggar, hobbling up.  "I'm glad you are at
+length come.  I have long waited for you, to give you some important
+information regarding your safety.  But who is the person with you?  May
+I speak before him?"
+
+"He is a friend--say on," replied the Greek.
+
+"Well, signor, what I have to say is, that before long you will find
+this city too hot for you," answered Giacomo.  "As you directed me, I
+watched the three Greeks you left at the _caffe_.  For a long time they
+remained inside, and at last when they came out I followed them for some
+distance, and heard them making inquiries for the office of the police.
+They went to the wrong one first, and then I followed them to the other.
+Fortunately the office was closed, and they were told that they could
+not make their complaint till to-morrow.  I could understand but little
+that they said, yet I am certain that they spoke of having seen you
+here."
+
+"You have done well," returned the Greek.  "You saw where they lodge?"
+
+"_Si, signor_, certainly."
+
+"Then follow them to-morrow, and let me know the result of their
+information."
+
+Saying this, the Greek summoned the Jew to admit him and his companion
+to the house.
+
+"I shall have to quit you to-morrow," he observed, as their host, after
+examining numerous bolts and bars, followed them to the only
+sitting-room the Jew possessed; his dining-room, library, and sanctum,
+where all his most private and important business was transacted.
+
+"What! will you not take a passage by the good brig, the _Zodiac_,"
+asked the Jew.  "I had arranged everything for you, and should not have
+had to appear in the affair."
+
+"I had done my part also at the ball to-night, and I flatter myself the
+English colonel and his niece would have been pleased to have my
+company.  All would have gone well, had it not been for the appearance
+of those Greeks, who fancy they know me, and will swear that I am no
+other than the pirate Zappa, which, by the bye, exhibits the folly of
+being merciful.  Now, though with your assistance, my friend, I might
+easily prove who I am, still, as you know I might find the detention
+inconvenient, I shall therefore sail early in the speronara.  Your
+letters may be addressed to me as before, but bear in mind that your
+information is generally too stale.  Now I will get a little rest, if
+you will show me where I am to sleep."
+
+"Wonderful man," muttered the Jew, as he quitted his guest, who had
+thrown himself on a couch, and was already asleep.  "He has no fear of
+treachery."
+
+The Greek knew that the Jew was a wise man, and would not kill his
+golden goose.  The Jew had procured some ordinary morning dresses for
+the Greek and his companion, and habited in them, with Italian cloaks
+thrown round them, they next morning fearlessly took their way to the
+quays.
+
+Manuel was in attendance, and Paolo immediately embarked, and went on
+board the speronara, while the Greek returned once more into the city.
+Had any one watched the movements of the two strangers, they would have
+observed that the Greek never for an instant allowed the Italian to
+leave his side while they were on shore, and that the latter regarded
+him with a look much more of fear than of affection, somewhat as an
+ill-used dog does his master, though he still follows his footsteps.
+
+As the Greek walked along, he made observations on several vessels which
+had been mentioned to him by the beggar, and afterwards looked into the
+police-office, where his accusers had not arrived.  Again, therefore,
+returning to the quay, he summoned the boatman, Manuel, who had returned
+for him, and directed him to pull on board the speronara, to which he
+had previously sent an order by Paolo to get under weigh, and heave to
+till he should come on board.
+
+"Let draw," he exclaimed, as soon as he stepped on board, "we will try
+the quality of your craft, Master Alessandro, steer as if we were bound
+for Syracuse, and afterwards we will run off shore.  In case any vessel
+should be sent in chase, I wish to mislead them as to the course we have
+taken."
+
+"_Capisco_--I understand, signor," said the Sicilian.  "We have a good
+breeze, and shall reach the _Sea Hawk_, if she is at her post, long
+before dark."
+
+"Did you ever know her miss her rendezvous?" said the Greek.  "And now,
+my good Paolo, let me ask how it has fared with you since yesterday?"
+
+"As it may with a man weary of the world," returned the youth, sighing
+deeply.
+
+"You will yet do bravely, Paolo," said Caramitzo.  "How like you now the
+life of a sailor?  We have variety and excitement enough to please you?"
+
+"Too much--I should prefer less change, and a more tranquil existence,"
+returned the youth.  "But I am willing to undergo all to please you."
+
+"The very words your sister would have spoken.  Come, come, Paolo, you
+must rouse yourself, and learn to enjoy the pleasures of life, instead
+of moping and weeping as she does."
+
+As the Greek spoke, the youth's eyes flashed angrily; but as if with an
+effort, he controlled himself, and his countenance directly assumed its
+usual dejected look.
+
+The speronara, as has been described, kept first to the northward; and
+after standing in that direction for six or seven miles, she eased off
+her sheets, and ran off to the eastward.  After three hours a large
+polacca brig was seen from her deck a couple of points on her larboard
+bow.  On this a small flag was run up to the end of her main-yard, which
+was immediately answered by the brig.  The speronara then hauled her
+wind on the starboard tack which brought her head looking almost into
+Valetta harbour, while the brig hove to on the same tack.
+
+The Greek had for some time been looking through a spy-glass towards
+Malta, which lay like a line of blue hillocks rising from the sea.
+
+"Here Paolo," he said, at length.  "Do you take the glass, and tell me,
+what vessels you see, which appear to have come out of the port we left
+this morning."
+
+For some time Paolo made no answer.  He was examining the intervening
+space between them and the shore.
+
+The Greek, meantime, reclined on a seat to rest, for he was weary with
+his exertions.
+
+Paolo at last addressed him.
+
+"I make out a square-rigged vessel of some sort, steering this way.  She
+looms large."
+
+The Greek sprang to his feet, and took the glass.
+
+"She is the one we are in search of," he exclaimed.  "Up with the helm
+and let draw the head sheets."
+
+The orders were obeyed, and the speronara ran off again before the wind
+towards the brig, with which she had communicated, and the head of whose
+topsails were just seen above the horizon.  It took a couple of hours
+before the speronara hove to close to her, by which time the day was
+almost over.
+
+The brig was a remarkably fine looking vessel, with a long low hull,
+painted black, with sharp bows, a clean run and a raking counter.  She
+was what is denominated polacca-rigged; a name given to designate those
+vessels which have their lower masts and topmast in one piece; thus
+evading the necessity of tops and caps, and much top-weight.  Her yards
+were very square; her masts, which were polished, raked somewhat; her
+rigging was well set up, and very neat; and her canvas looked white and
+new.  She was in truth a very rakish-looking and beautiful craft.  As
+the speronara drew near, a boat was lowered from the brig and manned,
+and now came alongside.
+
+As soon as the boat, which was full of armed men in the picturesque
+costume of Greek sailors, came alongside, Caramitzo turned to the
+padrone of the speronara:--
+
+"Alessandro," he said, "your personal services to me are over, for the
+present; but I have occasion for the use of your vessel for a few hours
+longer.  Do you and your people go quietly on board the brig, and remain
+till my return.  Some few of my followers will man the speronara in the
+mean time."
+
+The padrone of the speronara would have expostulated, but the Greek cut
+him short, and intimated that, as just then his will was law, if he did
+not consent with a good grace, he would be compelled to do so--pointing
+at the same time to the boatload of desperadoes alongside.  Seeing
+therefore that resistance was useless, the padrone and his crew were
+transferred to the brig, and thirty Greek seamen took their place.  The
+exchange was made very rapidly, as their chief, for such he was whom we
+have known as Argiri Caramitzo, appeared in a hurry.
+
+An officer, who seemed to have charge of the brig, came off in a smaller
+boat at the summons of the captain.
+
+"Understand," he said, "you are, if possible, to keep the English brig,
+you see to the westward, just in sight; at, indeed, about the same
+distance we are now from her.  Steer east-northeast, which is her
+course, and look out for the speronara.  I am about to visit the brig,
+and may perhaps be able to render you a good account of her."
+
+The officer bowed.
+
+"I understand your orders clearly," he said.  "We would rather, however,
+see you returning in the brig, than in the speronara."
+
+"I will not forget your wishes," the chief answered laughing, as the
+boat shoved off.
+
+"Now my men let draw the foresheet--now she has way on her--haul it well
+aft, and see if she will lay up for the brig yonder.  Ah, she does it
+bravely--call me when we near her."
+
+And wrapping himself in his cloak he lay down to sleep, or, it might
+have been, to meditate on the daring plans and projects working in his
+active brain.  The speronara flew over the waves like a sea-bird on the
+wing.  She soon neared the brig which Paolo at once recognised as the
+English merchantman they had passed in Valetta harbour.  He had heard
+from the chief who were the passengers on board, and the _ruse_ to be
+practised had also been confided to him.  He had been endeavouring to
+beguile, to him, the weary hours of the voyage with reading, while the
+chief slept, for sleep refused to visit his eyelids.  A thought seemed
+to strike him.  He wrote hastily in the book, and tearing out the leaf,
+placed it in his bosom.  He then roused his companion from his slumber.
+The Greek started up and eyed the approaching brig.
+
+"It is she," he exclaimed.  "That vessel, my men, is to be your prize;
+but much caution will be required to take her.  She is armed, that is to
+say, she has four real guns and two wooden ones; but from what I saw of
+her captain and crew, I think they are likely to fight.  They are very
+different sort of characters, are those English, to the Italians we are
+accustomed to deal with, who call on their saints to help them, and from
+the Turks, who make up their minds it is their fate to be taken and
+thrown overboard.  The difficulty, on the contrary, with these English,
+is ever to persuade them that they are beaten; and, as they don't care
+for the Saints, and don't fear the devil--heretics that they are--they
+trust to their own right arm, their cutlasses, and big guns; and by
+Achilles, if you do manage to throw them overboard, they will swim about
+in the hopes of getting a cut at you.  Now, where we cannot succeed by
+force, we must employ stratagem; and I intend to go on board and to
+inform them that the _Sea Hawk_ is an Austrian ship-of-war, anxious to
+protect merchantmen from the attacks of the corsair Zappa, and to
+revenge herself on him for his capture of one of their brigs of war, of
+which they will have heard.  If I find them unprepared and unsuspicious
+of us, we will at once run alongside and take possession; and, as I am
+anxious not to be under the necessity of throwing the crew overboard, we
+will stow them all away in the hold of the vessel, and make the padrone
+carry them with him to Sicily.  If he murder them on the voyage that
+will be no fault of ours; and if he lands them, they can be no evidence
+against us at any time, for they have not seen our brig, and Signor
+Sandro will not dare to give any correct information, though, of course,
+he will tell a number of lies to exonerate himself; but for that we are
+not to blame.  Now we will heave to, to windward of our friend, and see
+the boat clear for launching, to carry me and Paolo on board her."
+
+Having concluded his observations, the chief and Paolo went below, and
+soon returned so completely disguised in the costume of Sicilian
+boatmen, as I have described, that the Greeks at first scarcely knew
+them.
+
+As they passed the brig, they hailed her, and then hove to.  The pirate,
+for there is little use concealing the character of the pretended
+prince, with his young companion, whom he had instructed how to act,
+stepped into the boat, manned by two stout hands, and pulled alongside
+the brig.  He was somewhat startled and disappointed on discovering the
+preparations which were made to receive him, should he appear as an
+enemy; and, seeing Colonel Gauntlett at the gangway, with whom he had
+held so much conversation on the previous day, it occurred to him at
+once that it might be dangerous to trust his own voice, and he therefore
+resolved to make Paolo the spokesman.  His greatest trial, however, was
+to come, when, in the presence of Ada Garden, his countenance was
+exposed to the bright light of the cabin lamp.  The admiration he had
+felt for her at the ball was increased when he beheld her again; but it
+was not so great as to make him forget that now was not the time to show
+it, and it was with some feeling of relief that he found himself once
+more in his boat, fully convinced that, even with his thirty men, it
+would be a work of considerable danger to attempt the capture of the
+_Zodiac_ by means of the speronara.  He accordingly determined to return
+on board the brig, dismiss the speronara, and keep a bright look out
+after the merchantman, till he should find a favourable opportunity to
+take her unawares.  As the speronara sailed almost two feet to one of
+the _Zodiac_, he was soon able to pass her and to reach the polacca brig
+before she was discernible through the darkness.  As the Greek stepped
+on the deck of the brig, the crew received him with a shout of welcome.
+
+"Long life to our captain," they exclaimed.  "Long life to Zappa."
+
+The Prince Caramitzo or the pirate Zappa, for under either of those
+names that worthy person may in future be recognised, assured his
+followers of the satisfaction their affection afforded him, and then
+ordered them to tumble the Sicilians into their speronara, and to make
+all sail without delay.
+
+The _Sea Hawk_ was kept before the wind, and next morning, at daybreak,
+they found themselves still a long way ahead of the English brig.  The
+pirates, who had on board a number of Austrian uniforms, and seamen's
+dresses, and flags, indeed every means of disguising the ship to appear
+like a man-of-war of that nation, now, by their chief's orders, set to
+work on the necessary preparations to make her assume that character,
+while Zappa himself appeared in the uniform of an Austrian captain.
+
+His purpose was to dodge on, under easy sail, till the _Zodiac_ came up
+with him; and then, under pretext of friendly converse, to run her
+alongside, and to pour his men on her decks before her crew should have
+time to make any resistance.  The gale of wind, which so suddenly sprang
+up, prevented the execution of this plan, and preserved the _Zodiac_.
+
+When Zappa observed her bearing down on him, he was in hopes that his
+ruse had succeeded, and that his vessel was taken for what he wished her
+to appear; but when he saw, on his following her, that the English brig
+made more sail in the very height of the gale, and at last carried on in
+a way that seemed even greatly to hazard her safety, he began to fear
+that he was suspected.  He, however, was determined not to lose sight of
+her again, and accordingly made sail in chase, with the hopes of finding
+a favourable opportunity to execute his purpose at the termination of
+the gale.  At length it fell calm, and his vessel lay about four miles
+from her.
+
+We have seen that he was a man of extraordinary nerve, and he bethought
+him that he would try once more to blind the master and crew of the
+_Zodiac_, and, ordering a boat to be manned, he pulled boldly on board
+her.  Had not Bowse been forewarned, there can be little doubt but that
+he would have triumphantly succeeded, and there can be no reflection on
+his want of talent either in planning or executing that he did not do
+so.  Had he known as much as does the reader, he would probably have had
+nothing to do with the speronara, which was suspected, but would at once
+have run alongside the _Zodiac_ in his own vessel which was unknown.
+When he found himself, on his second visit to the _Zodiac_, so nearly
+caught in his own net, he pulled back to the _Sea Hawk_, vowing that he
+would not again be foiled.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTEEN.
+
+The master of the _Zodiac_, as he laboured without ceasing at the
+important work of getting his ship once more in sailing trim, every now
+and then glanced at the pretended Austrian with feelings in which the
+undaunted courage of the British seaman were fearfully mingled in his
+bosom with dark forebodings as to the result of an engagement with an
+enemy in every respect so much his superior.  His eye would also, ever
+and anon, range round the horizon in anticipation of those rising signs
+of the coming breeze, which he prayed Heaven might yet be long delayed
+till the work was completed, and then that it might come from the
+eastward, as it would thus give him the weather gage, and enable him to
+manoeuvre to better advantage in the coming fight; for he had already
+seen most convincing proof of the superior sailing qualities of the _Sea
+Hawk_; that he had no expectations of being able to avoid it, even
+should he be able to make sail before the arrival of the breeze.  With
+voice and example, he cheered on his crew to the work; the topmast had
+been got up, and the rigging fitted over its head; but the topsail-yard
+was not yet across, and much remained to be done to make their previous
+labours of any avail.  Bowse himself had taken his meals on deck, as had
+his mates; and the men had snatched but a minute to satisfy their
+hunger.  He had just before sent them below to their dinners, when, as
+he was taking a look at the enemy, to see what she was about, he
+observed beyond her a dark blue line on the horizon.
+
+"Ah," he muttered; "there's no doubt what is coming now, and long before
+the canvas is spread, we shall have the breeze blowing strong, and the
+brig coming down on us.  Well, we've done our best, and men can do no
+more.  I'll let the poor fellows have this meal in quiet; it will be the
+last many of them will eat, I fear.  Ah!  Heaven only knows if any on
+board here will ever taste another, if those cursed villains get hold of
+us--and nothing but a miracle can save us, that I see--yet, we'll make
+them pay dear for victory, at all events."
+
+He took two or three turns on the deck, watching his antagonist, and the
+coming wind; and from his cool and calm exterior, no one would have
+supposed how fully he felt the dangerous position in which his ship was
+placed.  Broader and broader grew the line, till, at last, the wind
+filled the loftier canvas of the corsair, which was spread to catch it.
+The time, he saw, was, come to prepare for the final struggle.  He
+summoned the mate from below.
+
+"Turn the hands up," he cried out, in a firm, sharp tone, to be heard
+throughout the ship.  "We shall have work before long to warm them up a
+bit."
+
+The men sprang on deck with alacrity, casting an eye at the stranger as
+they went to the work in hand.
+
+The topsail-yard was ready fitted, and all hands now joined in swaying
+away on it.  Meantime, the wind, though still light, had filled the
+pirate's sails, and she was stealing through the water towards them,
+before they even felt the wind.  At last a few catspaws, the
+_avant-couriers_ of the stronger breeze, began to play round them.  The
+foresail and the fore-staysail were the only sails they could yet get to
+pay the brig's head off before the wind.  These were now set; but the so
+doing delayed the work of bending the topsail, and the _Sea Hawk_ was
+now coming fast up with them.  As soon as the _Zodiac_ was got dead
+before the wind, the main-topsail and topgallant-sails were hoisted; the
+studdensail-booms were run out, and studdensails set, which much made
+amends for the loss of the headsails, as long as they desired only to
+keep before the wind.  Notwithstanding, however, all the canvas the
+_Zodiac_ could set, the corsair still came up with her hand over hand.
+Bowse watched till he thought she had come within range of his guns, and
+he then ordered one to be brought up, and pointed at her over the
+taffrail.
+
+As soon as Colonel Gauntlett, who was on deck, heard the order given, he
+exclaimed that he and Mitchell would assist in working the guns, while
+the crew continued bending the sails.
+
+The gun was accordingly trained aft, but part of the taffrail had to be
+cut away to work it.
+
+"Try to knock away some of his spars, sir," cried Bowse, as the colonel
+prepared to fire.  "Everything depends on that."
+
+The colonel fired, but the shot fell short.  The gun was instantly again
+loaded, but before they had time to fire, the pirate yawed and let fly a
+bow chaser, the shot from which flew through the main-topsail, though
+without doing further damage.  The colonel again fired, but again the
+shot fell short, to his no slight rage.
+
+"I see how it is, sir," observed Bowse, "that fellow has a long nine in
+his bows, while our gun is only a carronade.  He will be doing us
+mischief, I am afraid."
+
+"Let him get a little nearer though, and we will give him two to one,"
+returned the colonel.
+
+Scarcely had he spoken, when another shot came, which cut away the
+topmast starboard shrouds.  Hands were immediately sent aloft to secure
+the rigging, but this again delayed the progress of the work on the
+foremast.  Notwithstanding the occasional yaw the pirate was obliged to
+make in order to fire, he still gained on the _Zodiac_.  At last he got
+within range of her carronades, to the great satisfaction of Colonel
+Gauntlett, who forthwith commenced firing his gun as fast as Mitchell
+could sponge and load it.  The shot, however, told with little or no
+effect; a few holes were made through his head-sails, but no ropes of
+importance were cut away on board the _Sea Hawk_.  The countenances of
+the pirates could now clearly be seen.  They had exchanged the Austrian
+uniforms for their proper Greek dresses, which added considerably to the
+ferocity of their appearance.
+
+Finding that the carronade frequently sent its shot on board, they
+hauled up a point, so as to bring their vessel on the starboard quarter
+of the _Zodiac_, and at the same time to keep beyond the range of her
+guns, while they could still send the shot from their long bow chaser on
+board her.
+
+The brave master groaned when he saw the manoeuvre, for he felt how
+completely he was at the mercy of the enemy.  The colonel,
+notwithstanding, still continued working his gun, till with rage he saw
+that his shot again fell short of the enemy.  The _Zodiac_, it must be
+understood, bearing chiefly after sail, could not venture to haul up so
+much as to bring the enemy again astern, or he would have tried to do
+so.  His gun was worked quickly, and with great precision; shot after
+shot told with fearful effect on the spars and rigging.  The men had
+perseveringly laboured the whole time in spite of the shot flying about
+them, but just as they had bent the fore-topsail, and were swaying away
+on the yard, a shot struck the fore-yard, and cut it completely in two.
+The men saw that their efforts were all in vain, and letting go the
+halyards, rushed of their own accord to the guns.
+
+"It's no use running, sir," they exclaimed, with one voice.  "Let's
+fight it out while we can."
+
+The pirate's shot continued their work of destruction.  The main topmast
+next received a wound, and in a minute afterwards, the breeze
+freshening, down it came on board, hampering up the deck.
+
+"Clear away the wreck of the topmast, my lads," exclaimed the master.
+"And then I hope those scoundrels will give us a a chance of punishing
+them."
+
+The order was obeyed, and the gun, which had been trained aft, was
+replaced, and the other two guns were got over to the starboard side.
+The brave crew then gave forth a cheer of defiance at the enemy,
+expecting that they were about to run them on board; the pirates were
+waiting, though, till their guns had produced more effect; a shot at
+last came, and carried away the peak halyards, and deprived her of all
+power of manoeuvring.  The _Zodiac_ was now at their mercy; and they
+bore down upon her; but instead of running her aboard on the starboard
+side, they luffed up when just under her stern, and poured in the whole
+of their starboard guns; then, keeping away again, they hauled up on the
+other tack joining their larboard battery, and then once more, as if
+content with their work, they kept away, and ran her on board on the
+starboard side.
+
+Three of the _Zodiac's_ crew had been disabled, and Bowse himself was
+badly wounded; but the remainder fought their guns to the last.  The
+pirates, as the sides of the two vessels ground together, threw their
+grapnels on board, and crowded the rigging to leap on the deck of the
+_Zodiac_.
+
+The master, and Colonel Gauntlett, led on the English crew to oppose the
+enemy--never did men fight better, but numbers bore them down--the
+struggle was in vain, the colonel was first struck down, and the master
+directly after, and though the two mates continued fighting some time
+afterwards, one being killed and the other wounded, the survivors gave
+way, and were either driven down below or overboard.
+
+The tall figure of the pirate leader was the most conspicuous in the
+fight.
+
+"The brig is ours!" he exclaimed, as he took up his post at the top of
+the companion steps.  "But she is too slow a sailer to be of any use to
+us; we will therefore take the most valuable part of her cargo on board,
+and desert her.  We have no time to lose; for all this firing may have
+been heard by some British cruiser, who will be down upon us before
+long--Now, Paolo, follow me."
+
+The pirate crew instantly got the hatches off, and set to work to select
+what they considered most valuable, and to transfer it to their own
+vessel.
+
+Ada Garden had often read of tempests at sea, of shipwrecks, and
+battles; but it had never occurred to her that she might some day
+witness their horrors, or suffer from their dreadful effects.  Now the
+reality of the scenes she had before pictured to herself, as events
+passed by, and unlikely again to happen, was palpably displayed before
+her.  She had scarcely recovered from the terrors of the the storm when
+her uncle came below, and, with unusual tenderness in his manner urged
+her not to be alarmed at the noise of the guns which were about to be
+fired; at the same time speaking with confidence of their ultimate
+success.  Though she trembled with anxiety at what she heard, she
+promised not to give way to fear, and entreated to be allowed to come on
+deck.  To this he of course would on no consideration consent, and after
+much argument, and by showing her the useless danger she would run, he
+made her promise that nothing should induce her to leave the cabin till
+he himself came down to summon her.  She again had recourse to her
+Bible, and, with Marianna sitting at her feet, she endeavoured to calm
+her mind, and to banish her terror as she had done during the gale.
+Except from the occasional discharge of the guns there was now, perhaps,
+much less to cause her alarm, if she could have helped thinking of the
+possible result; but this, notwithstanding her uncle's assurances, she
+could not do; for she understood too well the great superiority of the
+pirate vessel; and though she knew that her countrymen would struggle to
+the last, yet she felt that they might be overcome; and she scarcely
+dared to contemplate what her fate might be.  The alarm of her young
+attendant was almost beyond control.
+
+"Oh, Holy Mary!" she shrieked out, as the first shot was fired; "the
+dreadful battle has begun, and we shall be killed.  Oh, why did we leave
+our dear Valetta, to come on the stormy sea, when one moment we are
+about to be drowned and the next murdered--ah me, ah me!" and the poor
+girl burst into tears.  Another shot was heard, and she started and
+trembled afresh.
+
+Ada tried to console her.  "Listen now, Marianna," she said, "those
+shots are fired from this vessel, and, therefore, they cannot hurt us,
+though they may our enemies.  It is only those which are sent from the
+other ship can injure us; as yet, none seem to have been discharged."
+
+"May the saints prevent the wretches from sending any!" exclaimed
+Marianna through her tears.  "Perhaps they will not fire on a British
+ship."
+
+"Heaven grant it may be so," said Ada, "but I fear not.  That sounds as
+if our ship had been struck."
+
+It was the sharp sound of a spar being wounded, which, like an electric
+shock, reverberated through the vessel.  Another and another followed.
+
+"Oh, the enemy must be close to us!  My dear, dear mistress, what is
+going to happen?" shrieked the poor Maltese girl.
+
+"Put your trust in Heaven, Marianna; and, though we are unable to
+discern it, the means may at the last moment be found for our
+preservation," said Ada solemnly.  "I would that I were allowed to
+venture on deck, to learn that my uncle has not suffered in this
+dreadful fire."
+
+"Oh, do not leave me, my mistress," exclaimed Marianna, clinging to her
+dress.  "You will be killed, to a certainty, if you go up among all the
+fighting.  No, you shall not go!"
+
+Ada did not attempt to disengage herself, for she remembered her promise
+to Colonel Gauntlett, and she felt how worse than useless she would
+there be.  Still louder and more frequent became the roar of the enemy's
+guns, and the crashes, as the spars and rigging came falling down on
+deck.  Then came other frightful noises in quick succession, as the
+pirate poured in her two broadsides, and lastly the loud, grating sound,
+as she finally ran alongside, and the two vessels ground together as
+they lay locked in their deadly embrace.  At the same instant arose the
+shouts of defiance raised by the British seamen, mingled with the
+shrieks of their wounded, and answered by the fierce cries of the
+pirates, as they threw themselves on the _Zodiac's_ deck--next was heard
+above their heads the loud trampling of the feet of those engaged in
+mortal struggle.  Sometimes Ada fancied that her friends were
+victorious, and that the pirates were driven back; then again, by the
+more frequent sound of the stamping of feet, and the cries and
+exclamations in a strange language, she felt too sure that the enemy had
+poured still greater numbers on board.  For a few moments the noise of
+feet increased; there were next some heavy, dull sounds, as of persons
+falling, and then arose the loud triumphant shout of victory; but the
+sounds were strange--it was that of the enemy; all, then, for a time was
+silent--what had become of her uncle and the brave crew?  With her heart
+palpitating, and her mind in a chaos of confusion, she could not resolve
+what to do.  She could just discern the footsteps of persons descending
+the companion-ladder--they entered the main cabin.  The door of the one
+in which she with Marianna sat was violently opened, and she beheld the
+countenance of the pirate Zappa.  Too truly all then was lost.  The
+excess of her horror and alarm overcame her and she fainted.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FOURTEEN.
+
+When the first glimmerings of consciousness revisited the mind of Ada
+Garden, she felt that some dreadful calamity had befallen her, without
+being able to comprehend its nature or extent.  An undefined terror, an
+insupportable oppression at the heart made her feel that death must soon
+release her from her sufferings.  She had neither the power nor the will
+to stir a limb, or to open her eyes to discover her real state.  The
+noise of the engagement and the thunder of the guns, the shrieks and
+cries of the combatants, still rung with fearful clearness in her ears,
+yet without enabling her to remember the causes which had produced them.
+She felt that she had been deprived of her only guardian--that she was
+alone in the world without friends to protect or counsel her; but how
+her uncle had died she could not comprehend.  Then she thought she saw
+him sinking down into the deep blue sea, and his countenance was turned
+towards her with the smile it wore when he was pleased, and down, down
+he sunk till he reached the yellow sand at the bottom, where, through
+the clear water, she could see him resting, and beckoning her to raise
+him up; and then there seemed to pass a vessel full of strange, fierce
+forms, shrieking and mocking her; and whenever she stooped down to aid
+the old man, it would come between them and conceal him from her.
+
+At last a deep-drawn sigh gave notice that she was returning to a
+consciousness of the dreadful reality.  She opened her eyes with
+difficulty, and for an instant gazed round her, and then again closed
+them.  That glance had revealed to her that she was no longer in her own
+cabin, though she still felt that she was at sea.  For some time after
+this she remained with her eyes closed, trying to collect her scattered
+thoughts, till at last she remembered the fight with the _Sea Hawk_, and
+the appearance of Zappa at the door of her cabin.
+
+The thoughts of what had occurred were almost sufficient to drive back
+her mind to a state of insensibility, if not to madness itself; but she
+felt that all the courage and energy she could muster were requisite for
+her guidance, and by a strenuous exertion of the intellect, she
+conquered the feeling which was so nearly overpowering her.  Once more
+she opened her eyes, and tried to raise herself, that she might discover
+where she was.
+
+The movement she made attracted the attention of some one who appeared
+to be occupied at a little distance from her, and who instantly flew to
+her side.
+
+"Oh, my dear mistress, the saints have heard my prayers, and you have
+come to life again!" exclaimed the voice of Marianna, who immediately
+presented herself before her, with a countenance in which pleasure
+overcame every other feeling.
+
+"Oh, tell me, where am I?  What has happened?" exclaimed Ada, eagerly;
+but the exertion or excitement caused her again almost to faint.
+
+"Hush, hush, my dear mistress," whispered Marianna.  "Do not be alarmed.
+You are not in a condition to ask questions, nor to listen to my
+answers, so I shall say nothing.  You have been very ill with a fever,
+and you are to take this medicine, which will do you much good."
+
+As she spoke, she presented a glass, filled with a cooling beverage,
+which, as Ada felt very thirsty, and her mouth dreadfully parched, she
+gratefully drank off and lay back on her pillows.
+
+She saw that she was in a large cabin, furnished and ornamented with
+much taste; and through the open stern-ports, from which a light pure
+breeze blew in and cooled her fevered brow, she saw the calm blue sea
+glittering in the sunshine, and in the far distance the land rising in
+picturesque hillocks from out of the water.  While she was gazing at
+this calm and soothing scene, and meditating on the meaning of
+Marianna's words, she fell into a quiet slumber.
+
+The Maltese girl watched her mistress till she saw that she slept, and
+then busied herself in putting the cabin in order, and in dusting the
+furniture, as if she were in a room on shore.
+
+The cabin was, as has been described, in the after part of the vessel,
+and occupied its entire width.  It was fitted up with bird's-eye maple,
+and the mouldings were gilt.
+
+There were two large sofas, or standing bed-places, on either side, with
+brass bars overhead, by which a curtain could be drawn round them.
+
+The space between the two ports was occupied by a rack, on which were
+arranged with much taste, a number of richly-embossed arms, pistols,
+swords, and daggers--and against the bulkhead was another stand, filled
+with muskets and cutlasses, brightly polished.
+
+On the couch farthest from the door, on the starboard side, lay Ada;
+with her feet towards the stern, and her head supported by pillows; so
+that the full force of such air as could find its way through the ports
+should blow on her face.  As she slept, a fresh bloom slowly crept over
+her cheek, which had hitherto been of a deathlike paleness, and as her
+faithful attendant watched its appearance, she hailed it as a sign of
+returning health.
+
+In the centre of the cabin was a table on which now stood a large vase,
+filled with sweet-scented flowers, which spoke of the shore and
+civilisation.  There was, indeed, in the arrangement of the cabin
+generally, a mixture of elegant luxury and warlike preparation, which
+gave it the appearance of the cabin of a yacht fitted for a voyage among
+savage or treacherous people.  Whatever she was, Marianna seemed
+perfectly at home.  Her work-basket was on the table, and various things
+belonging to it were scattered about; as were several articles of female
+apparel, which showed also that she considered the cabin sacred to her
+mistress and herself.  When she had arranged everything to her
+satisfaction, she again sat down composedly to her work, and amused
+herself, as she plied her needle, by singing a song of her native
+island, in a tone, however, too low to run any risk of disturbing her
+mistress.  After some time she got tired of singing, and then as some
+people are apt to do, who are fond of keeping their tongues going when
+they have nobody else to speak to, she began to talk to herself.  She
+did not raise her voice, it is true, above a whisper, but still it was
+sufficient to give exercise to that little fidgety occupant of the
+mouth.
+
+"Well, this is all very nice, and very pleasant, and very agreeable; and
+the gentlemen are very civil, and very respectful, and very kind; but I
+wonder when we shall ever reach the shore," she said; and then she went
+on singing again, and then once more began to talk as follows:--"I
+suppose, as they say, we shall at last reach the shore, and everything
+will be as it should be, and my mistress will be happy and contented
+after all her troubles--poor dear, sweet, young lady--I'm sure she ought
+to be.  Well, it does puzzle me, exceedingly--that it does--I cannot
+make it out, no more, I am sure, would wiser heads than mine.  But there
+is one thing I am very sure of, that Signor Paolo is one of the wisest
+and most amiable young gentlemen I ever saw.  So melancholy, too, he
+seems--something very dreadful weighs on his spirits, I am sure.  I
+don't think he is in love--I thought so at first; but when I hinted that
+he was, he gave the nearest approach to a smile of which he is capable,
+which I'm sure he would not have done, if he was a victim of the tender
+passion.  One thing is certain, however--he saved the life of my sweet
+young mistress.  If it had not been for his knowing how to doctor, I'm
+sure she would have died--dear, dear, how sad it would have been--what
+would have become of me, too!  Well, when she recovers, and I tell her
+all that has happened, I am sure she'll think the same of him that I do.
+When she does begin, she will be asking me so many questions--I wish
+that I could answer one half of them--first, she'll want to know what
+has become of the poor old gentleman, her uncle.  Well, he certainly was
+a passionate, grumpy, sour old man as ever lived.  Yet he had his good
+points--he had a kind heart, which made him do many a kind thing in his
+own rough way.  He was generous, too, when he thought people deserving,
+and then he dotingly loved my young mistress, and intended to leave her
+all his money.  What shall I tell her has become of him?  I can tell her
+nothing; for I know no more than she does; or what has become of the
+brave Captain Bowse, or his polite mates, or even of that stupid
+long-legged fellow, Mitchell.  I'm afraid, after the dreadful noise I
+heard, they must all long ago have gone to the other world.  But to
+believe so would make my young lady sad, and would agitate her, and
+Signor Paolo says she must be kept quiet, so I will tell her I know
+nothing.  Ah! that will be the safest plan."
+
+While she was running on in this way, a gentle knock was heard at the
+door--she sprang up, and went to it cautiously.
+
+"Who is there?" she asked.
+
+"It is I, Paolo--may I enter?" answered a voice from without.
+
+"Oh yes, indeed you may, Signor Paolo," she whispered through the
+keyhole, and at the same time withdrew the bolts from the door.  As she
+did so she fancied she heard a bolt drawn slowly back outside.  When the
+door opened, a young man entered, habited in the Greek costume, though
+his features were more like those of one born in Italy, as was the
+language he spoke.
+
+"Has the lady yet awoke, and have you given her the potion I left for
+her?" he asked in a cautious tone.
+
+"_Si, signor_, she not only awoke, and drank up the draught, but she
+began to talk, and has now gone to sleep again," replied Marianna.  "See
+how sweetly she sleeps."
+
+The young man stepped across the cabin so that he might be able to see
+Ada's countenance.
+
+He observed the slight roseate tinge which had visited her cheek, and
+her calm, quiet breathing.
+
+"The lady does well," he whispered.  "I will send you another draught to
+give her when she awakes, which she will not however do until towards
+the evening; and then, when she speaks, try to tranquillise her mind,
+and induce her again to sleep.  The slightest agitation might be fatal
+to her."
+
+"Oh, then, signor, I will tell her anything you advise," answered
+Marianna.  "But I am much puzzled what to say; and I want you to tell
+me, among many other things, where we are going; because I know that
+will be one of the first questions she will ask me, and I'm sure I can't
+answer it."
+
+The young man hesitated before he spoke.
+
+"Tell her," he said, at last, "that we are going to a place where she
+will be kindly and honourably treated; but that you know not the name of
+it.  I am not the commander of this vessel, nor can I direct her course;
+and I am not allowed to say more than I have."
+
+"Oh, but you have great influence with him who is commander; and you can
+make him do what you like, I am sure," urged the Maltese girl.
+
+"Indeed, I cannot," answered the young man, mournfully.  "My influence
+extends but a short way, and can be but rarely exerted in the cause of
+right.  Were I to attempt too much, I should become altogether
+powerless."
+
+He stopped, as if he had said too much, and seemed about to leave the
+cabin.  He again, however, went up to Marianna, and whispered--"It may
+be better for your mistress and yourself that she remain as if overcome
+with illness till the conclusion of the voyage.  Urge her not to rise,
+or to attempt to go on deck; and tell her that the leech who has
+attended her, has prescribed perfect silence and calmness.  You
+understand me?"
+
+"I do, signor--though I cannot comprehend your reasons," returned
+Marianna.  "But, at all events, you can tell me when the voyage is to be
+brought to a conclusion.  It has lasted already a long time.  I did not
+think the Mediterranean sea was so large."
+
+"Even there I cannot satisfy you," returned he who was called by
+Marianna Signor Paolo.  "Certainly not for many days; it may be even for
+some weeks.  You observe, that we do not always continue sailing.  We
+visit the shore occasionally, and, sometimes, remain hours together at
+anchor."
+
+"I cannot say exactly that I discovered that," answered the girl.  "I
+thought sometimes the ship appeared to sail very slowly, and that we
+were very near the shore; but I knew not that we were altogether at
+rest.  Yet I cannot understand why you should not tell me where we are
+going to."
+
+"Perhaps I myself do not know," returned Paolo evasively.  "The
+commander of this ship does not always say where he will next steer."
+
+"There again--who is your commander?" asked the girl.  "It is strange
+you should not have told me his name."
+
+"You are much too curious, Marianna," answered Signor Paolo.  "I must
+again warn you to prevent your mistress from asking questions, which you
+cannot answer; and now I must leave you, for the present; for I dare not
+remain long at a time here."
+
+Saying this, to the great disappointment of Marianna, who had made up
+her mind to enjoy a long chat, he took his departure; and she bolted and
+locked the door behind him--saying, as she did so, "I will do as he
+tells me, at all events; and, as I may not go out, no one else shall
+come in without my leave."
+
+The bright rays of the sun were streaming through the stern-ports, and
+glittering on the arms and the gilt mouldings of the bulkheads, when Ada
+Garden again awoke.  Her eyes were dazzled by the bright refulgence
+which they encountered, and almost blinded, she closed them, till
+Marianna bethought of drawing the curtain across the foot of her couch.
+In so doing she saw that her mistress was awake.
+
+Now, although the glare of the sunlight had disturbed Ada's slumbers, it
+had had the beneficial effect of imparting somewhat of its brightness to
+her spirits; and instead of the gloomy oppression which she had before
+experienced, she now felt a glow of hope circling round her heart; and
+she was fully prepared to credit the favourable account of the state of
+affairs which Marianna was about to give her as soon as she was
+questioned.
+
+"Where am I--what has happened?" she asked, endeavouring to sit up.
+
+"You must take another draught before I am at liberty to tell you
+anything, my dear signora," answered Marianna, bringing her the goblet
+which Paolo had sent.  She drank the cooling mixture, and it served
+still further to revive her.  "Now let me arrange your pillows, and I
+will tell you all you want to know," said the faithful girl, arranging
+her couch.  "There, now you are comfortable!  Well, first, we are with
+very kind, considerate people, who do everything I wish; and we are as
+safe as we can be on board ship--though I wish ships had never been
+invented; then we are going to a very beautiful place--though, when we
+are to get there depends on the wind and other circumstances, which I am
+not clever enough to explain."
+
+She was running on in this style, when Ada cut her short by abruptly
+asking--
+
+"Where is my uncle?  Is he on board?  Why does he not come to me?"
+
+"Ah! there are some little mysteries which I cannot explain just now,
+and that is one of them," promptly returned Marianna.  "The signor
+colonel is not on board the ship, nor is the good Captain Bowse--they
+all went away in the other one; and we--that we might be much safer--we
+came on board this one.  Here we are, and here we must remain, till you,
+my dear signora, can get well enough to go on shore; but there is no
+hurry, for we could not be better off than we are now.  So, as you have
+asked a great many questions, which your doctor said that if you did I
+was not to answer, yet I have done so, you must try and go fast asleep
+again, and forget all about it."
+
+Ada was still too weak, she discovered, to talk; and her mind had not
+either sufficiently recovered its clearness to perceive the glaring
+evasiveness of her servant's replies; so, satisfied that her
+apprehensions of danger were groundless, she amused herself by examining
+the fittings of the cabin, and by watching through the open ports the
+magnificent effect of the setting sun, which now just dipping in the
+water, seemed to convert the whole ocean into a sheet of liquid gold.
+She thus discovered that the ship was steering an easterly course, from
+which she concluded that she was still on her voyage to Cephalonia.
+
+Two more days passed away, and served to restore to Ada Garden her
+strength both of mind and body, though the uncertainty of the past and
+present, and painful anticipations for the future, much retarded her
+complete recovery.
+
+In vain she questioned Marianna.  Her lively attendant knew but little--
+and even that, she had been taught, it would be beneficial to her
+mistress to conceal.  The young Italian had once entered the cabin while
+she was awake, and had felt her pulse, in order to be better able to
+prescribe for her, but had remained not a moment longer than was
+absolutely necessary in her presence.  She resolved, however, the next
+time he came to detain and question him; for the description given of
+him by Marianna, already made her place confidence in him.  She had not
+long to wait for an opportunity; for that evening, just before sunset,
+his knock was heard at the cabin doors, and with the usual caution he
+entered.
+
+"How is your mistress?" he asked of Marianna.  "Does she feel stronger?"
+
+"She is awake to answer for herself," returned the Maltese girl, "and
+will gladly speak to you."
+
+The young man started--he had so generally found her unconscious, that
+he seemed not to have expected to find her able to question him.  He,
+however, crossed the cabin and stood with his arms folded, leaning
+against the bulkhead, where she could not observe his countenance.  Ada
+was the first to speak.
+
+"I am glad you have come, signor," she said, in a low tone; "for I am
+anxious to express my gratitude to you for the attention with which, as
+my maid tells me, you have treated me during my illness, and to which I
+feel sensible I am much indebted for my recovery."
+
+"Lady, I have but performed the duty in obedience to the order of
+another," he replied, in a tone so calm that it sounded almost cold to
+her ear.  "I found you suffering, and I have employed what knowledge I
+possess of the healing art to restore you to health.  I rejoice to find
+that my efforts have not been totally unavailing."
+
+"To you, at all events, my gratitude is due," returned Ada.  "And I
+would lay myself under a still further obligation, by asking you to tell
+me what ship I am on board, how I came here, and to where I am being
+conveyed?"
+
+The Italian hesitated, as if he was framing an answer, which Ada
+remarked to herself.  At last he replied,--"Lady, your first question I
+may answer.  You are on board a man-of-war belonging to the patriot
+Greeks, who are struggling for their liberty against the infidel Turks;
+and you are in possession of the commander's cabin.  How you came here I
+am less able to inform you, and thus much only, further, I know, that we
+are sailing for one of the islands of the Grecian Archipelago, where you
+will be landed, and placed with those who will tend you carefully.
+Lady, I regret that I cannot tell you more."
+
+The suspicions of Ada were much increased on hearing these words.
+
+"I believe that you, signor, would not willingly deceive me," she
+observed.  "The very tone of your voice forbids the supposition.  But
+tell me, as the Greek patriots are on friendly terms with the English,
+should I desire to be placed on board a British ship-of-war, of which I
+believe there are several in these seas, would not your commander comply
+with my wishes?"
+
+"The commander of this ship is anxious to do all he can to gratify you,
+lady; but to do as you wish may not be in his power."
+
+"Signor," said Ada, glancing at his features.  "I have heard that voice
+before.  You speak Italian well; but so do many Greeks.  Tell me, are
+you the commander of this ship?"
+
+"Lady, I am not," returned the young man emphatically.  "I am but acting
+as the surgeon of the ship, to soothe the anguish of those who are
+wounded.  I have no authority on board."
+
+"Then why does not the commander visit me?" said Ada, "I would see him
+and urge my request to be placed under the protection of the British
+flag.  Surely he would not refuse to do so."
+
+"Oh, lady, do not ask to see him," exclaimed the Italian, forgetting his
+cold reserve and previous caution.  "You know not what misfortune you
+may bring on yourself by so doing.  He believes that you are now sick,
+almost to death, and that your only chance of restoration to health is
+rest and quiet on shore."
+
+"You speak in enigmas," said Ada, quickly taking alarm.  "Surely the
+commander of a man-of-war would not detain an English lady against her
+will; and my having recovered would make him still more anxious to
+enable me to return to my friends."
+
+The Italian stood for some minutes lost in thought.
+
+"You know not lady how you came to be on board this vessel," he said.
+"You now compel me to tell you.  Your attendant informs me that the ship
+in which you sailed from Malta was attacked by a corsair, and captured;
+but that you and she were the only persons conveyed on board the pirate
+vessel; and that you, having fainted during the engagement, were
+unconscious of all that took place.  It appears that for a short time
+only you remained on board the pirate, still in a happy state of
+unconsciousness of the misfortune which had befallen you, when we caught
+sight of the ship, chased, and captured her.  You and your attendant
+were found on board, respectfully treated, and in possession of the
+chief cabin.  This was a suspicious circumstance, for who could tell
+that you were not willingly on board."
+
+"Ah!" exclaimed Ada, almost smiling at the atrocious supposition.
+"Surely no one could believe that I was acting in consort with pirates?"
+
+"Lady, I do not; but all may not so readily believe the truth," returned
+the Italian.
+
+"But am I and my innocent attendant then to be punished as pirates,"
+asked Ada, with a hysterical laugh.
+
+"Scarcely so, lady; but you may be required to give evidence against
+them," returned the Italian.
+
+"I can give no evidence against them," said Ada; "for, as you have been
+informed, I have been deprived of consciousness since I was found on
+board the English brig."
+
+"The observation you make, lady, is much in your favour," remarked the
+Italian in a low tone.
+
+"Then I am to understand," continued Ada, not noticing it, "that I am,
+with an attendant, a prisoner in this cabin."
+
+"So I am compelled to confess, with much regret, is the case," replied
+the surgeon.
+
+"Then I understand it all," she ejaculated, compressing her lips, and
+fixing her eyes upon the young man, who had advanced a few paces to the
+after part of the cabin.  "From man I can expect no aid,--Heaven will
+not desert me."
+
+"Lady, God never deserts those who trust in him," he replied, about to
+quit the cabin.
+
+"Stay," exclaimed Ada.  "Those features, too, I have beheld before.
+Tell me where it was I saw you?"
+
+"Lady, fancy often strangely deceives us," returned the surgeon, in his
+former cold tone, and before she had time to ask another question, he
+had quitted the cabin.
+
+She, as Marianna had before observed, heard a bolt drawn across it.
+
+On board what vessel they were there might be a doubt; but there was
+none that they were prisoners.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FIFTEEN.
+
+Malta lay basking on the calm blue ocean, in the full radiance of a
+mid-day sun, hot, white, and dazzling, when Her Majesty's brig _Ione_
+made her number in the offing, approaching the port from the northward.
+It was observed at the signal station at the top of Government House,
+and from thence telegraphed to the guard-ship.  At the same time another
+sail appeared from the eastward.  She soon was made out to be a
+merchantman.  Both had a fair wind.  The brig of war stood in for the
+harbour on a bowline, her yards braced up on the larboard tack; and a
+very beautiful object she appeared, with all her canvas to her royals
+set to a nicety, as she rounded Fort Saint Elmo, and then kept away a
+little and run to her former anchorage, when, at a wave of her
+commander's hand, as if by magic, the whole crowd of canvas was in an
+instant clewed up and furled, and she brought up off Fort Saint Angelo.
+The merchant brig, which had the yellow flag flying, ran towards Port
+Marsa Musceit, and deliberately furling one sail after another, she
+dropped her anchor at the quarantine station, for she had come from the
+land of the plague, and many a day must pass before she could get
+_pratique_.  Captain Fleetwood ordered his gig and hastened on shore, in
+order to report himself and to deliver his despatches to the governor.
+He had just returned from a trip to Naples, where he had been sent to
+convey despatches and also to bring back a few casks of light wines for
+the governor's table.  He was cordially received by the old veteran,
+with whom he was a favourite.  He was just taking his departure when he
+was called back.
+
+"It may be for your satisfaction to learn, Captain Fleetwood, as I know
+that you are in a hurry to reach England, that you are to be sent home
+immediately with despatches and the mails," said the governor kindly.
+"I dare say we shall see you out here again before long, from what I
+hear, eh?"  Charles Fleetwood actually blushed.
+
+"I shall certainly come back to the Mediterranean, with or without a
+ship, as soon as I can," he answered; "and I hope I shall find you well,
+sir."
+
+"I shall be glad to see you, my lad, and I wish ye every success," said
+the old governor kindly, as Fleetwood took his final leave.  On his way
+back to the ship he called at the post-office, for he was anxious to
+ascertain, without delay, if there were any letters for him.  He hoped
+to receive one from Cephalonia.  He felt sure Ada would have contrived
+to write to him; and as he made the inquiry his heart beat much faster
+than usual.  He had a packet of letters delivered to him; he ran his eye
+hurriedly over the addresses.  Her handwriting was not to be seen.  They
+were all from England.  He then made every inquiry in his power from the
+shipping agents and others about the _Zodiac_; but nothing had been
+heard of her.  It was supposed she must long ago have arrived at her
+destination.  None of Colonel Gauntlett's friends had heard of him.
+Disappointed and out of spirits, he at last returned on board.  He was
+afraid that he should be obliged to leave Malta without hearing of her
+safe arrival; and then how many months might pass away before he might
+receive a line from her.  He did not, however, forget that others would
+be glad to hear that they were to revisit their homes, and as he passed
+Mr Saltwell, the first lieutenant, who was superintending the business
+of sending the governor's casks of wine on shore, he told him to prepare
+for sailing to England in a day or two.  Before the captain had thrown
+himself on the sofa in his cabin, which he did as soon as he reached it,
+the joyous news had flown through the ship.  Jemmy Duff was the first to
+carry the news into the midshipmen's berth.
+
+"Huzza, my lads!" he exclaimed, whisking round his cap, and letting it
+come down over the eyes of Togle, another youngster of his own standing,
+who was reeling after the fatigue of furling sails, and eating his
+dinner,--"Old England for ever!  Who'll bet that we shan't be kissing
+our sweethearts at home this day six weeks?"
+
+"Why, what do you mean?" cried several, looking up.
+
+"Who'll take my bet?" replied Duff.
+
+"Why, I will," answered Togle, who did not like being disturbed,
+clearing his head at the same time from the cap.  "I will, because I
+don't think such an ugly-looking chap as you are can have a sweetheart
+to kiss."
+
+Whereon he got the cap pressed down harder than before, with his nose in
+a slop of rum-and-water on the table.
+
+"But what makes you sing out in that way?" asked Tompion, the second
+mate.  "You don't mean to say that we are homeward-bound, youngster?"
+
+"I do, though; and the skipper has just come on board to say so,"
+replied Duff; and thereon there was a general shout of congratulation,
+for though all hands were very happy together, the thought of change was
+exciting, and that of home was dear to most of them.
+
+"Well, the hope of the Duffs will be once more pressed to the maternal
+bosom.  I congratulate you, Jemmy," said Togle, who was trying to get
+his own nose in order, after its flattening in more senses than one, by
+putting that of his antagonist out of joint a little.
+
+"Well, now we've had our cheer, and have all been flattering ourselves
+with the thoughts of home, I'm ready to take any bet Duff likes to make
+that we shall not be in England this day six weeks, or two months, if he
+likes, for I believe, after all, it's a hum of his; and I propose we cob
+him as a punishment for deceiving his Majesty's liege subjects and
+gallant officers as he has done."
+
+"I can prove, though, that I speak the truth," exclaimed Jemmy, who saw
+the day turning against him.  "Any one of you go and ask Mr Saltwell.
+He heard it from the captain, I tell you."
+
+"No, no," put in Togle.  "Punishment first and proof afterwards.  That's
+the way the Turks manage, and they are sensible people.  You can take
+the cobbing first, and then go and ask Mr Saltwell, or the skipper
+himself, if you like."
+
+"You go and be damned, Togle," retorted Duff.  "You know well enough
+that I'm speaking the truth; and mind, old chap, I shall keep you to
+your bet,--two months, you said."
+
+"I made no bet," answered Togle.  "You offered to bet yourself, but you
+didn't propose what it should be,--a dinner at the Star, or--"
+
+Just then a personage appeared at the door of the berth, who was
+immediately appealed to.
+
+"Oh! come in here, Muhajiar; you'll know all about it," cried Jack Raby.
+"Take a glass.  We haven't seen you for some time.  Have you heard
+whether we are going home?"
+
+"So the purser's steward told me, gentlemen, and it is generally
+believed throughout the ship," returned the individual addressed, who
+entered with such a bow as he could contrive to find room to make, and
+took his seat at the table, where with much gusto he drank off the
+porter offered to him.  He was a stout, tallish man, with a good
+expression of countenance, and most of those who remember Malta in those
+and even later days, will recollect him as one of the most respectable
+tailors in the place.  He had been, I believe, in the marines; but
+getting his discharge, set up for himself as a builder of garments, and
+soon managed to establish a very thriving business.  He was always on
+the watch, and the moment a ship dropped her anchor he would come on
+board to take orders.  He knew everybody and everything that was going
+forward, and was, consequently, a great authority.
+
+"Huzza! it is true, for Paolo Muhajiar has heard it," exclaimed Togle,
+looking hard at Duff.  "Well, Jemmy, I'll let you off your bet--but you
+will see that I am right."
+
+Signor Paolo Muhajiar took his leave, for he was not likely to get any
+orders, at all events, to be paid, if he executed them; and the berth
+was soon cleared of its rightful occupants--some to go on shore, others
+to their duties, and the rest to see what was going forward in the
+harbour.
+
+The scene there was amusing.  There were boats of all sorts and
+descriptions alongside; but there is one peculiarity of which Valetta
+may boast, to the disadvantage of nearly all other ports.  The boats
+intended for the conveyance of passengers are kept in good order, and
+beautifully clean; and the boatmen belonging to them are also very
+careful to dress neatly--their linen always looking as white as snow.
+Some of the boats alongside had goats on board, and the aquatic
+goat-herds were offering to milk them to supply milk for the officers'
+tea.  It is not a bad way to secure pure milk.
+
+The three mids of the _Ione_--Jack Raby, Duff, and Togle--were on the
+poop leaning over the quarter-rail, and amusing themselves by discussing
+affairs in general, and watching the panorama round them, when a boat
+with two thin, slight lads pulled out of the dockyard creek.
+
+"He for dive, signor," sung out one of them, looking up at our mids.
+
+"He says he'll bet you he'll dive to the bottom and be back again sooner
+than you will, Togle.  So overboard with you, and show him he's wrong,"
+said Duff, trying to heave over his messmate.
+
+"He says he'll bring up a shilling if you heave it overboard," answered
+Togle, retaliating by seizing the first coin he could lay hands on out
+of Master Jemmy's waistcoat pocket--it was fortunately only
+half-a-crown.  "There, Smaitch, it's too much for one of you though, so
+both of you be after it."
+
+And holding it up to show, before Duff could snatch at it, it was
+glancing through the clear water of the harbour.  Over went both the
+lads after it, eager to appropriate so rich a prize, and it is to be
+feared, had they had knives, they would have fought for it under the
+waves, and have neither of them returned.  Luckily Duff, as he could not
+save his own coin, had managed to seize a shilling from Togle, which
+served to attract the attention of the one who was furthest from the
+great prize, and both of them came up to the surface an instant
+afterwards, with the pieces of money in their hands.
+
+"Me for dive, signor--me for dive," they both again sung out, hoping to
+get another coin from Raby.
+
+"No, no more me for dive, you blackguards," he answered, shaking his
+head.  "You've had quite enough from these two Master Greens already."
+
+And the lads, after singing out a few more times, pulled on ahead, still
+crying, "Me for dive, signor; me for dive;" though little, beyond a few
+pence, did they get from the crew of an old Mediterranean cruiser like
+the _Ione_.
+
+"Now suppose there were sharks here as they have in the West Indies, it
+would not be quite so easy to go overboard as it is," observed Duff, who
+quickly recovered his temper, which he had lost with his half-crown.
+
+"Oh, these fellows would laugh at a shark," answered Raby.  "Why even
+the blackies don't fear them, and will attack and kill the largest.  By
+the by, did you ever hear of the big fellow they keep in Port Royal
+harbour to do the duty of guard-boat?  Not a man dares swim on shore
+when big Tom is on duty, and he never takes a snooze they say."
+
+"You don't mean to say so," said Togle, "but how do they manage to keep
+him there?"
+
+"Oh, the Government promised him a superannuated pension when he's no
+longer fit for work; but, as he finds he must go on shore to receive it,
+he is obliged to keep afloat; though he's been so many years at it that
+no one remembers when he first came on the station."
+
+"He must be a rum old joker," observed Duff.  "Hillo, here comes old
+Monsieur Collet with his cargo of ginger-beer.  Let's go and get some;
+for I'm very thirsty."
+
+And away they all three scrambled to the gangway, to which a boat had
+come with a little wizened old man in her, and laden with bottles of
+ginger-beer, and other refreshing drinks.
+
+"Hand us up ginger-beer there," sung out Jemmy Duff.  "But, I say,
+Monsieur Collet, remember, no pop--no pay."
+
+"Oh, no, signor.  All my ginger-beer pop very much."
+
+And, to prove the truth of his assertion, off went half a dozen of his
+bottles fizzing away together; some, however, remained, and the old
+Frenchman insisted on himself cutting the lashings of the corks to give
+full effect of the pop.  He would then put a far from clean thumb over
+the mouth to prevent the liquid from escaping; but still the froth would
+fiz and fume round it.
+
+"Thank ye, Monsieur Collet, none of your digitalis for me," remarked the
+assistant surgeon, who observed the operation, which, however, few
+others seemed to care for.
+
+The attention of the idlers was soon drawn off from old Collet, and his
+refreshing draughts, towards a boat which pulled alongside, filled with
+musicians, who if they produced sounds not especially harmonious, took
+care that they should be loud enough to be heard far and wide.
+
+"Huzza for the Banjee," sung out some of the men forward.  "Come,
+Smaitch, tip us a tune there--Go ahead, Banjee!" and on this requisition
+the performers in the Banjee boat began to exert their talents to the
+great delight of their hearers, who rewarded them with showers of pence.
+Not, however, of this character are the principal Banjee boats; which
+really contain very good musicians, who enliven the harbour with their
+sweet harmony, and are often some of the best performers from the Opera
+House.  Valetta harbour is in truth as lively and animated, as
+interesting and picturesque a sheet of water as is to be found in any
+part of the world.  On the north side of where the ship lay were the
+dazzling white walls of the city towering towards the blue sky, with the
+Marina below them, and numerous vessels moored along the quays; on the
+other side the frowning batteries of Fort Saint Angelo, and the Venetian
+looking canal, called Dockyard Creek; many of the houses having doors
+cut through the rock opening down to the water, the whole wearing an
+aspect more Oriental than European.  Then the boats, darting about in
+every direction, mostly painted bright green and yellow, with upright
+sterns rising high above the gunnel, and great big eyes painted on the
+bows--very often having the name of some ship or other on them in
+addition.
+
+And the boatmen, with their long red or blue caps, the tassel reaching
+to their waists, their gay waistcoats, their shirt-sleeves rolled up
+above their elbows exhibiting their brawny arms, their red sashes, their
+blue overall trousers, and their nankeen ones below, are not unworthy of
+remembrance.  But the most picturesque objects are the lateen sails with
+their long tapering yards either wing and wing when skimming along
+before the wind, or heeling over when close-hauled upon it.
+
+Such in part was the scene viewed from the deck of the _Ione_.
+
+Captain Fleetwood sat meditating in his cabin.  He had read all his
+letters from home.  They contained nothing that was not satisfactory,
+and yet his thoughts were far from cheerful.  He was out of spirits at
+not hearing from Ada; from being unable to gain any information about
+her.  He, however, had received no positive orders for sailing, and he
+trusted that tomorrow or the following day some vessel from Cephalonia
+might arrive, and bring a letter for him; still his heart would sink
+with forebodings of ill, when he recollected the suspicions he had
+entertained, and the warnings he had given to Bowse respecting the
+speronara and her crew.  A man who is in love, when he is absent from
+the object of his affections, is certainly very much to be pitied, if he
+has the slightest particle of imagination; for he is sure to employ it
+in conceiving that all sorts of misfortunes and miseries, and disasters,
+are befalling her.
+
+He was aroused from his meditations by a message from the governor,
+requesting to see him immediately, on urgent business.  He sprang up,
+put on his cocked hat, buckled to his sword-belt, and ordering his gig
+to be manned, pulled on shore as fast as he could, and toiled upwards,
+by steps innumerable, to the governor's palace.
+
+"Ye will be surprised, doubtless, Captain Fleetwood, at my sending for
+ye again to-day," said the governor, in a kind tone, as he entered.
+"But sit down, mon, sit down and rest yourself, for I have a very
+extraordinary communication to make to ye, which I cannot fail to think
+will agitate ye; and I therefore considered it advisable to speak to ye
+on the subject myself."
+
+"For Heaven's sake tell me what it is, sir," exclaimed Fleetwood, who,
+on first entering, had seen that something was wrong; and his fears
+having already pointed all round the compass, he had settled that it was
+in some way connected with Ada Garden.
+
+"Ye must be calm and tranquil, mon, in a case like this; for ye will
+require all your judgment and discretion to discover the means of
+accomplishing your object;" continued the governor, not noticing the
+interruption.  "And as I considered ye a mon in every way calculated for
+the purpose I have in view, and, moreover, particularly suited, from
+other reasons, which ye yourself will allow, I instantly made
+application to employ you on it."  Fleetwood almost groaned.  He could
+not again venture to interrupt the governor, though he was bursting with
+impatience to have his fears relieved or confirmed.  "Well, I see ye
+wish to be informed on the subject, which is very natural, Captain
+Fleetwood; and, therefore, I must premise that I have this day received
+notice of the arrival of a brig, a merchantman from Smyrna, and that she
+is now performing quarantine in Port Marsa Musceit.  Her master has
+written a statement which has been forwarded to me; and which, if
+correct, and I see no reason to doubt it, proves that further efforts
+are required to put down piracy and robbery and murder in these seas;
+and by God they shall not be wanting as long as I'm ruler here."
+
+"Well, sir; well, sir," ejaculated Fleetwood.
+
+"But ay, the statement.  It is to the effect that the brig _Mary Jane_,
+William Jones master, on her voyage from Smyrna to Malta, did in
+latitude ... degrees north, longitude ... degrees east, sight the hull
+of a vessel dismasted.  That not lying much out of her course, she
+hauled up for her; and on a nearer approach she appeared to be
+water-logged, by her lowness in the water, and the heavy way in which
+she rolled; that on getting close to her, the _Mary Jane_ was hove to,
+and a boat lowered into the water, into which the first mate and a
+boat's crew got, and pulled on board her.  It appears that the mate,
+when he first got alongside, thought that she had been brought into her
+present condition by a storm, from the appearance her shattered bulwarks
+presented; but that, climbing up her side, she found a number of
+shot-holes, and round-shot sticking in them, and her spars and rigging
+lying about the decks, evidently destroyed by shot.  He therefore came
+to the conclusion that she had been hotly engaged with an enemy of very
+superior force, as she herself only carried four guns; and it would
+require a large number, or else very rapid firing, for a long time, to
+send so many into her as he observed.  He soon discovered that there was
+no human being alive on board her; but on more minute examination, he
+was of opinion, from the state of the decks, that there had been some
+severe fighting, and a number of people killed on them.  All the bodies,
+however, had been thrown overboard.  The hold of the ship had been
+ransacked, was almost empty, as were the cabins, which had evidently
+been fitted up for passengers, and there were a few articles of female
+gear scattered about, which made him suppose that there had been ladies
+on board."
+
+"Great Heaven!" ejaculated Captain Fleetwood, starting up.  "The name,
+sir--the name?"
+
+"The name is just what the mate had considerable difficulty himself in
+discovering; for, you see, the master had a fancy to have it painted so
+low under the counter, that it could not be seen, sunk deep in the water
+as the ship now was.  At last, however, one of the men who accompanied
+him, found a book with the name of Bowse in it, which he concluded to be
+that of the master."
+
+"The same," groaned poor Fleetwood.  "It was the _Zodiac_.  She is
+lost--lost to me for ever.  Oh, Ada, Ada!"
+
+And again he groaned, as if death could alone relieve his heart from his
+load of misery.
+
+"Hoot, mon, hoot! ne'er say die while there's life!" exclaimed the bluff
+old governor.  "Ye have no positive proof that any one ye care for is
+dead or lost to ye.  I tell ye, the mate of the _Mary Jane_ found no one
+dead on board the vessel; and, as she had no boats remaining, it is just
+a plausible supposition that the survivors of the crew and the
+passengers may have escaped from the ship they thought was sinking in
+one of them; and we may hear of your friends turning up somewhere or
+other; for I do not pretend to deny that, when I first received notice
+of the outrage, I felt convinced that my friend, Colonel Gauntlett and
+his bonnie niece were among the sufferers."
+
+"Too true, they were, sir," replied Fleetwood, by a great effort,
+endeavouring to collect his thoughts for active service.
+
+"It was that supposition, and not ignorant also of your attachment to
+the young leddie, which made me resolve to apply, instanter, that the
+_Ione_ might be sent in the first place to search for the crew and
+passengers of the late brig the _Zodiac_; for I ought to say, she sank
+while the _Mary Jane_ was yet close to her; and then, it will be
+gratifying and soothing to your feelings, under the circumstances, to
+chastise the miscreants who have perpetrated this atrocity--and I do not
+suppose, Captain Fleetwood, that ye will be disposed to spare them more
+than I should."
+
+And the grim old soldier gave a look which indicated no inclination to
+be lenient.
+
+"We will hang every mother's son of them; and teach other villains that
+these seas can no longer be made the field for the exercise of their
+marauding disposition.  Ye understand, Captain Fleetwood--ye may take
+them alive if ye can; but ye may sink, burn, and destroy them all,
+sooner than let one escape."
+
+"I comprehend, sir, clearly," answered Fleetwood.  "When can I sail?"
+
+"I am expecting your orders every instant," replied the governor.  "It
+is a considerate change of destination, to be sure; but I knew the duty
+would be gratifying to you; and, fortunately, your brig is the only
+vessel on the station fit to be sent on it, while the despatches can go
+home by the _Racehorse_ as well.  Sit quiet a few minutes till the
+orders arrive; and I will in the mean time glance my eye over a paper I
+have to read."
+
+Captain Fleetwood threw himself back in his seat, and covered his eyes
+with his hands.  The old governor, who had purposely been more
+circumvolute even than usual, in order not too suddenly to shock his
+feelings, looked up at him with a kind expression, which showed that he
+truly entered into his wretchedness.
+
+"I have been considering, sir," said Fleetwood, suddenly looking up,
+"what clue can be found of the pirates' places of retreat; for, if they
+did not destroy those on board the _Zodiac_, I feel sure that they will
+have carried them off."
+
+"Ah! that is the proper spirit with which to meet a misfortune,"
+exclaimed the governor, rising and placing his hand on Fleetwood's
+shoulder.  "Look it in the face, and think how you can best overcome it.
+You deserve to succeed--and you will succeed, mon, I am sure.  Well, as
+to the clue, that is an important consideration, which must be thought
+of."
+
+Captain Fleetwood remained some time longer in consultation with the
+governor.  His orders, which had been sent up to the palace, were handed
+to him, and with them in his pocket he hurried on board.
+
+"Mr Saltwell," he said, as he ascended the side, "hoist the blue-peter,
+and take every means of getting all hands on board.  We sail to-night
+for the Levant.  I shall be happy to see you as soon as convenient in
+the cabin."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," mechanically answered the first lieutenant, who, as he
+looked at his commander, at first thought that he had gone out of his
+mind; but he soon saw that something extraordinary had happened to cause
+this sudden change in their destination, and without stopping further to
+consider what it was, he took the necessary steps to obey the orders he
+had received.  The announcement, as might have been expected, created,
+at first, no little dissatisfaction and disappointment throughout the
+ship, but that was before any one was aware of the reasons of the
+change.  Mr Togle was the first of the midshipmen to hear the news, and
+down he rushed into the berth, where most of his messmates were
+collected.
+
+"You've lost your bet, Jemmy," he exclaimed, giving Duff a slap on the
+shoulder.  "Instead of going to England we're bound for the Levant, old
+fellow; so fork out.  You betted a dinner at the Star, didn't you?"
+
+"Well, suppose I believed your humbug," answered Duff, "I'm ready to
+give you a dinner at the Star; but if we don't go to England, I'm sure I
+don't know how you are to eat it; so I've done you, old fellow!"
+
+Thereon the discussion grew warm, as to how a bet under such
+circumstances should be settled, no one believing Mr Togle's assertion
+of their change of destiny.  It was interrupted by the shrill pipe of
+the boatswain's whistle, and the hoarse cry of--
+
+"All hands, unmoor ship," which echoed along the decks.
+
+"There's something in the wind, any how," exclaimed Jack Raby, as they
+all jumped up to hurry to their stations.
+
+"I told you so," said Togle.  "We shall have plenty of adventures before
+we again see old England, depend on it."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SIXTEEN.
+
+There is in the northern portion of the Grecian Archipelago--and, from
+being out of the usual track of vessels, little known even to the modern
+voyager, and in the days of which I write still less so--a small island
+called by the mariners of those regions the Island of Lissa, though I am
+not aware under what name it appears in the English charts.  In extent
+it is five or six miles long, and from two to three broad; its lofty
+sides rise in most places as rocky precipices from out of the blue
+ocean, and only on the southern side can anchorage-ground be found.  It
+appears, on sailing round it at a short distance off, to be a barren,
+inaccessible rock--a fit abode only for the wild sea-fowl which may be
+seen hovering round it.  Its aspect, on approaching nearer, alters, and
+here and there a pathway, cut in zig-zag down the rock, may be
+discerned; and at one spot on the north, which appears at first to be a
+mere crevice in the rock, to the seaman who steers boldly towards it, an
+opening is revealed between the lofty cliffs, so narrow that the yards
+of a ship might touch either side, yet with the water so deep that one
+of large tonnage may enter, and find herself in a beautiful basin
+surrounded with a fringe of yellow sand--lofty rocks, of many hues,
+rising on every side, with a deep ravine running up into the interior,
+its sides also equally rugged and precipitous.  Neither tree nor shrub
+can be seen in this wild but picturesque spot: rock, water, sand, and
+sky, are the only component parts of the landscape.  At the time I speak
+of a few small light boats were drawn up on the beach, and two crafts of
+considerably larger size lay moored in the basin or cove.  They were
+long, low vessels, entirely decked over, and fitted to pull some twenty
+oars; they had thick stumpy masts, and long tapering yards, for lateen
+sails, now stowed fore and aft in the boats.  The sails were bent, the
+oars being placed along the thwarts, and they wore an air which showed
+they would be ready for sea at a moment's notice.
+
+There was somewhat a wicked look about them, at the same time they might
+belong to peaceable fishermen; for there were several nets hung up on
+poles along the shore, and at times a few old men might be seen mending
+them or cleaning the boats.  The chief communication between the cove or
+basin I have described and the interior of the island was by a narrow
+pathway, which ran along near the bottom of the ravine for some
+distance, and then, turning to the right with many a zig-zag, led along
+the edge of deep precipices till it reached the summit of the cliffs.
+At the very bottom of the ravine leaped and sparkled a bright, clear
+rivulet, the only stream in the island.  It might be seen far up,
+indeed, at what might be called the head of the ravine, rushing forth
+from between two cliffs, and bounding down a fall of two or three
+hundred feet in a mass of glittering foam.
+
+One of the wildest and most inaccessible spots in the island was in that
+portion to the right, or east of the cove--the point of land, indeed,
+formed by it and the sea, and bounded on the north by the ravine.  The
+only access to it from the rest of the island was from the north-east by
+a narrow neck of land, with the sea-cliffs on one side and those of the
+ravine on the other.
+
+This wild and rugged spot had been selected centuries ago, when the then
+powerful republic of Venice held sway over considerable territories in
+those seas, for the erection of a stronghold; and certainly no place
+could have been better adapted, by its position and nature, for defying
+the attacks of an enemy from without, or for guarding any rich argosies
+taking shelter in the bay below.  It was of course for the purpose of
+protecting their commerce that this rock had been seized on and
+fortified.  It had probably also at some other period been increased and
+strengthened on the land side, and occupied for less laudable objects
+than the mere protection of commerce.  Whatever might have been the
+original intention of its erection and its subsequent use, the massive
+towers and turreted walls had long since been disused, and had fallen
+into the decay of years, unheeded and unknown, except by a few families
+of fishermen who had from generation to generation followed the same
+occupation.  I call them fishermen, because such was the designation
+they would have given themselves, had they been questioned on the
+subject, and very properly so, for that was the occupation they and
+their fathers had followed from time immemorial--when they happened to
+have no other more lucrative or interesting employment.  Another change
+had, however, of late years come over the ancient ruins, and though it
+could not be said that they had assumed much of their pristine
+appearance, some of the least dilapidated portions, at all events, gave
+signs of being the habitations of human beings.  One tower especially
+had been roofed in, as had a building attached to it, and smoke had been
+seen to ascend from its hearth; and faces, hitherto strangers to the
+island, had appeared at its windows.  The village in which most of the
+old inhabitants of the island resided was on the opposite side of the
+ravine, in a spot almost as inaccessible as that on which the castle
+stood, but somewhat more convenient for a congregation of persons; and
+as it was in a manner fortified by art, in addition to what nature had
+done, they never found the Turks anxious to attempt the no easy task of
+dispossessing them.  Although the exterior of the island was so rugged
+and unprepossessing, and so destitute of verdure and cultivation, there
+were spots in the interior where the orange, the citron, the pear, the
+apple, and the vine flourished in rich luxuriance; the sides of the
+hills were clothed with olive-trees, and the more even portions with
+fields of waving corn, amply sufficient for the simple wants of the
+population; and though cattle might be rare, thriving herds of goats
+found herbage among the rocks, and on the narrow ledges of the rugged
+cliffs.  In fact, everything which the mere unsophisticated wants of man
+could require, the island itself supplied, except clothing and weapons;
+and for the purpose of collecting these the misticoes in the cove were
+found extremely useful,--no spot, indeed, could be more calculated for
+the abode of peace, innocence, and rural simplicity--a complete island
+Arcadia; and so it would possibly have become, had the inhabitants been
+less addicted to maritime adventure; but then they would have had to go
+about in the state in which were our first parents, before the fall, or
+to have dressed in goats' skins; and at all events they would have had
+no arms to defend themselves against the Turks; so that their frequent
+naval expeditions might have been prompted by the excess of their
+patriotism, and would, therefore, to say no more about them, have been
+most laudable.
+
+But the part of the island with which we are most interested is that to
+the east of the bay, where the ruined castle was situated.  The tower
+which I have described as having been rendered somewhat habitable, stood
+in a position by which it commanded an extensive view to the southward
+and eastward, as also of the bay or cove below.  Yet, although placed
+apparently in so exposed a situation, so completely surrounded was it by
+rocks of the same hue as the stone of which it was constructed, that at
+a short distance off only, on the sea, it could in no way be
+distinguished from them.
+
+I must introduce the reader to an apartment in the upper part of the
+said tower, which possessed two windows, one looking to the south, the
+other into the cove.
+
+The room presented an appearance which could not at all have been
+expected from the condition of the outside.  It was furnished, not only
+completely, but most richly and luxuriously, yet in a way which showed
+that the hand of a professional artist had not been employed.  The floor
+was covered with a Turkey carpet of the most valuable description, and
+round the room, in Oriental style, were arranged couches, with the
+softest cushions, and carved with thick silks of varied patterns.  The
+walls were lined with damask hangings, of a light blue, and the ceiling
+was arranged in the form of a tent, composed of cottons, which had
+probably been fabricated in the looms of England.  There were tables in
+the room, and seats scattered about around them.
+
+Besides the hangings on the walls, they were ornamented with pictures of
+much value, and racks of arms, richly chased, and arranged so as to form
+many fanciful devices.
+
+The whole appearance of the apartment showed that it had been hurriedly
+fitted up, with lavish disregard of expense, and with materials which
+might have been most conveniently at hand, but were not originally
+intended for the purpose to which they were devoted.  The arrangements,
+also, were such as a seaman might be supposed to have made, more,
+probably, than any other person.  The room had an occupant--a young and
+very beautiful girl.  Her beauty was of the pensive cast.  She had large
+black, gazelle eyes, a clear olive complexion--clear as purity itself,--
+and a figure slight and graceful, with a cast of feature of the most
+classic mould.  As she sat at the window, gazing out on the blue sea,
+ever and anon a slight roseate tinge would appear in her soft cheek, and
+vanish rapidly as the thoughts which made it rise.  Her costume was
+rather fanciful, than either Grecian or of any other people, and though
+elegant and becoming, she appeared to have formed it from a profuse
+supply of costly materials placed at her disposal.  It partook, however,
+of the character of the dress of the East, though European taste might
+have been detected in it.
+
+She seemed very sad; for, though she held a book in her hand, with which
+she was apparently endeavouring to divert her attention from melancholy
+thoughts, her eyes would constantly wander over the wide blue sea, the
+only object visible from the window, and a pearly drop from her dark eye
+would steal down her cheek, and fall unheeded on the page before her,
+while an unconscious sigh would burst from her heaving bosom.
+
+There was evidently a weight on her young heart, a grief which was
+wearing out the elasticity of her spirits, withering her glorious
+beauty, and making her aged before her time.  Perchance she mourned the
+absence of one she loved, and was wearied with anxiety for his return;
+perhaps the canker-worm of remorse was at work within her, for a fault
+committed and irretrievable; perhaps she was the victim of lawless
+outrage, a captive against her will; perhaps she had been severed from
+all she loved on earth, and the bright hopes of life had been blasted
+for ever.  At last she closed her book with a smile; but it was one of
+pain and bitterness at the hopelessness of her attempt to divert her
+mind from the contemplation of the present.  A guitar, such as is
+generally used in Italy, lay on the divan near her; she took it up, and
+ran her fingers over the strings.  For a few minutes she struck a
+plaintive air, in consonance with her feelings, and then, almost
+unconsciously, she added her voice to the strain in a rich flow of
+melody.  Her words, too, were sad, and the language was that of Italy.
+
+  Nina's Song.
+
+  The earth is all as lovely here,
+  The sky as bright and fair,
+  And flowers of every hue and shade
+  Perfume the southern air.
+  The sparkling sea lies at my feet,
+  So clear, it seems a lake,
+  And tiny waves, with snowy crest,
+  Alone the silence break;
+  And yet I weep from day to day
+  For that loved home, now far away!
+
+  I almost wish 'twere not so like
+  My loved Italian land,
+  Its southern flowers, its gorgeous skies,
+  Blue sea, and golden sand.
+  For while I gaze, a whispering voice
+  Steals sadly through my brain,
+  And tells me, I must never hope
+  To see that spot again.
+  And I must weep, from day to day
+  For that loved home, now far away!
+
+  I close my eyes, and fancy paints
+  So vividly and clear,
+  Each lovely spot, each well-known sound.
+  To mem'ry ever dear;
+  I hear again the vesper-bell,
+  Chiming to evening prayer;
+  While the cheerful song of the Gondolier,
+  Floats through the balmy air.
+  And thus I dream till dawn of day,
+  Of that fair home, now far away!
+
+  And yet the chain which binds me hero
+  Is dearer far to me,
+  Than the beauties of my palace land,
+  Girt by the glorious sea.
+  For his dear love, I left them all,
+  And while that love is mine,
+  If dreary wastes were now my home,
+  Think not I would repine.
+  Yet still one thought, from day to day,
+  Tells of my home, now far away!
+
+  But if his love should ever fade,
+  Like twilight o'er this shore,
+  And whisper'd words of tenderness,
+  Now mine, be heard no more!
+  Then no reproach shall meet his ear,
+  No weeping meet his eye;
+  I'd leave him ere he form'd the wish,
+  And leave him but to die;
+  For I would seek, ere close of day,
+  Death, in that home now far away.
+
+As she ceased, a tap was heard at the door; and she, bidding whoever was
+without to enter, a young girl appeared, and closing the door,
+approached her.  She wore the red embroidered Greek cap, with her hair
+hanging in two long plaits behind, full trousers, and a silk waistcoat,
+reaching to the knees.  Her age might have been about fourteen, and she
+was very pretty, with black, flashing eyes, and a figure rather full
+than slight, and somewhat below the common height, and a countenance to
+which health and spirits gave an animated expression, which would have
+made features far inferior to hers appear to advantage.
+
+She seated herself on a cushion at the feet of the young lady with an
+affectionate familiarity, and looking up in her face, said, in the soft
+tongue of modern Greece--
+
+"Oh, do continue those sweet strains, lady.  Though they made me sad, I
+came up on purpose to listen to them, and to make my heart lighten the
+grief of yours by sharing it with you."
+
+"Thanks, my good Mila.  You are ever kind," answered the lady; and
+though she spoke Romaic, she had difficulty in expressing herself.  "I
+value your love the more that I possess that of no other."
+
+"Your sweet temper and your sweet voice have won you more friends than
+you suppose, lady," answered the Greek girl.  "My young brother would
+die for you, I know, and my old grandfather, Vlacco, has his heart
+softened towards you, I am sure."
+
+"Does Vlacco feel pity for me?  Then would he, do you think, allow us to
+wander forth to explore this rocky island?  I am weary of remaining shut
+up in so small a compass for so long a time."
+
+"I will try and persuade him, lady; and if it is not contrary to his
+orders I think he will allow us to go together," returned the girl.
+"But you know, lady, since the futile attempt of Signor Paolo, your
+brother, to carry you off, you have constantly been watched."
+
+"I know it, and therein is my misery.  He knows I would not quit him if
+I could; and how can a weak girl escape from this rock-bound prison
+except--" she paused and looked at the deep blue sea which lay at their
+feet--"except it were to seek that rest which can be found, by one like
+me, only beneath the calm bosom of yonder ocean."
+
+"Oh, lady, let not such dreadful thoughts enter into your mind!"
+exclaimed the young Greek, looking up at her with a face in which pity
+blended with alarm.  "Come, we will wander forth, as you wish it, far
+into the country; the change of scene, the fresh air, and exercise will
+cheer your spirits, and I am sure my grandfather will not deny our
+request to be allowed a little freedom."
+
+A silk scarf and such boots as the Turkish women wear when they venture
+abroad, completed the Italian lady's walking costume, and following the
+young Greek, they descended from her lofty tower.  The flight of the
+steps which led to the ground was steep and narrow, and were the same
+which had been used in former days, repaired in places where the stones
+had given way, bywood work slightly run up.  This, a few strokes of an
+axe would serve to destroy, and the summit of the tower would be
+immediately rendered inaccessible.  The story immediately beneath the
+one inhabited by the lady was fitted up as a residence, though with much
+less attention to comfort and elegance.  There were several couches for
+sleeping, and a few seats and tables; but in the corners of the room
+furthest from the windows were piled up in one, chests and bales of
+goods, silks, cottons, and woollen cloths; in another, a collection of
+arms, muskets, and cutlasses, and boarding-pikes.  There were a few
+small brass guns, some mounted on carriages and others on swivels, such
+as are carried on the gunnels of ships, or on the bows of boats; and
+there were shot and cases which looked as if they contained powder.
+Indeed, there was altogether a large collection of valuable goods, and
+arms and ammunition sufficient to protect, it if the men were found to
+use them.  In the recesses for the windows, which were very narrow, were
+fitted platforms, which were evidently intended to place the
+gun-carriages on, as there were ring-bolts to which to make breechings
+fast, in order to prevent their running too far back at the recoil.  The
+windows, as in the story above, looked down on the harbour, and seaward,
+but there was another on the land side which commanded a view of the
+narrow neck of land which led to the platform on which the castle stood.
+The lower part of the tower was much in the same state in which it had
+been left centuries before.  The first story, as it were, had
+disappeared, so that there was an empty space for what may be called the
+height of two stories; and, as there were no windows of any description,
+it appeared dark and dreary in the extreme.  A steep path led round it
+several times till it reached the gateway, which looked towards the sea
+and the most inaccessible part of the cliff.  Any person, on entering
+this lower division, would not have supposed, from what he could
+observe, that the upper part would have afforded so great a contrast by
+the richness and luxury displayed there.  On a more minute examination,
+however, of the basement floor, it would have been discovered that a
+stage had been raised from the earth, on which were placed a number of
+large jars of wine, casks of olives, cases of figs, and sacks of corn
+and other grain, indeed, provision sufficient to support a body of men
+for a considerable time.  There were also some heavier guns than those
+seen above, and spars, and cordage, and other munitions for fitting out
+a ship.
+
+The bottom of the flight of steps by which the two young girls had
+descended led to the side of this chamber farthest from the door, and
+they had some little difficulty, after leaving the bright light reigning
+through the upper regions, in finding their way across it.  The Greek
+then, with her little hand, struck the door as hard as she was able, to
+call the attention of some one without to open it; but the noise she
+made was insufficient for the purpose.  At last she was obliged to try
+the effect of her voice.
+
+"It is I, your grandchild, Mila.  Open the door, I say; open the door,
+Vlacco!" she exclaimed; but no one answered to her call.  "So he thought
+I was going to remain some time with you, lady, and I verily believe he
+has gone off his post.  Now, if we could but have managed to get the
+doors open, we might have gone out without his leave, and when he comes
+back, he would find the birds flown."
+
+"It is useless wishing that," said the Italian.  "The door is too
+strongly fastened, and it shows me that I am a prisoner, and no longer
+trusted; let us return up-stairs."
+
+The Greek girl thought a little, as if unwilling to give up their
+object.
+
+"We will do as you propose, lady," she said at last; "but we will not
+let him know that we came down, and are aware that he leaves his post;
+so, another day he may not fasten the gate, and we may get out, and
+wander where we like, without asking his leave."
+
+They were about returning, when little Mila exclaimed--
+
+"Stay, I think I hear him coming, and we won't tell him we have been
+waiting; but, after he has been here a little, I will ask to be let
+out."
+
+They waited accordingly for some time, during which some person was
+heard moving slowly about outside, when little Mila again exclaimed, as
+loud as she could call, "Vlacco, Vlacco! let me out, I say, grandfather;
+you have bolted the door, as if a storm was blowing to burst it open."
+
+At last the bolt was withdrawn, and the door opening, an old Greek, with
+white locks escaping from under his red cap, and a thick, grey
+moustache, stood before them.  He had a rough, weatherbeaten
+countenance, and dark eyes, deeply sunk in his head, with a very stern
+expression.  His appearance was altogether forbidding, and his
+countenance was one which it would make any person very uncomfortable to
+look at, who knew that his life depended on the amount of mercy and pity
+to be found in his bosom.  He must have been a powerful, active man in
+his youth; but a weight of years had sadly pulled down his strength, and
+palsied his once unfaltering hand.
+
+"What a noise you make, little one.  You seem to be in a great hurry to
+get out of the gilded cage," he exclaimed, not seeing the Italian who
+stood in the shade.  When, however, she stepped forward, he altered his
+tone, which became as courteous as his gruff nature would allow.
+"Pardon, lady," he said, "I was not aware of your presence.  What is it
+you wish?"
+
+"Why, we wish to wander forth, and explore the island, grandfather,"
+answered the young girl, speaking for the Italian, who had difficulty
+both in comprehending old Vlacco's way of speaking, and in answering him
+in Romaic.  "Now, I will not hear any excuses; I am going with the lady,
+who is ill, and will pine to death if she is kept shut up in this way;
+and, if you do not think we are able to take care of ourselves, you can
+come too.  It is a pity we have not got wings, and then you might clip
+them as they do those of the wild sea-fowl, to prevent their flying
+away."
+
+The old Greek offered a number of objections to the project; among
+others, that if anything happened to the lady, his life would pay the
+forfeit; but they were all overruled by his grandchild, who laughed at
+his fears, and at length she and the Italian set out on their
+expedition.  They took the way along the neck of land of which I have
+spoken, among rocks which towered up in many fantastic shapes, without a
+sign of vegetation on their weatherworn summits, and overlooking
+precipices which descended many hundred feet of perpendicular height
+into the sea below.  At last they emerged from this wilder tract, and
+descending a gentle slope covered with many a sweet-scented shrub, on
+which the bees delight to rest, they looked down into the centre of the
+island.  Here a scene of a nature totally different to what they had
+left met their view.  Every spot of ground was cultivated to the utmost
+extent.  Below their feet was an orange grove, the trees of which were
+laden with the ripening fruit; the side of a neighbouring hill was
+covered with vines wide spreading along trellises gracefully arranged.
+Several orchards of apple and pear trees were seen in the distance.
+Beyond were fields of Indian corn waving in the breeze, and on the
+higher ground millet and barley were seen growing.
+
+"We may boast, lady, that our island is not altogether the barren rock
+those might suppose who have looked forth only from the windows of the
+castle," said Mila.  "And from yonder hill to the north let us enjoy the
+view over the whole of it, if you will venture so far."
+
+The Italian expressed her readiness to go there; for though, as she
+said, she had before visited it, a long time since then had passed away.
+
+As the two young girls passed through the fields, several husbandmen,
+employed in them, gazed at them with a somewhat furious look; but they
+all knew the granddaughter of old Vlacco, and quickly concluded who her
+companion was.  The view from the summit of the hill, which was the
+highest part of the island, extended, as Mila had said, not only over
+the whole of the island, but embraced a wide circle of the surrounding
+sea, and of many a neighbouring isle and islet, which appeared in every
+direction, rising from the bosom of the deep, some with their outlines
+clear and defined, others of various shades of blue, the most distant
+seeming like faint clouds floating in the horizon.  They had enjoyed for
+some time, from this rocky post, the breeze which in that elevated
+position came cool and refreshing, when the quick eye of little Mila
+discerned a white sail, a mere speck, upon the blue sea.  It skimmed
+rapidly along, and approached the island.  They watched the vessel with
+breathless attention.
+
+"She has two masts; she is a brig of some size," cried the island girl,
+who was well accustomed to distinguish the different rigs of vessels.
+
+"It is, it must be his bark," exclaimed the Italian.  "Oh! let us hurry
+to meet him, or he may come and find me absent."
+
+"The brig cannot arrive till long after we shall reach the tower,"
+answered the Greek girl, following, however, the wishes of her
+companion.
+
+On reaching the tower they saw the shores of the bay below crowded with
+people, all bustle and animation, in expectation of the approaching
+sail; but neither of the girls could determine, from the great distance
+at which she still was, whether she were indeed the looked-for brig or a
+stranger.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER SEVENTEEN.
+
+A bright moon was floating in the pure ether of that lovely clime, as
+the _Ione_, under all sail, glided out from the calm waters of the
+harbour of Valetta on to the open sea.  No sooner had she got beyond the
+shelter of Saint Elmo than she heeled over to the force of a brisk
+north-westerly breeze, which sent her through the water at the rate of
+some seven or eight knots an hour, to the no small satisfaction of all
+on board.  No time had been lost in getting ready for sea.  The purser
+had got off his stores with unusual despatch; the first lieutenant had
+received what he required from the dockyard; the officers, who were on
+shore, had been sent for and collected; sea stock had been laid in by
+the caterers of the gun-room and midshipmen's mess, and Signor Michael,
+from Nix Mangiare Stairs, had not neglected to send the groceries which
+were ordered; little was forgotten, and no one was left behind.  The
+commander had been the most busy, and those who saw the calm and
+composed way in which he went about the business in which he was
+occupied, could scarcely have supposed the anguish which had so lately
+rent his mind.  After he had spoken to his first lieutenant, he had
+again gone on shore, and tried to find out the three Greeks who had
+deposed to having been robbed by pirates; but as they had quitted Malta,
+he looked over the copies of their depositions, and he there found it
+stated that the vessel which had attacked theirs was a large polacca
+brig, supposed to be the _Sea Hawk_, and there was further a full
+description of her and her commander.  The boatman, Manuel, was
+examined, but little could be gleaned from him but a description of the
+person he had put on board the speronara, which answered to that given
+by the Greeks; and the conclusion arrived at was the correct one, that
+he was no other than Zappa himself, and that he had employed the
+speronara merely to bring him to Malta and to carry him on board his own
+vessel, which must have remained all the time in the offing.  It might
+be supposed that Captain Fleetwood would first have gone in search of
+the speronara, but he considered that by so doing he should lose much
+valuable time without a prospect of gaining any adequate information;
+and he therefore resolved at once to sail to the eastward, touching at
+Cephalonia, on the chance of learning something to guide his future
+course.
+
+The moment the object of the voyage was known, there was not a man or
+boy on board who did not zealously enter into it; and many became almost
+as eager to fall in with the _Sea Hawk_, and to recover the prisoners,
+if any were still alive, as could have been the commander himself.  It
+was the universal subject of conversation, morning, noon, and night, in
+the gun-room, the midshipmen's berth, and at the messes of the petty
+officers and men.  Many a midnight watch was made to pass rapidly away
+by discussions as to the probabilities of their success, and with yarns
+of length interminable, about pirates and robberies on the high seas.
+Far too sacred were held the feelings of the commander to allow any one
+to allude even to the subject to him; and though he doubtlessly thought
+more than any one else about it, he endeavoured to maintain his usual
+tranquil exterior.  It was sad, however, to perceive that anxiety was
+rapidly thinning his cheek and dimming the lustre of his eye, though it
+could not quench the fire which would urge him to continue the search as
+long as life endured.  He remained much in his cabin, poring over charts
+of the Greek Archipelago, and studying all the books he possessed,
+describing the islands.  When he came on deck, it was to glean
+information from those who had visited that part of the Mediterranean,
+or to discuss with Saltwell the plan of operations he had commenced
+arranging, but in the details of which he purposed to be guided by the
+accounts he should receive wherever they touched.
+
+Every sail they sighted was overhauled, provided she did not lead them
+much out of their course, in the hopes of gaining tidings either of the
+survivors of the _Zodiac's_ crew or of the pirate brig, and also to urge
+those bound in the same direction to aid in the search.
+
+Every one on board the _Ione_ prayed for a fair wind, and plenty of it,
+to carry them along rapidly to the scene of their operations.  The
+officers, who could but sympathise with their captain from having known
+Ada Garden, were, of course, the most eager, and never, perhaps, were a
+set of men collected better able to aid in accomplishing the same
+object.
+
+Mr Saltwell, the first lieutenant, was a first-rate officer.  He had
+been constantly before at sea as a first lieutenant; for though his good
+qualities were known in the service, he had very little interest.
+Whatever was the work in hand, he contrived to get it done in the best
+possible way without noise or trouble, so that he was always liked by
+the men, and the ships in which he served were kept in excellent order.
+In appearance he was slight and dark, for his countenance was well
+bronzed by tropical suns, and he was too active to grow fat.  His
+manners were gentlemanly, though he had a remarkably small amount of
+soft-sawder about him; and all sincerity himself, he could not believe
+that people were speaking falsely to him, and was at times rather apt to
+come out roundly with the truth, to the astonishment of those who heard
+him; so that he was clearly not fitted to be a courtier.  Captain
+Fleetwood had a great respect and regard for him, as he knew him well,
+for they had before served together.
+
+The second lieutenant, Henry Linton, was a young man of good family and
+considerable interest, he had been made a lieutenant as soon as he had
+served his time, and he expected shortly to receive his commander's
+commission.  He was a very gentlemanly, amiable fellow; and as he had
+good sense and much observation, and had always attended to his duty, he
+was a very fair seaman and a good officer.  In his heart of hearts he
+rather pitied, not to say despised, Saltwell, for his want of the polish
+he possessed and his indifference to the elegancies of life, though he
+was not unable to appreciate his messmate's frankness of manner and
+truthfulness of character.  His foible was his admiration for the poets,
+and his belief that he could write poetry and was a first-rate critic.
+
+The purser, Mr Jones, was an honest, painstaking man, with a large
+family, and he came to sea for their benefit, after having nearly given
+up the service.
+
+Than the master, no one in the service was a better navigator.  He was a
+self-taught genius, for he had gone to sea originally before the mast,
+and even in that capacity had found time to gain instructions in
+navigation, geography, history, and many other sciences.  He was for
+some time rated as a schoolmaster of a frigate, and afterwards entered
+as a master's assistant, and was soon promoted to the rank of master.
+Mr Norton was, notwithstanding his early associates, a man of pleasing,
+gentlemanly manners, and a real favourite with all hands, and his vast
+fund of information and anecdote made him a great acquisition to a mess.
+
+The surgeon, Mr Viall, was, for a wonder, an Englishman.  He was
+supposed to be able to amputate limbs with great accuracy, and was a
+very respectable man.  Though he had been some years at sea, he had
+never contrived to learn anything about nautical affairs; and one day,
+in Malta harbour, he went on board a large merchantman, which happened
+to be brought up at no great distance from his ship, and was going below
+before he discovered that he had got into the wrong box.
+
+The assistant-surgeon, O'Farrall, was an Irishman, and much more of a
+character.  He had, shortly before the time of which I speak, come to
+sea for the first time.  A day or two after he had joined the _Ione_,
+one of the marines insulted him by quizzing his Irish brogue, so he
+forthwith lodged his complaint with Mr Saltwell.  The first lieutenant
+desired him to point out the man.
+
+"Faith, I don't remember exactly the cut of his mug," said he; "but I
+made sure of knowing the spalpeen again by that same, that his name is
+Tower."
+
+"How do you know that his name is Tower?  I think he must have deceived
+you.  We havn't a man of that name on board."
+
+"Oh! by--, he couldn't decave me, lieutenant, darlin', then; for though
+he didn't recollect it, I'll be sworn, or he'd a kept a more dacent
+tongue in his mouth, I saw his name of Tower graven on his musket."
+
+Most of the other members of the midshipmen's berth I have already
+described.
+
+There was a mate of the name of Grummit, who had been for some years
+waiting for his promotion, but was of so hopeful a disposition, that he
+always expected his commission out by the following packet; and there
+was a master's assistant, called Samuel Spike, who considered himself
+capable of commanding the allied fleets of Europe; and a clerk, named
+Smith, who intended, when he had made his fortune and retired from the
+Service, to become First Lord of the Treasury; but as these delusions
+did not prevent them from attending to their duties, and they certainly
+appeared to contribute very much to the happiness of the young men who
+entertained them, nobody interfered with them.  I ought not to forget to
+mention among the officers, the boatswain, gunner, and carpenter.  The
+most remarkable circumstance connected with them was, that their names
+were respectively Brown, Black, and White.  They were all good seamen,
+and properly impressed with the importance of their offices.  If Brown
+had, like his superiors, a weakness, it was in the belief that not a
+boatswain in the service could pipe better, or had a louder voice than
+himself, as also that he deserved a much higher rating than he
+possessed.
+
+"A sail on the larboard bow," hailed the look-out from the mast-head.
+
+"What does she look like?" inquired Mr Saltwell, who was on deck.
+
+"A large brig, sir, close hauled on the larboard tack," was the answer.
+
+The wind at the time was about north-west.
+
+The first lieutenant, with his glass slung across his shoulder,
+instantly went aloft.  He could see about half way down her topsails,
+and there was something in the look of them which made him think it was
+worth while overhauling her.  He came down, and went into the cabin to
+report her to Captain Fleetwood.
+
+On his return the yards were braced up a little, and the course altered
+three points more to the northward.  Captain Fleetwood soon came on
+deck, and went aloft to examine the chase.  As the _Ione_ was already
+carrying as much canvas as could possibly be set, little more could be
+done to make her sail faster.
+
+Of course, bound as they were on what might prove a long and arduous
+cruise, it would not have done to start the water, or lighten the ship
+in any way; and, in a smooth sea, the common expedient of slinging the
+hammocks, and making the watch below turn in with round shot in their
+arms, would have been of no avail.  The breeze, however, favoured them;
+for while the _Ione_ was heeling over with it almost to her bearings,
+the chase lay nearly becalmed.  She had no royals set, and her foresail
+was hauled up, so that they neared her rapidly.
+
+"I suspect our friend there keeps a bad look-out; for I don't think he
+has seen us yet," observed Mr Saltwell to the master.
+
+"If that is the case, he is not the fellow we are in search of,"
+answered Mr Norton.  "A pirate would have his eyes about him."
+
+"Perhaps, as he is becalmed and cannot get away, he hopes, by apparent
+indifference to our approach, to deceive us as to his character,"
+suggested Linton; "or he may have mistaken us for a merchantman, and
+expects to make a prize of us."
+
+"He'll find he's caught a Tartar," said Saltwell; "but he must be blind
+not to see by the cut of our canvas what we are, even at this distance."
+
+"Perhaps, he trusts to a fleet pair of heels, and we shall have him
+showing them to us before long," said Linton.  "I do not think there is
+anything yet to prove that he is not the pirate we are looking for.
+That fellow Zappa is a bold and crafty scoundrel, as his late visit to
+Malta and his successful attack on the Austrian brig sufficiently
+proves.  He may have a mind to engage us, perhaps."
+
+"You don't know the Greeks, if you think so," said Saltwell.  "Why, you
+must have pictured him to yourself like one of the heroes in the
+romances you are so fond of, who fight alone for love and glory, and
+whose greatest delight is to lay their ships alongside an enemy of
+greater force, in order to prove how superior knaves are to honest men.
+Depend upon it, Signor Zappa will keep clear of us, if he can."
+
+"Well, but what do you say to his attacking an Austrian man-of-war, and
+capturing her?" urged Linton.  "That looks something like the chivalry
+of piracy."
+
+"As to that, in the first place, he discovered, by some means or other,
+that she had specie on board; and she was also of much less force than
+his vessel.  He carries, it is said, sixteen guns, and she had but
+eight," answered Saltwell.  "So he followed her for some time, till he
+surprised her one dark night, and captured her before her crew had time
+to go to quarters.  It did not say much for Austrian naval discipline,
+though it was not an enterprise Zappa had any great reason to boast of,
+either."
+
+"If the account I heard is true, he acted, however, the part of a
+magnanimous conqueror; for, after he had rifled the brig, and taken
+everything he wanted out of her, he allowed her and her officers and
+crew to go free, without murdering a soul of them, which, at all events,
+speaks in his favour," said Linton.
+
+"Well, if that is his vessel, we shall soon know more about him and
+her," observed Saltwell.  "We are nearing her fast.  I shall go aloft,
+and try if I can make out what her hull is like."
+
+They drew nearer and nearer the stranger, who still continued her course
+to the northward under the same easy sail.
+
+At last, her hull was visible from the deck.
+
+Mr Saltwell had his glass fixed on her, as had Captain Fleetwood.
+
+"What do you make her out to be, Mr Saltwell?" said the captain.
+
+"She is polacca rigged, with raking masts, and has a long, low, dark
+hull," answered the first lieutenant.
+
+"The very description of the _Sea Hawk_," exclaimed Linton.  "I hope to
+goodness it may be her."
+
+"I trust it may," said Captain Fleetwood, drawing in his breath, and
+compressing his lips, to conceal his agitation.
+
+The excitement on board now increased, as there appeared a greater
+probability of the stranger proving to be the pirate.
+
+Anxiously beat the heart of Captain Fleetwood.  What might be the
+consequence, supposing the prisoners were on board, and his Ada among
+them?  Would the pirate hold them as hostages?  Zappa, he was aware,
+well knew, from what he had learned at the ball at Malta, how dear Ada
+Garden was to him, and what, in consequence, might be the pirate's
+conduct?
+
+His orders were to burn, sink, or destroy the rover, wherever he should
+find him; and he resolved to do his duty.
+
+As he walked the deck in silence, he glanced his eye aloft more
+frequently than usual to see how the sails stood.  They were never
+better set.  Every brace and bowline was taut to a nicety.  Then he
+would look over the bulwarks to judge of the rate at which they were
+slipping through the water, by the appearance of the sparkling bubbles,
+as they darted off from the side, and circled in eddies under the
+counter, and many an earnest gaze did he cast at the chase to assure
+himself that he was still coming up with her.  It is a saying, that when
+a hare runs, the dogs will follow--it is equally true at sea, even when
+the order is reversed, if a vessel makes sail in chase, the chase will
+generally run away.  Hitherto the officers of the _Ione_ had found the
+vessel in sight offering an exception to the rule.
+
+"Let her see our colours, Mr Saltwell.  It may induce her to show hers
+in return."
+
+The British ensign flew out to the breeze at the peak of the _Ione_;
+but, for some time, no attention was paid to it by the stranger--
+perhaps, it might not have been observed--at all events, no answer was
+made.
+
+"Ah, the rascal is ashamed of his nation, or is puzzled to know what
+bunting to show us," said the master.  "No, by Jove; there flies the new
+flag of independence, and a pennant to boot.  He wishes to make us
+suppose he is a Greek man-of-war."
+
+"He may try to do so, but he will not deceive us," said Linton.
+"There's a most piratical cut about the fellow, which is enough to
+condemn him anywhere."
+
+"We shall soon get her within range of our long guns, and we shall then
+see what she is made of," observed Saltwell, eyeing her.  "Shall we get
+the gun ready, sir?" he asked of Captain Fleetwood.
+
+"You may, Mr Saltwell; but as long as she does not show any intention
+of avoiding us, on no account fire," was the answer.
+
+"He seems in no hurry to move, at all events," observed the first
+lieutenant.  He had scarcely spoken, however, before the breeze which
+the _Ione_ had brought up with her reached the stranger, and, as if to
+make amends for her former inactivity, the heavy folds of the foresail
+were let fall, the royals were sent aloft, her head fell off from the
+wind, studdensail after studdensail was set, and away she flew, before
+the freshening breeze, like a sea-fowl darting from its slumber on the
+wave, at a rate which those on board the British ship felt it would take
+their utmost speed to compete with.
+
+"Up with the helm--square away the yards, Mr Saltwell," exclaimed
+Captain Fleetwood, as soon as he saw what she was about to do.
+
+"Ay, ay, sir.  All hands make sail," cried Saltwell.
+
+"All hands make sail," was echoed along the decks.
+
+The men sprang on deck.  The order to set the studden-sails was given.
+The hands flew aloft, and before the Greek had got all his canvas up,
+the _Ione_ had every stitch she could carry packed on her.  This gave
+her an advantage, but the stranger was still far beyond the range of her
+long guns.
+
+A stern chase is so proverbially a long chase, especially when the
+leading vessel happens to be the fastest, as there soon appeared reason
+to believe was the case in the present instance, that I will not weary
+the reader by describing it, but, for the present, will leave His
+Majesty's ship _Ione_ running under all sail, in chase of a suspicious
+craft, towards the island-studded shores of Greece.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER EIGHTEEN.
+
+Never did the _Ione_ go along at greater speed under the same canvas
+than she was doing in chase of the Greek brig; but fast as she went, she
+gained little, if anything, on the vessel she pursued.  No two crafts
+could have been better matched.  The chances were all, therefore, in
+favour of the escape of the latter.  She was four miles ahead, and she
+kept that distance.  She might carry away a mast or spar, and thus the
+_Ione_ might come up with her; or it might fall calm, and she might be
+overhauled by the boats, but the pursuer was just as likely to receive
+some damage, and thus she had most to fear a calm.  If she could manage
+to hold her own till night came on, she would be able to haul her wind
+on either tack with very little danger of being discovered.  The
+officers walked the deck with impatient steps.  It was provoking to have
+a vessel just ahead of them, and which they all felt almost sure was the
+one they were in search of, and yet be unable to come up with her.
+
+"If we could but get her within range of our guns, there would be some
+satisfaction in peppering at her," said Jemmy Duff, who, with several of
+his messmates had gone on the forecastle to have a better view of the
+chase.  "I'd give a month's pay to have only one slap at her."
+
+"That's not any overwhelming sum, Jemmy, though," observed Togle,
+laughing.  "I'd give the whole of my half-pay for a year, and all the
+fortune you're ever likely to leave me, to have her within range of our
+guns for ten minutes."
+
+"Mighty generous you are, indeed," said Jack Raby.  "By that way of
+reckoning, whoever got the half-pay would be sadly out of pocket, as a
+midshipman's half-pay is nothing, and find himself; if he accepted the
+one, he would have to pay for your grub, and whoever gets Jemmy's
+fortune won't have much duty to pay, I'll bet."
+
+"No; I must consider my rank in the service my fortune, whenever I have
+to propose to a young lady," answered Duff, putting his hand on his
+heart, with a sentimental look.  "But, I say, can't we do something to
+get hold of that fellow ahead of us?"
+
+"Why, I suppose he'll fetch the land one of these days, and then, if he
+can't sail over it, like the Yankee flat-bottomed crafts, which draw so
+little water that they can go across the country, when the dew is on the
+grass in the morning, we shall come up with him," replied Togle, with
+great gravity.
+
+"I wonder you can joke about it, Togle," said Duff.  "For my part, I
+hate the sort of work, it makes one feel all nohow, and sadly injures
+the appetite; I could scarcely eat my dinner to-day."
+
+"One wouldn't have supposed so by the manner you stowed away the grub,"
+answered Togle.  "For my part, I don't feel so anxious, because I've
+made up my mind that we shall catch her some time or other.  Let's see,
+it has just gone seven bells, so we've more than three hours of
+day-light, and much may happen in that time."
+
+The men were, meantime, discussing the subject of the chase in their own
+fashion; nor did the three warrant officers, Brown, Black, and White,
+fail to express their opinions on the matter.
+
+"My opinion is," said Mr Brown, "that them Grecian chaps know how to
+build crafts suited for going along in their own waters, as all must
+allow is the case in most parts; but just let us catch any one of them--
+that fellow ahead, for example--outside the straits, wouldn't we just
+come alongside him in a quarter less time."
+
+"As it is, he'll lead us a pretty chase, I fear," observed Mr Black.
+"It will be like one I heard of in the war time, when a Jersey privateer
+chased a French schooner from off the Start right round the Cape, and
+never caught her till she ran into the Hoorly."
+
+"Ah! but there was a longer chase than that which I have heard talk of,
+when the _Mary Dunn_, of Dover, during the Dutch war, followed a
+Dutchman right round the world, and never caught her at all," said Mr
+White, who piqued himself on being facetious.  "Now, I'm thinking this
+present affair will be, somehow, like that, unless as how we manage to
+go faster than we now goes along, which ain't very likely, or she goes
+slower, which she don't seem to have a mind to do."
+
+During the day, Captain Fleetwood scarcely quitted the deck.  Up and
+down he paced, with his glass under his arm, now and then stopping and
+taking an anxious look at the chase, again to continue his walk, or else
+he would stand loaning against the bulwarks for a length of time
+together, without moving, unconscious of its lapse; his thoughts
+evidently fixed on the vessel ahead, and penetrating, in fancy, her
+interior.  Indeed, none of the officers remained below longer than was
+necessary to take their meals, and every glass was in requisition to
+watch the chase.
+
+Towards the evening, the wind, although keeping steady in the same
+quarter, gave indications of falling light, and there seemed every
+probability of what most on board had prognosticated would not take
+place--a calm.
+
+"The wind has dropped very much, sir," said Mr Saltwell to the captain.
+
+"It has," replied Captain Fleetwood.  "I know what you would say--Get
+the boats ready for hoisting out.  We'll overhaul her in them, if it
+falls calm, as I trust it will.  As yet, she goes faster ahead than we
+should pull.  I will go with them, and you, Saltwell, must take charge
+of the ship."
+
+The first lieutenant signified his comprehension of his commander's
+orders, and immediately set about carrying them into execution.
+
+The prospect of a calm was seen by all on board, and the news that the
+chase was to be attacked with the boats, should such happen, gave the
+greatest satisfaction, every one being anxious to go in them.
+Notwithstanding the dangers and hardships of boat service, it is one
+Jack likes excessively, on account of its excitement and variety.  The
+commander intended to lead in the first gig.  Linton was to command the
+cutter, and Tompion, one of the mates, the second gig, which were the
+only boats to be employed.
+
+The arrangements had scarcely been concluded, when a loud flap of the
+canvas against the masts gave indication of the cessation of the breeze.
+Still, however, the brig had considerable way through the water.
+Linton was looking through his glass at the vessel ahead.
+
+"She still seems to have the breeze," he observed to Saltwell.  "I hope
+the fellow is not going to carry it off with him."
+
+"I suspect he'll soon find it leave him," replied Saltwell.  "But I wish
+it would be quick about it, for otherwise it will be getting dark before
+we get alongside."
+
+"As long as we can make out the enemy, that will not much signify,"
+replied Linton.  "There will be less chance of our being hit."
+
+"Yes; but remember, in boarding in the dark, you are fighting on the
+enemy's ground," observed Saltwell.  "He knows his position and
+resources, and has you at a disadvantage.  Give me daylight, and let me
+see my enemy's face."
+
+"Ah! there seems a prospect of our having it, for the sails begin to
+flap heavily, and, by Jove, the chase is no better off," exclaimed
+Linton.  "See, he has got the wind already up and down his mast."
+
+"Huzza!" cried Jemmy Duff, who was midshipman of the cutter.  "There's
+farewell to the wind for Mr Grego."
+
+"Lower the boats, Mr Saltwell," was heard in the deep tones of the
+captain's voice.
+
+The first lieutenant repeated the order.  Mr Brown's whistle was next
+heard piping the boats away, and getting out the cutter, and in another
+minute the crews and the respective officers were in them, waiting for
+the commander to shove off.  He had gone below for an instant for his
+sword, and when he stepped into his boat, though he looked pale, there
+was resolution in his eye to dare the worst, and if needs be to suffer
+the worst.  With a hearty cheer from their shipmates, the boats shoved
+off, and pulled with lusty strokes towards the stranger.  They had no
+positive right as yet to consider her an enemy, except from the fact of
+her having led them a somewhat longish chase; but as it was not much out
+of their course, they had no reason to complain.  The _Ione_ still kept
+under sail, slowly drawing ahead.
+
+The stranger appeared to be no way disconcerted at their approach, but
+as she was almost entirely becalmed, she hauled up her foresail to get
+it out of the way, and seemed quietly to be waiting for them.
+
+"Can you make out what those fellows are about, sir?" asked Jemmy Duff
+of his superior.  "They don't seem to be afraid of us."
+
+"Just stand up in the bows, and try what you can do to arouse their
+fears, Duff," said Linton, laughing.  "We must have sharp eyes to know
+how they look at this distance, and perhaps as they know that they
+cannot get away from us, they think it better to put a bold face on the
+matter."
+
+The sun was just about to sink in the waves as the boats came within
+range of the stranger's guns, but she allowed them to pull on without
+molestation, and as they got still nearer, they saw that she had no
+boarding nettings triced up, though, through the open ports, the crew
+were seen at their quarters, and the guns were run out ready for action.
+She appeared to be crowded with men in the Greek costume.  They had but
+little time for observing anything before they were close to her.
+
+"What do those boats want here?" hailed the voice of some one standing
+on her poop.
+
+"These are the boats of His Britannic Majesty's brig, _Ione_," answered
+Captain Fleetwood, standing up in the stern sheets of his gig.  "What
+brig is that?"
+
+Linton every instant expected a shower of grape as the answer of the
+stranger.
+
+There was a pause.
+
+"The Independent Greek Government's brig, _Ypsilante_," was at length
+the answer.  "What is your object in visiting us?"
+
+"I am in search of a pirate who has attacked an English ship," replied
+Captain Fleetwood; "I wish to gain some information about her."
+
+"I shall be glad to see you on board, then," said the same person.
+
+And he was heard to issue several orders in his own language.
+
+"Keep under her stern in case of treachery," said the captain to Linton
+and Tompion.  "I will go on board--I still have my doubts about her
+character."
+
+In another minute the gallant Fleetwood was ascending the side of the
+Greek brig, alone.  Side ropes were handed to him, and the side was
+manned in man-of-war fashion, and he found a group of officers assembled
+at the gangway to receive him.  The captain, a fine-looking man, was
+distinguishable by the richness of his dress and his dignified bearing.
+He received his visitor very courteously.
+
+"I have led you a long chase, I am afraid," he observed, speaking
+English, "but the reason I did so you will allow was a good one, for I
+was myself chasing another vessel all the time, and of course could not
+heave to, that I might inform you, nor had I the means of signalising
+you to that effect."
+
+"What do you believe to be the vessel you were chasing?" inquired
+Fleetwood, anxiously.
+
+"A Greek, I am sorry to say, and a sister vessel of this brig.  She has
+lately plundered a vessel laden with arms, and as they are much required
+by the patriots, I was dispatched to try and fall in with her."
+
+"What is her name, or rather who commands her?" asked Fleetwood.
+
+"Her name is the _Sea Hawk_, and she is commanded by the noted pirate,
+Zappa," replied the Greek captain.
+
+"The very vessel I am in search of," said Fleetwood.  "But is it not
+more likely that he should have gone somewhere to dispose of his booty
+than that he should remain cruising about here?"
+
+"He has had time to deposit his booty, and to return to look for more,"
+replied the Greek.  "If we could get hold of him, we should make him
+disgorge all he possesses as a ransom for himself and followers."
+
+"What, and let him loose again on the world to commit further piracies?"
+exclaimed Fleetwood.
+
+The Greek captain laughed, as he replied:--"Why, it would not do to hang
+men limply for being guilty of a little piracy.  Some of our leading
+chiefs might object to the precedent.  But I will gladly aid you in
+looking for Signor Zappa; and if you catch him, of course you will be at
+liberty to treat him as you think fit.  To be frank with you, I do not
+think you will find him unprepared in his strong-hold, and he will not
+yield up his vessel without many hard blows."
+
+"What! are you acquainted with the situation of his stronghold?"
+exclaimed Fleetwood, eagerly.
+
+"Well!" answered the Greek captain.  "And if you will step into my
+cabin, I will point it out to you on the chart."
+
+By this time the sun had gone down, and the gloom of the evening
+prevented the countenances of those surrounding him from being
+distinguishable, adding somewhat to the wildness of their appearance and
+the fierceness of their moustachioed countenances.  As he stood on the
+poop he looked over the taffrail, where he could see the two boats
+keeping off just within hail, and in the distance the lights hoisted at
+the mast-head of his own ship to guide him on his return.
+
+It must not be supposed that Fleetwood had not all this time his
+misgivings as to the character of the vessel he was on board.  She might
+be the famed _Sea Hawk_, Zappa's own brig, and the man he was speaking
+to, one of the pirate's lieutenants; for he suspected that Zappa would
+not venture to present himself in person for fear of being recognised.
+Notwithstanding this, with an unfaltering step he followed the officer
+into the cabin.
+
+The cabin was small, and fitted up in a way suitable to that of a vessel
+engaged in an arduous and dangerous service--a couple of sofas, a table,
+and chairs, were the chief articles of furniture, with some shelves, a
+buffet, and a stand for arms.
+
+"I can but offer you rough entertainment," said the Greek, courteously
+placing a seat for his guest.  "We are so engaged in hunting down those
+scoundrel Turks that we have little time to think of luxuries--such as I
+have, I shall place before you."  As he spoke, he clapped his hands in
+oriental fashion, and a servant appeared.  "Bring wine and bread, and
+such food as you have," he said, and the man vanished.
+
+Fleetwood would have declined the proffered hospitality, on the plea of
+being anxious to return to his ship; but his host insisted on having the
+refreshment brought in, observing,--"It is the custom in the East,
+remember, to eat salt together as a sign of amity, so you cannot refuse
+me."
+
+As he spoke, the servant returned, bringing in the very frugal fare he
+had ordered--a jar of wine, some olives, and bread of rather brownish
+hue, with some goats' milk cheese, were placed on the table.
+
+"It is not the sort of fare you would give me on board your ship; but,
+such as it is, I offer it to you," said the Greek captain.
+
+"It is more than I expected," answered Fleetwood, bowing.  "But may I
+ask, have you been on board any British ship of war?"
+
+"I have served on board on the _L--_ as a midshipman, and have since, on
+several occasions, acted as pilot and interpreter.  You see in me,
+Captain Fleetwood, one who is solicitous to be of use to you; and, as
+you appear to be anxious to meet this Signor Zappa, I will now show you
+where you are most likely to fall in with him."
+
+The evident frankness and cordiality of these expressions at once
+dissipated all Fleetwood's previous misgivings, and in a few words,
+while he was partaking of the refreshment placed before him, he detailed
+what had occurred, and his belief that the pirate had made prisoner of
+an English lady, even if he had not murdered the rest of those on board.
+
+While he was speaking, the Greek brought down a chart of the
+Archipelago, and pointed out the island of Lissa, a minute description
+of which he gave.
+
+"But, Captain Fleetwood," he observed, "with your brig, or indeed with
+the whole British navy at command, you can scarcely capture that island,
+especially while the pirate holds hostages so dear to you in his hands.
+Take my advice, attempt nothing by force; your only chance of success is
+by stratagem.  By following a plan I will venture to suggest to you, if
+you will undergo the danger, which I will not deny is very great, I
+think there is a prospect of your being able to rescue your friends.
+Once, however, arouse the suspicions of the pirate and his followers,
+they will put the place in so strong a state of defence, and will keep
+so vigilant a watch over their prisoners, that an attack on the island
+will be useless.  Remember, when I tell you this, I am well acquainted
+with the place and the people, and I feel assured of the soundness of my
+advice."
+
+Captain Fleetwood thanked him very much, and assured him that he was
+eager to hear the plan he would advise him to follow.
+
+On this, Captain Teodoro Vassilato, for such was the name of his new
+Greek friend, explained it to him, and promised him his assistance in
+carrying it out.  What it was it is not necessary here to detail, as it
+will be fully developed in a future part of this story.
+
+Linton sat in the boat keeping way with the Greek brig, which still
+glided slowly ahead, till he began to lose his patience, and at last he
+grew alarmed at the non-arrival of his commander.  Could any treachery
+have been practised? he thought, and had Fleetwood's generous boldness
+led to his destruction?  He longed to penetrate the intention of that
+dark mass ahead of him, which lay rolling uneasily, as the glassy swell
+at long intervals heaved noiselessly under her keel, as it glided
+onwards.  He remembered, too, all the suspicions which had been
+entertained of the craft, and he longed to pull alongside, and to demand
+what had become of his captain.  But he had been directed to remain
+where he was till his return, and he was too good a disciplinarian not
+to obey orders.  The gig, he believed, was still alongside, with the
+people in her, but it was so dark, it was difficult to make that out.
+He had almost resolved to send Tompion in the second gig to ascertain
+this, when he heard the splash of oars in the water, and his doubts were
+soon after relieved by the return of Captain Fleetwood.
+
+"I have kept you some time, gentlemen," said the captain.  "But I have
+gained some important information to guide our proceedings.  Now give
+way and follow me."
+
+The boats were soon on board, and hoisted in, and during the night a
+breeze from the northward springing up, the _Ione_ continued her voyage
+to Cephalonia, which it was expected she would make during the course of
+the day.  The forenoon watch had just been set, and the officers were
+going to breakfast, when the look-out at the mast-head, who had just
+gone aloft, hailed the deck to say that there was an object on the lee
+bow, floating deep in the water, but he could not distinguish what it
+was.
+
+"What does it look like, though?" asked the first lieutenant.
+
+"It's more like a boat bottom up, or a thick piece of timber, than
+anything else," was the answer; "but I think it's a boat, sir."
+
+"It's not worth while going out of our course to ascertain," observed
+Linton.
+
+"I am not so certain of that," exclaimed Saltwell.  "It may be part of
+the wreck of the _Zodiac_.  At all events, I shall inform the captain."
+
+He accordingly went into the cabin, and on his return the ship was kept
+away, and Captain Fleetwood came on deck.
+
+"Aloft there, can you see it now?" hailed Mr Saltwell.
+
+"Yes, sir, we're steering right for it, and I make no doubt it's a
+boat."
+
+The brig was making good way through the water, and soon approached the
+object, which proved to be a boat with her keel up.  She was then
+hove-to, a boat was lowered to tow the swamped boat alongside.  When
+this was done, a rope was passed under her stern, she was lifted till
+the tackle fall could be hooked on to the ring-bolt in it, when she was
+easily turned over, and as she was hoisted up the water was baled out.
+Every one was eager to learn what boat she was.
+
+It was soon perceived that she had been much shattered and damaged, for
+the gunnel on one side had been almost knocked away, and the bows had
+been stove in; but the injury had been repaired by one or more coats of
+tarred canvas, nailed over her bow and bottom, in a very rough way.  The
+captain at once pronounced her to be an English-built boat, but she had
+no name by which it could be discovered to what vessel she belonged.
+
+"Some poor fellows have been cast away on the rocks, and tried to make
+their escape in her," remarked Linton.  "They must have encountered
+another squall in that ricketty craft, and she must have capsized and
+drowned them all."
+
+"It looks too like it," said Saltwell.  "But if they had got on any
+rocks they would have taken a longer time to put her to rights.  What
+think you of her being launched from the deck of a sinking vessel?"
+
+"The same idea struck me," observed Mr Norton, the master.  "I suspect,
+if we had the means of ascertaining, that she will be found to be one of
+the boats of the lost _Zodiac_."
+
+"I fear it; and if so, all must have perished," said Saltwell.  "It
+would be cruel to suggest it to the captain."
+
+"He already has thought of that," observed the master.
+
+"What shall we do with the boat, sir?" inquired the first lieutenant of
+the captain.  "Shall we cast her adrift?"
+
+"No--get her in on deck, and overhaul her more thoroughly," was the
+answer.
+
+This was done; and while the carpenter was examining her, and making
+remarks on the curious way she had been patched up, he found, in the
+stern sheets, a silk handkerchief, which had been thrust into a hole,
+over which, evidently, there had not been time to nail any canvas.  It
+had thus been fixed in so tightly, that the water had not been able to
+wash it out.
+
+The carpenter drew it forth, and opened it.
+
+"Ah, here is a name in a corner, which will go far to prove to whom the
+boat belonged," he exclaimed.  "If I know how to read, these letters on
+it spell--`J.  Bowse.'  What do you say, Brown?"
+
+"There's no doubt about it," answered the boatswain, shaking his head.
+"And by the same token, it belonged to the master of the _Zodiac_, for
+he used to be very proud of having his handkerchief marked in that way,
+as it was Mistress Bowse's own handy work; and, t'other day, when he was
+aboard of us, he, poor fellow, showed me that very handkerchief, and
+said his missis had worked him another set just afore he came away."
+
+The discovery was reported to the captain; but he made no remark on it.
+He, apparently, had before come to the conclusion, that the boat had
+belonged to the unfortunate _Zodiac_.
+
+"Land ahead," was cried out from aloft, and resounded through the ship;
+and before the middle of the afternoon-watch, the lofty mountains of
+Cephalonia rose in view, with the lower lands of Zante to the southward.
+
+The wind freshened, and backing round more to the westward, the _Ione_
+stood boldly in for the entrance of the magnificent harbour of
+Argostoli, and, before nightfall, anchored within a mile of the town.
+
+Captain Fleetwood immediately hurried on shore.  With a heart beating
+with anxiety, he made inquiries about the _Zodiac_; but nothing had been
+heard of her, or her passengers and crew.  He did not yet despair, and
+taking an interpreter with him, who was strongly recommended, he
+returned on board, the anchor was got up, and the _Ione_ stood out of
+the harbour of Argostoli.
+
+There was little chance of the grass growing under her keel.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER NINETEEN.
+
+On reaching the ruins, the Lady Nina and her companion saw old Vlacco
+seated on a rock, at a short distance, whence he could command an
+extensive view of the sea.  He had a spyglass in his hand, which he
+every now and then lifted to his eye, to observe the approaching sail,
+and then he would let it fall again into his lap, as if he were
+considering what she was.
+
+"Let us go and ask my grandfather what he thinks is the vessel in
+sight," said Mila, and, with some difficulty, they worked their way over
+the rocks and ruins towards him.
+
+He turned round rather gruffly at hearing the voice of his grandchild,
+as she asked him what he thought was the sail nearing the island; for,
+as he himself had not yet made up his mind on the subject, he was unable
+to give her a positive answer; and was very unwilling to confess his
+ignorance, especially in the presence of the Lady Nina.
+
+"She is a brig, child; and I should have thought your own sharp eyes
+would have told you that," he answered.
+
+"So they have, grandfather," she replied.  "I have seen that she is a
+brig long ago; but I want to know whether she is the _Sea Hawk_, or a
+stranger."
+
+"A stranger would scarcely be running directly for the port, as that
+vessel is; and it is about the time we may expect our chief's return,"
+answered old Vlacco; "so, if one was unable to distinguish that brig
+below there from any other, we might conclude that she was the _Sea
+Hawk_."
+
+The young Italian stood by, anxiously listening to these observations,
+for her heart beat eagerly for the return of him who commanded the
+vessel of which they spoke, and dark were the forebodings of disaster
+which oppressed her at his long absence.
+
+"Then you think she is the _Sea Hawk_?" exclaimed Mila.  "I pray she may
+be, for the sweet lady's sake."
+
+"If she is not, they have cleverly imitated her to deceive an old
+seaman's eyes," returned the old Greek.  "You may tell the lady, that,
+to the best of my belief, yonder vessel is our chief's; but it is
+necessary to be cautious, when our strength is so much diminished by the
+absence of many of our best men, and when the cursed Turks are sweeping
+off the inhabitants from many of the neighbouring islands; and even the
+British have taken upon themselves to interfere with some of the
+domestic concerns of our friends."
+
+Nina clasped her hands with an expression of thankfulness, as Mila
+explained to her what her grandfather had said, her eyes all the time
+watching the vessel.
+
+"Ah!" she exclaimed.  "Surely there is a flag flying from the mast-head.
+That must be a signal to us."
+
+The old Greek again examined the vessel with his telescope.
+
+"It is, lady--it is the rover's flag, under which I have fought in many
+a hard-contested battle," he exclaimed with animation.  "No one else
+would venture to carry that banner, and we will assemble his followers
+to receive him with honour.  Lady, do you retire to the chamber in the
+tower, where he will, doubtless, hurry on his arrival, and it might
+anger him were you not there to welcome him."
+
+Mila repeated what had been said.
+
+"Tell your grandfather I would go down to the beach to receive his chief
+the instant he sets foot on shore," said Nina, with greater resolution
+in her tone than she had hitherto expressed when speaking.
+
+The old pirate understood what she said, and turned round on her with an
+angry frown, which showed that he was a person whom, in his less amiable
+mood, it would be dangerous to contradict.
+
+"Lady, my orders were, not to allow you out of my sight, except when you
+were locked up in the tower.  I have already disobeyed them more than
+once, for I knew you would not run away; and I was willing to gratify
+you and my little girl there--I am not going to neglect them just as he
+is returning, so you must go back to the tower.  It is also a far more
+fitting place for you to receive him, than exposed to the public gaze on
+the beach."
+
+A crimson blush overspread the cheek of the lovely Italian, as she heard
+what Vlacco said, and she knew it was hopeless to attempt making him
+alter his resolution.
+
+"Then I am a prisoner within those walls," she said, slowly bending her
+steps towards the tower, accompanied by Mila.
+
+"Very like it, lady," muttered the old pirate.  "By my patron saint, I
+would not have ventured to speak in that way a year ago, when her power
+was omnipotent in the island.  But her rule would not last for ever with
+our chief, that I guessed from the first, and I prophesy it will before
+long come to an end altogether.  Well, the _Sea Hawk_ will very soon be
+in the harbour, so I must collect the people to receive him."
+
+Saying this, he climbed to the top of one of the ruined walls of the
+castle, and taking a horn, which hung by the girdle at his side, he blew
+a blast, which sounded far and wide throughout the island.  It was
+answered by several sounds in various directions.
+
+In a short time, in twos and threes, armed men were seen approaching;
+some up the steep path on the side of the ravine, others across the
+causeway; and as they assembled, they were marshalled in order by Vlacco
+in front of the tower.
+
+Nina and her companion had placed themselves at the window, to watch the
+vessel, and the proceedings below.
+
+The gathering of the pirate's followers--for so Vlacco had pronounced
+the commander of the approaching brig to be,--continued for some time,
+till Nina observed upwards of fifty persons collected--some of them were
+very old men, and others were boys, but there were few in the prime of
+life--all such, it appeared, having been called away on some expedition
+with their thief.  They were all armed to the teeth, but with a great
+variety of weapons: some had English muskets, others long Turkish
+matchlocks, some rifles and fowling-pieces; every one had a dagger and
+one or more pistols in their belts, generally of the rich workmanship of
+the East.  Their costume, also, was very much varied in character; and
+though the red skull-cap was generally worn, some had adorned their
+heads with turbans, even of the green colour, which, as if in mockery of
+the Turks, should cover the scalps of none but the true descendants of
+the Prophet.  Some wore the white kilt of the mountaineers, others the
+long trousers and loose waistcoat of the main; indeed, their costume was
+as varied as their arms, and showed that here were collected persons
+driven from various parts of Greece by the tyranny of their Ottoman
+oppressors.
+
+As soon as a sufficient number of the band had assembled, they dragged
+out, under Vlacco's directions, one of the large guns from the basement
+story of the tower to the edge of the cliff, where, between the rocks,
+there was a sort of natural embrasure, partly aided by art, while a
+platform had been formed for the purpose of mounting a gun there.  It
+was an admirable position, as it so completely overlooked the entrance
+to the cave, that a shot sent from it could not fail of hitting a vessel
+attempting to enter.
+
+As Nina watched these proceedings, she could scarcely tell, from the
+appearance of the armed band and the manner in which Vlacco was placing
+the gun in the battery, whether he was preparing to receive the
+approaching vessel in a hostile manner.  The idea of treachery came
+across her mind.
+
+"Can the old pirate," she thought, "meditate the destruction of his
+chief, for the sake of taking possession of all the riches in the
+tower?"  But she soon discarded her fears as improbable, recollecting
+that those who were on board with him were all nearly related to those
+remaining behind.
+
+The purpose Vlacco had in placing the gun there was soon made obvious.
+It was loaded and fired--the report reverberating in thunder among the
+rocks.  Scarcely had the noise ceased, when puffs of smoke were seen to
+issue from the vessel's side, a faint echo was heard from seaward.
+
+"That is the usual signal and answer made when our chief returns," said
+Mila.  "There can be no longer any doubt that it is his vessel.  See,
+she seems to be coming on more rapidly than before."
+
+Such was the case, for the sea breeze had lately somewhat freshened, and
+every sail was spread to woo it.
+
+Majestically the brig glided over the blue sea, like a swan skimming
+over a tranquil lake.  As seen at that distance, she appeared a mass of
+white canvas; nor did she cause a ripple on the calm, mirror-like
+surface.  On she came, till her deck seemed almost beneath the rock, and
+the young Italian fancied, in her eagerness, that she could see the
+countenances of those who walked it, and could distinguish the chief
+himself from all the rest.  Surely none but those well acquainted with
+the spot would venture thus to run on directly against that rocky shore.
+
+The inhabitants of the opposite village had long recognised the _Sea
+Hawk_, and had returned on shore, giving up their anticipations of
+finding her a stranger, on whom they might pounce unawares, and make her
+their prize.  Some of the larger boats remained just at the mouth of the
+harbour, to assist the vessel in entering, should the wind fail her at
+that very juncture, which it was not unlikely to do.
+
+Vlacco had marshalled his men, and leaving a guard of five at the tower,
+led them down to the beach by the winding path through the ravine.  When
+within four or five hundred fathoms of the rock, the brig's
+studden-sails came down altogether, every other sail was clewed up, and
+she shot like an arrow through the narrow opening, her yard-arms almost
+brushing the rocks on either side; her anchor was let go, and she swung
+round just clear of the other craft in the centre of the basin.
+
+Her arrival was greeted by loud shouts from the people on shore, which
+were answered by the crew, and then succeeded inquiries from those in
+the boats for some who did not appear.
+
+"Alas! they have fallen in the fight," was the answer.
+
+A sigh or an expression of sorrow was their only requiem.
+
+"But what success--what booty have you brought?" was the question most
+eagerly asked.
+
+"Thanks to our captain's skill and bravery, we have never had more
+success, or so rich a booty, with so little cost.  A few of our brave
+comrades have paid the debt all must pay; but we have ever come off
+victorious.  Huzza for our brave captain!  Huzza for Zappa!"
+
+"Huzza for Zappa--huzza for the gallant _Sea Hawk_!" was echoed by the
+people on the beach, taken up by his followers, and repeated by those on
+the cliffs above, till Nina heard the cry as she sat in her watch-tower.
+She trembled and turned pale, for her heart longed to see him; yet she
+almost feared his coming.  Poor girl! she little knew what was in store
+for her.
+
+The captain of the _Sea Hawk_ was the first person to land, accompanied
+by the young Italian, Paolo.  As he stepped on shore, his own particular
+adherents welcomed him with loud shouts, and he returned this greeting
+courteously.
+
+"Ah!  Vlacco, old friend, I rejoice to see you strong and well," he
+said, cordially holding out his hand; and in like manner he spoke to
+others of the band.  Whatever he was in other places, and whatever
+opinion the reader may have formed of him, he was, among his own people,
+and on board his own ship, in every respect, the chieftain.  There was a
+boldness and independence, even a dignity in his manner, which awed
+inferior spirits, and made them willingly obey him, though he might have
+been at the time thoroughly destitute of every quality which constitutes
+true greatness of character.  Zappa had always been successful.  It was
+the cause of his rise--the only secret of his power.  He had been
+fortunate in his first speculation--an attack on an unarmed merchantman,
+most of whose crew were on shore.  He carried off a rich booty, and had
+the opportunity of boasting of his deeds among those who would willingly
+have shared in them.  His fame spread.  He collected followers, and
+became a chieftain.
+
+The eyes of the old pirate brightened, and a smile even lighted up his
+grim visage, as he received this mark of his leader's regard.
+
+"Yes, I am proud to repeat, that all has gone well during the time you
+have been away," he replied.
+
+"And the Lady Nina," said Zappa, taking the old man aside, "has she
+appeared to grieve for my absence, and for that of her brother?"
+
+"Grieve--indeed, she has--so says my grandchild Mila.  She has done
+nothing but sigh and sob, and look out on the sea all day long; but
+whether it was for you or her brother she mourned I cannot say," was old
+Vlacco's answer.
+
+"Well, I will--I must try and dry her tears now, so I'll to the tower,"
+said the pirate, taking the path up the ravine.  "Come, Paolo, we'll go
+and see how fares your sweet sister."
+
+But Paolo had disappeared.  The moment he had touched the shore, while
+the chief was addressing his followers, he had slipped off, and with
+quick steps had hurried up the ravine.  He was already out of sight,
+winding his way up the steep ascent which led to the tower.  Zappa was
+excessively angry at this; for he wished to be the first to salute Nina,
+and he was afraid her brother would inform her of things of which he
+wished her, at present, to be kept in ignorance.  He therefore hurried
+after him, followed at a distance by Vlacco and his band, who could in
+no way keep pace with his vigorous and active steps.  He hoped to
+overtake the young Italian; but Paolo was also active, and he was eager
+to embrace his sister--the only being in the world whom he felt could
+love him--the only one he had loved.
+
+The door of the tower stood open, and with haste he ascended the steep
+steps, which led to her chamber.  He threw open the door, and stood at
+the entrance; her arms were round her brother's neck, and she was
+weeping.  For an instant she did not perceive that any one else was
+present--she looked up, and beheld the pirate.  With a cry, she tore
+herself from her brother's embrace, and, rushing towards Zappa, threw
+herself into his arms.
+
+"You see, Paolo," he said, in a taunting tone, "your sister will prefer
+remaining with me, with all my faults on my head, rather than follow
+your sage advice to return to Italy with you.  Is it not so, my Nina--
+you love me still?"
+
+She hid her face in his bosom, as she murmured,--"It were death, indeed,
+to quit you."
+
+"You hear her, Paolo.  Now listen to me," said Zappa.  "For her sake I
+forgive you for disobeying my orders, and quitting me just now, while I
+had directions to give you; return on board the ship--you have duties to
+attend to there, which you must not neglect--there, embrace your sister
+once more if you wish, and go."
+
+The young Italian stood for a minute with his eyes fixed, glaring on the
+pirate, as if he were about to speak, and give vent to his indignant
+anger in words; but he said nothing; and, with a groan, which burst from
+his bosom, without giving another look at his sister, he rushed out of
+the door, and down the steps, nor stopped till he reached the beach.
+
+"You look thinner than usual, my Nina; and the brightness of your eye
+has lost somewhat of its lustre since I left you," said Zappa, as they
+sat at the window of the tower, looking out on the moonlit sea; while
+within the chamber the light of a silver lamp, suspended from the roof,
+cast a brilliant radiance on every side, and on a table, spread with
+crystal goblets, and dishes glittering with silver and jewels, on which
+a luxurious repast had been served.
+
+"My health will soon be restored now you have returned," answered Nina,
+returning the fond pressure of his hand.  "But I have been almost a
+prisoner in this tower; and old Vlacco, whom you left as governor in
+your absence, would have made me one completely, had I not insisted on
+enjoying a little freedom at times with his grandchild, Mila.  Your
+absence, too, was so much longer than usual that I feared for your
+safety, and for that of my poor brother."
+
+"Old Vlacco was a strict jailor, was he?" said Zappa.  "Why, you know,
+my pretty bird, I warned him to beware lest you should take flight, as
+once you tried to do, urged by the persuasions of your brother; and, I
+suppose he thought he was to obey his orders to the letter; but now we
+have returned, your cause of anxiety will have ceased, and I believe you
+love me too well ever again to wish to leave me.  I believe, also, your
+brother has been taught the folly of his conduct too well to attempt it
+again.  But a truce with subjects which are disagreeable.  Here's to
+your health, sweet one; I pledge you in this sparkling goblet of Samian
+wine, and I will try to drive away your melancholy by recounting some of
+the adventures of my voyage."  As he spoke, he stretched out his hand to
+the table, and seizing a large glass of wine, he drank it off at a
+draught.  "Ah! this cheers the heart after the hardships of the ocean.
+Wine is a glorious thing, Nina; it banishes the gloomy thoughts which
+will ever and anon intrude into the hearts even of the bravest.  But I
+promised you my adventures, sweet one.  Soon after we sailed from hence,
+we had a few skirmishes with Turkish vessels; we captured and destroyed
+two, but they had little on board them of value, and the men began to
+grow discontented with our want of success, and at last I resolved to
+fly at nobler game.  By the by, I happened to fall in with a Neapolitan
+vessel; the crew were your countrymen, Nina, and I would not injure
+them, though, I believe, some of my people, unknown to me, bored holes
+in her to try add sink her.  While we were engaged in taking out
+whatever was of value, a ship of war hove in sight, and we were obliged
+to leave her.  I then stood towards the coast of Italy--"
+
+"Oh! do not tell me of such dreadful things.  I cannot, I do not believe
+you.  I thought you were only engaged in fighting the enemies of your
+country, and of the Christian race, and you confess to committing deeds
+which would make you a pirate--a foe to all nations.  Say that you were
+joking."
+
+Zappa laughed heartily as he answered,--"A prejudice, my pretty Nina; it
+is one you must conquer, too, with all speed.  What! despise my free and
+independent profession.  You, my wife, think ill of piracy, and the
+brave rovers who commit it.  Ha! ha! ha! that must no longer be, let me
+assure you.  To my story--you interrupt me--where was I--oh, yes!
+sailing towards the coast of Italy.  We ran on till we sighted a lofty
+mountain of Sicily, and just then fell in with a speronara, owned by a
+man with whom I have had transactions, and whom I knew I could trust.  I
+engaged him to take me to Malta; and, with your brother as my companion,
+I visited that place, and learned what vessels were about to sail.
+
+"One bore a rich freight; we followed, and took her.  Now, Nina, I am
+going to make you jealous.  An English lady was on board; she was young,
+beautiful, and the heiress, I understand, of much wealth.  She is now my
+prisoner, and I intend to bring her here to place her in your charge,
+Nina.  But remember, no jealousy--for though you are lovely, you will
+have to acknowledge that she is so also--yet I say not equal to you,
+sweet one."
+
+As Zappa was speaking, Nina rose, and as she stood in the recess of the
+window, with the beams of the pale moon lighting up her countenance,
+which would otherwise have been cast in shadow, her figure appeared to
+grow more pure and ethereal, even to the eyes of the fierce and lawless
+pirate.  Her fair and slender hands were clasped on her bosom, while she
+turned on him a look in which pain and reproach were mingled, as she
+answered--
+
+"I would gladly do your will in all things; I would willingly afford aid
+to one in distress, to one who undeservedly suffers, who is torn from
+her kindred and friends; but speak not to me of jealousy, Zappa, I have
+trusted you too much, I love you too devotedly, as you well know, to be
+influenced by such a feeling.  Let the lady arrive when she may she is
+welcome."
+
+Poor girl! even as she spoke, the first pangs of the deadly poison had
+shot through her heart, though she knew not what was the cause of the
+feeling which oppressed her.  She thought it was the indifference of his
+tone, the light carelessness of his words which gave her pain, yet he
+was always accustomed to speak in that way, for to things serious or
+sacred he paid little regard.
+
+"I will not, then, suppose you jealous, Nina, since you like it not to
+be suspected that you are even capable of the feeling," answered the
+pirate, throwing himself back on the divan, and laughing; "I shall not,
+however, yet put you to the test, but when the lady arrives you will
+treat her as one to whom all courtesy is due."
+
+"I have promised to do so," replied the Italian girl, still standing in
+the position she had assumed at a distance from him.
+
+"Then do not look so cold, and glance your eye repulsively on me,"
+exclaimed Zappa; "one might suppose that I were a monster unfit for one
+so fair and pure as you to gaze on."
+
+Nina burst into tears.
+
+"You are unkind and I am weak," she exclaimed passionately.  "You
+confess to me that you are a pirate and a robber, that your hand is
+stained with the blood of your fellow-men--of men not slain because they
+are the enemies of your country, but because they attempted to guard the
+treasure committed to their charge, and I ought to loathe and detest
+you, and yet I cannot--I love, I love you still."
+
+And she sank down on her knees at his feet, and hiding her face in the
+cushions of the divan, gave way to a flood of tears, while her bosom
+heaved as if she were struggling for existence.
+
+Zappa gazed at her for some minutes without speaking, till the paroxysm
+of the fit had passed away, when compunction, or it might have been a
+less amiable feeling, seized him, and stooping down, he raised her in
+his arms.
+
+"I was but trying you, lovely one," he said, in a soft tone.  "I am not
+the blood-stained monster I painted myself.  My hand has never slain a
+fellow-man except in self-defence; and is not so unworthy as you would
+believe to be clasped in yours.  Besides, Nina, you are, as far as your
+church makes you so, my wedded wife--for good or for evil, for wealth or
+for poverty, and must not, sweet one, play the tyrant over me.  But a
+truce with this folly--I am weary of it," he cried, starting up; "I have
+many directions to give about my brave barque, which I must not forget--
+even for your sake,--and I must see old Vlacco, and consult with him
+about improving the fortifications of our island--for, with enemies on
+all sides, these are not times when we can trust to our remote position
+as before, and to such old defences as nature has provided.  Farewell;
+and when I return, let me see the accustomed smile resting on those
+sweet lips."
+
+He kissed her as he spoke; and, without waiting for an answer, he
+quitted the chamber, and she heard him descending the steps of the
+tower.  She hid her face in her hands, and there seemed but little
+prospect of her having the power to obey his commands.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY.
+
+We left Ada Garden virtually a prisoner on board a vessel which she
+believed a Greek man-of-war.  Day after day the voyage continued without
+the anchor being dropped.  Sometimes the vessel was steered in one
+direction, sometimes in another; but, as she judged by the appearance of
+the sun, as it was seen from the cabin windows at sunset, they were
+verging towards the east and north.  Fortunately the weather continued
+fine, and they were able to have the ports open the whole of the day,
+which in a slight degree made her amends for being deprived of the free
+air of the deck.  Generally, also, the wind was fair, when it came in
+cool and refreshing through the ports; but some days it blew more ahead,
+and then Ada could feel the vessel heel over as the canvas felt its
+force; and, at times, she judged that they were beating along some
+coast, or through a narrow passage, as the continuation of the same land
+was seen on every alternate tack.
+
+Signor Paolo had visited the cabin every day; but he was silent and
+reserved as at first, and she failed to obtain any information from
+him--though, latterly, she thought he appeared as if he would have
+spoken more; but, each time he was about to do so, fear seemed to make
+him hesitate, and he said nothing.
+
+Her health, under his judicious treatment, had gradually improved till
+she had recovered as much of her accustomed strength as she could expect
+to do, without the benefit of more air and exercise than she could enjoy
+in the cabin.  But her spirits remained much depressed at the
+uncertainty of her own future fate, of that of her uncle, and with the
+thoughts of the anguish she knew Fleetwood would endure at her loss.
+
+"Could I but let him know," she thought, "that I am alive, and am
+suffering no great inconvenience, oh, how it would relieve my heart!"
+
+She little thought that at that very time her lover was scouring the
+seas on board his ship in search of her.
+
+At last the vessel was once more before the wind, slowly gliding through
+the water.  There seemed to her more bustle and animation than usual on
+deck.  The faint sound of a gun came off from the shore--it was answered
+by a loud report from on board, accompanied by a wild cheer from those
+on deck; and, a short time afterwards she felt that the anchor was let
+go; strange voices were heard alongside--and looking out of the
+stern-ports, high cliffs arose before her eyes.  She and Marianna
+continued gazing out of their prison at the strange scent before them,
+and at the number of boats filled with uncouth, savage-looking beings
+pulling in boats round the ship.  Among others, one appeared to leave
+the vessel and take a direct course towards the shore.
+
+"Oh! signora, look there--look there!" cried Marianna.  "There is Signor
+Paolo going to leave us."
+
+Ada did look, but her eye scarcely rested on Paolo, for it caught sight
+of one who sat next to him in the boat.  She grasped her attendant's arm
+as she whispered, "My worst fears are realised.  There goes the pirate
+Zappa, and we are his prisoners."
+
+"Oh! don't say such a thing, signora," cried Marianna, trembling; "I
+shall die of fright.  Yet, surely he could not have had any command on
+board such a quiet, well-ordered vessel as this has been?"
+
+"I fear that I am not mistaken in his identity--and his appearance
+explains everything," said Ada.  "What can he intend now by leaving the
+vessel?  Try the doors and see if we are still prisoners in the cabin."
+
+Marianna found the door closed as before, and she and her mistress sat
+down more alarmed than they had been hitherto; Ada feeling that her last
+hope of escape had vanished.
+
+They remained thus for some time, till they were startled by the abrupt
+entrance of Paolo into the cabin.  He apologised, on seeing Ada's look
+of surprise.
+
+"Pardon me, signora; I have been sent by the captain of the ship to
+express his regret that your apartments on shore are not arranged, and
+to regret that you will have to remain some time longer on board."
+
+"Excuses are superfluous, when no choice is allowed me but to obey,"
+returned Ada, with more haughtiness in her manner than usual; for,
+having seen Paolo in company with the pirate, she could no longer regard
+him in the same light she had before done.
+
+The young man seemed at once to observe and feel the change.
+
+"I deeply regret, signora, that you should have cause to complain," he
+exclaimed, in a voice in which sorrow mingled with passion; "but, oh!
+believe me, that I am not more free than you, and act under the orders
+of one who has the power to compel were I to prove disobedient."
+
+"I believe you," said Ada; "and now tell me, who is this person who
+ventures to hold me a prisoner?"
+
+"You will know too soon, lady, but my lips must not inform you,"
+returned Paolo.  "However, if it can afford you any satisfaction to know
+it, be assured that I will watch carefully over you, and that my
+directions are, not to quit the vessel except to accompany you on
+shore."
+
+"It must be a satisfaction to those in distress to know that they have a
+friend who interests himself in their welfare," replied Ada, in a
+softened tone, as Paolo, with an inclination of his head, withdrew.
+
+For two whole days did Ada Garden and her attendant remain inmates of
+the vessel.  On the third Paolo made his appearance to announce that
+accommodation was prepared for them on shore, and that a boat was
+waiting alongside the vessel to convey them there.  For the first time
+Ada stepped on the deck of the vessel, and, after having been shut up so
+long below, the full, bright glare of the sun almost dazzled her eyes,
+and prevented her seeing objects clearly.  As she recovered her sight,
+she observed that the vessel, on board which she had spent so long a
+time, was a brig, that she was in beautiful order, and had eight guns
+run out on either side.  A few seamen in Greek costume were employed in
+the fore part of the vessel in repairing the rigging, but none of them
+took the slightest notice of her, as Paolo handed her to the gangway,
+followed by Marianna.  At his summons two men came aft, and brought up
+her boxes from below, which were lowered into the boat alongside, into
+which he then assisted her and her attendant.  He then gave the signal
+to shove off, and a few strokes of the oars carried the boat to the
+shore.  Ada looked round her with surprise at the wild beauty and
+perfect tranquillity of the scene.  In the centre of the bay lay the
+brig at anchor, her hull and tall masts, and the tracery of her spars
+and rigging reflected in the calm clear water.  Her sails were closely
+furled, and no one appeared above the bulwarks to show that she was
+tenanted by human beings.  The two misticoes lay inside of her, without
+sign of any one being on board them, and the boats belonging to the cove
+were drawn up on the beach, but the fishermen had deserted their nets,
+and not a person appeared in any direction.  She gazed up at the lofty
+cliffs, and at the picturesque ravine towards which Paolo pointed, as
+they landed, to indicate their path, at the same time expressing his
+regret that there were no means of conveying her up it except by a
+litter borne by men.
+
+The perfect calmness of the whole scene, its unusual beauty, and the
+freshness of the air served to reassure her, and she began to experience
+an elasticity of spirits she had not for a long time felt.  Paolo led
+her up the path I have before described, to the platform on the summit
+of the cliffs on which the ruined castle stood.
+
+"This is a wild spot, lady, but not wanting in beauty; and the tower you
+see before you is to be your abode while you remain on the island," said
+Paolo, pointing to a tower which was nearer the causeway, and had not so
+extensive a view as the one I have described, but yet it overlooked the
+sea, and more of the interior of the island.  Paolo knocked at a door at
+the base, and it was opened by the young Greek girl Mila, who saluted
+the strangers with a smile of welcome, and then led them away up a
+flight of steps to an upper story, where, throwing open another door,
+she ushered them into a chamber, at the appearance of which Ada could
+not help uttering an exclamation of surprise; and Marianna, who had
+completely lost all her fears in company with Signor Paolo, clapped her
+hands with delight.  The time had, indeed, been well employed, which
+had, since their arrival, converted that ruined tower into so
+magnificent an abode.
+
+The pirate must have ransacked all his stores of silks and satins to fit
+up the room.
+
+"The roof has probably been formed some time, but all else has been
+accomplished during the last three days," said Paolo, as they entered.
+"That was the reason, lady, of your not landing before."
+
+The style was very similar to that of the other tower; but the hangings
+were, perhaps, richer, and the carpets more valuable; attention had been
+paid to what might be supposed English taste.  There were a greater
+number of tables and chairs, and there was even a book-case fastened
+against the wall, though the books it contained were few, and not of a
+very select description.
+
+There were two guitars and a music-book on one of the tables, and the
+walls were adorned with pictures, and a magnificent silver lamp hung
+from the centre; and, indeed, everything had been done to give the room
+a cheerful and habitable appearance.  On either side were curtains
+across a corner of the room; and, on drawing them, Ada perceived that
+there were couches arranged, and furnished with the finest linen,
+showing that the chamber was intended for their exclusive residence,
+perhaps also, their prison.  Mila busied herself in showing the
+arrangements of the room, and Paolo explained that she was anxious to
+serve the stranger in the best way she could.  Ada intimated that she
+could not but be satisfied with the care taken for her comfort, and
+Paolo, suspecting that she would prefer being left alone, called Mila,
+and took his departure.
+
+Paolo had been gone some time, when a knock at the door was heard, and
+Marianna ran to open it.  As she did so, she started back with a cry of
+surprise, for there stood before her the pirate Zappa.
+
+Ada rose as she saw him, for she felt that, from the first, it would be
+necessary to assume a dignity and fearlessness of manner, in order to
+gain any influence over him.
+
+"The Prince Argiri Caramitzo, I believe I have the honour of seeing,"
+she said, bowing.
+
+"The same, signora, who has the happiness of welcoming you to Greece,
+and has had that of rescuing you from a great danger," replied Zappa, in
+his most courteous tone, advancing a step only into the chamber.  "He
+now comes to express a hope that you are satisfied with the arrangements
+made for you, and will be contented to remain an inhabitant of this
+island till communications can be opened with your friends, in order to
+restore you to them."
+
+"I need not tell you, prince, that I am most anxious to communicate with
+my friends, and must beg you to tell me by what means I can do so," said
+Ada.
+
+"The opportunity will, doubtless, soon occur," replied the pirate.
+"But, in the mean time, I have to assure you that I have taken measures
+to let your friends know of your safety--though, for reasons which I may
+hereafter explain to you, not the place of your abode."
+
+"I understand you, signor; and I beg now to thank you for the courtesy
+and delicacy with which you have treated me," said Ada.  "And I will ask
+you as a farther favour, to tell me what has become of the relative who
+left Malta with me.  Is he still living?"
+
+As she spoke her voice trembled, and a tear started in her eye.
+
+"Indeed, lady, I would gladly answer your question if I could.  I know
+nothing of your relative," replied Zappa.  "But I am wearying you with
+my presence.  I came but to ascertain that you were satisfied with such
+humble accommodation as I could afford you, and will no longer intrude
+myself on your presence.  Lady, farewell; and should any suspicions
+enter your mind about me, I entreat you to banish them; and to believe
+that, however much appearances are against me, I am not guilty."
+
+It would be difficult to describe the tone with which those words were
+uttered, or the polished bow Zappa gave as he quitted the room, fully
+believing that he had made a great stride in winning over the feelings
+of his prisoner, to look on him with regard.
+
+A whole day passed away without the appearance of Paolo, or any person
+except little Mila.  The young Greek girl was her only attendant,
+besides Marianna; but as she could not make herself understood, she
+seldom remained long together in the room.  Had she even not felt
+herself a prisoner, the day would have passed wearily away with so few
+means of amusing herself at her disposal.  She examined the books which
+had been placed on the shelves: they were mostly Italian, though she
+recognised a few as having been on board the _Zodiac_.  In vain,
+however, she tried to give her attention to them, for whenever she did
+so her thoughts wandered away till they were lost in the painful
+reflection which her position naturally suggested.  Among her luggage
+were the means of employing herself in such fancy-work as was the
+fashion in those days, but she soon threw it down in despair, as rather
+increasing than relieving her anxiety.
+
+Such was not the case with Marianna, who quickly recovered her spirits,
+and plied her needle with her usual diligence, and laughed and sang, as
+if nothing out of the way had occurred.  One of her great sources of
+pleasure was, in the intervals of her work, to look through a telescope
+which Paolo had placed in the room; it was on a brass stand, and had
+been, probably, among the cargo of some vessel plundered by Zappa or his
+associates.  The view, as I have said, from the window, extended over a
+wide range of sea, along the greater part of the east side of the island
+and into the interior; and a glimpse could just be caught of the mouth
+of the harbour, though the vessels lying there were not visible.  It was
+in the afternoon of the second day after their arrival that Marianna was
+amusing herself with looking through the glass, when she uttered an
+exclamation of delight.
+
+"Oh, signora, signora--do come, and look!" she cried.  "There is a
+vessel coming to the island; for I see her white sails just rising out
+of the water.  She is coming to take us home--I know she is."
+
+Ada flew to the telescope--her heart beating with agitation at the very
+mention of release, though her hopes were not so sanguine as those of
+her damsel.  She looked earnestly for some time at the sail which
+Marianna had observed; but, as she withdrew her eye from the tube, she
+shook her head with a look of disappointment.
+
+"The sail looks very small," she said.  "So I fear, Marianna, it cannot
+be a ship of war, and no other can afford us assistance."
+
+"Oh, but it is yet a long way off, signora," urged the Maltese girl.
+"When it comes nearer it will appear much bigger, as I have often
+observed from the windows of your uncle's house in Valetta a little sail
+no bigger than a pocket-handkerchief, which has grown larger, and
+larger, and larger, till it has become a mighty ship with a hundred
+great guns looking out of her sides.  Who knows but what this may turn
+out a big ship sent out by the King of England, with Signor Fleetwood as
+captain, to look after you?  My heart tells me that she is a friend."
+
+Ada smiled mournfully at her young attendant's over sanguine
+prognostications, in which she could so little participate.
+
+"I fear you are wrong in this case, my good Marianna," she answered.
+"You observe that the vessel we see is small, but we can already
+distinguish three distinct sails, and soon the hull itself will rise out
+of the water, and then we shall be better able to judge of its proper
+dimensions.  I can already see her without the glass.  Tell me if the
+bulwarks are not in sight."
+
+"Yes, signora, I can distinguish the dark mark of the body of the
+vessel, and she seems to come on quickly towards us," answered the
+Maltese girl, who was bending down upon a table drawn towards the
+window, with her eye to the glass.
+
+The vessel they were looking at was rather to the west of the island,
+towards which she was standing close-hauled beating up against an
+easterly wind, bound probably up the Dardanelles.  The sea was calm, and
+glittering in the sunbeams, which gave it the appearance of a plain of
+molten silver sprinkled with diamonds--for to nothing else can I compare
+its dazzling lustre.  The breeze had been uncertain all the morning, now
+so light as not to disturb the mirror-like surface of the sea, now
+freshening up again so as to send the vessel along rapidly through the
+water.  It had, however, lately, in shore, given signs of dying away
+altogether.  The stranger stood on till she fetched up, almost looking
+into the mouth of the concealed cove, either totally unconscious of the
+danger of her proceeding, or indifferent to the consequences.
+
+The latter could scarcely be the case; for, as Ada again looked at her
+through the telescope, she observed that she was a vessel apparently of
+little more than a hundred-and-twenty or thirty tons burden.  Her rig
+was that of a brigantine--the foremast having the top and spars of a
+brig, the mainmast carrying fore-and-aft sails like a schooner.  When
+she had stood in within a quarter of a mile of the shore she tacked,
+either fearing to get becalmed should she approach nearer, or being,
+uncertain of the depth of water.  If it was to avoid the former
+inconvenience, it was too late, for, scarcely had she gone about than
+her sails flapped idly against the masts, and she lay unable to make any
+way at all.
+
+Ada was now convinced that she was a stranger--a merchantman, probably,
+as she judged by the cut of the sails, the short yards, and the few men
+who appeared on her decks.  She had two guns, it is true, but they were
+of little weight of metal, and could have been of slight use in
+repelling a really determined attack.
+
+Ada trembled for her fate, when she recollected her suspicions of the
+lawless character of the inhabitants of the island.  As she was watching
+the persons on the deck of the vessel, she saw that there was suddenly
+some confusion among them; several persons hurried from below, and some
+appeared to be surveying the mouth of the harbour with their telescopes.
+The cause was soon apparent, for as she looked in that direction, a
+long low dark object was seen to steal out from behind the rocks, like a
+snake from the grass, and dart towards them.
+
+It was one of the misticoes, with her yards and sails stowed along the
+deck, and impelled by twenty long oars, pulled by twice that number of
+men, while as many more stood in the after part, and at the bows, with
+their matchlocks in their hands ready for use.  In the bow, also, was a
+long brass gun on a swivel, pointed towards the doomed vessel.
+
+The stranger was, however, manned by no cowardly hearts.  As soon as
+they saw the nature of their enemy, they cast loose their two guns,
+loaded them, and ran them both out on the port side, which was the one
+then bearing on the shore.  They knew that escape was impossible, and
+that they had little hope of mercy, so they lost no time in firing, on
+the chance of striking the enemy between wind and water, and compelling
+him to return.  Unhappily, neither shot told with much useful effect.
+One struck the water just ahead of her, the other hit her gunnel and
+killed two of the people, which only exasperated the others, and made
+them pull the harder to get on board before receiving any other similar
+visitors.
+
+"Oh!  Jesu Maria," exclaimed Marianna, hiding her eyes in her hands.
+"What can be the reason that the vessel there should fire at the boat?"
+
+"I am afraid we shall be witnesses of a dreadful scene," said Ada; "and
+yet I cannot withdraw my eyes from it.  Oh! what will become of the poor
+people on board the vessel if those wretches in the mistico get near
+her?  See! they are my countrymen, too, for there flies the red ensign
+of England."
+
+The ensign had been hoisted as the brigantine fired; but while watching
+the Greek vessel she had not observed it.  The English, undaunted, set
+up a loud cheer, as they again run out their guns; but the pirates,
+taught by experience, pulled round under her stern, where her guns could
+not reach them, and let fly their own long pieces at them.  As they were
+much lower than she was, the shot injured no one on deck; but flew
+through the fore-topsail.  They did not again attempt to fire; but
+trusting to their vast superiority of numbers, they dashed boldly
+alongside, with the object of carrying her by boarding.  The English had
+time to get one of their guns over to the starboard side, on which the
+mistico boarded them, and to fire directly down into her, before the
+pirates were able to leap up their side.
+
+It was too late, however, to save them.  The Greeks swarmed over the
+bows and quarters, and up the side, their swords in their teeth, and
+though the English seamen fought in a manner worthy of their name, Ada
+saw, with anguish, that they were quickly cut down or overpowered,
+pressed upon by overwhelming numbers, and in three minutes the islanders
+had full possession of the vessel.  It made her heart sick as she beheld
+the catastrophe, which she had hoped against probability, might have
+been averted.  Intensely interested as she was to learn the fate of her
+countrymen, her agitation prevented her from seeing more, and obliged
+her to withdraw her eyes from the painful sight.  Marianna, however,
+took her place at the telescope.
+
+"Oh, signora!" she exclaimed, "the saints protect us!  But those cruel
+wretches are throwing the bodies of the poor English they have murdered
+overboard, before even their hearts can have ceased to throb.  Wicked
+villains!  I hope they won't treat the living in the same way."
+
+"I'm afraid none remained alive," said Ada, shuddering.  "But what are
+they doing now?"
+
+"They seem engaged in making their own vessel fast to the other, to
+prevent her from sinking, I suppose.  I wish they may both go down to
+the bottom together.  It would serve the wretches right."
+
+"God will punish them in His own good time, or the power of civilised
+nations will be exerted to perform His will," replied Ada.  "Our
+religion teaches us, remember, not to wish evil even to our worst
+enemies.  But, ah, there comes out the other mistico to the assistance
+of their friends."
+
+In a short time the last-named vessel had reached the brigantine, and as
+soon as she was lashed alongside, all hands were busily engaged in
+transferring the cargo to their own craft, for they had managed to stop
+the shot-hole in the side of the one which had been engaged.  The
+brigantine's anchor had been dropped, and her sails clewed up; and as
+soon as the two misticoes were laden, they returned to the harbour.  In
+another hour or so, they were again alongside the prize, and engaged in
+their work of plunder.  They laboured hard till they had transferred
+everything of value from her hold, and they then commenced stripping her
+masts of the sails and rigging; and in collecting other things from her
+deck and cabin which might be useful--not forgetting her guns, and her
+small store of powder and shot.  By the time they had completed their
+work the sun had set, and loaded with plunder they returned to port.  As
+they left the side of the unfortunate vessel, a shout of exultation
+escaped them; and soon after, Ada perceived through the gloom a thick
+smoke ascending from the hatchways, followed quickly by forked flames,
+which leaped upwards, and rapidly enveloped the masts and lower,
+rigging.  The whole hull was rapidly in a blaze, which lighted up with a
+lurid glare the two misticoes; the grim visages of their fierce crew,
+their red caps, and varied-coloured costume being clearly visible at
+that distance through the telescope.  The fiery tinge falling also on
+the rocky cliffs, and the towers and walls of the castle, and converting
+the tranquil surface of the ocean into, seemingly, a sea of blood.
+
+The brigantine burned fiercely--there must have been some inflammable
+substance which had formed part of her cargo remaining in her hold.
+From the two small stern-ports, which had been left open, the flames
+burst forth in jets of fire, as also from every hatchway, fore and aft,
+till the decks fell in, and the masts, like two pillars of fire, came
+rushing down, and hissing into the water.  At length the empty hull sunk
+beneath the surface, and all was again dark.
+
+"I fear, signora, we are in a complete nest of pirates," said Marianna,
+breaking the silence which she had maintained after the catastrophe.
+
+"I fear so, too," replied Ada; "but that burning vessel may prove a
+beacon to light our friends to our rescue."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY ONE.
+
+Ada Garden sat in the chamber of the tower which had been awarded to her
+as her prison.  Her Maltese attendant had accompanied young Mila to a
+short distance from the castle--but she was not alone.  A figure knelt
+at her feet in the attitude of the deepest devotion; his head was bowed
+down to the ground, and sobs burst from his bosom:--it was the young
+Italian, whom we have known under the name of Paolo.
+
+"Oh, hear me, lady!" he exclaimed passionately,--"oh, hear me, before
+you dismiss me for ever from your presence.  I cannot unsay what I have
+said--I have dared to tell you that I love you with the fondest, the
+deepest devotion--I have done so from the first moment I saw you; but
+hear my excuses.  I felt myself alone and desolate in the world; I
+beheld you, bright, innocent, and beautiful, exposed, I knew, to the
+most dreadful danger, and I determined to save you at all risks.  I knew
+not then that it was love--I thought it was compassion for one so fair.
+I saw you brought on board the pirate vessel, the accursed _Sea Hawk_,
+unconscious of your state.  My medical knowledge would, I knew, be of
+service: I suggested that your life hung on a thread, that the slightest
+agitation might destroy you, and I so worked on the fears of the
+miscreant chief, that I persuaded him to confide you entirely into my
+charge.  I ventured even to administer a narcotic, to render you
+insensible when Zappa wished to see you, and to frighten him still more
+into the belief that you were on the point of death.  Day after day I
+saw you, I felt that your safety depended on me, that I might even yet
+be the means of rescuing you from the thraldom under which you are
+placed, and day after day my love increased--I have fed upon it till it
+has become a part of my very existence, and can end but with my life.
+Then tell me, lady--tell me, how could you expect me to do otherwise
+than confess the love which is consuming me?  I do not ask yet for a
+return of my devotion--I do not expect it till I have accomplished far
+more than I yet have done to deserve it; but yet, I do say, when my task
+is fulfilled--when I have placed you in safety, and can surround you
+with the luxuries to which you are accustomed--when I can restore you to
+your proper station in life, that must be my reward, or I will place a
+dagger in your hand, and bid you strike home to my heart; for that would
+be the only other boon I would ask of you--the only other happiness I
+could enjoy."
+
+Ada looked at the unhappy young man with compassion, and her bosom
+heaved with emotion; for she saw the sincerity of his passion, and it
+grieved her heart to wound his feelings; but yet, she could not deceive
+him.
+
+"Signor, I cannot blame you.  I do not complain of your addressing me in
+words of love, however much I am grieved to hear them.  I am grateful
+for all you have done for me--I would endeavour to prove to you, had I
+the power, how grateful I am, and for all you purpose doing for me.  I
+feel that to you I owe my preservation from dangers too dreadful to
+contemplate.  I venture to entreat you still to exert your generous
+efforts to aid me, and to enable me to return to my friends; and yet I
+tell you that I cannot give you more than my deep, my everlasting
+gratitude.  My love, signor, were it a worthy recompense for your
+exertions, I have not to give--my heart as well as my troth belongs to
+another."
+
+The fierce passions which rest in the bosoms of the inhabitants of those
+southern climes, have far more powerful effects than any similar
+emotions on the less sensitively constituted frames of the northern
+nations.  Scarcely had Ada uttered these words, than, casting a glance
+at her features, as if to ascertain that he heard aright, and was not in
+some frightful dream, the young Italian fell prostrate on his face
+before her.  Horrified and trembling, she gazed at him without moving,
+for she thought he was dead; but at length as she stepped over him, his
+heavy breathing assured her that he still lived, and she exerted all her
+strength to raise him, as she was afraid, for his sake, to call any one
+to her assistance.  A jar of water was in the room, and she dashed some
+of its contents over his face, and placed him so that the air from the
+window might come in and revive him.  It was now her turn to act the
+part of guardian angel; and Captain Fleetwood would have pardoned her,
+as she bent over him, had she felt as a sister for the pale and unhappy
+youth before her.  At last her efforts were crowned with success.  He
+opened his eyes and gazed at her with a look to which intelligence soon
+returned.  As he did so, he endeavoured to rise; but the agitation of
+his feelings had been too violent to allow him so quickly to recover,
+and he again sank down on the ground, where he remained for some
+minutes, endeavouring to regain his scattered thoughts.
+
+"Where am I?  What dreadful event has occurred?" he at length muttered.
+"Methought some demon came with lightning in his hand to blast the
+lovely prospect which an angel had opened to my view."
+
+He was silent--the sound of his own voice had the effect of restoring
+him to his senses.  He rose, though with difficulty, and stood before
+her, supporting himself by a chair.
+
+"Pardon me, lady," he said, his voice still faltering as he spoke; "I
+have been weak, and have acted wrongly, madly, I own it.  The words I
+have uttered I should not have spoken till you were free, and had no
+longer more to expect from me; but oh, forget them--learn to look upon
+me as before I committed that fatal error.  I ask no recompense for what
+I have done, I ask none for what I may do.  All I entreat you is, to
+allow me to serve you faithfully--to obey your behests, whatever they
+may be, even though to do so break my very heart-strings.  Lady, for
+your sake I would preserve my rival, even though the next instant I were
+to see you clasped in his arms."
+
+Ada was moved, and she held out her hand to the young man; for though to
+English ears his language might appear overstrained, and his sentiments
+exaggerated and unnatural, for an Italian she knew it was composed and
+rational, and it gave her confidence in the sincerity of his
+professions.
+
+"I trust you, signor," she answered, struggling to keep down her own
+emotion.  "Believe me, you have my sincerest regard, and I were, indeed,
+base not to feel the deepest gratitude.  Remember, then, that I rely on
+you to serve me whenever I may ask you, and place my safety and hope of
+ultimate escape in your hands."
+
+"And it shall not be misplaced," answered Paolo.  "But, lady, I have
+longed to banish from your mind the prejudice you must naturally
+entertain against me, at seeing me in this island, with such company;
+but believe me that it is sorely against my will.  I am here by
+compulsion, a prisoner like yourself, though with more apparent liberty.
+To comprehend it I must tell you my unhappy history, which I would long
+ago have done, had I had the opportunity; but I feared to do so in
+presence of your attendant, on whose discretion I knew not if I could
+rely; and I have also, lately, been so closely watched by my oppressor,
+Zappa, that I have been unable to visit you when I thought you might be
+alone.  If you will now, lady, listen to me, it will serve to calm my
+spirits, and will contribute towards placing me in the position I would
+enjoy in your estimation."
+
+Ada assured him that even when her suspicions as to the character of the
+_Sea Hawk_ had been excited, she could not suppose that he was as guilty
+as those with whom she found him associated, although she had not
+believed him altogether as blameless as she should be rejoiced to find
+that he in reality was.
+
+"Thanks, lady, thanks, you already relieve my heart of a great weight,
+by saying so," he exclaimed, checking the passionate expression which
+was stealing into his tone and manner.  "To convince you further that
+you did me but justice, I will give you a brief outline of my history:--
+
+"You see before you the last remnant of an old, and noble, and once
+powerful family.  My fathers were lords of a broad domain in the
+neighbourhood of Brindisi, among the wild and rugged mountains which
+form the eastern spur of the Appenines, and abut on the shores of the
+Adriatic.  They first rose and flourished in the days when the sword of
+the strong hand could win lands and power, and when, whatever was lost
+by the extravagance or folly of one, was easily replaced by the bravery
+and daring of his successor.  But in later years, although the former
+means of repairing their damaged property no longer existed, yet, still
+with rather frequent succession, a Lord of Montifalcone would assume the
+family honours, who failed not to squander away property which he had no
+means of replacing.  Estate after estate was sold for several
+generations, till, at last, my father found himself the heir to a
+half-ruined castle on the borders of the ocean, and a few thousand acres
+of unproductive land in the same neighbourhood.  My mother, who is now a
+saint in heaven, was as much so as a mortal can be when on earth; and
+although my noble father inherited much of the true pride of ancient
+ancestry, he was free from the folly and vice of his predecessors, and
+he resolved to exert all his energies in repairing his broken fortunes,
+and to hand down a fair estate to his progeny.
+
+"By prudence and economy, he in a great manner, succeeded in doing so;
+and as he considered that idleness had been the cause of the ruin his
+ancestors had wrought on the family, he determined to give all his own
+children professions, which should afford them employment, and the means
+of support, despising the spirit which considered any employment besides
+that of arms beneath the dignity of a noble.
+
+"My eldest brother was, accordingly, educated to the profession of the
+law, while I studied that of medicine.  I had three sisters, all equally
+lovely, and endued, apparently, with the same amiable qualities.  The
+eldest married young, and went to live in the neighbourhood of Naples;
+the second died; and the history of the third is closely interwoven with
+mine.  By husbanding his resources, and carefully attending to the
+nature of the soil, my father had so improved the farms on his estate,
+that their produce was increased threefold; and as he spent the greater
+part of the income arising from it in still further improving it,
+devoting only what was absolutely necessary for the education of his
+sons, the produce went on increasing, to the surprise of all his
+neighbours.
+
+"The castle had been put in sufficient repair, to make a suitable
+residence for the family, and thither, during the time my brother and I
+could escape from our professional studies, we eagerly hastened to spend
+it in the society of those to whom we were ardently attached.  Our
+greatest favourite, if we loved one more than the other, was our sister
+Nina, for she was the youngest.  She was the most fascinating and
+lovely, though we confessed that if she had a fault, her disposition was
+too yielding and confiding--guileless herself, she could not credit that
+guile existed in others.  Hers was one of those characters which, from
+its very innocence, would be held more sacred in the eyes of an upright,
+honourable man, though it exposes its possessor to be made the dupe of
+the designing villain.  One might have supposed that our remote and
+quiet home would have been free from the accursed presence of such a
+one.  Never was a family more united or more happy.  Our father was in
+the enjoyment of vigorous health, and proud of his family, and the
+success of his laudable projects.  Our sainted mother rejoiced when he
+did, and their children had a contented present, and could look forward
+with confidence to the future.  I have not described the castle in which
+we lived.  It was one of great antiquity, though, as it had been added
+to, in subsequent years, the walls were mostly sound, and in good
+repair.  It stood on the summit of a rocky cliff, overlooking the sea,
+though of no great height, so that the waves, during a wintry storm,
+could dash up to the very base, and send showers of the sparkling spray
+over the walls.  There was a deep moat surrounding it, with a drawbridge
+over it; and, besides the main part, which was of great extent, there
+were walls with passages through them, and strong towers at each angle
+with which they communicated.  So numerous and intricate were the
+passages, and so dark and dangerous, from their ruined condition, that
+even I, a son of the house, had never entirely explored them.
+
+"Inland of the castle was an extensive and now highly-cultivated plain,
+the property of my father, who could thus from the summit of his tower
+survey the greater portion of his estates.  Beyond the plain rose range
+above range of lofty and almost inaccessible mountains which gave a
+character of peculiar wildness to the scenery.  Indeed, during the
+winter, I have never seen a spot partaking more of savage grandeur than
+my paternal castle; with the stormy ocean roaring on one side, and the
+cloud-capped Appenines towering to the skies on the other.
+
+"It was my delight as a boy, with my gun in my hand, to hunt the wild
+chamois among the remote recesses and rugged precipices of the one, or
+to bound in my light boat over the dancing waves of the other.
+
+"Among such scenes was I born, and I believe they gave a tone to my
+mind, which subsequent intercourse with the world did not altogether
+wear out; and such as may be supposed had a still more powerful effect
+on the mind of my sisters, who enjoyed less means of having their effect
+counteracted.
+
+"One night during the middle of winter, when all the members of the
+family were assembled in the great hall, sitting round the large dish of
+burning embers, to keep ourselves warm, chilled as we should otherwise
+have been from the effects of a furious gale, which blew across the
+Adriatic from the snowy mountains of Albania, a report was brought in by
+one of the farm servants, that a vessel was driving towards a dangerous
+reef of rocks, which ran out to sea, at a short distance from the
+southward of the castle.  My brother and I seized our hats and cloaks,
+and bidding the rest of the family not to be alarmed for our safety, we
+rushed out to see what assistance we might render to the hapless crew of
+the vessel, should any of them escape alive.  She was still at some
+little distance, and apparently not aware of the imminence of her
+danger, for she was firing guns of distress to call those on the shore
+to her assistance, as if, in the situation she was placed, any human aid
+could be afforded her.  The sea was running to a prodigious height, and
+dashing with the wildest fury on the rocky shore, and not a boat we had
+ever seen could have lived in it an instant.  The wind too blew in awful
+gusts, so that we frequently could scarcely stand, and it sent the foam
+flying over us in showers, till we were drenched with it to the skin, as
+we passed along to the edge of the cliff; on our way to the spot near
+which we judged the hapless vessel would strike the rocks.  We had
+collected as many of our people as we could find, and were supplied with
+ropes and spars to enable us to save the lives of any, should they be
+washed on shore from the wreck.
+
+"Now, mark me, lady, we believed that we were performing a truly
+Christian and virtuous act, and yet it was the cause of all the
+subsequent misery! and those I loved far better than myself endured.  We
+were hastening to preserve from destruction the accursed viper who was
+to sting us to death.  Thus, Heaven ordained it should be, and its ways
+are dark and intricate, beyond my comprehension, for surely it is
+against all the rules one can conceive of justice that a virtuous action
+should be thus rewarded.  Perhaps you will say that His ways are
+inscrutable, and, that as we have neither the power, nor have we the
+right to attempt to read them, so we should not venture to cavil at His
+ordinances, but humbly believe that the ultimate result will be for our
+benefit.  I believe it is so, lady; or it may be for a punishment; but
+it is bitter, very bitter, oftentimes to bear.  But I am wandering from
+my story.  We could watch the progress of the fated vessel by the
+occasional flashes of her guns, and the still more vivid ones of the
+lightning which darted from the dark clouds, and we could see that she
+still had some sail set, with which she was endeavouring to haul off the
+shore.  On she flew, plunging madly into the foaming waves, when, just
+as we reached the beach, she was lifted on the summit of a sea, and
+crashed downward on the reef.  We fancied that we could hear the
+despairing shriek of the hapless mariners above the loud roar of the
+waters as the wild waves dashed over them, and their barque parted
+beneath their feet.  A second flash revealed to us the masts falling by
+the board, and every timber and plank upheaving amid the foam--another
+came, and not a vestige of the vessel remained.  We were about to leave
+the spot, from feeling how hopeless was the prospect of saving the lives
+of any of those who had the misfortune to be on board, for we believed
+that not one could have survived an instant after the vessel had struck,
+when the men who were with us asserted that they saw some of the wreck
+drifting towards us; and directly afterwards a chest and some planks
+were cast within their reach, and hauled on shore.
+
+"This encouraged us to remain; and some other chests and boxes, bales of
+silk, and parts of the wreck, quickly followed.  My brother and I had
+been endeavouring to pierce the darkness with our eyes, to discover if
+any of our fellow-creatures were floating among the remnants of their
+late home, when we perceived a spar driving along the shore, to which it
+gradually drew near; and as a more vivid flash of lightning than usual
+darted through the air, we were convinced that we saw the figure of a
+man clinging to it.  Calling the men to our assistance, we hurried on to
+the spot where we judged he would come on shore.  The spar, with its
+occupant, approached us, again to be carried off.  We saw that the man
+was unable to help himself.  My brother and I, fastening ropes round our
+waists, rushed into the water, and striking out against the waves,
+almost overpowered with their force, we seized the now nearly insensible
+body, just as his grasp had loosened from the spar, and dragged him
+ashore.  So completely exhausted was he that, at first, we believed our
+exertions had been in vain, and that he was dead; but, on feeling his
+heart, we found that he still breathed; and, after looking in vain for
+the appearance of any of his late shipmates--though we left some men to
+watch, should any come on shore--we bore him to the castle.  My brother
+and I were almost chilled to death with the cold wind, which blew
+through our wet clothes--for we had wrapped up the stranger in our
+cloaks--yet, on our reaching home, before we would attend to ourselves,
+we saw him stripped of his wet garments, and placed him between blankets
+in my bed.
+
+"We then hurried off to change our own dripping clothes, leaving him in
+charge of our mother, who was engaged in pouring some warm liquid down
+his throat.  When we returned we found that he had much revived, and was
+able to speak a little,--though with pain--for he confessed that he had
+received some severe blows from the pieces of the wreck, and was much
+bruised, and otherwise injured.
+
+"I ought to have stated that, on entering the castle, we found that he
+was habited in the Greek costume; and that his dress was rich and
+costly, as were the ornaments on a dagger and brace of pistols which
+still were fixed in his sash.  We were not, therefore, a little
+astonished to hear him speak Italian with a pure accent, the reason of
+which he soon explained, by stating that he had been educated in our
+country, which he had, indeed, only lately left.  At first it had struck
+me that he seemed restless and uneasy when he heard that our men were
+still out for the purpose of assisting those who might come on shore.
+
+"He made minute and constant inquiries whether any of his shipmates had
+been saved; and when he was informed that the men had returned, and
+reported their belief that he was the only survivor of the whole ship's
+company, though he at first gave way to expressions of great grief, he
+very soon recovered his composure, nor did he show further that he felt
+any regret at their loss.
+
+"As he was very much hurt, I was afraid of fever setting in, which might
+have proved fatal; and I therefore forbade him to engage in
+conversation, and gave him such remedies as I thought would prove
+effectual in allaying it.  It did not, however, do so entirely; and for
+some days he suffered severely.
+
+"I sat by his side, and watched over him with the greatest care--in
+which work I was aided by my sisters--who were in constant attendance on
+him when I was called away.  When he had slightly recovered, he told us,
+without our questioning him on the subject, that the vessel which had
+been lost belonged to the Greek patriot navy, which was just then
+forming, from those ports which had succeeded in throwing off the
+Turkish yoke, and that he was simply a junior officer on board, as he
+had not, indeed, had any great length of experience on the sea--though
+that, with regard to rank and family, he was equal to any in his native
+land.
+
+"He then told us that he had been educated at the university of Pisa;
+and when he mentioned the name of Argiri Caramitzo, my elder brother,
+who had been there, recollected fully hearing much of him, though it
+struck him that he bore the character of a wild and thoughtless youth.
+His ultimate recovery was slow, for the injuries he had received were
+very severe.  As, in our economical system of housekeeping, we had few
+personal attendants, my mother and sisters were more constantly at the
+side of the sick stranger's couch than would otherwise, probably, have
+been the case; at the same time that it would have been contrary to our
+notions of hospitality to leave him much to the care of menials.
+Indeed, his conversation was so sparkling and lively--so full of
+anecdote of his varied intercourse with the world--and his manners were
+so courteous--and his expressions were so full of gratitude, that they
+felt themselves amply recompensed for their attendance by the
+gratification they experienced in his society--especially my younger
+sister, to whom the great world he painted was new, and strange, and
+wonderful.
+
+"My brother and I were not so much captivated by the attractions of the
+handsome stranger as were the rest of the family; at the same time I
+confess that, by his cordiality and evident anxiety to win me over, and
+to show his sense of the obligation he was under to me for the
+preservation of his life, he managed to gain my regard, if not my
+affection--indeed, I could not place that perfect confidence in him
+which I should have desired; as I frequently, in his less guarded
+moments, heard him express sentiments which were totally at variance
+with those he led my family to suppose he possessed.  I had, however, no
+doubt of the account he gave of himself--as it was corroborated in one
+point by the numbers of bodies washed on shore habited in the Greek
+costume.  To return to the night of the wreck, or rather the morning
+succeeding it.  When he heard that none of his shipmates had escaped, he
+entreated us to exert ourselves in preserving from plunder such chests
+and boxes as came on shore, as he said he trusted that, as Providence
+had saved him, it had preserved his property also, and that he should
+hope to find his own chest among the rest; and he promised, after having
+examined them, to give the remainder up to those who had found them.
+This wish, of course, seemed very natural, and several boxes which were
+discovered were conveyed to the castle.  It was more difficult to
+account for a number of bales, and pieces of silk and cloth, which drove
+on shore entangled with the seaweed; but when he heard of it, he stated
+that they had fallen in just before with a foundering merchantman, and
+that this was probably some of her cargo.
+
+"His first care on recovering was to examine the chests, which he took
+an opportunity of doing without any witnesses.  One he claimed as his
+own, and he showed us that it contained several rich Greek dresses,
+which he begged might be cleaned and dried.  The remainder of the boxes
+had been thoroughly ransacked for the purpose, as I since have reason to
+know, of destroying any papers which might betray the character of his
+ship; and also to remove some bags of treasure which he knew they
+contained.  He thus became possessed of considerable wealth, and the
+surest means of accomplishing any object he might have in view.  As he
+partially recovered his strength, he would wander out with my mother or
+sisters to the sheltered garden within the walls of the castle, and
+afterwards to one which was situated on the outer side of the moat, and
+which contained orange and apple, and other productive trees.  The time
+was approaching when my brother would be compelled to return to his
+practice, and I to my studies at the university.  Before, however, we
+went, our guest was able to accompany me on a short excursion into the
+mountains.  He seemed to enjoy it, though he was much too fatigued, he
+said, again to attempt so long an expedition.  This observation led me
+to suppose that he had no present intention of quitting the castle.  He
+expressed his regret at my intended departure, and assured me that he
+hoped to return again at some future period to thank me more than he had
+hitherto done for the service I had rendered him.  A day or two
+afterwards, thinking the change would benefit him, I invited him to
+accompany me on the water; the sea was calm, the sun shone bright, and
+the air was almost as balmy as in summer.  I mention the circumstance
+for the purpose of introducing the conversation which ensued, as we sat
+at the stern of the boat rowed by two sturdy fishermen.
+
+"`So, Signor Paolo,' he said, `I understand that you are studying the
+science of medicine--a very important one, though but little understood
+in my country.'
+
+"My answers are immaterial, so I will not repeat them.
+
+"`A somewhat dull life, though, you are destined to lead, if you are to
+be shut up in one of the smaller cities of Italy, and employed in
+tending old dowagers and sick babies.  I should have thought that such
+an occupation were somewhat derogatory to one with the noble blood which
+flows through your veins.  Each man to his fancy, Signor Paolo.  Now,
+were I to recommend, I should advise you to claim your patrimony from
+your father, and to wander forth and see the world.  Instead of
+returning to your college, accompany me to Greece, where I must soon go;
+and I will show you some of the glorious sport of war, and introduce you
+to the land where the arts and sciences flourished when Italy was but a
+desert.  When you grow weary you can return to your studies; but I
+promise you that you will find by far too much excitement and interest
+in the life you will lead to make you wish to go back to the dull
+routine from which I shall have emancipated you.'
+
+"Such was the tenor of his conversation; and though I declined accepting
+his offer, it made an impression which I should not at the time have
+supposed possible.
+
+"I had for some time past observed that he seemed to pay more attention
+to my youngest sister, Nina, than to the other members of the family,
+and she used to listen to his words, and to watch his looks with an
+eagerness which ought to have warned those about her of the too probable
+result.
+
+"I, at length, the day before I left home, informed my mother of my
+fears that the stranger was becoming attached to my sister, and
+entreated her to be on her guard.  She assured me that my alarm was
+groundless; that she had not remarked anything particular in Signor
+Caramitzo's manner; and that at all events Nina was far too well brought
+up to give her affections to one of whom she knew so little.  We left
+our beloved and happy home--my brother, alas! never to return.  We were
+the only two of the family the stranger feared; for he saw that we did
+not thoroughly trust him.
+
+"Our parents treated him with all the courtesy due to an honoured guest;
+and it was against all their notions of hospitality to hint to him that
+as his strength was re-established, he should take his departure.  He
+now began his accursed employment of winning and enslaving the pure
+affections of my young sister, in order to allure her from her father's
+home.  He found the task of making her love him, not very difficult, for
+she knew nothing of the perfidy of man; but when he first proposed her
+flying with him, she was startled and horrified, and would have betrayed
+him, had he not assured her that he had mentioned the subject merely to
+try her, and that it was far from his intention to make her do anything
+of which she might repent.
+
+"He still continued urging his suit in secret, and winding himself
+deeper and deeper into her affections, till she no longer lived or
+breathed, except for his sake.  He at last really and truly loved her as
+much as his nature was capable of; and I believe that if any compunction
+ever visited his mind, it was at what had been his intention with regard
+to that sweet girl.
+
+"Two weeks after I left the castle a letter reached me, with the
+information that the stranger had taken his departure on board a vessel
+which put into the neighbouring port, and what seriously alarmed me was,
+that my sister Nina had been seized with a dangerous illness.  I would
+have flown home, but my father forbade me; and the next account spoke of
+her recovery--though she remained in a low and melancholy state most
+unusual for her.  It was at this time my eldest sister married a
+nobleman of high character, greatly to our parents' satisfaction; and
+soon afterwards the first misfortune which had yet happened to our
+hitherto prosperous family occurred.  Our second sister was seized with
+a mortal malady, which terminated her existence.
+
+"The shock was so great to our mother, worn out as she already was with
+watching over Nina, that she could not rally; and she herself fell a
+victim to the same fatal disease.
+
+"I returned home to find my father prostrate by the double blow.  For
+months I anxiously watched over him, and at length, to my great joy, he
+partially recovered his health and strength.  Nina's spirits appeared to
+me to have been much restored, her eye brightened, and often her lips
+wore the same smile as of yore.  I never ventured to mention the name of
+Argiri Caramitzo to her, nor did she herself ever allude to the
+circumstance of his shipwreck and stay at our castle; and I trusted that
+she had banished him from her mind.  Such happiness as the world can
+give was about, I hoped, to revisit the remnant of our family.  Alas!
+how fallacious were my expectations."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY TWO.
+
+"One summer's evening, my sister and I were seated with our father at an
+open window of our apartment in the castle, whence we could enjoy a view
+of the calm waters of the Adriatic.  He was more cheerful than he had
+been for a long time; and Nina took her guitar, and sang to him some of
+the songs in which he used formerly to delight.
+
+"While we sat there I observed a white sail in the far distance; and it
+seemed to me to approach nearer and nearer the land.  I pointed it out
+to Nina; and it struck me afterwards that she grew pale as I spoke, and
+placed her hand on her heart, as if to stop its throbbing.  Yet at the
+time I thought nothing of it.  For a few minutes she was silent, and
+lost in meditation, but at length recovered herself, and continued
+singing.  I remarked this, and I remember rallying her on the subject,
+saying that her songs were all those she knew of a sad and plaintive
+character.
+
+"The time for sleep arrived, and we retired to our chambers.  Nina
+kissed our father's cheek, and was going, but went back and kissed him
+again, and he blessed her at parting.  I had slept some hours, I know
+not how long, when I awoke, feeling hot and feverish.  I tried again to
+sleep, but could not; and at length I arose for the purpose of taking a
+walk round the battlements, thinking that the cool night air, which came
+off the sea, would calm and refresh me.
+
+"On my way to the small turret gate, which led from a tower to the top
+of the castle wall, I had to pass Nina's chamber.  The door was open.  I
+looked in--the chamber was vacant.  Surprised, though not much alarmed,
+for I thought she had, unknown to me, gone to occupy the one which had
+been our sister's, I continued my progress.
+
+"As I opened the gate, the night air, which blew in and circled round
+the bower, struck my feelings as peculiarly cold and damp, and a low,
+moaning sound came across the waters.  There was no moon, and the stars
+were obscured by a veil of clouds which had gathered in the sky, so
+that, to my eyes, accustomed to the light of the lamp I had carried thus
+far, the darkness seemed almost palpable.  I, however, could have gone
+round the walls blindfold, so that this was to me a matter of
+indifference, and I stepped out on the battlements.  I had proceeded
+some way, when I was startled by seeing the bright rays of a light
+flashing across the courtyard before me.  I stopped, and watched, with
+astonishment, for I could not surmise who could be in that part of the
+castle at that hour of the morning.  I must state that on the side of
+the castle nearest the sea, within the outer walls, was a small chapel,
+dedicated to our Lady of the Rock, and here, on saints' days and
+Sundays, and on certain other occasions, the priests from a neighbouring
+convent used to come and perform the services of the Church; for my
+father did not keep a regular chaplain, as is generally the custom.  He
+was not a man to support the drones they usually are.  The light, I was
+convinced, whose beams I saw, was in the chapel, through the windows of
+which it must come.  By going on a little further along the battlements,
+I had a more extensive view of the chapel; and I now beheld a bright
+light streaming from all the windows.  My astonishment was still further
+increased by hearing the voices of persons within: they were silent, and
+I then distinguished the voice, I thought, of a priest, engaged in the
+performance of a service.  From a turret, some way on, a stone stair led
+down into the chapel; and as the key of the door was attached to the one
+I held in my hand, I determined at once to solve the mystery.  Hastening
+on, I opened the door in the turret, and descended noiselessly.  I
+reached the bottom of the steps, and a few paces more brought me to the
+door which opened into the chapel.
+
+"I confess that, at that moment, all the stories I had ever heard of the
+power of the spirits of evil to assume the human form, or of the
+departed to return on earth, or of horrors mysterious and undefined,
+rushed into my mind, and, for a time, I stood irresolute and trembling.
+
+"At length, I mustered courage and burst open the door.  The scene which
+met my sight made me recoil with a feeling very different to what I
+expected.
+
+"A priest was at the altar--a stranger, whom I knew not; and before him
+stood my young sister Nina, her hand clasped in that of the man whose
+life I had saved--of whom I had now so many dark suspicions, Argiri
+Caramitzo.  I rushed forward with a cry of rage, and would have borne
+Nina off from him.  He put me aside with a contemptuous smile, for I was
+unarmed, and far weaker than he.  I snatched a dagger from a man
+standing near, and would have plunged it in his heart, when the voice of
+the priest arrested my hand, uttering the word--
+
+"`Forbear!'
+
+"Nina had looked confused and alarmed; she shrieked out--
+
+"`Oh! injure him not, Paolo, he is my husband--my life; till me, if I
+have done wrong; but he would have it so.'
+
+"`She speaks truly,' said the priest.  `She is the wedded wife of Signor
+Argiri Caramitzo, or by whatever name this signor is known.'
+
+"`I can bear much from you, Paolo,' said Caramitzo, speaking to me for
+the first time; `but you must not interfere in a case of this sort.
+Your sweet sister has bestowed on me her hand, as she has long given me
+her heart; and this very night I bear her hence to my home upon the
+waves.'
+
+"As he said this, he pressed Nina to his bosom, and seemed about to bear
+her away, while he stretched out his other hand, as if to prevent my
+approach.  `Whether wife or not, she leaves not this castle without her
+father's consent--with one, too, whose name and profession are
+doubtful,' I again exclaimed, springing forward, and attempting to seize
+her.
+
+"`If you will have it so, you must take the consequences,' he replied,
+in the same cool tone.  `Seize that young signor, and bring him along; I
+will not be interfered with.'  He turned, and spoke to a number of men
+who stood round, armed to the teeth, and whom I had not before remarked.
+They immediately seized me, and I saw at once that resistance would be
+useless.
+
+"`It is folly, Nina, to be alarmed,' I heard the Greek say, in answer to
+my sister's tears and remonstrances.  `No injury shall be done him, and
+we will shortly return and claim your father's pardon, and explain the
+reasons of my present proceedings.'
+
+"Nina was not convinced, for she had not expected to be thus suddenly
+carried off; and she made every resistance in her power to what was
+being done, entreating also that I might be set at liberty.
+
+"The Greek, however, was deaf to all her entreaties, and soon succeeded
+in pacifying her fears.  Had I indeed been able to arouse the other
+inmates of the castle, it would have been of no avail, for it was now
+completely in the power of Caramitzo, as I have hitherto called him--for
+under that name I then knew him; though I need scarcely tell you that he
+was no other than the pirate Zappa.  He had, it appeared, during his
+former stay at our castle, secured the key of a small postern-gate,
+through which he and his followers had gained admittance.  For a long
+time his arrival had been looked forward to by my deluded sister, as he
+had arranged the means of communicating with her before his departure;
+and he had persuaded her of the necessity of a private marriage, all the
+arrangements of which he promised to make, provided she would undertake
+to follow his directions.  The priest he had brought with him from a
+distant part of the coast, having induced him, by high bribes, to
+accompany him, and, I believe, keeping him in ignorance as to the place
+to which they had come, or who was the lady he had married.  A book,
+however, was left on the altar in the chapel, with the signatures of the
+married couple, the priest, and witnesses; either intended as a
+consolation or an insulting mockery to the unhappy father who had been
+deprived of his child.  My eyes were instantly blindfolded, and I felt
+myself lifted up and carried along for some distance, till I was placed
+in a boat, from which, after rowing for some distance I was hoisted on
+board a vessel, and placed by myself in a cabin, the door of which was
+fastened on me.  After a vain attempt to get out, I threw myself down on
+a couch in the cabin, and considered how I should proceed to liberate my
+poor sister and myself.  The rippling noise of the water against the
+sides of the vessel showed me that she was under weigh, and I felt how
+hopeless was our fate.  The morning must have been far advanced when the
+door of the cabin was opened by two powerful men, with arms in their
+belts.  A third person appeared behind them, who spoke a little broken
+Italian.
+
+"`We have come,' he said, `Signor Paolo, to request you to take the
+oath; without signing which no person is allowed to remain alive on
+board this vessel beyond twelve hours.  When you have been longer with
+us you will see the necessity of our rule.  You will not refuse to take
+it.'
+
+"`I shall certainly refuse to take any oath which may restrain my
+liberty,' I answered; `I desire that my sister and myself be at once
+restored to our home.'
+
+"`Whatever we may ultimately do, it is necessary for you to take the
+oath before you can quit the cabin.  It is the rule of the ship, and the
+captain himself, as well as any of his friends must abide by it.'
+
+"`What is the character of the ship I am on board, then?'  I asked--the
+dreadful truth for the first time flashing across my mind.
+
+"`That you will be told when you have taken the oath,' replied the
+interpreter.  `The captain has brought you on board, and will not have
+you injured; but we claim our privilege, which he cannot refuse us.  The
+oath to betray neither vessel nor crew, by sign, by word, or deed; to
+obey our chief in all things, and to abide by the laws of the ship,
+or,'--and the two men drew out their glittering daggers from their
+sashes--`death.  You preserved our captain's life, he says; but he
+cannot save yours, unless you accept our terms, and then, on that
+account, we will gladly receive you as a brother.'
+
+"I considered, as well as I was able, under the circumstances, how I
+should act.  I was young--life seemed full of charms.  They were in
+earnest, and I saw nothing unreasonable in the oath they imposed on me.
+I had no longer any doubt that I was on board a piratical vessel.  I
+could not expect her crew to act otherwise than they were doing towards
+me; and the true character of Caramitzo now appearing more evident, I
+felt that there was greater reason to rescue my betrayed sister from his
+power; and I thought that the only way of so doing would be to affect no
+hesitation even in joining them.
+
+"`I consent to take the oath,' I replied, with as firm a voice as I
+could command.  Had I known the abject slavery to which those words
+would reduce me, I would have died sooner than utter them.
+
+"`Come,' said the men, `we are prepared to administer it without delay,'
+and, blindfolding me, they led me into another cabin, where I was
+ordered to kneel down on a cushion, and a book was placed in my hands,
+which I was told was the Bible.  The oath was then administered, and it
+made me call down the most dreadful maledictions on my head, and on the
+heads of all those dear to me, should I ever break it.  The bandage was
+then removed from my eyes, and I found myself in a large cabin,
+surrounded by men with drawn swords in their hands, and at the head of
+them appeared the pirate Zappa.
+
+"A cross was then formed by the swords of the two men standing nearest
+to me, which I was compelled to kiss, and then to sign my name in a book
+with my own blood.  The ceremony completed, I was told to rise, a sword
+was placed in my hands, and I was hailed as a comrade.  I shuddered at
+the name.  Zappa then advanced towards me, and, with the same smile
+which had once fascinated me, he exclaimed.  `Welcome, my dear Paolo,
+now doubly my brother.  I have been compelled to use a little gentle
+force to win you to me as I have long been anxious to do.  You are yet
+unable to appreciate the advantages I can offer you, so I will not
+complain of your angry looks.  Now come on deck, and I will introduce
+you to your brother officers--for I consider you one of this ship, and I
+will try and make a seaman of you.'
+
+"I was meditating, while he spoke, whether I should fly at him, and
+endeavour to wreak the bitter vengeance I felt at the moment; but the
+oath I had just uttered came to my mind, and for my sister's sake, by a
+violent effort, I restrained my passion.
+
+"`I cannot pretend, Signor Caramitzo, not to complain of the violence to
+which you have subjected me, and of the deceit you have practised on my
+sister,' I replied; `yet, I am in your power, and I trust to your honour
+to make the best amends you can--to treat her with tenderness, since she
+has given herself to you--and to allow me the opportunity of
+communicating with our unhappy father, and of endeavouring to mitigate
+the grief he will feel at the loss of his children.'
+
+"`I do not forget that you saved my life, Paolo, and that alone would
+make me obey your wishes,' he answered, in a mild, conciliating tone.
+`Your sister is dearer far than that life, and, therefore, you need not
+fear for her.  I will not pretend to disguise from you, Paolo, what I
+am; but that she need not know.  The world calls me and my companions
+pirates.--Let them--the lion is a nobler animal than the beast on which
+it preys.  Ours is a glorious life; you will learn to think so, too.
+There is danger, it is true.  But there is excitement far higher than
+that the gambler, who stakes his fortune on a cast, can enjoy, and who
+generally, when he loses, seeks the worst that can befall us--a speedy
+death.  But I will not now stay to sing the praises of the life I have
+destined you to lead, till, grown weary, we some day retire from the
+busy scene, and become honoured chiefs and nobles in our own country,
+with lands and wealth, and surrounded by our family and dependents.  Eh,
+Paolo, I draw the picture well!  But we will on deck, and see how our
+barque speeds over the waters.'
+
+"I repeat his words, to show the character of the man in whose power my
+unhappy sister was placed.  For myself I feared not, nor grieved--I
+could easily break my bonds; but she, alas! hers were indissoluble.
+Fortunately for her, she did not guess who he was, nor the character of
+his ship.  She believed, and I trust, to this day believes, that he
+commanded a Greek man-of-war, and is all he represented himself to her.
+
+"We sailed on, meeting with various adventures, till we reached this
+island, where, in a neighbouring tower, he at once established my
+sister.  I felt also that it would be cruelty to undeceive her, and
+would answer no good object.  My sister, I believe, he really loves, or
+did love, as far as his nature would allow; but lately I have fancied
+his affection was decaying, and he has always treated me without
+severity, and generally with kindness, though my spirit has rebelled
+against the shackles which galled me, but which I had no power to shake
+off.
+
+"My story is drawing to an end; but I have still more to say.  I urged
+Zappa, day after day, to allow me to return to my paternal home, and
+endeavour to comfort my father, if consolation was still to be found for
+him on earth, and to explain to him the cause of my sister's absence,
+with the wish of palliating the folly of her conduct in his eyes, vowing
+solemnly at the end of four months again to return to the island.  To my
+surprise, he at last consented to comply with my wish, undertaking to
+land me on the coast of Italy, and to call again for me at a spot and a
+period he would afterwards fix on.  His object in so doing was, not to
+allow me to know the position of this island.  He fulfilled his promise,
+and I at length returned to the castle.  Alas! though my father still
+lived, I saw at once by the pallor on his cheek, and trembling voice,
+that his days were numbered.  I appeared to him like one returning from
+the dead; for he had believed that I was slain in endeavouring to
+prevent my sister from being carried off.  He blamed her not--he
+pardoned her weakness and folly, and his longing desire was to see her
+once more before he died.
+
+"I had yet another blow to receive.  My eldest brother, whom I loved
+dearly, had been slain by the dagger of an assassin at Naples, and I
+became the heir to the family property, which I neither wished for nor
+could enjoy.  My whole anxiety was now to return to the island, and to
+endeavour to persuade the pirate to allow my sister to accompany me back
+to see our father ere he died.
+
+"At last I received a letter desiring me to repair to a certain port,
+where I was to be met by a person who would convey me on board a
+felucca, whence I was to be transferred to the pirate vessel.  I thought
+not of the dangers and difficulties of the undertaking, but, embracing
+my father, with a bleeding heart I tore myself from him, and hastened to
+the appointment.  Zappa received me cordially, and I was in hopes, would
+consent to my request; but when I at length made it, he at once
+positively refused to grant it.
+
+"He said that Nina was now happy and contented; and that she knew not of
+her father's illness; and that if she was allowed to leave him she would
+hear things to his prejudice, and might refuse to return; and that, as
+she was only going to see her father die, it could not possibly benefit
+her.  The more I urged my request, the more he appeared determined to
+refuse it, till at length I saw that all attempts to gain him to consent
+would be worse than futile, so I ceased from importuning him.  I did not
+the less meditate how I could best accomplish my object.
+
+"As soon as I reached the island, I told Nina, the first time I was
+alone with her, of our father's wish to see her, at the same time
+binding her not to mention the subject to her husband, as I assured her
+he would not consent to part from her.  As soon as I explained our
+father's state to her, and told her he was heartbroken at her loss, she
+wept bitterly, and promised to enter into any plan I might arrange to
+enable her to visit him, fully intending again to return here.  My
+purpose was, to separate her from the pirate for ever, by informing her,
+though at the risk, I knew, of blasting her happiness, of his true
+character; but yet, signora, I knew that the evil day must come, and
+that, when he deserted her, I might not be by to protect her.
+
+"I had brought a considerable sum of money with me, which I had
+concealed about my person for any emergency, and with it I bribed two
+men of the village on the opposite side of the bay, to prepare a boat,
+in which, with their aid, I hoped to reach either the main land, or one
+of the larger islands, or to get on board some vessel which would convey
+us to some civilised place, whence I might find the means of reaching
+Italy.  I waited for an occasion when Zappa should have gone on one of
+the piratical expeditions he was in the habit of taking, and when,
+according to custom, he would have compelled me to accompany him.  To
+avoid this I had planned to feign illness, and, as soon as I saw the
+preparations making for embarking, I pretended to be seized with a
+dangerous sickness.  He expressed great regret, and so convinced me that
+he regarded me with affection, that I felt some qualms of conscience at
+deceiving him, stained, though I knew him to be, with a thousand crimes.
+He even delayed his departure, and I saw it would be necessary to
+pretend to recover to get him off.
+
+"The night at last came, in which the enterprise was to be attempted.  I
+left my room, to which I was supposed to be confined by illness, and,
+going down to the bay, I found the boat and the men in readiness.  I
+then returned to my sister's tower, whence I bore her trembling with
+alarm, and overwhelmed with grief at the thoughts of quitting the man
+whom she so fatally loved, we safely reached the boat.  We were not
+observed, for no one suspected us, and we launched forth into the deep.
+I had arranged for an ample supply of provisions, and I had previously
+carried down the means of sheltering my sister from the weather; so we
+were prepared for a long voyage.  For three days we steered to the west
+and south, with the sea calm, and the wind favourable and moderate,
+passing only small islands, where the men assured me we should have no
+chance of assistance.  By this calculation, it would take us two days
+more before we could reach the main land; when, on the fourth day, as
+the morning broke, I discerned a vessel standing towards us.  As she
+drew nearer, my horror, as well as that of the islanders, may be
+supposed, when they pronounced her to be Zappa's own brig, the _Sea
+Hawk_.  It was hopeless to expect to escape her by outstripping her in
+sailing; so, we lowered the sail on the chance of our remaining
+unobserved, while Nina and I crouched down in the bottom of the boat, in
+order that, if the pirate vessel should pass at some little distance, we
+might be mistaken for one of the fishing-boats of the neighbouring
+islands.  All our care was futile.  On so smooth a sea, and in so bright
+an atmosphere, an object as large as we presented might be seen at a
+great distance, and we had not escaped the vigilant eyes of the pirates.
+On came the vessel.  Nina was bathed in tears; the Greeks trembled, for
+they knew their lives were at stake.  I nerved myself for the worst, for
+I knew not what the rage of Zappa might prompt him to do, though I
+feared for my sister more than for myself.
+
+"The boat was not only seen but recognised, and the _Sea Hawk_ ran up
+close to us.  The men were ordered to pull alongside, and we all soon
+stood on the deck of the brig.
+
+"`Such, then, is the love you bear me, that the first moment of my
+absence you would desert me,' said the pirate, looking reproachfully at
+Nina, without taking any notice of me and my companions.  `I believed, I
+felt sure, that you loved me, but now I know that I was bitterly
+mocked.'
+
+"`Oh, no, no!' exclaimed Nina, who had stood trembling and abashed
+before him, `I loved you better than life itself.  I love you now, and
+no human power should have prevented me from returning to you.  Do with
+me as you will, but do not wring my heart with greater anguish than now
+it suffers by believing that I do not love you.  My duty to a dying
+parent would alone have prompted me to take the step I have done.'
+
+"`I believe you, Nina,' said Zappa, taking her in his arms.  `I will not
+part with you.  As to you, Paolo, you have deceived me, and have
+instigated your sister to leave me.  I shall take means to prevent your
+behaving thus in future.'
+
+"Saying this, he carried my sister below, and placed her in his cabin;
+he then returned on deck, and walked up to where the two Greeks were
+standing, awaiting their sentence.  I had never before seen his fiercer
+passions aroused.
+
+"`You know what you have to expect,' he exclaimed, in a voice of
+thunder.  `You have broken the laws of our community.  You would have
+deprived me of the two persons I most regard in the world, and
+purposed--nay, deny it not--for I know your vile natures, to have
+murdered them for the sake of the gold still in their possession.  Take,
+therefore, the consequences.'
+
+"As he uttered these words he drew two pistols from his belt, one in
+each hand, and, levelling them at the heads of the men, they uttered a
+shriek for mercy, as their eyes caught the direction of his hands; but
+it was too late.  Ere they could spring back, he fired, and they fell
+dead at his feet.
+
+"`Cast the bodies overboard, and let their boat go adrift.  We will keep
+no memorial of the wretches,' he exclaimed; then, turning to me, he
+observed, `You see, Paolo, how we treat traitors; and let me tell you,
+you have had a narrow escape; and your sweet sister--I tremble to think
+what her fate would have been.  Had I not fortunately found you, you
+would not have been allowed to live another day, and let this be a
+lesson to you for the future.'
+
+"Two days afterwards we reached the island, and Zappa quieted my
+sister's anxiety, by promising to gain information respecting our
+father's health.  He did so, and the reply was, that he was dead.  I
+remained still subservient to the pirate.  I would not desert my unhappy
+sister, and I could not break through the fetters the pirate had thrown
+around me.  He confides in me, and insists on my accompanying him on his
+expeditions, when I can render great assistance to his men from my
+knowledge of surgery; and I am at times able to mitigate the fate of
+those who fall into his power.  Had I the will also, my oath would
+prevent my betraying him, and thus, signora, you will be able to account
+for my appearance on board the speronara, and afterwards in the _Sea
+Hawk_.  Such, lady, is the outline of my unhappy history--"
+
+"And one on which it would have been wiser for you to have held
+silence!" exclaimed a voice behind him; and, looking up, he and Ada
+beheld the tall form of Zappa standing in the doorway.  He advanced into
+the room, making a low reverence towards her, at the same time that he
+stretched out his hand in the direction Paolo was standing.  "Go,
+foolish youth!" he exclaimed, in a tone in which contempt blended with
+anger.  "You will some day try my patience more than I can bear."
+
+The young Italian stood for an instant irresolute--his bosom heaving
+with emotions of pride and indignation, and his lips parted, as if he
+would have defied his tyrant; he felt, too, that he was in the presence
+of the woman for whom he had declared his love, and all the more manly
+qualities of his nature rose up to his aid; but he had been too long
+accustomed to yield to the influence which the pirate had gained over
+him--he quailed before the stern, unrelenting eye fixed on him, and his
+soft, unresisting character, too similar to that of his unfortunate
+sister, made him falter in his half-formed purpose.  With an expression
+of agony, of shame, and humiliation on his countenance, he turned and
+fled down the steps.
+
+Ada at once felt the importance of maintaining her own dignity.  She
+rose, and as calmly as she could command her voice, she asked,--"May I
+know, signor, to what cause I am indebted for this visit?"
+
+"Beautiful lady!" said the pirate, still standing at a distance, which
+would have showed respect had his words been different, "can you suppose
+it possible that I should always resist the influence of your
+attractions.  Am I to be the only one in this island who is to be
+debarred the happiness of basking in your smiles?  Is yon weak youth
+ever to be preferred to me?"
+
+"In pity's name, cease this insulting mockery, signor," said Ada, her
+heart at the same time sinking with a fear she had hitherto happily not
+yet experienced.  "Does not every manly quality of your heart rebel at
+the thought of thus addressing one so totally unprotected, so helpless
+as I am.  With regard to the unhappy gentleman who has just quitted the
+room, I am innocent of any other feeling than profound pity for his
+misfortunes; and with regard to yourself, how can you expect me to feel
+other than indignation at the outrage to which you have subjected me.
+Every day that I am kept here a prisoner can but serve to increase that
+feeling; and my only request is, that I may not be insulted by the
+presence of one who has been the cause of the misery I endure."
+
+There is a majesty and dignity, a commanding power in the eye and
+expression of a pure, high-minded, resolute woman, which will abash even
+the boldest and most unscrupulous men.  That is their shield and
+buckler, their defence against the attacks of the profligate.  It is
+like the steadfast gaze of a dauntless man, which is said to have the
+power of awing even the fiercest of the beasts of the forest; but let
+her beware how for an instant she withdraws it, how she allows the
+softer feelings of her woman's nature to shake her firmness; her
+opponent is ever watchful, and should she allow the faintest gleam of
+hope to enter his bosom, the potent charm is broken.  Thus, in the
+bright dignity of her nature, stood Ada Garden.
+
+The blood-stained, reckless pirate advanced not a step nearer; he stood
+abashed and confused, nor gave utterance to a word of remonstrance at
+her resolution.  He seemed to feel that it was she, indeed, whose right
+it was to command--his duty to obey.  He hesitated as he spoke.
+
+"Pardon me, signora, I came not to offend you, but to endeavour to win
+your regard and esteem.  Time may reconcile you to your lot--may soften
+your feelings--may create a tenderer sentiment in your heart than you
+are now disposed to entertain.  I am not one who is in the habit of
+yielding a point on which I have once determined; I must be content,
+however, to look forward to the future, while I submit to your dictates
+for the present.  Farewell, signora, I acknowledge myself conquered; but
+another time, be not too confident that you will gain the victory."
+
+Ada endeavoured to maintain her composure, but the tone assumed by Zappa
+alarmed her more than he was probably aware of.  Silence she felt was
+now her best safeguard.  She placed her hands before her eyes to shut
+out his hateful sight, while she endeavoured to nerve herself for what
+might next occur.
+
+The Greek, however, it appeared, had no wish to proceed to extremities.
+Perhaps he really felt affection for her; perhaps he calculated on
+receiving a handsome ransom for her.  Whatever was his motive, he
+determined to persecute her no more for the present, and he took the
+opportunity to quit the chamber.
+
+When she removed her hands from her eyes she was alone.  She heard the
+pirate descending the steps of the tower, and when she had ascertained
+that he had to a certainty left it, she knelt down, and her deep sobs
+told of her outraged feelings, and the anguish of her heart.  She was
+aroused by the return of Marianna, who promised never again to be
+tempted to leave her.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY THREE.
+
+Zappa had hitherto contrived to prevent the meeting of Ada and Nina, by
+compelling both of them to remain shut up in their respective parts of
+the castle.  The cause of this conduct it is scarcely necessary to
+explain.  His object was to keep Nina ignorant of the presence of her
+rival, and he also hoped to bend Ada's haughty spirit by the confinement
+to which she was subject.  It could not, however, be supposed that Nina
+should not hear rumours of the presence of a stranger in the island,
+although Paolo had been careful not to hurt his sister's feelings
+needlessly, by speaking of her.  Little Mila, the only personal
+attendant with whom she could converse, had been warned not to mention
+the arrival of Ada and her attendant; and for some time she kept the
+secret which was burning on her tongue; but as she suffered somewhat
+from that infirmity which is said, I suspect unjustly, to be peculiar to
+her sex, she at last began to think that she had kept it long enough.
+She did not, however, at once announce the information she had to
+communicate, but reserved to herself the pleasure of giving it out by
+driblets.
+
+"We shall have the whole castle built up as it used to be, one of these
+days, I suspect, signora," she observed, as she was assisting Nina to
+dress.  "It would be difficult, though, to arrange a more handsome room
+than this."
+
+"No, Mila, scarcely could anything be more beautiful than this.  But why
+should you say so?" asked Nina, whose suspicions had already been
+aroused by her attendant's previous remarks.
+
+"Why, signora, I was comparing it with a room I have seen elsewhere,
+which is also very magnificent," returned Mila.
+
+"You have seen!  Why, you have never been off this island," exclaimed
+Nina.
+
+"That is true, signora," said the Greek girl; "but the room I speak of
+is on the island, and I confess it is at no great distance from this
+tower."
+
+"I was not aware that any other part of the castle was inhabited, except
+the tower and the house close to it," observed Nina.
+
+"There you are mistaken, signora.  The other old tower to the east of
+this, has had a room lately fitted up, very much like this, and there
+lives there a good-natured, lively girl, who tells me--for we manage to
+talk very well together--that she was born in an island like this, only
+larger.  I like her very much, though she is not at all pretty; but she
+has a mistress, a young lady, who also lives in the tower, who is a
+complete angel--so fair, and kind, and beautiful, though she does not
+speak much, as she does not understand a word of Romaic; but I loved her
+the moment I saw her, and I am sure you would do so also, signora, were
+you to see her."
+
+"A lady! young, and fair, and beautiful," repeated the Italian girl, a
+feeling gushing into her bosom which was very far from being allied to
+love.  "Who is she? how long has she been here? what is she like?"
+
+"As to who she is, signora, all I know is, that they say she belongs to
+a people who have big ships, and have never been slaves to the Turks;
+then she has been here ever since our chief came back; for he brought
+her in his vessel with Signor Paolo, your brother, who knows more about
+her than I do; and I suspect, loves her also not a little.  And with
+regard to what she is like--she is not so tall as you are, signora; but
+her skin is as clear as yours, and fair as the foam blown across the
+ocean in a winter's storm, with some of the hue stolen from the rose on
+her cheeks; and her eyes--so soft they are, and of the same tint as the
+brightest spot in the cloudless sky above our heads."
+
+How long little Mila, having now ventured once to let her tongue run
+loose on the forbidden subject, would have continued recapitulating the
+praises of the stranger lady--little dreaming of the wounds she was
+inflicting on the feelings of her older friend and mistress--it is
+impossible to say, had not Nina interrupted her.
+
+"I must go and see this stranger lady!" she exclaimed, in a tone which
+startled the little girl, and taught her that it would have been wiser
+to have obeyed orders, and not mentioned her.  "Come, Mila, we will go
+at once, and you shall run up into her room, and announce me."
+
+"Oh, dear! signora, that will never do," answered the Greek girl.  "You
+forget that the directions of our chief forbid you to quit your tower;
+and what would he say, were he to hear that you had visited that of the
+stranger lady.  He is certain to come back, and find you there."
+
+Nina had, however, so determined to satisfy her jealous suspicions, that
+she overruled all Mila's scruples.
+
+"If I find them fatally true, a speedy death will be my only resource,
+or, ah! that of my rival;" so ran the current of her thoughts.  "I could
+not let her live in the triumphant enjoyment of what I had lost--his
+love.  I could not bear to think that other ears but mine own hear the
+tender accents of his voice, which speaks so eloquently to me of love.
+'Twould be madness to know that I were flung aside for one more young
+and beautiful, perchance, but one who could not feel for him one tenth
+part of the intense love I bear him.  I must go and see her.  If she
+is--oh!  God, what?"  And her hand touched, unconsciously, the hilt of a
+small dagger she wore in her girdle.
+
+Ada Garden was sitting in her chamber when little Mila hurried into her
+presence, and intimated, as well as she could, that a lady desired to
+see her, flying out at the same speed with which she entered.
+
+As it happened, Ada did not, in the least, understand what she meant,
+and supposing it was a matter of no importance, continued the perusal of
+a work she held in her hand.  She was startled by hearing a deep sigh,
+and looking up, she saw a graceful female figure standing at the other
+end of the room, with her eyes fixed intently on her.  For the first
+moment, the idea glanced across her mind, that her senses must have
+deceived her, so statue-like was the form--so rigid was the gaze; but a
+few seconds served to assure her that a human being was in her presence.
+Her own look, as she lifted up her eyes, betokened surprise, though not
+alarm, and there was that sweet and tranquil expression, that purity,
+the consciousness of innocence, in her countenance, which the beautiful
+Italian--for she was the intruder--interpreted aright.  Nina did not
+utter a word for some moments; but with the passionate impulse which
+had, unhappily, too often guided her, she advanced towards her supposed
+rival, and knelt down before her, bending her head to the ground.  She
+soon looked up, and gazed in her countenance with an expression of
+earnest inquiry, as if she would read her thoughts.
+
+"Lady," she at length exclaimed, "I have wronged you--I feel--I know--
+you cannot be the base, the cruel being I have believed you.  You would
+not seek to estrange the affections of a husband from one who lives for
+him alone.  Say you do not love Argiri Caramitzo, the chief of this
+island--you do not wish to win his love."
+
+Astonishment prevented Ada from answering this extraordinary address,
+and she hesitated, while she considered in what terms she should speak,
+so that she might quickly tranquillise the agitated feelings of her
+visitor, and, at the same time, avoid wounding them.
+
+Nina seemed to mistake her silence for an acknowledgment of guilt, for
+she sprang to her feet, and her dagger-blade flashed in her hand.  In
+another moment, it would have been stained with blood, had not Ada
+exclaimed--
+
+"Indeed you do me wrong, signora.  I would not rob you of your husband's
+love, for all the world can give.  I am not mistaken in supposing you to
+be the sister of Signor Paolo Montifalcone; and if so, I already know
+your history, and, far from seeking to injure you, would do all in my
+power to preserve you from harm."
+
+"You can but injure me in one way, and that you might do unknowingly and
+unwillingly," exclaimed the Italian, still regarding her with a glance
+of distrust; while she clutched the weapon in her right hand, which hung
+down by her side, the other being stretched out before her, as if to
+prevent her supposed rival from approaching her.
+
+Ada felt an unusual courage come to her aid.  She neither trembled nor
+turned pale, nor did she show any attempt to defend herself from Nina's
+mistaken vengeance; but she lifted her mild blue eyes, full of
+commiseration, towards the now flashing orbs of the Italian, and, in a
+sweet, calm voice, she said--
+
+"There is a Power above, which, if we seek, will arm us both--you
+against such vain fears, me against the guilt, unknowing though it may
+be, of winning affections which should be your alone."
+
+A fresh impulse seized the unhappy Nina; flinging away her weapon, she
+rushed forward, and throwing herself on her knees, clasped Ada's hand
+and covered it with kisses.
+
+"I have not the heart to injure you, though you should prove my
+destruction," she exclaimed.  "But you will not allow him to pour the
+words of tender endearment into those ears; nay, if he does but think or
+utter one word of love, remember, the time has come to act for your own
+safety.  Here, take this weapon, and promise me to employ it, should the
+necessity arrive, for should you fail to do so, neither your beauty, nor
+his shielding arm could save you from the maddened impulse of my hand--
+the last dying effort of my strength."
+
+As she spoke, she rose, and lifting her dagger from the ground, she
+returned with it towards Ada.
+
+"Nay, fear not, lady," she said, as she saw Ada start.  "It is harmless
+now.  Take the dagger, and keep it as remembrance of the unhappy Nina
+Montifalcone."
+
+Nina presented the weapon, as she said this, with the hilt towards Ada,
+who considered it would be more politic to accept the gift, though,
+indeed, she shuddered as she did so; but she felt that she might herself
+unhappily be driven to the dire necessity of employing it.  She took it,
+therefore, and placed it on the table by her.  She then raised the
+excited and unhappy girl, who had again sunk on her knees, and placed
+her on a seat by her side, when, after some time, she succeeded, by slow
+degrees, in completely tranquillising and re-assuring her mind.
+
+"You are no stranger to me, Nina," said Ada Garden, affectionately
+holding her hand.  "Your brother has told me the whole of your history,
+and his own unhappy fate.  His devotion to you seems unparalleled.  Do
+you feel that you give it a just return?"
+
+"Alas! no," answered Nina.  "He has, I fear, sacrificed himself to me
+from that dreadful night when I left my native home, confused,
+bewildered, and little dreaming that it was to be for ever.  But I do
+not detain him; if he wishes to return he may do so."
+
+"He came with you, and without you he will not go back," observed Ada.
+
+"While my father lived, I would have returned to see him, at the risk of
+my life--at the risk of the displeasure of one dearer than life; but now
+that he is no more, no earthly power should make me quit my husband."
+
+"But your brother has doubts of the truth of the report of your father's
+death, and would still induce you to accompany him," said Ada.
+
+"What! and allow you to remain?" whispered Nina, her fears, in a moment,
+rushing back to the baneful course from which they had been diverted.
+"No, lady, that were folly too great even for me to commit."
+
+Ada saw that she was touching on dangerous ground.
+
+"Indeed, again you wrong me, Nina," she said, tenderly pressing her
+hand.  "I did not believe my intentions could be so misconstrued; but I
+will not mention a subject which is so painful to you."
+
+"There are few which are not, lady," returned Nina, again appeased; "for
+the very language we speak reminds me of the home I have lost, the
+misery I have caused--it reminds me that I may be stigmatised as a
+murderess; that the death of the best, the kindest of fathers, may be
+laid to my charge; and often would such thoughts drive me to madness,
+and to seek a speedy end to all my misery from the summit of yonder
+cliff; but for what I have lost, I have gained a prize which recompenses
+me for all--the love of one without which death would have been welcome;
+a love I value more than all the earth's brightest treasure.  They say
+the maidens in your country are calm and cold as the snow on the
+Appenines, and it were in vain, therefore, for you, lady, to attempt to
+conceive what that love is.  He might abandon me--he might forget me--he
+might spurn me, but still I should love him, though I slew him for his
+perfidy; and should die happily on the tomb to which I had consigned
+him.  Then do not speak to me again of quitting him;--he is my world,
+and all else I have abandoned for him."
+
+Ada, after this, did not again attempt to renew the subject--indeed,
+pirate though he was, Zappa, she remembered, was, there existed every
+reason to believe, the young Italian's husband; and though utterly
+unworthy of her devoted affection, as she had herself too strong a proof
+to doubt, Nina still owed to him the duty of a wife.  She had severed
+other sacred ties, in a way they can never be severed without ultimately
+bringing grief and remorse to the heart of the guilty one; but she now
+must abide by the consequences of her fault, and had no power to quit
+him to whom she had bound herself, even to visit the deathbed of a
+father.  It was painful, however, to Ada, to reflect what must be the
+ultimate fate of her lovely and interesting companion, when the pirate's
+already waning love was burnt out--when the cast on which she had staked
+her all on earth was lost for ever; or, should the lawless adventurer
+meet the fate his daring expeditions seemed to court, and when death
+should claim his own, she should learn that he whom she had so truly
+loved was a murderer, and a robber, and had died the death of a
+malefactor, what anguish, what shame, was in store for her--what a
+dreary future.
+
+The two girls, both equally beautiful in their separate styles, sat
+together, without speaking, for some time, lost in their own
+reflections.  Both were sad--for one was a prisoner, without a prospect
+of release: to the mind of the other, a picture of the home of her
+youth, and her deserted, dying father, had been conjured up with the
+vividness with which they had never before presented themselves, and
+some pangs of remorse were agitating her mind.  They were startled by a
+loud peal of thunder, which reverberated through the sky, and looking
+out through the casement they beheld the whole air of heaven covered
+with dark rolling clouds, and the sea a mass of white foam, which a
+blast, like a whirlwind, blew furiously over the surface; while the
+sullen roar of the lately aroused waves was heard as they lashed the
+rocks beneath the cliffs.  One of those sudden tempests had arisen,
+which at times visit the shores of the Mediterranean with peculiar fury;
+their anger, like the rage of a human being, though short, yet causing
+havoc and destruction wherever it falls.  The wind, as it increased,
+howled and whistled through the ruined building; the lightning darted,
+with vivid flashes, from the lowering sky; and the waves, worked into
+fury, rose every instant higher and higher, till they appeared like the
+water of a boiling cauldron, as their white-headed crests leaped up
+towards the tower, which they seemed to shake to the very base.
+
+Marianna, followed by little Mila, rushed into the room, shrieking with
+alarm; crying out that the building was going to fall about their heads;
+at the same time, the rain descended so furiously, that they were afraid
+to venture into the open air.
+
+"Oh! signora, we are all going to be washed into the sea, and we shall
+never more be heard of; oh!  Santa Maria, have mercy on us," cried the
+Maltese, rushing up to Ada, and crouching down by her side.
+
+The Greek girl was not so much alarmed, as she had witnessed similar
+tempests before, and knew how speedily they terminated; so also had
+Nina, who gazed at it devoid of all fear; and whose agitated state of
+mind it seemed rather to allay than increase.
+
+"Do not be alarmed, lady," she said, smiling, as she turned to Ada.
+"You may also quiet the fears of your attendant, for the masonry with
+which we are surrounded has already stood firm for several hundred years
+through many a fiercer storm than this; and the shocks we now feel are
+not likely to shatter these old towers.  They are caused by the waves
+dashing under the caverned rocks beneath our feet.  How furiously the
+waters rage and foam at the opposition this little island makes against
+them.  It was during a storm like this that Argiri Caramitzo was first
+brought to my father's castle.  Heaven grant that he may not have been
+tempted out on the sea this morning.  Mila, do you know if your chief
+left the harbour since I came here?"
+
+The latter sentence she spoke in her broken Romaic, and in a tone which
+showed her agitation.
+
+"Yes, lady," answered the Greek girl, "He went on board one of the
+misticos as soon as he reached the harbour, and immediately set sail."
+
+"Great heaven, and is even now on yon troubled waters," exclaimed the
+poor girl almost fainting with agitation.  "And I am here, nor even till
+this instant thought of him.  Cannot we send out the other mistico to
+assist him.  Surely some of his brave followers will be found ready to
+search for him.  I myself will accompany them."
+
+"Alas, signora, it would be in vain now to attempt to put to to sea,"
+replied Mila, who knew more about nautical affairs than did Nina.  "Yet
+we need not fear for the safety of our chief--he is even now probably
+taking shelter under some of the neighbouring islands.  He and those who
+are with him are too well accustomed to the signs of the weather not to
+have perceived this storm in time to have escaped from its fury."
+
+"Ah, I think I see a white sail flying before the wind, like a
+sea-bird's wing on the summit of the waves," exclaimed Marianna, who had
+been looking through the telescope at the object of which she spoke.
+
+"Oh, it must be the mistico, then," cried Nina joyfully, hastening to
+the telescope, through which she saw the white canvas, closely reefed,
+of a small vessel standing for the island.
+
+"Oh, it is the mistico," she exclaimed eagerly.  "I know her by the
+shape of her sails.  It must be her, and they are returning in safety."
+
+As soon as Nina had withdrawn her eye from the glass, which she did not
+do for a long time, till she had fully persuaded herself that the vessel
+in sight was the one she hoped, with her husband on board, Ada's
+curiosity and interest were excited to watch the progress of the
+mistico.  On she came, careering across the foaming sea, now lifted on
+the summit of a curling wave, now sunk into the deep trough between the
+watery mountains, where she would remain, her sail alone visible,
+apparently about to be overwhelmed by the wave which lifted its crested
+head close astern of her; but again she would rise once more on the
+summit of another, and as it were seated on it would fly onwards for a
+long distance, again to plunge down to the dangerous depths from which
+she had just emerged.  To Ada the little vessel appeared in the most
+imminent danger, and she expected every instant to see it disappear
+beneath the waves, and wondered how she could have so long continued to
+buffet them successfully.  As she watched, she observed that the
+mistico, instead of steering towards the west end of the island, so as
+to fetch the mouth of the bay, was gradually verging towards the east;
+and it struck her also that she was smaller than the mistico she had
+been accustomed to see from the stern windows of the brig, while she was
+living on board.  But of that, of course, she was not able to form any
+correct judgment, as from so great a height and distance the eye even of
+the most experienced is easily deceived.  She feared therefore that the
+sail in sight was a stranger, and would, to a certainty, be wrecked on
+the coast, without the chance of receiving any aid from the inhabitants,
+who were much more likely to murder any of the unfortunate crew who
+might escape the perils of shipwreck, for the sake of their clothes, and
+any money they might have about them, than to assist in preserving their
+lives.
+
+Nina also had been watching, with still more intense interest, the
+progress of the sail, now seen without the aid of the glass; but so
+persuaded was she that it was her husband's mistico, that she did not
+remark the difference of size, nor that she was not steering directly
+for the harbour.
+
+"Ah, he will be here soon, and in spite of the storm I must return to my
+tower, to receive him when he comes on shore," she exclaimed in a
+cheerful voice.  "Lady I must bid you farewell, and as I cannot now tell
+you all the love and gratitude I feel for you, I must entreat you to
+allow me to visit you again.  You will forget my passion and folly, and
+remember only any redeeming traits you may have discovered in me.  Say
+you will do this, my sweet friend, before I leave you."
+
+"Indeed I will," answered Ada, pressing both the hands which were held
+out to her.  "I shall think of you always with the affection of a
+sister; but I must not let you go even now; for I fear greatly you will
+be disappointed in your expectations.  See, yonder bark; mark how her
+head is turned; and tell me if she is steering for the harbour."
+
+"Alas! that is not our chief's mistico, after all," exclaimed little
+Mila, corroborating the opinion Ada had formed.  "She will be wrecked,
+too, and all in her will, to a certainty, perish."
+
+"I cannot think that it is not his," said Nina.  "He has some reason for
+approaching the further end of the island, if, indeed, he is not about
+to enter the harbour--perhaps he may purpose going round it to anchor on
+the northern side."
+
+"That vessel, as she now steers, would not get round the island, lady,"
+observed the Greek girl.  "I wish my grandfather were here--and he would
+understand clearly all about it.  Ah, there he is; and now the rain is
+over I may venture out and call him up here.  He will explain matters
+clearly to us."
+
+Saying this, without a thought of the consequences either to herself or
+to her, should the morose old pirate think fit to inform his chief of
+Nina's visit to the stranger lady, out ran the lively girl into the open
+air.
+
+She was almost blown away down the ravine by a furious gust of wind,
+which caught her just as she got outside the door; but, undaunted, she
+managed to work on her way, shouting loudly all the time to her
+grandfather to come to her assistance; but as he was to windward, and
+rather deaf, he did not hear her.
+
+At last she reached him, and seized him by the arm to support herself,
+after her fatiguing run, while she insisted on his accompanying her back
+to the apartment of the stranger lady.
+
+He looked very angry at first at being asked to go; but little Mila's
+eloquence conquered, and she led him in triumph back, holding on by his
+arm; but this time it was to prevent herself from being fairly lifted
+off her feet, and blown along over the ground.
+
+He made a somewhat unwilling salute to the two ladies, as he entered the
+room, while Mila dragged him up to the window.
+
+"Now tell these ladies what you think about that mistico there, which is
+driving towards the shore--let me see, where is she?  Alas! she has come
+frightfully near."
+
+"That mistico, why she must be a stranger to these parts, or she would
+not venture near our shore; and she has a crew on board who know very
+little about their calling, for they are going to wreck themselves as
+clearly as possible, somewhere at the east end of the island.  They
+could not do it better if they were to try; and as there are only two
+places on the whole coast where they have a chance of escaping, probably
+in a few minutes they will have gone to the other world."
+
+"Then you think that she is not my husband's mistico," said Nina.
+
+"Think! why no, of course not; she is not unlike her either, lady,"
+answered the old pirate.  "They are strangers, who, as they are not
+invited to come here, will probably have their throats cut for their
+intrusion, if, by chance, they happen to get in shore alive."
+
+"But your chief--what think you of your chief?" exclaimed Nina eagerly.
+
+"He is safe enough under shelter of one of the islands, and will be back
+here right enough to-morrow morning," answered the old man.
+
+"Grant heaven it may be so," ejaculated Nina.  "And now, Vlacco, you
+must obey me in this.  Collect all the men you can, and hasten along the
+shore, to where that vessel will be wrecked.  Remember, the life of your
+chief was preserved in a similar manner, and it were impious to allow
+any to perish whom we can save.  Bring such as escape safe to my tower;
+and beware that no one robs or injures them."
+
+The old man, who had found that he had been very much too severe to Nina
+during the last absence of Zappa, was glad of an opportunity of
+regaining her favour, and accordingly promised to obey her directions.
+
+In spite of the violence of the storm, he immediately set out to collect
+some more youthful and active men to attend him; and he was soon again
+seen crossing the causeway in the direction of the place towards which
+the vessel was driving.
+
+As it was scarcely possible for Nina to reach her own tower, she
+continued, with Ada Garden, watching the awful progress of the mistico.
+
+On came the little vessel, scarcely visible, amid the foam and spray
+which surrounded her.
+
+She had now got completely to the east side of the tower, whereas, when
+first seen at the greatest distance, she was in the south-west.  Her
+course must, therefore, have been about northeast, as nearly as
+possible, directly before the wind; and whatever old Vlacco might have
+said to the contrary, she must have been steered by no timid or ignorant
+hands.
+
+"She may even now get round the east end of the island!" exclaimed Nina,
+whose eye had seldom been off her.  "If she can once do that, the
+unhappy men on board her may yet escape with their lives."
+
+"But suppose she does not, will not the old Greek and his followers be
+able to rescue them?" asked Ada; who, though less apparently excited,
+felt an equal, if not a greater interest in the fate of the stranger.
+
+"Ah! she appears even now to be full a mile short of the point.  And see
+yonder wave which lifts her up--in another instant, it will dash her on
+those frowning rocks, and all on board must perish.  Oh!  Heaven, have
+mercy on them.  There--there--they are lost."
+
+As she spoke, a huge wave came rolling on, lifting the little vessel on
+its curling summit, and, with a loud roar, bore her, with the wildest
+impetuosity, towards the frowning cliffs.  Downward it came with a
+terrific crash, its crest flying upwards in showers of foam, and hurling
+the bark, she was lost to sight among the rocks.  All the females, as
+they beheld the sad spectacle, uttered a cry of horror, and they fancied
+that they could hear, amid the howling of the storm, the despairing
+shrieks of the drowning mariners, and could distinguish, among the foam,
+their dying forms, with their arms stretched out, in their agony, for
+assistance, where none could come.
+
+"They are all lost!" cried Nina, hiding her face in her hands to shut
+out the dreadful sight her imagination had conjured up.  "May the saints
+intercede for their souls!"
+
+Her example was followed by Marianna and Mila, while Ada, though pale
+and trembling, had pointed the telescope towards the spot, for the
+purpose of discovering whether any human beings had succeeded in gaining
+the shore.  Not a vestige of the wreck could she see; but on the summit
+of the cliff, above where she supposed the vessel must have struck, she
+beheld a person, whom she concluded was old Vlacco, waving, as if to
+some one below.  He and his followers then disappeared down the cliffs.
+
+"There is hope yet, Nina--there is hope yet!" she exclaimed joyfully.
+"Thank Heaven! some may have escaped."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY FOUR.
+
+The morning preceding the storm I have described was very lovely, and
+the pirate chief had gone out at an early hour; and was standing on the
+edge of the cliff overlooking the harbour and the sea, while he
+meditated on the plan of some future predatory expedition he had
+proposed to himself to undertake on board the _Sea Hawk_.  He was
+interrupted in a short time by the appearance of one of his followers,
+who had come up the ravine from the bay below.
+
+"Pardon, chief, for my thus coming on you without warning; but I have
+tidings of importance to communicate," said the man, making a
+reverential obeisance.
+
+"What is it, Baldo?" asked Zappa.  "Haste, I am always impatient of
+news."
+
+"It is this, chief.  A boat arrived this morning, soon after break of
+day, from the island of Naeiri, and a man, who has come in her,
+Gerassimo Listi, one of the scouts, states that a British ship of war
+has been anchored some days at the farther end of it, and that he
+suspects--"
+
+"Where is the man, this Gerassimo Listi?" exclaimed Zappa, interrupting
+him suddenly.  "I want not to hear his suspicions--I will examine him--
+where is he, I say?"
+
+"Under the walls of the tower, chief, waiting your return," replied the
+man.
+
+"Send him hither instantly," said Zappa.  "Then go in search of Vlacco,
+and tell him I would speak with him--I may have need of his counsel."
+
+The man hurried off to obey the orders he had received, while Zappa
+stood, with his arms folded on his bosom, waiting the coming of the
+messenger.
+
+"A ship of war, and British," he muttered.  "There must be some cause
+for her coming here.  She may possibly be in search of me; but yet, how
+can it be known where I am to be found? and that English merchant
+vessel, I took good care that neither she nor any on board should tell
+tales.  Well, friend, what news do you bring me?" he asked, turning to a
+man in the costume of a Greek fisherman, who now approached.  "Haste,
+tell it me."
+
+"Why, chief, for the last six days, in a sheltered bay, to the west end
+of our island, a brig of war, carrying eighteen guns, has been at
+anchor.  When she first came in, I thought she had come to remain one or
+two nights only, to supply herself with water, for there is a fine
+spring there, and perhaps with fuel; but she hoisted no flag, and seemed
+to have no intention of communicating with the shore; and, instead of
+going away, there she remained, day after day, till my suspicions of her
+intentions were excited.  I watched her narrowly for some time, and even
+pulled close round her two days ago; and I am convinced, from her
+appearance, and the language I heard spoken, that she is British.  Now,
+it struck me, knowing what sort of character were the people of that
+nation, that she had come there for the purpose of looking out after the
+_Sea Hawk_, or the mistico; and as soon as I arrived at this conclusion,
+I hurried off to bring you the information."
+
+"I believe your suspicions are turned in the right direction; and it
+will be necessary to be on our guard," replied the pirate, who had
+listened somewhat impatiently to the man's account.
+
+"But here comes Vlacco--we will hear what is his opinion on the
+subject."
+
+The consultation between the pirate and his lieutenant-governor--for so
+we may designate old Vlacco--was earnest and brief.
+
+The result was that Zappa instantly descended the cliffs, down to the
+bay, where the loud blast of a horn speedily collected a large number of
+his followers, always ready to undertake any exploits in which he led
+them.
+
+He selected as many as he required for his purpose, and ordered them to
+prepare for embarking in the mistico, called the _Zoe_, in the space of
+a quarter of an hour.  Meantime, he despatched a messenger to the tower
+to bring his arms and some dress, which might serve him as a disguise
+should it be necessary.
+
+The island spoken of lay about thirty miles to the westward of the
+harbour; and, towards it, the mistico, as she emerged from between the
+cliffs, shaped her course under all sail, with the wind on the larboard
+beam.  The little vessel flew across the water at a rapid rate; for,
+though the sea was smooth, there was a fresh breeze to fill the sails.
+
+All the crew were in high spirits--they invariably were when Zappa led
+them, as they believed he would always show them where plunder was to be
+obtained; and they were not a little disappointed when he thought fit to
+inform them that he now required them to perform a service not only of
+no profit, but with considerable danger attending it; and yet one which
+was absolutely necessary, as the safety of the island demanded it.
+
+"You must understand, my friends, that, if the brig we have heard of,
+is, as I have every reason to believe, a British man-of-war, her purpose
+is either to watch for our _Sea Hawk_, and to attack her the next time
+she goes out of harbour, or to destroy our strongholds on shore.  How,
+though, in the latter point, I do not think she would have any chance of
+success, we should find her a remarkably disagreeable antagonist to the
+brig; in fact, to confess the truth, it would be wiser to run away than
+to fight her.  Those English are determined fellows; they will tight as
+long as their own ship is afloat; and, on your decks afterwards, if they
+can manage to get there.  Now, if I find that my suspicions are
+correct--and I shall venture on board even to ascertain their purpose--
+my proposal is, that we treat the enemy as we treated the Turks; we will
+watch our opportunity; and, during some dark night, we will let a
+fire-ship float down across their bows when they are not dreaming of any
+such thing--and we will blow them all up together.  We must be near to
+knock on the head any stragglers, who are not killed at once by the
+explosion; and then, as no one will survive to say how the accident
+happened, it will be supposed her magazine caught fire; and we shall
+escape all suspicion."
+
+This speech which was made in choice Romaic--and which, doubtless,
+sounded much more heroic and elegant in that idiom than in simple
+English, was highly applauded by his followers--indeed, had they ever
+heard of Homer, they would have considered it equal in substance and
+talent to anything ever uttered by the most valiant of the heroes he
+speaks of.  It was scarcely concluded, however--and they were still
+discussing the subject, when the man at the helm, who had kept his eye
+to windward, exclaimed that he saw a black cloud to the south-east,
+which he was certain betokened a sudden storm, and would advise the
+postponement of all discussions till they got safely into port.  He was
+an old Levant mariner, who, unlike his race in general, was rather
+fonder of action than words; and, though he had no objection to cut a
+throat, or plunder a ship, he did not approve of talking about it.
+Though he was a sulky old rascal, Zappa had great confidence in his
+sagacity, and accordingly turned his eye in the direction to which he
+pointed.  He there saw, too certainly, a mass of black clouds which had,
+by this time collected, and which, every moment adding others to their
+number, came sweeping towards them.
+
+"We must look out for ourselves, my men," he exclaimed.  "Lower the
+sails while we have smooth water, and close reef them.  We will try to
+get under the lee of the land, till the fury of the tempest has passed."
+
+The order was no sooner given than obeyed; and the sails were closely
+reefed and hoisted again before the first blast of the tempest struck
+the vessel.  She had by this time performed rather more than two-thirds
+of her voyage, so that she had some eight miles more to go over before
+she could get under shelter of the land.  If she could succeed in doing
+this before the height of the storm came on, she would be in comparative
+safety; and if not, she might be driven far up the gulf, before she
+could get under the lee of any other shore.  The safest plan would be at
+once to run back for their own port, which there was every probability
+of their reaching, though not quite a certainty, as a shift of the wind
+might possibly drive them to the northward of it.  As, however, Zappa
+was anxious to ascertain all about the English ship, he determined to
+persevere.  I have already described one or two storms, and may probably
+have to introduce two or three more, so I will not weary my readers by
+telling them how the waves leaped and tumbled, and foamed; and the wind
+roared and the vessel struggled madly through them.  It is enough to say
+that it blew a very hard gale, and that the oldest mariners on board
+never wished to be out in a harder.  Even Zappa himself, who was
+accustomed to take things very philosophically, began to think, when it
+was too late, that it would have been wiser to have gone quietly home
+again.
+
+They had, fortunately, kept well to windward of their course, and were
+thus able to keep well away to fetch the north of the island; thus
+bringing the wind and the sea abaft the beam.  Two or three seas came
+rolling up after them, just before they got well in with the land, and
+very nearly swamped the _Zoe_, and drowned Zappa and all his crew; which
+event would, doubtless, have been a very great benefit to society in
+general, although, fortunately for the interest of my history, which it
+would have materially injured, it did not occur; but the pirate and his
+followers got safely into a little bay, where they dropped their anchor,
+and offered up their thanksgivings to their patron saints, for having
+preserved them from the great danger they had just encountered.
+
+After having thus piously performed their religious duties, they set to
+work to prepare the materials for a fire-ship, with which they purposed
+to blow the English brig and all her crew to the devil.  The storm had
+soon spent its fury, and in the evening they again got under weigh, and
+beat round to the south side of the island to the bay, where they had at
+first intended anchoring, it being, by far the safest, as the wind was
+very likely to shift round, and blow with almost equal violence down the
+gulf.  Among the islands of the Archipelago, the gales generally come
+from the northward, and it is consequently considered always more
+prudent to anchor under a southern shore.  The pirates now recollected,
+as they were congratulating themselves on their own escape, that the
+English brig had been seen anchored in a bay to the south-west of the
+island; and they began piously to hope that she might have been driven
+on shore, and lost with all her hands, which would have saved them the
+expense and trouble of fitting up their fire-ship, and the risk of
+attempting to use it.  Before, however, they took any steps in that
+direction, Zappa determined to pull up into the bay, where she was
+reported to have been, and to ascertain what she was, and her purpose in
+coming there.  By daylight next morning, for he was an early man when
+work was to be done, he was prepared to set out on his expedition.
+
+The bay where the _Zoe_ had anchored, was about five miles from where he
+believed the British vessel was to be found, so he had a long pull
+before him.  His boat pulled eight oars, and he selected as many of the
+strongest of his hands to man them.  She was a clumsy-looking craft, and
+did not appear as if any amount of force could drive her through the
+water; indeed, she seemed to be a mere fishing-boat, such as are used in
+those waters.  He had the precaution also to pile up a couple of nets in
+her bow and stern, and also to take on board a large supply of fish,
+which he got from some fisherman of the place, so that nothing was
+wanting to complete the deception; for he had taken care that all his
+men should be habited in the ordinary fisherman's dress as he was
+himself.
+
+As the boat left the side of the mistico, she had, in every respect, the
+appearance of one belonging to a harmless fisherman just returned from
+his day's avocation.  Although Zappa had with justice full confidence in
+his own masquerading talents, he wisely did not wish to run any
+unnecessary risk, and he, therefore, ordered the mistico to get under
+weigh, and to sweep close in shore after him, that he might, in case of
+necessity, have some support at hand; she was, however, not to come
+nearer than a mile from the harbour, where he expected to find the brig,
+for fear of causing his character to be suspected.  Every arrangement
+being made, the boat shoved off--away she pulled, while he quietly sat
+on the top of the nets, smoking his pipe with perfect unconcern, as if
+he had nothing else to think of besides where he should find the best
+market for his fish.
+
+For about four miles the men pulled on at a rapid pace, laughing and
+joking as they toiled at their oars.  A headland, from which a reef of
+rock projected some way out into the sea, then presented itself, and, as
+they pulled round it, the mouth of a harbour gradually opened on them.
+It was a secure and landlocked place, and some way up it Zappa discerned
+the tall masts of the brig he was looking for.  His practised eye at
+once recognised her as a brig-of-war, and, as he drew nearer, he had
+little doubt from her build that she was British.  He had, however, made
+up his mind to run every risk, so he pulled boldly up the harbour
+towards her.
+
+"Now, my men," he said, addressing his crew, "remember, everything
+depends on your coolness and courage.  We are going to put our heads
+into the lion's mouth, and, by all the gods of our ancestors, if we give
+him cause he will bite them off without the slightest ceremony.  Do not
+stir from your seats, and pretend not to understand a word which is said
+to you, which it is not very likely you will do; but should any on board
+speak Romaic, make any excuse which occurs to you for not leaving your
+boat while I am on board."
+
+By the time he had finished this address, they were within a cable's
+length of the brig.
+
+"What boat is that?" hailed the sentry on the poop.
+
+On which Zappa, concluding that the hail was intended for him, held up a
+large fish in his hand.
+
+"A fishing-boat coming up astern, sir," said the sentry to the officer
+of the watch.
+
+"Let her come alongside, then--we want some fish," said the officer in
+return.
+
+"Ah!  I think I know that brig!" exclaimed Zappa--"I am certain of it--
+she is no other than the one which lay in Valetta harbour when I was
+last there; and her captain, too, was, I learnt, the very officer I met
+at the ball, who was dancing so frequently with my fair prisoner.  Now,
+by some wonderful chance or other, he has discovered that she was not
+lost in the _Zodiac_, and has come here to look for her--I see it all at
+once, and if I am right--good luck befriend me; for, should he discover
+me, I have not a chance of escape.  It would be wiser not to venture on
+board, but to pull quietly back to the mistico, and to wait till night,
+when we may try the effect of our fire-ship; but, then again, it is not
+likely that any one but he should know me at all, and my dress is so
+different to what it was when he saw me, and my beard is so grown, that
+even, should I be brought into his presence, he will not probably
+recognise me.  I may gain something of what they are about, and the
+venture is, at at events, worth making."
+
+Zappa arrived at this conclusion as his boat ran alongside the _Ione_,
+when it was rather too late to think of turning back; indeed, he felt
+that his attempting to do so would at once bring suspicion on him.  It
+now occurred to him, that to gain any information, it would be necessary
+to employ some means of exchanging ideas, and for that purpose, he must
+speak a little of the _lingua Franca_ so generally made use of.  With a
+dauntless air, therefore, he sprang up the side, and, as he stood at the
+gangway, he ordered his men to hand him up some of the finest of the
+fish.  While they were doing so, his eye ranged over the decks, fore and
+aft, and he was glad to see that Captain Fleetwood was not among the
+officers who were collected on the poop, watching him and his boat.  The
+gun-room steward was the first to become the purchaser of a fine dish of
+fish for his master, at a very low price, too, which much astonished
+him.  He smelt at them, and examined their gills, and turned them over
+most critically; for he could not help fancying that there must be some
+defect.
+
+The fact was, Zappa had entirely forgotten to learn what price to ask;
+for, as he had seldom before acted the part of a fishmonger, he had not
+the slightest conception of what was their value, and was very nearly
+betraying himself thereby.  He saw, however, with his usual acuteness,
+that he had made a mistake, and took care to correct it with the next
+purchaser, who was the midshipmen's steward, and who came accompanied by
+their caterer; but though they had to pay more, the price was still so
+low as to induce them to lay in a stock for future consumption.  The
+warrant-officers and ship's company next commenced purchasing, and all
+suffered as Zappa gained experience in his new calling.
+
+"But does not the captain eat fish?" he asked of a Maltese seaman, who
+had been acting the part of interpreter.  "Has his servant come to
+purchase?"
+
+"The captain does not want any fish, he is not on board to eat it,"
+answered the Maltese carelessly.  "I wish he were; for he must have been
+out in that storm yesterday, in one of your little feluccas, and Heaven
+knows what may have become of him."
+
+"Where has he gone, then?" asked the pirate.  "It would have been wiser
+to have trusted himself in your fine brig here, than in one of our
+native boats, which our seamen only know how to handle."
+
+"Oh! don't ask me, my friend; we seamen have no business to talk of our
+captain's doings," replied the Maltese, laughing.  "But let me know
+where you have learned to speak the _lingua Franca_ so well.  It is not
+often that I can understand ten words uttered by the fishermen of these
+parts."
+
+"I will reply to your question, friend, though you do not answer mine,"
+returned Zappa.  "I sailed as a boy to all parts of the coast of the
+Mediterranean, till my father died, and I came home and married.  I have
+now a mother and sisters, besides a wife and family to support; so I can
+go roving no longer.  And so your captain has gone on an expedition, has
+he?  Have many people accompanied him, for I suppose he did not go
+alone?"
+
+"As many went as he chose to take with him," replied the Maltese.  "If
+he had ordered them, the whole ship's company would have gone."
+
+"A clear answer, friend.  Does anybody else wish to buy more of my fish.
+Just ask them; for I must be off again to catch a fresh supply for the
+support of my young family," said the pirate carelessly.  "And can you
+not tell me then where your captain has gone to?"
+
+"I shall begin to think you have some reason for your curiosity, if you
+ask so many questions," observed the shrewd Maltese.  "I was joking
+about our captain, and, if you want to see him, I can take you to him."
+
+"Is it so?" answered Zappa, who easily divined the reason of the man's
+answer, and was far too keen to be deceived by it, or to want a reply.
+
+"I care nothing about your captain, further than that I thought I might
+sell him some fish if I met him.  But you can do me a service, by
+telling me if I am likely to fall in with any other ships of war, or
+merchantmen, with whom I may drive my trade?"
+
+"Ah, padrone, I cannot assist you there either; for we seamen know
+little of what happens outside the ship's planks," returned the Maltese.
+"It is not often, though, one goes long in these seas without meeting
+with a cruiser of our own country, and as for merchantmen they are thick
+enough; but neither one nor the other are likely to come to such
+out-of-the-way islands as these are."
+
+"When will that man have finished selling his fish there?" sang out the
+officer of the watch.  "Manuel, there--Tell him, as soon as he's done,
+to shove off.  We ought not to hold any communication with the natives,"
+he muttered to himself, as he continued his quarter-deck walk.  "These
+fellows are as sharp as knives, and, if we let them near us, they'll be
+ferreting out something they ought not to know to a certainty."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," replied Manuel.  "Come, Mister Fisherman, the officer
+says you must not be standing talking here all day, so I'll wish you
+farewell, and a good haul the next time you let down your nets."
+
+"Thanks, friend, I am generally tolerably successful in that way,"
+answered the pretended fisherman.  "Farewell, I shall come alongside
+again to-morrow, and I hope to find plenty of buyers.  I live a little
+way down the coast, and shall sure to be back, so do not buy of any one
+else.  Caralambro Boboti is my name.  Don't forget it.  Farewell,
+again--"
+
+Just as he was uttering these words, and making the usual salaam to the
+poop, or rather to the officers walking on it, his eye lighted on the
+countenance of a man ascending the companion-ladder which made even him
+for an instant turn pale.  At first the idea glanced across his mind
+that he saw an apparition, but the shoulders and the body and legs came
+next, and he was soon convinced that the person before him was real
+flesh and blood.  No less a person, indeed, than Colonel Gauntlett
+ascended from below closely followed by his man Mitchell, and stood on
+the deck of the _Ione_, glaring at him with a look which convinced him
+that he was recognised through his disguise.  There was not a moment to
+be lost.  If he remained where he stood, the probability was that he
+would be seized; if he exhibited any fear or hurry, it would be
+equivalent to condemning himself, and he and his companions would be
+shot without mercy, as they attempted to escape.  He felt at once that
+his only chance depended on his own coolness so as to make the old
+officer fancy that he was mistaken in his identity.  With the most
+perfect self-possession, therefore, he repeated his farewell to the
+Maltese, and was about deliberately to lower himself into his boat, when
+the colonel threw the whole ship into commotion, by exclaiming in a
+voice of thunder--
+
+"That's him!--The scoundrel--the pirate--stop him--fire at him.  I'm
+right, Mitchell, am I not?  That's the villain who attacked the
+_Zodiac_, and carried off my poor niece?"
+
+"Not a doubt of it your honour.  It's the thief of the world who
+murdered us all, and by the holy poker I'll have him."
+
+As he uttered these words he sprang towards the gangway, nearly
+capsizing his master, and almost grasped Zappa by the croup of the neck
+before anybody else understood what the commotion was all about.  He
+missed him, however, and the pirate, with a spring, which the imminence
+of his danger would alone have enabled him to take, leaped into his
+boat, and as he did so, he exclaimed to his crew, who saw that something
+was wrong--
+
+"Shove off, or we are dead men!"
+
+The pirates waited no further words to excite them to exertion, and a
+few strokes sent the boat clear off the brig's side.
+
+So great, mean time, was the impetus Mitchell had gained, that when he
+missed catching Zappa, he could not again bring himself up, and souse
+overboard in the water he went, his head fortunately escaping the gunnel
+of the pirate's boat by a few inches.  In revenge, an old pirate
+attempted to give him his _coup de grace_ with the blade of his oar, but
+missed him.
+
+"Arrah, ye cowardly thief to hit a man like that in the water, but I'll
+mark ye--remember--bad luck to ye," exclaimed Mitchell, as after his
+first immersion he rose to the surface, where his spluttering and cries
+drew the attention of the sentry off from the pirates.
+
+"A man overboard," was the first intelligible cry which was heard, and
+scarcely was it uttered, when three or four men, headed by a midshipman,
+were overboard to attempt to pick him up.  Mitchell's own eagerness to
+stop the pirates, very nearly prevented them from saving him, for though
+he had little enough notion of swimming, he struck out manfully after
+the boat, which the confusion had enabled to gain a good distance from
+the vessel before any means had been taken to stop her progress.  At
+this juncture the first lieutenant, hearing a noise, came on deck, and
+soon brought matters into order.
+
+"Silence there, fore and aft," he exclaimed.  "Let the proper crews
+stand by the falls of their boats.  Lower the starboard quarter boat,
+and pick up the man in the water.  What is it all about?"
+
+"The pirate, sir--the villain, Zappa was in that boat.  Shoot him--stop
+him, Mr Saltwell, I say!" exclaimed the colonel, scarcely able to speak
+from his agitation and rage.
+
+"Sentries, fire at the men in that boat," said Mr Saltwell, in a calm
+tone, which sobered down all who heard him to the proper pitch for
+comprehending orders.  "Hand up a dozen muskets from below, and some
+ammunition.  Lower the larboard quarter boat, and give chase after that
+fellow."
+
+Each order was obeyed with the rapidity with which it was given; but in
+lowering the starboard gig, the after falls got jammed, and her head
+came right into the water, and almost filled her.  This delay prevented
+the other gig from going in chase, till she had picked up the people in
+the water, and taken them on board; but all caused delay, and both boats
+set off in chase nearly together.
+
+Meantime Zappa heard the noise on deck, and guessed that the colonel was
+explaining who he was, and that he should soon have the boats sent after
+him.
+
+"Pull till your sinews crack, my friends," he shouted to his men.  "We
+have no child's play now; but keep a good heart, and we shall get
+clear."
+
+Just as he spoke, he looked back at the brig, he saw the barrel of a
+musket glancing in the sun, and a shot came flying over his head.
+Another followed, and buried itself in the pile of nets against which he
+leaned.
+
+"If they have no better shot among them we need not fear," he shouted.
+"Keep a good heart, my men.  The _Zoe_ will be close outside, and, when
+we reach her, we may set the boat at defiance."
+
+He was, by this time, nearly an eighth of a mile from the _Ione_, and
+pulling directly out towards the mouth of the harbour.  Several other
+musket-shots had been fired at him, and hit a man in the side, and
+severely hurt him, but he still declared himself able to keep at his
+oar.
+
+A long brass gun had, however, been got up on the poop, which, loaded
+with musket-balls, was let fly at them.  The shower fell thick around
+them, and had it not been for the shelter of the nets, more than one
+shot might have proved fatal to Zappa.
+
+Another pirate was wounded, but, fortunately, not enough to disable him,
+or their prospect of escape would have been much diminishes.  The man
+turned pale as he tried to bind a handkerchief round his arm to stop the
+bleeding; but he still continued tugging at his oar.
+
+"Never fear, my chief, we will all be pierced through and through before
+we give in," he exclaimed.  "Row on bravely, my comrades, row on."
+
+The two gigs were now in full chase, rather more than a quarter of a
+mile astern, and the brig had ceased firing, leaving all the work to be
+performed by them.  Linton had command of the first gig, Tompion of the
+second, and both had some loaded muskets in their stern sheets, and all
+the men had their cutlasses and pistols; all these necessary
+arrangements having considerably delayed the boats, but Saltwell judged
+rightly, that it would be worse than folly to send unarmed men against
+such desperate characters as the pirates.  There was a strong breeze
+blowing nearly across the harbour, from the north-west, and, as soon as
+Zappa had got from under the lee of the land, and felt the full force of
+it, he considered that he should be able to make more way under sail
+than by pulling.  Two of the people were obliged to lay on their oars
+for the purpose of hoisting it, and, as soon as the English saw this,
+they set up a loud shout, thinking the chase was going to give in.  They
+soon saw their mistake, and, as the large lateen sail rose above the
+little stump of a mast, the boat felt the force with which she was
+pressed onward, and away she darted over the water.  The English bent to
+their oars till the good ash sticks almost cracked, each boat vying with
+the other to get ahead.  Do all they could, however, they could not
+overtake the Greek.  Linton saw that, if they were to catch the pirate,
+they must kill each man who came to the helm, so as to keep the boat
+luffed up in the wind.  He accordingly raised a musket and fired.  It
+was a good shot, and, though Zappa escaped, the man next him received
+the ball in his bosom.  He fell back with a deep groan, a convulsive
+shudder passed through his frame, and he was dead.
+
+"If that is to be the game," exclaimed the pirate, grinding his teeth
+with passion till now not expressed.  "I must try which of us is the
+best shot."
+
+And forthwith he drew from under the nets two rifles which had been
+concealed there.
+
+"Steady the helm here, Baldo, while I try to punish our pursuers."
+
+He fired.  His first shot seemed to take no effect.  He raised the
+second; a wild shriek came across the waters, uttered by the poor fellow
+who pulled the stroke oar of Linton's boat, on whom his too sure aim had
+taken effect.  Both boats now, in revenge, began firing as fast as the
+muskets could be loaded, and the Greeks were compelled to crouch down in
+the bottom of their boat to avoid the shot.  Zappa kept his seat boldly
+at the helm.  A reef, as I said, ran off the mouth of the harbour on the
+eastern side, and, to double it, so as to regain the mistico, it would
+be necessary to make one if not more tacks, and here the light gigs
+would have an immense advantage over him.  The distance to the point
+round which he must go was about three-quarters of a mile, but he
+already had a good start, and, if no other accident happened, he might
+hope to beat round it before the gigs could come up with him.  He must
+now, however, depend entirely on his sail, for neither of the two
+wounded men were fit to pull an oar, and, with a diminished crew, the
+chances would be against him, should the wind fail.  It was an animating
+struggle, and equally exciting to pursuers and pursued.  Zappa
+encouraged his followers, and urged them to persevere to the last,
+hinting at the certainty of a rope and running noose, as the
+alternative, if they were caught.  Linton, on his part, cheered on his
+men, and told them the safety of their beloved captain, as well as that
+of a young countrywoman, depended on their overtaking the pirate.
+
+The body of poor Knox, who had been killed, was laid down at the bottom
+of the boat, and Togle, who was midshipman of the gig, took his place,
+so that they very soon recovered the ground which had been lost.  As
+they cleared the western shore of the harbour, the wind was found to
+draw more up its coast, and fresh off the water, and a slight sea came
+rolling in, sparkling brightly in the sunshine, adding a life and beauty
+to the scene, with which the work of death going on was sadly
+disconsonant.  The British seamen cheered, and bent to their oars with
+renewed vigour, making the spray fly in showers, full of rainbow hues,
+over the bows, as Linton spoke to them, though they wanted no fresh
+stimulus to urge them to exertion.
+
+"They will have to tack presently, and we shall soon be alongside them,"
+he exclaimed.  "We will pay them off, my men, and, if we do not catch
+them the first tack, we will the second."
+
+Meantime Zappa held on his course, firing occasionally at the boats, but
+with less success than at first.  When also he round that the wind
+headed him, he began to calculate that the enemy would, to a certainty,
+be alongside him before he could weather the point, and that if they
+once got there, his chance of escaping was small indeed.  He felt, in
+truth, that he had put his head into the lion's mouth, and that the lion
+was wagging his tail.
+
+"Curses on the wind, to fail me just as I wanted it the most," he
+exclaimed, measuring with his eye the distance between him and his
+pursuers.  "If it was not for the reef, we should have done well, and
+there comes the _Zoe_, beating up to our assistance.  They have heard
+the firing, and guessed that something has gone wrong.  Does any one
+know if there is a passage through the reef?  It struck me, as we came
+in, that there was a spot free from sea-weed, where the water looked
+deep, which should be just now on our larboard bow.  Per Bacco, I see
+it, and will try it.  If we strike, we shall fight there to better
+advantage than under weigh, and the mistico will be, soon up to our
+assistance."
+
+None of the pirates had been through the passage, if passage there were,
+but all expressed the wish to try it, instead of having to beat round
+the point.  The helm was accordingly kept up, and, to the surprise of
+the pursuers, away the Greek boat darted directly towards the rocks.
+There was, as I have said, some little sea, sufficient, as it met the
+impediments of the reef, to make a long line of breakers.  There was one
+small spot where it could not be said that there was no foam, but where
+the water was rather less agitated than elsewhere.  It was here that the
+pirates expected to find an opening, but, as they drew near it, they
+almost doubted the wisdom of making the attempt, so little prospect was
+there of their being able to cross it.  The English, meantime, were
+rather divided in their opinions.  Some thought that, driven to
+desperation, they had resolved to destroy themselves and their boats;
+while others were as far wrong on the opposite side, and fancied that
+they were well acquainted with some passage through which they intended
+to pass.  Another minute would decide the question.
+
+On the Greek boat flew with redoubled speed, as she was kept more away.
+She was already among the broken water.  Zappa, his nerves unshaken,
+stood up to steer, while a man, leaning over the bow, tried to make out
+the channel.  As soon as the pirate showed himself, both the English
+boats opened their fire on him; but, though several shot whistled round
+his head he remained unharmed.  Sea after sea, huge masses of glittering
+foam came rolling in on them, threatening to fill the boat, should she
+for one instant meet with any impediment.
+
+Every man held his breath, and looked with an anxious glance ahead.  On
+either side, the water came dancing up and lapping over the gunnel, and
+beyond, the heads of the black rocks appeared amidst the frothy cauldron
+through which they sailed.  Now the side of the boat almost grazed a
+rock, which, had she struck, would have sent her into a thousand
+splinters.  A short distance more and they would be safe.  The _Zoe_ had
+observed them, and was standing towards them to render them assistance.
+Even their enemies forbore to fire, so perilous was their situation, and
+so certain appeared their destruction.  On they rushed.
+
+"I can see no passage," exclaimed the man in the bows.  "We are all
+lost!  Ah, no!  Starboard the helm--starboard!  Haul off the sheet a
+little!  Up with the helm again!  Ease off the sheet.  Huzza! huzza!  We
+are safe!"
+
+The last great danger was past; a bend in the channel had been
+discovered, through which the boat glided; and now she floated in clear
+water, and held her rapid course towards the mistico.  No sooner was the
+chief on board the _Zoe_, than the helm was put up, and off she ran
+under all sail, with her head to the island of Lissa.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY FIVE.
+
+Doubtless, the reader will be anxious to hear by what wonderful event
+Colonel Gauntlett and his man, Mitchell, had escaped from the death they
+were supposed to have suffered, and whether poor Bowse, and any of the
+survivors of his crew, had been equally fortunate; but, as I have matter
+of still more importance to communicate in this chapter, I must entreat
+him to have patience till I can return to that part of my history.  We
+left the old pirate, Vlacco, on his way, by Nina's directions, to give
+his assistance to any who might have survived the wreck of the Greek
+mistico.  He had no particular wish to turn philanthropist in his old
+age, so he went rather in a sulky humour, as he would very much rather
+have knocked them on the head than have had, not only to save their
+lives, but to refrain from touching any of their property.  The orders
+of his chief's lady were, however, not to be disobeyed; so he and his
+companions hurried on as fast as they could go with the rope and spars
+they had with them.
+
+"Ah! there she drives," he muttered.  "She might just as well have come
+on shore here, and saved me the trouble of going so far.  The boat is
+well handled though, and her crew don't seem inclined to give it up to
+the last.  They don't know what they are coming to, or they would be
+throwing up their arms in despair.  Well, it's some people's fate to be
+hung, and some to be drowned, so they must have made up their minds to
+go out of the world in the last way."
+
+He walked on for some distance further, by which time the little mistico
+was close in with the rocks.
+
+"I don't know though," he continued.  "She has got past Point Ausa, and
+I'm not quite so certain that she won't run right up into Ziyra Bay.
+So, by the saints, she has; and if she had tried to get there, she could
+not have done it better.  Now, on my sons, or the sea will be too quick
+for us, and will have carried those strangers away before we get there."
+
+A few minutes more brought him and his party to the edge of a lofty
+cliff, from whence they looked down into a small sandy bay, where,
+already almost high and dry, lay the mistico they had seen approaching
+the shore.  The entrance to the bay was through a very narrow passage
+between two rocks, which could only just have allowed her to scrape
+through; but once inside, the force of the sea was so much broken by
+them that she had received little or no damage.  The waves were,
+however, sufficiently high to break over her, and almost to fill her, so
+that the crew were compelled to land as fast as they could.  This they
+accomplished by dropping down from the little stump of a bowsprit as the
+water receded, and running up on to the dry sand before it returned.
+
+"You are lucky fellows to get on shore so easily," muttered old Vlacco.
+"But now you are there, you are very like mice in a trap, you cannot get
+out without my assistance."
+
+From the appearance of the bay, there seemed to be much truth in his
+observation, for so perpendicular were the cliffs, that no one could by
+any possibility, have scaled them.
+
+He counted the people as they landed, and saw that there were four men
+and a boy; and he was now watching to learn what they would do.  There
+was, as he was well aware, a narrow pathway cut up the side of the
+cliff; but the lower part was concealed, by leading into a small cavern,
+so that no strangers were likely to find it.  It had been formed,
+probably, in the days when the island was a regular fortress, and had
+been thus arranged, that no enemy should land there, and take them
+unawares.
+
+The crew of the mistico immediately set to work to try and find their
+way to the summit of the cliff; and it was while they were so doing that
+Vlacco showed himself.  He went to the lowest part of the cliff, and
+beckoned to them to come under it, and then driving two of the spars
+into the ground, he made a rope fast to them, and lowered it over the
+cliff.  It was immediately seized by the boy, who, with the agility of a
+monkey, commenced hauling himself up by it, towards the summit.  It was
+nervous work to see him now swinging in the air, now placing his feet on
+the narrow ledges of the rock, and thus making play for a few yards to
+rest his arms.  At last, he stood safely at the top, and taking off his
+cap, cheered to his companions to follow his example.
+
+"Many thanks, signor," he said, addressing Vlacco in a language which
+sounded something like Maltese, to which nation he apparently belonged,
+by his dress and the excessively dark hue of his skin.
+
+One after the other followed, till the whole crew were safely landed.
+
+They were all dressed as Maltese; but one of them addressed Vlacco in
+Romaic, and said--
+
+"He and his shipmates had to thank him for the assistance he had
+afforded them.  If our master was here, he would thank you, too; but,
+poor fellow, he and the mate were washed overboard, and we now know not
+where we have got to, or where to go.  We must get you and your friends
+on shore here to aid us in getting our vessel afloat, and we must then
+try to find our way back to Malta."
+
+"You'll not find that so easy," muttered the old pirate.  "But how came
+you to hit the bay in the clever way you did?  No one could have done it
+better who knows the island well."
+
+"Our good luck served us, and our prayers to the saints wore
+efficacious," returned the Maltese.  "We did not expect to succeed so
+well, I can assure you."
+
+"Some people are not born to be drowned," muttered, in a gruff voice,
+the old pirate, who, since he had given up robbing on his own account,
+had no further fears on the score of the alternative generally
+mentioned.  "You're in luck, I say; and since you happen not to be food
+for fishes, as I expected you would be by this time, I must tell you,
+that I have orders to bring you into the presence of the chief lady of
+this island, by whose directions I came all this way to try and save
+your lives, for I should not have taken so much trouble of my own
+accord, I can tell you."
+
+"The chief lady of the island," repeated the Maltese, who saw that it
+would be folly to take notice of the rude tone a the old man's
+observations.  "Who is she, friend?"
+
+"Who is she?  Why, the wife, or mistress, or lady love, or whatever you
+like to call her, of our chief, Zappa," answered Vlacco.
+
+"Ah?" ejaculated the Maltese, and he turned to one of his companions,
+and interpreted what he had heard in a language Vlacco did not
+understand.
+
+It seemed much to affect the man, who was a young, dark-skinned Maltese,
+though with features more of the European cast than theirs generally
+are.  He spoke a few words to the interpreter, who then said--
+
+"But, tell me, my friend, is the lady you speak of a Greek of these
+islands, or a stranger?  We are anxious to know who our intended
+benefactress is."
+
+"I don't see how it matters to you, who or what she is, provided she is
+of service to you," returned the pirate.  "But as you want to know, I'll
+tell you, she's a foreigner, and our chief seems very fond of her; and
+she is of him, I should think, by the way she looks at him.  Will that
+answer serve you?"
+
+The interpreter repeated what he had heard to his companion, who was
+evidently greatly agitated, though he tried to master his feelings, so
+as not to allow them to attract the attention of the islanders.  He was
+able to say a few words to the interpreter, who immediately asked--
+
+"Has the lady been long in the island, or has she lately arrived,
+friend?"
+
+"I am not going to answer any more of your questions," replied old
+Vlacco, who had gradually been losing the little amiability he ever
+possessed.  "I don't know why I said anything at all to you.  My orders
+were to see you safely into the lady's tower, where I must lock you up;
+and, as soon as our chief comes back, if he takes my advice, he'll heave
+you all off the top of the cliff together."
+
+"What, is your chief absent then?" said the Maltese, with a gleam of
+satisfaction in his countenance.
+
+"He is," replied Vlacco.
+
+"Where has he gone, friend?" asked the persevering interpreter.
+
+"Hough," was all the old pirate would answer.
+
+"When do you expect him back, friend?" inquired the interpreter.
+
+To this Vlacco would not deign a "Hough;" but looked as if he was very
+much inclined to shove his interlocutor over the cliff.
+
+This put an effectual stop to further conversation with any of the
+islanders; but the strangers continued every now and then, making
+observations to each other in a low tone, as they proceeded on their way
+to the tower.
+
+Old Vlacco hurried them on to the causeway, and past the eastern tower,
+which was the one where Ada Garden resided, till they reached the
+habitation of poor Nina.  He then opened the door, rudely shoved them
+all in, and told them to amuse themselves as they best could in the
+dark, while he went to inform the lady of their arrival.
+
+The fury of the summer tempest had subsided, and the dark masses of
+clouds had passed away, leaving only a few loitering stragglers to
+follow, in order to restore the sky to all its usual brightness.  The
+untiring waves still continued lashing the base of the rocks; but their
+roar had lessened, and the white foam no longer flew in showers of spray
+up the steep cliffs.
+
+Ada Garden and the young Italian sat at the window watching for the
+appearance of the shipwrecked mariners.  As Ada saw them at a distance,
+she at once recognised them from their dress as Maltese, and she longed
+to question them, to learn if they had come lately from their native
+island, and could give her any information respecting the vessels of war
+which were there; and whether the _Ione_ had yet sailed for England.
+
+At all events, she thought, if they could effect their escape, they
+might convey intelligence of her situation to Malta; and she doubted
+not, trusting to the chivalry of her countrymen, that even should
+Captain Fleetwood have sailed for England, every effort would be made
+for her release.  She whispered her hopes to Nina, who understood and
+promised to forward her wishes.
+
+"I should much like to speak with these poor men myself," she observed.
+"But my so doing might excite suspicions which might effectually
+counteract it, and bring destruction on their heads."
+
+"Fear not, lady; I will speak to them, and urge them to convey tidings
+of you," said Nina.  "For though I think not my husband would allow
+innocent men to be injured, yet of late he has done acts and said things
+which make me very wretched, though I do not comprehend them.  Even
+Paolo has of late come to see me but seldom, and is more silent and
+reserved than I ever before remember him.  I know not where it will all
+end, but now and then dark shadows pass before my sight, and congregate
+in the distance, till the whole future seems full of them.  But I rave,
+lady.  Ah! here come the strangers."
+
+Ada had scarcely listened to what her companion was saying, so intently
+had she been watching the Maltese seamen.  Her heart beat so quick with
+agitation, that she felt it would overcome her strength; hope and fear
+rose alternately in her bosom, yet she was sure she was not mistaken.
+Notwithstanding the disguise, the dark-stained skin, she was as certain
+nearly as of her own existence, that she beheld Charles Fleetwood.  Love
+cannot be mistaken.  And yet his air and walk were not as usual; the
+independent, buoyant step was not there, the free, bold carriage of the
+gallant sailor was gone, and he seemed to drag on his steps as if weary
+of life, instead of being engaged in an expedition, which she well knew
+must be to rescue her.  She had loved him before, but as she now saw him
+risking his liberty and his life for her, all the tenderest feelings of
+a woman's nature gushed forth, and she longed to rush into his arms to
+tell him of her gratitude, and deep, undying devotion.  She longed to
+call him to make him look up, to soothe his heart by letting him know of
+her safety; but prudence restrained her; she felt that the slightest
+sign of recognition might prove his destruction, and she endeavoured to
+conceal her feelings even from him.  But the quick glance of the young
+Italian soon discovered that she was suffering from some powerful
+emotion, and the direction of her eyes betrayed the cause.  She at once
+saw that there was some one she knew, but as Ada said nothing, she
+thought it kinder not to utter her suspicions.
+
+"I shall soon discover when I see them together," she said, mentally.
+"And I will not agitate her by asking her questions."
+
+In her heart of hearts, Nina hoped that the strangers would be able to
+assist Ada in her flight, for though she felt herself attracted to the
+beautiful stranger, she was not the less anxious to get her safe out of
+the island.
+
+Nina accordingly rose to take her departure, observing that the storm
+was over, and that she must hasten to make arrangements about the
+shipwrecked strangers, and to send for her brother to aid her, as they
+were not likely to receive much assistance or commiseration from Vlacco.
+She looked attentively at Ada as she said this, and the expression of
+thankfulness which she saw on her countenance convinced her still more
+that she was right in her conjectures.
+
+As soon as the shipwrecked seamen found themselves alone, the one who
+had hitherto appeared of the least importance, and had been seen to put
+on so dejected an air, on hearing that they were to be conducted into
+the presence of the chief's wife, was now evidently considered by the
+rest as their leader.  By a strenuous effort he aroused himself,
+observing, in a language which was much more like pure English than
+Maltese, "We must, while we can, examine the condition of the fortress
+in which we are confined; we may find it necessary to try and let
+ourselves out.  Except the door, there seems, however, to be no outlet;
+but there is a gleam of light coming down from the further corner, and
+there must be an aperture to let it through."
+
+"I will go in, and see all about it," exclaimed the Maltese lad, also
+speaking remarkably good English, and in a few minutes, his voice was
+heard calling on his companions to find their way to the foot of the
+steps, and to follow him into the chamber above.
+
+In a few minutes, the whole party were assembled in the apartment I have
+described as the pirate's chief store-room.
+
+"The enemies have chosen to put us in possession of the fortress, and
+have given us every means of keeping it," exclaimed the Maltese lad,
+examining the arms and ammunition.  "All we have to do, is to barricade
+the door below, and we might hold out a long siege."
+
+"And very little use that would be, when our object is to get away as
+fast as we can," returned another.  "However, we know where to find a
+good supply of arms if we want them."
+
+Meantime, their leader, and the one who had acted as interpreter, had
+gone together into the story above.
+
+"It is too true, then," exclaimed the first, after they had examined the
+apartment, looking as if he could scarcely restrain his grief.  "This is
+evidently a lady's chamber, and furnished, too, with all the luxury and
+treasure the pirate would lavish on his wife.  Yet it cannot be hers.  I
+know her too well--gentle and affectionate as she is, she would die
+rather than submit to such degradation.  But what is this?" he took up a
+book, which lay on the table.
+
+It was one he had often seen in the hands of Ada Garden, and her name
+was on the title-page.  Charles Fleetwood, for he it was who had come to
+rescue her he loved, as he discovered this fatal confirmation of his
+worst fears, covered his face with his hands, and groaned.  But he
+quickly recovered himself.
+
+"No, no--I will not believe it.  The thought is too horrible--too
+dreadful.  I wrong her to entertain it for an instant.  Yet, who can be
+this lady the old pirate spoke of?  He said she would soon be here.
+Would to heaven she were come?"
+
+The whole party had just collected together in the lower story, when
+they heard the gate open, and, a female figure appeared at the entrance.
+
+Captain Fleetwood's heart beat audibly, for, during the first moment, he
+could not tell whether it might not be Ada Garden; but the next, a gleam
+of light, and to him it was one of sunshine, exhibited a graceful and
+beautiful person; but a stranger.  In his satisfaction, he was very
+nearly forgetting himself, and rushing forward to inquire for Ada.  She
+stopped to address the old pirate, who had opened the gate.
+
+"You have treated these poor men with scant hospitality, thrusting them
+down here, wet and hungry," she observed to him, in an angry tone.
+"Conduct them up to my room, and I will inquire whence they come, and
+how they happened to be cast on the shore.  Send, also, for Signor
+Paolo, for some of them seem hurt, and may require his aid; and, good
+Vlacco, see that food be supplied to them, of the best the island
+affords, and let a chamber be prepared for them in the house, near to
+the room where my brother sleeps.  We will, at least, endeavour to be
+hospitable to the few strangers who are ever likely to visit our
+shores."
+
+Nina ascended to her chamber, into which Vlacco directly afterwards
+ushered the Maltese seamen.  She inclined her head in acknowledgment to
+the reverence they made her, and then ordered Vlacco to retire, and to
+fulfil her directions.
+
+"Do any of you speak Italian?" she asked in that language.
+
+"_Si, signora_, I do," said Fleetwood, stepping forward.  "I am also
+eager, in the name of my comrades, to thank you for your interference in
+our favour; nor are we at all assured, that without it, our lives would
+have been safe, had we fallen into the hands of some of those
+islanders."
+
+"As to that," returned Nina, "I cannot say.  They are rude men, and are
+little accustomed to encounter strangers.  But I am glad to be of
+service to you, and will be of more, if you can point out the way."
+
+"The greatest you can render us, signora, will be to order some twenty
+or thirty men to aid us in launching our mistico.  She is, fortunately,
+uninjured, and we may thus be enabled to continue our voyage."
+
+"They shall do so to-morrow morning, by which time the sea will be
+calm," said Nina.  "I have ordered lodging and food to be prepared for
+you.  And tell me, can I, in any other way, serve you?"
+
+Fleetwood felt a strong inclination to confide in her completely.
+Before, he had dreaded seeing Ada as the mistress of the tower; and now,
+he almost wished that she had been, for the dreadful thought occurred to
+him that she might be dead.  He was considering how he should frame some
+question to learn the truth, when his eye fell on the book, which he
+knew contained her name.  He took it up, and, as if by chance, his eye
+had now, for the first time, seen it, he pointed it out to Nina.
+
+"Lady," he said, "do you know the person to whom this book belongs?"
+
+"No," returned Nina; "I know no lady of that name--but stay.  Is the
+lady young, and fair, and beautiful, for, if so, I have just parted with
+her?"
+
+"She is, she is!" exclaimed Fleetwood, in a voice of agitation, the
+colour rushing to his face, and showing through the darkly-stained skin.
+"Where is she, lady?  Oh, tell me!"
+
+Nina smiled.
+
+"You have betrayed yourself, signor," she answered.  "But you may
+confide in me--I will not injure you.  I thought from the first, that
+you were not a common seaman, in spite of your costume.  Such speak not
+with the accent you do.  You take a great interest in this fair girl.
+Confess it."
+
+"I do, signora; and, moreover, I would risk everything to rescue her."
+
+"I thought as much," returned Nina.  "I may find means to serve you--and
+will do so.  But remember, signor, that I may also some day call upon
+you to assist one who, although you may look upon him as an enemy, may
+demand your aid.  Promise me that, should I ever require it, you will
+exert all your energies--you will strive to the utmost--you will even
+risk your life and safety, if I demand it of you, to serve him I will
+not now name.  Say you will do this, and you enable me to do all you
+require.  Otherwise, I cannot; for in aiding your wishes, I am
+disobeying his orders, and I cannot justify my conduct to myself."
+
+"You must remember, signora, that a naval officer, and, I confess to
+you, that I am one, owes his first duty to his country; next that,
+gladly will I obey your wishes," returned Fleetwood.  "If any one, in
+whom you take interest, is in difficulty, and I have the means to save
+him, I promise, faithfully, to do so.  More, I cannot say.  Will that
+satisfy you?"
+
+"It does.  Say, whence did you come--and whither were you bound, when
+you were driven on this coast.  It may be necessary to show that I have
+not forgotten the most important part of the examination."
+
+"We come from Malta and were bound for Smyrna, but were driven out of
+our course by a gale of wind, in which we lost our master and mate.  Our
+vessel was wrecked, and becoming the purchasers of the mistico, we
+endeavoured to find our way home in her.  None of us, however,
+understanding navigation, we were afraid to continue our voyage till we
+found some one to supply their place.  This, lady, is the story we have
+to tell, to account for our appearance on the island; but, in one point,
+believe me, I do not deceive you, when I assure you, that we come not
+here to injure, in any way, the chief of this island."
+
+"Enough, signor; I trust to you," replied Nina.  "I will now have you
+and your companions conducted to the apartments prepared for you.  There
+is but small habitable space in the castle, extensive as it once was,
+and it would lead to suspicions were you to be better lodged."
+
+She clapped her hands, and little Mila appeared, to conduct the
+strangers to the abode Nina had selected for them.
+
+Left alone, she stood, for an instant, a picture of misery.
+
+"Alas, alas!" she repeated to herself, "everything I hear and see
+convinces me that his course is one full of danger, if not, also, of
+crime.  But I am acting for the best, and am gaining a power which may
+serve him at his utmost need.  I am doing what is right."
+
+Poor Nina, the idol she had set up was gradually changing his god-like
+radiance for a sombre hue, his heavenly countenance for one of dark
+malignity.  So must all false idols change.  The brighter and more
+beautiful they appear at first, the blacker and more hideous will they
+become.
+
+The adventurers had retired to rest.  Their couches were composed of
+heather, scattered along the sides of the room; but it was covered with
+thick cloths and rugs, and formed no contemptible resting-place; their
+drenched clothes had been well dried, and they had enjoyed a plentiful
+meal.  Even Fleetwood had done justice to it; and the Maltese lad, who
+was no other than our friend Jack Raby, astonished little Mila by the
+prodigious extent of his midshipman's appetite.
+
+Another seeming Maltese was a person the reader is probably not prepared
+to meet.  He was our friend Bowse, late master of the _Zodiac_, who,
+having been rescued from the fate which hung over him, had entreated
+Captain Fleetwood to be permitted to accompany him, and to share his
+dangers in recovering Miss Garden.
+
+The Greek captain, Teodoro Vassilato, was the person who had acted as
+interpreter.  He had once been taken prisoner by the pirates, and having
+a little private revenge of his own to satisfy, he had offered his
+services, which were too valuable to be refused.
+
+The last person was really a Maltese seaman, long a faithful attendant
+on Fleetwood.  He was to be put forward as the most prominent person,
+should any doubt arise as to their being really Maltese.
+
+As the reader may have suspected, the shipwreck was the result of design
+rather than chance or mismanagement; and though they had long been
+waiting for a gale of wind, better to account for it, and as the most
+certain means of getting a footing on the island, they had scarcely
+bargained for one of such violence.
+
+As, however, Captain Vassilato was confident of the spot, they resolved
+to stand on.  They well knew the danger they were running--for they felt
+that it would be almost certain death, should the pirates discover them;
+but they had strung up their nerves for the work, and all were anxious
+to serve Captain Fleetwood, and to rescue Ada Garden from captivity.
+
+Fleetwood had thrown himself on his couch, thinking of Ada, and
+pondering how he might beat obtain an interview with her, when the door
+slowly opened, and a dark figure entered, holding a light in his hand.
+He attentively scrutinised the countenances of the sleepers, and then
+stopping before Fleetwood, he threw the light full on his face, so as to
+awaken him thoroughly, had he slept, and beckoned to him.
+
+Fleetwood sprang to his feet.
+
+"Follow me, signor," whispered the stranger, in Italian.  "I have come
+to conduct you into the presence of one you have long wished to meet."
+
+"To the English lady?" he asked, his voice trembling with agitation.
+
+The stranger laid his finger on his lips as a signal of silence, and
+beckoned him to follow.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY SIX.
+
+After the _Ione_ had left Cephalonia, she commenced her intricate
+passage among the innumerable isles and islets of the Grecian
+Archipelago, towards Lissa, in the neighbourhood of which his new friend
+Teodoro Vassilato, the captain of the _Ypsilante_, had appointed a
+rendezvous with Captain Fleetwood.
+
+On first starting, they were favoured with a fair breeze; but no sooner
+did they get among the labyrinthine mazes of the islands, than a foul
+wind set in, and delayed them in a manner which sorely tried Fleetwood's
+impatient spirit.  Any one who has cruised among those islands will know
+the difficulty of the navigation, and the necessity for constant
+watchfulness.  Besides the thousand islands and islets, there are, in
+every direction, rocks of all sizes, some just below the water, others
+rising above it to various heights; and although there are no regular
+tides, there are powerful and very variable currents, and many a ship
+has been cast away in consequence of them--the master, by his
+calculations, fancying himself often well free of the danger, on which
+he has been in reality running headlong.
+
+The _Ione_ had stood to the southward, and had tacked again to the
+northward, with the island of Milo blue and distant on her weather beam,
+when, just as the sun, in his full radiance of glory, was rising over
+the land, the look-out ahead hailed that there were breakers on the
+starboard bow.
+
+"How far do you make them?" asked Linton, who was the officer of the
+watch, as he went forward to examine them himself with his telescope.
+"By Jove! there is a mass of black rocks there; and I believe there is
+somebody waving to us on them," he exclaimed.  "Here, Raby, take my
+glass, and see what you can make out."
+
+"I can make it out clearly, sir," replied the midshipman.  "There are a
+number of people on them, and they have a sheet or blanket, or something
+of that sort, made fast to a boathook or small spar, and they are waving
+it to attract our attention."
+
+"They have been cast away, then, depend on it, and we must go and see
+what we can do for them," said Linton.  "Run down and tell the captain;
+and, as you come back, rouse out the master, and ask him how close we
+may go to the rocks."
+
+The captain and master, as well as all the officers, were soon on deck,
+and the brig was looking well up towards the rocks, within a few cables'
+length of which, to leeward, the pilot said they might venture.
+
+There was a good deal of sea running, for it had been blowing very hard
+the previous day; but the wind had gone down considerably, and Captain
+Fleetwood expressed his opinion that there would not be much difficulty
+in getting the people off the rocks, provided they could find an
+approach to them on the lee side; but on getting nearer, the rock
+appeared to be of so small an extent, that the waves curled round it,
+and made it almost as dangerous to near it on one side as on the other.
+
+"I think that I can make out a part of the wreck jammed in between two
+rocks, just flush with the water," observed Saltwell, who had been
+examining the place with his glass.  "An awkward place to get on."
+
+"Faith, indeed, it is," said the master.  "If we hadn't come up, and
+another gale of wind had come on, every one of those poor fellows would
+have been washed away."
+
+"It is an ill wind that blows nobody good," remarked the purser, who was
+a bit of a moralist in a small way.  "Now we have been complaining of a
+foul wind--and if we had had a fair one, we should have run past those
+rocks without ever seeing the people on them."
+
+"No higher," exclaimed the gruff voice of the quarter-master, who was
+conning the ship.  "Mind your helm, or you'll have her all aback."
+
+"The wind is heading us," muttered the man at the wheel; "she's fallen
+off two points."
+
+"Hands about ship," cried Captain Fleetwood.  "We'll show the poor
+fellows we do not intend to give them the go-by.  Helm's a-lee!  Tacks
+and sheets!  Main-topsail haul.  Of all, haul."
+
+And round came the brig, with her head to the eastward, or towards the
+island of Milo.  She was at this time about two miles to the southward
+of the rock, and that the people on it might not suppose that she was
+about to pass them, Captain Fleetwood ordered a gun to be fired, to
+attract their attention, and to show them that they were seen.  This
+appeared to have a great effect; for the officers observed them through
+their telescopes waving their signal-staffs round and round, as if to
+exhibit their delight.
+
+"They seem as if they were all drunk on the rock there," said Linton.
+"I never saw people make such strange antics."
+
+"I fear it is more probable that they are mad," observed the captain.
+"I have known many instances in which men have been thus afflicted, who
+having nothing to satisfy their hunger or thirst, have been tempted to
+drink salt water."
+
+"It proves that they must have been a long time there.  We must not keep
+on long on this tack, master, I suspect."
+
+The _Ione_ was soon about again on the starboard tack, and away she
+flew, every instant nearing the rock.  It soon became evident that
+Captain Fleetwood was right in his suspicions; for, as they drew closer,
+they could see that some of the unfortunate wretches had thrown off all
+their clothing, and were dancing, and leaping, and gesticulating
+furiously--now joining hands, and whirling round and round, as fast as
+the inequalities of the ground would allow them, then they would rush
+into the water, and then roll down and turn over and over, shrieking at
+the top of their voices.  Some, again, were sitting crouching by
+themselves, moving and gibbering, and pointing with idiot glance at
+their companions, and then at the vessel.  Two or three figures were
+seen stretched out by the side of the rock, apparently dead or dying.
+In the centre and highest part of the rock, a tent was erected, and
+before it were several persons in a far calmer condition.  Some were
+waving to the brig, others were on their knees, as if returning thanks
+to Heaven for their approaching deliverance, and two were stretched out
+on rude couches formed of sails, in front of the tent, too weak to stand
+up.  At last the _Ione_ got under the lee of the rock, and hove to.
+
+"We must take great care how we allow those poor fellows to get into the
+boats," said Captain Fleetwood.  "I need not tell you how much I value
+every moment; at the same time, in pity for those poor wretches, we must
+endeavour to rescue them--I propose, therefore, to anchor the cutter at
+two cables' length from the rock, and to veer in the dinghy till she
+drops alongside them; we must then allow only two at a time to get into
+her, and then again haul her off.  How many are there--do you count, Mr
+Linton."
+
+"About forty, sir, including those who appear dead or dying," returned
+the second lieutenant.
+
+"Twenty trips will take about two hours, as the cutter must return once
+to the ship with her first cargo.  It will be time well spent, at all
+events," said Fleetwood, calculating in his mind the delay which would
+be thus occasioned in discovering where Ada had been conveyed, and
+attempting her rescue.  "Mr Saltwell, I will entrust the command of the
+expedition to you," continued the captain.  "Mr Viall," to the surgeon,
+"we, I fear, shall want your services on board; but, Mr Farral," to the
+assistant-surgeon, "you will proceed in the cutter, and render what aid
+you consider immediately necessary.  Take, at all events, a couple of
+breakers of water, and a bottle or two of brandy.  You will find some
+stimulant necessary to revive the most exhausted--I should advise you,
+Mr Viall, to have some soft food, such as arrow-root, or something of
+that nature, boiled for them by the time they come off.  They have
+probably been suffering from hunger as well as thirst, and anything of a
+coarse nature may prove injurious."
+
+The cutter was hoisted out, and every preparation quickly made.  Numbers
+of volunteers presented themselves, but Linton's was the only offer
+which was accepted, as he undertook to go on to the rock in the first
+trip the dinghy made, and to render what aid he could to those who
+appeared to be on the brink of dissolution, when even a few minutes
+might make the difference, whether they died or recovered.  Mr Saltwell
+gave the order to shove off, and away the cutter pulled up towards the
+rock, with the dinghy in tow, on her work of humanity.
+
+The captain and those who remained on board watched the progress of the
+boats, as well as the movements on the rock, with intense interest.  It
+is scarcely possible to describe the excitement on the rock, caused by
+the departure of the boat.  If the actions had before been extravagant,
+they were now doubly so; they shrieked, they danced, they embraced each
+other with the most frantic gestures; and, indeed, appeared entirely to
+have lost all control over themselves.
+
+The cutter dropped her anchor at the distance it was considered
+advisable from the rock; but her so doing seemed to make the unhappy
+maniacs fancy that she was not coming to their assistance, and their joy
+was at once turned into rage and defiance.  One of them leaped into the
+water and endeavoured to swim towards the boat.  Linton, who had taken
+the precaution before leaving the ship to arm himself, as had Raby, who
+was his companion, instantly leaped into the dinghy, with the two men
+destined to pull her; and they urged her on as fast as they could to
+succour the unhappy wretch, slacking away at the same time a rope made
+fast to the cutter.  They had got near enough to see his eye-balls
+starting from his head, as he struck out towards them, his hair
+streaming back, his mouth wide open, and every muscle of his face
+working with the exertion of which he himself was scarcely conscious,
+when, as he was almost within their grasp, he uttered a loud shriek, and
+throwing up his arms, sank at once before them.  A few red marks rose
+where he had been, but they were quickly dispersed by the waves.
+
+"The poor fellow must have broken a blood-vessel, sir," said Raby.
+
+"No, indeed," replied Linton, "every artery must have been opened to
+cause those dark spots.  A ground shark has got hold of him, depend on
+it.  Heaven grant we do not get capsized, or our chance of escape will
+be small.  But, hark! what language are those fellows speaking?  It is
+French, is it not?"
+
+"French, sure enough, sir," replied Jack Raby.  "I thought so, before we
+left the cutter."
+
+"_Sacre betes Anglais_!  How dare you venture here?  This is our island,
+far better than your miserable Malta.  We have taken possession of it,
+and will hold it against all the world.  Begone with you, or we will
+sink you, and your ship to the bottom; off, off."
+
+As they were uttering these words, they continued making the most
+violent gestures of defiance and contempt, but this did not prevent
+Linton from approaching the rock.  It was larger than it had appeared to
+be at a distance; and at the spot to which he was making there was a
+little indentation where the water was comparatively smooth.  I have
+said that there was a group of men in front of a tent, at the higher
+part of the rock, and these they now observed, were armed, and had
+thrown up a sort of fortification, with planks and chests, and spars,
+and other things cast on shore from the wreck, aided by the natural
+inequality of that part of the rock.
+
+"Good Heavens!" thought Linton.  "And on so small a spot of ground,
+could not these men rest at peace with each other?"
+
+Just as the dinghy was within two boat-hooks' length of the rock, a
+voice from among the group, hailed in English,--"Take care, sir, or
+those fellows will murder you all.  They have been threatening to do it.
+But if we could but get up a few drops of water here, we should soon be
+able to quiet them."
+
+"I have the water for you, and I will try what I can do to pacify them,"
+shouted Linton, at the top of his voice.  "_A present, mes amis_" he
+said in French; "we have come here as friends to aid you; we do not want
+to take your island, to which you are welcome; and to convince you that
+we do not come as enemies, any two of you can go off to the large boat
+there, where they may have as much food and water as they require."
+
+Two of them rather more sane than the rest, on hearing this, shouted
+out,--"Food and water, that is what we want--you are friends, we see--we
+will go."
+
+"No, no--if any go, all shall go!" exclaimed the rest, rushing down to
+the water; but, so blind was the eagerness of the mass that these were
+precipitated headlong into the sea, and would have become food for the
+ground sharks had not Linton and his companions hauled them into the
+dinghy.  He was now afraid that he should be obliged to return at some
+risk with the boat thus heavily laden, but before doing so he determined
+to make one more attempt to join the people on the top.  His first care,
+before letting the boat again drop in, was to pour a few drops of
+brandy-and-water down the throats of the two Frenchmen they had rescued.
+This so revived them, and with their immersion in the water, so
+restored their senses, that they rose up in the boat and shouted out to
+their companions:--"These men are friends--receive them as brethren
+among you, and we will be answerable for their honesty."
+
+"Now, messieurs, is your time," said one.  "Hasten, if you desire to get
+on shore, or their mood will change."
+
+"Pull in," cried Linton, and in another moment he and Raby, who carried
+a breaker of water on his shoulder, sprang on shore while the boat was
+hauled back to the cutter.
+
+There they stood for an instant confronting the most ferocious looking
+beings it is possible to conceive in human shape.  Their beards were
+long, and their hair wet and tangled, and hanging down over their
+shoulders, their eye-balls were starting from their heads, and their
+limbs were emaciated in the extreme, lacerated, and clotted with blood
+and dirt--scarcely any of them having a rag of clothing to cover them.
+
+"Now, my friends, allow us to proceed to a place where we may sit down
+and discuss our plans for the future," said Linton, hoping thus to keep
+them quiet till he could get nearer the summit of the rock.
+
+"_Waistcoat bien, c'est bien_," they answered.  "Monsieur is a man of
+sense," said one, with a maniac leer at his companion.  "We will allow
+him to make merry at our next feast, eh, comrades?"
+
+And they laughed, and shouted at the wit of the poor wretch.
+
+"We will proceed, then," said Linton, who found them pressing on him.
+"Push on, Raby, and try and gain the top before these madmen break out
+again.  Let us advance, messieurs."
+
+"What, and join our enemies in the castle up there?" sneered the maniac,
+who had proposed them joining their feast, of the nature of which they
+could have little doubt.  "No, no.  We see that you are no friends of
+the French, so over you go to feed the fishes."
+
+As he uttered these words, he made a rush at Linton, who with difficulty
+leaped out of his way, when the miserable wretch, unable to stop
+himself, ran on till he fell over into the water, where his companions
+derided his dying struggles.  This attracted the attention of some; but
+the others made a rush at Linton, who had just time to draw his cutlass,
+and to keep them off from himself and Raby, who, hampered with the
+water-cask, could do little to defend himself.
+
+So rapidly had the events I have mentioned taken place, that there was
+not time even for the dinghy's return to bring them assistance.  Had
+Linton chosen to kill his assailants, he might easily have preserved his
+own safety; but unwilling to hurt them, unconscious as they were of what
+they were about, he was very nearly falling a victim to his own
+humanity.  As he and Jack Raby sprang up the rock they got round them,
+and on a sudden they found themselves attacked from behind.  On turning
+his head for a moment, a powerful wretch seized his sword by the blade,
+and though it was cutting his hands through and through he would not let
+it go.  At the same instant others threw their arms round his neck, and
+were dragging him to the ground, where in all probability they would
+instantly have destroyed him, when two persons sprang down from the top
+of the rock with heavy spars in their hands, and striking right and left
+on the heads of the maniacs, compelled them to let go their hold, and
+allow Linton and Raby to spring to their feet.
+
+"Now, sir, now is your time!" exclaimed one of their deliverers.  "Up to
+the fortress before they rally.  They have had such a lesson that they
+will not think of coming there again."
+
+Neither of the officers required a second call, and in an instant they
+were in front of the tent.
+
+"You have brought us water, sir.  Thank Heaven, the breaker has not been
+injured!" exclaimed the man, who had aided them so effectually, taking
+it from Raby's shoulder, who poured out some into a cup which he had
+brought for the purpose.  As he did so Raby examined his countenance,
+which, though haggard and emaciated, he recognised as belonging to an
+old friend.
+
+"What, Bowse!" he cried.  "Is it you?--I am, indeed, glad to find that
+you have escaped from the pirates, though we find you in a sorry
+condition enough."
+
+"Ah, Mr Raby, I knew the _Ione_ at once, and glad I am to see you,"
+answered Bowse, filling the cup with water.  He was about to carry it to
+his own mouth, but by a powerful effort he restrained himself,
+muttering, "There are others want it more than I do."
+
+And he handed it to Linton, pointing to one of the sufferers on the
+ground.  Linton took the cup, and pouring a few drops of brandy into it,
+gave it to the person indicated.
+
+"What!" he exclaimed, as he did so.  "Do I, indeed, see Colonel
+Gauntlett?  Tell me, sir, is Miss Garden here?  I need not say how much
+it will relieve the mind of Captain Fleetwood to know that she is safe."
+
+The colonel groaned as he gave back the cup, saying--
+
+"Indeed, I know nothing of my poor niece."
+
+In a few minutes a cup of water had been given to each of the persons
+round the tent, the reviving effect of which was wonderful on even the
+most exhausted.  Meantime the unhappy wretches on the lower part of the
+rock were shrieking and gesticulating as before, but instead of looking
+at the boats they now turned their eyes towards those who were quenching
+their raging thirst with the supply of water brought by Linton and Raby.
+At this juncture the dinghy returned, and the men in her succeeded by a
+_coup de main_ in getting two men off, when by a less forcible manner
+they would probably have failed.  The moment they reached the rock they
+leaped on it, holding the boat by the painter, and before the Frenchmen
+were aware they had seized two of them who had jackets to catch hold of,
+and had hauled them into the boat.  A second time the manoeuvre had
+equal success, and thus six were got off without much trouble.  Linton
+now bethought him of trying to soothe some of them by giving them water,
+and at last he succeeded in attracting one of them up the rock by
+holding up a cup of water.  The man took it and quaffed it eagerly.
+
+"_C'est mieux que le sang_," he exclaimed in a hollow voice, followed by
+a fierce laugh.  "_More, more, more_."
+
+The lieutenant considered that he might give him a little more, and
+others seeing that their comrade was obtaining that for which they had
+been longing, came up and held out their hands for the cup, their manner
+and the unmeaning look of their eyes showing that they were more
+influenced by the instinct of animals than the sense of men.
+
+By degrees the whole of them came up and obtained a cup of water, and
+Linton had the satisfaction of seeing that they had become much calmer
+and more manageable.  He, in consequence, thought he might venture down
+to examine the condition of the still more unfortunate beings who sat by
+themselves, altogether unconscious of their condition, as well as of
+those he had seen stretched out at their length near the edge of the
+rock.  Bowse, however, recommended him not to attempt to do so till a
+greater number of the maniacs had been got off.  "If Mr Raby and I, and
+Mitchell, there," (meaning the colonel's servant, who was the second man
+who had come to their rescue), "were to accompany you, and it would not
+be safe for you to go alone, those poor wretches might attack our
+fortress and murder all in it; and to say the truth, I am afraid you can
+do very little good to any of them."
+
+Bowse's arguments prevailed, and Linton and Raby set to work to get the
+people into the dinghy.  He found the best way was to give them a little
+water at a time, and then to promise them more directly they should
+reach the cutter.  In this way several more were got off, the seamen
+seizing them neck and heels the moment they got near the dinghy, and
+tumbling them in.  At last Linton, leaving Bowse in charge of what he
+called the fortress, proceeded with Raby and Mitchell, carrying the
+remainder of the water to aid those who either could not or would not
+move.  The first man they came to lay moaning and pointing to his mouth.
+No sooner did his parched lips feel the cooling liquid than he sat
+upright, seizing the cup in both his hands, and drained off the
+contents.  Scarcely had he finished the draught than, uttering a deep
+sigh, he fell back, and, stretching out his arms, expired.  On the next
+the water had a more happy effect: the eye, which at first was glazed
+and fixed, slowly acquired a look of consciousness, the muscles of the
+face relaxed, and a smile, expressive of gratitude, seemed to flit
+across the countenance of the sufferer.  The next, who was sitting by
+himself, almost naked, with his feet close to the sea, received the cup
+with a vacant stare, and dashed the precious liquid on the ground, while
+the cup itself would have rolled into the sea, had not Raby fortunately
+saved it.  They, however, again tried him with more, and no sooner did
+the water actually touch his lips than he seemed as eager to obtain it
+as he was before indifferent to it.  When the dinghy returned, these two
+were lifted into her, and conveyed on board the cutter.  The cutter had,
+by this time, a full cargo on board, which she transferred to the
+_Ione_, and then returned, anchoring closer in with the rock than
+before.  While Linton and his companions were attending, as I have
+described, to the most helpless of the French seamen, they were followed
+closely by the remainder, who watched their proceedings with idiot
+wonder.
+
+The threatening gestures of the gang, who were behind, made him glad to
+find a way by which he could retreat to the summit of the rock, where he
+found assembled, besides the persons I have already mentioned, the
+second mate and three British seamen of the _Zodiac_, as also the
+captain of a French brig-of-war, which it appeared had been wrecked
+there, four of his officers and five of his men, who were the only ones
+who had retained their strength and their senses; and many of them were
+so weak that they had not sufficient strength to walk down to the boats.
+Linton accordingly sent for further assistance, and two more hands came
+off from the cutter, both for the purpose of carrying down the
+sufferers, and of defending them in the mean time from any attack the
+maniacs might make on them.  Colonel Gauntlett, although at first unable
+to walk, quickly recovered, and insisted on having no other assistance
+than such as Mitchell could afford in getting to the boat.  The French
+captain had suffered the most, both from bodily fatigue and mental
+excitement.
+
+All this party having been embarked, Linton advised that the cutter
+should return to the ship, and begged that four more hands should be
+sent him, with a good supply of rope-yarns.  While the boats were
+absent, he tried to calm and conciliate the unhappy beings on the rock;
+but, although they no longer attempted to injure him, it was evident
+that they abstained from doing so more from fear than good will.
+
+They were in all, remaining alive, twelve persons; and, when the dinghy
+returned, he found his party to amount to eight men, with whom he
+considered he should easily be able to master the others.  The
+unfortunate Frenchmen had not sense to perceive what he was about, and
+he had captured and bound three before they attempted to escape from
+him.  Then commenced the most extraordinary chase round and round the
+rock.  In a short time three more were bound, and these Linton sent off
+before he made any further attempt to take the rest.  There were still
+six at large, fierce, powerful men, who evaded every means he could
+devise to get hold of them without using actual force.  He was still
+unwilling to pull away, and leave them to their fate; at length he
+ordered his men to make a simultaneous rush at them, and to endeavour to
+trip them up, or to knock them over with the flats of their cutlasses.
+Pour of them were secured, though they had their knives in their hands,
+and made a desperate resistance; the others, they were two, who appeared
+to be the maddest of the party, darted from them, and, before they could
+be stopped, leaped off, on the weather side, when they were quickly
+swallowed up among the breakers.  Linton and his companions shuddered as
+they left the fatal spot.
+
+The _Ione_, with her new passengers on board, kept on her course, and
+the wind still continuing foul, Captain Fleetwood steered for Athens,
+off which place, the French commander said he was certain to find a ship
+of his own country to receive him and his crew.
+
+A French frigate was fallen in with, as was expected, and the French
+captain and his surviving officers and crew were transferred to her.
+They were all full of the deepest expressions of gratitude for the
+service which had been rendered them, and all united in complimenting
+Bowse for his behaviour during the trying time of the shipwreck, which
+had been the chief means of preserving their lives.
+
+I will not describe Fleetwood's feelings on seeing Colonel Gauntlett,
+and on hearing that Ada had, to a certainty, been carried off by Zappa.
+He had been prepared for the account; for he believed, from the first,
+that it was for that purpose he had attacked the _Zodiac_.
+
+Such, however, was a conjecture a lover would naturally form, as he
+considered her the most valuable thing on board; but, perhaps, the more
+worldly reader may consider that the rich cargo had greater attractions,
+as well as the prospect of a large sum for her ransom.  He was not aware
+that, at that very time, Zappa had sent to Aaron Bannech, the old Jew of
+Malta, to negotiate with her friends for that very purpose.  The
+colonel, of course, remained on board to assist in the search for his
+niece, while Bowse begged that he might be allowed to remain also for
+the same object, and his men entered on board the _Ione_, which was some
+hands short.
+
+A few words must explain the appearance of Captain Bowse and his crew
+and passengers on the rock.  When Zappa had left the _Zodiac_ he had
+bored holes in her, for the purpose of sending her to the bottom; she,
+however, did not sink as soon as expected; and Bowse, with some of his
+people who were unhurt, were able to put a boat to rights, and to launch
+her.  The boat carried them all, and they were making for the nearest
+coast when they were picked up by a French man-of-war.  The French ship
+was soon after wrecked on a barren rock, on which they existed without
+food for many days, and where many of the Frenchmen went mad.  Here they
+remained till the _Ione_ took them off.
+
+Fleetwood had been very unhappy at having been compelled to go so much
+out of his way to get rid of the Frenchmen; but he was well rewarded for
+the delay, by falling in, when just off the mouth of the Gulf of Egina,
+with the very brig he had chased before touching at Cephalonia, the
+_Ypsilante_.  Captain Teodoro Vassilato came on board, and expressed his
+delight at meeting him again, insisting on being allowed to accompany
+him on his search.
+
+"I was once taken prisoner by the rascals myself, and narrowly escaped
+with my life, and I may have some little expectation of satisfaction in
+punishing them," he observed.  "Indeed, without my assistance, I do not
+think you have much chance of success."
+
+This last argument prevailed, and Fleetwood, warmly pressing his new
+friend's hand, assured him of his gratitude for his promised assistance.
+The two brigs, therefore, sailed in company to search for the pirate's
+island.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY SEVEN.
+
+Captain Fleetwood followed his unknown guide into the open air without a
+word having been exchanged between them.  He felt no fear, and scarcely
+any doubt as to the object of the summons he had received; for he had,
+from the first, persuaded himself that it was in some way or other
+connected with Ada Garden, and that he was either to hear of her, or to
+be conducted into her presence.  The guide stopped at the door of the
+building to conceal the light, and looked cautiously around to
+ascertain, apparently, that no unwelcome eyes were near to watch their
+proceedings.  Having convinced himself that he was unobserved, he again
+beckoned the English officer to advance, leading him round close to the
+line of ruins, which at one time formed the outer walls of the castle,
+and the shadow of which now served to aid in concealing them from any
+person who might; by chance, be crossing the more open ground.
+
+As Fleetwood was passing beneath Nina's tower he looked up at her
+casement under the vague impression that he should there find her whom
+he was so eager to meet; but no light was visible, either there or in
+any part of the building; and he had little time for observation, for
+his guide led him on with a step so light and rapid that he had to do
+his best to keep up with him.  The night was one of the most perfect
+with which that eastern clime is blessed.  The air though warm was pure
+and fresh after the storm--the golden stars were shining forth with a
+brilliant lustre, from the intense blue of the sky, on the dark tranquil
+sea, which lay in calm majesty at their feet, the gentle hush of its
+slumbering waves being the only sound to break the tranquil silence of
+the hour.
+
+It was a night formed for the holy meeting of those whose hearts, though
+bound together, had long been parted, a night for pure happiness and
+love.  Fleetwood felt its benign influence, and had he before been
+inclined to despair, it would have reassured him.  A moon reduced to a
+thin crescent was sinking towards the horizon, and casting a bright
+shining line across the ocean, its light being just sufficient to throw
+the tall shadows of the towers and ruins along the open ground, and to
+tinge their summits with a silvery hue.
+
+The guide every now and then stopped and listened, as if apprehensive
+that some one might be abroad, and interrupt their proceedings; and then
+hearing nothing, on he went again as rapidly as before; Fleetwood each
+time imitating his example, and stopping also.  He had scarcely before
+remarked his conductor's appearance; but he now observed, while thus
+stopping, that his figure was small and light, and that he wore a dark
+_capote_, with the hood drawn over his head, so as completely to conceal
+his features and to envelope his form.  They went on till they got close
+to the tower in which Ada resided, when the guide once more came to a
+stop, and beckoned Fleetwood to approach.
+
+"_Zitto_, hush!" said the guide, in the softest Italian.  "I have risked
+much to serve you, and her you love--my life--and even more than my
+life--yours also, perhaps--and, therefore be cautious.  I can allow you
+only a short time to say all you long to utter; but remember what might
+happen were you discovered.  I will remain below to watch and warn you
+of danger, and afterwards to conduct you back to your lodging, as I must
+lock you in there.  No one yet suspects you; but when our chief returns
+I know not how that may be--therefore be advised by me; what you have to
+do, do quickly.  Now go--a short half-hour is all the time I can allow
+you."
+
+Fleetwood, as he listened, was certain that he knew the accents of the
+voice, and that the speaker could be no other than the Signora Nina; but
+he did not stay to utter empty thanks.  He thought he could do that as
+well on his return, but sprang towards the door, which she opened for
+him, as she spoke; and again taking the lantern from beneath her cloak
+showed him some steps by which he might ascend the tower.
+
+"Be cautious," she whispered, seeing that he was about to leap up them
+at the rate his impatience would have urged him to proceed.  "Tread
+lightly, and speak not loud, lest any one passing may hear you.  Now,
+go."
+
+She held the light to show him the turnings in the stairs.  He stepped
+up two or three at a time, with the light tread of a seaman; and on the
+summit a door stood open, a bright gleam of light streaming through it.
+A female figure stood in the centre of the apartment.  He would have
+known her among a thousand.  She sprang forward to meet him, and in
+another instant Ada Garden was clasped in her lover's arms.  For some
+minutes the hearts of both were too full to allow them to speak, and joy
+such as is experienced but seldom in the life of any, and by many never,
+was their predominant feeling.  How much of the precious time allowed
+them to be together they had thus spent, I do not know, when Marianna,
+who had been standing retired in a corner of the room, thought it
+incumbent on her to make her appearance, and embracing Fleetwood's knees
+in her delight, she poured out a torrent of thanks to him for his having
+come to rescue them.  However much they might have wished the good
+little girl anywhere but where she was, her presence was very useful to
+them, as it sobered Fleetwood down to the things of this world; and
+reminded him that he had all his plans and arrangements to explain to
+his mistress, and numerous directions to give her for her guidance.  Ada
+also was recalled to her present position, and as the first ecstasies of
+her joy subsided, fears for her lover's safety took possession of her
+mind.
+
+"Oh!  Fleetwood," she exclaimed; "you have risked your liberty and your
+life for my sake; and I fear the treacherous and fierce man who brought
+me here will wreak his vengeance on your head, when he finds himself
+disappointed in obtaining a large ransom for me--his object, I expect,
+in carrying me off."
+
+"But, my sweet Ada, I do not intend to give him the power of so doing,"
+returned Fleetwood.  "We have stanch friends to assist us, and our
+arrangements are excellent, so that provided we are not suspected we
+have every chance of success."
+
+"I will not then, Fleetwood, damp your generous energy with my own,
+perhaps too weak, fears," answered Ada.  "But I am ready to do whatever
+you think best."
+
+"That is my own brave girl," said Fleetwood, pressing her to his heart.
+"We must succeed; and now, Ada, listen to what I have to tell you."
+
+"I will--but first tell me, for I have been undutiful in not asking
+before, have any tidings been received of my poor uncle, and the brave
+crew of the _Zodiac_?"
+
+"Your uncle is safe on board the _Ione_, and our good friend Bowse is
+one of the companions of my adventure," replied Fleetwood.  "The gallant
+fellow insisted that, as you had been in a manner under his charge, when
+you were carried off, it was his duty to come in search of you; and I
+was too glad to have his assistance."
+
+"Thank Heaven for my uncle's safety!  And I trust, Fleetwood, that he
+has conquered the prejudices he entertained against you since he has
+been on board your ship," said Ada, smiling.  "Indeed, his nature is
+generous, and I know that he must."
+
+"I trust that he has, dearest," returned Fleetwood.  "I have treated him
+as I believe I should any other person in a similar position; and I may,
+recollecting that he was your uncle, have shown him more respect and
+tenderness than I might otherwise have done; but, at all events, he
+appears well disposed towards me.  However, in two days, I hope you will
+have the means of judging for yourself."
+
+"So soon!" exclaimed Ada.  "Is your ship so near?"
+
+"But a few hours' sail from hence; and I would, this very night, have
+put our plan in execution to carry you away, had we been at liberty; but
+first, the kindness of the pirate's young wife prevented our examining
+the harbour and the boats in it; and we afterwards found ourselves
+locked up in the room allotted us to sleep in.  I do not, in
+consequence, think we are suspected; for it is very natural that the
+gruff old pirate, who seems to act as lieutenant-governor, or
+major-domo, of the castle--I scarcely know what to call him--should not
+think fit to leave a party of strangers at liberty to wander about and
+examine into the state of his defences.  I have now to thank the Signora
+Nina for the happiness I enjoy of seeing you.  But, tell me, Ada, do you
+think she is to be thoroughly trusted?"
+
+"Poor girl, I believe so," said Ada.  "Intentionally, I feel sure she
+would not betray us, but will do her very utmost to aid us."
+
+Ada did not give the reasons for her confidence.  Her maiden modesty
+made her unwilling to tell her lover that she believed that Nina,
+besides her wish to do what was right, was also influenced by her
+anxiety to get her out of her husband's way.
+
+"She has already given proof of her willingness to serve us; but, in her
+brother I have not the same confidence, and you must be cautious not to
+let him discover who you are.  I may wrong the unhappy youth, for he
+appears to have many generous and good qualities--and his devotion to
+his sister, the original cause of his misfortunes, is extraordinary.
+However, he, at times, appears to wander in his mind; and, except in a
+case of urgent necessity, do not trust him; and, if you have occasion to
+do so, appeal to his generosity and honour, and he is more likely to
+serve you."
+
+"I will do as you advise, Ada; and I confess that I would rather trust
+to that beautiful Italian girl, than to the sort of person you describe
+her brother to be;" said Fleetwood.  "But our time is short; and I have
+not told you one word of our plan.  You must know that I was fortunate
+enough to fall in with a Greek captain, who knows the island, and
+entertains a laudable hatred for Signor Zappa; and he undertook to pilot
+us here, either in the _Ione_, or in any way I proposed; but strongly
+urged me to employ stratagem to recover you.  I accordingly resolved to
+pretend to be a Maltese seaman, as the character I could best personate,
+and to be unfortunately wrecked on the island.  Once here, I felt sure I
+should find means to communicate with you; and I then proposed to cut
+out a boat from the harbour, and to carry you off in her.  I directed
+our pinnace and jollyboat to wait every night just out of sight of land,
+to the windward of the harbour, with the men well armed, all the time I
+am here, to assist us should we be followed when escaping.  I, at first,
+intended to have come alone; but my Greek friend first insisted on
+coming, then so did Bowse, in a manner I could not refuse; and I was
+glad when a real Maltese volunteered, as he could act as spokesman if
+necessary.  Young Jack Raby also begged very hard to be allowed to
+accompany me; and, as he can speak Maltese and looks his character, I
+felt that he would be of great use; as, if it were necessary, while he
+remained hid away in the bottom of the boat, you might make your escape
+in his dress.  The party I have mentioned left the ship yesterday
+morning in a mistico I bought for the purpose; and we agreed to pretend
+to have lost our own ship, and to be endeavouring to find our way back
+to Malta.  Though we wished for a strong breeze to give a plausibility
+to our being wrecked, we did not bargain for quite so much wind as we
+had, and we were fortunate in having so good a pilot as the Greek.  I
+have not much hope of getting the mistico off--and scarcely intend to
+use her if we do--but she will be very useful in turning suspicion
+aside; and if the pirates think fit to watch us, they will keep their
+eyes in that direction while we are taking our departure in another.  By
+the by, as I felt sure Marianna would be with you, from the account
+Bowse gave of having seen you both carried off together, it was arranged
+that young Raby should pretend to be her brother, that we might the more
+easily make the necessary arrangements: so the moment he sees her, if
+they meet by chance, she is to rush into his arms and cover him with
+kisses.  What do you say to the arrangement, Marianna?"
+
+"Me no mind it," answered the little Maltese, laughing.  "But, signor,
+say which the brother is, that me no kiss the wrong person.  No do well
+to have brother who won't say me is his sister."
+
+"He is a little dark fellow, with a face as brown as mine, for we
+painted from the same pot," said Fleetwood.  "But if I know Master Jack
+Raby well, he will not leave you long in doubt.  He has seen you with
+Miss Garden, and you will very soon have proof of his fraternal
+affection, so pray remember to acknowledge him."
+
+"Me take great care to kiss very much," said Marianna, simpering.
+
+"I shall trust to you; but be careful not to recognise any of the rest
+of us; and now, my sweet Ada, I must bid you farewell.  Be prepared
+to-morrow night for our exploit.  Somewhere about midnight I hope to be
+with you.  Put on some dark, close-fitting dress, which is less likely
+to be seen in the dusk than a light-coloured one; and if you could
+procure capotes from Signora Nina, such as she now wears, it will be
+still better.  Should we be met by any of the islanders we may be
+mistaken for their friends.  Our present purpose is to escape from the
+harbour, and to leave the mistico in lieu of the boat we take.  Young
+Raby and I will come up for you and Marianna, while the rest prepare the
+boat.  Once outside, I have little fear of what may happen, for we shall
+soon be under shelter of the _Ione's_ boats, and they will be a match
+for all the craft of this place, with the exception of the brig, which
+they will scarcely think of taking out after us.  I must keep the
+Signora Nina no longer waiting.  Again, dearest, farewell!"
+
+They parted as lovers under such circumstances would part; and when he
+reached the foot of the tower he found that nearly an hour had elapsed
+since he left the Italian lady.
+
+She had remained outside the tower, under the deep shadow in the angle
+formed by it and the ruined wall, which ran off towards the other tower.
+
+"I fortunately calculated on your want of punctuality," she whispered.
+"But delay might be dangerous, so you must hasten back to your
+dormitory, and breathe not, even to your companions, that you have
+quitted it this night.  They sleep soundly, and will not awake."
+
+"I forgot to watch how time passed, and I thought not it had flown so
+rapidly by," said Fleetwood.  "I should deeply grieve were I to cause
+you greater risk than you have already run for Ada Garden's sake."
+
+"No harm is yet done," replied Nina.  "I took care, thanks to my
+brother's knowledge of drugs, that all who were likely to interfere
+should sleep soundly to-night.  I tried it as an experiment, that, on
+another occasion, I might be able to assist you in the same way.  Now
+let us hasten back."
+
+"Stay, lady, for one moment," exclaimed Fleetwood, who had the natural
+horror of all right-minded Englishmen to the employment of any but open
+and fair means to obtain even the most important object, and an especial
+disgust at the thoughts of having drugs used to send his enemies to
+sleep; though, whether, in that respect he was over particular, we will
+not stop to discuss; at all events, being very certain that if there was
+a doubt, he kept on the right side of the question.  "Stay," he said;
+"you risk too much for our sake.  Give us but our liberty.  Take care
+that we are not locked up again, as to-night, and we will manage every
+other arrangement.  The means you hint at employing are dangerous; and,
+I believe, we have no right to use them.  I again repeat my promise,
+that I will not use force nor injure any one for whom you have regard,
+unless driven to it by the most dire necessity."
+
+"You act, signor, nobly, according to the dictates of your conscience,"
+answered Nina.  "Perhaps you are right, and I will follow your wishes,
+unless absolutely obliged to encounter force and injustice by stratagem
+and fraud, the only resource of the weak.  It is agreed then.  To-morrow
+I will manage that you and your companions shall be allowed to range at
+will over the island.  I need not counsel you to make use of your time.
+And now we must delay no longer, or the morning light will be breaking
+in the sky before I have returned to my tower."
+
+Saying this she hurried back, followed closely by Fleetwood, towards the
+other part of the ruins.  She observed the same precautions as before on
+approaching the building.
+
+On a sudden she stopped, and drew back close to him, beneath the shade
+of the wall.  A footfall was heard; and he saw that she trembled in
+every limb.  Presently a figure emerged from behind the tower, and
+stood, for some minutes, gazing up in the sky, as if contemplating the
+glorious galaxy of stars, which shone down from it.  At length it
+advanced towards the spot where they were standing, and Fleetwood felt
+that they were about to be discovered, and prepared for the emergency.
+
+"I must save this poor girl at every cost," he thought.  "Whatever be
+her motive, she has placed herself in peril on my account."
+
+Just as the person came close to them, he turned round, evidently not
+observing them, and walked forward in the very direction from whence
+they had come.
+
+As soon as he was out of sight, Fleetwood heard the Italian lady
+whisper,--"It is poor Paolo.  He would rather aid than betray us; but,
+for his sake, while I have other means, I would not willingly employ
+him.  He has suffered much for me, and I would not bring further
+vengeance on his head.  Now go in and sleep till the morning."
+
+The door was carefully closed, and Fleetwood heard it locked after he
+entered the room, where his companions slept soundly.
+
+Nina, mean time, hurried back to her tower, where she found little Mila
+sleeping on her couch.  She awoke her with a kiss.
+
+"Your task is nearly over for to-night," she whispered, putting, at the
+same time, two keys into her hand.  "Go, now, and lock me in, and return
+those keys whence you took them.  I am grateful for your zeal, and you
+shall have your reward.  Keep your own counsel as before; and no one
+will suspect you."
+
+Mila nodded, took up the keys, and slipped noiselessly back to the house
+tenanted by her grandfather.
+
+Fleetwood tried to follow the example of his friends, but it was not
+till daylight broke that he closed his eyes in a deep slumber.
+
+"Humph," muttered old Vlacco, as he came into the room in the morning
+rubbing his eyes.  "There was little use locking up these lazy Maltese,
+unless they are addicted to walking in their sleep.  At all events they
+are honest, or they would not snore so loudly."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY EIGHT.
+
+The greater part of the population of the island residing near the
+harbour were assembled on the shores of the bay to enjoy, under the
+shade of the high cliffs, the deliriously cool air of the evening, and
+to welcome the return of their chief, whose mistico was seen approaching
+from the westward.
+
+There were old men and women, the elders and parents, as well as the
+young men and maidens, who had come with happy hearts, to amuse
+themselves with various light sports, but chiefly to dance their
+favourite Romaika, which has been handed down to them from the earliest
+days of their heroic ancestors, when it was known under the more classic
+name of the Cretan or Doedalian dance.
+
+Century after century has seen it danced by the youths and maidens of
+successive generations, on the self-same spots--always the most
+beautiful in the neighbourhood--both on the islands and on the main,
+since the time when Greece was young and strong--the fit cradle of the
+arts and sciences; when that literature was produced which will last as
+long as the world exists; when those temples arose, and those statues
+came forth from their native rock, which subsequent ages have never been
+able to equal; when all that the human mind could conceive most elegant
+had its birth; when her ships traversed all known seas, and her colonies
+went forth to civilise the earth; when her sages gave laws to the world,
+and a handful of her sons were sufficient to drive back thousands upon
+thousands of the vaunted armies of the East; from those glorious epochs
+to the time when, sunk in effeminacy and vice, despising the wisdom of
+her ancestors, she fell under the sway of the most savage of the tribes
+she had once despised--yet still, in abject slavery, while all that man
+cared for was destroyed, the sports of their youth were not forgotten;
+and what was learned in youth, the parents taught their children to
+revive, as their only consolation in their misery and degradation.
+
+Thus, Homer's description of the dance in his days would answer
+perfectly, even to the very costume, for that danced in a remote island
+of the Archipelago:--
+
+  "A figure dance succeeds:
+  A comely band
+  Of youths and maidens, bounding hand-in-hand;
+  The maids in soft cymars of linen drest;
+  The youths all graceful in the glossy waistcoat.
+
+------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+  "Now all at once they rise--at once descend,
+  With well-taught feet, now shaped in oblique ways,
+  Confusedly regular, the moving maze:
+  Now forth, at once, too swift for sight they spring,
+  And undistinguish'd blend the flying ring.
+  So whirls a wheel in giddy circle tost,
+  And rapid as it runs the single spokes are lost."
+
+Among the spectators was Nina, and after much persuasion she had induced
+Ada Garden to accompany her, with Marianna.  Ada had done so after due
+consideration, from believing that it would be better to appear as much
+as possible at her ease; and by meeting the strangers, without appearing
+in any way to recognise them, or to take interest in them, to disarm any
+suspicions she thought it probable old Vlacco might entertain.
+
+The veteran pirate had at first grumbled at allowing her to leave her
+tower; but Nina silenced him by asserting that, during her lord's
+absence, she had the chief command; and that if he would not obey, she
+would complain of his cruelty and tyranny, and declare that he was no
+better than a Turk.
+
+Marianna was delighted at once more finding herself looking at a crowd,
+and sadly wanted to go and join the dancers, though her mistress would
+not allow her to do so; and even Ada herself felt her spirits rise under
+the genial influence of others' happiness.  She forgot that the
+handsome, spirited youths she saw before her were beings brought up to
+become robbers and murderers; and that the lovely maidens she gazed on
+were taught to consider such deeds as justifiable and praiseworthy.  She
+saw in them, for the moment, only the descendants of the ancient Greeks;
+and in form and feature, and even in dress, how slight the change.
+Alas! that their own indolence and effeminacy should have reduced them
+so low that they should become the slaves of despots, and thus have all
+the vices inherent in a state of slavery.  Nina and Ada did not venture
+down into the bay among the crowd, but stood apart on a ledge, raised
+some thirty or forty feet above the sands, at the entrance of the
+ravine, where they could overlook the whole scene.  The old fishermen
+and their wives were seated in groups, either on the rocks under the
+cliffs, or on seats formed of the spars and planks of the boats ranged
+along the sands.  The youths wore their gayest sashes, and their red
+fezzes set jauntily on one side; and the maids their best cymars, with
+their beautiful hair adorned with garlands of wild flowers, in rich
+profusion, streaming down their backs.
+
+Many of the girls were very lovely, with tall, graceful figures, and
+their hair of auburn hue, which is as much prized now as of yore.  The
+music was primitive, consisting of pipes, such as Pan might have played
+on, and stringed instruments like the guitar or violin.  The musicians
+were in appearance like the bards of old, ancient men, with white locks
+and flowing beards; but they appeared, nevertheless, to reap as much
+pleasure from the scene as the rest.
+
+They had just begun to play as Nina and Ada reached the spot, and the
+dancers had formed in line to commence their amusement.  A pretty and
+graceful girl, with a chaplet composed of flowers and shells, the spoils
+of the sea and land, and a garland of the same nature hung like a scarf
+across her shoulders, led off the dance; a handsome youth, with one hand
+holding hers, and the other another girl's, came next, and so a chain
+was formed of alternately a young man and a maiden.  At first the leader
+advanced with a slow and seemingly sedate pace, all following, in a
+measured time, to the musician's solemn strain.  By degrees, as the
+music became more lively and animated, so did the movement of the
+dancers increase in rapidity.  First, the foremost girl led her chain of
+dancers along the smooth sand at a rapid rate; then she suddenly turned,
+and setting to her partner, flew off, and darted under the upraised arms
+of those at the furthest extremity, dragging the rest after her; then
+she twisted among the rocks, on the shore, and when weary of that
+movement, joined her hand to that of the youth at the other end, and
+commenced circling round and round at as rapid a rate as the feet of the
+dancers could more.  When all were panting and dizzy, suddenly she broke
+the circle, and led off again in a line towards the sea, till she
+reached the very brink, where the sparkling wavelets washed the shining
+pebbles and many-tinted shells; and watching till the water receded, she
+darted after it, and flew back before it caught her; though many who
+were in honour bound to follow her, in vain hurried their steps before
+the returning wave overtook them, amid the shouts of laughter of their
+more fortunate companions.  Nothing would, however, induce them to break
+the indissoluble chain.  Then she led them smiling and shaking their
+heads as they went in review before their older friends, who were seated
+as spectators, and the rest expected they were thus to visit all the
+groups; off again she darted to chase the retreating wave, and then once
+more to join hands in the lively wheel, and at last, overcome with their
+exertion, they sank on the sands exhausted, though they quickly again
+sprang up to renew their sport.  Several other similar sets were formed
+at the same time; one of which, composed of the younger people, was led
+by little Mila; nor was it the least lively or joyous of them all.
+
+Ada Garden looked anxiously around to discover whether Fleetwood and his
+companions were there, and she soon perceived him and several other
+persons in the costume of Maltese seamen, mixed among a number of the
+islanders, who considered themselves too old to dance and too young to
+sit quiet as spectators.  Fleetwood descried her; he was afraid almost
+to look towards her, lest any one might suspect him.  Jack Raby was near
+him, and he whispered to him to be prepared, should the people they were
+with move in that direction, to recognise Marianna, and to rush up to
+where she was standing.  Ada watched them as they moved from place to
+place, now talking with some of the old people, now with others, till at
+last they reached a group below her.  The moment was not lost.  Master
+Jack uttered an admirable imitation of a cry of joy, and commenced
+scrambling directly up the cliff, in a way only a midshipman or a monkey
+can scramble, towards Marianna.  She also played her part exceedingly
+well.  She shrieked with joy, and bent over the cliffs, exclaiming in
+Maltese,--
+
+"My dear brother, my dear brother, where have you come from?  Oh, I am
+so delighted to see you!"
+
+Jack answered in return with his choicest gibberish, which did perfectly
+well to express all the sentiments of fraternal affection he was at that
+moment experiencing; indeed, no one could have understood him had he
+spoken Maltese, and few were listening even to what was said, they were
+all too much occupied either with watching the dance, or the approach of
+their chief's mistico, which was now seen just at the opening of the
+mouth of the bay, and adding not a little to the picturesque beauty of
+the scene.  Raby had no little difficulty in getting up the cliff--he
+had chosen so steep a place--and he was very nearly slipping all the way
+down again, just as he had reached the edge of the ledge, but all served
+to show the ardour of his affection.  By a desperate effort he sprang up
+and rushed into Marianna's arms, and she had no reason to complain of
+his neglecting the promise his captain had made for him; and to do
+Marianna full justice, she played the part of an affectionate sister to
+admiration.  No one would have suspected that they were not delighted to
+meet after a long separation, and yet they had never, to their
+knowledge, seen each other till that moment.
+
+"Oh, my sister, I am so delighted to see you," exclaimed Raby.  "And
+now, Miss Garden, pray listen to me," and he gave Marianna another kiss
+and a hug.  "The captain has fixed on a boat to run off with, and we
+shall easily be able to launch her, and will have her ready near those
+rocks to the left there exactly at midnight, when he and I will be
+waiting for you under your tower.  He wants to know if that old rascal
+of a pirate locks you up every night as he did us.  Pretend to be
+speaking to my sister here."
+
+Marianna got another kiss.  Perhaps, in that respect, Master Raby rather
+overdid his part; but he was a young actor, and as his captain had
+ordered him to do so, he was not to blame.
+
+"I fear so," answered Ada.  "Lady Nina will give him the key."
+
+"If not, we must go the whole hog, as the Yankees say, and pick the
+lock, or we shall have to lower you out of the window.  We are not going
+to be stopped by anything.  You must prepare a line of some sort to haul
+up a rope by, which we will bring in case of necessity.  No one will
+suspect us; for we have been working away at the mistico all day, and
+she isn't off yet; in fact, we took care she shouldn't be, for there is
+every prospect of a calm, and a pulling-boat will answer our purpose
+much better.  The pirates, if they trouble their heads about us, think
+we are going to try and get away in the mistico; though my belief is,
+they don't intend to let us; and I should not be at all surprised but
+what they'll go this evening and rip off a few planks, or bore holes in
+her bottom, to prevent our escaping, lest we should betray the position
+of this island.  However, Miss Garden, be of good cheer, whatever our
+skipper--I beg pardon, Captain Fleetwood--undertakes is sure to be right
+in the end."
+
+"Tell your captain, Mr Raby, that I will be prepared," whispered Ada,
+looking away from where he was standing.  "Tell him, that I have no fear
+for myself; but do try and caution him to be careful of himself; and
+allow me also to thank you for your generous zeal in my service, and to
+entreat you to be cautious."
+
+"Oh, as for me, Miss Garden, I like the fun of the business," replied
+the midshipman bluntly.  "I would do anything, too, to serve the
+captain; and as for him, he's never rash, and you must not think that
+he, or any of us, wouldn't gladly risk ten times the danger we now run
+to serve you.  So now I must be off again, to tell my companions that I
+have found my sister.  There, Miss Marianna, I think I've kissed you as
+much as the most affectionate of brothers would be expected to do--I'll
+give you a few more when I come back."
+
+And away sprang the light-hearted youth down the hill, and, getting back
+to his companions, he appeared to be pointing out to them his
+newly-found sister, and to be expressing, with animated gestures, his
+delight at the discovery.
+
+"It's all right, sir," he whispered to his captain; "Miss Garden isn't a
+bit afraid, and will have a line ready to haul up a rope to her window,
+if she cannot get out any other way.  What shall I do now, sir?"
+
+"Go back to your sister and try and learn where the chief pirate has
+been, and gain any other information which may be useful," replied
+Fleetwood.  "Perhaps you will be allowed to remain altogether with her,
+and if you can, do so; for you will be of the greatest service in
+assisting Miss Garden to escape from the tower."
+
+"With all my heart, sir.  Would it be proper to give Miss Smaitch any
+more kisses?  It seems to please her," said the midshipman, with
+apparent innocence, just as he was running off.
+
+"Perfectly unnecessary, I should think," replied Fleetwood, almost
+laughing at the mid's pretended simplicity, which, having held the same
+irresponsible rank himself, he could fully appreciate.  "You may overact
+your part."
+
+"No fear, sir--I'll be decorous in the extreme, and if you don't see me
+again, suppose all goes right; I'll get shut up in Miss Garden's tower,
+if I possibly can."
+
+He did not wait for further directions, but scrambled up the cliff again
+to where Marianna was standing, who, supposing that she was to receive
+him as before, threw her arms round his neck and paid him off in his own
+coin.
+
+Nina, whether she believed in the relationship or not, took good care to
+explain to the bystanders that the Maltese attendant had found a brother
+among the shipwrecked crew of the mistico, and it all seemed so natural,
+that no one doubted the statement.  Even old Vlacco, who was generally
+so wide awake that, in his own opinion, no one could take him in, was
+completely deceived, and threw no difficulties in the way of Jack Raby's
+accompanying Ada to the tower, when Nina requested that the brother and
+sister might not be parted.
+
+As Jack was very small for his age, he looked much younger than he
+really was, and the old pirate, considering him a mere child, thought he
+could do no harm, at all events; and should it be necessary to cut the
+throats of the rest of the party, to ensure their not escaping, it might
+be as well to save him, to make him a servant to the English lady.  This
+circumstance was of great advantage to Ada, as the lively conversation
+of the young midshipman, whose buoyancy of spirit nothing could damp,
+served to divert her mind from dwelling on the dangers of the attempt
+about to be made to rescue her; and she was also able to learn from him
+many of the events with which the reader is acquainted but of which she
+had hitherto, of course, remained in ignorance.
+
+While what we have been describing took place, the _Zoe_ was drawing
+rapidly in with the land.  The breeze was fair to carry her close to the
+harbour's mouth, and then, having sufficient way on her, down came her
+two tapering lateen sails, and she glided up to her well-known
+anchorage.  She was instantly surrounded with boats full of people,
+anxious to know what adventures she had met with during her brief
+cruise, and how she had weathered the storm the previous day.  They soon
+came back, and it was speedily noised abroad that some event of
+importance had occurred, and much bustle and discussion took place in
+consequence.  Two wounded men were conveyed on shore to their own
+cottages, or rather huts, and messengers were forthwith despatched in
+search of Signor Paolo, to bring him to attend on them, for he was
+nowhere to be found among the crowd on the shores of the bay.
+
+Zappa himself was next seen to step into his boat, when the musicians
+began to play their most lively airs, the dancers to dance their best,
+and those who had firearms, to discharge them in his honour; the sharp
+report, for they were all loaded with ball, echoing from cliff to cliff
+around the bay.  He stepped on shore with a brow less calm and a smile
+less sweet than usual, and returned the salutations of his followers in
+a manner less courteous than his wont, as he hurried on towards the
+entrance of the ravine leading up to his abode.  He stopped short on his
+way, for his eye fell on Nina and Ada standing close together, and
+talking like two friends long acquainted.  He was much puzzled.  He had
+only been absent two days, and he was not aware that either of them knew
+of the other's existence; though as it was no longer important,
+according to his present policy, to keep them apart, the meeting did not
+matter; and he little knew how soon similarity of misfortune makes
+brothers and sisters of us all.  He looked up, and made a bow to them as
+he passed; but he paid them no further attention, and taking Vlacco's
+arm, he led him up the ravine.
+
+Poor Nina's heart sank within her.  It was the first time he had treated
+her with cold neglect and indifference.  Ada Garden saw also that
+something was wrong: she had observed the two wounded men landed from
+the mistico, and she remarked the angry brow of the pirate; so she came
+to the conclusion that he had been defeated in some skirmish or other,
+and that, very probably, he was expecting the island to be attacked by
+the Turks, as had been the case with others, when most of the population
+had been put to the sword.  She mentioned her fears to Jack Raby.
+
+"I don't think it's anything very bad, for the young pirates and
+piratesses are still dancing away as merrily as before," he answered.
+"But I'll soon know all about it."
+
+And once more he rejoined his friends, and exchanging a few words with
+them, ran back to Marianna.
+
+"It's a warmer matter than I thought; but still there is nothing to be
+alarmed about, Miss Garden," he said, as soon as he had recovered his
+breath.  "The Greek officer, who is with us, hears from the people that
+their chief had the impudence to go on board an English brig-of-war--
+that he was pursued by her boats, and very nearly captured.  I wish to
+goodness he had been--but nothing more is known on the subject.  There
+is no doubt he has visited the _Ione_, and I only hope he has got no
+inkling of what she is there for, and what we are about.  If he has, you
+see, why that is only a still greater reason for not letting the grass
+grow under our feet."
+
+The news brought by the midshipman of course alarmed Ada very much, as
+she saw all the dreadful consequences which would too probably ensue,
+should Zappa discover who he had in his power.  He had the reputation of
+being treacherous, vindictive, and cruel; and he was not likely to grow
+merciful towards men who had ventured into his island in disguise, for
+the purpose, he would naturally suspect, not only of rescuing her, but
+of observing his means of defence, in order afterwards to attack him.
+
+The evening was drawing to a close--the dancers had grown weary, and the
+elders had begun to retire to their homes; so Ada gladly acceded to
+Nina's wish to turn their steps up the ravine.
+
+They parted at the foot of Nina's tower; and, as Ada bade her new friend
+farewell--as she believed, for the last time--her heart bled for her
+unhappy position and too probable fate.  Ada hurried to her tower,
+followed by Jack Raby and Marianna, fearful of meeting with the pirate,
+lest he should stop to question the young midshipman; but, luckily, he
+did not appear; and as soon as they reached her chamber, they set
+themselves to work to prepare for their flight.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER TWENTY NINE.
+
+Captain Fleetwood and his companions had carefully kept out of the way
+of Zappa when they saw him land, lest, by any unfortunate chance, he
+should recognise them; and, when they heard of the expedition on which
+he had been engaged, they had reason to rejoice that they had taken this
+precaution.  As soon as the islanders had returned to their homes to
+feast and make merry, and to indulge in the juice of the grape--which,
+on such occasions, is the great resource of the men, as it was in the
+days of their ancestors--they set themselves down on the rocks to
+consult as to their future proceedings, taking care that no eavesdropper
+was within hearing to discover that they were not talking Maltese.  They
+were well aware that the risk they ran was much increased by the
+pirate's knowledge that the _Ione_ was in the vicinity--for it was
+natural he should suspect that she was there with some design against
+him, even though he might not have gained any information respecting
+their expedition.  They hesitated, therefore, about returning to the
+castle; and the Greek, Captain Vassilato, gave it as his opinion, that
+it would be more prudent to seek for food in the village, and to pretend
+to be anxious to procure lodgings for the night; that instead, however,
+of entering any house, they should, as soon as the inhabitants were
+retiring to rest, slip out and return to the bay; and that, while they
+were engaged in getting the boat ready, Captain Fleetwood should go up
+to the tower and bring down Miss Garden.
+
+"We could not have selected a better night for our attempt," he
+observed; "for, fortunately for us, the greater portion, if not the
+whole, of the male population will be drunk, and are not likely to
+interfere with us.  Had it not been for this, we might have found much
+difficulty in getting away unperceived out of the bay."
+
+"What is your opinion, Mr Bowse?" said Fleetwood.
+
+"I am inclined to agree with Captain Vassilato," answered Bowse, "who
+seems to know the habits of the people, unless you have any reason to
+offer against it."
+
+"I should prefer facing the lion in his den; or, hearing that there are
+strangers in the island, he may suspect, and send for us, if we avoid
+him.  Besides, I fear we may have difficulty in enabling Miss Garden to
+escape from the tower; and I should wish to visit the mistico to procure
+a rope and block to lower her, if necessary, from the window.  The bay
+is not more than two miles from the tower, and it will excite less
+suspicion if we are seen going there, as if with the intention of
+sleeping on board the mistico; and the old pirate knows, perfectly well,
+that we cannot get her off without his assistance.  I propose that we
+remain on board the mistico till an hour before midnight, and while you
+go on to prepare the boat, I will remain to assist Miss Garden in
+escaping from the tower, and we will then follow directly after you."
+
+"Well, sir, I think your plan is the safest and best, because we shall
+then be independent of everybody," said Bowse.  "It will be somewhat
+more fatiguing, perhaps, for it will give us a long walk over very rough
+ground; but that is not a matter to be thought of with the object we
+have in view.  But, by Heavens, sir! here comes that rascally old
+pirate, and I should not be surprised if his object is to tell us that
+we must all go and be locked up again, as we were yesterday night, and
+then we are regularly done for, I fear."
+
+As Bowse spoke, old Vlacco was seen at the mouth of the ravine, at
+least, as well as they could distinguish in the dark, whence he began
+descending the rocks to the sands.
+
+"I trust that, even if we are locked up, everything is not lost," said
+Fleetwood.  "At all events, he is coming towards us, and it is our best
+policy to exhibit no unwillingness to accompany him if he desires it."
+
+The others agreed that such was certainly their only resource; and
+directly afterwards old Vlacco came up to them.
+
+"I have been directed by our chief to desire the presence of you
+Maltese, forthwith, at the castle.  He wishes to examine you as to
+certain things, about which you can give him information, and if you
+satisfy him, he will probably allow you to depart hence to-morrow.  Tell
+this to your comrades," he said, looking at Captain Vassilato, who
+forthwith translated it into English, carefully making the words sound
+as much like Maltese as possible.
+
+"We will gladly give him any information in our power," returned the
+Greek captain.  "We were contemplating paying our respects to him; and
+if you lead on, we will follow you."
+
+"Humph," muttered Vlacco, as he began to climb the ravine, "the fellow
+gives a ready answer, and I suspect we have got the wrong sow by the
+ear."  Or at least he made use of an equally elegant expression
+answering to the above in the Romaic.
+
+"We must adhere firmly to our story," said Captain Vassilato, as they
+followed the pirate.  "But I wonder whether, among his other
+accomplishments, our friend Zappa understands Maltese; if so, you,
+Pietro, must act as spokesman, and remember, the more dull and stupid
+you appear, the better.  If, however, we find he does not, I must
+continue to play the interpreter.  It will be dangerous, however, to
+speak English in his presence, for depend upon it he knows the sound of
+the language too well to be deceived."
+
+"Your caution is very important," observed Fleetwood.  "Mr Bowse and I
+will keep in the back ground, and be silent; and do you, Pietro, put
+yourself forward, and answer all questions put to us, if he speaks your
+native tongue; but if he talks Greek, Captain Vassilato will do so."
+
+It would be absurd to say that the whole party did not feel the full
+danger of their position; but they were brave men, and had strung up
+their nerves to encounter whatever might happen; the expected interview
+they saw would prove as critical as any part of their adventure, and
+they were accordingly proportionately anxious for the result.  It was,
+fortunately, perfectly dark by the time they reached the summit of the
+cliff, and old Vlacco led them to the building they had inhabited on the
+previous night.
+
+"There, go in, and I will inform our chief that you are come," he said,
+pointing to their room.  "In the mean time, some supper, I suppose,
+won't come amiss; and if he should not wish to see you this evening, the
+eating it will do to pass the time till you go to sleep."
+
+They were agreeably surprised to see little Mila and an old woman, who
+had before attended on them, enter with a supply of provisions, to which
+they did as much justice as they were able, and while they were
+discussing them, Vlacco returned.
+
+"Well, I told our chief that I believed you were as honest as most men,
+and I don't think he'll trouble himself about you till to-morrow," he
+observed, as he sat down at the table, and helped himself to a cup of
+wine.  "Let me tell you, if you were the rogues he first thought you
+might be, he would have sent every one of you flying over the cliffs,
+without the slightest ceremony."
+
+The old pirate seemed in a facetious mood, and laughed, and drank, and
+talked, in a way very different to what appeared to be his usual habit;
+but it struck his guests that it was assumed to throw them off their
+guard, and that he was eyeing them all the time, much in the way that a
+hungry cat does a trapful of mice, which she knows will shortly be
+thrown to her to torment.  After some time, he took his departure, and
+they heard him lock and bolt the doors behind him.  There they were,
+then, once more prisoners, at the very moment it was all important to
+them to be free.
+
+Fleetwood at first was in hopes that the Signora Nina might come to
+liberate them; but he then recollected that, her lord being returned,
+she would scarcely be able to escape from the tower without being
+observed; and felt that they must depend on their own exertions to free
+themselves.  To open the door was out of the question, so they commenced
+operations by examining the window.  A small lamp had been left there,
+which they had not on the previous night, and Pietro observed that Mila
+had placed it on the table, at the moment her grandfather's back had
+been turned to quit the room, and he suspected that she had done so by
+the direction of the Italian lady.
+
+The window was a mere aperture in the highest part of the building; but
+it was secured with strong iron bars, so firmly fixed in the wall, that
+they soon found it would be impossible to remove them without files or
+tools to work with.  They next tried the roof.  On examination, they saw
+that it was very rudely put together, and that a great part of it was
+formed simply of the rough planks torn from the sides of a vessel--
+probably some unfortunate craft cast on their shore, or brought there as
+a prize.  This they judged would be easily removed, if they could raise
+a scaffolding to work from.
+
+"Before we do anything, let us put a screen before the window, lest any
+one from without should observe our proceedings," said Fleetwood, who
+was the chief suggester of what should be done, though his companions
+were not behind-hand in conceiving as well as executing the details of
+their plan.
+
+They waited for upwards of an hour, till they hoped old Vlacco would be
+fast asleep; occupying themselves meantime in cutting up a small wooden
+bench into wedges and levers, to rip open the boards.  They then hung a
+cloak across the window, and placed the table against the wall which
+they calculated formed the outer side of the building.  On it, they
+piled two empty casks, which were ordinarily used as seats, and thus,
+with the remaining bench, they were able, without difficulty, to reach
+the ceiling.  This platform was only sufficiently large to allow two to
+work at a time; so while Captain Fleetwood and Bowse mounted on it, the
+other two held it firm, and handed up the wedges and cross bars they had
+manufactured.  As they were, of course, afraid to make any noise by
+hammering in the wedges, they first worked away with their knives, till
+they had formed grooves to insert the edge of several; they then placed
+the ends of the handspikes against them, and pressing those with all
+their force, they had the satisfaction of seeing that the planking began
+to separate.  They persevered in their efforts, and the planks being
+fortunately old and rotten, and exceedingly dry, from the heat of
+summer, the nails easily drew out, and they were soon able to insert
+their cross bars.  They had begun making the hole in the roof, some
+little way from the wall, and it was fortunate they had done so.  In a
+quarter of an hour they had removed enough of the planking to enable
+Fleetwood to draw himself through, when he found that heavy stones were
+placed on the outer edges to keep them down on the wall, and that they
+had had a narrow escape of their coming tumbling through upon their
+heads; or of having sent them crashing over, with a loud noise, on the
+ground on the outside.  As it was, a quantity of rubbish had fallen
+through, and they found that the whole roof was covered with it, and
+that they had by chances selected the spot where it lay the thinnest.
+
+Bowse followed Captain Fleetwood to the roof, and they then assisted
+their Greek friend and Pietro to ascend, after the latter had
+extinguished the light, replaced the table bench and casks as before,
+and swept the rubbish under the straw.  As he was a light, active man,
+by stretching down their hands as he stood on one of the casks, they
+were able to drag him through on the roof.  They then carefully closed
+down the planking, and swept some rubbish over it, so that it would
+require a little examination, to discover by what means they had made
+their escape.
+
+So far, they were once more in the open air and at liberty to proceed,
+if they could reach the ground.  The night was like the previous one,
+with a clear sky and the stars shining brightly, while the moon had
+become much too small to give more light than just sufficient to enable
+them to find their way.
+
+The hazard now was to descend without making a noise, for the night was
+so serene that the slightest sound would, they feared, be heard; though
+the distance did not appear more than an active man could leap without
+danger.  But the walls were broken and crumbling, and it was difficult
+to find a spot on which they could depend, to take their last hold of
+before dropping off.  After proceeding a few paces to the right,
+however, the wall appeared more even.
+
+"Now, my friends," whispered Fleetwood, "I will lead the way, and try
+the depth--the ground below seems free from stone--and, by grasping the
+ends of your handkerchiefs, I may fall without the fear of breaking my
+legs."
+
+On this, the other three, as proposed, formed a rope with their
+handkerchiefs; and all of them leaning over the wall.
+
+Fleetwood threw himself off; and, grasping the handkerchiefs, lowered
+himself till he reached the end, and then dropped.  The fall was
+considerably greater than he expected--for the ground sloped away on
+that side of the ruin, in a manner on which they had not calculated; and
+he had great reason to congratulate himself on the precaution he had
+taken.  The other two adventurers insisted on Bowse, who was the
+heaviest man of the party, following next.  He could now better judge of
+the depth; and Fleetwood, having rolled away all the loose stones, he
+fell without injury.  The Greek came next, and was caught in the arms of
+his companions; and Pietro, in like manner, dropped down, the rest
+saving him as he fell.  This feat accomplished, they all breathed more
+freely; and crouching down on the ground to avoid being seen, they
+listened attentively to ascertain if any one was moving, before they
+again put themselves in motion.  Not a sound disturbed the silence of
+the night; and, satisfied that they were not discovered, they crept
+cautiously on towards the eastward, under the shadow of the wall, in the
+manner Nina had led Fleetwood on the previous night.  It still wanted an
+hour and a half to the time he had desired Ada to be prepared; and he
+resolved to employ the interval in ascertaining whether the door of her
+tower was locked; and, if he found it so, to proceed to the mistico, and
+procure the cordage which might be required.  Leaving his companions,
+therefore, seated on the ground, in a sheltered rock, he walked to the
+tower alone.
+
+He first looked carefully on every side; and, having ascertained that no
+one was near, he approached the door.  It was locked--as he feared it
+might be--and, after the most minute examination, he could discover no
+means by which he could open it.  He then went under the window, and, in
+vain, tried to attract the attention of the inmates.  They were,
+apparently, too busily employed within.  At last, he threw up some small
+stones, and after numerous efforts, one entered the casement.
+
+"Who's there?" said a voice, which he recognised as Raby's.
+
+"_Ione_" replied the captain, in a loud whisper.
+
+"Is it you, sir?" exclaimed the midshipman, to whom the answer was
+familiar.  "I'll be down at the door directly."
+
+And Fleetwood heard him hurriedly descending the steps.
+
+"You are much sooner than we expected, sir," said the lad through the
+chinks of the door.  "Can you open the door from the outside?"
+
+"No; can you open it from within?" asked Fleetwood on return.
+
+"No, sir," said the midshipman; "I tried for a whole hour to pick the
+lock, but could not do it; so I have fitted a chair, strengthened with
+some ropes which came with Miss Garden's baggage, and there will be no
+more difficulty in getting down from the tower than from the deck of a
+frigate."
+
+"You have done admirably," replied Fleetwood.  "I will not stop to thank
+you,--but tell Miss Garden everything is going on well--and I will
+return in an hour."
+
+The adventurers had some difficulty in picking their way among the rocks
+to the little bay where the mistico lay on the sand; but they succeeded
+in reaching it without encountering any one; and, as they had discovered
+the means of descending to it in the morning by the secret path I
+mentioned, leading through the cavern, they easily got down.  They found
+that the vessel had not been disturbed--indeed, old Vlacco, having
+claimed her for their chief, no one would have ventured to take anything
+from her.  They were thus not only able to procure the rope and blocks,
+but to provide themselves with some arms they had stowed away where they
+had not been discovered; and some provisions which, should they miss the
+_Ione's_ boats, might be very important.  Although, from the peculiar
+rig of the mistico, her halyards were too short to be of any service,
+and her sheets too thick, a coil of small rope was found of sufficient
+length for the purpose; and, loaded with their treasures, they bade
+farewell to the little craft which had served them in such good stead.
+
+"I should like to burn her, to prevent the rascals benefiting by her,"
+said Captain Vassilato, as they walked along the sand to the entrance of
+the cave.  "But, as the so doing would probably betray us to them, we
+must leave her to them as a gift; and may she drown some of them before
+they have done with her."
+
+"I would rather we could catch her again with a few of them in her,"
+observed Bowse.  "I never like to wish an enemy worse luck than a good
+thrashing, if I can meet him in fair fight; but, to be sure, from what
+we hear of these fellows, they don't deserve much mercy from civilised
+men, though we have no reason to complain of the way they have treated
+us."
+
+"Stay till they discover what we are about, and they would cut our
+throats without ceremony," replied Captain Vassilato.  "We shall do
+wisely not to trust them."
+
+Fleetwood walked on ahead without speaking.  His mind was too much
+occupied with the importance of the undertaking, and the risk to her he
+loved, to allow him to enter into conversation; and, indeed, he wished
+his friends would be silent, for, though it was not probable any of the
+islanders were within hearing, it was possible that some one might be
+out, and they might betray themselves.  The same thing struck them at
+last, and they followed in silence.  The most difficult part of the
+journey was where they had to mount the rude steps cut in the cliff, and
+where the slightest slip might have proved fatal.  They, however,
+reached the open door in safety, and then proceeded more briskly on
+their way.  Wherever they could, they kept as much as possible under
+shelter; but they had several open spaces to pass, where they could not
+avoid exposing themselves to view; though, as there were no habitations
+in the neighbourhood, they did not fear any danger from this
+circumstance.
+
+Any one who has been engaged in an undertaking, on which not only their
+own life and safety depends, but also that of others, and among them of
+one dearer than life itself, will understand the feelings which animated
+Fleetwood's bosom, as the most difficult and dangerous part of the work
+was about to be accomplished.  The happiness, the pride, the joy
+unspeakable which would be his, should he succeed in placing her in
+safety, urged him dauntlessly on; at the same time the thought of what
+would be the result of failure made him grave and serious; his own
+speedy death, but that he set at naught; her misery and continued
+captivity, and, perhaps, even a fate too horrible for him to
+contemplate; and he did not forget that he had companions also, who had
+generously risked their lives to assist him, and that they also would be
+involved in his destruction.  Fortunately the difficulties of the road,
+the necessity of looking out for the best path among the rocks, and of
+watching for the approach of any person who might interrupt them,
+prevented him from dwelling so deeply on the subject as to unfit him for
+the work.
+
+His heart beat quick as he approached the tower; and, wringing his
+friends' hands as they hurried on to prepare the boat they had fixed on,
+he remained under Ada's window with the coil of rope, promising to
+follow, as soon as possible, with Miss Garden and her companions.  Jack
+Raby was on the watch, and appeared at the window as he got under it.
+So well had the midshipman arranged everything, that not a word was
+spoken.  He let a line down, which he had made by unstranding a piece of
+rope, and twisting up some bits of the carpet; and, though composed of
+so many materials, it was sufficiently strong for the purpose; and with
+it he hauled up the end of the rope and the block through which it was
+to run.  The block he at once, with a sailor's quickness, securely
+fastened on to the iron bar; and, reeving the rope through it, he
+fastened one end to the chair he had arranged, and then, putting the
+chair out of the window, he jumped into it, holding on by the other part
+of the rope, and lowered himself down to Fleetwood's feet.
+
+"All right, sir," he whispered.  "I thought it better to try the length
+of the rope and the strength of my chair, before we trusted Miss Garden
+in it.  She is in capital heart, sir, and so is my new sister.  Now,
+sir, if you will stand by the end, I'll go up again to help her into the
+chair, and bear it off the wall.  I can't ask you to haul me up, sir."
+
+"No, no, jump in, my lad, and be careful, in Heaven's name, that you
+secure Miss Garden properly," said Fleetwood, pressing his hand; and he
+quickly hauled him up again to the window, and the chair once more
+appeared, with Ada seated in it, a shawl thrown round her, in true
+man-of-war fashion.  Raby had taken care to have everything properly
+prepared.
+
+"Now, sir, lower away gently, if you please," he whispered, as he leaned
+out of the window; and Ada Garden safely descended into Fleetwood's
+arms.  A silent embrace was all he would allow himself, before he hauled
+up the chair to lower down Marianna, who accomplished the transit with
+the same speed as her mistress.  Jack Raby did not immediately descend,
+but, hauling up the rope, he cast off the block, and then passed the
+rope over the bar, and descended by it.
+
+"I won't delay you a moment, Captain Fleetwood," he said.  "But I am
+determined the pirates shall not find out how we escaped, and, as there
+is a cliff close here, which overhangs the sea, I will, with your leave,
+heave the chair, and rope, and block, over it, and they will never
+discover them there; or if they do, they will think that we got over the
+cliffs."
+
+As Fleetwood considered the delay would not be of consequence, and that
+no harm could arise from allowing the midshipman to have his way, he
+gave him leave to do as he proposed, and in two minutes he returned,
+having accomplished his object.
+
+"There, sir," he said, laughing quietly.  "If the pirates miss one of
+the chairs, they may look for it long enough before they find it or the
+rope, and in the mean time they will fancy English young ladies can jump
+forty feet to the ground without hurting themselves.  When they try to
+open the door, too, they'll think we are inside, for I barricadoed it
+with everything I could find, and there'll be a pretty smash when they
+shove it open."
+
+"You have done admirably, and now take Marianna's arm, and follow me,"
+said Fleetwood, leading the way with Ada.
+
+When Ada Garden found herself once more by Fleetwood's side, she
+returned her grateful thanks to Heaven for having thus restored her to
+liberty; for so strong was her confidence in her lover's courage and
+judgment, that she felt as if all difficulty and danger were over, and
+that success must await them.
+
+Fleetwood also uttered a silent thanksgiving to Heaven, and a prayer for
+protection during the still greater danger he knew they must encounter
+in their endeavour to get out of the harbour; but, of course, he did not
+tell her this.  Neither spoke; they both were confident of the
+sentiments of each other's heart, and Ada felt it would be useless at
+that moment to express her gratitude, when she hoped to prove it during
+the remainder of her life; and he in like manner knew that there would
+be no necessity to tell her of his love and joy at finding her, when his
+acts were giving her such convincing evidence of it.  They walked on
+under the shadow of the wall, as noiselessly and rapidly as they could
+move, towards the commencement of the steep path leading down the
+ravine.  In doing so they had to pass close to Nina's tower.  Fleetwood
+looked up; no light was seen streaming from the casement, nor was any
+one heard stirring within.
+
+On they went, and, Fleetwood tenderly supporting Ada, they commenced
+descending the path.  They had got about a quarter of the way down, when
+Fleetwood fancied he heard the sound of a distant footfall.  Could it be
+the echo of their own feet? he thought, then made a sign to Raby to stop
+while they listened.  There could be no mistake about it.  Footsteps
+were rapidly approaching, and, on looking back, they saw, to their
+dismay, a dark figure on the cliff above them.  Fleetwood drew back
+under the shadow of an overhanging rock, and he could feel Ada, who had
+also seen the figure, as she clung closer to his arm, tremble with
+alarm, which she in vain endeavoured to overcome.  Marianna uttered a
+faint shriek, and was going to repeat it, when Jack Raby gave her a
+pinch, which effectually recalled her to her senses, and, in a whisper,
+he threatened to give her another if she made the slightest noise.  A
+minute or two of the most intense anxiety passed away, which, under the
+circumstances, appeared nearly an hour, and no one appeared.
+
+"If we emerge from where we are, we cannot escape being seen, should the
+person remain where he was," replied Fleetwood.  "It will be better to
+confront him boldly, and learn his intention in following us, than to
+allow him to go back and to give information of our attempt.  I will
+leave you, Ada, in charge of Mr Raby, and will return instantly."
+
+"Oh, do not quit me!" exclaimed Ada.  "I will go with you--indeed, I am
+not alarmed for myself; but I know not what may happen to you.  They may
+kill you, Fleetwood--oh, do not go."
+
+"It is absolutely necessary that something should be done, dearest, and
+there is no greater danger to be feared in going than remaining,"
+answered Fleetwood.  "Ada, I must force myself from you--it must be
+done."
+
+"You are right, Charles, I was weak.  Go, and I will remain as you
+wish," she whispered, relinquishing his arm, and he sprang up the path.
+
+Jack did his best to comfort Ada, by assuring her that his captain could
+easily manage to thrash a dozen Greeks, and that he was not likely to
+suffer any harm from a single pirate, at all events.  Every moment Ada
+expected to hear the noise of a struggle, a pistol-shot, or the clash of
+swords.  She listened with breathless eagerness, trembling in every
+limb, and she would have followed her lover, had she not known that her
+so doing would be against his wish, and could be of no advantage to him,
+but might cause great harm.  It appeared to her an age since he left
+her, and her anxiety became almost too great to be borne.
+
+"Oh, Mr Raby, cannot you go up and see what has become of Captain
+Fleetwood?  Some accident has happened to him, I am certain," she
+whispered to the midshipman.
+
+"I must obey orders, Miss Garden, and wait for the captain's return,"
+was the answer, in the same low tone.  "You need not be alarmed, I can
+assure you--he has not been gone two minutes."
+
+He had scarcely spoken when Ada's quick ear caught the sound of
+footsteps, and she could scarcely restrain her cry of joy, as she sprang
+forward to meet him.  He placed his arm tenderly round her to support
+her, as he led her on.
+
+"It is very extraordinary," he said; "I could find no one, though I
+searched the very spot where I had seen him standing.  But, come on,
+dearest, we have time to reach the boat, and to get outside the harbour
+before the spy, if such he was, can send people to pursue us."
+
+"I am able to walk much faster," said Ada, hastening her steps, "I dread
+any delay in this dreadful place."
+
+They had not, however, proceeded many paces, when, on turning one of the
+many angles of the winding path, a person, the same, they fancied, whom
+they had before seen, appeared suddenly before them, and laid a hand on
+Fleetwood's arm.
+
+"Stay, signor," he said in a low, deep voice, speaking in the Italian
+language.  "You are already suspected by one who knows not mercy, and if
+he were to discover your wild attempt to carry off that lady, your death
+would be the consequence.  Return and abandon it; for ere you can get
+beyond the sound of the waves, as they dash on the cliffs below, you
+will be pursued and overtaken."
+
+"I know not who you are, signor," said Fleetwood; "but, as I believe
+your warning is given in kindness, I thank you.  To follow your advice
+is impossible, and I must beg you, as a favour, not to detain us--I need
+not ask you, I trust, not to betray us."
+
+"I feel sure that Signor Montifalcone will not do so," exclaimed Ada,
+recognising at once the voice of the young Italian.  "He will rather
+exert himself to assist us--I am not mistaken in his generosity."
+
+Paolo was silent a minute, when, releasing his grasp of Fleetwood's arm,
+he sighed as if his heart would break, and took Ada's hand.  "Lady," he
+said, in a tone of deep melancholy, "you sign my death-warrant; but it
+shall not prevent me from obeying your wishes.  I will accompany you to
+your boat, if you have one prepared, and, when you have gone, I will
+endeavour to deceive those who attempt to follow you.  Further, I know
+not how to aid you."
+
+"We are grateful to you for your promised aid," said Fleetwood; "and
+now, lead on, we can ill afford further delay."
+
+"It is for the lady's sake I act," muttered Paolo, beginning to move
+onward down the path.
+
+Ada overheard him.  "It is because you are generous, and would preserve
+the lives of others, even though you risk your own," she said, in a low
+tone, touching his arm.  "But if there is danger in remaining here, come
+with us.  You can be conveyed in safety to your native country, and can
+ascertain if your father yet lives."
+
+"What! and leave my unhappy sister to her fate?" said the young man,
+turning round his countenance towards her, which, even with the faint
+light afforded by the moon, she observed wore an expression of the
+deepest grief.  "I have but one object to live for,--for her sake alone
+I consent to endure existence.  Do not ask me to quit her."
+
+"Oh that she would have come too," said Ada.  "She might yet be saved."
+
+"She would not accompany you, lady," answered Paolo.  "Pirate though he
+is, Zappa is still her husband, and no power would now make her quit
+him.  But I delay you, and increase the risk of discovery, already
+sufficiently great, by speaking.  I will say no more, but that I pray,
+when in safety in your native land, you will not forget the unhappy
+exile whom once you knew, and who would gladly have died to serve you."
+
+He spoke as they walked on, and a few minutes more brought them to the
+mouth of the ravine, whence a full view of the moonlit bay lay before
+them.
+
+The _Sea Hawk_ and two misticos were at their anchors.  No light
+appeared on board either of them, nor was there any one moving, that
+Fleetwood could discover, on their decks; nor was the slightest noise
+heard, except the low, gentle ripple of the untiring water on the sands;
+yet so smooth and glass-like was the sea, that every star in the heavens
+seemed reflected on its surface.  He could distinguish, also, the dark
+boats drawn up on the beach; but he looked in vain for the one his
+friends were to secure, in which to make their escape.
+
+"They have, with due caution, carefully concealed her," he said to
+himself.  "When we get more to the left, we shall doubtlessly see her."
+
+On descending to the sands, they turned, therefore, sharp round to the
+left under the cliffs, which, it must be remembered, was the direction
+of the spot agreed on where the boat was to be in readiness.  At length
+they reached the black rock, alongside of which Fleetwood expected to
+find her, and, to his great satisfaction, he saw that she was there; and
+his friends directly after rose from her bottom, where they had
+concealed themselves while waiting for his coming.
+
+"We were alarmed for your safety, Captain Fleetwood," said Bowse,
+leaping out to meet them.  "We waited so long for you; but everything is
+in readiness.  If you will assist Miss Garden on board, I will take care
+of Marianna.  But who is this stranger with you?"
+
+"One to whom I owe much," said Ada, stretching out her hand.  "Farewell,
+Signor Montifalcone, may Heaven reward you for what you have done for
+me."
+
+"Farewell, lady, and may you never know the grief I am doomed to bear,"
+returned the Italian; and before Fleetwood, who would have thanked him,
+could speak, he had retired to a distance; and as they quickly embarked,
+and urged the boat from the shore, they could see him standing watching
+them, still as a marble statue.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY.
+
+"Thank Heaven, you are so far safe, dearest," said Fleetwood, as he
+placed Ada in the stern sheets of the boat, by the side of Jack Raby,
+who, it was arranged, should steer, while he took the stroke oar, his
+companions pulling the others.
+
+With heartfelt gratitude did Ada thank Heaven, for having thus far
+conducted them in safety through the perils which surrounded them, and
+implored protection for herself, and for the gallant men, her
+deliverers, through those they had still to encounter.
+
+They had well employed the time spent in waiting, by carefully muffling
+the oars, so that they should make no noise as they worked in the
+rullocks, and it was now only necessary to take care to let the blades
+fall into the water, and to draw them out again with as little splash as
+possible.
+
+Marianna sat opposite to her mistress; and if not the most delighted of
+the party at the success which had hitherto attended them, she, at all
+events, gave more vehement expression to her feelings; and Raby had to
+apply his former remedy to keep her quiet.
+
+At a sign from Fleetwood, the boat was sent gliding off from the rock;
+but instead of at once steering out into the bay, she was kept close in
+shore, under the shadow of the cliffs: the blades of the oars just
+clearing the sand as they went along.
+
+The boat was a very rough specimen of naval architecture, and wore they
+to have depended on her speed, the chance of escape would have been
+small indeed.  She was built to pull six oars, with a high bow and
+stern, and though well suited to serve as a fishing-boat, or to live in
+the short seas of the Archipelago, was not intended to be used when
+rapid progress was important.  The adventurers had, indeed, selected
+her, not on account of the qualities she possessed adapted for their
+purpose, but because she happened to be moored close into the shore,
+near the east side of the bay, and, what was very important, had her
+oars left on board her.  Pietro, who was a good swimmer, had, it
+appeared, gone off with his knife in his mouth, and cutting her cable,
+towed her close enough in for the other two to step into her.  They had
+then brought her round, with the same cautious silence, to where
+Fleetwood had found her.
+
+The hearts of all beat quick with hope, not unmixed, however, with
+apprehension, as the boat glided along the shore close to the cliffs.
+
+Fleetwood's glance was roving watchfully round, to notice the first sign
+of their being discovered, and of any preparations made for their
+pursuit.  The figure of the unhappy Paolo Montifalcone was the only one
+discernible, as he stood at the end of the rock, to catch a last glimpse
+of the faint outline of her on whom he had so devotedly set the
+affection of his ardent nature, without a prospect of return, and his
+figure soon faded away in the obscurity.
+
+From the shore, the adventurers had now, they thought, less cause to
+fear; but they looked with suspicious eyes towards the brig, and the two
+misticos, on the decks of which, at least, one person ought to have been
+on the watch; but neither of them gave any signs of having life on
+board.
+
+"If we had suspected the sort of watch there rascals keep, we should
+have had little difficulty in taking them by surprise," thought
+Fleetwood.  "We may profit by our knowledge on another occasion, but I
+am afraid they will not _forget_ the lesson I hope we shall give them,
+to be more vigilant in future."
+
+Of course, it is difficult to describe the sensations which alternately
+filled Ada's bosom, as the boat progressed round the harbour; hope, joy,
+gratitude, love, and fear, all were there; and those who would
+understand what they were, must either have been placed in a similar
+position, or must endeavour to fancy themselves so placed.  At length
+the eastern point of the harbour was passed, and with the towering
+cliffs of the entrance rising above them on either side, the clear
+boundless sea appeared ahead.  Jack Raby, with the natural impulse of
+his age, forgetting his own lessons to Marianna, was very nearly giving
+way to a shout of joy as he found the boat floating freely on the ocean
+he had learned to love and to confide in; but he recollected himself in
+time, and merely uttered a whispered "hurra," which could not have been
+heard above the splash of the water on the rocks close above them.
+
+"Port your helm, Raby, and let us shut out the bay as fast as we can,"
+whispered his captain.  "We shall still keep under the shadow of the
+cliffs for a short distance, to avoid the risk of being seen from the
+eastern towers.  That will do, steady.
+
+"Keep up your courage, my sweet Ada, for a few minutes more," he said,
+turning his eyes to her countenance, from which, indeed, his glance had
+never been absent longer than was necessary to watch for their safety.
+"We may now congratulate ourselves on having every chance of escape.  In
+less than half an hour we shall fall in with the _Ione's_ boats, and
+then we may defy the whole nest of pirates to stop us."
+
+"I shall have no further fear when we have lost sight of that dreadful
+vessel, which looks even now like some slumbering monster about to awake
+and rush after us," she answered, pointing to the _Sea Hawk_, which lay
+still open inside the harbour's mouth.
+
+She had scarcely uttered these words when a loud shout was heard, which
+seemed to proceed from some one on board her, and a musket was
+discharged at them.  The shouting was repeated, and words were clearly
+distinguished.
+
+"We are discovered," exclaimed the Greek captain.  "Pull, pull, as hard
+as we can, the watch on deck is calling on us to come into the harbour.
+He has evidently just woke up, and is yet uncertain what we are, though
+he suspects us.  He threatens to fire the guns at us if we do not obey
+him, and that will have the effect, though we escape the shot, of waking
+up the rascals in all quarters, and we shall have a whole fleet of boats
+after us: stay, I will hail in return, and pretend we are fishermen."
+
+On this he stood boldly up in the boat, and cried out in Romaic, at the
+top of his voice--
+
+"What fool is that on board the _Sea Hawk_, who has been sleeping on his
+watch these four hours past, and now makes so much noise, because others
+more industrious get up early in the morning to follow their avocations?
+We should have little fish to eat if we were to trust to you for the
+supply."
+
+"Who is it?" exclaimed the same voice.  "Is it you, Balbo?"
+
+"Yes, yes," answered Captain Vassilato; "I should have thought you would
+have known my voice."
+
+"Who is it?" hailed another person, apparently on shore.
+
+"Gerasimo Listi," answered the watch on the _Sea Hawk's_ deck.
+
+"No, no, the old fellow lies drunk at home!" exclaimed the second
+speaker.  "Treachery, treachery.  They are the spies endeavouring to
+escape."
+
+"It is hopeless to deceive them," said Captain Vassilato, when he heard
+these words, which he translated to his companions as he resumed his
+seat and oar.  "We must pull for our lives; we have a good start, and it
+may be some time before any boats' crews can be collected to pursue us."
+
+It is needless to say with what energy all hands bent to their oars--
+concealment was of no further use, and they were able to put their whole
+strength into their strokes.  There was no time to be lost.  The brig
+was swinging with her broadside across the mouth of the harbour, and as
+soon as those on her deck could procure matches, they rushed to the
+guns, and discharged them in quick succession; and Ada could scarcely
+restrain a shriek of terror as she saw their bright flashes lighting up
+the mouth of the harbour--the sides and rigging of the vessel now
+crowded with people--and heard their loud report echoing among the
+cliffs, as also the rushing noise of the shot as they came flying by--
+some over their heads, some close astern, and others ahead of them; for
+though the pirates' aim was very uncertain, yet, as from the narrow
+entrance of the bay, the only shot which could reach them must come
+between the cliffs, they could not go far distant from them.  One or
+two, apparently, from the peculiar noise they made, hit the cliffs, and
+rebounded back into the bay.  Marianna, whose fears had completely
+overcome her, crouched down at the bottom of the boat, where she thought
+she should be more secure; and Fleetwood entreated Ada in that respect
+to follow her example, desiring Jack Raby to place her as low down as
+possible, where a shot was less likely to strike the boat.  Though she
+was unwilling to be more sheltered from danger than he was, yet she saw
+that her so doing would relieve him from some of his fear for her
+safety, and she complied with his wishes; reclining on some jackets and
+cloaks which Jack Raby spread out for her, she saw no more of what took
+place, though the noise of the firing soon ceasing told her that they
+had shut in the brig by the western cliffs.
+
+"Remain where you are, dearest," said Fleetwood, as she was about to
+rise.  "We may still have some shot sent after us, when the boats, which
+will probably pursue us, get outside; and though, with the start we
+have, they are not likely to take good aim, a fatal one may come on
+board; and think, Ada, of how little use would be the risk we have run,
+if you were to be the victim.  But do not be alarmed; no enemy has yet
+approached."
+
+I do not know if I have explained clearly the position of the boat: she
+was at this time about an eighth of a mile from the lofty cliffs which
+formed the western side of the bay, with her head to the west, going at
+the rate of between four and five knots an hour, which was the utmost
+speed with which, with all their exertions, they could urge her through
+the water.  The cleft in the rock, as now the entrance of the harbour
+appeared to be, was seen over their starboard quarter, and in that
+direction their eyes were anxiously turned for the appearance of the
+boats they fully expected would follow them.  A new danger also appeared
+from a quarter they had not expected, for along the summit of the
+cliffs, as seen against the bright blue sky, they could discern some
+figures running at full speed, and they were not left long in doubt as
+to their intentions.  The persons halted, and the bright barrels of
+their guns gleamed in the moonlight, as they brought them to their
+shoulders and fired.  Several balls flew by them, and one struck the
+gunnel of the boat, though, fortunately, no other damage was done.  The
+pirates kept shouting out their threats of vengeance, and firing away,
+apparently to intimidate the fugitives, little understanding the
+character of the people with whom they had to deal.
+
+Here, of course, Ada was exposed to as much danger as the rest; and
+though Fleetwood would have joyfully interposed his own person to
+preserve her, it was impossible for him to do so, and all he could do
+was to entreat her to remain down as much as possible under the seat,
+and to redouble his efforts at the oar.
+
+"We shall soon be beyond the range of those fellows' guns!" he
+exclaimed.  "But ah, there's a boat's bow creeping out from between the
+rocks.  We've a good start of her, however.  Give way, gentlemen.  We'll
+lead her a long chase, and find her a warm reception at the end of it, I
+hope."
+
+"She's not alone, though!" exclaimed Bowse, whose eyesight was
+remarkably keen.  "There's another close astern of her, and, by heaven,
+there's another just rounding the point.  We shall have enough of them
+to look after us, at all events."
+
+"It matters little how many, provided we keep ahead of the leading one,"
+said Captain Fleetwood, in a cheerful tone, not as much for the object
+of encouraging his rude companions, as for the sake of keeping up Ada's
+spirits.  "I don't think any of them are likely to pull much faster than
+we do."
+
+These remarks were made slowly and at intervals, and perhaps even fewer
+words were really used, as any one who has pulled a heavy oar, for life
+and death, will know the utter impossibility of carrying on an unbroken
+conversation, as I have written it down.
+
+They had by this time nearly doubled the distance they were from the
+shore when the first boat was seen, and had thus gained the best part of
+half a mile from the harbour's mouth.  The nearest of the pirate's boats
+was rather more than a quarter of a mile off, which in a stern chase,
+with slow-pulling boats, was a considerable distance.
+
+The other boats they would not have seen at that distance, had not, as
+they pulled out, a gleam of moonshine fallen on their bows, and tinged
+their foaming wake with a line of gold, as they rounded the point before
+they could stand to the westward in pursuit.  The night remained as calm
+and beautiful as at first, and the moon, though still young, afforded
+sufficient light to enable the pursuers and pursued to distinguish each
+other, as they urged their boats through the water.
+
+Fleetwood's arrangements had been as follows: Provided the weather was
+sufficiently moderate, in Mr Saltwell's opinion, with whom all
+authority rested, to permit him to venture to sea, with safety, in an
+open boat, he was to get under-weigh, in the _Ione_ every evening; to
+stand in till within sight of the island, and to send the boats on with
+all hands, well armed, to within about two miles of the island, due west
+of the harbour, or much nearer if the night should prove dark; but they
+were especially to avoid any risk of being seen from the island.  As
+morning dawned they were to retire gradually, keeping a bright look-out
+for him, and they were then to return on board, and the _Ione_ was to
+stand back to her anchorage.
+
+As the night was decidedly bright, Fleetwood did not expect to find the
+boats nearer than within the distance he had fixed on, and they had then
+a mile and a half at least to sail before they could come up with them;
+but he hoped that the firing would have attracted their attention, and
+that, suspecting its true cause, they would have pulled closer in.  Raby
+stood up as he steered, to peer into the darkness, but no sign could be
+seen of the wished-for boats.
+
+"May I hail, sir?" he asked.  "The pirates will only think that we are
+laughing at them, and perhaps some of those with Mr Linton may know my
+voice."
+
+"Yes, hail if you like; but we are still too far off for them to hear
+you," said Fleetwood.
+
+On this, Jack Raby, putting his hand to his mouth, gave a long shrill
+cry, which might have been heard a mile off; and it must have made the
+pirates think that one of them was wounded; but no answering hail was
+given.
+
+The pirates' boats, though so suddenly manned, were pulled well, and
+were decidedly overhauling the fugitives.  Fleetwood remarked it, but he
+said nothing.  He still hoped that as the distance was short between
+them, and when they might not only obtain assistance, but retaliate on
+the enemy, they might gain it before they were overtaken.
+
+"It's surprising that the pirates in the boats don't fire on us,"
+observed Bowse.  "They must see us clearly enough to take good aim at
+this distance.  I suspect they have no fire-arms with them."
+
+"Depend on it, they are not without them," replied Captain Vassilato.
+"His rifle was the first thing every man snatched up, as he left his hut
+and sprang on deck to jump into his boat.  No, no, they make sure of
+coming up to us, and anticipate too much satisfaction in cutting our
+throats, to throw away a shot on us."
+
+"They would be less chary of their powder if they knew how short a
+distance our friends are from us," said Fleetwood.
+
+It occurred to him, also, that probably Zappa himself was on board one
+of the boats, and that he would not fire for fear of injuring Ada; for,
+judging from his own feelings, he had from the first, thought, and
+justly too, that the pirate was influenced to carry her off, more by his
+admiration of her than for the sake of her ransom, and this caused him
+still more anguish, when he saw the probability of her again falling
+into his power.
+
+"I think there is a slight air springing up from the eastward, sir,"
+said Jack Raby, as he sat down again to steer.  "I wish we had a sail to
+drive her on faster."
+
+"I fear, indeed, that there is a breeze getting up," said Fleetwood, in
+a tone which ill concealed the apprehensions he felt.  "The other boats,
+however, may not have sails.  They must all have come off in a great
+hurry."
+
+"I see something which has a sail, though," exclaimed Bowse.  "The
+rascals have towed out one of their cursed misticos, and we shall have
+her after us presently.  I see her white canvas, even now, gleaming in
+the moon-light.  She does not feel the breeze yet, for there is a little
+northerly in it, and the cliffs becalm her."
+
+"I fear you are right, Bowse," said Fleetwood.  "I have just now, also,
+caught a glimpse of her; but the breeze is still very light, and will
+not send her faster through the water than the boats can pull, so we
+need not fear her, I hope.  It convinces me, also, that the boats have
+no sails; but that they believe we have, and might, if the wind
+increases, get away from them.  Courage, my friends, we must not
+despair."
+
+"We may give them a tough job to take us, sir, even if they come up with
+us," exclaimed the young midshipman, glancing over the boats, which were
+clearly overhauling them.  "There are five of us,"--he reckoned himself
+a man in strength, as he was in courage--"and, with arms in our hands,
+we may thrash a few dozen rascally pirates, any day.  But it may be as
+well to sing out again, and let our friends know our whereabouts."
+
+He jumped up as he said this, and shouted at the top of his voice; but
+no hail was heard in return; and it now became too probable that, owing
+to the calm which had prevailed all day, the _Ione_ had been delayed,
+and that her boats had not reached their station; for, otherwise, as
+Fleetwood suggested, they would most certainly have pulled towards them
+directly they heard the guns of the _Sea Hawk_.  Again and again Jack
+Raby hailed, with the same result; and it now became very certain that
+they must not depend on the speedy assistance of their friends.  To say
+that Fleetwood's heart sank within him, as this circumstance became
+evident, would be wrong; at the same time that he saw clearly the very
+great danger to which he and those with him were exposed.
+
+"That they have refrained from firing shows that they will not injure
+Ada; and when she tells the pirate that a large ransom is ready to be
+paid for her, he will send her, unharmed, on board the _Ione_; and, for
+ourselves, we must sell our lives dearly, as brave men should do."
+
+He thought this, as he saw the leading Greek boat rapidly gaining on
+them, and now little more than two-thirds the distance she had been
+before; while they had pulled rather more than a mile from the shore,
+which now rose dim and frowning astern of them.  At the same rate they
+might thus pull two additional miles before they were overtaken; but
+then it was utterly impossible that their strength would enable them to
+continue urging the boat through the water at the same speed they had
+hitherto been doing.  Could they indeed do so, it would be, they soon
+saw, to little purpose, for every instant the breeze increased, and the
+mistico was already up to the sternmost boats.  They now saw that she
+had her sweeps out, as well as her canvas set--which, of course, still
+further lessened their chances of escape.
+
+"I fear the knaves will have the best of it, sir," exclaimed Bowse,
+incautiously, forgetting the effect his observation might have upon Ada.
+"But, never fear, sir, we'll fight it out as long as we've hands to
+move.  I'm sure Captain Vassilato and Mr Raby will, and I'll answer for
+Pietro and myself."
+
+"Thanks--thanks--my friends; I fear it must come to that," said
+Fleetwood.  "Raby, have you got the muskets ready?  We will give them a
+few shot, to show that we do not intend to yield, and at the same time
+the report may be heard by our friends."
+
+"Yes, sir; there are three muskets here," replied the midshipman.  "I
+suppose they are loaded."
+
+"Oh, never fear; Captain Vassilato and I examined them after we got down
+to the boat, and we loaded them on board the mistico," said Bowse.
+"Take a steady aim when you fire, sir.  If you can but hit one or two of
+the men at the oars, it will throw them into great confusion."
+
+"Shall I fire, sir?" asked Jack of his captain.
+
+"No, wait till they get nearer; we must not throw a shot away," was the
+answer.
+
+Ada had heard, with the most intense anxiety, all the observations which
+had been made, and she could resist speaking no longer, which she did,
+in a voice weak and trembling with agitation and alarm.
+
+"Oh, Fleetwood, I implore you, do not, for my sake, resist," she said.
+"The pirates must inevitably overpower us, from what I hear; and you can
+do no good by fighting, but will certainly sacrifice your own life and
+that of your friends.  Yield, without striking a blow, and they will not
+injure you; and you will surely find another opportunity to escape,
+while I must bear my lot as I best can.  For myself I have no fears."
+
+"Ada, it is not death I fear; but the thought of losing you almost
+unmans me," exclaimed Fleetwood.  "And even if I felt, which I do not,
+that my life would be safe, were I again in the pirate's power, I could
+not yield without fighting, nor would those with me, I am sure.  I know
+all you feel, my beloved Ada; but were we this moment to cease pulling,
+and to allow the pirates to come alongside, it would but hasten our
+fate."
+
+Ada saw that further remonstrance would be useless, and relying, as she
+justly did, on Captain Fleetwood's discretion and judgment, and feeling
+he was acting for the best, she said nothing, but waited in silence and
+dread the coming contest.  Poor little Marianna, though her fate was
+less cruel than that of her mistress, as a short captivity was all she
+had to fear, was not the less alarmed, and lay at the bottom of the
+boat, giving way to her fears in floods of tears without attempting to
+rise.
+
+The first boat approached within three cables' length of that of the
+fugitives.
+
+"Now, Raby, fire, and aim steadily," exclaimed Fleetwood.
+
+The midshipman, leaving the helm for an instant, took one of the
+muskets: and resting it on the stern of the boat, fired.  A loud cry
+succeeded the report, and the boat's progress was evidently stopped.
+
+"You have hit one of them," said Fleetwood.  "Now, load your piece and
+fire again.  If you can hit another, it will throw them into further
+confusion."
+
+Jack Raby eagerly did as he was desired, and taking his aim in the most
+deliberate manner, another pirate was either killed or wounded.  The
+effect was to make her drop so much astern that the second boat took the
+lead of her.
+
+Jack again loaded his piece.  He looked up at the star of which he had
+been steering, just touching the tiller with his arm, to bring the boat,
+which had gone off half a point, back to her proper course; and then
+turning round, and half kneeling on the seat, he fired with the same
+deliberate coolness as before.  The bullet struck the boat, but no one
+appeared to be wounded, for on she came faster than ever.  He loaded and
+fired again, with the same want of effect; a third shot, however, told
+on the body of one of the pirates, in the after part of the boat, but
+his place was instantly taken by another; though the delay allowed the
+boat which had so long led to come almost abreast of her; and they now,
+to Fleetwood's grief, came up together, one pulling for each quarter.
+
+"Load once more, Raby, and pass two of the muskets forward," he
+exclaimed.  "As they hook on, we will all fire together, two on each
+side; then, with our pistols, shoot those who are attempting to grapple
+the boat, and trust to our cutlasses for the rest.  The moment we can
+free ourselves we will again take to our oars; and I hope we may give
+them such a taste of our quality, that the rest may not wish to molest
+us."
+
+"We'll do our best," was the unanimous cry, for all saw that Fleetwood's
+proposal, however desperate, was the only one to afford them the chance
+of escape.  It would have been as great folly to have trusted to the
+mercy of pirates, such as they were, as it is to confide in the honour
+or fair dealing of grasping, money-loving rogues on shore, more
+especially of those who fancy that they have the protection of the laws
+to shelter them, while they carry out their nefarious projects.  The two
+leading boats were close to them, while the others were some way astern,
+with the mistico, which was bringing up the breeze, nearly abreast of
+the latter.
+
+"Now," exclaimed Fleetwood, throwing in his oar, and seizing a musket,
+as the bows of the two boats came up with their counter, "fire."
+
+The order was obeyed, and a man in each boat was seen to fall, but it
+did not check them, and they dashed alongside.  The gallant adventurers
+drew their pistols, and fired them with equally good aim, for two more
+of their opponents fell wounded; and then grasping their cutlasses used
+them with such effect, that for some minutes their assailants were kept
+at bay, without either of themselves receiving a wound.  Suddenly, in
+the midst of the clashing of swords and the cries of the combatants,
+Jack Raby jumped up on the seat at the risk of being cut down by the
+enemy; and, while he was still using his sword with one liana, he put
+the other to his mouth, and shouted out at the top of His voice--
+
+"_Ione_--ahoy--ahoy!  I thought so, I thought so," he exclaimed, as a
+faint hail came across the waters.  "I thought I heard their hail before
+we fired."
+
+On hearing this, Fleetwood and the rest simultaneously joined in the cry
+of--
+
+"_Ione_--ahoy--ahoy!"
+
+If, however, it had the effect of letting their friends know where they
+were, it also made the pirates see the necessity of finishing the affair
+without delay, if they would secure their prize.  A tall figure had been
+seen standing in the after part of one of the boats.  He now sprang
+forward, and crossed his blade with Fleetwood, who at once recognised
+him as Zappa.  Both were good swordsmen, but the pirate had greater size
+and strength, and his arm was, besides, untired, while Fleetwood could
+scarcely wield his weapon.  Zappa shouted to his men.
+
+"Beware!" cried the Greek captain, who knew what was said.
+
+The pirates from both boats made a simultaneous rush; a third came up at
+the same time.  A blow, he could not parry, struck Fleetwood down,
+senseless, into the bottom of the boat; and at the same moment his
+companions fell desperately wounded, except Jack Raby, who found his
+sword whirled into the sea, and himself lifted, by main force, into one
+of the boats, with Pietro in his company.  As Fleetwood tottered on
+receiving his wound, Ada Garden uttered a shriek of terror, but before
+her fears overpowered her she mustered her energies for the occasion,
+and endeavoured, as she knelt at the bottom of the boat, to prevent him
+from receiving any further injury as he fell.  Regardless of the noise
+and confusion around, she raised his head on the cloaks, on which she
+had been reclining; she endeavoured to stanch the blood flowing from a
+deep wound in his head; she called on his name, in accents of anguish,
+to revive and speak to her, but in vain--no answer could he give.  She
+observed not what was taking place, scarcely that his companions were
+taken away; that other men filled their places, and that the boat was
+being urged rapidly back towards the shore, by six fresh and powerful
+oarsmen.  Meantime the mistico had come up, and now hauled her wind with
+her head to the northward, so that her guns might cover the retreat of
+the pirate boats; but as soon as they got in order, and began to move
+towards the harbour, she let draw her head sails, went about, and stood
+in the same direction, none of the pirates having the slightest
+intention of coming in contact with the British, if they could avoid it;
+for they also, it afterwards appeared, had heard the hail of the
+_Tone's_ boats, and rightly guessed from whence it came.  The crews of
+the British boats gave way with a will; for, finding that all the firing
+had ceased, and that their hail was no longer answered, they began to
+suspect the truth, and that their friends had been overtaken and
+captured.  Linton, it must be remembered, could not tell to a certainty
+what had taken place, and he therefore acted to the best of his
+judgment.  He ordered the boats to accompany him, pulling as fast as
+they could, in the direction in which they had seen the firing; but they
+had come clearly in sight of the lofty cliffs of the island before they
+perceived the mistico standing in for the land, and a fleet of boats
+near her, just distinguishable through the gloom.  The tables were now
+reversed, and it was this time the smaller force chasing the larger one;
+but even had there been twice the number of boats, Linton would not have
+hesitated to chase them.  The British crews, as they found that they
+were in sight of the enemy, gave forth three of those hearty cheers
+which they can seldom resist uttering in moments of excitement, and,
+with redoubled energy, dashed after the retreating boats.
+
+That cheer was heard by those of the captives who still retained their
+consciousness, and though it showed them that they were not deserted by
+their friends, it made the pirates still more eager to return to their
+strong-hold, to avoid encountering an enemy so evidently in good spirits
+and courage.
+
+The mistico sailed well; but, as the wind stood, it was evident that she
+would be obliged to make one tack, if not more, before she could fetch
+the harbour, and this gave the British a hope that they should at all
+events be able to cut her off; and Linton doubted whether it would not
+be better first to get hold of as many of the boats as they could, and
+then to wait for her off the mouth of the harbour.
+
+"I think the boats have got the captain, and the rest of them, on board,
+by the way they pull," shouted Linton, to Tompion, who commanded the
+cutter.  "Tackle them first, and we may pay the other rascals off
+afterwards.  Huzza, my men--give way, or they will be into their den
+before we can get alongside them."
+
+"The mistico has tacked," shouted Tompion, in return.  "Shall I fire
+into her?"
+
+"No--no; no firing--we may be hitting our friends," cried Linton.  "Let
+her go--we can get her afterwards."
+
+As the boats drew near her, the mistico opened a fire of small arms and
+swivels on them over the larboard side; for she was now standing
+directly across their course, bringing them, as she got more to the
+northward, under her stern; so that when she again tacked, she would be
+able to bring her starboard broadside to bear on them.  The pirate boats
+also commenced a slight and uncertain fire, showing that very few of
+them had arms; but, as they drew near the shore, the cliffs appeared
+fringed with a blaze of fire, which opened down upon them.
+
+Still undaunted, Linton pushed on: the boats were occasionally hit, but
+no one was wounded.  The mistico again tacked; but she found the wind
+more scant than she had probably expected, and she consequently fell
+off, and instead of having the English boats on her starboard side, she
+passed astern of them, unable to fire, so close were both parties
+together, without an equal chance of injuring her own friends.  The same
+cause also prevented the people on the cliffs from keeping up the hot
+fire they might otherwise have done; for in the darkness of night it was
+difficult to distinguish the position of the English boats, in
+consequence of their carefully abstaining from firing.  Linton and his
+followers were almost up with the sternmost of the pirate boats when the
+lofty cliffs opened, as it seemed, by magic--the enemy disappeared in
+the narrow opening, and, as they were boldly pushing after them, they
+found a thick chain drawn across the passage, and at the same time a
+blaze of fire opened from the broadside of the brig, moored across it.
+
+"Back your larboard oars, pull up your starboard oars, my men," shouted
+Linton.  "We are in a trap--must give it up, or be knocked to pieces,
+I'm afraid.  Let all the boats pull to the south-west as fast as they
+can till we are out of the range of their guns."
+
+It was, indeed, time for the British to retire; for besides the big guns
+and swivels of the brig, every accessible point of the cliffs above
+their head appeared covered with musketry, and several heavy pieces sent
+forth their messengers of destruction from beneath the walls of the
+castle.  Never were boats perhaps exposed to a hotter fire--to penetrate
+into the harbour was utterly impossible, and the probability of their
+escaping was small indeed.
+
+"Pull on--pull for your lives, my men," shouted the young lieutenant, as
+the boats' heads came round, and their crews endeavoured to escape from
+the showers of round shot and bullets, which dashed the water up on
+every side of them, wounding several, and sending more than one brave
+heart to its last account.
+
+"We shall do yet, my men.  We'll pay the villains off for this!" he
+shouted.  "Oh, Heaven!  They've done for me.  Take the helm, Duff, and
+tell Mr Tompion--"
+
+He spoke in a low tone, and before he finished the sentence he sunk down
+at the bottom of the boat.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY ONE.
+
+"And so, signora, you would show your gratitude for the attention and
+respect with which I have treated you, by endeavouring to escape from my
+care, and by bringing your countrymen to attempt my destruction."
+
+These words, uttered in a deep, stern voice, were the first Ada heard
+with sufficient distinctness to comprehend their meaning, since the
+termination of the conflict, in which she had seen her lover, over whom
+she still hung, cast down wounded by her side.  The tone and accent told
+her, too clearly, who was the speaker ere she raised her head, and,
+looking round, beheld the pirate Zappa, steering the boat.  Whether or
+not it was fancy, she could scarcely tell; but, as she gazed at him
+through the gloom, his dress appeared disordered, and stained with
+blood, and his countenance seemed to her to wear an expression even of
+unusual ferocity.  Dread, lest in his savage mood he should wreak his
+vengeance on Fleetwood, kept her silent.
+
+"Speak, signora," he repeated.  "Why have you done this?"
+
+"I have done nothing to injure you, nothing of which you have a right to
+complain," said Ada, lifting up her head, though still remaining on her
+knees by Fleetwood's side.  "You unjustly deprived me of my liberty, and
+that I have attempted to regain.  Of no other crime towards you can you
+accuse me."
+
+She said this with as firm a voice as she could command, remembering the
+effect her courage had had on the pirate, on a former occasion; and she
+now felt that it was, if possible, of still greater importance to her to
+retain her presence of mind; not only her own life, but that of
+Fleetwood; might depend on her behaviour.
+
+"But you are mistaken, signora.  I accuse you of instigating some
+strangers, to whom hospitality had been shown, to run off with the
+property of my people, and of inducing that unhappy youth, Paolo
+Montifalcone, treacherously, to assist in your flight," returned the
+pirate firmly.  "I will not, however, barter words with you.  If I and
+my people escape from the attack your countrymen appear about to make on
+us, I may overlook your crime; but if any of them suffer through your
+means, you shall not escape my vengeance."
+
+"I am defenceless and in your power," replied Ada.  "I repeat that I
+have not instigated my countrymen to attack you, and if you suffer, it
+is through no fault of mine.  But if you add a cold-blooded murder to
+your other crimes, you will bring down the vengeance of all civilised
+nations on your head, as instruments of the God whom you have offended."
+
+"My resolution is fixed, signora.  What I do depends on the result of
+this night's business," said the pirate, in the same stern voice; and,
+without paying her any further apparent attention, he urged on his
+people to renewed exertions at their oars.
+
+This conversation took place exactly as the British boats were first
+discovered through the darkness, coming up astern; and as they happened
+to be just there in line, and looming large in the gloom, Zappa could
+not tell what force was now being brought against him; and it was the
+belief that he was about to be attacked by overwhelming numbers, before,
+perhaps, he could get within shelter of the harbour, and make
+arrangements for his defence, which had stirred up all the devil within
+him.  One of his remarks gave Ada some gleam of comfort, for it made her
+fancy that the pirate did not suspect that the wounded man at his feet
+was Captain Fleetwood, the enemy from whom he had most to dread, and she
+hoped that he still believed him to be simply the Maltese sailor he
+appeared.  Hope, however slight, will, as the light branch keeps a
+drowning man above the surface of the treacherous waters, support a
+person amid present distress and difficulty, who would otherwise sink
+overwhelmed beneath them; and this idea, which had happily occurred to
+Ada, prevented her giving way to the wretchedness she felt at the
+failure of her lover's gallant attempt to rescue her, and the too
+probable destruction he had brought on himself and those associated with
+him.  The pirate every now and then turned his head to watch the
+advancing boats, expecting them each instant to fire on him; but seeing
+that they did not do so, he grew calmer as he approached the harbour,
+knowing that he should soon be in safety within it.
+
+Though trembling lest her care should evince her interest in Fleetwood,
+Ada, as soon as Zappa's attention had been withdrawn from her, again
+employed herself in endeavouring to staunch the blood which flowed from
+his wound.  As she bent over him she found he breathed; and as she held
+his hand in hers, she felt that his pulse was still beating, though slow
+and faint.  It had at last occurred to her, that it would be wiser to
+call Marianna to her assistance, though, with the natural jealousy of
+love, she was unwilling that any one but herself should tend, while she
+was able, the object of her affection, but the poor girl was little in a
+condition to render her any aid; as, overcome with her fears, and the
+continued excitement in which she had been kept, she had gone off in a
+fainting fit, from which she was only just recovering.  She heard the
+voice of her mistress, and it served to revive her, and raising her
+head, she dragged herself towards her.
+
+"Oh, holy Mary, and is the brave captain killed!" she exclaimed, as she
+saw Fleetwood's rigid, death-like appearance, though the dark colour
+with which his skin was tinged concealed the ghastly pallor of his
+countenance.  "Oh, holy mother, is he dead?"
+
+Ada grasped Marianna's arm, to make her keep silent, as she
+whispered--"He is your countryman, a seaman of Malta.  You must attend
+to him."  And she trusted that Zappa had not overheard her maid's
+indiscreet exclamation.  Whether he had or not, his attention was again
+attracted towards them.
+
+"You appear to take great interest in that wounded man, signora," he
+observed, in a less angry tone than before.
+
+"I do, signor," she replied, in a firm voice, without waiting for his
+saying any thing further.  "I perform but a woman's part towards a
+wounded man, in endeavouring to alleviate his suffering.  I do as I
+would towards any one in a like situation; and as I would towards you,
+were a shot, from the guns of my countrymen, this instant to lay you
+low, and were I again carried into captivity by your orders.  We are
+taught by our religion, signor, not to distinguish our enemies from our
+friends, when they are in affliction."  Ada made this last observation
+as the genuine feeling of her heart, without any hypocrisy, however
+excusable some might think it, under the circumstances, and,
+doubtlessly, would have staunched the wounds of her greatest enemy, to
+the best of her power, had she been called on to do so; though the
+anxiety and tenderness which animated her, as she watched over
+Fleetwood, would have, of necessity, been wanting.
+
+"Well, well, signora," returned Zappa.  "You and your attendant are
+welcome to do your best to prevent the man from dying, though he
+deserves nothing at my hands; but whatever men may say of me, they shall
+not justly accuse me of being a murderer in cold blood.  Your countrymen
+do not appear to be in a fighting mood.  Perhaps they are afraid of
+firing, lest they should hurt you.  Is it not so, lady?  I know more of
+their plans than you suspect.  The expedition is led by the captain of
+the _Ione_, in person, and he was on the look out for you, when we so
+inopportunely came up, and spoilt your arrangements."
+
+"Can it be so?" thought Ada.  "Is he really ignorant that Fleetwood is
+close to him?  Alas, he may be deceiving me, and if I pretend to agree
+to his assertions, he will but use it as a weapon against me.  The right
+and best plan is to refuse to give an opinion on the subject."
+
+"I am your prisoner, signor," she said, aloud; "and as such I claim
+every right to endeavour to escape as I best can.  It would therefore be
+folly in me to acknowledge by what means I have communicated with my
+countrymen, even if I had done as you suppose, lest you should prevent
+my doing so another time."
+
+"_Per bacco_, you are a brave girl!" exclaimed the pirate, in a tone in
+which Ada felt that admiration was too much mingled with a familiarity
+she had endeavoured to avoid.  "I would rather be your friend than your
+enemy, if you would let me.  Faith, you deserve your liberty, or
+anything else that you desire; but it would tax my generosity too much
+to give it to you."
+
+What he said further, Ada did not hear; for the noise of the firing,
+which then commenced from the cliffs above, as well as from the boats,
+drowned his words.  She trembled for the fate of the _Tone's_ crew, who
+were coming to her assistance; for she was sufficiently acquainted with
+the nature of military defences, to know the impracticable character of
+the harbour into which the pirates, she was afraid, would try to draw
+them.
+
+The firing increased; and she judged, by the gestures of the Greeks, who
+were rowing, that her countrymen were close upon them.  Again the hope
+revived that, even then, Fleetwood might be rescued.  The shouts of the
+British seamen rang in her ears.  She could scarcely refrain from rising
+and waving to them to urge them on to the succour of their captain; but,
+just as she fancied they would be alongside, she saw the cliffs, at the
+entrance of the harbour, towering above her, and the boat shooting in;
+directly after, the _Sea Hawk_ opened her fire, and her ears were
+deafened with the reverberating reports of the guns, and the shouts and
+shrieks of the pirates.  The moment the boat touched the shore, Zappa
+and his companions sprang out, he shouting,--"To the castle--to the
+castle!  We will give them the guns as they retreat."
+
+And Ada found herself left alone with Pietro and Marianna.  In vain she
+endeavoured to arouse her lover to a state of consciousness--the same
+frightful torpor continued which the wound had caused; and her heart
+almost broke with anguish, as she began to fear he might die before he
+could receive any proper assistance.
+
+"The pirate talks of his generosity.  Would he allow him to be sent on
+board the _Ione_ with a flag of truce?" she thought.  "No, no; it were
+vain to hope it; and the very entreating him to do so would betray
+Charles to him."
+
+She then remembered the medical knowledge possessed by Paolo
+Montifalcone, and the great assistance he had been to her; but she had
+no means of testing his surgical skill, though she understood that Zappa
+had, at first, detained him, that he might be useful to any of his
+followers who were wounded--but then the idea occurred to her--though,
+perhaps, she did not express it in so many words,--"Can I trust him?  He
+has confessed his unhappy attachment to me.  I told him that, if no
+other circumstance prevented my marrying him, my heart was another's,
+and can I dare to place that favoured rival in his power?  He is,
+apparently, generous, and possesses many excellent qualities; but he is
+an Italian; and if the tales I have heard of Italians are true, they are
+less scrupulous than other persons of ridding themselves of those they
+hate.  Perhaps he would not contemplate such a deed--he might now
+shudder at the thought of it; but if the temptation were thrown in his
+way, could he withstand it?  I might, were I to trust him, be guilty of
+my Charles's death, and of causing that unhappy youth to commit a
+murder.  Oh!  God help me!  What shall I do?"
+
+Just then, some rapid steps were heard of a person running along the
+sands.  They attracted the attention of Marianna, who had begun to
+recover from her fright; and looking over the side of the boat, she
+screamed out,--"Is it you, Mr Raby?  Oh, come here--come here!  We want
+you very much."
+
+She was right in her supposition; and the next instant the midshipman
+had sprung into the boat.
+
+"What, Miss Garden!  Are you left here alone?  And, good heavens! is
+that the captain?" he exclaimed, in a tone of voice which showed how
+deeply he felt, joyous and careless as he was on ordinary occasions.
+"Oh, Miss Garden, he is not dead!"
+
+"I trust in Heaven he is not, Mr Raby," replied Ada.  "He has been
+stunned and severely wounded, and, had no one been with him, would have
+bled to death; even now, I know not what may happen if he does not
+speedily receive assistance.  Had we the strength to do so, we might
+convey him up to the tower, where I suppose I shall be again shut up,
+and his wounds might thus be properly dressed."
+
+"I am afraid that you, and Marianna, and I, should never be able to
+carry him all that way without hurting him," returned Jack Raby.  "If I
+could find our companions, we could easily do it; but I don't know what
+became of them.  I was dragged into a boat by myself, and knocked down,
+and told to be quiet; out, as soon as we got in here, the rascals went
+off to man their guns, and quite forgot me, I suppose; so, directly I
+found that they were gone, I felt to see if my head was hurt, and
+feeling it all right, I jumped out and set off, determined to try and
+find out what had become of you and the rest.  If I could not succeed, I
+thought about going up to the Italian lady, and getting her to make
+interest for us all.  I was in a great hurry, because I did not know
+when the pirates might come back; and they will, probably, shut me up
+somewhere, so that I cannot get to speak to her."
+
+"Your suggestion, Mr Raby, affords much hope that we may obtain
+assistance for Captain Fleetwood," said Ada.  "Oh! hurry up to the
+tower, and I am certain that the Signora Nina will exert herself to the
+utmost in our favour.  Tell her all that happened--tell her that the
+life of one very dear to me depends on her sending us aid; and she will
+find some one who will come and assist to carry your captain to a place
+of safety.  I need scarcely advise you to take every precaution to avoid
+being stopped on your way."
+
+"Never fear me, Miss Garden," answered the midshipman, as he leaped on
+shore.  "If I hear any one coming near me, I'll stow myself away under
+the rocks, or climb right up the cliffs over their heads.  It's
+fortunately so dark, that there's very little chance of my being seen,
+and I'll be back again as fast as I can."
+
+Nina Montifalcone was sitting, solitary and sad, at the window of her
+tower, gazing out on the sea, and watching the scene enacting below her.
+She had risen from her couch on hearing the firing and noise, and had
+gone to where she now was, to learn the cause of it.  The rapid
+discharge of the guns from the brig and fort told her that fighting was
+going on, and the British boats in full retreat explained what else had
+happened.  So interested was she on what was going on without, that she
+did not hear the sound of the footsteps of a person who entered the
+room.
+
+"Signora, signora," said a voice near her; she started on hearing
+herself addressed, and saw Jack Raby standing at her elbow.  "I have
+come in a great hurry, and have not a moment to spare, to tell you that
+Signora Garden, your friend, is on the shore of the bay in a boat, and
+that there is a person very badly wounded in it, who will die if you
+cannot send him assistance; and also that, if you do not intercede for
+us with the pira--I mean with the chief of this island,--I and my
+companions shall, very likely, to-morrow morning, be hung, or shot, or
+have our throats cut, or be thrown over the cliffs, or, at all events,
+sent out of the world."
+
+"The Signora Garden, and one in whom she is interested, wounded,"
+repeated Nina.  "Ah!  I see how it is.  Tell me, frankly, boy.  Is it
+the captain of the English brig who is wounded?"
+
+"_Signora, si_, I will not deny it," said the midshipman.  "There is,
+therefore, you will see, still greater necessity for you to interfere in
+his favour."
+
+"I tell you, boy, if it were known who he was, and for what purpose he
+came here, I could not preserve his life for one instant," replied Nina.
+"He must not be brought up here on any account, for he would be
+certainly recognised in the morning.  Have you met my brother, Signor
+Paolo.  He alone can assist us."
+
+"What, the Italian gentleman?  No, signora.  I took too much care in
+coming up here to fall in with anybody," said Jack.
+
+"Then I must go in search of him.  We shall probably find him among the
+spectators of the fight.  I will send him down to the boat.  Tell the
+signora that there is a cottage close to the shore on the other side of
+the bay, to the inhabitants of which my brother has been of great
+service, by preserving the lives of their children in a dire sickness,
+and thither the wounded man shall be conveyed.  If they have any
+gratitude in their nature, they will perform any service Paolo may
+require; and the English captain will be safe with them, even should
+they discover who he is.  Now, hasten back to the bay with the message,
+and entreat Signora Garden to return to her tower, and to appear to take
+no further interest in him.  It will betray him, to a certainty, if she
+does, and it can do him no good.  I will, however, endeavour to arrange
+that you shall remain with him to attend on him.  Tell her that, as soon
+as I have dispatched Paolo, I will go myself to meet her."
+
+While Nina was speaking, she took out of a chest the _capote_ she had
+worn on the previous occasion, and, throwing it over her shoulders, led
+the way down the steps.  While Jack Raby hurried off down the ravine,
+she took her way towards the edge of the cliffs, where she saw a number
+of people, some of them still firing in the direction where the boats
+were supposed to be, though they must by that time have been beyond the
+range of the guns; it served, however, to occupy their attention, so
+that no one perceived her.  She wandered among them for some time in
+vain, looking for her brother, till, at last, she found him, leaning
+against a part of the ruins on a high spot, from where he could overlook
+the whole scene.  Twice she called him, but so absorbed was he in his
+own thoughts that he did not answer her, till she climbed up over the
+broken fragments at his feet, and touched his arm.
+
+"Paolo, my brother," she said, "I come to ask you to perform a generous
+and a noble work, from which you must not shrink.  You love the English
+lady who has been held captive here.  I knew it from the first, and I
+know that she cannot return your love, for her heart is another's.  Now
+listen: the man to whom her heart is given, your rival if you will, lies
+now in the island, wounded almost to death, and on your skill depends,
+probably, whether he lives or dies.  Promise me, then, as you hope for
+salvation in another world, for peace of mind in this, to exert that
+skill to the utmost to preserve his life, to conceal his real character
+from my husband, and to aid him to escape from the island.  Say you will
+do this, my brother, and I believe, from what I have seen of that fair
+girl, you are far more likely to win her regard by such conduct, and
+ultimately, perhaps, even her love, than were her lover to die without
+an attempt on your part to save him."
+
+Paolo listened without interrupting her, and did not immediately answer.
+
+"Her love!  Do you think it possible that I should gain her love?" he at
+length exclaimed, as if he had not heard anything else she had said.  "I
+would sacrifice life itself for that bright jewel."
+
+"It would be wrong were I to hold hope out to you to induce you to act
+as I could wish, Paolo," said Nina.  "Think not of any other reward than
+such as your own heart will afford you.  Her love I do not believe that
+you will attain, even were her lover to die.  One of her nature places
+her heart on one object, and when that is torn from her, it never again
+finds a resting-place.  All you may expect, and that, be assured, she
+will give you, is her gratitude and esteem.  With that you must be
+content."
+
+"It is bitter to think so, and yet I have long ceased to hope," murmured
+Paolo.  "Tell me though, Nina, what would you have me do?"
+
+His sister told him of the arrangement she had already made with Jack
+Raby.
+
+"Come, my brother, decide what part you will take--there is no time to
+be lost; oh! let it be that one worthy of your generous nature."
+
+"Nina, I will do as you wish," Paolo gasped forth, after a long silence.
+"I will endeavour to save the life of this man, even though my heart
+break when I see him united to her he loves."
+
+"Swear it, then, Paolo--swear it by the Holy Apostles--swear it, as you
+hope for Heaven's mercy hereafter," exclaimed Nina.  "Not only for your
+own sake do I impose this oath, but for the sake of the sweet girl
+herself, that she may know that, though her lover is in his rival's
+power, he is as safe as in the hands of his dearest friend."
+
+Paolo took the oath his sister prescribed, and leaping off the ruins,
+hurried, at headlong speed, down to the bay.
+
+Nina followed at a slower pace.
+
+The flight of the fugitives had been discovered by old Vlacco, even
+before they had quitted the bay.  He had awoke in the night, he stated,
+and had taken it into his head, that he would go to see if they were
+safe in their prison.  He was so astonished and confused on finding they
+were not there, that, at first, he could not decide what course to take.
+He then bethought him that his duty required him to inform his chief,
+and as soon as Zappa was made aware of the fact, the whole island was in
+commotion, and the pursuit was commenced.
+
+It was with very great satisfaction that Nina heard of Ada's flight, and
+most earnestly did she pray that she might not be overtaken.  For the
+fair girl's sake, she wished this, and for her own, even still more so.
+She admired her beauty, she was inclined to love her as a sister--and
+yet she could not conceal from herself that she greatly feared her as a
+rival in her husband's affections.  She had lately learned, too surely
+to doubt it, that his love was waning, and that he himself was far
+different from the character she had supposed him.
+
+By his own acknowledgment, he was a blood-stained pirate; and she had
+already too many proofs of the fact, even had he not, now that he was
+indifferent to her love, boasted to her of his deeds.  Sometimes, alas,
+the dreadful thought would occur to her, that even her life would not be
+safe, if it stood between him and his wishes; and yet, woman-like, she
+still loved on.  She tried to shut her eyes to his faults, to forget his
+unkindness, and to discover only the noble qualities she at first
+believed he possessed.  Though she feared Ada, she could not hate her;
+and would not have harmed her, now that she felt sure she would never
+consent to become the pirate's bride should she die, much less his
+mistress; but she was not the less anxious for her departure, and
+proportionably grieved when she heard that she was once more a prisoner
+in the island.  With natural jealousy, when Zappa spoke of obtaining a
+ransom for Ada, she had endeavoured to ascertain what steps he had
+taken, for the purpose of arranging it; and by no means could she learn
+that he had even made any attempts to open negotiations on the subject
+with any persons at Malta, or elsewhere; and this confirmed her in her
+fears that this was simply a pretext to weary out his prisoner, and to
+reconcile her to her fate.  She was certain, also, that Captain
+Fleetwood could have heard nothing on the subject; as he would, she
+thought, have preferred so safe a way of recovering her, instead of the
+dangerous one he had attempted.  Such were the subjects which occupied
+her mind, as she walked down the ravine to meet her rival.  In the
+meantime, Ada had watched, with an anxiety scarcely describable, for the
+return of Raby; every instant expecting to have the pirates come back;
+and to have her lover dragged roughly from her; and to have to run the
+risk either of betraying him, or of allowing him to perish without
+assistance.
+
+At last Jack arrived, followed at an interval by Paolo.
+
+"Signora," he said, "I have come to take charge of a man I hear is
+sorely wounded.  Do not doubt me; I repeat the oath I have given my
+sister, that I will, to the best of my abilities, endeavour to restore
+him to health, and if an occasion occurs, to aid in his escape from
+hence.  I ask--I look for no reward."
+
+"I trust you, signor," replied Ada, giving him her hand.  "You could not
+commit so black an act as to deceive me, and now, oh! hasten to put your
+good intentions into execution."
+
+On this Paolo told her of the fisherman's hut, to which he purposed to
+convey Captain Fleetwood, and hurried off to summon the old man.  He
+soon returned, stating that he was from home, and as no time was to be
+lost, he proposed that he and Raby should carry the wounded officer
+there at once, with the aid of Ada and Marianna.  This they accomplished
+without much difficulty, by means of a cloak found at the bottom of the
+boat, and then, urged by Paolo and Raby, Ada tore herself away from him,
+and with Marianna, endeavoured to find her way up the ravine, while Jack
+remained to keep watch over his commander.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY TWO.
+
+Lieutenant Saltwell, on whom, in his captain's absence, had devolved the
+command of the _Ione_, walked her quarterdeck on the night on which the
+events we have been describing took place, with a mind very ill at ease.
+
+He had been during the whole afternoon endeavouring, by every possible
+means in his power, to get the brig up to the spot agreed on, off the
+island of Lissa, so that he might dispatch the boats at dark to wait
+still closer in for the coming of Fleetwood and his companions.  The
+breeze with which they had started had failed them soon afterwards, so
+the sweeps had been got out, and the boats had towed ahead, till he was
+fearful of knocking up their crews and unfitting them for the work they
+had still to perform; and yet, do all they could, he was obliged to
+dispatch them, under the orders of the several lieutenants, with a pull
+of some eighteen or twenty miles before them.
+
+"For heaven's sake, make the best speed you can," said Saltwell, as he
+bade his brother officers good bye.  "Our captain will make the attempt
+to-night, depend on it, and it will be sad work if he cannot find the
+boats."
+
+"Never fear, we shall not miss him, I hope," exclaimed Linton, as he
+leaped into his boat.  "Shove off and give way, my merry men."
+
+The boat's crew did their best; but the event was another convincing
+proof of the misfortunes which may arise from being a little too late.
+Had they been ten minutes sooner, they would, perhaps, have been in time
+to prevent their captain and his companions from falling again into the
+hands of the pirates.  Linton felt this when he found that they were
+recaptured, and, stung with regret, although he was in no manner to
+blame, he agreed on the pursuit with a zeal which very nearly led to the
+destruction of himself and his followers.
+
+We left him severely, if not mortally, wounded, off the mouth of the
+pirate's harbour.  The command, therefore, devolved on Tompion, who
+immediately ordered the boats to separate as much as possible, keeping
+within sight of each other, to cause the shots of the enemy to become
+less effective, by being scattered over a wider range.
+
+"Pull away, my lads," exclaimed the mate; "we shall soon be out of this,
+and we shall have an opportunity before long of paying them off."
+
+The men needed no inducement to pull hard, for it was excessively hot
+work, and they had no fancy to be exposed to the showers of bullets
+which came whizzing round them, especially when they were compelled to
+run away from the enemy.
+
+The frowning and lofty cliffs, fringed with tiny glances of vivid light,
+and the bright flashes of the _Sea Hawk's_ guns, which were reflected on
+the calm water, formed, doubtlessly, an exceedingly picturesque
+spectacle, which those who were pulling at the oars had full opportunity
+to contemplate, but not the less disagreeable to them on that account,
+especially as it would have been a very useless amusement to fire
+against the cliffs in return.  Fortunately, no further casualties
+occurred, and every instant, as their distance from the shore increased,
+there was less chance of a shot hitting them.  At length, Tompion,
+seeing that they were free from danger, hailed the other boats, to order
+the crews to rest on their oars to recover breath, before they shaped
+their course to return to their ship.  The hail was answered by another
+from the westernmost boat, commanded by Jemmy Duff; he sung out--
+
+"Did you see the mistico get into the harbour, with the rest of the
+rascals?"
+
+"No," said Tompion.  "Did any one on board see her?" he asked of the
+crew.
+
+"No, sir," was the general answer.
+
+"No one saw her go in," he answered.
+
+"Then, by Jove, there she is, on our starboard beam," sung out Duff in
+return.  "She is pretty nearly becalmed, it seems.  She has got out
+there, I suspect, to watch us, and to try to cut us off.  What shall we
+do?"
+
+"I and the gig will close you, and we'll see what is to be done," said
+Tompion, ordering the other boat to follow him, and all the boats were
+soon alongside each other.
+
+There, sure enough, Tompion perceived the mistico, about a quarter of a
+mile off, with her head to the southward, evidently watching their
+movements.  It might seem surprising that she had not attacked them when
+under the cliffs; but, in the first place, she could not then get up to
+them, and had she been able to do so, it would have prevented the
+pirates on shore from firing on them.
+
+The wind had at this juncture almost failed her, but she had her sweeps
+to depend on, and with a strong crew they could send her along at a
+great rate.  She was commanded on the present occasion by the second
+lieutenant of the _Sea Hawk_--at least by the officer who performed the
+duties of one--who had hurried on board with as many men as he could
+find, and swept out to sea the moment the alarm of the prisoners' escape
+was given; and now, somewhat mistaking the character of British seamen,
+he had begun to edge up towards the boats, purposely to take them by
+surprise, and hoping to make them an easy prey.
+
+Of most of this Tompion was soon aware, and it now became a question as
+to the advisability of attacking her instead.
+
+"What does Mr Linton say?" asked Duff.  "We should not take long about
+it, I think, and she would be something to show for our night's work."
+
+"Tell Mr Linton how things stand, Jennings, and ask him what he wishes
+us to do," said Tompion to the coxswain of the gig.
+
+"Poor Mr Linton can say nothing, sir," returned Jennings, in a
+sorrowful tone.  "I'm afraid he'll never speak again."
+
+An exclamation of grief escaped from all who heard the words.
+
+"What! is he dead?" inquired Tompion, in a voice which showed that he
+participated in the feeling of the crews, although he might very
+probably benefit by the vacancy thus created; yet, I will venture to
+say, the thought of this did not enter his head.
+
+"No, sir, not dead, I hope," said the coxswain.  "I have bound up his
+wound as well as I can, and stopped the bleeding; but he's in a dead
+faint, and I don't know if he'll come to again."
+
+"Well, Duff, I should like to act as Mr Linton would have done, and I'm
+sure he would have attacked the mistico without giving two thoughts
+about it," observed Tompion; "but then, again, for his sake, we ought to
+get back to the ship as fast as we can, to obtain surgical assistance
+for him."
+
+"I know how you feel, Tompion," exclaimed Jemmy Duff--"but I have it:
+our two boats can easily tackle the rascally mistico, and let the gig
+pull back to the brig as fast as she can, with Mr Linton and Timmins
+here, who is badly hurt, and let them tell Saltwell of our whereabouts,
+and we shall fall in with her before the morning with a prize in tow, I
+hope."
+
+"Capital!" exclaimed Tompion, who was, for a wonder, not above taking
+advice from a junior, when it happened to be good, and coincided with
+his own opinion.  "What say you, my lads--do you think you've got
+strength enough in your arms to punish some of those rascals for Mr
+Linton's too like death, and the trick they played us?"
+
+"All right, sir, never fear.  We can give it them yet," exclaimed both
+crews, with one voice; and seldom will British seamen be found to make
+any other answer.
+
+"Well, then, Jennings, do you steer due west,--right for that tar, that
+is your course.  When you get about five miles from this, fire a musket,
+and continue firing every ten minutes.  They will show a blue light as
+soon as they hear you, and you can scarcely miss the ship.  Take poor
+Timmins on board with you--there's no one else hurt, I hope."
+
+"No, sir, no," was the answer.
+
+"I need not tell you to make the best of your way, and I'm sorry, for
+your sakes, we can't have you, my men, with us, in the affair on hand."
+
+Having given these orders, most reluctantly they were obeyed by the crew
+of the gig, which immediately pulled away in the direction pointed out,
+and was soon lost to sight in the gloom.  Tompion made the necessary
+preparations for the attack on the mistico.
+
+He was not above despising an enemy whom he intended to attack, and as
+the fight, in which he was about to engage, would be the first in which
+he had held the command, he was doubly anxious that it should be
+successful.  He ordered his men to see that their pistols, and the
+muskets in the boat, were properly loaded and primed, and a small brass
+swivel, mounted in the bows, he had loaded with musket balls, almost up
+to the muzzle, to fire as they ran past the enemy's quarter.
+
+"Duff," he exclaimed, "you board on the starboard side, I will grapple
+her on the larboard, as I want to be a few seconds before you, to give
+her a taste of my gun, and if she stands in as she now does, I shall get
+there quickest.  Now, my men, give way, and let the scoundrels have a
+taste of your cutlasses when you get at them.  Huzza for old England!"
+
+As he uttered these words, the men repeated the cheer till the night air
+rung again, and bending to their oars, made the water fly from under the
+bows of the boats, while their heads turned in the direction of the
+piratical mistico.
+
+The loud cheer and the suddenness of the movement completely took the
+pirates by surprise, it appeared; and instead of tacking and standing
+boldly towards the English to meet them, as they expected, her helm was
+put up, the sheets eased off, her long sweeps run out, and away she went
+dead before the wind, at a rate which Tompion saw would give his men a
+tough pull to come up with her.  Another reason for her so doing was
+soon apparent, by her opening a fire of two swivel guns over her
+counter, which her crew probably calculated would check the advance of
+the boats.  It is extraordinary at what speed the Greek misticos can be
+urged through the water; and on this occasion the _Zoe_ did full justice
+to her character, for her crew were strong, fresh, and in high spirits,
+while, on the other hand, the British seamen had been rowing all night,
+and the greater part of the day, and were dispirited by the loss of
+their officer and the ill success of the expedition; not, however, that
+this prevented them from exerting themselves to the very utmost of their
+strength.  The wind also, which had been very uncertain and changeable,
+now almost a calm, now a fresh breeze, now blowing from the eastward,
+now some points to the north of it, then a like number to the south,
+seemed suddenly to fix itself in the latter point with a considerable
+increase of strength, which sent the mistico flying through the water at
+a greater speed than ever.
+
+"Give way, my men, oh, give way!" shouted Tompion, scarcely able to
+articulate in his eagerness to overtake the enemy, for with the increase
+of the breeze he saw their chance of doing so gradually fading away, and
+the proud hopes he had begun to form, of revenging the loss they had
+sustained, and of being able to carry with him his first prize as a
+proof of what they had done, with a vista of honour and promotion in the
+distance, cruelly dissipated.  Again the British seamen cheered, and
+stretched their arms till their oars bent and cracked, but the sound was
+answered by shouts of derisive laughter from the Greeks, and a discharge
+from their swivel guns with several rounds from their musketry, though
+happily without doing much damage.  Both boats were struck over and over
+again, and one man was wounded, but not sufficiently to disable him.
+
+The cutter returned it with a bow-chaser, and to some purpose, it
+seemed, by the cries and shrieks which followed.
+
+"Give it them again!" shouted Tompion.  "If they do get away, they shall
+have cause to remember us.  Fire, my men, fire!"
+
+Again the shot told with fearful effect among the crowded crew of the
+_Zoe_; and from the cries and confusion on board they had reason to hope
+that some of those working her sweeps were disabled; and as the firing
+ceased, that those who had worked the guns had taken their places.
+Tompion had been narrowly watching her movements; he had from the first
+suspected some ruse to be played off on him.
+
+"Ah! she has put her helm to port, and is running in for the land
+again!" he exclaimed.  "Keep a little more to the eastward, Duff, and
+try to out her off; we may have her yet, before she gets into port."
+
+The mistico had had quite enough to say, it seemed, to the British
+boats; and was now endeavouring to get safe into the harbour, and very
+probably to try and tempt them to follow her, if they had not already
+had sufficient warning of what they might expect if they did so.
+
+On they all three went in the same direction, the mistico by her change
+of course being thrown somewhat nearer to her pursuers than she before
+was, but they otherwise gained little, if anything, on her.  The cutter
+perseveringly kept up her fire as fast as the gun could be cleaned and
+loaded, and the mistico more slowly returned it, the small sheets of
+flame which ever and anon issued from the mouths of the pieces showing
+their position to those on shore, as they drew near.
+
+Still Tompion did not like to abandon the pursuit--they had already
+expended so much exertion and time, that he felt as if it would be
+throwing it all uselessly away if they were, after all, to fail; and yet
+he began to see that they had already gone far enough, and that, if he
+persisted in the chase, he might incur a greater disaster than had yet
+happened to them.  He looked up at the cliffs, and tried to persuade
+himself that they were still at some distance off.  They certainly
+looked very dark and lofty; but as there was no firing from them, he
+thought that they must be still too far off for any shot to reach them.
+The crew of the mistico, now that they felt pretty certain of not being
+captured, cheered and laughed, and called out to them, using every
+device to enrage them, and induce them to follow.
+
+"We must soon be about ship, Duff!"  Tompion sang out from his boat;
+"and I am afraid, after all, we have done little good."
+
+"If you will go on a little longer, perhaps the wind may shift, and we
+shall have her becalmed under the cliffs," replied the midshipman.  "It
+would be a great thing to carry her off in sight of the enemy."
+
+Tompion was too ready to follow his messmate's advice, so they
+persevered in the chase with great gallantry, but certainly with a want
+of discretion, though it must be borne in mind that they had now less
+danger to apprehend either from the brig or the cliffs, as the pirates
+could not possibly fire without risking the killing of friends as well
+as foes.  Now, although Tompion fancied that all their exertions would
+be thrown away, he was not aware, as the reader possibly is, that they
+were of the very greatest service to their friends on shore.  It was
+their gallant pursuit of the mistico which had so completely engaged the
+attention of the pirates that they entirely forgot their prisoners, and
+allowed them to make the arrangements I have described.  Had it not been
+for them, their captain would very soon have been discovered by Zappa,
+and his life would probably have been sacrificed, Raby would not have
+had time to reach Nina's tower, nor would Nina have found Paolo, and
+sent him to assist the sufferers.  Thus it is, by persevering in doing
+what is right, and brave, and honest, in all the affairs in life, good
+will ultimately arise from our acts, even though we ourselves may not
+immediately discover it, and though; perhaps, we may to the end of our
+lives remain in ignorance of the effect we have produced.  There is a
+time when all things must be known, and then we shall reap our reward.
+Let this be a consolation to us in all our troubles and disappointments
+when we have been strenuously endeavouring to do some important good,
+and find all our plans and projects defeated by the selfishness, the
+ignorance, the obstinacy of others, perhaps of the persons we would
+benefit, till at last we are inclined to exclaim: "What is the use of
+attempting to do good in this world?  Do all I can, I cannot succeed."
+We do succeed--we can succeed; often, very often, when the result is not
+seen.  We may, it is true, strive very much, and yet do very little
+good; but is not that little good something? is it not pure gold--
+treasure which will endure?  So also (I am moralising while the British
+boats are still in pursuit of the mistico) man cannot see the ultimate
+result of the evil he may commit--there the order is reversed.  A little
+evil in appearance may cause a vast amount of crime, wretchedness, and
+suffering.  Even a word idly spoken may give rise to thoughts which may
+grow up and flourish, till they become like a upas tree to destroy all
+within their influence.  To commit a small evil may be like the
+withdrawing the keystone from the arch, to cause the ruin of the whole
+edifice; or it may be like an ear of corn, which may soon serve to sow
+the whole field, and in the end millions and millions of acres.  If men
+could but remember this, they would hesitate ere, by a seemingly trivial
+act, they incurred the awful responsibility of the immeasurable amount
+of crime and suffering they may cause.
+
+How much further Tompion and Duff would have ventured I do not know,
+when their progress was arrested by a sight which silenced even the
+jeering laughter of the pirates.  A loud, crashing noise was heard,
+which seemed to rend and tear in sunder the very cliffs, from the summit
+of which bright flames burst forth suddenly, and exposing the pinnacled
+rocks, the shattered ruins, and the groups of figures standing on them,
+in front of the fire, to the view of those below.  The glare for the
+first moment almost blinded the eyes of the English, so long accustomed
+to darkness; but they soon saw that the fire proceeded from a tall tower
+near the edge of the cliff, and that the flames were bursting forth from
+the door, the windows, and the very roof itself, quickly towering up
+towards the sky.  That some dreadful catastrophe had occurred, there
+appeared to be no doubt by the commotion created among the people.  They
+began to run in all directions; some, it seemed, to procure water to
+throw on the flames, others to find ladders to scale the walls, and some
+were seen to attempt to gain the interior, but were again speedily
+driven forth by the fury of the flames.  Their efforts, it was very soon
+seen, were of little avail, the flames seemed to gain fresh strength by
+some new stimulant, they darted up higher than before in a pyramid of
+fire, the tower was seen to rock to and fro, and down it came with a
+tremendous crash, burying, it seemed too probable, beneath its burning
+ruins many who could not have had time to escape to a distance.  The
+mistico, while this event was taking place, had, favoured by the wind,
+got considerably ahead of the boats, and was by this time close in with
+the harbour's mouth.
+
+"Duff, ahoy," cried Tompion.  "That looks like a warning to us, and I
+think we ought to take it, and be off before the villains recover from
+their confusion.  Pull up your starboard oars.  We must give it up."
+
+"I am afraid so," said Duff, imitating his senior's example, and
+defeated in their object, the two boats once more steered in the
+direction where it was expected the _Ione_ would be found.  They were
+allowed to escape without further molestation, for the greater number of
+the pirates were engaged in watching the progress of the flames, or in
+endeavouring to quench them; for not only was the tower destroyed, but
+the fire had communicated to the building attached to it, and that also
+was rapidly being consumed.
+
+Saltwell had too much anxiety on his mind to allow him to turn in to
+take any rest, and for the greater part of the night he had walked the
+deck while he beat the brig up towards the island.  He became still more
+anxious, as the morning approached, at the non-appearance of the boats,
+and was continually hailing the look-outs to keep their eyes and ears
+open to catch any sign of their coming.  Colonel Gauntlett, who, of
+course, was not less anxious on his niece's account, was also constantly
+by his side; but the hours of night wore on, and no boats appeared.  The
+brig stood on towards the island, for Saltwell considered that if the
+expedition was successful, there was no further reason for concealment,
+and that the nearer he got the better, and that, at all events, with the
+breeze which had sprung up, he could stand out of sight of land again,
+before daylight.  The faint outline of the island, invisible to any but
+a seaman's eye, at last appeared through the darkness.  Several of the
+officers were collected together on the poop, looking towards it, as the
+brig now lay up on the starboard tack.
+
+"Ah, what is that?" exclaimed Saltwell, as a bright light was seen
+reflected on the sky.
+
+"Why, they have either set fire to one of their vessels, or have blown
+up some fort or other.  That may account for the boats' not returning."
+
+"I don't think that is likely," observed Colonel Gauntlett.  "Captain
+Fleetwood would scarcely delay to attack the pirates with a lady in one
+of the boats.  Would you, Mr Saltwell?"
+
+"No, sir, I would not," returned Saltwell.  "You are right, and I do not
+think the captain would; but still I cannot account for the fire, and it
+is a large one, or we should not see it at this distance."
+
+"I see no reason to conclude that Captain Fleetwood has anything to do
+with the conflagration," observed the colonel.  "I wish we could see
+something of him and my little girl though.  It is hazardous work he has
+been on, and I do not half like it.  Couldn't you fire a few guns, to
+give them notice of our whereabouts?  I don't see how they are to find
+the ship otherwise."
+
+"A sailor's eye is sharper than you may suppose, colonel," said
+Saltwell; "and depend on it, they will keep a sharp lookout for us.
+However, I will do as you propose, for the wind is off the shore, and
+the pirates are not likely to hear the guns.  Mr Brown, fire the
+foremost gun on the starboard side, and the next to it in four minutes'
+time."
+
+Directly after the order was issued, the gun sent forth its sheet of
+flame, and its dull sound was heard booming along the waters.  Several
+others followed without any answering signal.  The _Ione_ had now, in
+Mr Saltwell's opinion, stood long enough to the northward, or rather to
+the north-east, so he tacked ship, and they headed up rather more
+towards the island, though she soon again fell off nearly south.  The
+larboard guns were now fired, and at last a tiny spirt of fire was seen
+to the eastward, and the sharp report of a musket struck on the ears.
+
+"About ship then," cried Saltwell, and when she was round, after
+standing on a little way he hove her to, and ordered Mr Black to burn a
+blue light to show their position.  On this a faint cheer came down on
+the wind to prove that the signal was perceived.  The next few minutes
+were passed, by those more immediately interested in the success of the
+expedition, in considerable anxiety.  The splash of oars was heard, and
+but a single boat glided out of the darkness.
+
+"In Heaven's name, where are the rest?" was the question asked by many
+voices at once.
+
+"Mr Tompion sent me back, sir, with Mr Linton, who is badly hurt,
+while he and Mr Duff stopped to chase a pirate craft which had been
+dodging us," replied Jennings, to Saltwell's questions, giving
+afterwards a brief account of the failure of their expedition.
+
+"Poor Linton wounded, and by such villains," muttered Saltwell, as his
+brother-officer was lifted carefully on deck.  "How does he seem,
+Viall?" he inquired of the surgeon, who hurried forward when he heard
+what had occurred.
+
+"We shall see better when we get him below," returned the surgeon.  "He
+is alive, and that is all I can say."
+
+The wounded officer was carried to his berth, where the surgeon and his
+assistants assembled to examine his hurts.
+
+"This is a bad business, indeed, for the captain," said Saltwell to
+Colonel Gauntlett, as they resumed their walk on the poop, while the
+ship remained hove to, waiting for the arrival of the other boats; "I
+fear the pirate will murder him, and those with him, when he finds out
+who he is."
+
+"What, think you he will venture to murder a British officer, when he
+knows that his strong-hold is discovered, and that his death would
+certainly be avenged?" exclaimed the colonel.  "Poor fellow! and my
+little niece--if the poor girl ever escapes from that infernal den--I'm
+afraid she will never recover it."
+
+"I own, I fear for the worst," said Saltwell, who was weary, and out of
+spirits.  "Zappa knows well enough that he has deserved a rope, and,
+from what I hear, he is the sort of character to win it thoroughly; but
+we must do our best to punish him.  As soon as the boats come back, I
+intend to give Tompion a fresh crew, and to leave him in the cutter,
+well armed and provisioned, to watch the island, while we go in search
+of the _Ypsilante_; and, as Captain Vassilato left her under my orders,
+I shall send her off with a requisition to any of our cruisers she can
+fall in with, to assemble at an island to the southward of this; and I
+have not the slightest doubt, that any captain, who happens to be senior
+officer, when he hears of what has occurred, will take the
+responsibility of ordering a grand attack on the island.  If not, we
+will, by Heaven, try what our own brave fellows and the crew of the
+_Ypsilante_ can do to rescue their captain, or avenge their deaths."
+
+"Bravo, Mr Saltwell, I am rejoiced to hear you say this," exclaimed the
+colonel, warmly grasping the lieutenant's hand.  "And I and Mitchell
+will act as volunteers with the marines.  I wish we had done this at
+first.  A strong hand and a firm heart, are the best things to trust to.
+I never liked the plan poor Fleetwood has pursued, from the first.
+Your plots and your disguises seldom succeed; and they are not fit for
+Englishmen to engage in--they are contrary to the genius of our country,
+thank Heaven; but that Greek friend of his over-persuaded him, and, I am
+afraid, has led him to his destruction."
+
+"I wish that I could say, sir, that I thought all had gone well,"
+returned Saltwell.  "However, we must now do our best to mend matters.
+Well, doctor, what report can you make of poor Linton?" he asked of the
+surgeon, who just then appeared on deck.
+
+"I have extracted the ball, and he has recovered his senses," answered
+the surgeon.  "He is in very great danger; but I can give no decided
+opinion as yet.  He has expressed a wish to see you, and has begged me
+to call you."
+
+"Poor, poor fellow, I'll go below instantly," cried Saltwell, hurrying
+down, and auguring the worst from the doctor's tone.
+
+He found Linton stretched out in his narrow berth, lighted by the sickly
+glare of a small lamp fastened against the bulkhead.
+
+The clothes had been thrown over the lower part of his body; but his
+shoulder was bare, the pallid hue of his skin contrasting with the dark,
+red stains on the linen of the shirt, which had been cut off, and still
+lay beneath it.  The arm, on the side where the ball had entered the
+neck, lay immovable by his side, looking shrunk and withered, except a
+slight twitching of the fingers, which showed the agony he was enduring.
+
+O'Farrell, the assistant surgeon, sat at the head of the bed, applying a
+cooling lotion round the part which had been bound up, to prevent
+inflammation, if possible, from setting in, administering now and then
+some restorative to revive him from the exhaustion consequent to his
+great loss of blood.
+
+As soon as Saltwell entered, his eyes turned towards him, and his lips
+moved; but his brother-officer heard no sound, till he put his ear close
+to his mouth.
+
+"Saltwell," he whispered, "don't let them blame me wrongfully for being
+beaten off by those rascally pirates; I did my best, as you know I
+would.  Our poor captain--I grieve for him more.  Don't let a stain
+remain on our names.  And, Saltwell, if I die, as I think I shall, when
+you get home, see my poor Julia--bear her my deepest love, and tell her
+I thought of her to the last."
+
+"I'll do all you wish, my dear fellow," answered Saltwell, deeply
+affected.  "But we must not let you slip through the doctor's fingers;
+cheer up, for the sake of all your friends.  And now try and get some
+rest--it will do you more good than any thing I can say, or the doctor
+can give you."
+
+"I fear not, Saltwell, I fear not," said Linton.  "But I won't keep you,
+for you'll be wanted on deck, as the boats will soon be coming back, and
+I trust to you to remember to fulfil my wishes."
+
+Saltwell saw that his presence did more harm than good to his wounded
+friend, as it induced him to talk; so, bidding him try to sleep, he left
+the cabin.  As he reached the deck, he saw that the first faint
+indications of the coming dawn had appeared in the eastern horizon--not
+streaks of light exactly, but a less dense gloom, which could best be
+distinguished by contrasting it with the darkness of the opposite
+horizon, and, at that instant, the flash of a gun was seen in the same
+quarter, and the sound came booming over the water towards them.
+
+"Ah! there comes the cutter," he exclaimed; "Tompion is firing his brass
+gun to draw our attention.  Don't fire again, Mr Black, it is not
+necessary, and will disturb Mr Linton, but burn a blue light--it will
+prevent their going out of their course, for it will be some time before
+they will otherwise be able to distinguish us."
+
+The gunner had the blue light already, expecting to be called on to use
+it, and the next instant a lurid glare illumined the whole ship; the
+sails, the spars, and the countenances of the people, all assumed a
+sepulchral hue, which gave her the appearance of some phantom bark, such
+as has appeared to the excited imagination of many a seaman in his
+wandering through those distant and torrid climes, whose pestilential
+vapours, rising from the overteeming earth, fever his blood and cut
+short his span of life.
+
+It had scarcely done burning before another gun was fired; but whether
+as a signal, or for any other reason, it was, at first, impossible to
+say, till several others followed in rapid succession.
+
+"It must be a summons to us," observed the first lieutenant to the
+master.  "Fill the fore-topsail, and let fall the fore-sail--we will, at
+all events, stand on as close as we can to them."
+
+The breeze, which sent the _Ione_ along, was very light, so that some
+time elapsed before she neared the spot whence the firing had been
+supposed to proceed.  Saltwell was on the point of ordering another blue
+light to be burned, when a loud hail was heard, and, directly
+afterwards, the boats were seen approaching as fast as the weary crews
+could send them through the water.
+
+"Has Mr Linton got back alive?" were the first words heard spoken by
+Tompion.
+
+"Yes--yes, all right," was the answer.
+
+"Thank Heaven for that!" he exclaimed; and, as soon as the cutter ran
+alongside, he jumped on deck and went aft to report himself as come on
+board.
+
+"I hope you do not think that I have done wrong, sir," he said, when he
+had finished his account of what had occurred.  "I fully thought we
+should capture the mistico, and I could not tell but what some of our
+friends had been taken on board her."
+
+"No, Mr Tompion, I have no reason to find fault with your behaviour.
+As far as I can judge, you showed judgment and gallantry, which, in an
+officer, it is all important should always be combined.  And, at all
+events, you have got clear out of the scrape, though you certainly ran a
+great risk of being captured."
+
+"Well, sir, I am very glad you approve of what I have done," answered
+Tompion.  "And now, sir, if you will allow me to make a suggestion, I
+would keep off the island till daylight; for, not long ago, as we were
+pulling here, both Duff and I fancied we heard some firing off the mouth
+of the harbour, but we could not tell for certain, we've had such a din
+of popping in our ears all night; however, I cannot help thinking some
+of the party have made another attempt to escape."
+
+"I am afraid that there is very little chance of that," said Saltwell.
+"If that villain, Zappa, does not murder them, it is more than I expect.
+However, we'll stand on towards the island till daybreak, as you
+suggest; and now, Mr Tompion, I should think you require both rest and
+food, so go down below and take them.  Tell Mason to give you and Mr
+Duff whatever he has got in the gun-room--you'll get it quicker there
+than in your own berth."
+
+Midshipmen are proverbially hungry, and I need not say that our two
+young friends did ample justice to a cold round of beef, which the
+gun-room steward placed before them.
+
+Saltwell had scarcely turned in when he was again roused up by Togle,
+the midshipman of the watch, who came to tell him that a suspicious sail
+was seen to the eastward.  He immediately came on deck; and just in the
+centre of the red glow on the sky, which precedes the rising of the
+bright luminary of day, there appeared the tapering sails of a
+lateen-rigged craft, looking like the dark fin of a huge shark, just
+floating on the lead-coloured waters.
+
+"She's standing this way too, by Jove!" he exclaimed.  "And give me a
+glass.  I thought so; she's in chase of a small boat under sail, just
+a-head of her Mr Togle, go aloft with a glass, and see what you can
+make out.  I can distinguish little more than the upper leech of the
+sail; and were it not so calm, even that could not be seen."
+
+Togle hailed from aloft, to say that there was certainly a boat a-head
+of the stranger.
+
+"I think that I can even make out that she has people in her, as she is
+much nearer us than the mistico, which keeps firing at her every now and
+then."
+
+"You are right," said the lieutenant, as the midshipman came on deck.
+"She is little more than half way between us.  All hands make sail!  We
+must do our best to overhaul her first; for, though I have slight hopes
+on the subject, she may have some of our friends in her, trying to
+escape."
+
+Every stitch of canvas the brig could carry on a wind was now set; but
+the mistico stood boldly on, and it became a matter of great doubt
+whether or not she would have time to get hold of her prey, and escape
+back to port before the _Ione_ could come up with her.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY THREE.
+
+The triumph of Zappa at recovering Miss Garden was great, in proportion
+to his anger against those whom he suspected to have assisted at her
+escape; but once having got her again in his power, and safe inside his
+well-fortified harbour, he felt as a cat does towards the unfortunate
+mouse it has caught and killed--that he might leave and return to her
+when he pleased, without a chance of her again running away: he
+therefore hurried off to the fort, at the summit of the cliffs, to
+superintend the destruction of the English flotilla, which he believed
+had been sent against him; for he could not have supposed that so small
+a force as was really there would have thus boldly followed him to the
+very mouth of his den.
+
+On his arrival at the fort, he found old Vlacco busily engaged in
+pointing the guns to bear down on the British boats; and on his sounding
+his well-known bugle, a large number of his followers collected with
+their fire-arms, to assist in the defence of the post.  While they all
+were occupied in firing at the enemy, Vlacco sent into the tower to
+bring a supply of powder for the guns, from some casks, which, with the
+usual carelessness of the Greeks, had been left there without the
+slightest precaution against accident.  A cask was broached, and much of
+the powder scattered about.  After the boats had disappeared, the
+pirates were retiring from the fort, when Tompion's gallant attack on
+the mistico called them back, and it was at this time that a spark from
+the lantern of a man, sent for a further supply of powder, fell among
+the scattered grains, and produced the conflagration I have before
+spoken of.  As the flames burst forth, and burnt with terrific energy,
+Zappa flew towards the building, in vain endeavouring to find means of
+entrance.  Wherever he attempted it at the door or window, the fire
+drove him back.  In vain he called on the name of Nina.  She neither
+answered nor did she appear at either of the casements.  His usual calm
+demeanour had completely deserted him, and he seemed like a madman as he
+rushed round the building, urging his followers to bring ladders to
+enable him to mount to the story, where he expected to find her.  Two
+were at last found, but they were far too short to be of use, and he was
+soon warned to retire to a distance by the explosion of another cask of
+powder, which shook the old walls to their foundation, and he had
+scarcely got to a secure position, when the remainder igniting, the
+whole edifice came tumbling down at once, and lay a heap of smoking
+ruins on the ground.  Some of the burning embers had fallen on the roof
+of the adjoining building, and that now blazed up, and being very dry
+and rotten, burnt with equal fury, so that in a very short time it was
+reduced to a heap of ashes: the old walls of the castle, against which
+it was built, alone standing.  It was thus that all traces of the means
+by which the prisoners had made their escape were obliterated.  The
+islanders could do nothing to stop the progress of the flames, for the
+only water procurable was from a deep well, whence only a small quantity
+could be drawn up at a time, and there were no means at hand to get it
+from the sea, over the cliffs.
+
+The conflagration had the effect of attracting the population, far and
+near, to the spot--the fishermen and other inhabitants of the
+neighbouring village, the seamen from the vessels, and indeed everybody
+in the bay, came rushing up the ravine to see what was taking place.
+
+Zappa stood at a distance, contemplating the scene of havoc.  He thought
+of Nina in all her youth and beauty, of her fond affection, her deep
+devotion, of all the sacrifices she had made for him--and callous and
+bad as was his heart, a transient pang of bitter regret visited it, for
+the cruel return he had made her.
+
+"This, then, Nina Montifalcone, is the fate I have reserved for you.  An
+agonising death the only reward I can give you for that love which still
+endured after I had torn aside the bright veil with which your fervid
+imagination had clothed me, and showed myself to you in my real
+colours--that love which I verily believed would have endured after you
+knew that my heart had been captivated by one still younger, still more
+beautiful, than yourself."
+
+As he gave vent aloud to these feelings, so strange to his bosom, which
+now agitated him, he suddenly stood like one transfixed, his breath came
+thick, his eye dilated, for there before him, with the full glare of the
+fire falling on her, stood the figure of Nina.  Her countenance was pale
+as death, and she neither spoke nor approached him.
+
+"Who are you?" he exclaimed at length, in a voice trembling with
+emotion; "speak, if you would not drive me to distraction.  Tell me
+whence you come, and why you now come to seek me."
+
+"I am Nina Montifalcone,--some time your wife, whom you oft have told
+you loved," she replied, in a tone of deep dejection.  "What I soon
+shall be, the greedy worm may best tell."
+
+Her voice recalled him to his senses, though her words seemed strange.
+
+"Nina," he exclaimed, "you overheard my vain ravings when I thought you
+had fallen a victim to yon devouring flames; but think no more of them,
+and tell me by what miracle you escaped from the tower, before the
+flames burst forth--for afterwards, no power could have saved you."
+
+"I had gone to comfort and succour the unfortunate, those whom your
+injustice has made prisoners in this island, and I sought you even now
+to plead for them," she answered boldly; the tone of meek sorrow with
+which she had before spoken being no longer discernible.
+
+"You take me unawares, and would work on me at a weak moment, Nina," he
+replied.  "But know you, girl, that the persons of whom you speak are
+spies, come here in disguise to work my destruction?  Ah! you look
+surprised, incredulous!  Yes, these men--these pretended Maltese--are no
+other than Englishmen, belonging to a ship of war lying at no great
+distance from this island, for the express purpose of capturing my
+vessel, my gallant _Sea Hawk_, if they can fall in with her; and I have
+not told you all--their leader is the captain himself, the very man to
+whom that fair English girl, of whom you are so foolishly jealous, is
+betrothed.  I knew this, I say, from the first; but I pretended
+ignorance, for I wished to discover who were their accomplices among
+those I trusted.  He even now lies dead or dying in the bay below, and I
+left the fair girl with him, that she might know I did not kill him; but
+I tell you, Nina, if he were to recover, he should not live to escape,
+and to bring destruction on me.  If he dies now, it is through his own
+folly, and no one can accuse me of having slain him; so, except you
+would wish to make his blood rest on my head, do not pray for his
+recovery."
+
+"Oh! you would not do so black a deed--you would not slay an innocent
+man because he came to regain the bride of whom you had deprived him!
+for I feel assured that for no other object did he visit this island;
+and that should he recover, were you to give her to him, and allow him
+and those who came with him to depart, he would promise never to molest
+you, or to take advantage in any way of the knowledge he has obtained by
+his visit to this island."
+
+Nina spoke with firmness and energy, as she said this, for she fancied
+that her arguments were so good, she could not fail to gain her object.
+
+"Ah! have you been consulting with the English signora and her lover,
+that you plead their cause so well?" he exclaimed, with the bitter tone
+in which he often spoke.  "Well, I will see to it, and now come to the
+fair lady's palace, she will afford us lodging there, since ours is
+burnt down; which, Nina, it appears, troubles you but little.  Know you
+not, girl, that I have there lost property to the value of many thousand
+piastres?  That is alone enough to sour a man's temper, till he can
+replace them, which, were I to follow your wishes, it would be long
+enough before I could do."
+
+"My mind was too much occupied with the object I have spoken to you
+about, to think of the loss, even though everything I possessed was
+destroyed," she replied, quietly.  "But I still felt thankful that I was
+preserved from the dreadful fate which would have been mine had I
+remained in the building; and if you also feel gratitude to Heaven for
+this, show it by granting life and liberty to the English captain and
+his friends.  You accuse me of being influenced by them to plead their
+cause; but it is not they who influence me,--it is honour, justice,
+right, and oh! my husband, remember that their fate may soon be yours,
+and that if you show not mercy to them, you can expect none in return."
+
+"I know that, Nina, I expect none," he answered, fiercely.  "Were I to
+fall into the power of my enemies, they would tear me limb from limb,
+and mock my dying agonies with their laughter, ere they showed me mercy
+or gave me liberty.  I do, Nina, as I expect to be done by; I hope for
+nothing else.  But why do I stand prating here?  My house is burnt to
+the ground, and my property destroyed, so we must go and crave shelter
+of the Signora Ada, for you and I have many things to do before I again
+close my eyes in sleep."
+
+When they arrived at the Stranger's Tower, as the Greeks had called the
+building inhabited by Ada, they found that she and Marianna had already
+arrived there, and returned to their former quarters, according to
+Nina's advice, as if nothing had happened to disturb them.  She had,
+indeed, seen them safe lodged there before she sought her husband; and
+she now returned to them by his directions, to take some rest, which she
+much required, while he occupied the lower and still unfurnished chamber
+as a sort of council-hall, where he summoned Vlacco and some of his
+chief officers to consult what, under the present circumstances, it
+would be necessary for them to do.
+
+As soon as old Vlacco and one or two others had arrived, he sent to have
+all the prisoners brought before him, that he might examine them
+respecting their object in venturing on his island, and their motive for
+leaving it.  His visit to the _Ione_ must be remembered, and that he
+there only learned that her captain had gone on a secret expedition, and
+he naturally concluded that he was accompanied by his own crew.  His
+surprise was, therefore, very great, when Captain Vassilato, Bowse, and
+the Maltese, Pietro, were dragged rudely into his presence.
+
+"What!" he muttered, as he saw the honest skipper.  "Have my people
+again done their work so clumsily, that another vessel has floated to
+bear evidence against me?  It must be he, and yet he looks so
+unconscious of having seen me before, that I must be deceived.  There
+were five prisoners," he remarked, aloud.  "Where are the other two?"
+
+"We cannot find them, chief," was the answer.  "We have looked in every
+direction, we have inquired of all, but no one has seen them or heard of
+them."
+
+"How is this?" exclaimed Zappa.  "I left one of them, whom I knew to be
+no other than the captain of an English ship of war, sent here to watch
+the _Sea Hawk_, wounded and dying in old Listi's boat, with the stranger
+lady and her attendant watching him, and as they, I hear, have already
+returned here, I suppose they would not have deserted him.  Let them and
+the Lady Nina be summoned."
+
+In two minutes the two ladies and Marianna stood before him; but he
+neither rose nor showed them any courtesy.
+
+"Can you inform me, signora, where Captain Fleetwood is to be found?" he
+exclaimed, with vehemence, addressing Miss Garden, in Italian.  "Ah, you
+thought I was so blind as not to recognise him; you thought I did not
+observe the fond affection with which you bent over him as he lay
+wounded in the boat; indeed, you fancied that we keep so careless a
+watch in this island, that any strangers may come without our
+discovering them; but let that hope desert you for the future, and now
+answer me truly, madam."
+
+This was the first intimation that Ada had received that the disguise of
+Fleetwood had been seen through, and horror at what the consequences
+might be almost made her sink fainting on the ground; but by a strenuous
+effort, she recovered sufficiently to answer with apparent calmness--
+
+"The person, whom you state to be Captain Fleetwood, was removed from
+the boat to the hut of a fisherman on the beach, as he was in no
+condition to be carried up here."
+
+"By whom--by whom was he removed?" asked the pirate, impatiently.  "You
+could not have carried him."
+
+"By a man habited as a Maltese, and by your own surgeon, whom I had
+summoned to attend on him," replied Ada, firmly.
+
+"Why, that must be Salamonsi's cottage," remarked Zappa, turning to
+Vlacco.  "Send down forthwith, and let the boy and Signor Paolo be
+brought up here; and mark you, if the English captain has recovered the
+use of his tongue, let him be conveyed here also--he shall answer for
+himself."  He said this in Romaic, so Ada did not understand the cruel
+order; but Nina did, and, with an imploring look, she stepped to his
+side, and besought him to revoke the command; but he roughly repulsed
+her, and, turning to the other three prisoners, he asked, in the _lingua
+Franca_, often used by him,--"By what right have you, who were
+hospitably entertained in this island, attempted to run off with persons
+whom you knew were my prisoners?"
+
+On this the Maltese seaman, Pietro, stepped forward, and, with the
+volubility for which the islanders are celebrated, made the long
+statement which had been previously agreed on, finishing by stating that
+he and his two companions had been engaged by the lady to convey her on
+board an English ship, and that they had no reason to suppose they were
+injuring any one by so doing.  As this was all said in Maltese, scarcely
+a word of which language Zappa understood, he was not a little puzzled,
+and was insisting on having it repeated in some more intelligible
+tongue, when Marianna, who was highly delighted with it, not the less so
+that she knew it contained scarcely a word of truth, volunteered to
+translate it into Italian, and immediately began with such little
+additions and touches of her own as she thought would increase the force
+and probability of the story.
+
+"That will do," said Zappa, who was not very easily imposed upon, as she
+was continuing her own commentaries on what had occurred; then turning
+to Captain Vassilato, "What defence have you to make?"
+
+"As you do not understand my language, and I speak but little _lingua
+Franca_, I can say no more than my shipmate," he replied between his
+teeth, in the language he mentioned.
+
+"And you," said Zappa, in the same patois, turning to Bowse.  "What have
+you to say for yourself."
+
+Poor Bowse, who knew but little of any language except his
+mother-tongue, his accent undeniably betraying him whenever he did
+attempt to express himself, thought silence would be his best course, so
+shaking his head he pointed to his tongue and gave forth some
+inarticulate sounds, unlike any known dialect.
+
+"You have spoken loud enough before, accursed spy," exclaimed the
+pirate, in Italian, starting up, and menacing him with his dagger.  "So
+you thought I did not know you either; you thought I should not remember
+the man with whom I once have crossed blades, even though I fancied he
+was food for the fish of the sea.  Fools that you were to venture into
+the lion's den; or, venturing in, to attempt to carry off his prey.  But
+enough of this, your guilt is clear; you came as spies, and you shall
+meet their reward.  Over the cliffs with the three; we will quickly send
+their companions after them."
+
+He said this in Italian, and then repeated it in Romaic.
+
+Old Vlacco, who was now in his element, and delighted at the decision of
+his chief--indeed, he longed to propose that Ada and Marianna should be
+made to bear them company--seized the unfortunate men, and was dragging
+them off with the aid of others of the pirates, when Nina flew to the
+door to bar their exit.
+
+"No, this must not, this shall not be!" she exclaimed, in a voice hoarse
+and trembling with agitation, so unlike her own usual sweet tone.
+"Wretch, pirate, robber, murderer!  You have crimes enough already on
+your head, without adding others of yet blacker dye, to drag me and all
+who witness them down to destruction with yourself.  If you murder them,
+you murder me, for I will not live to be the wife of a wretch so
+accursed; and, think you that yon fair girl would yield to your wishes--
+would, forsooth, become your bride, even were I gone, and her brave
+lover also dead, and no one even on earth to protect her?  I tell you,
+monster, no!  You have seen, that meek and delicate as she appears, how
+much she can endure without complaining; you have yet to learn that she
+has an unconquerable spirit, and a reliance on the God of Heaven, which
+would enable her to defend herself from you.  Now, do your worst!
+Murder me if you will.  It will but be a fair return for what I have
+lost for you.  Murder those men.  Insist on your followers executing
+your vile commands, and, from that moment, you lose my love, valueless
+it may be, and you lose all hopes of gaining that of any other human
+creature whose love is worth the winning, and who knows of your
+misdeeds; and you bring down the sure and rapid vengeance of an outraged
+Heaven on your defenceless head."
+
+The pirate at first heard her thus boldly speak with astonishment, and
+then with rage, which increased till it passed his control.  His hand
+had been clutching his dagger; and, as she uttered these last words,
+almost, it is to be hoped, before he himself was aware of what he was
+about, he hurled it with terrific violence at her, uttering a howl like
+that of a tiger.  The weapon flew from his hand; it wounded her delicate
+neck, and stuck quivering in the rough planking of the door.  She
+neither screamed nor sank to the ground, but stood, as before, unmoved
+as a marble statue, though her cheek blanched to a yet more pallid hue
+than before, while the red stream issued from the wound, and ran down
+her bosom.  Ada sprang forward to support her, but she waved her off.
+
+"Stay," she said, "I must yet speak again.  That unmanly blow has done
+more than pierce the frail body, it has cut asunder ties which I thought
+would have endured till life became extinct; it has unriveted links
+which I believed would have survived, in strength and beauty, the decay
+even of the cold grave; but I have been taught this night to abhor the
+false idol I once worshipped so devotedly; and now I shall welcome
+death, come when it may, as my only release from misery.  Ah! that wound
+would have been less unkind had it ended at once the bitter mockery of
+life!"
+
+Even the callous pirate, as he saw the blood flowing from the pure neck
+which had been so often bent in fondness over him, felt a pang of
+regret, and a dread of the consequences, not unmixed with admiration of
+a spirit so determined as she exhibited.
+
+"Pardon me, Nina!" he exclaimed, springing towards her.  "I knew not
+what I was about.  I would not injure you, girl, for worlds!  Say you
+forgive me--say you are not hurt, and I will do all you desire with
+regard to these men."
+
+"The wound is but a scratch, as you may see," she answered, calmly,
+keeping him off with her hands, and still standing before the door.
+"That will quickly heal.  My forgiveness can be but of little value to
+you, but you have it, and my petition is, that you do not injure these
+men."
+
+"You have preserved their lives for this night, at all events; but I
+cannot let them go free to betray me and my followers to our enemies,"
+he answered.  "Vlacco, there are, I think, some chambers beneath this
+tower, and formerly used as dungeons, which may again serve the purpose
+when cleared out of rubbish.  They will not be able easily to escape
+from thence; and, meantime, place a strong guard upon them in the
+basement story, and see that they hold communication with no one."
+
+The old pirate, with an angry look, showed the disappointment he felt at
+not being allowed to dispense summary justice to the prisoners,
+signified to his chief that his orders should be strictly obeyed; and,
+just as matters had been brought into this state, the messenger, who had
+been sent to bring up the prisoners and Signor Paolo, returned with the
+announcement that none of them were to be found.  The old fisherman
+accompanied them, with great dismay in his looks, asserting that he had
+nothing at all to do with the matter.  He had but one instant returned
+to his cottage, after having assisted in the endeavours to extinguish
+the fire; he found the door open, and some one had apparently been
+placed on the mats, which served as his bed, for there was some blood on
+them, and some pieces of linen and lint lying about, and that was all he
+knew.  He had not spoken to, nor seen Signor Paolo that night.  Zappa's
+anger was very great at hearing this, and he was very nearly revoking
+the reprieve he had granted to the other prisoners.  He believed that
+treachery had been practised, though, except Paolo and Nina, he knew not
+whom to suspect; and, while she denied all knowledge of the event, her
+brother was nowhere to be found; so, weary as he was, he set off with
+Vlacco and his officers to investigate the matter at the bay.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY FOUR.
+
+Left at liberty, Nina and Ada returned to the upper chamber of the
+tower, where the latter entreated the unhappy Italian girl to allow her
+to dress the wound in her shoulder, which was far deeper and more
+serious than she had acknowledged to Zappa; but she refused all
+assistance.
+
+"No," she said; "no hand but mine shall tend the wound which he has
+given; and it matters but little, for I feel that the clouds of my
+destiny are gathering over me, and that very soon the storm will burst
+to overwhelm me."
+
+But her will was more powerful than her frame, and as she spoke she sank
+down on the divan, and would have fallen to the ground, had not Ada and
+Marianna ran to support her.  Overcome with agitation and loss of blood,
+she had fainted, and taking advantage of the opportunity, they placed
+her on a couch, and while they applied restoratives, they bathed the
+wound, and tried to staunch the blood.  She gave signs at length of
+life; but hers was no ordinary faint, and for hours did she continue in
+that state, wavering on the verge of death.  As Ada herself, fevered and
+weary, sat by the side of her friend, she felt almost equally overcome
+with alarm and anxiety for the fate of her lover.  What could have
+become of him?  Had Paolo proved treacherous, and, afraid of his
+recovery, spirited him away, and cast him over the cliffs? or was she
+wronging the young Italian, and had he not, mistrusting the mercy of the
+pirate chief, concealed him in some secret place till his anger had worn
+off?  This she owned to herself was the most probable cause; but love,
+even on ordinary occasions, is full of doubt and fears, much more so
+then had she reason for dread under the circumstances in which he was
+placed.  While she believed Zappa was ignorant of who he was, she
+trusted he was in no other danger than that resulting from his wound;
+but now that he was discovered, after the dreadful exhibition she had
+witnessed of the pirate's temper, she trembled at what might be his
+fate.  Why had she quitted him? she thought.  Why had she not boldly
+avowed who he was, and her love for him, and dared the pirate to injure
+him?  She had seen the successful effects Nina had produced by such
+behaviour on the daring outlaw--why had she not acted in the same
+manner?  She bitterly accused herself of having deserted him, of having
+trusted him to strangers, and, more than all, of being the cause of his
+death.  This thought gave her the most poignant grief, and she prayed
+that if Heaven had ordained that he must thus die, she might be spared
+the misery of knowing it.  Daylight surprised her still sitting by the
+couch whereon lay the yet more unhappy Nina.
+
+"And yet, compared to that poor girl's fate, mine is blessed indeed,"
+she thought, as she, watched those pallid features, on which an
+expression of acute pain still rested.  "She staked all for love, and
+has found the idol she madly worshipped turned into a demon, who she
+feels will destroy her.  She, too, has an accusing conscience to keep
+happiness at a distance.  She remembers that she burst asunder the bonds
+of duty, that she caused the death of a fond parent; while I, through
+Heaven's mercy, have never been subject to the temptation to create for
+myself a retrospect so dreadful."
+
+It would be well, indeed, if all in a position likely to read these
+pages would remember, as did Ada Garden, when they are subjected to
+misfortune or suffering, that there are thousands around them in a far,
+far worse condition, deprived of all that can make life of value,
+without hope in this world or the next, and men they would never dare to
+arraign the dispensation of Providence, by which they receive the
+infliction from which they suffer, and would feel that even thus they
+are blessed above their fellows.  Poor Ada saw that Marianna still
+slept, and, fearful lest Nina should require assistance, she was herself
+afraid of retiring to rest, though weariness made her head fall
+frequently on her bosom.  At length she was aroused by a gentle knock at
+the door, and little Mila entered the room.  She was evidently full of
+something which she wished to communicate, and told a long story, not a
+word of which Ada could understand.  So eager had she been, that she did
+not perceive the condition to which Nina was reduced, believing that she
+was still asleep from simple fatigue, but her eye falling on her, she
+burst into loud lamentations of grief, which very nearly awoke her from
+the lethargy into which she had fallen.  It was the means, however, of
+awaking Marianna, by whose aid she was able to make the little girl
+comprehend the importance of seeking out Paolo, and bringing him to
+attend on his sister.  She was absent nearly two hours, but at length
+returned, accompanied by the Italian.  Eager as Ada was to gain tidings
+of Fleetwood, she forbore to ask him any questions till he had recovered
+from the state of agitation into which he was thrown by seeing the
+condition of his unhappy sister.
+
+"You need not tell me who has done this deed," he muttered, in a hoarse
+voice, as he bent over her.  "I knew it would come to this--I knew, when
+weary of her, he would cast her aside as a child its broken toy, or
+would thus destroy her in his mad passion.  Yet it would have been
+kinder had he struck deeper, and thus ended her misery with a blow.  I
+have remained near her--I have watched over her, ill-treated and
+despised as I have been,--that, when this should be her fate, though I
+could not shield her from it, I might yet avenge her death.  Yes, my
+sweet Nina, indifferent as you may deem me, I love you deeply."
+
+"But, Signor Paolo," said Ada, not knowing how long he might continue in
+this strain, "your sister is still alive, and I trust that by the aid of
+your skill, her wound may neither be mortal nor of much consequence."
+
+"Not mortal, lady," he said, bitterly; "and yet, I tell you, it would
+have killed her had it but scratched the skin.  It is the spirit with
+which that dagger was cast will destroy her far quicker than the wound."
+
+Ada now entreated him to examine into his sister's condition; and at
+length, grown more calm, he set skilfully about his office, and he
+confessed that, if fever did not set in, the wound was of slight
+importance.
+
+When he was at liberty, Ada at last asked him to give her tidings of
+Fleetwood; but he denied all knowledge of him, saying, that he had left
+him, with Raby watching him, at the fisherman's hut, and that on his
+return, both were gone, and that he could nowhere discover them.
+
+Mila, now having an interpreter, came forward with her version of the
+story.  She said she had heard that their chief had, on quitting the
+tower, come down to the bay in a state of passion, in which he had never
+before been seen, at the non-appearance of the two other prisoners, whom
+he vowed he would execute the moment they were discovered; that he had
+caused diligent search to be made for them in every direction, with the
+same want of success, till, at last a small boat belonging to the _Zoe_
+was found to be missing, in which it was, consequently, supposed they
+had escaped.
+
+"Thank Heaven!" ejaculated Ada, with a gleam of joy on her countenance,
+which showed how much her heart was relieved.  "Oh, Signor Paolo, you
+know not how grateful I am to you for your generous assistance in the
+matter."
+
+"Do not thank me, lady, nor believe that I knew of, or had any hand in
+the escape of your countrymen, if indeed they have escaped, of which I
+would entreat you not to be too sanguine," he replied; but, seeing the
+reaction his words were producing, he added, "and yet, remember, I have
+no reason to suppose that they are not in a place of safety.  More I
+cannot say--and I beseech you not to ask me."
+
+"But I have not told you all," interrupted little Mila, who guessed that
+he was no longer translating what she had said.  "The moment the chief
+found that the boat was gone, he ordered as many men as she can carry to
+go on board the _Zoe_, and he himself accompanied them.  She immediately
+set sail in pursuit, and they say that there is no doubt of the little
+boat being overtaken; and that even were he to meet the larger boats
+which made the attack on the island, the mistico will, without doubt,
+sink them all, and destroy everybody in them."
+
+Paolo translated to Ada what Mila said, and the account again renewed
+her fears for Fleetwood's safety, though still she did not allow hope to
+abandon her.
+
+It may seem that the Italian would have acted a more judicious part, had
+he not given the latter information; but he was unhappily himself
+influenced by two motives; the one right, and good, and generous--the
+spontaneous result of his better nature; the other arising from his
+yielding to temptation, which was selfish, mad, and wicked.  The first
+prompted him to run every personal risk to save his rival from the
+pirate's anger; the other made him wish for his death, and eager to
+deprive him of the love of the fair English girl, whom, he still fancied
+he might save from Zappa's power, and win her for himself.
+
+For the present, Paolo had a holy and absorbing employment for his mind,
+in tending his unhappy sister, who, under his judicious care, recovered,
+sooner than Ada had expected, from the effect of her wound, though she
+saw, too truly, that her words were verified, and that the weapon had
+struck deeper than the eye could reach.
+
+Ada was now confined completely to the upper room of the tower, both
+because she would not quit her friend, and that she might avoid any risk
+of encountering Zappa, who had taken up his abode in the lower part of
+it.  Paolo was her only means of knowing what was going forward in the
+world without, and she felt an unwillingness to hold more communication
+with him than was absolutely necessary; indeed, nothing he said could
+dispel her fears.
+
+The _Zoe_, it appeared, had been out all day; but an ominous silence had
+been kept as to the result of her expedition.  Some said she had
+overtaken the boat, and brought back the prisoners; others, that the
+pirate had, in his rage, ordered the guns to be pointed down on her, and
+sunk her, with them on board; while, again, some asserted that the
+prisoners had not escaped from the island at all, and that they were
+concealed somewhere in it.
+
+This conflicting evidence was little calculated to alleviate her
+anxiety; but her heart was fresh and young--her health and spirits were
+unbroken, and the air which was wafted through her casement was bright
+and pure, and she still hoped on for the best.  Meantime the pirates
+were not idle; and she observed from her window, that they were engaged
+all day long in strengthening and improving the fortification of the
+castle, as well as those on the other side of the harbour.  They threw
+up embankments, also, across the neck of land which joined the rock on
+which the castle stood, to the right of the island, and planted guns to
+defend the approach to it, as also a whole line along the cliff, which
+overlooked the entrance to the harbour.
+
+Provisions of all sorts were got in from every part of the island, and
+huts were erected, in which to store them; for the men, themselves
+accustomed from their youth to the roughest life, cared not for shelter,
+so that there was little chance of their being compelled, by famine, to
+yield.
+
+Nothing, indeed, was neglected, which might enable them to defend their
+stronghold against any force sent against it.
+
+The _Sea Hawk_ was also carefully refitted, and the two misticoes made
+ready for defence or flight.
+
+The _Zoe_ was again sent out to reconnoitre.  She had been absent for
+two days, and the pirate began to be alarmed for her safety, and to
+argue that the enemy were probably approaching, and that she had fallen
+into her hands.  All was, consequently, activity and excitement.  The
+crew of the _Sea Hawk_ went on board to man her, and those of the
+islanders destined to garrison the castle hurried up there with their
+arms ready for action.  At length, a sail was discerned approaching the
+island, and she was soon pronounced to be the _Zoe_.  Nearer and nearer
+she drew to the land, till there was no doubt of her identity, and as
+she entered the harbour, she was warmly greeted by those on shore, who
+hurried down to learn the news she brought.  Her crew reported that they
+had visited the island when the English brig-of-war had last been seen,
+but she was not there, nor could they gain any tidings of her; but that
+they had, on the following day, when standing to the southward, made out
+three sails, which, from the squareness of their yards, they conjectured
+to be men-of-war, and that they were standing on a bowline to the
+eastward, with the wind at north, but that they deemed it imprudent to
+approach nearer to ascertain further particulars.
+
+This information prevented Zappa from taking a cruise in the _Sea Hawk_,
+as he had been intending, both to gain further intelligence of the
+enemy, and to pick up a few prizes to satisfy the impatience of his
+people, who began to murmur at the length of time which had passed since
+they had been engaged in what they considered useful activity, as well
+as to replace the property he had lost by the burning of his tower.
+
+Ada had not neglected to inquire for the prisoners who had so severely
+suffered in her cause, and, though not allowed to communicate with them,
+she learned from Paolo that they were not treated with any unusual
+severity, farther than being confined in a chamber under ground, where
+very little light or air could penetrate, and that he believed their
+lives were in no danger.
+
+Nina never spoke of the dreadful night when she had first felt the
+fierceness of her husband's anger; but her sunken eye, her hollow voice,
+and faded cheek, showed what the effect had been, though, when she met
+him, she tried to smile as of yore, and to attempt to win him to his
+better mood.
+
+His followers, however, remarked that an ominous change had come over
+him, and that his mind at times seemed wavering on its throne.
+
+The unhappy Paolo still nourished in silence his love for Ada, and day
+by day he allowed it to increase, till he could scarcely conceal his
+feelings in her presence.
+
+It was night, and he stood where he had spent many an hour, on the cliff
+beneath her window.  No moon was in the sky, and the stars were
+concealed by a canopy of clouds which hung over the sea, and the wind
+moaned amid the rocks and ruined buildings with a melancholy tone well
+consonant to his feelings.
+
+Suddenly the perfect silence which had existed was broken by loud,
+terrific cries; the roar of cannon--the rattle of musketry--the cheers,
+and shrieks, and fierce imprecations of men striving in deadly combat;
+where had lately reigned silence and darkness, all was now the wildest
+confusion and uproar, and lighted up with the blaze of the death-dealing
+musketry.
+
+The pirate rushed by, and entered Ada's tower, giving orders to his
+followers, the meaning of which no sooner did Paolo understand, than
+exclaiming, "Now is the time, or she is lost to me for ever," he hurried
+after him.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY FIVE.
+
+We left the _Ione_, at the dawn of a fine morning, beating up towards a
+small boat, which had been observed running to the westward, while a
+mistico was seen off the island, directly before the wind, apparently in
+chase of her.  The boat, it was judged, was about half way between the
+two vessels; but then the _Ione_ was nearly dead to leeward, while the
+mistico was directly to windward, though it was a question how far she
+would venture to chase the boat, or whether she would attempt to carry
+her off within range of the brig's guns.
+
+As long as the mistico could keep well to windward, and out of gun-shot,
+from the closeness with which she could lay to the wind, and her fast
+sailing, she might carry off her prey, if such was her object, even
+before the eyes of those on board the English ship, without their being
+able to employ any means to prevent her so doing.
+
+"Ah, the rascals know what they are about," said the master, as he
+watched the Greek vessel through his glass.  "She is one of those
+piratical craft belonging to the nest of scoundrels on the island there,
+depend upon it; and they were trying to get hold of the boat, or to run
+her down, which they are just as likely to do as not, and then they'll
+be off again in the wind's eye, like a shot, before we can get up to
+them, and snug inside their rocks."
+
+"I suspect you are right, master," said Saltwell.  "And I cannot help
+thinking, also, that the boat has some of our friends on board.  Would
+to Heaven the breeze would veer a few more points to the southward, and
+enable us to lay up to her before the mistico reaches her."
+
+"I don't see what more we can do to go along faster," said the master.
+"Our canvas never stood better, nor did the brig ever make more way
+through the water with the same wind."
+
+"The mistico draws very fast on the boat, and, by Jove, the villains are
+firing at her," exclaimed Saltwell, who had been again eagerly watching
+the chase through his glass.  "Still she bravely holds her own.  Oh,
+there's no doubt of her having our friends on board.  See that the guns
+are ready, and cover her as soon as we get near enough; but we must take
+care not to hit the boat instead of the mistico."
+
+The boat was now about two miles off, and the mistico threes.  The
+former had only a sort of lug set; and, as well as could be seen at that
+distance, there was but the one person on board, who steered.  If there
+were any others, they had wisely stowed themselves away at the bottom of
+the boat, to be more out of the reach of the enemy's shot.  The breeze,
+though fresh, was not too strong to permit of her carrying her whole
+sail, and she flew rapidly before it; but the mistico went still faster,
+and, as Bill Hawkins, the captain of the fore-top, observed--
+
+"The little one looks for all the world like a small bird trying to
+escape from a hawk just ready to pounce down on it, and I hope we shall
+just come in to play the big eagle, and save her out of its claws."
+
+"She's the very same craft as we chased into harbour this blessed night,
+I shouldn't wonder," remarked Tom Derrick, who had been one of the
+cutter's crew.  "It would be a real pleasure to get hold of her, to
+string up every one of the villains at the yard-arm, for wounding poor
+Mr Linton; I should be sorry, indeed, if he was to lose the number of
+his mess."
+
+"So should I, old ship, and if ever we get an opportunity, won't we just
+pay off the murdering rascals for what they have done," said Hawkins.
+"My eyes, look there, how the big one is peppering the little chap; one
+would think she hadn't a whole plank left in her, and yet she stands on
+as bravely as if there warn't such a thing as a round-shot within a
+hundred miles of her."
+
+Such was truly the case; the shot from the long guns of the mistico must
+have flown close over her, and on either side; and, probably, several
+had gone through her sail, but seemingly none had touched her hull.  The
+_Ione_ had now opened the mistico free of the boat to the northward.
+
+"Stand by with the foremost starboard gun," cried Mr Saltwell, as they
+did so.  This was a long nine of brass, while the other guns were
+carronades.  "Fire!"
+
+The gunner, who considered himself a first-rate marksman, pointed the
+gun, and the shot going well clear of the boat, struck the mistico on
+the quarter, and those who were watching her with their glasses declared
+that they could see the splinters flying from her.  Still, so eager was
+she in the pursuit, that she would not haul her wind, seemingly
+determined not to do so till she had sunk the chase.  This there
+appeared every chance that she would do, for she had now got awfully
+near her, and it was surprising that her small-arm men had not contrived
+to pick off the helmsman, when the boat would, of course, have broached
+to, and have been her own.  Mr Saltwell again gave the order to fire as
+fast as the gun could be loaded and run out, but the skill of Mr Black
+did not shine so brilliantly as at the first attempt he made, though
+they went near enough to show the pirates what they were to expect if
+they persisted in their attempt.
+
+"Have the larboard gun ready there.  Hands about ship," cried the first
+lieutenant.
+
+Bound came the brig, and the gun was let fly.  The shot struck the
+mistico amidships, tearing away her gunnel, and creating the greatest
+confusion on board, if not destruction of life.  She found that, in her
+eagerness, she had gone rather too far, and putting down her helm, she
+gave a last revengeful broadside at her tiny chase, as she hauled her
+wind, and away she stood on a bowline towards the island.
+
+No sooner had she done so, than up sprung a figure in the stern sheets
+of the boat; and waving a cap round in his hand, seemed to be giving a
+cheer of derision.  The incautious action was returned by the pirates
+with a discharge of their swivel guns, and a shower of musketry, and he
+dropped into the bottom of the boat.
+
+"Poor fellow! the villains have killed him," exclaimed Mr Saltwell.
+
+"Yes, sir; and I'm sorry to say I think from the figure it is Jack Raby.
+It is just the thing he would do, too," said Tompion, whose glass had
+been fixed on the boat at the time.  "No--hurrah! the boat is standing
+on steadily with some one at the helm."
+
+"Thank Heaven! so she is," exclaimed Saltwell.  "Be ready there to heave
+the ship to, to let the boat come alongside."
+
+In five minutes more the brig was close up to the boat, and, to the
+surprise of all, the person in the stern sheets, who had been so long
+visible, was found to be a stuffed figure, covered with a _capote_, and
+a Greek cap on the top of it, while the head of Jack Raby was seen
+cautiously peering above the gunnel.  He very soon brought the boat
+alongside, when a couple of hands jumped in to assist him.
+
+"What, Raby, my good fellow, who have you there?" exclaimed the master,
+who was standing at the gangway with several of the midshipmen, eager to
+welcome their messmate.
+
+"I am sorry to say it is the captain, who is very badly hurt; but I was
+glad to get him off at any rate, for we've had a narrow escape of our
+lives," replied Raby, from the boat.
+
+This announcement was received with an expression of grief from all on
+board.  Saltwell, on hearing it, sprang to the gangway, to superintend
+the transfer of the captain to the deck, which was managed by lowering
+his own cot into the boat, and hoisting him up in it.  He was somewhat
+revived, though he was scarcely sensible of what was occurring; and when
+he was carried below, all waited anxiously to hear the surgeon's report.
+In this anxiety about getting the captain on board, the mistico was for
+the time entirely forgotten; and when at last Saltwell thought of her,
+and ordered the foretop-sail to be again filled in chase, she had got so
+far to windward as to be again almost out of gun-shot.  A few guns were
+fired after her, but the shot did not succeed in cutting away any of her
+spars or rigging, and she drew so fast ahead, that it was seen to be
+useless following her further.
+
+The brig's helm was accordingly put up, and she stood away to the
+southward, towing after her Raby's boat, which was kept in case she
+should be required for a future occasion.
+
+Everybody now crowded round Jack Raby, to learn from him all the events
+which had taken place; but Mr Saltwell summoned him, and made him go
+circumstantially over them to him, and he afterwards had to repeat them
+to all his messmates, and to the surgeon and purser, who had not heard
+them.
+
+As the reader is already well acquainted with most of them, I need only
+commence when he began his account of his successful escape from the
+bay, in which it appeared that he was assisted by no other person than
+Paolo Montifalcone.
+
+"You must know," he said, "that while the young Italian doctor was
+dressing the wounds, a fire broke out on the hill, above the bay, and
+the whole population rushed off to see the fire.  No sooner was the
+coast clear, than Paolo, as they called him, said to me--
+
+"`Now would be your time to escape, if you had anybody with you to
+manage a boat.'
+
+"Of course, I told him that I could do that perfectly well by myself.
+
+"`Well then,' he replied, `Hasten down to the beach, you will there find
+a small boat which we passed on our way here.  She has a sail in her,
+and oars, and if you are quick about it, you may get out of the harbour
+and join your friends before you are missed; and if you remain, you will
+be knocked on the head and thrown over the cliff, to a certainty.'
+
+"`You don't mean to say that you expect me to run away and leave my
+captain to die hereby himself,' I exclaimed, ready to knock him down,
+for I saw that he was in earnest in his proposal, though the idea had
+only just occurred to him.  `A pretty blackguard I shall be, indeed.'
+
+"`But I tell you he cannot live, and you will be sacrificed if you
+remain,' he argued.
+
+"`I tell you what it is, Signor Paolo,' I replied; `a midshipman's life
+is not reckoned of much value at the best, and I am not going to do a
+dirty action to save mine, I can tell you.  I'm much obliged to you for
+what you have done, and for your good intentions; but if the captain is
+to die, why it will be a consolation to him to die under the British
+flag, on board his own ship, and if you will lend me a hand to carry him
+down to the boat, why I can just as easy escape with him on board as by
+myself.  I'll trouble you also for some of your physic, and some lint
+and bandages, to doctor him with, and I hope he may yet do well.'
+
+"The Italian was silent for a few moments, when a sudden thought seemed
+to strike him, and he replied that he would do as I wished, though he
+warned me of the risk to which I was exposing the captain's life by so
+doing; but as he had just told me he would die on shore, I did not
+listen to him--in fact, I had no great confidence in the honesty of
+Signor Paolo.  There was something in his eye, as he looked at the
+captain, which I did not like, and besides, I should like to know how
+any respectable man came to be herding with such a set of cut-throat
+rascals.  I accordingly went outside the hut, to see how the coast lay,
+and I found that all was silent round us, for every man, woman, and
+child had gone up to the fire; and had it not been for the glare of the
+conflagration, the night would have been pitchy dark; so, lifting the
+captain up in a cloak on which he had been laid, Paolo taking the head
+and I the feet, we bore him, as well as we were able, down to the boat,
+though I was afraid every moment of letting him fall, and hurting him;
+indeed, nothing but the anxiety I felt would have enabled me to succeed.
+At length we reached the boat, and placing the captain at the bottom, I
+again thanked the Italian for the service he had rendered us; indeed,
+after all, I was afraid I was wronging him by my suspicions.  Then, with
+a lighter heart than I had felt for some hours, I got him to assist me
+in shoving the boat off the beach, and with the impetus he had given her
+I let her drift out into the harbour.  I then, as silently as I could,
+paddled round by the west shore, keeping clear of the brig and the two
+misticoes, for the one which chased us had just come in; but I had not
+much fear of any of them, for I knew that the few hands left on board
+them would be looking up at the fire, and would not observe me: though,
+had any one turned, they might have done so, for the bright glare from
+the flames fell on the boat, and would have showed her distinctly, even
+right across the bay.  Anxious as I was to get out of the harbour, I was
+afraid of pulling hard, lest any one should hear the splash of the oars;
+and so near was I to the vessels, that every instant I expected that the
+alarm would be given, and that a shot would be sent right into the boat.
+Fortunately, no one saw me, and it was indeed a pleasant moment to me,
+when finding the chain lowered, I rounded the west side of the harbour,
+and pulled fairly out to sea.  I had not hitherto been perceived; but
+still it was necessary to be very cautious, for, of course, I thought
+the pirates would be keeping a lookout, lest any of our boats might
+again attempt to approach the harbour, so I pulled on as hard as I
+could, for I no longer feared making a noise, till my arms ached so much
+that I could pull no longer.  I then laid in my oars, and though I
+fancied I could still hear the voice of the people on shore, I was so
+far to westward that I did not think the light would be reflected on the
+sail, even were I to set it.  I therefore stepped the mast, not without
+some difficulty--fortunately, the sea was smooth, or I could not have
+done it at all--and got the sail ready for hoisting.  Before doing so, I
+stooped down to examine how the captain was going on, and tried to place
+him in a somewhat more comfortable position.  His heart seemed to beat
+regularly, and though he was still unconscious, from the wound in his
+head, he did not seem to have any fever about him.  This raised my
+spirits, and I began to hope for the best.  I did not much like to give
+him any of Signor Paolo's doctor stuff, for at the best I have not much
+faith in it, and I have heard that those Italian chaps are much given to
+poisonous practices, so I hove it overboard, to be out of the way, and
+then hoisted my sail, and went aft to the helm.  The breeze was still
+from the eastward, and I thought by keeping dead before it, I should
+make the island, where I expected to find you brought up.  I considered
+that the boat was going about three knots an hour through the water; and
+when I had been out, as I calculated, about that time, I heard three
+guns fired, somewhere from the island, or near it.  This did not give me
+any concern, and I steered steadily on, wishing for daylight, that I
+might see the island or you, in case you were off here, till at last,
+just as it came, and I was looking astern to see it, the first streaks
+had appeared in the sky, I beheld, to my dismay, a sail, which I was
+certain must be one of the pirate misticoes, running right down for me.
+Well, thought I to myself, it's all up with the captain and me; but
+never say die, while there's a shot in the locker, so I held on my
+course.  It was not long, however, before my eyes fell on your topsails,
+rising out of the sea, and glad enough I was, you may be sure, when you
+made sail and stood towards me, for then I knew that I was seen.  The
+rascally mistico was overhauling me fast, though, and as I feared she
+would get me within range of her guns before you could reach me, I
+thought I would give them something to shoot at instead of my head, so I
+rigged up a figure with a _capote_ and cap, which I found in the boat,
+and stuck it up in the stern, and there fitting some lines on to the
+tiller, I made a berth for myself at the bottom of the boat to stow
+myself away in, as soon as they began to fire.  It's lucky I did so, for
+if I had had nine lives, like a cat, I should have lost them all; and
+what would have been worse, the captain would have been retaken.  My
+eyes, how the blackguards peppered at me; but you know all about that,
+and now, to my mind, the sooner we set to work to pay them off, and to
+get Miss Garden out of their hands, the better."
+
+This account was given by Jack Raby in his berth to his messmates, that
+narrated to the first lieutenant was more concise, without his own
+remarks on the subjects; for instance, he left out how often he had
+kissed Marianna--and how often he had tried to learn Romaic of little
+Mila, and made love on the strength of it--though, to his messmates, he
+enlarged much on these points, and hinted that he had completely won the
+heart of the old pirate's granddaughter, whom he described as a perfect
+angel in a red cap.
+
+It was with almost a cheer of joy, and many a sincere thanksgiving to
+Heaven, and a glistening of many a manly eye, that, some days
+afterwards, the news flew along the decks that the surgeon had
+positively declared that the captain was out of danger, and would soon
+again be fit for duty.
+
+Mr Linton had, notwithstanding his own prognostications, very much
+improved; and, though still confined to his berth, there was every
+probability of his soon recovering.
+
+The _Ypsilante_ had in the mean time been dispatched to summon any
+British ships she could meet, to the assistance of Captain Fleetwood;
+who, to strengthen his claim for their cooperation--for, as a junior
+officer, of course he could not order them to come to him--sent by her
+an account of the atrocities committed by the _Sea Hawk_; and a
+statement that an English lady and her attendant were held in durance
+vile by the pirates, which he justly calculated would excite all the
+chivalric feelings of his brother-captains, for which the British navy
+are so justly celebrated.
+
+He, meantime, cruised in the neighbourhood of the island, in the hope,
+should she attempt to make her escape, of falling in with and capturing
+the _Sea Hawk_.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY SIX.
+
+Captain Fleetwood once more trod the deck of the _Ione_; and though his
+cheek was pale, and his step had not regained its usual firmness, nor
+his voice its strength, his health was almost re-established, and grief,
+more than any other cause, prevented him from entirely recovering.
+Linton had also returned to his duty, and had produced several poetical
+effusions on the subject of the fate he had anticipated for himself,
+productions which he threatened to inflict on his brother-officers; but,
+as they earnestly entreated him to keep them fresh for those who could
+better appreciate them, he locked the papers up again in his desk--the
+purser, however, who did not intend to pay him a compliment at the
+expense of the rest, assuring him that it would be like casting pearls
+before swine.
+
+The officers had just come up on deck from breakfast, and the captain
+was pacing the poop with his first-lieutenant by his side, the sea was
+smooth, with a light air from the westward, and the brig, under her
+topsails, was standing to the northward--in which direction lay the
+pirates' island, appearing in the distant horizon like a blue hillock
+rising out of the water.
+
+"Sail, ho!" was the welcome sound which reached the deck from the
+mast-head.
+
+The usual question of "Where away?" was put by Mr Saltwell, in return.
+
+"On the larboard quarter, sir," was the answer.
+
+"What does she look like?"
+
+"A ship right before the wind, sir."
+
+"I trust she is a friend come to our assistance," said Captain
+Fleetwood.  "We'll stand down to meet her.  Put the ship about, Mr
+Saltwell."
+
+The brig having tacked, now stood under the same easy sail as before, to
+the southward, so as to cut off the stranger; a bright look-out being
+still kept astern, lest the _Sea Hawk_, or either of her tenders, should
+appear on the northern board.
+
+It may easily be supposed how anxiously Captain Fleetwood had been
+expecting the arrival of some other cruiser to assist him in making the
+attack he contemplated on the island.  Had he consulted his own
+inclinations, he would, as soon as he was able to grasp his sword, have
+attempted the exploit with his own ship's company, whom he well knew
+would be ready to follow him; but he was unwilling to risk the lives of
+his gallant fellows on so very hazardous an expedition--especially after
+the sad lesson he had lately experienced--and the suffering, if not the
+destruction, to which he had subjected his brave companions.
+
+Were he to make the attack and fail, he also thought the result would be
+too dreadful to contemplate; so he curbed his impatience as he was best
+able, till he could collect a sufficient force to enable him to
+undertake it with a certainty of success.  He tried also to console
+himself with the hopes that the Signora Nina and her brother would
+protect Ada to the utmost of their power.  Raby, wisely, had not told
+him his suspicions of Paolo--and, of course, he was ignorant of the
+events which had occurred in the island after he had been carried off,
+or he would certainly have been even less at his ease than he
+endeavoured to make himself.
+
+"What do you make her out to be?" he inquired of Mr Saltwell, who had
+just descended from aloft, with his spy-glass over his shoulder.
+
+"English, I think, sir.  I could see to the head of her courses, and, I
+should not be surprised, from the look of her canvas, that she is the
+_Vesta_ frigate, which was to be cruising somewhere off the Gulf of
+Egina."
+
+"I trust she may be.  Captain Grantham is an old friend of mine, and I
+know that if he received my letter he would come, if he possibly could;
+and welcome he will be; for, though the _Vesta_ is but an
+eight-and-twenty, we may do without further aid."
+
+Sail after sail of the stranger rose out of the blue water, till a
+towering mass of snow-white canvas floated above it, shining brilliantly
+in the rays of the forenoon sun, which fell directly on it.  At last,
+the dark hull and bow ports, and even the thin line of glowing copper
+below the bends, could be perceived, and little doubt remained of the
+identity of the ship in sight; though, from her position, her signals
+could not be perceived.  Had it been war time, the _Ione_ would not have
+allowed a ship, so far her superior in size, to approach, without
+greater caution in ascertaining her nation; but, as it was, there was no
+danger of her proving an enemy, and, at the worst, she could be but a
+neutral.
+
+While the matter was still in doubt, another sail was seen astern of
+her, standing in the same direction; and, in a little time afterwards,
+the frigate took in her studden sails, clewed up her courses, and
+bracing up her yards, rounded to, when the _Vesta's_ number blew out
+clearly to view.
+
+The brig, now close to her, also backed her main topsail, when the
+captain's gig was piped away, and Fleetwood, with a heart less depressed
+than he had long felt, went on board the frigate.
+
+He was warmly received by Captain Grantham, who exclaimed, "I am
+delighted to see you, Fleetwood.  From the accounts we received we
+thought it was all up with you; and I came more with the hope of
+avenging you, than of seeing you alive; but now you shall have that
+satisfaction yourself.  By Jove! we must blow up the hornet's nest
+without delay.  When did you propose to make the attempt?"
+
+"The very moment a sufficient force was collected," replied Fleetwood,
+highly gratified at his friend's zeal.
+
+"Well, what do you say to this very night?" asked Grantham.  "There is
+the _Venus_ coming up after me, and your Greek friend cannot be far off.
+I am afraid she is not likely to meet any other ship of the squadron;
+but we are enough, as it is, to drive every one of the rascals into the
+sea."
+
+"To-night, by all means," exclaimed Fleetwood.  "I could not have hoped
+for anything better.  We shall have a sufficient force to ensure
+success; and as there is no moon till a late hour, we shall have less
+risk of discovery before we are upon them."
+
+"Then to-night let it be; and I suppose there's no use insisting on your
+remaining on board, on account of your illness, and letting Rawson, of
+the _Venus_, lead the attack," said Captain Grantham.  "He is a gallant
+fellow, and will do it well."
+
+"I trust, Grantham, that you will give the command of the expedition to
+me.  I shall, indeed esteem it a most especial favour if you will do
+so," pleaded Fleetwood.  "I would, on no account, if I can help it, lose
+that post."
+
+"Well, I suppose, under the circumstances of the case, we must persuade
+Rawson to keep the ship, though, indeed, Fleetwood, I do not think you
+are yet strong enough for the exertion you must go through."
+
+"I have a Hercules of a coxswain, and I must make him carry me, if my
+legs fail me," said Fleetwood, smiling sadly.  "But you know, Grantham,
+I have motives enough to carry me through anything."
+
+"Yes, indeed, I know, and feel for you.  I suppose the fellows will show
+fight."
+
+"Not a doubt of it, from the specimen we have had of them.  They know
+that they have no mercy to expect at our hands, and that they fight with
+ropes round their necks."
+
+"We must give them enough of it, then; but I suppose, with the force we
+have collected, we shall have no great difficulty in forcing our way
+into the harbour I understand they have got there, though it seems to be
+well fortified."
+
+"We should be blown to atoms if we attempted it in the boats," said
+Fleetwood.  "You have no idea how strong the place is."
+
+"How, in the name of goodness, are we to get at them, then?" exclaimed
+Captain Grantham, who was more celebrated for his dash at an enemy, when
+once he saw him, than for originating any plan where stratagem was
+required.  "But let me hear what you propose to do."
+
+"I have, as you may suppose, thought much on the subject, so I may claim
+for it more attention than I might otherwise venture to do," said
+Fleetwood.  "I would on no account attempt to enter the harbour; but
+there is at the east end of the island a small cove, with an entrance so
+narrow that one boat can alone pass at a time."
+
+He spoke of the one into which the Greek captain had steered the
+mistico, all the circumstances of which he explained.
+
+"Now, I propose," he continued, "that the three English ships should
+stand towards the place, as soon as it is dark, and there is no chance
+of our being seen from the shore, while the _Ypsilante_ I will employ in
+another way.  We will bring up close in shore, and have all the boats
+ready to drop into the water, at the same moment.  I will lead in the
+_Tone's_ cutter, and, with my men, will mount by the concealed passage,
+and secure the approach to the summit of the cliff.  When this important
+point is gained, the other boats can enter; and Raby, who knows the
+passage, will lead the main body through it.  We will then proceed, as
+silently as we can, to the causeway, across which we must make a dash,
+and, I hope, may take the pirates by surprise.  I would send the
+_Ypsilante_, meantime, to approach the harbour; and when we reach the
+causeway, we will throw up a rocket, and she must commence a feigned
+attack on the mouth of the harbour, blazing away as hard as she can.
+This will distract the attention of the pirates, and make them fancy
+that they have most to fear from their enemies on that side.  As soon as
+she opens her fire, we will rush on; and as the Greeks will have hurried
+to the defences of the fort towards the harbour, I hope that we may have
+an easy victory."
+
+"I like your plan very much, and it has my hearty concurrence, as I have
+no doubt it will have Rawson's," said Captain Grantham.  "We shall soon
+have him up with us, and when he comes on board you can explain your
+proposal.  The _Venus_ should be near us by this time."  He rang his
+bell, and the steward appeared.  "Mason, learn from the officer of the
+watch how soon the _Venus_ will be up with us, and beg him to signalise
+her captain to come on board."
+
+"She's close to us now, sir," said Mason, as he went to fulfil the rest
+of the order.
+
+In about a quarter of an hour, Captain Rawson was ushered into the
+cabin.  He was a short, fat man, with a large, round, red, good-natured
+countenance, and if he was a fire-eater, as he had the character of
+being, he certainly did not look like one, except it might be supposed
+that the ruddy hue on his cheeks could have arisen from that cause.  He
+shook the hands of his brother-captains, as if he would have wrung them
+off, and then threw himself into a chair to recover from his exertions;
+but, when he began to speak, instead of the rough voice one might have
+expected, a soft, mellifluous tone was heard, which might better win a
+woman's ear than vie with the howling of the tempest.  He at once waived
+all the right he might claim to lead the attack on the island, and
+cordially agreed to the plan proposed by Captain Fleetwood.
+
+"In fact," he said, laughing, "there is no great credit due to me,
+Fleetwood; for I would much rather fight a ship twice the size of my own
+with the deck under my feet, than have to scramble up such a place as
+you describe, on a pitch-dark night, to thrash a few scoundrels of
+pirates."
+
+"If I don't mistake, you tried the first, and with no little success,"
+observed Grantham.
+
+"Oh, yes! that was when I was first lieutenant of the _Pan_,
+eighteen-gun sloop, and the captain being ill below, we fell in with the
+French thirty-gun frigate, _Liberte_, and instead of her taking us, as
+she expected, we not only beat her off, but gave her such a drubbing,
+that if we had carried as long guns as she did, we should have made her
+our prize.  But I'm afraid, Grantham, neither you nor I will see any
+more of that fun.  Well, we've had a good deal of it in our day, and
+have no right to complain."
+
+The friends, in talking over the adventures of the past, would very
+likely have forgotten what Fleetwood considered the much more important
+present, when they were interrupted by the entrance of a midshipman, who
+brought the agreeable intelligence that a sail, supposed to be the
+_Ypsilante_, was in sight to windward.
+
+"Huzza, then!" exclaimed Rawson.  "We shall have all your plan complete,
+Fleetwood,--and you think those fellows will fight?  Well, on my word, I
+should much like to bear you company if it was not for the hill--mind,
+only as a volunteer though--I will keep alongside your friend, Colonel
+Gauntlett."
+
+Seldom had an expedition been undertaken under better auspices than that
+to rescue Ada Garden and her companions, and to punish the pirate.  The
+night was very dark, and the breeze was just sufficient to enable the
+ships of war to get up to their anchorage at the proper time, while
+being from the west, or rather from the northward of it, the sea was
+perfectly smooth, which would enable the boats to enter the little bay
+without danger.
+
+As the dusk came on the little squadron hauled up for the island, the
+Greek brig standing for the port, the others keeping more to the
+eastward; the former had, however, sent two of her boats to accompany
+the _Ione_, and to assist in landing the men, thus rendering herself
+rather short handed; but, as she had only to make a feint of attacking,
+this was not considered of any importance, nor was it supposed for a
+moment that the _Sea Hawk_ would, or even could, make an attempt to quit
+the harbour in face of so superior a force.
+
+It was so dark that it was scarcely possible to distinguish the shore;
+but Fleetwood, who led in the _Ione_, as she was the smallest vessel,
+kept the lead going, and, as he knew the coast, he had no fears.  As he
+thought of the certain result of the expedition, and the unspeakable joy
+of releasing Ada, and bearing her off in triumph from the pirates'
+island, the depression of spirits, from which he had so long suffered,
+wore off entirely, and every moment which intervened seemed an age in
+his sight.
+
+"I am delighted to see you looking so well, my dear sir," said Colonel
+Gauntlett, as, before getting close in with the land, they sat at table
+with some refreshment before them, of which, by the by, the captain took
+but little, though his guest did ample justice to it.  "I must claim a
+post next to you, with Mitchell as my body-guard, and we must make it
+our business to find out my poor niece as soon as we get into the port.
+You will have to attend to the business of thrashing the pirates, and
+taking possession of the place, you must remember, so it is fortunate
+you have some one to assist you in rescuing the prisoners."
+
+"I shall be glad, indeed, to have some one with whom to place Miss
+Garden, as soon as she is released; but I expect that I shall be called
+on to perform that grateful duty at the head of my men, for round her
+tower, probably, the greatest resistance will be made by the pirates."
+
+"Well, then, my boy, we'll keep together--we'll keep together, and
+you'll find, I hope, that an old soldier is no bad ally!" exclaimed the
+colonel with animation.  "And now, Mitchell," (he was standing behind
+his master's chair, his head pressed against the deck above, and the tip
+of his nose just appearing from under a beam, which entirely concealed
+his eyes), "let me have another look at my arms.  There's nothing like
+having one's weapons in order on an expedition of this kind, depend upon
+it, Captain Fleetwood.  A good general always takes care that his army
+is well supplied with munitions of war."
+
+While he was speaking, Mitchell brought forth from his cabin his sword
+and two brace of pistols, which he placed on the table.  The old soldier
+drew his sword from its scabbard, and regarded it with a look of the
+greatest affection.  He turned it round to the light, to see that no
+rust had rested on it, and then pressed its point on the deck, and let
+it spring up again, to assure himself that it had not lost its pliancy.
+
+"Ah!" he said, "this and my pistols were the only things I saved from
+the wreck of the _Zodiac_ and the Frenchman; for I hold that no soldier
+should part with his sword till the last extremity.  An old friend, too,
+and served with me right through the campaigns in the Peninsula, till
+the crowning fight of Waterloo.  I have reason to be proud of it,
+Captain Fleetwood."
+
+"Indeed you have, sir; and I have no doubt that it will do good service
+to-night," said the captain.
+
+"I hope so; and, Mitchell, recollect the same orders as I have often
+before given you--never let this sword be left behind, should my arm
+lose the power of using it."
+
+"Yes, your honour," said Mitchell, with all the gravity of a mute,
+putting his hand to the beam, as he could not reach his forehead.  "I'll
+not forget."
+
+The captain, followed by his guest, went on deck, and, in about half an
+hour, the brig he considered was near enough in to anchor.  A light
+shown over the taffrail was the signal of what he was about to do, and
+as he clewed up his sails, his consorts followed his example, and all
+three dropped their anchors within a short distance of each other--the
+frigate being on the outside.  Not a light was allowed to be shown, lest
+it might be observed by any sleepless eye on shore--and as little noise
+as possible was made, lest any ear might hear it.
+
+The moment the anchors were let go, the boats were got out and manned,
+and rapidly collected round the _Ione_.
+
+Fleetwood then summoned the officers, commanding them, into his cabin,
+where, on the table, was spread out a rough sketch of the part of the
+island across which they would have to proceed, and of the port and
+harbour; and he then repeated briefly the plan of the attack, and
+assigned to each his particular duties.
+
+The frigate and corvette had each sent two lieutenants; and Linton
+insisted on being as well able to undergo the fatigue as his captain;
+the rest of the boats were commanded by the mates and midshipmen.
+Tompion had the jolly boat, and Jack Raby the gig, while the frigate
+sent also her lieutenant of marines to command those of the other
+messes.
+
+"Now, gentlemen, you clearly understand my wishes.  I will go in first,
+and climb to the top of the cliffs, and five minutes afterwards, Mr
+Raby, who knows the place well, will lead in the _Tone's_ gig, and show
+you the way to follow me, unless I should be attacked; and even then, do
+not come to my assistance till I call you.  I need scarcely caution you
+to preserve the strictest silence among your men to the last moment--
+indeed, till we are actually upon the enemy; and could we surround, and
+take possession of the tower you see marked there, it would be of the
+most vital importance, though I fear the pirates will keep too brisk a
+watch to allow us to get thus far without discovery; and now, the
+quicker we set about the work the better."
+
+Everybody expressed their full comprehension of Captain Fleetwood's
+directions, and he led the way on deck, followed by Colonel Gauntlett
+and Mitchell, and descended to his boat.  There his big coxswain, Tommy
+Small, was waiting for him.  Small had charge of the signal rocket,
+which the captain had, however, determined not to let off, unless they
+were first discovered by the pirates.
+
+One by one the other officers stepped silently into their boats as they
+dropped alongside, and, with muffled oars, shoved off after the gig; and
+no one, two cables' length off the ships, would have supposed that
+nearly two hundred armed men were about to land on the coast.
+
+Fleetwood's heart beat quick as he approached the shore, he felt sure
+that he could not have mistaken the spot; but still very great caution
+was necessary; and the entrance between the rocks was so narrow, that,
+even in the day time, it was difficult to find.  Twice he pulled up to
+the black towering rocks, and was obliged to back off again disappointed
+in finding the passage.  High above their heads they rose, looking like
+some impenetrable wall, the confines to a world.
+
+"Give way again, my lads," he whispered.  "Port the helm a little,
+Small.  That will do; I see it on the starboard bow.  Now, give way
+gently, my men.  In with your oars."
+
+And the boat was seen to disappear, as it were, into the very rocks.
+She glided, however, between them, and slid with a slight grating noise
+on to the soft sand, close to where still lay the mistico, which it
+seemed the pirates had not got off.  All hands jumped out, with the
+exception of the boat-keepers, and Captain Fleetwood lost not a moment
+in leading the way to the cavern, which he feared to find blocked up.
+With cautious steps he groped his way to it, and to his great
+satisfaction discovered that it was open, and feeling for the steps he
+ascended them.
+
+"Pass the word along for all hands to keep their left shoulders against
+the cliff, and there is no fear," he whispered to Small, who followed
+him closely with his drawn cutlass, ready to guard him from any who
+might attack him.
+
+This was, perhaps, the most hazardous part of the undertaking, for two
+or three resolute men stationed at the top might have kept the whole
+party at bay, or, indeed, have tumbled them all headlong down the
+cliffs.  He well knew the cunning of the Greeks, and should they have
+discovered the ship by any chance, this was the point they would defend,
+in the hopes of destroying all those engaged in the expedition together.
+Darkness was around them, the rugged cliff on one side, a precipice on
+the other, and beneath their feet a steep path or rough steps, and yet
+no one hesitated to follow where he led.  The most perfect silence
+reigned over the scene, except the sound of their tread, which could
+just be heard above the dash of the water on the rocks below, and the
+scream of some wild sea-bird as it winged its flight at a distance
+through the calm night-air.  On he went--a few more steps would place
+him on the summit of the cliff, in comparative safety.  His hand touched
+the grass at the very edge of the upper step--he sprang upwards and
+gained a footing on the top--he breathed more freely, and his followers,
+one by one, ascended and took their place by him.  He then advanced a
+little distance to defend the position and to allow the rest of the
+party space to assemble as they came up.  The five minutes passed away,
+and Raby led on, followed in a line by the other boats, for there was no
+room for two to pass abreast, and as they entered they all ran up side
+by side on the beach.  Raby led them with the same good success as his
+captain, though the marines with their muskets had some difficulty in
+getting up, and ran no little risk of falling over again; but no
+casualty occurred.  It was, however, a long business, thus getting up in
+a single file at so slow a pace, but at last the whole body were drawn
+up together.  Captain Fleetwood, for greater convenience, separated them
+into two divisions, he leading the first, and Jack Raby, who was
+delighted with his own importance, acting at; guide to the second.  It
+wanted just half an hour to midnight when they were put in motion.  He
+found the greatest difficulty in passing over the rough ground, and
+keeping the direct path near the cliff, without the risk of some of his
+followers slipping from the precipice to their left.  He had, it must be
+remembered, gone over the same path several times in the day, and once
+on the night of his attempted escape, when he and his friends went to
+get the rope, and the arms, and provisions, or it would have been almost
+impossible for him to find the way.  On the party went, silent as the
+dead, and though the sound of the marines' heavy and regular tread might
+have been heard at a distance, had any one been on the watch for them,
+the footsteps of the blue-jackets, as they sprang from rock to rock,
+were light almost as those of Indian warriors on any similar exploit.
+The weather, which had hitherto been serene, with a gentle and balmy
+breeze blowing from the west, now gave symptoms of being about to
+undergo a change.  A low moaning sound was heard as the night wind blew
+among the pointed rocks, and it struck with the chilly feel of the north
+on the right cheeks of the adventurers.  It served, however, rather to
+raise their spirits and strengthen their muscles; they knew that their
+ships were in safety, if the anchorage was tolerable on the lee side of
+the island, so they thought or cared little about the matter.
+
+Two miles had thus to be travelled, every instant expecting discovery;
+for it was scarcely to be supposed that the pirates, after their late
+deeds, would not be on their guard against an attack.  Now Fleetwood
+halted and listened, now he had literally to feel his way with the point
+of his sword, lest he should have inadvertently gone too close to the
+edge of the cliff, and in this manner upwards of an hour had passed
+away, slowly, indeed, to those eager to know the result.  At length,
+with a beating heart, he stood on the causeway, while a tower, the one
+in which he believed Ada was to be found, was faintly perceptible,
+rising, like some tall spectre, in the gloom before him.  A light for an
+instant glimmered through a casement of the story in which she resided--
+it was to him the beacon of his hopes, and served to confirm him in the
+belief that he had reached the approach to the castle, of which,
+otherwise, he was somewhat uncertain.
+
+"Shall I let off the rocket, sir?" whispered Tommy Small, who had kept
+close to him all the time, ready to support him had he stumbled.  They
+were the first words which had been spoken since the heights had been
+gained.
+
+"Not till the enemy discovers us," answered his captain--"then fire."
+
+He had been careful not to halt his men; for he had often observed, that
+while the actual tread, from breaking gradually on the ear, might not be
+noticed, the stop and the fresh start were nearly always heard.  On a
+sudden, however, he met with an impediment he had not expected--a high
+embankment ran directly across the causeway, with a ditch before it.  To
+slip down the side of the ditch, and to climb the opposite bank, was, to
+seamen, the work of a moment, and, without being discovered, the first
+few stood on the summit.  Some noise, however, scarcely to be heard, was
+made, and as Captain Fleetwood, with Small on one side, closely followed
+by the gallant old colonel, was on the point of leaping down into the
+ramparts, they found themselves confronted by a number of the islanders,
+who started up from between the guns, where they had been sleeping.
+
+To fire the pistols was the first impulse of the pirates, and the flash
+aroused their comrades, as well as showed them to their assailants, who
+dashed down among them before they had time to unsheath their swords,
+and cut them down without mercy.
+
+"Now, Small, off with the rocket," exclaimed Captain Fleetwood, as their
+first opponents were disposed of.
+
+At the word, the coxswain, who had been expecting the order, let the
+beautiful firework fly into the air.  Up it soared, making a curve
+towards the sea, into which it sent down a shower of glittering sparks,
+which had scarcely been extinguished before the _Ypsilante_, in gallant
+style, opened her fire on the harbour, making as much blaze and noise as
+she could.  The British seamen, believing that all necessity for further
+silence was at an end, gave three hearty, soul-stirring cheers, which
+rung among the rocks, even above the roar of the artillery, and they
+then rushed on into the fosse after their companions.  The sound, though
+it struck a panic into the hearts of the more timid of the pirates, at
+the same time showed them where the most imminent danger lay.  The chain
+was across the harbour, and they knew no vessel could enter, and that
+their guns on that side would sink her when she attempted it, so many of
+the bravest hurried to the causeway, to defend the approach to the fort,
+while others manned the guns above the harbour, and began to return with
+interest the fire of the Greek brig.
+
+All was now uproar, confusion, fire, smoke, shrieks, shouts, and
+curses--the roar of the brig's guns, and the sharp reports of fire-arms.
+The latter, however, were but little used by the English, who trusted
+more to their cutlasses and the points of their bayonets.
+
+The defenders of the causeway fought with the greatest bravery, the
+voice of their chief encouraging them to persevere, and none gave way
+till they were cut down or slain.  The British poured on in overwhelming
+force, but still the pirates struggled obstinately, strengthened by the
+arrival of their comrades from other parts.
+
+Fleetwood and Colonel Gauntlett both knew the voice of Zappa.
+
+"On, on," they exclaimed, trying to cut their way up to the spot, where
+at intervals, as pistols were flashing near him, they could see him
+flying from spot to spot, and encouraging his men, "Seize that man,
+their chief--take him alive!"
+
+The seamen did their best to come at him, but his followers, with a
+devotion worthy of a better object, rallying round him, kept them at
+bay.  At last the voice which had been heard so loud was silent, and
+though fire-arms flashed on each side, his figure was not to be seen.
+Yet the pirates did not give way, they even seemed to fight with more
+desperation than before, as if to make amends for his absence, or to
+revenge his loss.  Nothing, however, could withstand the determined
+courage of the English; though, had not the pirates incautiously lost
+the post which Zappa had so judiciously formed, they might, perhaps,
+have been kept at bay till daylight, and, at all events, must have
+suffered a severe loss.
+
+Fleetwood and the other officers encouraged their men to fresh
+exertions, and led the way.  The pirates could no longer withstand the
+onset, and, within five minutes after they had leaped the ramparts, the
+British had gained the open space under the fort, and the enemy were
+flying in all directions before them, some to conceal themselves among
+the ruins, others throwing themselves over the cliffs, to avoid, as they
+supposed, another death; and the greater number, still facing round,
+retreating by the path down the ravine.  A small, but more desperate,
+band, under old Vlacco, not active enough to run, and too brave to
+yield, had entrenched themselves among the ruins, on the point directly
+above the harbour; and while some of them were firing away on the
+_Ypsilante_, and thus defending to the last the entrance to their port,
+the rest had slewed round some of the smaller guns towards the interior
+of the fort, prepared to fire the moment they could distinguish their
+enemies from their friends.
+
+Meantime, Charles Fleetwood, eager in pursuit of the great object which
+had at first brought him to the island, the rescue of Ada Garden, led on
+his men to the tower.  He heard the scream of a female,--the gate was
+open--he rushed up the steps, followed by the colonel and several
+others--he reached the chamber she had inhabited, a light burnt on the
+table--it showed the confusion around; a slight form was on one of the
+couches--Fleetwood flew to it.  Could it be his Ada?
+
+There he beheld a sight to sicken his heart--it was the body of poor
+little Mila: a ball had entered her forehead, and, as in too many cases,
+the innocent life had been taken.  What might be the fate of her he
+loved best?  His eye fell on Marianna, who was kneeling on the ground in
+an agony of terror.  She lifted her head with alarm, expecting that some
+of the pirates had entered to wreak their vengeance on her; but when she
+saw who it was, she gave a shriek of delight, exclaiming--
+
+"Oh! save my mistress, signor captain,--save my poor mistress.  They
+have carried her away--the traitor, the false man, Signor Paolo--he and
+the chief.  You will never see her more."
+
+"Where, where! which way, girl, speak?" cried Fleetwood, with feelings
+which no words can in any degree express.
+
+"Oh!  I don't know, signor," answered the Maltese girl, weeping with
+fright and agitation, increased by the tone of his voice.  "Down through
+the door, signor, she and Signora Nina."
+
+"But, my girl, did they neither speak nor say where they were going?"
+asked Fleetwood.
+
+"Oh! yes, yes.  They said the _Sea Hawk_,--the _Sea Hawk_.  They will
+escape.  Oh, Mother of Heaven! have mercy on us," replied Marianna,
+through her tears.
+
+"Enough.  Down the ravine, my men.  Follow me," shouted Fleetwood, as he
+rushed down the steps.  "Colonel, do you remain at this tower, and
+prevent the pirates entering, if any rally."
+
+At the bottom he fortunately met Dawson, the first lieutenant of the
+_Vesta_, and second in command.
+
+"Dawson," he exclaimed, "take charge of the high ground with half our
+men, and clear the point there of those fellows firing down on the
+harbour.  The first division follow me: on, my men!"
+
+Uttering these words, he led the way to the path winding down the
+ravine, followed eagerly by seventy or eighty of the blue jackets.  As
+may be supposed, he flew rather than ran, and even Tommy Small could
+scarcely keep up with him.  He had too good a cause to know the path,
+every turning of which he had noted with the greatest care, so he had no
+fear of missing his way.  As he went on, he found the wind blowing
+strongly down the ravine; and this circumstance showed him, to his
+sorrow, that the _Sea Hawk_ would have no difficulty in running out of
+the harbour, if the _Ypsilante_ did not prevent her.  Still the pirate
+could only have had a short start of him.  All he could do was to shout,
+"On, on," and to wish, though in vain, that he could move faster.
+
+He might yet reach the shore, even before the boats could shove off, and
+Ada might be rescued.  This thought supported him.  The wind rapidly
+increased, and its howl was heard even above the shouts of his
+followers.  At length he reached the shores of the bay; he rushed to the
+edge; he could distinguish some boats floating on the surface of the
+water, and further on, there was a sound as if men were engaged in
+shoving others into it; yet he dared not allow any one to fire, for he
+could not tell what boat might contain his Ada.  He led on his party in
+that direction.  The pirates had seen him, and defended themselves
+bravely.  Some sacrificed themselves while their comrades were escaping,
+and, by the time they were overpowered, only three boats remained on the
+shore.  Into these, Fleetwood did not for a moment hesitate to throw
+himself as soon as they were launched, with as many of his men as they
+could contain, but the oars of two only could be found, and in vain were
+those of the other hunted for.  With a hearty cheer the gallant fellows
+gave way after the enemy.  The retreating pirates fired on them as they
+advanced out into the bay.  He could just distinguish, by the flashes of
+the guns, the brig, and the two misticoes in the centre of it.  As he
+looked, their sails were loosened and swelled to the gale; the pirates
+waited not to secure their boats, as they leaped on board.  The cables
+were cut, and the two misticos darted out through the narrow passage
+into the open sea.  Old Vlacco must have known what they were about, for
+the fire from the fort towards the _Ypsilante_ seemed to be redoubled in
+warmth, preventing her from aiming at them as well as she might have
+done.
+
+The _Sea Hawk_ had still several boats round her, and towards her
+Fleetwood now steered.  His men urged on the boat to their utmost
+strength; he felt a hope that he might reach her, when her fore-topsail
+was let fall, and sheeted home.  A spring was on her cable, her head
+turned rapidly round, her yards were squared away, the cable cut, and
+she darted out from among a crowd of boats, among which she left the
+English entangled, just as they were on the point of running alongside
+her, and following her tenders out to sea, discharging her broadside
+full at the _Ypsilante_, as she passed her.  The Greek behaved
+gallantly, and instantly put up her helm, and bore away in chase.
+
+Fleetwood, his heart almost broker with agony at his disappointment, saw
+that it would be in vain for him to pursue, and he also remembered that
+the _Ypsilante_, with her reduced crew, and severely handled as she had
+been by the fort, was in no way a match for the _Sea Hawk_, though her
+shot might injure her, who was, he feared, on board.
+
+There was, however, a doubt, on board which of the vessels Ada had been
+carried, if she really had again been torn, almost as it were, from his
+arms, and he dared not entertain a hope to the contrary.
+
+Quick in action as in thought, these ideas passed through his mind as he
+returned to the shore, with the purpose of hastening back to the ships,
+and getting them to start in chase of the pirates.
+
+At least, he thought, the _Ypsilante_ will know what direction the _Sea
+Hawk_ has taken, and be able to direct us in the pursuit.  Before,
+however, he could return to his ship, he had numerous important duties
+to perform as leader of the expedition, and, indeed, from the firing
+which still continued on the heights, he saw that even the fort was not
+yet entirely their own.
+
+For him the great object of the enterprise had failed, totally,
+miserably failed.  Not only was Ada Garden again lost, but she would
+certainly be placed in a position infinitely worse than that in which
+she had hitherto been.  He scarcely dared to think what act the pirate
+might commit, now that he was driven to desperation; she had no longer
+her attendant with her, and the Signora Nina might have lost the little
+influence over him she had before possessed.  He bitterly cursed the
+mistake he had made in not dispatching one at least of the British ships
+round to assist the _Ypsilante_ in blockading the entrance; but he
+checked himself, as it occurred to him that, had he done so, Ada might
+have been placed in still greater peril, as Zappa might still have
+attempted to carry her off, and, on finding himself completely
+entrapped, without a hope of escape, might have blown up the _Sea Hawk_,
+with all on board her, and he remembered the principle which had often
+sustained him through adversity and sorrow, though he could not accuse
+himself of having, through his own conduct, brought on the misfortune,
+or the cause of grief, that Heaven ordains everything for the best, and
+that it is impious to repine at its decrees.  With a far different
+feeling did he climb up the path than that with which he had rushed down
+it, and though his spirits, disappointed and agitated as he was, did not
+fail him, his bodily strength almost did, and, had it not been for
+Small, he would scarcely have accomplished the undertaking against the
+fierce gale which was blowing down the ravine.
+
+As they climbed up, the occasional roar of the big guns, and the rattle
+of musketry, was still heard, and on the summit a sight met his view
+which he had scarcely expected, and which grieved him sorely.  Some of
+the huts I mentioned as having been built to contain the pirates'
+provisions and other stores, had caught fire, and lighted up the whole
+scene.  Hedged up on the outer promontory were the band of islanders,
+under old Vlacco, who, without the remotest prospect of victory or
+escape, yet refused to yield or ask for quarter.  The old pirate had
+saved his chief; he had enabled him to escape by the gallant way he had
+held the post.  He was now fighting on his own account for revenge, and
+to sell his life as dearly as he could.  He was determined the victory
+the British had obtained should not be bought cheaply; he and his men
+worked the guns with the greatest courage; while one party were engaged
+in loading them, the others would rush forward and defend them, and then
+retire at the moment they were fired, and be at their posts again before
+the British could reach them.
+
+Their numbers were being gradually thinned; but, in the meantime, they
+were committing great havoc; and the ground in front of their
+entrenchment was strewed with the dead and dying marines and seamen, who
+had, with equal gallantry and true courage, ventured to attack them.
+The numbers of the British seemed, to Fleetwood, to be awfully
+decreased; the marines and a few seamen only appearing to keep the
+pirates in check, when a loud shout proclaimed the cause of it; and he
+saw Colonel Gauntlett at the head of a large party, dragging forward one
+of the guns from another part of the fort.  They halted, and, opening on
+either side, the gun was fired directly at the centre of the gang of
+pirates.
+
+"Now, on, my friends!" shouted the colonel.
+
+"On, on!" cried the lieutenant; and, at the same moment, Fleetwood led
+on his party towards the devoted desperadoes.  Not one cried for
+quarter; but they could not, for an instant, withstand such an attack;
+every one was cut down or driven towards the edge of the cliff, where,
+still inspired by their desire of revenge, they seized their opponents,
+and endeavoured to drag them over with themselves.  Almost the last
+survivor was old Vlacco; and exerting all the remaining strength which
+age had left him, for he was still unwounded, he fixed his death grasp
+on the arm of one of the foremost of his assailants; slowly he stepped
+back, as he was forced to retreat, enticing his antagonist on, till,
+feeling his left foot over the edge, he sprang forward to grasp him.
+
+"In Heaven's name, hold me back!" shouted a voice, which Captain
+Fleetwood thought he recognised as Bowse's.  The old pirate threw
+himself back with all his might, in the hopes of overbalancing the man
+whose arm he held, and dragging him with him.  For himself he had no
+hope, no expectation but instant death, and the gratification of his
+revenge against one of those who had caused the destruction of himself
+and many of his comrades.  Bowse was a powerful man; but he had been
+weakened by long confinement, and the pirate was large and heavy.  Once
+he drew himself back, lifting the old man with him; but again Vlacco
+forced him forward, pressed as he was by others behind, who did not see
+their nearness to the dreadful precipice, and he felt that the
+despairing pirate was dragging him, with himself, to instant
+destruction; his feet lost their hold of the ground, and he was falling
+forward, when he, at length, sung out for help--though scarcely
+expecting it; but at that instant he felt himself dragged back by a
+powerful hand, and a sword descending, severed, with a blow, the arm of
+the old pirate, who, with a cry of rage, disappeared into the dark
+obscurity of the abyss below; and Bowse, turning round to thank his
+preserver, found that he was his old shipmate, Tommy Small.
+
+This was the last resistance the British had to encounter; and,
+unfortunately, it had cost them very dear.  The second lieutenant of the
+_Vesta_, a mate of the _Venus_, and six seamen and marines, had been
+killed, and ten men wounded, as well as four officers.  About fifteen
+pirates only were found dead, but a larger number had been seen to throw
+themselves over the cliffs; and the wounded had probably destroyed
+themselves in the same manner, for five only, who were unable to move,
+were discovered alive.  About twenty, who had either wanted resolution
+to destroy themselves, or thought they were less guilty, and, therefore,
+likely to escape punishment, were dragged out from the holes among the
+ruins, where they had concealed themselves--these were the only remnant
+of the force who had made so stout a resistance; the rest had either
+escaped in the vessels, or their mangled corpses were to be found at the
+bottom of the cliffs.  Although Captain Fleetwood was most anxious to be
+off, he considered that it would not do to evacuate the place till it
+had undergone a strict examination, he determined, therefore, to leave
+the _Vesta's_ lieutenant of marines, with thirty marines and twenty
+seamen, in charge, while he led the rest back to embark on board their
+ships, where he knew, should the gale increase, their services would be
+required.
+
+Among the wounded was Colonel Gauntlett.  His grief on hearing that his
+niece had been carried off by the pirate was very great.
+
+"It is a sad thing for that poor child; and though I have had much
+sorrow in my time, never has anything pained me more," he said, as the
+captain told him what had occurred.  "And for you, Fleetwood, I feel
+most deeply.  You loved the girl, and you deserve her for the exertions
+you have made to recover her.  In Heaven's name, get back to your ship
+and pursue the scoundrel round the world, if he goes so far.  For
+myself, I will remain here, and have my old carcass doctored; and if, as
+you think there is a possibility of her being concealed somewhere in the
+island, I will discover her, and shall be here to take charge of her,
+while you, at all events, will have the satisfaction of punishing the
+pirate."
+
+Thus it was arranged; indeed, the colonel was unfit to be moved, and was
+likely to fare much better in the tower, under the care of Mitchell, and
+a surgeon, who was left to look after the wounded, than on board the
+brig in a gale of wind.
+
+Marianna, however, entreated that she might not be left behind on the
+island.  She urged that her mistress must have been carried away in the
+_Sea Hawk_, and that as the _Ione_ was going in search of that vessel,
+her services would certainly be required when she was recovered, which
+she felt positive she would be, as she would serve as a chaperone to
+Ada, should he be blessed by finding her.  Fleetwood was glad to take
+her with him.  The first person he inquired for, after the pirates had
+been overcome, was his friend Captain Vassilato.
+
+Bowse said that he had been released with him and the Maltese, Pietro,
+from the dungeon under the tower, by Colonel Gauntlett's party, and that
+he had seen him charging the last band of pirates who had resisted.  It
+was for some time feared that he was one of those who had gone over the
+cliffs, either dragged over by the pirates, or in the eagerness of
+pursuit; but at length he was discovered under a wall, where he had
+managed to crawl to be out of the way of the scuffle, after receiving a
+severe wound on the leg from the wind of a round shot.
+
+His delight at seeing Fleetwood, whom he thought had been killed, he
+declared, restored him to health; and he insisted on being carried on
+board the _Ione_, to get sooner on board his own vessel, that he might
+go in chase of the pirate.  Bowse also begged to be allowed to accompany
+the captain.
+
+All their arrangements being made, Fleetwood set off at the head of his
+men to return to the little bay, where the boats were left.  The march
+back was less difficult and more rapid than the advance, as they were
+now able to light their lanterns, which had been brought, and to use
+some torches which had been discovered in the fort.  They reached the
+boats in safety; but although the bay was to leeward, as the gale was
+blowing strong, there was a good deal of swell setting into the little
+cove, and they experienced considerable difficulty in embarking, and no
+little danger in getting out to sea.  The ships, however, showed plenty
+of lights to guide them on board; but the way the lights moved showed
+that there was a heavy swell, and the loud roar of the surf warned them
+that they would have breakers to pass through before they could get on
+board.
+
+"It must be done, Small," said the captain, as her crew were getting the
+cutter afloat.  "We have gone through many a worse surf, but never
+through so narrow a passage in so dark a night."
+
+"I've always managed to see the way out of any place I've got into,
+sir," replied Small.  "Please Heaven, sir, we'll get out of this too."
+
+"Very well," said the captain.  "Gentlemen, I will lead, and let the
+boats follow at a sufficient distance from each other not to run the
+risk of fouling."
+
+Captain Vassilato was lifted into the cutter, she was shoved off through
+the surf, and the impetus almost sent her up to the entrance.  A high
+black mound appeared to rise before her, obscuring the view even of the
+lights on board the ships, and seeming to block up all exit.  Small's
+eyes were keen, he exactly hit the passage, and the boat, rising on the
+surge, her oars almost touching the rocks on either side, darted out
+into the open sea.  For an instant only, Fleetwood went alongside the
+_Ione_ to put his Greek friend on board, and to order Saltwell to get
+everything ready for weighing the instant he returned, and he then
+pulled off to the frigate to make a report of what had occurred, and to
+advise the instant pursuit of the pirate.
+
+Captain Grantham was very much grieved to hear of the loss of so many
+men, and that the young lady had been again spirited away, and promised,
+as soon as it was daylight, to go in chase of her; but in the dark, he
+considered it worse than useless to move from his comparatively snug
+berth.  He was glad a nest of such determined pirates had been routed
+out; but, independent of more humane motives, he regretted to have to
+send up to the Admiralty so long a list of casualties.  It showed,
+however, that it was no trifling affair, and he might truly state, that
+it was impossible to count the number of the enemy killed.
+
+"You, Fleetwood, do as you think best," said Captain Grantham.  "If you
+wish to get under weigh, do so; but, tell me, what plan do you propose
+to pursue?"
+
+"I think, while the present gale lasts, of standing across to examine
+the island to the westward of this; and when it moderates, or if the
+wind shifts, I shall stand to the northward, towards the Gulf of
+Salonica, where there are numerous hordes of pirates, with whom Zappa is
+certain to find friends."
+
+"I am not quite so sure of that--remember, two of a trade can never
+agree.  However, it is as well to try in that direction.  I will stand
+to the southward and westward, and will send Rawson to the eastward, and
+we will then rendezvous off this island, unless we happen to catch sight
+of our friend in the meantime, in a week or ten days--Heaven grant that
+we may have success!"
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY SEVEN.
+
+When Zappa saw, by the overwhelming number of his enemies who poured
+into the fort, that he must perish or make good his retreat from the
+island, he ordered those of the _Sea Hawk's_ crew who were on shore to
+accompany him; and retreating from the fight, he left them below while
+he rushed up into Ada's tower, and gained the chamber where the
+terrified females were assembled.
+
+"Fond girl, I will not leave you to perish or to be branded as the
+pirate's mistress," he exclaimed, clasping Nina in his arms.  "I will
+not quit you till I can place you in safety--come with me."
+
+"We will live or die together," murmured Nina, forgetting, in that
+moment of defeat and disaster, all the cruelty of which he had been
+guilty towards her.
+
+"Lady, your friends have gained the day," he continued, turning to Ada.
+"You have brought rain on my head, and you have your revenge--farewell."
+
+Miss Garden's heart beat quick with hope.  The moment of her
+emancipation had at last arrived, and he whom she loved had come to her
+rescue.  At the instant the pirate disappeared, a person rushed forward,
+and seizing her in his arms, exclaimed,--"Haste, signora, from hence, or
+destruction awaits us."
+
+She knew Paolo Montifalcone's voice; and believing that the pirate had
+intended to blow up the tower, she fancied that he had come to save her,
+nor attempted to struggle in his grasp.  She shrieked out to Marianna to
+follow her, but the poor girl was so petrified with horror at the death
+of little Mila, which had just taken place, that she could not move, and
+in vain Ada implored the Italian to stop for her attendant.  His only
+reply was--"It will be too late, and we shall be destroyed--on, on."
+
+He seemed to be endowed with strength almost superhuman; he gained the
+bottom of the steps, and rushing on, was soon among the body of the
+retreating crew of the _Sea Hawk_, who were following their captain.
+They all recognised Paolo, who was a favourite among them, and aided him
+in supporting his burden.
+
+"Oh where are you taking me to?" exclaimed Ada, when, too late, she
+heard the sounds of the strange voices round her, and found that she was
+descending the ravine.
+
+"To happiness and freedom," he answered passionately, and pressed her
+closer in his arms.
+
+Ada, with horror, saw that she was cruelly betrayed.  She shrieked
+aloud, and struggled to get free; but he who bore her had pictured the
+only joy he could hope for in possessing her, and intense misery without
+her, and he could not bring himself to relinquish what he valued more
+than life itself.
+
+"Hear me, sweet Ada," he exclaimed, as he still bore her on.  "He whom
+you loved is dead, and a heart devoted as mine, is alone worthy to
+occupy the place he held."
+
+Still Ada entreated him to have mercy on her, to take her back to her
+friends, who must even now be in the tower she had just quitted; but he
+was deaf to all her prayers.
+
+The gentle, timid Paolo had been sadly changed by the scenes he had
+witnessed, and the burning love to which, he had madly resigned his
+soul.  She saw at length that all appeals to his generosity or better
+feelings were vain, and overcome with horror, she fainted.
+
+When they reached the beach, Zappa and Nina had already embarked; he
+placed Ada in another boat, with the rear-guard of the pirates.  They
+were quickly alongside, and she was lifted on deck, still insensible,
+and, without the chief seeing her, Paolo carried her in his arms below.
+Instantly the brig was under weigh, and darting out of the harbour, was
+hotly engaged with the _Ypsilante_.
+
+Once on the open sea, the pirates breathed more freely, and sail after
+sail, notwithstanding the strength of the breeze, was let fall from the
+yards.  The shot of the fort had already damaged their enemy, and now
+bringing their broadside to bear on her just before she kept away in
+chase, they raked her fore-and-aft, killing many of the people, and
+cutting away much of her rigging.
+
+The _Sea Hawk_ was celebrated for her speed, and the rigging of the
+_Ypsilante_ was much cut up, but her commanding officer was a gallant
+fellow, and crippled as he was, determined, if he could, not to lose
+sight of the enemy; and was soon after her, firing his bow-chasers with
+little or no effect, as the _Sea Hawk_ was rapidly running from them,
+firing her stern guns in return.
+
+Meantime the _Sea Hawk_ winged her rapid flight over the foaming waters.
+She had received but slight damage from the cannonade, opened on her by
+the _Ypsilante_, during the storming of the fort, and none after she got
+outside the harbour, so that the pirates were able to laugh at the
+efforts of her pursuer.
+
+Zappa having run the _Ypsilante_ out of sight, shaped as northerly a
+course as the wind would allow him, towards that part of the Archipelago
+where the islands cluster the thickest, that, among their many intricate
+and dangerous channels, well known to him and his crew, he might have a
+greater chance of avoiding his enemies; and would be certain to find
+friends ready to assist him.  The two misticos, not being able to look
+up so well to the gale, had to run before it till it moderated, and they
+then hauled up in the same direction.  From their rig and appearance
+being that of the ordinary craft of the Mediterranean, they ran less
+risk of recognition than the brig, or of detection, from being able to
+conceal themselves in any nook or bay, or behind any reef which might
+offer itself, so that an enemy might pass close to them, without their
+being seen.
+
+The gale continued blowing with undiminished fury till daylight, when it
+gave signs of abating.  It had been the means of saving Zappa and his
+comrades, and he wished it to continue rather longer to carry him
+entirely clear of his pursuers.  Men with sharp eyes were sent aloft to
+look out on every side, to discover if any vessels were in sight.  They
+reported one hull down in the northern board, the heads of her topsails
+only seen, which was, doubtless, the _Ypsilante_, and two on the
+larboard quarter, which seemed like the two misticos.  As the sun rose,
+his beams seemed to calm the rage of the tempest, the wind fell, the
+clouds dispersed, and the sea went down, and Zappa no longer felt the
+anxiety he had at first experienced for the fate of his vessel.  He now
+mustered his crew, and found that some of his bravest and best men had
+fallen when attempting to defend the fort against the first attack of
+the English; the remainder promised to stand by him as long as the _Sea
+Hawk_ floated on the waves.  Every arrangement which circumstances would
+admit of being made for the future, he dismissed all but the necessary
+watch on deck, to take the rest they so much needed.
+
+Among those who appeared was Paolo.  He hitherto had had no time to
+speak to him--he now summoned him to his side.
+
+"What," he exclaimed, "are you not yet weary of a rover's life, that you
+return again to the _Sea Hawk_--or did you fear a pirate's fate, if you
+had remained on shore?"
+
+The Italian looked conscience-stricken and miserable.  He could not meet
+the glance of the pirate's eye; he dared not confess what he had done;
+and yet he knew it must be instantly discovered.
+
+"Could I leave my sister?" he asked.  "Could I leave one whom I love
+dearer than life itself to perish amid the raging fight, when my arm
+might save her?  Do you suppose that my eye is so dull, my heart so
+callous, that I could behold the rare beauty which almost won your
+affections from her who had sacrificed all to you, and yet feel no
+impression?  Know, that he whom you have treated as a tyrant does his
+slave, whom you have scorned and deceived, has a heart capable of
+burning with a passion far more intense, far brighter, far purer, and
+more enduring than the flickering flame which yours can alone nourish."
+
+"What is this rhapsody about?" exclaimed Zappa, thinking that Paolo had
+gone mad.
+
+"When you go below, you will discover," answered the Italian, and walked
+to the other side of the deck.
+
+When Ada Garden came to her senses, she found herself in the cabin of
+the _Sea Hawk_, and Nina bending over her, and applying such
+restoratives as she had at command.  She was soon sufficiently recovered
+to explain to her astonished friend the means by which she had come
+there.
+
+"And Paolo could have done this.  He who professed to be ready to die
+for you, to tear you from the very arms of your friends, when they were
+on the point of recovering you.  Alas! my unhappy brother--his mind must
+have forsaken him."
+
+"Whatever the cause, I have sorely suffered, and I have no one to trust
+to now but you, Nina.  Through you alone can I now hope to be restored
+to my friends."
+
+As Ada was speaking, the pirate chief entered the cabin.  He started
+back, on seeing her, and an angry frown came over his brow.  "What! and
+my suspicions are true," he exclaimed, in a voice of passion.  "And that
+mad youth has ventured to bring you on board.  You, lady, who have been
+the cause of the disaster we have suffered, who have already so nearly
+proved my destruction."
+
+He ground his teeth as he spoke, and the two defenceless girls saw that
+he was working himself up to the same awful pitch of fury to which he
+had given way when he so barbarously wounded Nina.
+
+"But where is this wretched youth?" he continued.  "Here, Momolo--
+Balbo," calling to some of his officers, "seize Signor Paolo, and drag
+him here.  Take care that he does not leap overboard to avoid you.  He
+has performed an act, by which he has well merited death, and he knows
+his guilt is discovered."
+
+While those he spoke to were absent obeying his orders, he stood at the
+door of the cabin, grasping his sword, as if he meditated a dire and
+speedy vengeance.  Nina sprung towards him and clasped his arm.
+
+"Oh! you will not injure him--you will not--you cannot kill my brother!
+He has committed a great fault--but his death will not remedy it.  Say,
+for my sake--say, for her sake--for she wishes not his destruction--you
+will forgive him?"
+
+While Nina was thus pleading for her brother, he was brought in by four
+of the crew, who, supposing that he had been found guilty of treachery--
+the only crime in a pirate's eye--stood over him with their drawn
+daggers in their hands, to execute, at the moment, the chief's commands.
+Zappa shook her off without answering her.
+
+"So, signor, you have dared to drag hither the glittering bait which has
+already allured a host of enemies to attack us; and while I would have
+left her as their prize, and escaped in safety from what you have done,
+they will still continue their pursuit, nor desist till they have
+destroyed us all.  From the number of men engaged in the attack, there
+must, doubtless, be many ships in chase of us, whereas, had you not
+committed this mad act, we might have gone our way unmolested.  Such is
+your crime and its consequences; and if I deliver you up to the crew,
+and explain what you have done, they will save me the trouble of being
+your executioner.  Take him on deck," he said, in Romaic, to the men who
+held Paolo.  "I will follow shortly; and you may, meantime, make
+preparations to deal with a traitor."
+
+The pirates were dragging the miserable man away, when Ada, who though
+she knew not the words which were used, comprehended their meaning,
+sprang from her seat and grasped Paolo's arm, to prevent his being
+carried off.
+
+"Stay," she cried, appealing to Zappa.  "Do not condemn this unhappy man
+to death.  Towards me he has acted the most cruel part--but I forgive
+him.  For your own sake, I implore you to do so likewise, for the sake
+of that sweet girl.  Oh! do not commit so black a crime.  It will be a
+murder, for he had no intention of injuring you or your followers.
+Blinded by an unhappy passion for me, he has done this, fancying that
+the man to whom I was to be united is no more; and has been led on in
+the vain hope of one day possessing me, and winning the worthless love I
+should have to give.  Let me now swear that nothing shall ever induce me
+to become his--and let it be part of his punishment that he knows what
+he has done is in vain; and if, by any means, I can remedy the evil he
+has committed, I will do so, if you will allow him to live."
+
+"A lady who pleads so energetically should have her prayers granted,"
+said the pirate, with a tone of irony.  "But let him beware how he
+behaves--unhand him," he said to the men, in their own tongue.  "These
+ladies have pleaded for the prisoner, and are answerable for his
+conduct.  And tow, signora," he said, in a blander tone, addressing
+himself to Ada, "by what means do you propose to remedy the fault of
+that madman?"
+
+Ada was silent for some minutes, during which the pirate stood regarding
+her attentively.
+
+"It is fitter for you to point out the means by which I can serve you,
+than for me to propose them," she at length replied.  "Indeed, I can do
+nothing till I am restored to my friends; I am sure that any ransom you
+may propose, which they have the power to pay, they will gladly give for
+my liberty."
+
+"It is a pity that was not thought of before; but, are you aware, lady,
+that it is usual to secure the ransom before the prisoner is restored?"
+observed Zappa.
+
+"Touch then at one of the Ionian Islands, where there are English
+authorities, and let me write letters in different directions, and
+before long, I doubt not, the money will be raised, and will be
+deposited wherever you desire.  If you will allow me to go on shore, I
+will promise to do my very utmost to place the money in your hands, and
+will send word to the British cruiser, now in search of this ship, that
+I am in safety; and will at the same time exert all the influence I may
+possess with my friends to obtain your pardon, should you be captured.
+This I promise to do most faithfully."
+
+"Oh, listen to her!" exclaimed Nina, springing towards the pirate, and
+seizing his hands.  "Land her in safety and honour among her own people,
+and she will pay you the money if you demand it, and I--I will be
+responsible that she does so with my life--but why demand it? you have
+already more wealth than you require on board this vessel, and no rest
+nor safety can you expect, or hope to find, while you follow your
+present pursuits; your hand against every man, and the hand of every man
+against you,"--(Nina knew not that she was quoting the words of the
+sacred book to describe her husband)--"but oh, my husband, remember that
+there is a land across the narrow Adriatic, where your deeds are
+unknown, and where we may henceforth live unsuspected in tranquillity,
+and with such happiness as we can enjoy--that land, the land of my
+birth--there, in the home which I deserted for your sake, you will be
+secure; there I will watch over you, will tend you, will strive to make
+you forget the past in the contentment of the present; and should you be
+discovered, should any one attempt to tear you from me, I will give my
+life with joy for yours.  Oh say that you will do this--say you will
+abandon the evil course you are leading, and you will make my heart beat
+lighter than it has done for many a day, and bless the words you utter."
+
+The pirate was somewhat softened.
+
+"Nina," he said, looking at her with a glance of more affection than she
+had for a long time seen, "you know not what you ask me to do.  You know
+not the difficulty, the almost impossibility of accomplishing what you
+wish.  Even were I seized with the humour to turn virtuous, I cannot
+abandon my vessel and my crew; they are bound to me and I to them; and
+were I to quit them, they would be captured, to a certainty, and in just
+revenge for my desertion, they would inform all they met of my retreat.
+If I proposed to leave them they would not let me, and from that instant
+I should lose all my authority.  And then think, should I even succeed
+in commencing the existence you propose, how is it likely to suit one,
+accustomed from his earliest days to the dissipation of cities, or the
+wild excitement of a rover's life--how should I, who have so long
+commanded a band of men, regardless of all laws but those I have framed,
+and yet obedient to me as children, submit to the dull, plodding
+business of a country farmer engaged in superintending bumpkins in their
+daily toil?  No, Nina, you must not expect it; I feel it cannot be."
+
+He was silent, and seemed lost in thought.  His lips moved, but his
+words were almost inaudible.
+
+"The vision was too bright and beautiful ever to be realised," he
+murmured.  "Alas, alas, I have for ever cut myself off from such
+happiness--and that fond girl too--oh, it is a cruel fate for her to be
+linked for ever to one so lost.  Yet it might be done.  I might again
+seek out the speronara of the Sicilian Alessandro, and he should land us
+on some part of the coast I would select, nor should he know whither we
+went.  Ah--but is he to be trusted?  Would he not, if he saw our wealth,
+be tempted to destroy us for the sake of possessing himself of it?--
+would he not, even if we concealed it ever so carefully, or even had it
+not, suspect that we had it, and equally attempt our destruction?  Who
+is to be trusted?  In whom can I, especially, of all men, dare to
+confide?  Alas! on no one.  Every one of my fellow men, except the
+ruffians who surround me, and a few like them, would glory in betraying
+me.  I might, it is true, find some stranger bound for the Italian
+coast, and with a well-invented tale about the vessel I had quitted,
+persuade them to carry me whither I may determine to go."
+
+"Nina, I will think about it," he said, aloud.  "I would please you if I
+could; but though my power to do evil has been great, alas! the means I
+possess of doing good are small indeed."
+
+"Oh, do more than think of it," exclaimed Nina, looking up imploringly
+in his face.  "Resolve with your determined will to execute what you
+think of--resolve to overcome all difficulties--to be daunted by no
+dangers, and she and I will bless you to our dying day, and our prayers
+will ascend to heaven to implore forgiveness for the crimes which now
+weigh down your soul and prevent you from perceiving clearly where true
+peace and happiness can alone be found."
+
+"Enough, Nina, enough, or you will make me act the woman," exclaimed
+Zappa, releasing his hands from her grasp, and rushing on deck, where
+his voice was heard, immediately after, issuing some orders in his usual
+firm and loud tones.
+
+"You will conquer, my sweet Nina; you will persuade him to abandon a
+pirate's life, and happiness may yet be in store for you," said Ada,
+kissing the cheek of her friend, who sat pale and trembling on the couch
+by her side.
+
+Nina shook her head sorrowfully.
+
+"Alas!" she replied, "you know not the wayward spirit which possesses
+him, or you would not speak to me of hope."
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY EIGHT.
+
+Several days had passed, and the _Sea Hawk_ was still among the
+clustering islands of the Archipelago.  Twice she had attempted to
+escape from them on her voyage to Cephalonia; but each time she had been
+driven back by the appearance of suspicious sails to the westward, which
+her captain believed to be British men-of-war, cruising in search of
+him.
+
+Men were stationed all day and night on the yard-arms, and topmast-heads
+to look out for the first faint outline of a ship; yet, not as before,
+in the hopes of falling in with a richly-laden merchantman, but for the
+purpose of avoiding her, lest she should prove to be one of the many
+enemies on the watch to destroy them.  The wind also no longer favoured
+them, but shifting to the westward, had aided to baffle them in their
+efforts to escape.  Zappa prayed again for the gale, which had so
+opportunely arisen to enable him to force his way out of the harbour of
+Lissa; but now when he equally needed it, and had no evil purpose in
+view, when better intentions had been formed and better feelings had
+arisen, it refused to blow.  Either contrary winds or calms had always
+been met with, and till he had a prospect of a quick run, it would be
+folly to venture out from amid the islets, which now sheltered him.  He
+was afraid of anchoring, or of remaining off any place for an hour
+together, lest an enemy should suddenly appear and give him no time to
+make sail to escape.  He seldom went below, but wrapped in his cloak he
+threw himself on the deck, when weary nature required rest, to be ready
+at a moment's call.  His days and nights were full of toil, care, and
+watchfulness, and thus the time wore on.  It was a lovely day; the sky
+was of the most intense blue, without a cloud or speck to dim its
+brilliancy; the sea calm as a mirror, and reflecting the hue of the
+bright canopy above, was of so crystal a clearness that the eye seemed
+capable of piercing to its very lowest depths; the sun shone forth with
+glowing splendour, and the wind of the gentle zephyr, which came from
+the west, blew with a balmy softness, incapable of ruffling the water,
+or of forcing through it the pirate brig.  Her sails, spread to catch
+the first breath of a stronger breeze, now hung almost idle from the
+yards, or ever and anon gave a loud flap of impatience against the
+masts.
+
+Blue islands rose out of the water on every side of the ship; some
+extending a considerable distance along the horizon, others, mere
+hillocks, appearing above it; and besides the more distant islands,
+several islets were seen, mostly barren rocks, some of a mile in length,
+and others of a few hundred yards; the largest only being of a height
+sufficient to conceal a vessel behind them.  Some were broken into
+picturesque forms, and their sides sprinkled with moss and lichens, or
+coarse grass, and a few low shrubs looked green and inviting at a little
+distance--a deception which a nearer approach quickly dissipated.  Here
+and there also black lines and spots might be seen on the surface, being
+the summit of coral reefs, which, with any sea, were entirely concealed
+by the wild foaming surf breaking over them; and though the greater
+number of these were almost flush with the water, or below it, a few
+rose as much as five or ten feet above it.  As may be supposed, no
+vessel would venture into this locality, unless those on board were well
+acquainted with its numerous hidden dangers.
+
+To increase them still further, strong currents set among the islands,
+running towards various quarters, accordingly as they encountered the
+opposition of the rocks, either above or below the surface, so that it
+was impossible, from the appearance of the land, to say in which
+direction the vessel, exposed to their influence, would next be carried.
+Into one of these currents, the _Sea Hawk_ had now got, and though she
+appeared to be stationary in the water, she was being driven on at a
+rapid rate past the land to the westward.  Her captain, however,
+apprehended no danger--he had every rock and shoal mapped out in his
+mind far more correctly than on any chart in existence, and he felt
+confident of being able to avoid them; and thus, though the airs came
+from the westward, the brig was carried bodily to windward, and steerage
+way was just kept on her.
+
+The heat of the cabin was so great, that Ada and Nina had been forced on
+deck, over the after part of which an awning had been spread to shelter
+them from the sun--and there they sat, silent and sad, for the long
+delay which had occurred had depressed their spirits, and filled their
+imaginations with forebodings of coming evil.
+
+Paolo stood by himself, leaning over the quarter-rail, and gazing, with
+a vacant listlessness, at the sea; no one speaking to him, and he
+noticing no one.
+
+Zappa slowly paced the deck, every now and then stopping to watch the
+progress of the vessel, and to issue his orders to the helmsman or sail
+trimmers, who were at their stations ready for any emergency; but though
+every sail, to her royals, were set, with that light wind, a few hands
+only were required to box about the yards, as it became necessary to
+keep the vessel away, or haul her more up, to avoid the rocks and shoals
+as they presented themselves.
+
+Looking at that beautiful fabric, as she floated proudly on the waters,
+and observing the skill with which she was handled, it was difficult to
+suppose that danger of any kind, beyond what I have mentioned, could
+menace her.
+
+Zappa himself felt secure, for he knew that none of his enemies could
+here approach him unawares; or, if they daringly ventured into that
+labyrinth of dangers, he could easily elude them, or entice them to
+their destruction.  However, a strict look out for the appearance of any
+sail was, as usual, kept; but all his attention was occupied in conning
+the vessel through the intricate passage he had selected, in order thus
+to make some progress on his voyage.
+
+"If this dreadful state of uncertainty endure much longer, I feel that
+it will kill me," said Nina, taking Ada's hand, and looking into her
+face, as if to read the effect her words produced.  Her dim, sunken eye,
+and the hectic spot on her faded cheek, gave sad token that her words
+were too likely to be fulfilled.  "For your sake, dear friend, I will
+try to live, and for his sake also.  I would not quit him, even for
+another and a better world, till I was assured that he had forsaken the
+sinful and dangerous path he has, alas, so long followed.  It is an
+awful thing to think that he whom one loves, better far than one's-self,
+may be speedily hurried to his eternal doom, without a prayer for
+forgiveness--a hope in the future.  I would not be separated from him,
+and yet I dare not wish to bear him company; though I feel that, black
+as are his crimes, my guilt is even greater.  I deserted a fond father--
+I broke his heart, Ada, and can such a one as I hope for Heaven?  Will
+the suffering, the agony of heart, I have endured, be any atonement in
+the sight of God?  Oh, promise me, Ada, that should death claim me as
+his own, you will strive, by every means in your power, to lead him back
+to virtue--to preserve him from the ignominy, the punishment which, even
+I acknowledge, he has deserved at the hands of his fellow-men."
+
+Ada Garden roused herself from her own despondency, to soothe the
+feelings of her friend.  She endeavoured to persuade her that her
+prognostications regarding her own death were probably groundless; and
+though she did not seek to lessen her horror of the crime she had
+committed, she pointed out to her the merciful promises held forth in
+the sacred writings, that her repentance was of more value than her
+sufferings; that the latter was sent by a kind Heaven to produce the
+former feeling, and that, trusting in Him who died for all, she might
+hope confidently for pardon, and remission of her sins.  She assured her
+of her own belief, that Heaven is not deaf to those who pray that those
+they love may be made to repent; and she entreated her, if on that
+account alone, to live for her husband's sake.
+
+"And, Nina," she continued, "what a weak girl--what one situated as I am
+can do, I will do for your husband; and more, I will entreat Captain
+Fleetwood, not only to save him from punishment, but to use every means
+in order to persuade him to repent of the past, and to follow a noble
+and virtuous course of life."
+
+In this manner the two lovely girls had conversed for some time in tones
+not above a whisper, lest it should be heard by him whom it most
+concerned, when an exclamation of terror escaped the lips of Nina, and,
+seizing Ada's arm with a convulsive grasp, she pointed over the larboard
+side of the vessel, where a sight met their view, which was, indeed,
+sufficient to make the stoutest heart quail.
+
+Meantime the captain stood near the weather gangway, directing, as I
+said, the course of the vessel, with his first mate by his side, whom he
+had called to him to point out the danger yet to be passed; while, as a
+precautionary, and, indeed, usual measure on such occasions, hands were
+stationed at the jib-boom end, and at the weather foreyard-arm, to give
+timely notice of any rocks which might lie in their course beneath the
+water, from the beautiful clearness of which they were discernable, even
+though many feet from the surface, at a considerable distance.  The
+brig's head was to the southward, and all eyes were thus turned to
+windward, or in the direction towards which she was drifting with the
+current, and no one thought of looking on the lee side, from which no
+possible danger was apprehended.
+
+"We have done well to come here, Baldo," observed Zappa to his mate.
+"We are here far more secure than in any harbour in the world; for no
+one but a mariner of our own islands would venture his ship among these
+reefs.  See yonder black ledge, which shows its threatening summit a few
+feet only above the water--there is a passage between it and another
+reef further to the southward, through which we shall easily pass,
+provided the wind does not fail us altogether; and if so, we must rouse
+the hands up and take to our sweeps."
+
+"It is a dangerous place, though, captain, and one I would rather not
+venture into, unless I was very sure of my weather," replied the mate.
+"Even now, if it was to come on to blow, it would be no easy matter to
+get clear."
+
+"No fear of that, my friend; I who brought the craft into this place
+will take her safely out again, let the wind blow with its greatest
+fury.  A gale is what we have day and night been praying for; and let
+one come, the gallant _Sea Hawk_ will brave it, and laugh at her
+enemies.  But tell me, Baldo, how do the people like this hide-and-seek
+life?  It is not what they have been accustomed to under my command."
+
+"They wonder what your intentions are," answered the mate.  "They say
+that, by sailing westward, as you propose, we are more likely to meet
+with our enemies, than if we kept among the islands to the northward,
+where we have friends."
+
+"The very reason I would avoid the locality," said Zappa.  "We shall
+certainly be sought for there; whereas, no one will expect to find us in
+the broad seas to the west; and remind them besides, that where we are
+going, we shall, without doubt, fall in with some richly-laden
+merchantmen, which will amply repay all hands for their losses."
+
+"There is reason in that, captain; I dare say it will content the men,"
+said the mate.  "But while I am on the subject, there is another
+complaint which they have to make."
+
+"What is it?" asked the pirate, angrily, for he did not like his mate's
+tone.  "I love not to hear complaints."
+
+"The stranger lady," replied the mate.
+
+"Well, what of her?" inquired the captain.
+
+"She has brought us all into this scrape," continued Baldo.
+
+"So it is said, is it?" remarked the captain, with a dark frown.
+
+"No one knows why she was brought on board," continued the mate,
+speaking fast, to say what he wished, before any further interruption
+occurred.  "Some say that Signor Paolo brought her here; but it is
+supposed that he did so according to your orders."
+
+"They do, do they?" said Zappa, compressing his lips.  "And now, tell we
+what would they have done?"
+
+"They would have you get rid of her," answered the mate, boldly.
+
+"It is what I am about to do," returned the captain.  "I purpose landing
+her at Cephalonia."
+
+"What, without a ransom!" exclaimed Baldo.
+
+"With or without a ransom, as the case may be," said Zappa, coldly.
+
+"If without a ransom, there would be a more speedy way of getting rid of
+her, and would better satisfy them," observed the mate, with a dogged
+look, in which a certain amount of fear was mingled, with audacity.  "We
+want no women on board--all has gone ill when we have had them," he
+muttered, in a lower tone, which the captain, however, did not fail to
+hear.
+
+"Speak out--what mean you?" he asked fiercely.
+
+"That the deep sea will be the safest place for her, where she will not
+trouble us more," exclaimed the mate, half trembling as he uttered the
+words, for there was something in Zappa's look which warned him he had
+better not say them.
+
+Somewhat to his surprise, however, his captain suppressed whatever
+feelings inspired him.
+
+"And such is the wish of the crew, that I should destroy an innocent
+girl, who has trusted to me, and, perhaps, they would desire me to cast
+my wife also into the sea, to gratify their anger, because we have met
+with a reverse to which all are subject.  Well, tell them I will think
+about the matter."
+
+"They insist on having your instant decision, captain.  Some of them
+have friends in an island not far off, and they declare that they will
+land, and leave you and the craft to take care of each other, if you
+refuse to grant their request.  Some even venture to whisper words about
+deposing you, and sending you to look after your mistresses."
+
+"And you, the loudest whisperer of them all," exclaimed the pirate, in a
+fierce tone, so loud, that, had not those to whom it related been
+absorbed in their own conversations, they must have been startled by it.
+"That I slay you not this instant, you have to thank the critical
+position in which the ship is placed.  Go, tell them that I, Zappa,
+their chief, intend to remain their captain as long as the _Sea Hawk_
+floats proudly on the ocean, or till I absolve them from their
+allegiance.  Go, tell them this, and think well before you again venture
+to be the bearer of such a message from the crew.  First, get a pull on
+the braces; we must luff all we can, to get through yonder passage."
+
+Baldo, without venturing to answer, hurried to execute the order; and,
+as soon as the yards were braced sharp up, after giving a glance at his
+chief, who he had so lately been accustomed, to fear, that he felt
+surprised at his own audacity, he went below to consult with his
+coadjutors what was to be done.  He cunningly had taken advantage of his
+chief's late want of success, to ingratiate himself with the people, and
+had employed all the ordinary arts of a demagogue to weaken the
+authority of the man he wished to supplant; and he now gave the answer
+to their message, with such exaggerations and alterations as he judged
+would best suit his purpose, and inflame the minds of his hearers to the
+proper pitch for executing his mutinous designs.  He had, somewhat to
+the surprise of Zappa, who, however, soon fathomed his reasons,
+pretended to be ignorant of the navigation of the passage, through which
+they were winding their way, that he might thus throw him more
+completely off his guard.  The largest portion of the crew had been won
+over, and they were now summoned below to hear the decision of the rest,
+and to put their plan into immediate execution.  This may be guessed at;
+it involved the instant destruction of their chief, as well as of the
+unprotected girl, whom he refused to sacrifice to their fears.
+
+Baldo had marked the ill-starred Nina as his own; and Paolo, who had
+always been a favourite, and had never made an enemy, they intended to
+preserve as useful to them in his former capacity of surgeon.  Thus it
+is, that the lawless can never depend for an instant on each other.
+
+Zappa still stood at his post, issuing the necessary orders; and,
+although gloomy forebodings were on his mind, he resolutely determined
+to dare the worst, rather than yield.  He marked the mutineers gradually
+gliding off below, each man eyeing him as he went, still fearful of
+being perceived, till, at last, the stations of many of them were
+deserted; and he saw that, should any duty suddenly be required of them,
+there were not hands to perform it.
+
+"This must not be," he muttered.  "They have already carried things too
+far.  I must recover my authority now, or I lose it, and am destroyed."
+
+He gave a look to windward to see that the vessel was in no danger for
+some minutes to come, and was advancing to the main hatchway, with his
+sword in his hand, intending to spring down boldly among the mutineers,
+and bring the matter to a crisis, by daring them to attack him, when his
+eye glanced, for an instant, to leeward.  That instant was sufficient to
+create far greater alarm in his mind than had his mutinous crew.
+
+"All hands on deck.  Up men, for your lives, up!  Clew up, haul down!
+Brace round the after-yards!  Up with the helm!"
+
+To the eastward, hitherto unobserved, a small, white cloud had appeared,
+no bigger than a man's hand.  With almost the velocity of a thunderbolt
+it darted across the sky, expanding as rapidly, till, as it approached,
+it seemed like a vast bank of white mist, to which the rays of the sun,
+now past the meridian, gave a bright and shining appearance, the sea
+below, as if swept up by its base, curling in huge, foaming waves, and
+overtopping, with an angry roar, the reefs it encountered, as it bubbled
+and hissed in its onward course, while it sent before it, flying high
+into the air, a sheet of spray, which, almost as soon as seen, enveloped
+the doomed vessel.  It was the _Sea Hawk's_ pall.  The intending
+mutineers, startled by the fierce ringing tones of their commander's
+voice, attempted, in a mass, to rush up the main hatchway; at first,
+with the purpose of executing their foul project; but, in an instant, as
+the roar of the tempest struck their ears, and they felt the motion of
+the vessel, with wild energy, in the hopes of preserving their worthless
+lives, one man impeded the other; the bond of union was no longer
+thought of--the fear of their own death, not the wish to destroy
+another, now urged them on.  Those who had first seized the coaming
+strove to spring on deck, while those below grasped them fast; and few
+only succeeded in freeing themselves in the struggle, which seemed for
+existence.
+
+The moment that their services might have availed was lost, if any power
+could have saved the vessel; those more faithful to their trust, who had
+remained on deck, flew to the halyards and braces; but, before they
+could let go the first, or haul away on the others, the white squall was
+upon them.  The sails were taken flat aback, and the yards pressed
+against the mast would not start.  Down, down she went over on her
+starboard side, like a tall reed bent by the wind.  Her bowsprit and the
+canvas stretched on it flew to leeward.  Her head turned a few points to
+the eastward--she made a stern-board--the water rushed in torrents up
+her decks and into her hold--the foam flew wildly over her side, and
+shrieks, and cries, and oaths, extorted by the agony of despair, escaped
+from her maddened crew, as they beheld their inevitable doom.
+
+As Zappa saw the fury of the squall, he felt that all his skill and all
+his courage would avail him as nought to save the _Sea Hawk_.  In this,
+his last dire extremity, no craven fear filled his heart, and though for
+his own life he cared not, he remembered that there were others whose
+lives depended on him.  To fly towards the stern before the vessel's
+deck had become completely perpendicular, was the work of one moment,
+while in the next he dragged Ada and Nina, who, almost unconsciously,
+were holding on, by what were now the weather bulwarks, to the outside
+of the vessel.  In this task he was aided by Paolo, when the loud cries
+of "The ship is sinking, the ship is sinking," uttered by the seamen,
+and the roar of the tempest had aroused from his apathy, and who had
+sprung to the side of the two beings most dear to him on earth, with the
+thought rather of dying with them than of having even the power of being
+of any assistance to them.  The dreadful position in which they were
+placed was sufficient to paralyse the heart of the bravest, and the
+terror of the two girls was further increased by the shrieks of the
+drowning wretches which reached their ears.  They now clung with
+convulsive energy to the quarter-rail, their feet partly supported by
+the sill of the after-port, and though expecting instant death, they
+still, with the impulse which the weakest as well as the strongest feel,
+endeavoured to preserve their lives.  Nina was almost unconscious, but
+Ada Garden still retained her faculties unimpaired, and though she thus
+more acutely perceived the dangers which surrounded her, she was better
+able to exert herself for her preservation; yet, in that wild vortex of
+water, and with a sinking ship alone to rest on, what hope was there?
+Poor girl--in that moment how many thoughts passed rapidly through her
+mind.  Death to her could have few terrors, but life had many joys, pure
+and bright, and even these, presented to her mind in all their glowing
+colours, yet she tried to banish earthly things, to contemplate the life
+eternal, towards which she was hastening, to offer up a prayer to Heaven
+for herself, and for those who were being hurried to their doom with
+her--she prayed as earnestly for herself as for them, for it did not
+occur to her that she had less need of prayer than they, and who will
+venture to pronounce that she had?--her advantages had been many, theirs
+few.  Yet, do all she could, that image of one so truly loved would
+present itself to her eyes, and it added many an additional pang to her
+heart, to feel the bitter grief her loss would inflict on him.  Months,
+years would pass away, her fate unknown, he still would be vainly
+searching for her throughout those seas, till, perchance, some spars, or
+part of the hull, might be washed on some distant shore, and recognised,
+and a rumour might reach his ears of the destruction of the pirate's
+bark, and the suspicions of her doom might at length be confirmed.  This
+thought was, perhaps, the most cruel she had to bear.  These and many
+more passed through her mind more rapidly than I have taken to write
+them.
+
+"She sinks, she sinks!" was the only intelligible cry which reached her
+ears.
+
+"She does not sink," was heard in answer, in Zappa's deep-toned voice.
+"She floats still--come aft here, and aid me in lowering this
+quarter-boat into the water."
+
+The men he spoke to who were in the fore-rigging, could scarcely hear
+his words, but they comprehended his signs and intentions.  Eight of
+them came aft to assist him in lowering the boat, a light gig lashed to
+the main rigging.  Paolo remained with his sister and her friend, to aid
+them in holding on in their perilous position, in which they were
+further assisted by some ropes which Zappa had fastened to the rail, and
+placed in their hands.  The operation required great caution, as the
+only chance of her swimming was to launch her on the lee-side, or, as it
+were, in board.  The attempt was made.  All looked on with anxiety, for
+they saw that on its success their lives depended--the boat gone, they
+had no other hope of being preserved.  The lashings were cut adrift, the
+boat was lifted up to stand on her keel, on the rigging, and her stern
+was slewed round for launching, when a wave, larger than any which had
+yet struck the vessel, came roaring towards them.
+
+"Hold on for your lives, hold on," cried Zappa.
+
+Some heard him, others, paralysed with fear, let go their hold of the
+rigging, and the boat, torn from their grasp, was carried over the side,
+and being stove to pieces, was washed far away from them, while several
+unfortunate wretches found at the same time a watery grave.
+
+"Lost--all lost!" was the general cry, and this time the captain did not
+contradict them.  The coolest and the bravest abandoned all hope.  The
+foaming waves dashed wildly over the vessel, the wind roared, the thick
+mist enveloped them with its funereal pall; down, down she went, when a
+loud crash was heard, the stout timbers and planks were rent and torn
+asunder; he lifted on the summit of a wave, the bow was seen to twist
+and writhe, and separating from the after part, to sink in the foaming
+whirlpool, while the stern was cast with terrific violence on the
+rocks--another wave lifted it yet higher, and there it remained securely
+and immovably fixed, though with difficulty the few survivors could
+maintain their hold.  Still their prospect of salvation was small
+indeed.  Another wave might come and wash them off, or dash their last
+place of refuge into a thousand fragments.
+
+Every instant they expected the coming of the fatal wave; but sea after
+sea whirled foaming by them, making their eyes giddy, and sickening
+their hearts with apprehension; yet instead of increasing, each seemed
+diminished in size.
+
+The last effort of the white squall had been made--its fury was appeased
+with the sacrifice offered to it.  Onward it passed, clothed in its
+mantle of glittering mist, to other realms: the blue sky appeared, the
+troubled sea subsided into calmness; and the trembling beings who clung
+to the shattered wreck beheld, close to them, a reef of black rocks
+rising some four or five feet above the surface of the water.
+
+"Courage, my Nina--courage, lady!" exclaimed Zappa.  They were the first
+words he had uttered for some time.  "A seaman, with abundance of planks
+and a few feet of firm rock on which to plant his foot, should never
+despair.  Stay where you are for a few minutes, while I try to find a
+_more_ secure resting-place for you."
+
+As he said this, he stood up on the side of the vessel, to examine their
+position.  They had struck on the very centre of the reef, forming one
+side of the channel, through which the _Sea Hawk_ had been endeavouring
+to pass, and at the only part which was any height above the water;
+perhaps, indeed, not another spot could have been found which could have
+so securely wedged in the stern, as to have prevented its following the
+rest of the vessel to the bottom.
+
+The nearest land where assistance might be obtained was some ten miles
+off to the southward and westward, and in that direction the current I
+have spoken of was setting.  To the north were interminable reefs and
+shoals, from which direction no vessel could approach them; nor was it
+probable, indeed, that a craft of any description would pass near them,
+as few even of the Greek vessels ever came that way, and the utmost they
+could hope for was to be seen by some fishing-boat belonging to the
+neighbouring island.
+
+This occurred to the pirate as he stood up to look around him.
+Steadying himself, he walked to the end of the taffrail, which he found
+hung directly over a lodge of rock communicating with the main reef.
+Securing the end of a rope to the quarter-rail, he lowered himself down
+to the rock, and found that there was tolerably firm footing on it, and
+that it would be easy to carry to it a rope-ladder, from where Ada and
+Nina were clinging, by which they might descend with tolerable security,
+and from thence gain the main rock, which embraced an area of some
+hundred square yards or so.  Having made this discovery, he again
+climbed up to the wreck--of the whole crew of the _Sea Hawk_, but six,
+besides himself and Paolo, now remained alive.  The others had either
+been drowned in the hold of the vessel as she first capsized, or had
+subsequently been washed off, or carried away with the bow when it
+parted.
+
+The corpses of some of the latter were still seen floating about in the
+eddy round the rocks, and a few more wretched survivors were perceived
+clinging to portions of the wreck, and carried by the current far away
+from their companions, who had no power of rendering them any
+assistance.  Ada Garden shuddered as she witnessed their dreadful fate;
+and yet she felt that her own and that of those with her might not be
+preferable, but at the same time she and they had been as yet almost
+miraculously preserved, contrary to all expectation; and she could not
+help still indulging in the belief that, by some means or other, their
+deliverance might be achieved.
+
+On Zappa's return to the wreck, he roused up his men, who still clung to
+it, stupified with terror, and ordered them to exert themselves for
+their own preservation, as well as for the rest of the survivors.
+
+They had been so long accustomed to obey his voice, that they quickly
+returned to their senses.  The mainmast had gone, as had the main
+chains, but part of the main rigging, the backstays and shrouds still
+hung on to the wreck, and these he ordered them to haul up, and by
+securing the shrouds to the stern, and carrying the other end to the
+rocks, he formed an easy means of communication, by which Ada and Nina
+could gain the main rock.  They accomplished the passage without fear;
+and as they found their feet resting once more on firm ground, although
+it was a barren rock, they followed the natural impulse of their hearts,
+and bent down on their knees to return thanks to the Great Being who had
+preserved them.
+
+The hardened pirates, unused as they were to prayer, felt the genial
+influence, and at the spot where each happened at the moment to be, they
+stopped in the work in which they were engaged, and knelt likewise in an
+endeavour to imitate them in act, if not in feeling.
+
+"To work, my friends," exclaimed Zappa.  "We have no prospect of release
+from hence, unless we can construct a raft by which we may escape, while
+the calm which has now returned continues.  I tell you, one hour's
+moderate gale would render the spot on which we stand untenable, and we
+must all perish; but do not despair, we may, if we employ our time to
+advantage, form out of the wreck a raft, which will, with perfect
+security, convey us to yonder island, where we may find shelter and
+protection among friends who will gladly receive us."
+
+The men, on hearing their chief's address, expressed their willingness
+to obey him.  His first care was to collect such articles as were
+floating about in the water near them, and others which had been thrown
+on different parts of the rock.  Among them were chests, and casks, and
+spars, some of the running rigging, and two or three of the lighter
+sails, which had floated attached to the spars.  The most welcome and
+the most important prize was a cask of water--the second was a cask of
+biscuit which had been taken out of an English vessel, and there were
+two or three of olives; some boxes of figs, rather the worse for their
+immersion in salt water, but still very acceptable, and two trunks of
+wearing apparel, which had come on board with the biscuits--altogether,
+on surveying the provisions, there appeared sufficient to last them with
+care for several days.  Tools, with which to cut up the wreck to form
+the raft, were the next great desideratum, and the carpenter's chest
+could not be found.  They hunted in all directions without success, till
+at last, in despair, they began to tear up the bulwarks with their
+hands, as making a commencement of collecting materials.  On doing so,
+great was their satisfaction on finding three boarding axes secured with
+beckets to the side.  They had now tools to enable them to progress
+faster with the work.  They ripped off all the planking from the
+bulwarks, and cut up as much of the deck as was above water, and by this
+means got into one of the larboard cabins just before the bulkhead of
+the state cabin.  It had been occupied by the chief mate, and in it were
+found another axe, some nails, and several carpenters' tools, as well as
+a coil of small line, which was very useful for lashing the various
+parts of the raft together.  As the materials were collected they were
+carried to the rock, and in a short time the captain considered that
+they had sufficient to commence operations, as with the few people it
+would have to carry, a small raft only was necessary.  They first lashed
+some of the spars they had saved, together, forming an oblong square,
+while others where placed diagonally to strengthen the framework, and
+the stoutest was secured beneath to form a keel.  As their strength
+would afterwards have been unequal to the task, they were obliged to
+launch it before they commenced planking it over, and they then secured
+it on the west side of the reef, as it was in that direction they
+proposed going, and the water was there much smoother than on the other,
+where it was still agitated by the effects of the squall.
+
+The spar used for the keel was the upper part of the mainmast, or rather
+the topmast--for, it must be remembered, she was a polacca-rigged
+craft--and which had been broken completely off when the lower shrouds
+went over it; and as this was considerably longer than the raft, planks
+were fastened to each corner of the square to both the ends, so as to
+form a pointed bow and stern.
+
+Several casks were picked up which had lost their contents, and these
+were now bunged up afresh, and secured on either side of the framework,
+and this being done, the business of planking over the whole now
+commenced.  Nails were little used or required, and it was found more
+secure and expeditious to lash the ends of each plank down to the
+framework, securing it also in the middle; and on the top of these,
+others were placed at right angles, and either lashed or nailed down to
+them, till the whole was exhausted, thus forming a solid and somewhat
+strong mass of planking, sufficient, it was to be hoped, to bear them to
+the island they wished to reach.
+
+On the top of this the chests were placed on either side to serve as
+bulwarks, one being secured in the centre on a platform of planks, for
+Ada and Nina to sit on, and round it were arranged the casks of water
+and provisions which had been hauled out of the water.  Some of the
+smaller spars had been reserved for other purposes.  Out of one was
+formed a mast, out of another a yard, on which the main
+top-gallant-sail, somewhat reduced, was spread to form a sail.  From
+three oars, a rudder and two oars were manufactured, and a fourth was
+kept to pole off from any rocks towards which they might be driven.
+Altogether, a very complete raft was constructed, much superior to many
+which have borne wave-tossed mariners for days or weeks together on the
+broad waters of the Atlantic.  Not till every arrangement was made did
+Zappa and his followers desist from their labour.
+
+Meantime Ada and Nina had not been neglected, and the pirate seemed to
+be endeavouring to make such amends as were in his power for his past
+conduct.  On the further end of the rock a tent was erected with some of
+the sails, which had been saved, and a case of female wearing apparel
+was placed within it to enable them to clothe themselves, while their
+own dresses were drying in the sun, which, when spread out on the hot
+rock, a very few minutes sufficed to do.  Paolo had also collected small
+pieces of wood, which dried quickly, and he then piled them together to
+be in readiness to light a fire should it be required.
+
+The formation of the raft afforded them ample matter of interest, and as
+they sat there, secure and without discomfort, on that solitary rock,
+with the ocean smiling calmly around them, the awful event, which so
+short a time before had cast them there, seemed almost like a dream,
+which is, with difficulty, recalled to the recollection.
+
+Such food as could be prepared, they were supplied with; but, as may be
+supposed, they were little inclined to partake of it, nor would they,
+perhaps, have done so, had they not felt the importance of sustaining
+their strength to enable them to undergo the dangers and exposure to
+which they saw they would most probably be subjected.
+
+Thus the day passed rapidly away, and the sun was already verging
+towards the horizon, by the time the raft was completed.  It was now too
+late, Zappa asserted, to embark, and by waiting for the early dawn, they
+might have the whole of a day to perform the voyage without the risk of
+being exposed at night on the raft, and might hope, with certainty, to
+reach the island before sunset.
+
+The men willingly agreed to their chief's proposal, while the remainder
+of the party had no choice, but to submit had they objected to it; but
+it seemed so reasonable, that, anxious as they were to reach a more
+secure position, they uttered no complaint at his decision.
+
+The tent was, therefore, secured and strengthened, and a flooring formed
+inside it, on which were placed the portions of sail which had been
+collected and dried, and the clothing from the chests, so as to make a
+couch, which, although very rude, afforded a resting-place, for which
+the two poor girls were most grateful.
+
+Paolo stationed himself outside the tent, at a short distance only from
+them, and Zappa arranged a resting-place among the casks of water, and
+the provisions, and chests, which he had taken care should not be
+embarked.  The men, after a supply of food had been served out to them,
+huddled together, wrapped up in their _capotes_, on the bare rock, near
+where they had been working, and held a whispered conversation together,
+which lasted for some time after darkness covered the face of the deep.
+Paolo's mind, troubled and unhinged with the thoughts of the past, and
+the darkening prospect of the future, for long refused to allow sleep to
+visit his eyelids.  He listened to ascertain whether his sister and Miss
+Garden were still awake; but from the perfect silence in their tent, he
+trusted that they had been more blessed.  He then stood up to look round
+the rock.  The irate chief was sitting on a chest, with his arms folded
+across is breast, and apparently, from his upright position, still full
+of care, and on the watch on all around.  The people had thrown
+themselves down where they had been sitting, and seemed to be fast
+asleep.  The sea was calm, as it had been in the morning before the
+squall; and, though no moon was up, the myriads of stars, which
+glittered in the sky, threw a light over it even to a far distance, and
+enabled him to discern many of the reefs and rocky islets which
+surrounded them, while close at hand was seen, like a skeleton of some
+huge monster of the deep, the last remnant of the once gallant _Sea
+Hawk_.
+
+Wearied with standing, Paolo again sunk down on the rock.  He was awoke
+by a voice which he knew to be that of Zappa.
+
+"Rouse up, Paolo!" he said.  "You have taken your share of sleep, and I
+would fain snatch some moments of rest to prepare me for the toils of
+to-morrow; and yet I dare not sleep without leaving some one in whom I
+can confide on the watch."
+
+"Why, what mean you?" asked Paolo, starting up.  "I will gladly watch--
+but what have you to fear?  Surely, no enemies are near us."
+
+"Ah! you know not what was nearly occurring this morning, or you would
+not ask the question," said Zappa, in a tone of bitterness.  "See you
+yonder six men.  Are they, think you, friends or enemies?  I tell you I
+do not trust them.  Not long ago, I would have trusted them, as I would
+have trusted their comrades who have gone to their account; and yet they
+were about to destroy those two defenceless girls and you, and me, their
+chief.  Ah! you start!  You doubtless think the shipwreck we have
+suffered is a misfortune; and yet, I tell you, Paolo, that I believe by
+it our lives have been preserved.  I can trust to you, Paolo; and while
+I sleep you must watch.  To add to our security, light a small fire with
+the wood you collected, and keep yourself awake by feeding it.  Should
+any of them move, they will clearly be seen; and perceiving that you are
+awake, it will make them hesitate what to do.  They know also that I
+have arms--and that my pistols are never unloaded--and that you can call
+me in a moment, to use them.  Two hours' sleep will be sufficient for
+me--you can, I hope, watch for that time."
+
+Paolo assured Zappa that he would keep a faithful watch, for all their
+sakes; and then, aided by him, he lighted a fire between themselves and
+the men, while he kept a store of wood on their side to feed it as it
+began to decay.  The pirate, wrapping himself in a cloak, immediately
+threw himself down among the stores, and was instantly fast asleep.  As
+Paolo stood by the fire he thought that he beheld the tall masts and
+white sails of a ship gliding by, but she took no notice of the fire and
+disappeared in the darkness.  Thus the night passed on.  He no longer
+felt any sleepiness; and, as the pirate chief slept soundly, he could
+not bring himself to awaken him.  The first faint streaks of dawn had
+just appeared in the sky when Zappa started up.
+
+"What has occurred?  Why did not you summon me.  Paolo?" he exclaimed.
+"Ah! you were unwilling to awaken the angry lion.  I thank you, though,
+for your consideration.  You have kept our watch-fire in well, I
+perceive.  Throw more wood on it, and we will presently kindle such a
+blaze as will light us on our way before the sun arises.  Go, call your
+sister and the English girl, your voice will alarm them less than mine.
+I will rouse up my traitorous followers--for we must be away from hence
+without delay.  We know not what weather the morning's sun may bring."
+
+It was still almost as dark as at midnight, when Paolo summoned the two
+ladies.  They soon made their appearance, prepared for their perilous
+voyage, and refreshed by their night's slumber, notwithstanding their
+extraordinary position and the rudeness of their couch.
+
+Zappa's first care was to arrange the provisions in the centre of the
+raft; over them he erected the tent, which, though much reduced in size,
+afforded sufficient shelter for the ladies.  He then summoned them to
+take the seats he had arranged; but it was not without some fear and
+hesitation that they left the firm rock for so frail an ark, and it was
+not till Ada recollected the danger of remaining, that she could
+persuade herself to go on board, followed by Nina.
+
+Leaving them under charge of Paolo, Zappa summoned his men, and each of
+them was seen to take a bundle of the burning embers in their hands, and
+to proceed with them to the ship.  Once again they came back for more
+embers, and the remainder of the wood, and almost before they could
+return to the ship, a bright volume of flame was seen to burst forth
+from every part of the wreck.  The pirate hurried on board, followed by
+his men.  Two went on either side to work the oars; the others tended
+the halyards and sheet, while he stood at the helm.  The ropes which
+secured the raft to the rock were cast off, the crew gave way with the
+oars, the sail was hoisted to catch a light northerly air, and a strong
+shove sent it gliding through the water at a rapid rate.
+
+"Farewell, farewell," exclaimed Zappa, turning round to gaze at the
+burning wreck.  "No enemy can now boast that they have made a prize of
+the bark which has for so long been the terror of the seas, nor even of
+her shattered timbers.  Long, long will it be before your like is met
+with again."
+
+The raft glided onward, guided by the flames.  The light was seen far
+off by many eyes; but little wist they at the time that there was
+consuming the last remnant of the long much dreaded _Sea Hawk_.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER THIRTY NINE.
+
+The bright sun at length arose, and as his warming rays fell on the
+raft, they served to cheer the hearts of the adventurers.  The raft had
+made but little way, for the wind had failed them completely, and the
+sail had been lowered as totally useless, so that they had to depend
+entirely on their oars, to make progress towards the south, while the
+current still carried them along at a faster rate to the westward.  The
+pirates were, as may be supposed, excessively anxious to get on shore as
+soon as possible, it mattered little to them where, because, while they
+remained afloat, they might, at any moment, be fallen in with by one of
+the vessels in pursuit of them; and even should they be met by any
+merchantman, they were perfectly unable to defend themselves, and should
+they be recognised, they would equally be delivered up to justice.  So
+fast, however, did the current run, that it appeared very probable, not
+only that they would be carried far to the westward, but that they might
+pass the island altogether, and be obliged to attempt to gain another.
+Zappa spoke but little; his mind was troubled with many thoughts, though
+the present earnestly claimed his attention; he saw that if they could
+not fetch the island, their voyage would be much prolonged, and they
+would be exposed to many additional risks; and pointing this out to his
+men, he entreated them to exert themselves to the utmost.  From the
+muttered words and growls he heard, he perceived that he must still be
+on his guard against them, for they had conceived the idea, he had no
+doubt, that if they could once free themselves of the ladies, whom they
+believed to be the origin of their disasters, they should no longer be
+pursued; but it did not occur to them, that unless the English lady was
+restored, in safety, to her friends, their case would in no way be
+bettered.  Luckily, their intended victims did not understand them, and
+Zappa would not alarm them by warning them of what he had heard.  He
+told Paolo to be on his guard, and kept his own weapons ready to be used
+at a moment's notice.  On went the raft, a thin pillar of smoke marking
+the spot whence it had been launched.
+
+Zappa had been silent for some time.
+
+"Nina," he said at last, "you have endeavoured lately to induce me to
+quit the life I have hitherto led.  Your persuasions have influenced me
+greatly, and I would now gladly follow your wishes; but, alas! all the
+wealth I possess in the world went down in the hold of the Sea Hawk, and
+I am now again a penniless adventurer.  I could never consent to depend
+on you, even had you wealth to support me, and I shall therefore once
+more be driven to follow my old calling on the ocean.  Not my own will,
+but fate, drives me to it."
+
+"Oh, no, no; neither fate nor necessity drives you to it!" exclaimed
+Nina.  "Had the wealth, for which you mourn, not been lost, I would not
+have consented to use it.  My brother and I have sufficient in our own
+country for all our wants; what is mine, surely is yours also."
+
+"And I have in my own power a sum which some would consider an ample
+fortune," said Ada; "it is more, probably, than would have been demanded
+as my ransom, and yet I will gladly make it over to you, provided you
+quit for ever your lawless calling, and place your wife in safety in her
+native country."
+
+"Refuse the generous offer," said Nina, rising from her seat, and
+placing her hand on his arm.  "Do not be tempted to rob the fatherless
+orphan.  We shall have enough, without depriving her of her property."
+
+"Peace, girl," said the pirate.  "I will not now further speak on the
+subject.  It is folly to speak of the future when the present demands
+all our care."
+
+He spoke truly.  His attention, while the conversation I have described
+was going forward, had been less occupied than was requisite during the
+last few minutes, in guiding the raft, and observing the direction in
+which she was drifting; when, looking up, he saw on the starboard side,
+at no great distance from them, a ledge of black rocks, whose heads were
+just flush with the water, which broke over them in a line of hissing
+foam, threatening to wreck the raft should it once be driven against
+them.  The pirate urged his men to exertion, for every instant the raft
+drifted nearer and nearer the danger.  All hands went to the oars, for
+they saw that by their own exertions alone could they hope to escape.
+
+The end of the reef, which it was necessary to clear before they could
+be again in comparative safety, was still a considerable way off; and
+yet it seemed scarcely possible, at the rate at which the raft could be
+urged on, to avoid striking it.  Never did Zappa more anxiously wish for
+a breeze to carry them clear; for though, to the inexperienced eye, the
+danger appeared but slight, he knew that, if the raft, for an instant,
+struck the ledge, it would be forced on to it by the current, then the
+slightest increase of wind would form waves which would quickly sweep
+them all off to destruction.  So slight, however, was the surf, that, at
+a little distance, it had not been perceived; and even now, as Ada and
+Nina watched it, the expression of the countenances and the eager
+gestures of the men alone assured them of the risk to which they were
+exposed.
+
+Several times Zappa had looked astern, in the hopes of seeing the signs
+of a breeze coming up in that direction.
+
+"Ah, our good genius has not deserted us," he exclaimed, at last.  "Row
+on, my men--row on.  The wind will come in time; but we must not slacken
+in our exertions till it reaches us."
+
+These encouraging words had their due effect; the crew, already
+beginning to weary, aroused themselves afresh, the raft glided on, her
+head turned off from the rocks; yet still she neared them, and the side
+almost touched the outer ones, when the voice of the chief was again
+heard.
+
+"Hoist the sail, my men," he exclaimed.  "Be quick about it, and we are
+safe."
+
+The sail was hoisted, and bulging out with the first breath of the wind
+aided to keep the raft from the threatened danger.  Again the wind fell,
+and they once more glided towards the rock; but a stronger puff came,
+and they rapidly increased their distance, till Zappa was able to steer
+on a parallel line with the reef, and they shortly had the satisfaction
+of seeing the dangerous point far astern.  In this manner the greater
+part of the voyage was accomplished, and the day drew on; but still they
+were at some distance from the land.
+
+The breeze, however, continued, and there was now little or no prospect
+of their passing the island, and drifting out to sea.  They were about
+four miles off the nearest island, and were going at the rate of perhaps
+two knots an hour through the water, when, as Nina was watching the
+ever-changing countenance of the pirate, as troubled thoughts passed
+through his mind, she saw him start, and shading his eyes with his hand,
+cast an anxious glance towards the west.  Long he looked, and as he, at
+length, turned his face once more towards her, she observed a fierceness
+in his eye and a stern frown on his brow, which at once aroused all her
+fears.
+
+"I see that something is again amiss," she said, looking timidly up at
+him.  "Oh, tell me what it is has agitated you?"
+
+"Look there," he said.  "A cause sufficient to make many a bold man,
+circumstanced as I am, tremble," he replied, in a slow, determined tone,
+pointing, as he spoke, towards the north-west.  "Do you see yonder
+stranger, which has just hove in sight?"
+
+"I see the sails of a ship above the horizon.  But what harm can she do
+to us?" said Nina.  "If she sees us, and takes us on board, she will
+carry us to some land, whence we may proceed to Italy."
+
+"You forget that, to the hunted pirate, all men are enemies," answered
+Zappa, bitterly.  "I could not venture on board a merchant-vessel,
+without the risk of being recognised, and, if my eyes deceive me not,
+yonder craft is no peaceful trader, but rather a British ship of war."
+
+"Heaven forbid it," exclaimed Nina.  "But should she be, still the raft
+is so low in the water, that, at the distance we are off from her, we
+surely shall scarcely be recognised."
+
+"I wish that I could think so," said Zappa; "but on board that craft
+there are numerous sharp eyes on the look out, and our sail may long
+since have been seen from her mast-heads.  She is also, I well know, one
+of the very ships sent in chase of the _Sea Hawk_, and will not allow us
+to pass unquestioned."
+
+"Even should she be an enemy, are we not so near the shore that you may
+easily escape thither?" asked Nina, who was unwilling to acknowledge,
+even to herself, the danger to which Zappa was exposed.
+
+"She is standing this way, and, by the manner in which her sails rise
+from the water, she is making rapid progress towards us," murmured the
+pirate, speaking to himself rather than answering Nina's question.  "Ah!
+I know her now; and long ere we can reach the shore she will be upon
+us.  Well, we will strive to the last.  Fate may, for this once, favour
+us.  The wind may fail, or, by chance, we may not be seen; and if, when
+I have done all that I can to escape, rather than be captured, to hang
+alongside those wretches I saw not long ago on the fortifications of
+Malta, I have but the brave man's last resource to fly to, and the wave
+on which I have so long loved to float shall be my grave."
+
+Ada Garden had heard the previous part of the conversation with feelings
+between hope and fear.  She trusted that the ship in sight was a friend;
+and yet she could not tell what effect it might have on the pirates when
+they discovered that such was the case.  She deeply regretted, also, the
+fate which she feared might await Zappa, were he captured,
+notwithstanding the efforts she purposed to make to preserve his life,
+more certainly for Nina's sake than for his own; yet she was grateful to
+him for the forbearance he had shown towards her.
+
+It was an anxious time for her--indeed, the joy and satisfaction she
+would otherwise have felt at the thoughts of her own deliverance was
+much alloyed by grief for poor Nina, who, at the moment of realising her
+fondest hopes of reclaiming her husband, found them rudely torn from
+her.
+
+The crew had not yet observed the stranger, as they were occupied at the
+oars, or tending the sail, and Zappa was unwilling to alarm them before
+it was necessary; for he knew their caitiff nature, and though ferocious
+enough when they were sure of victory, he could not now depend on their
+courage, and he thought that they were very likely, when they saw that
+all chance of escape was gone, to quit their oars, and refuse to exert
+themselves further.
+
+On came the stranger till her hull rose out of the water, and the report
+of one of her guns was the first intimation the crew had of her
+vicinity.  They all looked round with astonishment, not unmixed with
+terror; but the calm bearing of their chief reassured them.
+
+"Bow on, my comrades," he said.  "That ship will not fire at us, and in
+another short hour we may be among our friends on shore."
+
+The stranger was, as she drew near, seen to be a brig of war, and the
+ensign which blew out from her peak showed her to be British.
+
+"I know her," he muttered in Romaic.  "She is no other than the accursed
+_Ione_, which has already wrought me so much injury.  To escape from her
+is hopeless, and naught remains for me but to execute my last resolve.
+Paolo, come here."  He now spoke in Italian.  "You know well how to
+steer, so take the helm and keep the raft for yonder headland."
+
+Paolo came aft and took the pirate's place at the helm, who, putting his
+hand on his arm, continued in a whisper, "Now show your manhood, for to
+you I commit the charge of those men.  Save their lives, if you can; and
+you yourself, with the testimony your sister and yon fair girl can give,
+will run no hazard.  Say that Zappa refused to fall alive into the hands
+of his enemies, and bravely met the fate he had awarded to so many.
+Farewell."
+
+Whether the act of giving up the helm to Paolo, or the expression of the
+pirate's countenance, made Nina suspect his intentions, she herself
+could scarcely tell, but her eye was upon him, while her limbs shook
+with dread, and, just as he was about to take the fatal leap from the
+raft, she sprung up, and grasped him convulsively by the arm, while her
+brother seized him on the other side, so that, without running the risk
+of upsetting the raft, or dragging them both into the water, he could
+not execute his dreadful purpose.
+
+"You shall not--you shall not!" exclaimed Nina, trembling in an agony of
+fear, and scarcely able to utter the words she wished to speak.  "Commit
+not so dire a crime, or fill the cup to the brim, and drag me with you.
+In destroying yourself, you slay me likewise."
+
+As the unhappy girl said this she clung to him, endeavouring to draw him
+to the centre of the raft.
+
+Ada had been afraid of leaving her seat, for she saw the risk to which
+all were exposed by the struggle, and that the weight of another person
+thrown on the spot might complete the catastrophe, though her agitation
+was scarcely inferior to that exhibited by Nina.
+
+"Stay, stay, signor," she exclaimed--"before you commit the impious deed
+you threaten, listen to me.  You would seek a certain death, and certain
+punishment in another world, to avoid the risk you run of meeting it at
+the hands of my countrymen in this--now listen to me.  I have already
+promised Nina to intercede in your behalf, and I now solemnly vow to you
+to employ every means in my power to preserve your life, and I feel
+almost certain of success.  A petition made by me under the
+circumstances of the case will, I am confident, be attended to, and you
+may yet enjoy many years of happiness with one who is so well able to
+afford it you."
+
+"Lady," said Zappa, "again you have conquered me.  Unworthy as I am to
+live, I accept life at your hands, and confide in your promise, though
+something tells me it will avail me but little.  Nina, you need not thus
+so fearfully clasp my arm.  I will not attempt to escape you, girl."
+
+As he said this, he allowed himself to be led forward by Nina, and sat
+himself down on a chest, where he remained for some minutes with his
+face buried in his hands, and bent down on his knees.  Paolo steered as
+he had been directed, and as the raft had for some time passed all the
+rocks and shoals to be feared, the task was not difficult.  Ada,
+meantime, watched anxiously, the approach of the English brig; but the
+wind, she thought, was lighter than it had been, for the distance
+between them did not appear to decrease so rapidly as at first, and as
+she looked alternately from the brig to the shore, she thought that
+there was more than a probability of their reaching it before they were
+overtaken.  The pirate seemed indifferent to his fate, but he was once
+more aroused to exertion by a shout from his men, and guided by what
+they said, he turned his eyes towards the shore, whence, from behind the
+headland towards which they were steering, the long low hull of a
+mistico was seen stealing forth, with her pointed lateen sails hauled
+close on a wind.
+
+"The _Zoe_, the _Zoe_," shouted the pirates.  "Our comrades come to our
+assistance."
+
+There could be little doubt that the mistico in sight was the _Zoe_.
+
+"But is she manned by our friends?" thought Zappa, whose suspicions were
+keenly alive to treachery.  "If she were, would she thus venture out in
+the very face of an enemy?"  The men, however, seemed convinced that she
+came as a friend, and welcomed her with every extravagant sign of joy.
+Though so near them, she had to make several tacks before she could
+reach them, whereas the brig of war, being before the wind, came down
+steadily towards them, and was rapidly approaching within range of her
+guns.  Zappa watched them both.  The mistico was manned by Greeks, for
+their picturesque costume was easily distinguishable, but he was not
+certain that they were friends; and far rather would he have fallen into
+the hands of the English, than into the power of his own countrymen.
+Should he continue his course, and should they prove enemies, the moment
+he was recognised would probably be his last, and those with him would
+be sacrificed; but, on the other hand, if he lowered the sail and
+attempted to pull up to the brig, he might lose the chance of saving
+himself and his followers.  He saw the risk of having to trust to the
+clemency of the British authorities, whom he had so often, by his
+misdeeds, offended.  He was decided on continuing his course by seeing
+the mistico get out her sweeps, and from the point where she then was,
+she could lay almost up for them.  In a short time all doubt was at an
+end, well-known faces were recognised on board, and greetings, loud and
+frequent, were exchanged between them.  A universal cry of sorrow was
+uttered as the loss of their favourite _Sea Hawk_ was announced, though
+their chief was warmly welcomed, as they saw that he was among those
+saved, and no mutinous feeling was perceptible among them.  The sail was
+lowered, and he raft was soon alongside the mistico.  The crew jumped on
+board, and pointing to the approaching brig, urged their friends to
+instant flight, but Zappa still remained with the rest.
+
+"Lady," he said, addressing Ada, "I leave you here, whence you will
+speedily be rescued by your own countrymen, and to your charge also I
+leave this poor girl; you will, I feel assured, see her safely restored
+to her country and her home; and Nina, listen to me; should I succeed in
+escaping my enemies, I will join you there, and in peace and safety
+forget the dangers we have passed."
+
+"Listen, Nina," said Ada.  "You cannot serve him by accompanying him,
+while with me you will speedily, I trust, be in safety."
+
+"What, leave him now in danger and in difficulty!" she exclaimed.  "No,
+no, I am not so light of feeling as to do that.  Farewell, sweet lady.
+You have loaded me with a debt of gratitude I cannot hope to repay."
+
+She stooped as she spoke, and kissed Ada's brow, then sprang back
+towards Zappa, who was stepping on board the mistico, for the pirates
+loudly summoned him, and with good cause, for at that moment another
+square-rigged vessel was seen coming round the east end of the island.
+Nina was in time to clasp the pirate's arm.
+
+"Oh, take me with you!" she cried.  "Your lot I will share, your fate
+shall be mine."
+
+He clasped her round the waist, and seizing the stay of the mast, leaped
+with her on board.  Paolo stood irresolute a moment.  He looked at Ada,
+she turned her face from him.  He saw his sister among the pirates.  He
+recollected his devoted love for her, and the sacrifice she had already
+made, besides which he felt the hopelessness of his passion, and just as
+the raft was being cast off, he followed her on board the mistico.
+
+The next moment Ada Garden found herself the only occupant of the raft,
+drifting on the face of the water.
+
+
+
+CHAPTER FORTY.
+
+The _Ione_ had in vain chased the _Sea Hawk_.  She had examined every
+island in her course, and searched in every bay and nook, and behind
+every rock and headland, but the pirate still evaded her, till captain,
+officers, and men were almost worn out with their labours.  Fleetwood,
+it may be supposed, did not save himself, and it could scarcely be
+expected that he should allow his officers to do so; in truth, however,
+every man and boy on board was almost as eager in the pursuit as he was,
+and fatiguing as it was, never was any duty performed more willingly,
+though, as they could relieve each other, they were not so much
+exhausted with fatigue.  Night and day he was on deck, and it was with
+difficulty he could be persuaded to take any food or rest, expecting, as
+he did, that the next few hours would place the _Sea Hawk_ in his power.
+Thus day after day passed away.  Sometimes a sail hove in sight, and
+they stood after her in chase, but only to come up with her to find that
+she was some English trader to the Bosphorus, or Greek man-of-war, of
+perhaps little less doubtful character than the _Sea Hawk_ herself.  The
+inhabitants of the islands either knew nothing about her, or would give
+no information, nor could any clue be obtained from any craft they fell
+in with; so at last Captain Fleetwood resolved to return south again,
+keeping close along by the Greek coast, to examine the dense group of
+islands and islets of which I have spoken.
+
+The wind had been light all night, and the _Ione_ had made little
+progress; but as the morning broke a breeze sprang up from the
+northward, and she hauled in a little to fetch the easternmost of the
+islands, among which she was about to cruise.  A Greek pilot had been
+taken on board on the _Zone's_ first entering the Archipelago.  He was a
+clever old fellow, and he undertook to carry the ship in safety through
+all the dangers with which she would be surrounded.  Zappa had once
+plundered a ship of which he had charge, and he was doubly anxious to
+get hold of him.  All the officers were on deck with telescopes in hand,
+sweeping the horizon, while the captain, as was his custom every hour,
+had just gone aloft with his glass to take a wider sweep, and to assure
+himself, with his own eyes, whether any sail was or was not in sight.
+
+"Poor fellow," said Linton, "I am afraid the captain will never live
+through it.  He is worn almost to a skeleton, and he looks as if a fever
+were consuming him.  Should anything dreadful have occurred, I am afraid
+it will kill him when he hears of it."
+
+"I fear so too, and it would be the last way I should wish to gain my
+commission," said Saltwell, with much feeling.  "I wish to Heaven we
+could fall in with this phantom rover."
+
+"It takes a great deal of worry to kill a man," observed the doctor, who
+had no great faith in the effect of any but physical causes on the body,
+the consequences of a limited medical education, though he was a very
+fair surgeon.  "If he persists in going without food and sleep, of
+course he will grow thin."
+
+"That's very well for you to say, doctor; but when a man's heart is sick
+he can't eat," answered Linton.  "It is the uncertainty of the thing is
+killing him.  Let him once find the young lady, and he will pluck up
+fast enough; or, let him know the worst, and, as he is a man and a
+Christian, he will bear his affliction like one, I'll answer for him."
+
+"Deck, ahoy!" hailed the captain, from aloft.  "Keep her away one point
+more to the southward."
+
+"Ay, ay, sir," answered Saltwell, and every telescope was pointed in the
+direction the ship was now steering.
+
+Nothing, however, was to be seen from the deck; but the captain still
+kept at the mast-head with his glass, intently watching some object
+still below the horizon.  At last he descended, and summoned the pilot,
+with the first lieutenant and master, into his cabin, where a chart was
+spread out on the table.
+
+"And we may stand safely on towards that island on our present course
+without fear of rocks or shoals, pilot?" he asked.
+
+The answer was in the affirmative.
+
+"There is a strong current setting from the eastward, you say, and you
+have known many vessels wrecked attempting the passage?  Then, Mr
+Saltwell, pack all sail on the brig.  There is a large boat, or a raft,
+with a square sail, to the south-east of us, which we will overhaul
+without delay."
+
+Royals and studding-sails, alow and aloft, were now set, and away the
+_Ione_ flew before the breeze.  Now the wind fell, and now it freshened;
+but the brig gained rapidly on the chase, which, by the little way it
+made, was soon suspected of being a raft.  Then came all the horrible
+doubts and fears, naturally suggested to Fleetwood's mind--but we will
+not dwell on them.
+
+"Sail, ho!" sung out the hand at the foremast-head.
+
+"A felucca-looking craft right under the land ahead of us," was the
+answer to the usual questions.
+
+Saltwell himself went aloft to ascertain more clearly her character, and
+soon returned with the report that she was a mistico beating up for the
+raft.
+
+"She will be up to it, too, sir, I am afraid, long before we can reach
+it," he observed.  "Shall we get a gun ready to fire, sir?"
+
+"In mercy's name, no!" exclaimed Fleetwood.  "We do not know what
+innocent people might be injured."
+
+"I meant to fire at the mistico, sir," said the lieutenant.  "She is, I
+am certain, a piratical craft, and if those on the raft are of the same
+kidney, she will assist them to escape; or if not, her people will rob
+and murder them under our very eyes."
+
+"You forget, Mr Saltwell, that we cannot be certain of that craft being
+a pirate, and till we are, we have no right to fire," said the captain.
+"Besides, our shot might strike the raft, or the pirates, if such they
+are, might fire on it in revenge."
+
+The cry of "a sail on the larboard bow" interrupted the conversation,
+and, as the glasses were turned in the direction indicated, the sails of
+a lofty ship were seen appearing above a headland, which ran out from
+the east end of the small island which lay before them.  The mistico
+could not yet see the stranger, so she stood on fearlessly towards the
+raft.  The people on the raft were then seen to quit it, and to go on
+board the mistico, which directly kept away, and ran to the westward,
+evidently to avoid the stranger which she must have just then seen for
+the first time.
+
+The ship made the number of the _Venus_, and after standing on some
+little time, tacked and stood towards the _Ione_.  The mistico, it must
+be understood, was now about a mile from the shore, and little more than
+the same distance from the west end of the island, while the _Ione_ was
+another mile to windward of her, so that if she sailed well, she might
+easily get round the point, and then by keeping away among the cluster
+of islands and rocks further to the south, very likely escape
+altogether.
+
+To avoid this, Fleetwood made the signal to the _Venus_ to bear up and
+run round to the south end of the island, to intercept the chase,
+trusting to his senior officer following his wishes.  Old Rawson was not
+a man to stand on etiquette, and if a midshipman had signalised him he
+would have obeyed the order, and he instantly put up his helm, and ran
+back again out of sight, though the mistico was already too far to the
+westward to profit by the change by dodging round in the same direction.
+
+"We must leave the raft to take its chance, sir, while we chase the
+mistico, I suppose," asked Saltwell.
+
+"Yes, by all means--haul up a couple of points on the starboard tack."
+
+"Port the helm.  Larboard fore braces.  Starboard after braces," cried
+Saltwell.
+
+"Avast," exclaimed Captain Fleetwood, who had been looking at the raft
+through his glass.  "Starboard the helm again.  Keep her as she was.
+The _Venus_ will look after the mistico.  There is some one on the raft.
+It is the figure of a female, and by heavens she is waving to us.  It
+is, it must be--"
+
+His agitation was so great, that he was obliged to support himself on
+Saltwell's arm, who sprang to his side to catch him, thinking that he
+was about to fall to the deck.
+
+The brig ran on till she neared the raft, a boat was lowered--her
+captain threw himself into it.  He was speedily alongside the raft; in
+another moment Ada Garden lay fainting in his arms, overcome with excess
+of joy and gratitude to Heaven, and love for him, who had rescued her.
+Thus he bore her up the side of his ship, and was about to carry her
+below when the report of a gun was heard booming along the water.  It
+seemed to have the effect of arousing Ada; for at that instant she
+opened her eyes, and gazing into her lover's face as she pressed the
+hand which clasped hers, she whispered--
+
+"Oh, do not let them kill him, Charles.  For his sake, for he treated me
+well; for the sake of that poor girl--spare him--I promised him.  Oh,
+hasten to save him!"
+
+Her earnestness might have made a less sensible man jealous; but
+Fleetwood knew her too well, and loved her too well, to have any other
+idea than the true one, that she was anxious to fulfil a promise to the
+letter, and in the spirit with which it was received.
+
+"I will do my utmost, dearest," he answered; "I will do all you can
+wish, but I know not whence that gun can have come; for the _Venus_ has
+gone round the other side of the island.  Keep her after the mistico,
+Mr Saltwell, and hoist a white flag at the fore, to show her we mean
+her no harm.  Fire a gun also away from her to draw her attention, and
+she will perhaps stand back towards us."
+
+These orders were given as he stood at the top of the companion-ladder
+before he conveyed Ada into his cabin, where little Marianna, almost out
+of her senses with delight, was arranging a sofa on which to place her.
+She again went off into a fainting fit, during which, while Marianna was
+searching for restoratives, and the surgeon was making his appearance,
+Fleetwood, as he knelt by her side, and called on her name, could not
+resist the temptation of bestowing many a kiss on her fair brow and
+lips, while he pressed her cold hands within his.  The remedy was
+efficacious--perhaps Marianna thought it would be so, by the long time
+she was in procuring any other, as probably did the surgeon; for Ada had
+opened her eyes, and was able to sit up before he entered the cabin with
+the implements of his calling under his arm, which he had brought, not
+that he expected there would be any use for them, but as a plausible
+excuse for his dilatoriness.
+
+At length, however, Captain Fleetwood tore himself away from Ada's side,
+and left her to the exclusive care of the surgeon and her maid, while he
+hurried on deck to endeavour to overtake the mistico before she got
+under the guns of his consort, who, of course, was not likely to treat
+her with the leniency he had undertaken to do.  A generous man, when he
+gets an enemy, especially a personal enemy, possessed of courage or any
+other noble quality, into his power, has a pride and satisfaction in
+pardoning him, and shielding him from punishment, and such was very much
+the feeling which animated Fleetwood, when he endeavoured to induce
+Zappa to return under the guns of the _Ione_.  The pirate had certainly
+been, to him, a very great enemy, but he had been an open and bold one;
+he had caused him much misery and suffering, both bodily and mental, yet
+he had behaved with forbearance towards those in his power, and now that
+his beloved Ada was once more in safety, Fleetwood felt not only
+willing, but anxious, to preserve him.  When he reached the deck he soon
+ascertained from whence the firing had proceeded, for another vessel had
+appeared on the scene.  She was a brig, which had evidently come round
+the south side of the island, and was now rather more than three miles
+to leeward, standing up towards the unfortunate mistico, which she had
+just got under her guns.  The mistico was by this time nearly two miles
+from the _Ione_, and with her sheets eased off, was standing along close
+in shore, with the hopes of getting round the west end of the island,
+and thus again away to the eastward, inside of her new enemy, not
+knowing that the _Venus_ had already gone round there to intercept her.
+
+"What brig is that, Mr Saltwell?" asked the captain, as he came on
+deck, his countenance expressing very different emotions from any which
+had appeared there for many a long day.
+
+"She carries the Greek colours, sir, and we make her out to be our old
+friend the _Ypsilante_.  I think she can be no other," was the answer.
+
+"It is her, there can be no doubt," said Fleetwood; "but I wish my
+friend Captain Vassilato would understand our signal.  I am afraid that
+he will destroy the mistico and kill those on board before we can get up
+to her."
+
+"There can be little to regret in that, sir," said Saltwell.  "It will
+save the hangman some work, if he sends them all to the bottom
+together."
+
+"You would not say so, Mr Saltwell, I am sure, did you know that there
+is an unfortunate girl on board, the wife of the pirate, who has
+rendered great service to Miss Garden, as well as her brother, a young
+Italian, whom I am most anxious to save, as I am also the pirate
+himself," answered Fleetwood.
+
+"Then I am sure, sir, every one on board will be most anxious to second
+your wishes," said the first lieutenant.  "And allow me, in the name of
+the officers and the ship's company, to congratulate you, Captain
+Fleetwood, on the fortunate issue of our adventures in the recovery of
+Miss Garden.  We all feel as we ought to feel--the most sincere joy and
+satisfaction at your happiness, and, perhaps, you'll understand what we
+want to express without my making a longer speech about it, but the fact
+is, we haven't had time to cut and dry one, and I didn't like to put off
+saying this longer than we could help."
+
+"And I, on my part, must not lose a moment in thanking you, Mr
+Saltwell, and the officers and ship's company, for the zeal and
+perseverance you have exhibited on this very trying occasion," returned
+Captain Fleetwood, putting out his hand and pressing that of his first
+lieutenant, warmly.  "You have all done me the greatest service any men
+could render another, and I am most sincerely grateful to you all.  Pray
+say this to all hands, for I cannot now more publicly express my
+feelings.  We must settle some way to mark the day as a bright one on
+board, but we shall have time to think about that by-and-by, and we must
+now see how the mistico gets on."
+
+It promised to fare badly enough with the unfortunate mistico.  Either
+Zappa did not see, or did not comprehend, the _Ione's_ signal, for
+instead of attending to it, he continued running down the west shore of
+the island, directly into the jaws of the Greek; but he reckoned
+probably that he should be able to hug the shore so close that she could
+not come near him, and he then hoped, it seemed, to get away among the
+rocks and reefs to the southward, where she could not venture to follow.
+This the Greek was equally resolved to prevent her doing, and no sooner
+had she got her within range of the guns, than she opened the fire of
+her whole broadside on her.
+
+Though she had not seen the people getting on board from the raft, she
+had no doubt of her character, and seemed determined to award her the
+pirate's fate.  The _Ypsilante_, it must be understood, was on the
+starboard tack, with her head about north-west, while the mistico was
+running about south, and about to haul up as soon as she could round the
+island on the larboard tack, so that the attempt to escape was not
+altogether so hopeless as might at first have appeared, had not the
+_Venus_ gone round to intercept her.  Zappa, of course, recognised the
+_Ypsilante_, and, knowing that her gunnery was not first-rate, he
+probably hoped that, as she could not venture into the shoal water,
+where the mistico was, she would not knock away any of his spars, and
+that he might manage to escape clear of her.  The wind, however, as the
+two vessels approached each other, came more from the eastward, and at
+the same time fell considerably, thus exposing the mistico much longer
+to the fire of the brig, which now opened upon her at the same time with
+musketry.  Several of the shot had told with dire effect, and those on
+board the _Ione_ could perceive that many of the pirates had been killed
+or wounded.  At last a round shot struck the mainmast, and down came the
+mainsail on deck.  The pirates, seeing that all hopes of escaping in the
+vessel were gone, were observed to leap overboard in an endeavour to
+gain the shore by swimming, in which many of them succeeded, though some
+in the attempt were swept out by the current, which still set to the
+westward, and sunk to rise no more.
+
+The mistico, deprived of the guiding power of the helm, and without any
+after sail, ran off the shore before the wind, in the direction the
+current was likewise drifting her.  She thus passed at no great distance
+from the _Ione_, which had reached her too late to prevent the
+catastrophe.  Captain Fleetwood, and all on board, were anxiously
+watching her as she drew near them.  On her deck two forms only were
+seen.  Near the shattered mainmast lay the pirate Zappa; the hue of
+death was on his countenance, and his side, torn and mangled by a
+round-shot, told that he was beyond all human help.  He was not deserted
+in his utmost need.  The unhappy Nina, faithful even to death, knelt
+over him.  His hand was locked in hers.  Her eyes watched the last faint
+gleam of animation which passed over those much-loved features.  She
+recked not of her own agony, for a purple stream issuing from her neck,
+told where a bullet had done its fatal work on her.
+
+In vain she tried to conceal it from her husband.  It was the last sight
+he beheld, and it added to his dying pangs to know that she also had
+suffered for his crimes.  Once more he opened his eyes, now growing dim
+with the shades of death.  He beheld the look of unutterable love fixed
+on him, and in that, his last moment, he understood what he had before
+so little prized.  He attempted to press her hand, but his strength
+failed him in the effort, his fingers relaxed their hold, and Nina,
+wildly calling on his name, received no answering look in return.  Again
+and again she called, then with an agonised scream, which was heard even
+on board the ships of war, and which made the hearts of the rough seamen
+sink within them, so fearful did it sound, she fell prostrate across the
+lifeless body of the pirate.
+
+The _Ione_ soon ran close to the mistico, and a boat being lowered,
+Fleetwood leaped into it, and went on board her, accompanied by the
+surgeon, who had discovered that Miss Garden had very little occasion
+for the exercise of his skill.  They lifted up poor Nina, but they had
+come too late to save, for death had kindly released her from the misery
+which would too probably have been her future lot.  Fleetwood, believing
+that it would gratify Ada, had the bodies carried on board the _Ione_,
+to be interred on shore; and as no other had been found on her decks,
+the pirates had probably thrown their slain comrades overboard.  He
+searched in vain for Paolo Montifalcone; he could scarcely believe that
+he would have deserted his sister at such a moment, and he was fain to
+conclude that he had been among those killed by the first broadside of
+the Greek brig.  She had hove too close in shore, and had sent her boats
+in chase of the fugitive pirates, but none of them were overtaken.
+
+The two brigs then ran round to meet the _Venus_, when Captain Rawson
+ordered the _Zoe_ to be burnt in sight of the island, as a warning to
+its piratical inhabitants.
+
+It was proposed by Captain Vassilato to make an expedition inland, to
+hunt them up; but Captain Rawson considered that it would not be worth
+the loss of time, as their chief was killed, observing that, after all,
+they were, probably, not much worse than a large proportion of their
+fellow-islanders, and as their vessel was destroyed, they could do no
+more harm, for the present.
+
+The three vessels then made sail for the island of Lissa, where the
+_Vesta_ had just before arrived.
+
+The seamen and marines, who had formed the garrison, were then ordered
+to embark on board their respective ships, first having dismantled the
+rude fortifications, and tumbled all the guns over the cliffs.
+
+The bodies of Nina and the pirate chief were conveyed on shore, in two
+coffins, and buried, side by side, in a green spot, under the shade of
+the only remaining tower, which, to this day stands as a monument to
+their memory.
+
+The island, where so many of the stirring events I have described took
+place, is once more silent and deserted, except by a few harmless
+fishermen, among whom, however, the name and deeds of the famous pirate,
+Zappa, and his stranger bride, are not forgotten; and, as they point to
+their graves, they say her spirit may be seen in bodily form, on calm
+moonlight nights, standing on the summit of the cliff, watching for the
+bark to convey her to her distant home.
+
+Colonel Gauntlett's delight on getting on board the _Ione_, and finding
+his niece in safety, and with the hue of health once more returning to
+her cheek, showed the affection he felt for her.  He wrung Fleetwood's
+hand warmly.
+
+"I have done you and your profession a wrong," he exclaimed, as he did
+so; "and I am not ashamed to own it.  From what I have seen of you and
+your brother-officers since this work has been going forward, I am
+convinced that there are as fine fellows in the British navy as there
+are in the army; and while both remain firm and loyal to their sovereign
+and their country, as I am sure they ever will, we may defy the world in
+arms against us.  But to the point--as you, Miss Ada, happen to prefer a
+blue jacket to a scarlet one, however much I might, when I was a
+youngster, have pitied your taste, egad, you have chosen so fine a
+fellow inside it, that I promise, when I slip my cable (as he would
+say), to leave you and him every rap I possess; for from what I have
+seen of him, I am very certain that he loves you for yourself (which, by
+the bye, shows his good taste), and does not care one pinch of snuff for
+the gold he knows that I am reputed to possess."
+
+Ada, on this, threw her arms round her uncle's neck, and thanked him
+over and over again for his kindness; while Fleetwood assured him, with
+a frank honesty which could not be mistaken, that he only spoke the
+truth, and that he intended to have done his best to marry her with or
+without his consent, though he expected to forfeit every chance of
+getting a penny with her.
+
+The _Ione_ touched at Cephalonia on her voyage to Malta, where the
+colonel found that, as he was supposed to be lost, another officer had
+been appointed to his post.  This, however, was much to his
+satisfaction, as he was anxious to return to England to make
+arrangements for the marriage of his niece.
+
+On reaching Malta, the _Ione_ was ordered home; and as Ada was not yet
+his wife, Fleetwood was able to carry her and her uncle to England,
+where, without the usual vexatious delays, his happiness was soon after
+completed.
+
+Of our characters, all I can say is, that most of our naval friends got
+on in their profession, and that the greater number are now post
+captains.
+
+After the conclusion of the Greek war, in which he greatly distinguished
+himself, Captain Teodoro Vassilato paid a visit to England to see his
+old friends, Captain and Mrs Fleetwood, and he is now an influential
+person in his native country.
+
+Our honest friend, Captain Bowse, must not be forgotten.  He returned to
+England in the _Ione_, and soon supplied the loss of the _Zodiac_ with
+an equally fine brig, in which he made numerous voyages to all parts of
+the world, and was able to lay by, for his old age, a comfortable
+independence, which, I am happy to say, he still enjoys.
+
+At the end of nearly every voyage, he used to run down to pay a visit to
+Captain and Mrs Fleetwood, at their place in Hampshire; and, on one
+occasion, he persuaded the lady to allow him to take her eldest boy, who
+was a little sickly, a short summer cruise.
+
+Young Charles was so delighted with his trip, that nothing would satisfy
+him till he was allowed to enter his father's noble profession, to which
+he promises to be an ornament, and is now a lieutenant of two years'
+standing.  Among other accomplishments, he is a first-rate hand at
+spinning a yarn, and often amuses his shipmates with an account of his
+father's adventures in chase of the _Sea Hawk_.
+
+THE END.
+
+
+
+
+
+
+End of Project Gutenberg's The Pirate of the Mediterranean, by W.H.G. Kingston
+
+*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK THE PIRATE OF THE MEDITERRANEAN ***
+
+***** This file should be named 21403.txt or 21403.zip *****
+This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
+        http://www.gutenberg.org/2/1/4/0/21403/
+
+Produced by Nick Hodson of London, England
+
+Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
+will be renamed.
+
+Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
+one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
+(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
+permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
+set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
+copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
+protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
+Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
+charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
+do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
+rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
+such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
+research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
+practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
+subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
+redistribution.
+
+
+
+*** START: FULL LICENSE ***
+
+THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
+PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK
+
+To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
+distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
+(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
+http://gutenberg.org/license).
+
+
+Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic works
+
+1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
+and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
+(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
+the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
+all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
+If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
+terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
+entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.
+
+1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
+used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
+agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
+things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
+even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
+paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
+and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.  See paragraph 1.E below.
+
+1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
+or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
+collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
+individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
+located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
+copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
+works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
+are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
+Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
+freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
+this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
+the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
+keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
+Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.
+
+1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
+what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
+a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
+the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
+before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
+creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
+Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
+the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
+States.
+
+1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:
+
+1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
+access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
+whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
+phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
+Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
+copied or distributed:
+
+This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
+almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
+re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
+with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org
+
+1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
+from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
+posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
+and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
+or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
+with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
+work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
+through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
+Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
+1.E.9.
+
+1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
+with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
+must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
+terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
+to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
+permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.
+
+1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
+work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.
+
+1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
+electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
+prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
+active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm License.
+
+1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
+compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
+word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
+distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
+"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
+posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
+you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
+copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
+request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
+form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.
+
+1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
+performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
+unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.
+
+1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
+access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
+that
+
+- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
+     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
+     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
+     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
+     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
+     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
+     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
+     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
+     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
+     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
+     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
+     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."
+
+- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
+     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
+     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
+     License.  You must require such a user to return or
+     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
+     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
+     Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
+     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
+     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
+     of receipt of the work.
+
+- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
+     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.
+
+1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
+electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
+forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
+both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
+Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
+Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.
+
+1.F.
+
+1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
+effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
+public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
+collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
+"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
+corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
+property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
+computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
+your equipment.
+
+1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
+of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
+Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
+Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
+liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
+fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
+LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
+PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
+TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
+LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
+INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
+DAMAGE.
+
+1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
+defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
+receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
+written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
+received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
+your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
+the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
+refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
+providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
+receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
+is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
+opportunities to fix the problem.
+
+1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
+in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
+WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
+WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.
+
+1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
+warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
+If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
+law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
+interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
+the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
+provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.
+
+1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
+trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
+providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
+with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
+promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
+harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
+that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
+or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
+work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
+Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.
+
+
+Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
+electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
+including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
+because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
+people in all walks of life.
+
+Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
+assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
+goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
+remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
+Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
+and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
+To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
+and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
+and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.
+
+
+Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
+Foundation
+
+The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
+501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
+state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
+Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
+number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
+http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
+permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.
+
+The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
+Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
+throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
+809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
+business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
+information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
+page at http://pglaf.org
+
+For additional contact information:
+     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
+     Chief Executive and Director
+     gbnewby@pglaf.org
+
+
+Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
+Literary Archive Foundation
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
+spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
+increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
+freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
+array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
+($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
+status with the IRS.
+
+The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
+charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
+States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
+considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
+with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
+where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
+SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
+particular state visit http://pglaf.org
+
+While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
+have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
+against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
+approach us with offers to donate.
+
+International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
+any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
+outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.
+
+Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
+methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
+ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
+To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate
+
+
+Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
+works.
+
+Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
+concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
+with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
+Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.
+
+
+Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
+editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
+unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
+keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.
+
+
+Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:
+
+     http://www.gutenberg.org
+
+This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
+including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
+Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
+subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.